JP7143051B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventional game machines are generally installed on an island facility provided in a game hall. , it is known that a plurality of gaming machines are installed in rows on both sides of an island facility (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-147545 A

However, the conventional game machine has not been sufficiently devised on the back side thereof, and no consideration has been given to the situation of the game machine installed in the island facilities.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with a new aspect of the back side.

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

The present invention
A gaming machine that conducts a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition and provides a player with a profit based on the result of the lottery,
a game board on which a predetermined game area is formed;
a light-emitting unit provided on the game board and configured to light-embellish a predetermined decorative portion visible from the front side of the game machine;
a separate light-emitting portion different from the light-emitting portion;
a state detection unit that detects the state of the game machine;
light emission control means for controlling the light emission mode of the light emitting section and the light emission mode of the separate light emitting section;
light amount adjustment means capable of adjusting the light amount based on a predetermined light amount adjustment operation;
a light-transmitting portion provided in a rear swelling portion that swells to the rear of the game machine,
The light-transmitting part is provided so as to transmit light emitted from the light-emitting part when the light-emitting part emits light,
When the light emitting unit is in a normal state, the amount of light can be changed based on the operation for adjusting the amount of light. It becomes impossible to change the amount of light based on the adjustment operation,
The separate light emitting unit is incapable of changing the light amount based on the light amount adjustment operation regardless of whether or not the state of the gaming machine is determined to be abnormal based on the detection result of the state detection unit,
The light emission control means changes the light emission mode of the light emitting unit when the state of the gaming machine is determined to be abnormal based on the detection result of the state detecting unit,
The light emitted from the light-emitting portion out of the light-emitting portion and the separate light-emitting portion is transmitted through the light-transmitting portion, while the light emitted from the separate light-emitting portion out of the light-emitting portion and the separate light-emitting portion is transmitted. is configured not to transmit light from the light transmitting portion,
Furthermore, a special light emitting unit is provided separately from the light emitting unit and the separate light emitting unit,
The light emitted from the special light emitting unit is visible from the rear side of the gaming machine, and even if the state of the gaming machine is determined to be abnormal based on the detection result of the state detecting unit, the special light emitting unit is characterized in that the light emission mode of is not changed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a new aspect of the back side .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front; (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a dispensing unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction; (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. Fig. 101(a) is exploded and is an exploded perspective view seen from the front; It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which front components, a game panel, a front unit, etc. are made opaque; FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as seen from the front right. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front left. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. 1 is a front view of a game board with the front constituent members, the game panel, the front unit, etc. made transparent; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 107; It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nail. (a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel. (a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front unit on the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, (b) is a back perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit. It is a left side view of a starting mouth unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general prize-winning opening, and the inclination of the door member of the variable prize-winning opening at the time of an open state. It is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the starting port unit and the side unit in the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st big prize-winning entrance door in a 1st attacker unit from left side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in a 1st attacker unit in a cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (a) is a front perspective view of the second attacker unit, the middle right side unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the middle right side unit, and the gate member in the front unit. is a perspective view of the from behind. It is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the path of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side middle unit. FIG. 115 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the right part of the game area in FIG. 115 ; It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine showing an enlarged upper left corner of a game board with a transparent door frame; FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of a back guide unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a back-side effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-side perspective view of the back-side effect unit in the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rear back production|presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rear back production|presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back production|presentation unit from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back production|presentation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the rear movable decorative body together with the rear decorative substrate. 142. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rear movable decorative body. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back rear movable decoration body, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back rear movable decoration body, and was seen from the back. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back rear movable decoration. FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the front view of FIG. 147 with broken lines; (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in (a), (c ) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the same part as the decoration of (a). FIG. 143(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 143(a). 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 exploded; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear movable decorative body. (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate in the region of the first LED, and (b) is a second LED positioned on the optical axis of the first LED. FIG. 10C is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide radiation plate at the part where the light guide radiation plate is located, and FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the arrangement of , from the front. FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the back decoration substrate together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. (a) is a front view of the rear decorative substrate, and (b) is a rear view of the rear decorative substrate. (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part with a form different from that of (a). It is a figure and (c) is an enlarged sectional view which shows a part of decoration which has the metal decoration part of a different form from (a) and (b). (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the configuration of the movable back decoration of the second embodiment, which is different from the movable back decoration of FIG. 142, and (b) is a movable back decoration of the third embodiment. FIG. 11C is an explanatory view showing the configuration of 1 in a cross section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the rear movable decorative body of the fourth embodiment in a cross section. (a) is a front perspective view of a lower back left effect unit and a lower right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a perspective view of a lower back left effect unit and a lower back right effect unit in the back unit. is a perspective view. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit when viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit when viewed from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back bottom left effect unit and the back bottom right effect unit from the front. (a) is a front perspective view of a back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-bottom view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-side lifting mechanism of the bottom-side effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-side lifting mechanism of the bottom-side effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the underside decoration unit of the underside effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the underside decoration unit of the underside effect unit, viewed from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing the lifting and lowering of the lower back decoration body unit by the lower back middle lifting mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration of the back-lower middle decoration unit in the back-lower middle effect unit, and (b) is a stop position of the back-lower middle rotating decoration. and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle effect unit from the front. (a) is a front perspective view of an upper back effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper back effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back elevation decorative body unit in the upper back effect unit, which is viewed from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back upper raising/lowering decoration body unit in a back unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the rotation mechanism of the back top front rotary decoration in a back top production|presentation unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the upper lifting decorative body unit in the upper rear effect unit; It is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the body unit and the rotating mechanism of the back-up rear rotary decoration. FIG. 10 is an explanatory view showing the decoration substrate from the front in a state where the upper back elevating decorative body unit is moved to the appearing position in the upper back effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the rear left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back-left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decorative body unit of the rear rear left effect unit exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decorative body unit of the rear rear left effect unit exploded and viewed from the rear; It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back left production|presentation unit from the front. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back left decorative body unit in the back left effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a back rear right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of a back rear right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back-right production unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-right decoration unit of the rear-right effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decorative body unit of the rear rear right effect unit exploded and viewed from the rear; It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back right production|presentation unit from the front. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-right decorative body unit in the back-right effect unit; (a) is a front perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left effect unit, viewed from the rear; (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the closed state in the back front left effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the open state in the back front left effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right effect unit exploded and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back movable decorative body of the rear-back production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-lower middle rotary ornament of the back-lower middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back upper rear rotating decoration of the back upper rear effect unit moves from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back left rotating ornament of the back rear left effect unit moves from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back rear right effect unit moves from the retracted position to the first appearance position It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-right rotating decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the first appearing position. A state in which the back-left rotating decoration of the back-left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-right rotating decoration of the back-right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in . It is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit, respectively, from the closed state to the open state. Back rear movable decoration of the back rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, Back upper rear rotary decoration of the back upper rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, Back left rotating decoration of the back left production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back right rotation decoration of the back right production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back bottom middle rotation decoration of the back bottom middle production unit is raised from the lowered position. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved to respective positions; It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-standing support member. It is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided in the body frame. Figs. (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridges of terminals of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, showing a small DIP-type connector electrically connected to the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side. 4D to 4F are diagrams for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of . FIG. 209(a) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209(c), and FIG. 209(b) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209(f). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification in which the terminal in the final stage and the solder escape pattern are formed apart from each other by a predetermined distance; FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram (a) of an over-resist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, and FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of a substrate on which a surface mount type connector is mounted, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. FIG. 213 is a continuation of FIG. 213, which is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of a cross section taken along line YY. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of a substrate on which a surface mount type connector is mounted in a modification, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. 215 is a continuation of FIG. 215 and is an enlarged view of the B part of FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of a cross section taken along line ZZ. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit; It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the shape of a solid ground at a portion where the front surface of a disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body contacts the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, showing the copper foil on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board; 1A is a schematic view of the surface, and FIG. 1B is a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is flowed into the solder bath; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a second embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a second embodiment; It is a front view of a peripheral control unit according to a second embodiment. FIG. 225 is a cross-sectional view along line XX of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment; 224 according to the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a third embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a third embodiment; FIG. 225 is a view on the arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment; Taking out the ground (GND) on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board for good contact between the ground (GND) on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board and the conductive elastic member according to the third embodiment FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method, a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (exposed example (a)), and a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate (exposed example (b)). , a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (an example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), and a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (through holes having lands). It is an example (d)) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fourth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the attachment procedure, such as a peripheral control board, which concerns on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing lands formed around through holes on the surface (mounting surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to a fourth embodiment, and FIG. Fig. (a) showing lands formed around through-holes on the back (solder surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment; Fig. (b) showing lands and screw designation symbols; It is a figure (c) which shows . FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) shows a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and shows a part of the base body constituting the peripheral control unit so that the state in which the conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen in the same figure. It is a figure (b) which shows a part of back perspective view of the peripheral control unit cut off by the CL line in (a). It is a continuation of FIG. 238 and is a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit with a part of the peripheral control unit cut off so that the conductive elastic member is pressed against the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and deformed. It is a figure (c) which shows a part. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged front view of a cover body that constitutes a peripheral control unit having openings into which tip portions of contact probes according to a fifth embodiment can be inserted and brought into contact; Taking out the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific substrate for good contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific substrate and the conductive elastic member according to the fifth embodiment It is a figure showing a method, a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (stripping example (a)), a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (stripping example (b)). , a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (an example (c) in which a plurality of through holes with lands are arranged), a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through holes with lands) It is an example (d)) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. 1 is a front perspective view of a flexible flat cable; FIG. Fig. (a) shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device, and Fig. 3 (a) shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the liquid crystal output board. b), which is a partial enlarged view of the B section shown in (a) and the C section shown in (b), showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to each connector through the notch; It is a figure (c). Fig. (a) shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected normally to the connector on the back side of the effect display device, and the flexible flat cable is electrically connected normally to the connector of the liquid crystal output board; It is a figure (b) which shows a state without. FIG. 2A is a view showing the arrangement of connectors on the relay board, and FIG. It is a figure (c) which shows the state which the connector of wiring and harness is not connected normally. FIG. 245 is a modification of FIG. 245 and is a diagram (a) showing the layout of the connector of the relay board and the part arrangement line, showing a state in which the connector of the wiring and harness is normally connected to the connector of the relay board. FIG. (b) is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the connector of the wiring or harness is not properly connected to the connector of the relay board. FIG. 10A is a partial perspective view of the game board as seen from the back, explaining the area where the wiring grooves are attached, and FIG. FIG. 247 is a continuation of FIG. 247 and shows a state where the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board; FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind; FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind; FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production|presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production|presentation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the light emission production|presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the light emission production|presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows the arrangement|positioning relationship of an LED bare chip and a light-guide plate. FIG. 4 is a front view showing a diffusion sheet arranged on the surface of the light guide plate; FIG. 4A is a view showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the LED board, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in FIG. FIG. (b) shows a state in which the insertion is normal, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a), showing an abnormal state in which the flexible flat cable is not sufficiently inserted into the connector of the LED board. (c). FIG. 4 is a block diagram for explaining electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits; It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of an LED constant current drive circuit. 264 is an enlarged view of part D of FIG. 263 viewed from the non-LED-mounted surface; FIG. It is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the second embodiment. It is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the third embodiment. FIG. 267 is an enlarged view of the D′ portion of FIG. 265 or the D″ portion of FIG. 266 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface; It is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 269 is an enlarged view of part D′″ in FIG. 268 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface; A method of arranging a surface display portion that can identify a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of a decorative substrate and corresponding LEDs, in the case of concentrated arrangement (part 1) (a), and in the case of distributed arrangement FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing (1) (b), (2) (c) in the case of concentrated arrangement, and (2) (d) in the case of distributed arrangement; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 271; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 277; FIG. FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process subsequent to FIG. 278 . It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a first starting opening passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design process processing performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design normal process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of hit determination processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; (A) is a win determination table used for lottery processing for big wins, (B) is a big win pattern design determination table used for lottery processing for types of big wins, and (C) is for small wins. It is a small winning design design determination table used for the lottery process for the type. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design variation process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing the control state when the movable decoration is driven, and (B) is a time chart showing the control state when the movable decoration is driven in the modified example. 4 is a time chart showing a control state during driving of the movable decoration. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect in which a movable decorative body is displayed in front of the effect display device; 4 is a time chart showing a control state during a player-participation type production; FIG. 4 is a side view schematically showing light emitted from the light-emitting decorations at the standby position when the pachinko machine is viewed from the side. FIG. 4 is a side view schematically showing light emitted from the light-emitting decorative body at the appearing position as viewed from the side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a rear decorative substrate provided with a plurality of holes; It is a front view which shows the light emission area|region in the back side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a light emitting area on the side of the game board viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view showing a light emitting area on the side of the game board viewed from the rear left. It is a figure which shows the opening provided in the back side of the production|presentation display apparatus. FIG. 99(a) is an enlarged schematic diagram showing a part of a cross section taken along line CC of FIG. 99(a). 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine; FIG.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 90) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player can operate the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for putting out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and peripherals arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100. , and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of golden obstacle nails N (brass is used in the present embodiment) which are in contact with the game balls B and planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. , a general prize winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, a gate part 2003, and a second start that give a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B payout) to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B An opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. A golden obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 . A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2002 , a gate section 2003 , a second starting opening 2004 , a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. , the player can be entertained with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be received or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a reverse effect unit 3100, a reverse effect unit 3100, or a Left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700, back front right effect The unit 3800 or the like can be used to entertain the player by performing a lighting effect, a movable effect, or the like.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 to be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 . In addition, hereinafter, the frame formed by the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 may be referred to as a "front frame".

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to hit into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery, which are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. In this manner, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates the cylinder lock 130 in the front and rear direction. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view, and faces the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is positioned, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 has a through hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) protrusions 102c protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the player can be guided forward (to the player side) of the pachinko machine 1 in a favorable manner.

Further, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3 . It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 83). and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and various boards of the body frame 4. The remainder of the connecting cable 503 extending from the frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board (inverted L-shaped portion extending up and down) can be covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box-like shape extending left and right, and has openings for passing wiring cables near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The notch portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper tray ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1 g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 . The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1i. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 34(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 can be supplied. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end, and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover supported rotatably about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotational axis extending vertically and directed toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to hold one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction, which is engageable with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 206) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since its rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball extracting button 222 of the tray unit 200, the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the operation transmitting portion 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the inlet 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, and it is possible to prevent the ball extraction member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B can be inserted into the partition Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b), etc.) that is recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string that has been set to let the illegal game ball B enter and exit the first starting port 2002, etc., the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 is released. By force, the string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It is possible to cut the string by the narrowed portion, and to prevent the fraudulent act using the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. FIG. 36(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 36(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front and communicates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 with the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. A ball passage 150a and a full ball receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and can communicate with a lower full discharge passage 610b of a lower full ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4. and a mouth 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and despite being shot by the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4, it did not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received by a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c which are open forward near the lower right corner in a front view. and a ball discharge port 150d that discharges the balls forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is placed inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-like locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disc-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like protrusion protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the above procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects further rearward than the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and a transparent handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. - 特許庁A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the handle decoration substrate 184 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190 is attached to an inner base 186 at one end and to a transmission gear 188 at the other end. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disk-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d projecting outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a portion protruding most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, and the side surface in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front bulges outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (gouged out) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes so that the clockwise side surface in the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface, which is the opposite side, curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It sticks out at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is transparent. An inner lens 185a that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member is attached to the inside of the handle cover 185 on the rear surface of the handle cover 185. As shown in FIG. The surface of the inner lens 185a is lens-cut (polyhedron-shaped) so that light can be refracted irregularly. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the mounting surface) are difficult to clearly see from the player's side. The back surface of the inner lens 185a as well as the front surface may be lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the inner lens 185a may be lens cut instead of the front surface. (It may be formed into a polyhedron). The steering wheel cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 . The front surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or both the front and rear surfaces of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut. Alternatively, the rear surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the turning operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. - 特許庁

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth projection 182d is the first projection 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. To reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front portion of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 attached to and protruding forward, a plate unit relay board 214 attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, An upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. ing. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular performance operation ring 330 having a rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and has.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 is positioned below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, and the game balls touch the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper plate main body 212 on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

The plate unit base 211 has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which projects forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted is passed through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction, and a front-view lower right corner penetrates the plate body in the front-rear direction. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after tray ball removal, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feed guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end whose upper part is closed is inserted below the ball lending operation unit 220 in a state assembled with the plate unit 200 . Further, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction in the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in the shape of a shallow box with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the plate lower right decorative board 288. , and the operation unit relay board 392 . The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and operates a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. (omitted)), a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed. return the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine after deducting the amount of the game balls B borrowed, or adjust the sound volume relating to the performance to be larger or smaller.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 having translucency disposed on the right side of the extraction button 222, and a ball rental operation base 223 located on the upper surface of the base portion 221 and right below the upper tray ball extraction button 222. A volume up button 226 arranged on the lower left side of the base part 221 A volume down button 227 arranged below the volume up button 226 on the upper surface of the base part 221 A ball arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223 Equipped with a lend button 224, a return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223. ing.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and when the player presses it, it moves slightly downward (when the player presses it, the upper tray ball eject button 222 moves downward. The pressing operation part of the tactile switch 224a (lead type) for the ball lending button is pushed slightly downward to turn on the tactile switch 224a for the ball lending button, while the player releases the pressing operation. By doing so, the ball lending button 224 moves upward to the original position, and the pressing operation part of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a returns upward, so that the ball lending button tactile switch 224a can be turned off. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The return button tactile switch 225a (lead type) can be turned on by pressing the push operation part of the return button tactile switch 225a (lead type) slightly downward, while the player releases the push operation. The return button 225 moves upward to its original position, and the push operation portion of the return button tactile switch 225a returns upward, so that the return button tactile switch 225a can be turned off. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs (lead type), and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after inserting cash or a prepaid card with a balance into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume up button 226 is formed in a triangular shape, and is arranged such that one of its three vertices faces upward. It is smaller than the distance that the top tray ball eject button 222 moves downward when operated.) The pressing operation part of the volume up button tactile switch 226a (surface mounting type) is pushed slightly downward to move the volume up button. While the tactile switch 226a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume up button 226 moves upward to its original position, and the pressing operation portion of the volume up button tactile switch 226a returns upward. The volume up button tactile switch 226a can be turned off. The volume down button 227 is formed in a triangular shape, and is arranged such that one of its three vertices faces downward. It is smaller than the distance that the upper tray ball eject button 222 moves downward by operation.) The pressing operation part of the volume down button tactile switch 227a (surface mounting type) is pushed slightly downward to move the volume down button. While the tactile switch 227a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume down button 227 moves upward to its original position, and the pressing operation portion of the volume down button tactile switch 227a returns upward. The volume down button tactile switch 227a can be turned off.

The ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220, Through the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the body frame 4 side, it is electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. , the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (display in response to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later) without going through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. Peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (controls the progress of the performance) via a performance drive board 1720 (to be described later) that drives a decoration board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. provided in the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000). It is electrically connected to a peripheral control board 1510, which can be described later. The ball rental board 228 and the volume control board 229 are accommodated in the ball rental operation unit 220 in a state of being adjacent to each other.

In this way, the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs are electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. The door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, the volume control board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 on which the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted, and electrical The door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side connected to the door frame 3 side is a completely different relay board. The signal transmission path for the switch 225a and the three 7-segment LEDs and the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are not mixed on the same relay board. . This is because the signal transmission path for the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs is a path through which a so-called main side signal is transmitted. The signal transmission path to the volume-up button tactile switch 226a and the volume-down button tactile switch 227a is a path through which signals on the main side are transmitted. Therefore, it is configured to pass through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side.

On the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228, pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, return button tactile switch 225a, and three 7-segment LEDs are soldered are provided. In the entire area, a green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solidly coated green resist”). On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball rental board 228, the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a connector (lead type) (not shown) is mounted is soldered. The resist forms a green resist layer. Furthermore, although not shown, on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228, there are mounted a ball rental button tactile switch 224a, a return button tactile switch 225a, and three 7-segment LEDs. In the vicinity of the side electronic component, the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the front side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged (In addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component , mounting orientation of the front side electronic parts (mounting direction), and the model number of the front side electronic parts. It is printed on a green resist by silk printing. On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball rental board 228, although not shown, the part numbers of the back surface electronic components and the back surface electronic components are arranged near the back surface electronic components such as connectors (surface mount type). The attributes of the back side electronic components such as the area indicating the position of the back side (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic components, the size of the back side electronic components, the mounting direction of the back side electronic components (mounting direction), the model of the back side electronic components ) is printed on the solid green resist by silk printing with a white paint that stands out against the green.

On the other hand, on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229, pads, through holes, lands, etc. for soldering the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are removed. A white resist layer is formed over the entire area by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by applying a white resist solution. On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the volume control board 229, the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a connector (not shown) is mounted is soldered with a solid white resist. A resist layer is formed. Furthermore, on the upper surface (front or surface) of the volume control board 229, although not shown, the vicinity of surface-side electronic components such as the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted. , the part number of the front side electronic component, the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (further, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the (Mounting direction of the component, may include the model number of the electronic component on the front side.) is solidly painted with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white. is printed on the resist by silk printing. On the bottom surface (rear surface or back surface) of the volume control board 229, although not shown, an area indicating the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged is located near the back side electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of back-side electronic components such as (further include shape of back-side electronic components, size of back-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of back-side electronic components, model of back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white.

In this way, the colors of the resist liquids applied to the ball rental board 228 and the volume control board 229, which are housed in the ball rental operation unit 220 while being adjacent to each other, are different. To explain this, the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs, as described above, is the path through which the so-called main side signal is transmitted. Therefore, the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. It is electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. On the other hand, the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is not a path through which a so-called main side signal is transmitted, as described above. The volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220, and are mounted on the door frame 3 side. Drive board unit 1700 on the side of main body frame 4 (front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000 in response to a command from peripheral control board 1510 described later) does not go through door frame sub-relay board 105 and interface board 635 on the side of main body frame 4. Peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control unit 1500 that can control the progress of the performance) It is electrically connected to the control board 1510).

That is, in the present embodiment, the volume electrically connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510 described later, which can control the progress of the performance) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1 An adjustment board 229 and a ball lending board 228 electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit), which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1, are adjacent in the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pachinko machine 1. Although the sound volume control board 229 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating film, the ball rental board 228 is coated with a green resist liquid different from white. Since the green coating film is formed, an operator who performs wiring connection can use the color of the coating film thus formed (that is, the color of the resist) as a guide to electrically connect to the volume control board 229. This can contribute to prevention of erroneous connection between the wiring that is connected to the ball rental board 228 and the wiring that is electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of erroneous connection of wiring.

In addition, the volume control board 229 includes a volume up button tactile switch 226a that allows the player to adjust the volume related to the performance to a high level, and a volume down button tactile switch 226a that allows the player to adjust the volume related to the performance to a low level. 227a and are mounted, and the detection result (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) by the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button is the game board 5 which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1 It is transmitted to the side peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the performance), and the player can request the ball lending board 228 to pay out the game ball B by lending the ball. A ball lending button tactile switch 224a, a return button tactile switch 225a capable of requesting the ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) to return cash or a prepaid card, and cash or money thrown into the ball lending machine. Three 7-segment LEDs that can display the remaining amount of the prepaid card are mounted, and the detection results (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF ) is transmitted to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1 . In addition, by transmitting a drive signal from a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) to the ball lending board 228, the ball lending display unit configured by three 7-segment LEDs mounted on the ball lending board 228 While the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the machine is displayed, the volume is adjusted from the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the performance) on the game board 5 side. No drive signal is output to the board 229, and the sound volume control board 229 is based on the drive signal from the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the performance, which will be described later). None of the electronic components that make up the displayed display are mounted. In this way, the position of the player's operation is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the performance) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. and a path to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is electrically connected to the volume control board 229. If the wiring and the wiring electrically connected to the ball lending board 228 are incorrectly connected, the player may suffer an unintended disadvantage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a white resist solution is applied to the sphere rental substrate 228 to form a white coating film, and a green resist solution different from white is applied to the sphere rental substrate 228. Incorrect connection is prevented by forming a green coating film on the connection.

In addition, surface-mount type electronic components are adopted as the volume-up button tactile switch 226a and the volume-down button tactile switch 226a mounted on the volume control board 229. Since the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs adopt lead-type electronic components, the type of electronic components mounted on the board (lead type or surface mount type), the wiring electrically connected to the volume control board 229 and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 can be distinguished. It can contribute to prevention of erroneous connection.

By the way, the reflectance of light is highest in white and low in dark colors. On the other hand, the ball rental substrate 228 on which the ball display portion is provided is coated with a dark green resist solution to form a green coating film. As a result, by reducing the efficiency of reflection of the light emitted by the ball rental display part on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228, the production by the production device excluding the ball rental display part is not hindered. can be done. Although green is used as the dark color in this embodiment, purple or black may be used instead of green.

In this embodiment, the ball lending board 228 is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the body frame 4 side. (for example, a CR unit), the volume control board 229 is connected without interposing the door frame secondary relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. , the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (decorative boards provided in the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later), the driving motor, the driving solenoid, etc. drive board 1720), via the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side, and electrically with the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the performance, which will be described later). It is connected. That is, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are present on the door frame 3 side. Therefore, for the front surface (surface) of the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, the same color as the color of the resist liquid applied to the ball rental board 228 is adopted, and the green resist liquid is applied. A green coating film is formed, and the same color as the color of the resist liquid applied to the volume control board 229 is adopted for the front surface (surface) of the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. Preferably, a white resist liquid is applied to form a white coating film. In addition, the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is fragile compared to the green coating film formed by applying the green resist solution. When manufacturing by arranging and cutting out a plurality of substrates from a material), it may crack or tear.

By the way, when manufacturing a substrate, as described above, a plurality of substrates are arranged and cut out from a single sheet of copper clad laminate (base material), so the color of the silk paint and the resist solution will be the same color, and a plurality of substrates having the same color will be manufactured. For this reason, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not it is manufactured from the same copper-clad laminate (base material) of the same standard size by examining the substrate having white color. Once found, when checking for other defects, it is sufficient to trace (find out) the other white substrates one by one, which has the advantage of contributing to early discovery of defects.

It should be noted that the volume adjustment operation to adjust the volume related to the performance based on the volume up button 226 to a large value or to adjust the volume related to the performance based on the volume down button 227 to a small value is performed for a certain period of time (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on). After that, for a certain period until the peripheral control MPU (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control IC" in place of the peripheral control MPU for those having the function of the peripheral control MPU as well) is activated, the display fluctuates. It may be always executable by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) except for a certain period of time before and after the special symbols are stopped (one or both of them), or the customer waiting state and Execution by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) is possible only when specific conditions such as a period during which the performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) are satisfied. can be anything. In addition, the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) may be reflected, or the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) may reflect the timing later than the timing of the volume control operation depending on the situation (whether or not the display is changing, the progress of the production, etc.) may be reflected.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine having a plurality of substrates has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0047] and FIG. 5). If they are arranged in the same direction, there is a risk that a person who performs the wiring connection work may mistakenly connect the wiring electrically connected to one substrate and the wiring electrically connected to the other substrate.

[3-5c-6. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after ball removal of the upper plate in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the upper tray, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guideway 241b for guiding the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guiding it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feeding guideway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. and a ball removal guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the state assembled to the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in a rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 in the state assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface that is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a and projects rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 abuts on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, and the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is positioned at the upper movement end. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper disk ball removal slider 242 at the upper movement end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and an upper right plate decorative unit 275, and a lower left plate decorative unit 280 and a lower right plate decorative unit attached below the upper left plate decorative unit 270 and upper right plate decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . Further, the lower tray main body 251 has a bottom surface positioned below the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211 in a state assembled with the tray unit 200, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is used to supply the lower tray balls. It is positioned in front of the mouth 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the upper left and lower plate decoration units 270 and 280, respectively, and the upper right and lower right plate decoration units 275 and 280, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side swelling portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

In addition, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the bottom right corner of the front decoration part 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat plate-like lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal lid 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left plate decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left transparent plate decoration body 271 extending to the left and right, a transparent upper left inner plate lens 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left plate decoration body 271, and an upper left inner transparent plate plate. A dish upper left decorative substrate 273 mounted on the rear side of the lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed transparent. The surface of the upper left ornamental body 271 of the dish may be cut with a lens (it may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface of the upper left ornamental body 271 of the dish may be cut with a lens. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), and the rear surface of the plate upper left decorative body 271 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The upper left inner lens 272 of the plate is inserted into the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate from behind. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decoration substrate 273 of the plate are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the top left decoration of the plate 271 can be decorated with light. . The dish upper left inner lens 272 is formed transparent. The surface of the upper left inner lens 272 of the dish is provided with a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 273 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. The back surface of the upper left inner lens 272 of the dish 272 may have a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron). A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decoration unit 275 includes a semi-cylindrical transparent plate upper right decoration 276 extending left and right, a transparent plate upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decoration 276, and a plate upper right inner. A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is provided, which is attached to the rear side of the lens 277 and has a front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “surface (mounting surface)”) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This dish upper right decoration 276 is formed transparent. The surface of the upper right ornamental body 276 of the dish may be cut with a lens (it may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface of the upper right ornamental body 276 of the dish may be cut with a lens. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), and the rear surface of the plate upper right decorative body 276 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The upper-right inner lens 277 of the plate is inserted into the upper-right plate ornament 276 from behind. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be decorated with light. . The plate upper right inner lens 277 is formed transparent. The surface of the upper right inner lens 277 of the plate is provided with a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 278 is difficult to clearly see from the player's side. In addition, the back surface of the upper right inner lens 277 of the dish 277 may have a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the surface of the upper right inner lens 277 of the dish 277, the back surface may be: A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a, a step can be formed in which the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his finger using the step between the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side protrusion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Alternatively, it can be used as a finger hold when operating an effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. In addition, the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a semi-cylindrical lower left transparent plate decoration body 281 extending left and right, a transparent lower left inner lens 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, and a lower left inner transparent plate plate. A plate lower left decorative substrate 283 mounted on the rear side of the lens 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") is provided.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed transparent. The surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). (It may be formed into a polyhedron), and the rear surface of the plate lower left decorative body 281 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower left inner lens 282 is inserted into the lower left ornament 281 from behind. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decoration body 281 can be decorated with light. . The lower left inner lens 282 of the dish is formed transparent. The surface of the lower left inner lens 282 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 283 is difficult to clearly see from the player's side. The back surface of the lower left inner lens 282 may be lens-cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron). A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a transparent plate lower right decoration body 286 that is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right, and a transparent plate lower right inner lens 287 that is attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286 . , and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right inner lens 287 and having a front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. , is equipped with

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed transparent. The surface of the lower right plate decoration 286 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). may be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the rear surface of the plate lower right decorative body 286 may be subjected to a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The plate lower right inner lens 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 is decorated with light. can be done. The dish lower right inner lens 287 is formed transparent. The surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decoration board 288 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be applied to both the surface and the back surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish (polyhedron may be formed). lens cut may be applied to the rear surface instead of the front surface of the lower right inner lens 287 (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a transparent rotating operating section 302 which can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operating section 303 which can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and is composed of a transparent central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302, the outer periphery of the central pressing operation part 303a, and the rotating operation part. 302 and a transparent annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b arranged between the inner peripheral portion 302 and the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 attached from behind in a plate center upper ornamental body 312a of a cover 312 and a plate center upper inner lens 313 attached to the rear side of the plate center upper inner lens 313 and capable of irradiating light forward. A plate center upper decorative substrate 314 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 attached from behind in a plate center lower decoration body 312b of a unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower inner lens. 315 is attached to the rear side, and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward is mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical surface bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 on the rear side thereof. 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semi-circular shape of the front portion is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above. installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a transparent plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a transparent plate center upper decoration 312a below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A transparent plate center lower decorative body 312 b extending forward in a semi-arc shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is provided. The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are continuous with the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is transparent.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper inner lens 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The upper plate center decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and the upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") is forward (outward). ) are mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decorative substrate 314 are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the upper plate center decoration 312a can be decorated with light. In addition, the surface of the plate center upper decoration 312a may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). may be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface of the plate center upper decoration 312a may be subjected to a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The plate center upper inner lens 313 is formed transparent. The surface of the inner lens 313 at the center of the dish is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 arranged is difficult to be clearly recognized from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be applied to both the front surface and the rear surface of the plate center inner lens 313 (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the surface of the plate center inner lens 313, the rear surface may be provided with a lens cut. may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower plate center inner lens 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 to be attached. The plate center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the plate center lower decoration 312b, and the upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) is forward (outward). ) are mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration 312b can be decorated with light. In addition, the surface of the lower plate center decoration 312b may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). may be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface of the plate center lower decorative body 312b may be subjected to a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The dish center lower inner lens 315 is formed transparent. The surface of the inner lens 315 under the center of the dish is provided with a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 arranged is difficult to be clearly recognized from the player side. In addition, the back surface and the front surface of the lower dish center inner lens 315 may be subjected to a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the surface of the lower dish center inner lens 315, the rear surface may be provided with a lens cut. may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 are caused to emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and it is possible to make it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top, and is translucent (for example, milky white).

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a rotatable manner.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified, and the vibrations can be converted into sounds such as voice and music and output. can.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56 and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a transparent rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation portion 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 . The ring mounting base 331, rotation base 332, bushing 333, and ring retaining member 334 are each formed transparent.

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a transparent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled with the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer and lower surface portions 336a that protrude upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. and an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotary drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and for detecting the rotary operation of the rotary operation portion 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating and vibrating the rotary operation section 302. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the contents of the player participation type presentation according to the direction of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, it is possible to apply a load to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the ring side gear portion 350a that rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect the transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decoration board 352a on the front side and a rear decoration board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surfaces (mounting surfaces)"). A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 . The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into the front and rear sides, similarly to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 are transparent. or through the through hole 331c of the decorative substrate cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331, the transparent ring outer upper cover 335, the transparent ring outer lower cover 336, and the transparent ring inner The cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to present the player with a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 .

[3-5e-7. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Also, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 . The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more diverse effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a transparent pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a transparent cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a transparent cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. , consists of

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through the central shaft 366. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A transparent center button cover 375 which is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom closed at the upper end and which has approximately the same diameter and which is attached to the upper end of the center button main body 373 so as to cover the top of the upper base 363 , and the upper base 363 . and a central button decoration substrate 376 mounted on the top surface and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button main body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. A transparent outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373 , and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covering the outer periphery of the central button body 373 . A transparent cylindrical outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379 with three-dimensional decoration, which is arranged above the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side of the part, and covers the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379. and a transparent peripheral button cover 380 attached to the lift base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, and a central hole 364b that penetrates vertically. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 to move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by the elevation detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between the adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364.

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a vertically extending cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted into a pair of guide holes 373c, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressing detection piece 373 e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 , and a pair of guide bosses 373 f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373 b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 .

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and formed transparent. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

The central button decoration board 376 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”), which are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. ing. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”), which are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. ing. The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decoration inner lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative inner lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. . The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the state where the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Also, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled into the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When the effect operation unit 300 is assembled into the effect operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a ) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374 . It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button main body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevation cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operating section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operating section base 320 and an operating section relay board 392 attached inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, elevation detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 are relayed. there is

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation part 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring driving motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, thereby making the rotary operation heavy or giving a click feeling.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 below the effect operation ring 330, on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a line are successively arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has a pressing operation portion 303 arranged in a ring of the rotary operation portion 302, and the upper surface thereof is higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302, as shown in FIG. 65(a). It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a first moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b move downward from the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to prompt the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a firmly, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation portion 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation portion 303 may hinder the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302 and enjoy more diverse operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. FIG. 66(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 66(b) is a back perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decoration substrate 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the cage front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “surface (mounting surface)”) and a front side of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are covered. A transparent left side inner lens 403 attached to a door frame left side base 401 and a transparent door frame left side decoration attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403. a body 404;

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side inner lens 403 is formed transparent. The surface of the left side inner lens 403 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decoration board 402 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. It should be noted that the left side inner lens 403 may have a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron) along with the front surface of the left side inner lens 403, or may be formed into a polyhedron. A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron). The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed transparent. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be lens-cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron). A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the rear surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 (it may be formed into a polyhedron). can also be used).

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration body 271 of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the top door frame unit 450 and the top decoration body 453 of the door frame. is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of the

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks like a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 69(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A transparent side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of transparent side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A side window interior decoration board 413 mounted on the front side of a door frame right side base 411, and a side window interior decoration member. 412, a transparent inner inner lens 414 inserted within each of the plurality of side window trims 410b.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a transparent right side inner lens 415 that is arranged forward of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and to the door frame right side base 411 . A through-hole 416a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in a flat plate shape so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 of the cage door frame and the right side inner lens 415 and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a is formed. The door frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415 are attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415. a door frame right side inner panel 417 extending in the direction and the front-rear direction in a flat plate shape and formed with a through hole 417a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side inner lens 415, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). A door frame right side decorative substrate 418 and a transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right inner lens 415 so as to cover the front side of the right inner lens 415 are provided.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed transparent. The surfaces of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 may be lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the side window interior decoration member 412 The front and back surfaces of the plurality of side window interior decorative portions 410b may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 of the side window interior The rear surface of the decorative portion 410b may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") of the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 is a surface mounting type and is capable of emitting multicolor full-color LEDs. LEDs are used. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal inner lens 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal inner lens 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, ie, upper, lower, left, and right. The internal inner lens 414 is formed transparent. The surface of the internal inner lens 414 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decoration board 413 is difficult to be clearly recognized from the player side. It should be noted that the inner inner lens 414 may have a lens cut on the back surface as well as the front surface (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the inner inner lens 414 may have a lens cut on the back surface instead of the front surface. may be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The right side inner lens 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. formed. The right side inner lens 415 is formed transparent. The surface of the right side inner lens 415 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decoration board 418 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. It should be noted that both the surface and the back surface of the right side inner lens 415 may be lens-cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the surface of the right side inner lens 415, the back surface may be: A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and forward and backward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed elliptical shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window inner decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed transparent. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side inner lens 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be lens-cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron). A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the rear surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 (it may be formed into a polyhedron). can also be used).

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame 3 and decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes forward most, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window decoration part 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island equipment) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, so that the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzling and the opposite side is seen from between them. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72(a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the folded state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from above, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from below. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a translucent (for example, milky white) door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame top base 451. A translucent (for example, milky white) top upper cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the top base 451 and the front upper portion, and the top upper cover 452 is attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452 . and a translucent (for example, milky white) door frame top bottom plate connecting the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 . 454 and . In this embodiment, the door frame top base 451, the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are translucent (for example, milky white). A top upper cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the base 451 and the front upper part, and the lower end of the transparent door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 are connected to the door frame top base 451 . Since the frame top bottom plate 454 is connected, the door frame top base 451 may be transparent instead of translucent (milky white, for example).

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration substrate 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration substrate 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 in front of the top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have it.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is arranged between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 (that is, arranged behind the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top center decoration). A transparent top center inner lens 458 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452 (located in front of the substrate 455) and disposed between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 (i.e. a transparent top left inner lens 459 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; A top upper cover 452 arranged between the decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 (that is, arranged behind the door frame top decoration 453 and in front of the door frame top right decoration substrate 457). and a transparent top right inner lens 460 attached to the front surface of the lens.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. and a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, and a translucent (for example, milky white ), a door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the door frame top base 451, and the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top plate 468 having translucency (for example, having a milky white color).

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side of the body portion 451a is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is formed in a shape that connects the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top cover 452 has an opening 452a which is largely cut forward from the rear end of the top surface. The opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decoration 453 is transparent. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively. The surface of the door-frame top decoration 453 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). may be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the rear surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 may be subjected to a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the lateral outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are of a surface mounting type and capable of emitting multicolor full-color LEDs. LEDs are used. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). LEDs are used. The door-frame top left decoration substrate 456 can light-embellish the left portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). LEDs are used. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 each extend in the horizontal direction and are transparent. The surfaces of the top central inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 are cut (polyhedron-shaped) to refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top center decoration board 455 arranged behind the top center inner lens 458, the door frame top left decoration board arranged behind the top left inner lens 459 456 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 arranged behind the top right inner lens 460. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly see it. Note that the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 may have lens cuts (or may be formed into polyhedrons) on the front and back surfaces thereof, respectively. Instead of the front surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460, the rear surfaces may be lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter that outputs high-pitched sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[Illumination with top side speakers]
Next, the structure of the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 will be briefly described. The top side speaker 464 has a vibrating portion such as a diaphragm and a center cap made of translucent resin (for example, polypropylene having a milky white color), and a magnetic circuit portion such as a magnet and a yoke. The vibrating portion and the magnetic circuit portion are held by the housing portion. A plurality of openings are formed in the housing portion in the circumferential direction. The through-hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, but is open in the rear.

On the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464 is attached to a mounting portion (not shown), and on the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, about 18 mm) The acoustic decoration substrate 469 is attached to the attachment portions formed on the four extended substrate attachment bending plates (not shown). In addition, a transparent plate (not shown) is attached together with the acoustic decoration substrate 469 to the attachment portions formed in the four substrate attachment bending plates (not illustrated) so as to cover the rear surface (rear surface) side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 . This transparent plate protects the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 from contacting other members and causing electrical troubles. In this manner, the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the transparent plate are attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, thereby assembling the speaker illumination unit. In other words, the speaker electric decoration unit is composed of the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the transparent plate.

When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 , the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464 . It is arranged so as to face the rear surface, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged to cover the rear side of the magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464 .

A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") is formed on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. ) forms a white resist layer. A plurality of LEDs (in this embodiment, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) 469a are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 . A connector (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 . A plurality of LEDs 469 a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are designed to flow a constant current controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 . The LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 is supplied with light emission data and clock signals serially output from the peripheral control board 1510. Based on this, the sound decoration board 469 By controlling the constant current flowing to the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 It realizes various light emission modes.

The peripheral control board 1510 detects an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jams in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guide unit 570, and payout device 580, etc., detection of fraud, opening of the door frame 3, main body opening of the frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or trouble (malfunction related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.). If not, it outputs light emission data for normal light emission mode to the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 detects an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guide unit 570, and payout device 580, fraud detection, door frame detection, etc.). 3, opening of the main body frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (malfunction related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc. )) is occurring, light emission data in a notification mode different from the above-described normal mode is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal.

In addition, in the light emission mode of the production mode (normal time), various light emission modes are obtained by combining lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc., and the main control board 1310 sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400. output, variably display the pattern using a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal, the main control board 1310 transmits a command corresponding to the variation pattern set when the pattern is variably displayed to the peripheral control board 1510, Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to the lighting state of the lighting mode as predetermined lighting for lighting (normal time). On the other hand, in the notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode), a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red) is lit at maximum brightness. When the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 is detected based on the detection signal from the open switch, a door frame open command is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board receives this door frame open command. 1310 adds predetermined information (information for preparing a format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the door frame open command that conveys the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and The peripheral control board 1510, which has received such a command and transmitted it to the control board 1510, controls to a predetermined notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode).

On the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, although not shown, the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components and the surface-side electronic components are arranged in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as the plurality of mounted LEDs 769a. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as areas indicating positions (including shape of surface-side electronic components, size of surface-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of surface-side electronic components, model of surface-side electronic components) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less conspicuous than white. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, although not shown, an area indicating the part number of the rear surface electronic component and the position at which the rear surface electronic component is arranged is displayed near the rear surface electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of back side electronic components (may also include back side electronic component shape, back side electronic component size, back side electronic component mounting orientation (mounting direction), back side electronic component model) The reverse side writing portion shown is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of electric decorations by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 , as described above, it is a full-color LED that can emit light in multiple colors, and its light emission mode changes in various ways when it is turned on (lighted) or turned off. For this reason, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is coated with a white resist liquid over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered, thereby forming a white coating film. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”.) A white resist layer is formed, and a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is formed on the solid white resist. The surface-side marking part that enables identification is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the yellow surface-side marking part is inconspicuous against the white resist when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off. Furthermore, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), a solid white resist with high reflectance and a yellow paint whose reflectance is very close to white The combination of the surface-side inscription printed by silk printing in (1) and (2) makes it possible to maintain a high reflectance on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

In a state in which the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. Since it is arranged to cover the rear side, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it passes through the through hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464 and passes through. Light is emitted from the center cap having light properties, and passes through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, and light is emitted from the diaphragm having light transmission properties. It is designed so that it can be decorated. As described above, the top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. As well as being able to visually recognize, the illumination of the top side speaker 464 can be visually recognized.

Furthermore, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it is reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke that constitutes the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape). The back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are repeatedly reversed, and emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, that is, behind the top side speaker 464. In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration substrate 469. FIG. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, which is the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451b of the door frame top base 451, as described above. On the door frame top base 451, the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration board 469 is larger than the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration board 469 so that the acoustic decoration board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 at the position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached is exposed. Through holes 451ba having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed respectively. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the LEDs 469a emit light rearward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, the acoustic decoration When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469). A plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (rear surface), and to the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the door frame top base 451. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through the gap formed by the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba.

The door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, as described above. In the door frame base 101, through holes 101k having a shape larger than or the same shape as the perimeter of the through holes 451ba formed at the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 and penetrating back and forth. are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the LEDs 469a emit light rearward from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (the acoustic decoration on the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469). A plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (rear surface) of the substrate 469), the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the door frame top base. The light exits rearward of the door-frame base 101 of the door-frame base unit 100 through the gap formed by the inner periphery of the through-hole 451ba formed in 451 and through the through-hole 101k formed in the door-frame base 101 .

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left and right through holes 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from a plurality of mounted LEDs 469a is emitted from the upper left region of the front component 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4, and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. They are reflected to the upper right area. In this embodiment, the front component member 1000 is made of transparent resin, but it may be made of black resin. Hereinafter, when the door frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the opening/closing axis side between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 will be referred to as "the pivot side of the door frame 3" or "the pivot side of the main body frame 4". , and the side opposite to the opening/closing shaft side may be described as "the open side of the door frame 3" or "the open side of the main body frame 4".

[Upper left region of front component]
On the front (surface) of the upper left region of the front component 1000, there is a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status (in this embodiment, black is used except for each transparent region for confirming the lighting state of a plurality of LEDs). ) is provided, a reflective sheet 1000a, which is a white printed portion having a high reflectance or a color close to white, is attached except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged.

The area of the front surface (surface) of the upper left area of the front component member 1000 to which the reflection sheet 1000a is attached is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5. 1400 is covered with the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged. Visibility becomes difficult. In other words, since the presence of the reflection sheet 1000a, which has no relation to the contents of the game presentation, can be hidden, it does not become an eyesore of the game.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the reflection sheet 1000a is arranged in the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the left acoustic decoration board 469, and the pachinko machine is used for pachinko. When the machine 1 is viewed from the front, the front surface of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 on the pivot side of the door frame 3 (the pivot side of the main body frame 4). Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (surface) is provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the left acoustic decoration board 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side). Reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a, the light is emitted forward, and passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, the outer periphery of the left acoustic decoration board 469, and the left through hole formed in the door frame top base 451. The light from the translucent diaphragm of the left top side speaker 464 passes through the gap between the inner circumference of the hole 451ba and the plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing of the left top side speaker 464. , the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side can be efficiently used as a game effect or notification mode. Note that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounting holes mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by the reflection sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the left acoustic decoration board 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side), Since the light is emitted forward, the light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is emitted into the game area 5a. It is not emitted toward the direction of the game board 5, nor is it emitted to the rear of the game board 5.例文帳に追加That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of acoustic decoration substrates 469 mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

In this way, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 (the door frame 3 is in a closed state), the reflection sheet 1000a is arranged on the left acoustic decoration board 469 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. It is provided on the front surface of the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to , and can reflect the light emitted by the left acoustic decoration board 469 toward the front of the reflective sheet 1000a. Therefore, the light (leakage) that leaks backward from the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side can be reflected forward on the reflection sheet 1000a and emitted forward from the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side. It can function as a reflective member that can be used. As a result, it is possible to suppress the leakage of light from the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side from proceeding toward the rear of the game board 5 . Therefore, the light directed to the rear of the game board 5 can be suppressed.

On the reflection sheet 1000a, although not shown, is a QR code (registered trademark) that stores a number (control number) that specifies the model of the game board 5 and attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5. , and are printed in predetermined positions with black paint, which is a dark color. The pachinko machine 1 is identified by a QR code (registered trademark) that stores attribute information of the game board 5 such as a reflection sheet 1000a, a number (management number) for specifying the model of the game board 5, and the manufacturing date of the game board 5. A specific information display section for displaying information (that is, a number specifying the model of the game board 5 and a QR code (registered trademark) storing attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5) is configured. ing. Since the front structural member 1000 is made of transparent resin when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 (when the front structural member 1000 is made of black resin, the background is black), Since the white reflective sheet 1000a is conspicuous, it is possible to naturally direct the line of sight of a game hall clerk or other attendant to the reflective sheet 1000a.

Further, the area of the front surface (surface) of the upper left area of the front component member 1000 to which the reflective sheet 1000a is attached is, as described above, an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, and the reflection sheet 1000a is covered with the door frame base unit 100. Since it is difficult to see through the door window 101 a of the frame 3 , the control number and the QR code (registered trademark) printed on the reflection sheet 1000 a are difficult to see through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3 .

Furthermore, since the reflection sheet 1000a is white, the dark black color stands out when the background is white, making it easy to visually recognize the control number and the QR code (registered trademark). In addition, when the QR code (registered trademark) is read by a code reading device that is separate from the pachinko machine 1 and is possessed by an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall, the reflection sheet 1000a is white, so that the background is displayed. becomes white, making it easier to read a QR code having a black color, which is a dark color. In other words, the white color of the reflective sheet 1000a can improve readability of the QR code (registered trademark). The surface area of the reflective sheet 1000a is larger than the area of the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the left side. Also, in place of the QR code (registered trademark), a one-dimensional bar code, letters, numbers, graphics, symbols, etc., or a combination of letters, numbers, graphics, symbols, etc. may be used.

Although not shown, a plurality of false nails are arranged on the front surface (surface) of the upper left region of the front component 1000 . Through holes are formed in the reflection sheet 1000a in portions corresponding to areas where gold-colored false nails are arranged. On the front surface (surface) of the game area 5a of the game board 5, as described above, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted. Since the false nail is also made of gold-colored metal, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, it can be used as a reflecting member like the reflecting sheet 1000a.

[Upper right region of front component]
On the open side of the body frame 3 and on the front (surface) side of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front structural member 1000, a metal plate for maintaining the mounting state of the game board 5 and the body frame 4 is provided. A manufacturing stopper FT (see FIG. 10) is provided respectively. That is, on the opening side of the door frame 3, the metal fasteners FT are arranged on the front (surface) sides of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In particular, the front side of the upper right region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 is located at a position corresponding to the sound decoration board 469 on the right side, and the metal fastener FT is arranged. The metal fastener FT is designed such that its end is inserted into a board fastener insertion hole (not shown) formed in the body frame 4 and engaged.

Further, the door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is made of metal, and as described above, is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101, Rigidity is imparted to the door frame base unit 100, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 are connected to the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction. an upper reinforcing frame 113 extending to the left and right, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position near the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and an intermediate reinforcing frame A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right end of 114 and the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of door frame hooks of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween. and a hooking member 116 to which 652 is hooked. That is, the right reinforcing frame 112 made of metal is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3 and on the opening side of the door frame 3 .

Thus, in this embodiment, on the open side of the body frame 4, the metal fasteners FT are provided on the front (surface) side of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. A right reinforcing frame 112 made of metal is arranged on the rear surface side of the door frame 3 on the open side of the door frame 3 . The metal fastener FT and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are both made of metal and have luster. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface ( The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the surface) is emitted by the metal fastener FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112. can be reflected. Further, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened with respect to the body frame 4, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the light emitted from the rear side of the door frame 3. - 特許庁Note that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of acoustic decoration substrates mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. The light from the LED 469a of the game board 5 is reflected by the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112, but the door frame base The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through hole 101k formed in 101 is not emitted toward the game area 5a, and the light from the game board 5 does not radiate to That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of acoustic decoration substrates 469 mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

Since the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, the front component 1000 may be made of black resin instead. Even with this configuration, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the right acoustic decoration passing through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 is opened. The light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the board 469 is directed to the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcement Since the light can be reflected by the frame 112, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 can be emitted. It is neither emitted toward the game area 5a nor emitted behind the game board 5. - 特許庁That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of acoustic decoration substrates 469 mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

In addition, a white reflective sheet obtained by appropriately modifying the shape of the white reflective sheet 1000a described above is pasted on the upper right area of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 and in the peripheral area where the metal fastener FT is arranged. can be configured to In this way, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 can be seen. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (surface), a metal fastener FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, a metal right reinforcing frame 112, Since it can be reflected by the white reflective sheet, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 The light is neither emitted toward the game area 5a nor emitted behind the game board 5.例文帳に追加That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of acoustic decoration substrates 469 mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

By the way, when opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall inserts a proper key into the cylinder lock 130 and rotates the cylinder lock 130, for example. A decorative member such as the transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410 is grasped by hand, and the door frame 3 is opened from the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4. Since the decorative member is continuously pulled, the more the work of opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the more the load is repeatedly applied to the connecting portion between the decorative member and the door frame 3, which may damage the door frame. There is

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the right side on the open side of the door frame 3 is emitted as described above. In addition, since the LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the LEDs 469a are mounted on the door frame 101k. 3 can emit light toward the rear. On the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3, and on the open side of the main body frame 4, the front surface of the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5. A metal fastener FT is arranged on the (surface) side, and both are metal members. Through the gap formed between the open side of the door frame 3 and the open side of the main body frame 4, the light reflected by the right reinforcing frame 112 made of metal and the metal reflectors such as the metal fasteners FT leaks out, can be made to emit light. As a result, when an employee such as a clerk of a game hall performs an operation to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, for example, the transparent door frame right side unit 410 provided in the door frame 3 can be opened. When the decorative member such as the side decorative body 419 is grasped by hand and the decorative member is pulled to such an extent that the appearance of light emission in the gap can be visually observed, the pulling of the decorative member is stopped, and the finger is inserted into the gap to open the door frame. 3 can be opened. Since the time for gripping and pulling the decorative member can be shortened, the time during which the joint between the decorative member (door frame right side unit 410) and the door frame 3 is subjected to load can also be shortened. Therefore, damage to the door frame 3 can be suppressed.

[When opening the door frame]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, while a player is playing a game, when a game ball shot toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 is flowing down, it accidentally hits an obstacle nail together with other game balls. It may become clogged. In this state, when the player launches the game balls one after another toward the game area 5a, the game balls are piled up on the clogged game balls, and the game balls are gathered like grapes. In order to eliminate the state in which the game balls are gathered like grapes, the player calls an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall to remove the game balls that are gathered like grapes. An attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall called by the player opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, each decoration board provided on the game board 5 is displayed. In addition to performing control to turn off all the mounted LEDs, each movable body provided on the game board 5 is controlled to maintain the position at the time of opening regardless of whether it is operating or not. Control of the game board at the time". Along with such control of the game board at the time of opening, or instead of this, a specific LED among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the front surface (surface) of the sound decoration board 469 When the door frame 3 is equipped with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening regardless of whether it is operating or not. Perform "control of the door frame when opening", which is to control so as to

When opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, when controlling the door frame at the time of opening, a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 are all extinguished, and / or Among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, specific LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) light up in a notification mode for notifying that the door is open. be in a state to When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it passes through the through hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464 as described above, and the translucency is obtained. Light is emitted from the center cap provided, and light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing. Furthermore, the light is reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke that constitutes the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape), and repeatedly moves between the back surface of the top side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 . On the other hand, since it is emitted backward from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (in other words, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light. Then, light leaks from the plurality of LEDs 469a from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, which is the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. ) Because light leaks from the plurality of LEDs 469a from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration substrate 469)), the gap between the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and the door The light exits rearward of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through a through hole 101 k formed in the frame base 101 .

That is, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and can emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3. 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 (that is, when the door frame 3 is opened), the sound decoration board 469 is positioned from the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize the notification mode by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface). In other words, the fact that the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light in the notification mode can be visually recognized not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3. A plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 . As a result, in the game hall, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is displayed to the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall passing through the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to convey the notification mode by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the notification mode can be visually recognized from the front side and the rear side of the door frame 3 . In addition, in the game hall, from both the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3, an abnormality or malfunction occurs in a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall (pachinko) Abnormalities in machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging in ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guide unit 570, dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraud, opening of door frame 3, opening of body frame 4, wiring Disconnection, etc.) or defects (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.))) The work efficiency of the hall can be improved.

By the way, if the speaker diaphragm is torn with an unauthorized tool, the sound will not flow. Although the sound changes just by opening it, the sound flows. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool and remove the wiring that is connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or break the wire so that the sound does not flow from the speaker, you will not be able to hear the sound from the speaker. Even if the game machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring a game ball by performing When a person who commits such fraudulent acts leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a player waiting state and performs a silent demonstration (a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame and the game board are illuminated for player waiting). The player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device capable of displaying the effect image while emitting light.) is repeated. Then, in such a state of waiting for a player, a staff member such as a store clerk at amusement hall will open a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool and disconnect the wire connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or disconnect the wire. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not sound is flowing from the speaker.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is perforated with a wire, since the acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 ), light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464, and the housing section Light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the . Since the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 and the center cap are made of translucent resin (for example, milky white polypropylene, etc.), the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 passes through the hole in the diaphragm. The light emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap shine brightly like a spotlight compared to the light emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap. As described above, the top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Through the hole, the presence of the hole in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be discovered as a spotlight shining with high brightness. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to determination of whether or not sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464 .

In addition, when the vibration plate of the top side speaker 464 is perforated with a wire and a silent demonstration is performed, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are turned off (by chance). ), or a state in which a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are extinguished within a period from the end of the silent demonstration to the start of the silent demonstration again. Also, since the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on which the white coating film coated with the white resist liquid is formed is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, the background becomes white due to the white coating film, and the top side speaker Through the holes in the diaphragm of 464 and the countless through-holes formed in the top lower cover 465, the white color of the white paint film can be seen. The holes are easily visible. This makes it possible to discover whether or not the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 has been tampered with. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to determination of whether or not sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464 .

In addition, a silent demonstration is performed in which a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit light in a player waiting light emission mode, and the player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image. is performed, a plurality of LEDs emit light in the player waiting light emission mode, so even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is illegally punched with a wire, it is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 Since the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 469a that are connected leaks through the holes in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464, part of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 appears to emit light. Thereby, it can be discovered that the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 has a hole.

A translucent speaker net may be provided in front of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 . By providing the speaker net, it is possible to prevent unauthorized entry into the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 with a wire, and it takes time to make a hole in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. , can contribute to the early detection of such fraud. In addition, since the speaker net is translucent, it does not easily interfere with light emitted through the translucent diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 .

In the top side speaker 464, the vibrating parts such as the diaphragm and the center cap are made of translucent resin, such as milky white polypropylene. A color close to black), red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, etc. may be used, and a transparent resin may be used instead of the translucent resin.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a front frame provided with a light emitting device (for example, JP-A-2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light emitting device performs effects that occur during the game, error notification, and the like. However, when the front frame is opened, the notification mode of the light emitting device can be visually recognized from the direction facing the front side of the front frame, but it is difficult to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the rear side of the front frame. There was a problem.

In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine including a front frame configured to detachably hold a game board in the middle frame and cover the front side of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163). (Paragraph [0019], and FIG. 1)). By the way, when the front frame is to be opened, a staff member such as a store clerk in the amusement hall inserts a key into the cylinder lock and turns the cylinder lock, and then grasps and pulls the decorative member provided on the front frame by hand. As the number of opening operations increases, there is a risk that the front frame will be damaged due to repeated loads being applied to the connecting portion between the decorative member and the front frame.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine having a front frame provided with a light emitting device (for example, JP-A-2018-079163 (paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). The light-emitting device emits light in a special manner different from usual when some kind of abnormality or malfunction occurs in the game machine, and can inform the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction. However, as the amount of light directed toward the rear of the game board increases, the amount of light directed toward the front of the game machine decreases.

Further, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which specific information about the game machine is provided on the game board (for example, JP-A-2017-080279 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 14)). As a result, it becomes possible to confirm from the outside whether or not the game board is a legitimate game board, and it is possible to suppress unauthorized alterations to the game machine. However, in the same manner as in the prior art, there is a possibility that the specific information can be visually recognized from the player's side, thereby deteriorating the decorativeness and reducing the interest in the game.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine having a speaker in the front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). A speaker provided in the gaming machine not only emits an effect sound generated during a game, but also an error notification sound and the like. By the way, if the diaphragm of the speaker is torn to pieces with an illegal tool, the sound will not flow, but it is easy to visually recognize that the diaphragm of the speaker is torn to pieces. Simply opening a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool will change the sound, but the sound will flow. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool and remove the wiring that is connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or break the wire so that the sound does not flow from the speaker, you will not be able to hear the sound from the speaker. Even if the game machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring a game ball by doing When a person who commits such an illegal act leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a player waiting state and performs a silent demonstration (the light emitting device emits light in a player waiting light emitting mode and the image display device emits light). The player waiting image is displayed.) is repeated. However, in such a state of waiting for a player, a staff member such as a store clerk at amusement halls may use an illegal tool to open a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker, disconnect the wire connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or disconnect the wire. It was difficult to determine whether sound was flowing from the speaker or not.

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate central upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side door frame decoration 404, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the Behind the door frame top decoration 453 are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation portion 302, the two plate center upper decorations 312a, and the plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 increases upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and the lower plate center decoration body 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are largely conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest and appealing to the player. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. Fig. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, pays out the game ball B to the player side, and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 opens and closes so that the open front side is closed. mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500 so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 can be played. A ball launching device 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in a front view on the rear side, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so that it can be opened and closed; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570, based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 projecting backward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. (a) to (c) of FIG. 84 are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the horizontal direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left, right, and rearward directions.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

On the main body frame base 501, a game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to a longitudinally extending axis at a position below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably attached about an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat plate-shaped guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 has an attachment shaft 502c rotatably attached near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h around an axis that extends vertically. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the drive board unit 1700 on the side of the main body frame 4 (front unit 2000 according to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later). and a decorative board provided in the back unit 3000, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc., which will be described later), and the opposite end is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is connected to the body frame base 501 at the end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

A connection cable that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the effect drive board 1720 described later of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. 503 guides the interface board 635 and the side of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side connected to an effect drive board 1720, which will be described later, to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. With the binding band 504 in contact with the front surface of the main body 502a, the banding band 504 is inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position in the horizontal direction among the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both upper and lower end sides of the guide main body 502a. , are attached to the guide body 502a by being clamped together.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are behind. (see FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (see FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this manner, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the crease. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 , is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 , and is attached to the door frame 3 . door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear side portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove portion 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 85(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball launcher 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and the launching base 541 attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the front view and rotated. A shooting solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the shooting base 541 and extends forward, a ball hitting mallet 543 whose proximal end is attached to the rotating shaft of the shooting solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball hitting mallet 543. A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. In this state, when the handle 182 is rotated, the shooting solenoid 542 is driven with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 mounted in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 has a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. In addition, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part extending in the left and right direction of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. As shown in FIG.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guide unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped driving gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the driving gear 585 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and includes a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downwards. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the delivery blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent to the right, and extends vertically along the left side of the rear view to the lower end. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 has three blade pieces 589a extending outward in the form of flat plates at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removing movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the clockwise rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 90).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, so that more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball removal path 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the back cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable piece 592. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short circular arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a gradually increases toward the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627, which opens leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are opened, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicated with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are ejected from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball extraction lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island equipment side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 93(b) is a back perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a front view near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 facing forward. and a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b, extends in the left-right direction, and obliquely downwards and rearwards. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side facing forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes rearward the most. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the panel front member 42, and the panel rear member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the front panel 42 can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. - 特許庁

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since it communicates with the lower outer frame assembly 40 through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to a sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through tube 623a extending in a cylindrical shape communicating with the through hole 621d and penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guiding part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guiding part 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the power supply board 630 (hereinafter referred to as a power supply board as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 for the sake of explanation). A transparent power supply board attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear surface of the board 630 is sometimes referred to as a "surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630" on which electronic components are mounted. and a cover 631 . The surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 is covered with the transparent power supply board cover 631 so that the power supply board 630 is housed in the transparent power supply board cover 631 . The front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply board 630 are coated with a green resist solution to form a green coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid green resist”). ), and a power switch 630a having an operation unit for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply substrate 630. As shown in FIG. On the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630, in addition to the power switch 630a, the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (further, the surface The shape of the electronic parts on the front side, the size of the electronic parts on the front side, the mounting direction of the electronic parts on the front side (mounting direction), and the model number of the electronic parts on the front side.) It is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a conspicuous white paint. The power switch 630 a is exposed from the transparent power board cover 631 . Since the power switch 630a is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of a transparent power board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board housed in the payout control board box 632. a substrate 633 (see FIG. 97); The payout control board 633 activates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby enhancing deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at the rearward portion of the speaker box 623 , which projects most backward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The rear cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and its left side attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a back perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 101(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails and the like, viewed from the front and above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right side wall 552e) with a length of about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. . The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By means of this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Moreover, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guide portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the place where the ball is jammed can be specified quickly. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and the overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outer side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b in which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is inclined to be lower, and a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g. Discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of detour passage 552g across discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the horizontal direction is about 1/3 of the length in the horizontal direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap with a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o have upper ends higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extend in the front-rear direction in a band-like shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Also, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. In addition, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. Note that the container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 below. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that the front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by discharging the fuel to a wide area.

In addition, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outer left portion of the rear wall 552c of the tank rail 553 in front view. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d in the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 is connected to the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the left portion extending straight in the left-right direction are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )is doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 such that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a step-like manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever so that the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551 . The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Moreover, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the side of the detour passage 552g presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without going through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

In addition, on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent upstream of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which front components, game panels, front units, etc. are made opaque. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board with the front constituent members, the game panel, the front unit, etc. made transparent. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the CC line in FIG. 107. FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decoration substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration substrate, the LED emits light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative board (side-view LED). detailed description is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate portion, and a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a second start-up opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. 2006, etc., to perform a game that allows the user to enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be received or passed.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115, etc.) that come into contact with the game balls B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 . In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 206, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided.

An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁A drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600 .

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape.

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116, etc.) attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

Further, in this embodiment, since the game panel 1100 has a transparent panel plate 1110, it is arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the game panel 1100 from the front of the game panel 1100 (that is, the front of the game board 5). The presence of various members on the game panel 1100 can be easily visually recognized (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “transparent game panel 1100”).

The drive board unit 1700 includes various boards (for example, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200 and the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400) that are electrically connected to the door frame secondary relay board 105 described above. , the side window inner decoration part decoration board 413 and the door frame right side decoration board 418 of the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc.), the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control The panel relay board 1710 relaying the connection with the board 1510 and the decoration board provided in the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 according to commands from the peripheral control board 1510, drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. are driven. A performance drive board 1720 and a drive board box 1730 housing the panel relay board 1710 and the performance drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 on the left side when viewed from the rear, and detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side when viewed from the rear.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the 5a, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first big prize winning opening 2005, a first starting opening 2002 or a second starting opening that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B. A second big prize winning opening 2006 is provided in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the 2004.例文帳に追加

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an out port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the game area 5a, and is provided in the middle of the vertical direction in the game area 5a. is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging from inside the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 and slightly above the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 is provided on the right side of the starter unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a in the front view, and has a second starter outlet 2004, a first big prize-winning outlet 2005, and a first sub-outer outlet 2011. a first attacker unit 2400, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and a center role A second attacker unit 2600 provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the object 2500 and having a second large winning opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600 provided above the second attacker unit 2600 and one Equipped with a side right center unit 2700 having a general prize winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right center unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003. there is

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010, which has a box shape with an open front and has a square opening 3010a on the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 is provided.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat plate-like back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat plate-like back front right decorative body 3040 provided below the front end inside the back box 3010. a back guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010; a back bottom left effect unit 3200 and a back bottom right effect unit 3250, and a back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part inside the back box 3010, and a back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. a back rear left effect unit 3500, a back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 in the back box 3010, and a back front left decoration 3030 and back rear left A back front left effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and a back front right effect unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800 and .

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116(a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel.

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear (out port 2010).

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 2010 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates with a width sufficient for two game balls B to be aligned in the horizontal direction. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 2010 and an out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, and is discharged to the rear of the front structural member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since this front component member 1000 is formed transparently together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, when assembled on the game board 5, the boundary of the game area 5a can be reduced from being clearly visible. , it is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the front structural member 1000 is made transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 115, etc.).

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front structural member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

Although illustration is omitted, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are separated in the left-right direction. and a plurality of engaging stepped portions formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . be.

As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of left and lower sides from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated to penetrate the lower portion. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 2010 at its upper portion. A cylindrical portion 3081 of an out-ball detection member 3080 in a back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 described later is inserted into the out recess 1123 .

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion. and a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging stepped portions on the lower side of the . The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion by elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparently together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, the boundary of the game area 5a can be reduced from being clearly visible. It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A transparent main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting portion 1201 is positioned directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and is positioned outside the back unit 3000. It is positioned directly below the ball detection member 3080 . The board holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000, and discharges them from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving part 628 below. can be done.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 which houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and has.

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting opening sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first big winning opening sensor 2402, and a second big winning opening. It is connected to the sensor 2601, the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out-port sensor 2403, the second sub-out-port sensor 3054, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and two LEDs for displaying the results of the ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display consisting of one LED, and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B in the gate part 2003 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the first big prize winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "win" or the like. A round indicator consisting of five LEDs displaying

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover body 1601 molded from a non-conductive transparent resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 . A plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a are formed on the rear surface side of the protective cover body 1601 along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601 to hold various wirings. A plurality of holes are formed in alignment vertically and horizontally.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixed pieces 1601b protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixed piece 1601c protruding downward from the lower end surface. This performance display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward, and two fixed grooves 3010c that are open to the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, are fitted into the back box. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b obliquely behind the 3010, the lower fixing piece 1601c side is moved forward to insert the lower fixing piece 1601c into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right at .

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 117(a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and FIG. 117(b) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end part of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B struck into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 Different from the first big winning hole 2005 and the first big winning hole 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B. The game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A second big prize winning port 2006 is provided.

A plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. placed above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 2010 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a lower right corner of the game area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 . The second big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out port 2011 is arranged below the second start-up port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is arranged on the right side of the general prize winning port 2001 on the right side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 and slightly above the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 is provided on the right side of the starter unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a in the front view, and has a second starter outlet 2004, a first big prize-winning outlet 2005, and a first sub-outer outlet 2011. and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. ing.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has a second big prize opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600. A side right center unit 2700 provided above and having one general prize winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a side right center unit 2700 provided above the side right center unit 2700 and having a gate part 2003 and a gate member 2800 which is in contact with.

[5-8a. starting unit]
Starting unit 2100 of table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. Figure 118 (a) is a front perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, (b) is a rear perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, and (c) ) is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general prize winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing parts of the starter unit and the side unit on the game board. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starter opening unit 2100 has a first starter opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. A flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction is provided, and the whole is formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape in which a rectangular portion elongated in the left and right direction and a semicircular portion having a lower side of the rectangular portion as a chord are combined when viewed from the front. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101 excluding the upper side, and is formed in a gutter shape with an open top. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 with the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, and the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110 form a first starting port 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B. forming.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is formed. located just below the center of Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100 and guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102. can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in . The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

Although illustration is omitted, a decorative seal is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so that it is more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 . As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting hole 2002 rather than the general prize winning hole 2001, and the player can be encouraged to hit the game ball B aiming at the first starting hole 2002.例文帳に追加At the same time, by allowing the first start port 2002 to receive the game ball B, a special lottery result (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game is advantageous to the player is generated. Therefore, it is possible to heighten expectations for the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B backward is inclined at a looser angle (an angle close to the horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B relatively backward is slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 can be seen for a longer period of time. The reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be surely recognized, and the joy (feeling of superiority) for the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be felt through the general winning hole 2001. can be savored for a longer period of time than when it is received by the

120, when the starter unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, the back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is positioned behind the back-bottom middle effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. Light emitted from LEDs such as the first lower-side decoration substrate 3322 and the second lower-side decoration substrate 3329 of the lower-side decoration unit 3320 is used for decoration.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the starting port unit 2100 , a rib may be provided that spans the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the first starting port 2002 . This rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part of which may be rounded) when viewed from the side, and the upper surface of the rib is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001. In addition, the distance from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is made longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203. (the rib is positioned below the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the timing at which the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 abuts the rib and is guided backward is It is possible to delay the timing of contacting the slanted portion and being guided backward, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

[5-8b. side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times. The three general prize winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 . The two general prize winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general prize winning opening 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat plate-shaped base plate, and extends forward and backward from the base plate in the shape of a gutter. One induction gutter, a first front wall portion closing the front end sides of the two first induction gutters, and a gutter-like extending back and forth from the base plate on the left side of the two first induction gutter. and a second front wall closing the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is made entirely of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open portion directed upward, and the second guide gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open portion directed to the upper left. The front end of the first guide trough 2202 extends vertically from the upper part of the first guide gutter 2202 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom, and the lower part moves backward toward the base plate 2201 as it goes downward. extends obliquely to Therefore, the first front wall portion 2203 closing the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position about 3/4 of the height from the bottom.

The second guide gutter 2204 has a vertical front end. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 closing the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201 .

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . Then, the portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205 can receive the game ball B. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. In addition, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 protruding rearward from the base plate 2201 pass through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined so as to become lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received in the general prize winning opening 2001 to the rear.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064 . The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051, and then It is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 .

The side unit 2200 differs from the starter opening unit 2100 in that no decorative stickers are attached to the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205 that form the front surface of the general prize winning opening 2001. It is made less conspicuous than the first starting port 2002 . In addition, since the front ends of the two general prize-winning ports 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general prize-winning ports 2001 can be emphasized. , it doesn't look bad.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. Light emitted from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for luminous decoration, and the back-bottom-left-rotation decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good condition. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a slanted portion on the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general prize winning openings 2001, the portion of the side unit 2200 makes it possible to The light emitted forward from the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the production unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 It can make you look better.

In this side unit 2200, since the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is faster. The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100 . Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B disappears in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being unnecessarily long with respect to the general winning opening 2001, while ensuring that the player recognizes that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player's interest can be easily directed to other winning openings such as the next game ball B, the first starting opening 2002, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, and continuously It is possible to keep the player entertained in the game in the game area 5a and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In other words, the portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 that is bent and extends obliquely is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the start opening unit 2100. The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 can be seen for a longer period of time. The reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be surely recognized, and the joy (feeling of superiority) for the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be felt through the general winning hole 2001. can be savored for a longer period of time than when it is received by the

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning holes 2001 is inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 can be seen from the side of the first guide gutter 2202. It is possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined part of the . When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front. Since the game ball B is not paid out, the player may feel distrustful of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall, and may lose interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the slanted portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are received in the general winning opening 2001 and move backward. Since the guided game ball B can be visually recognized by the player for a short period of time, the player can recognize that the game ball B has been received in the general prize winning opening 2001 . Therefore, even if the game ball B passing in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is mistakenly received in the general winning hole 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

In addition, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass through the front of the first front wall portion 2203, When B passes, if most of the game ball B (at least half or more of the game ball B) overlaps the general winning opening 2001 in a front view, the game ball B may not enter the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. The illusion of acceptance can be provided, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap the general prize winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side even if the benefits (payout of the game ball B and lottery of the first special lottery result) are not given after that. This allows the player to continue to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (left end) general winning opening 2001 out of the three general winning openings 2001 parallel to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. It has the same shape as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001 at the left end, some players can be given the illusion that it has been received in the starting hole. Even if the game ball B is accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 which is mistaken as the starting opening, the lottery for the special lottery result is not performed, so the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side feel distrustful. There is fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 away from the first start opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction (a position that cannot be accepted by "right hitting"), and the second Since no decorative sticker indicating the starting opening is attached to the front surface of the front wall part 2205, the player can be reconfirmed that it is not the starting opening, and the player feels a sense of suspicion, thereby increasing interest in the game. You can avoid dropping it.

In addition, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning holes 2001 slanted, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is greater than when the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced because no decorative seal is attached to the front surface of the general prize winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加

Although not shown, the angle of inclination of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general prize-winning port 2001) from the horizontal is such that variable prize-winning ports such as the big prize-winning port and the accessory prize-winning port can be opened and closed. The angle of inclination from the horizontal is larger than that of the winning opening door when it is opened by rotating about the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to guide the game ball B to the winning opening side. angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by accepting the game balls B into the variable winning opening is larger than the general winning opening 2001, the number of game balls B to the variable winning opening is increased. I want to win a prize. Alternatively, even with a variable winning opening (large winning opening) in which a prescribed number of prizes is determined, the player wishes to win more than the prescribed number of prizes. Therefore, by making the inclination of the variable winning opening door gentler than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slowed down. As described above, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning opening, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be seen for a longer time. 2001 can surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the variable winning hole, and can give the general winning hole 2001 the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted in the variable winning hole. It can be savored for longer than when it is received. In addition, since the angle of the prize winning port door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time for the prize winning port door in the open state to close, so that more than a prescribed number of game balls B win a prize for the player. can make you think to

In addition, in the two right side general winning holes 2001 in the side unit 2200, the portion extending obliquely downward from the lower end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203. is formed longer. As a result, since the winning opening is the general winning opening 2001, although the game ball B is paid out, a lottery such as a normal lottery or a special lottery is not performed. can be made out of the player's field of vision early on.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the side unit 2200, the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 out of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 is shown with an inclined front surface. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that is shot to the shooting position (so-called "left shot") in the normal game state can enter the general winning hole 2001 whose front surface is not inclined. Although the one provided at the position is shown, it is not limited to this. It may be provided at a position where the game ball B launched to the shooting position (so-called "right-handed") can enter, or may be provided at both.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having the inclined front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) is opened from the closed state. It has a narrow angle. When the number of game balls B to be paid out at the time of winning a prize in the big prize-winning port is set larger than that of the general prize-winning port 2001, the player cannot win more than the prescribed number of prizes even in the big prize-winning port where the prescribed number of prizes is determined. I hope Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B that has entered the big winning opening rolls to the back is slower than the speed at which the game ball B that has won in the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is inclined rolls to the back. there is In other words, when winning the general winning opening 2001, which is smaller than the number of payouts when winning the big winning opening, the game ball B that has won the big winning opening is faster than the speed when it rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the larger the payout amount, the longer it takes to disappear from the player's field of view. As a result, a prize-winning opening with a larger payout can provide a longer joyful time when a prize is won.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Side upper left unit 2300 in table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right. The side upper left unit 2300 is entirely transparent.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-8d. First Attacker Unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121(a) is a front perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit, and FIG. 121(b) is a back perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the first big winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game ball path in the first attacker unit.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and is positioned in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. installed. This first attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130, etc.). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second start opening 2004 is provided on the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction, and the first big prize winning opening 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and further than the second start opening 2004. It is provided at a low position, and the first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the first big prize winning port 2005 .

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a first start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005. It is equipped with a big winning hole sensor 2402, a first sub-out hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out hole 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism. Two each of the first big prize winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming a flow path for the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. a rear cover 2413 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second starting port 2004; a start solenoid 2415 for starting, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the start solenoid 2415, a first grand prize winning door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first grand prize winning port 2005, A first attacker solenoid 2418 for opening and closing the first major winning opening 2005 by moving the first major winning opening door 2417, and transmission for moving the first major winning opening door 2417 by transmitting forward/backward movement of the first attacker solenoid 2418. a member 2419;

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413 and attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413 and the first large prize winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for decorating the first large winning opening 2005 with light emission. Second starting opening sensor 2401, first big winning opening sensor 2402, first sub-out opening sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, starting opening solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first big winning opening decoration board 2420 and panel relay board and a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying connection with 1710 .

The unit base 2411 is made of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening portion 2411a that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the upper end near the right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411b that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the first opening portion 2411a, and A second opening 2411c that is elongated in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-rear direction in the upper part on the left side of the center; and a first sub-out port 2011 penetrating back and forth below the guide hole 2411b.

The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed so that the left and right widths are slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inserted. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is inserted. Each of the second guide holes 2411d protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side thereof is lowered.

The unit base 2411 is arranged horizontally along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two triangular contact portions 2411e projecting forward. These abutting portions 2411e allow the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning port door 2417 to contact with the abutting portion of the front cover 2412 when the first big winning port 2005 is closed. Together, they circulate in a large zigzag fashion in the front-rear direction.

A second starting opening sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411 . Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first big winning hole sensor 2402 is attached with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes are aligned. Magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d.

The front cover 2412 is formed in a box-like shape that is open rearward, and is formed as a transparent member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game balls B on the front surface of the unit base 2411 . As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 includes a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the upper right corner to the left and a game ball extending leftward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. It extends shorter than the first shelf portion 2412a so as to be lower leftward from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a and is spaced slightly longer than the diameter of B, and between the first shelf portion 2412a The second shelf portion 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf portion 2412b so as to be lower left than the left end of the second shelf portion 2412b and lower than the diameter of the game ball B. A third shelf portion 2412c extending shorter than the portion 2412b, and a space of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B to the left from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c. and a fourth shelf portion 2412d that extends lower leftward from a lower position than the third shelf portion 2412c and forms the first big winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is away from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf portion 2412a, the second shelf portion 2412b, and the third shelf portion 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf portion 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portions 2412a and so on. ing.

The front cover 2412 has a first vertical wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and a lower end of the first vertical wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to a height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. A fourth vertical wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end of the front cover 2412 to the lower side of the front cover 2412, a fifth vertical wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and a right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. and a seventh vertical wall portion 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to lower leftward. , further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412 . In addition, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then lower rightward. It extends upward and further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412 . The horizontal interval between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Furthermore, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting lower ends of a first standing wall portion 2412e, a second standing wall portion 2412f, and a third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e, after inclining to the left to leave an interval where the game ball B can flow between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l, to the middle of the fourth vertical wall portion 2412h on the left. and a second lateral wall portion 2412m that slopes upward. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. The second lateral wall portion 2412m is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the direction of approaching each other. It has an extending third lateral wall portion 2412n and a partition portion 2412o extending upward while connecting the opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lower leftward, and the space between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c allows the game ball B to circulate. are set apart. It has an upper shelf 2412p. The right end of the upper shelf 2412p is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. Also, the upper shelf 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lower rightward.

Although not shown, the front cover 2412 has a triangular shape at the front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and alternately in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two rearwardly projecting abutments in shape. When the first big prize winning port 2005 is in the closed state, these abutting portions move the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big prize winning port door 2417 to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411. Together, they circulate in a large zigzag fashion in the front-rear direction.

The rear cover 2413 is shaped like a box that opens forward and is made of a transparent member. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second starting door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first big prize winning door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. In addition, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to sandwich and hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403.

The second starting door 2414 includes a flat plate-like door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and extending in the left-right direction from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b. and a connecting portion 2414d provided at a portion apart from the rotating shaft 2414c in the lower portion of the arm portion 2414b and connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. .

The door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

The second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 with a door portion 2414a. The second starter door 2414 rotates (turns) about a rotating shaft 2414c by advancing and retreating the plunger of the starter solenoid 2415 in the front-rear direction. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting port solenoid 2415 is mounted so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes faces forward. The plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The first big prize winning opening door 2417 includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from the left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the horizontal direction, and a columnar link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower portion of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The pair of arm portions 2417b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c in the lower portion of the arm portion 2417b. This link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in a transmission member 2419, which will be described later.

The first big winning opening door 2417 can close the first big winning opening 2005 with a door portion 2417a. As the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, the first big prize opening door 2417 rotates (turns) about the rotary shaft 2417c, thereby moving the door portion 2417a in the front-rear direction. The first big prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is mounted so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes faces forward. The plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 includes a base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, an extension portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and penetrating in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension portion 2419b. and a slit 2419c extending vertically. Into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419, the link pin 2417d of the first big winning opening door 2417 is slidably inserted.

A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first prize winning opening decoration board 2420 . The plurality of LEDs of the first prize winning opening decoration board 2420 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The first big prize winning hole decoration board 2420 can light-embellish the first big prize winning hole 2005 by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

In the normal state of the first attacker unit 2400, the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starter solenoid 2415 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. protruding forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the door portion 2414a makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It's becoming That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

In addition, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is the second opening of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first big prize winning port door 2417 is positioned above the first big prize winning port 2005, and the door portion 2417a makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first big prize winning port 2005. It is in a good state. That is, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf portion 2412a, the game ball B rolls leftward due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second start door 2414 After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning entrance door 2417 according to its momentum, and is tilted to the left due to their inclination. roll in the direction In addition, when the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b contacts the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c may enter the

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first big prize opening 2005 is, with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412, They come into contact with each other alternately, and roll leftward while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that rolls leftward on the door portion 2417a rolls on the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and is then released to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 from the left end thereof.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first vertical wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, whereupon the second horizontal wall Due to the inclination of the part 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Also, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, it passes through between the third vertical wall portion 2412g and the fourth vertical wall portion 2412h, and the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It drops near the left end, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.例文帳に追加

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned into the game area 5a, and reaches the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulated on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B that passed through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c It is formed to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2415 is energized (turned on) according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger moves against the urging force of the spring. retreats, and the connecting portion 2414d of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (door portion 2414a side) is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting door 2414 rotates about the rotating shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. By rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper portion of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004. becomes. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401 After being detected, it falls onto the first lateral wall portion 2412l. The portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first horizontal wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the inclination causes the game ball B to roll backward, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from the rear end. The game ball B released rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. Ejected.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retreats together with the transmission member 2419 attached to its tip against the biasing force of the spring. When this transmission member 2419 retreats, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 slides in the slit 2419c and is pressed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c. It will happen.

As a result, the first big prize winning opening door 2417 rotates about the rotating shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. will have to move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first large prize winning port door 2417 rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first large prize winning port 2005 is opened upward, and the first large prize winning port 2005 opens. A game ball B can be accepted (see FIG. 124). That is, the first big prize winning opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the first large prize winning port 2005 when the first large prize winning port 2005 is in an open state, the fifth vertical wall after passing between the fifth vertical wall portion 2412i and the sixth vertical wall portion 2412j. Passing between the portion 2412i and the partition portion 2412o, or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partition portion 2412o, and after being detected by one of the two first prize winning opening sensors 2402, the second It falls on the three horizontal wall portions 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined downward from the upper surface toward the rear, and the game ball B dropped on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit base 2411 It is discharged rearward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is transferred to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. .

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first large prize winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first large winning opening 2005, the vicinity of the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first large winning opening 2005 By rotating the door portion 2417a centering on the rotating shaft 2417c extending to the left and right at the same position in the front and rear direction as the first big prize winning port 2005 (the first big prize winning port 2005 The depth in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2400) can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same for the second starting port 2004 that is opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414 . Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

In addition, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big winning hole 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2412o, and each is detected by the different first big winning hole sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 Since the game ball B is released backward, it is possible to suppress the game ball B from stagnation between the first big prize hole 2005 and the first big prize hole sensor 2402, and to increase the number of game balls in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127 and the like. Fig. 126(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame, and the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward until the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . Moreover, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110 into which the center accessory 2500 is inserted. This peripheral wall part 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state assembled to the game board 5 .

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502 ) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501 . In addition, the support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a linear shape, so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), thereby exerting a reinforcing effect while allowing the player to It is made to be inconspicuous from.

More specifically, a plurality of support portions 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in a support portion 2503 provided at a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes most to the left above a warp entrance 2511, which will be described later, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at that portion is midway between the vertically extending portions. has a shape that bulges out to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges leftward. It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is formed linearly so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 135). The support part 2503 of this part is the back front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 in which the part extending linearly up and down at the tip side of the support part 2503 is provided in the back in the state assembled to the game board 5. 3030 along part of the right side. Therefore, since the tip side of the support part 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, the support part 2503 is difficult to distinguish, and the back front left decoration provided at the rear is relatively small. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made conspicuous.

Further, among the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 below the warp entrance 2511 extends rightward in a rectangular shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends obliquely. The support part 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in the assembled state on the game board 5 (see FIG. 107, etc.). ). The laterally extending tip side of the support portion 2503 extends parallel to the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. , and the support portion 2503 is difficult to distinguish (see FIG. 111).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance that is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, at the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, a warp exit 2512 which is open in the frame on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 so that the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 can be released, and the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512. A stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the horizontal direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 are provided (see FIG. 127, etc.). The stage cover 2515 bounces back the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 to the stage 2513 side, thereby preventing the game ball B from entering from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the starter unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is positioned on the panel board of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that when it is attached to 1110, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the elevated portion (central release portion 2513a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starter opening 2002 of the starter unit 2100. ing. Thereby, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 has a guide passage group 2520 which is provided in the upper right corner and consists of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the impact of the front component 1000). It is almost in contact with the right rail 1005 near the part 1006 , and is formed so that the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide path group 2520 .

The guide passage group 2520 has a length in the vertical direction that is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove that is open forward, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good condition.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 away from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and a guide passage 2521 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2501. and a second guide passage 2522 extending along the The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated left and right. In addition, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are laterally adjacent to each other and open obliquely downward and to the right along the arc above the right rail 1005 .

The guide path group 2520 is positioned above the gate section 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 . In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the impinging portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have hit the impinging portion 1006 are first guided. It is configured to enter passageway 2521 .

Further, the center accessory 2500 protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and has a lower right guide passage 2530 that guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward across the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit opening obliquely downward to the left with a width of one game ball B.

This lower right guide passage 2530 has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in the state assembled to the game board 5 and is positioned between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600 . Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged.

According to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is located at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it becomes the outer edge, the inner side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center role 2500) can be relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the back unit can be displayed through the frame of the center role 2500. The decoration of 3000 can be made more visible.

In addition, since the supporting portion 2503 projecting inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes short from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided on the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided behind the back. It is possible to reduce hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000, the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the like. In addition, the center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are positioned as close as possible to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. is arranged, it is possible to suppress blurring of the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 on the rear side due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. - 特許庁For this reason, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body or the like provided in the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect thereof can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 and the like are made transparent and the support part 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body capable of emitting light decoration and the effect display device 1600, the light emitted from them can be used for the light emitting decoration, and the appearance is improved. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the back front left effect unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (the cross-hatched portion in FIG. 135). The LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the back front left effect unit 3700, the light emitted forward from the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted, or diffused to create a gorgeous light emitting decoration. can be shown to the player. It should be noted that the support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like, and the step or the like can diffuse the light from the rear, thereby making the display more gorgeous.

In addition, by providing the support portion 2503, there is provided a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501 . As a result, the game area of the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as wide as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to enjoy the original game.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support part 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, compared to the case where the support part 2503 is provided over the entire circumference, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further expanded. It can be widened, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear can be made more visible. In other words, if the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 is to be made to look larger, the support portion 2503 is provided along a portion of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind in a front view.

The edge of the support portion 2503 may be formed in the same shape as the front cover 3711 (decorative shape) of the back front left effect unit 3700 provided on the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from conspicuously lowering the decorativeness of the rear decorative body due to the support portion 2503 being different from the rear decoration. can increase

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decorative body 3030 of the back unit 3000 and the back front left effect unit 3700, which are provided at the rear, so that these decorations are displayed by the lens effect. Although the one that suppresses blurring is shown, it is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 away from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. The back front left decorative body 3030 of the back unit 3000 and the back front left effect unit 3700 may be intentionally made to appear blurred.

In the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an opening 1112 penetrating therethrough, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, this is not the case. However, the peripheral wall portion 2501 may have no rear portion to be inserted into the opening 1112. In this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112. . Also, when the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support part 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center role 2500 is not provided with the flange part 2502. You can do it.

[5-8f. Second Attacker Unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129 and the like. FIG. 128(a) is a front perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the path of game balls in the second attacker unit and the side middle unit.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of panel plate 1110 in panel 1100 . The second attacker unit 2600 has a second big prize winning opening 2006 openable to the left (see FIG. 129).

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second large winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second large winning hole 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal timing acting near the second large winning hole 2006. 2602 and . In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second large winning opening door 2611 for opening and closing the second large winning opening 2006 and the second large winning opening door 2611 to close the second large winning opening 2006. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) that transmits the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second large winning opening door 2611, and the second large winning opening 2006 and a guide passage 2613 for guiding the received game ball B and releasing it backward.

The second attacker unit 2600 has a second large winning opening 2006 that opens leftward from the center in the left-right direction toward the right, and a second large winning opening 2006 that closes the second large winning opening 2006 from the left. A winning entrance door 2611 is provided.

The second big winning entrance door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that extends linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a left side that bulges out from the upper end of the right side. and an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second prize winning door 2611 has a cylindrical rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction around the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape, and a link projecting in a columnar shape rearward from a position distant from the rotating shaft. A pin (not shown) is provided. The second big prize winning opening door 2611 is attached so that the lower rotating shaft can rotate so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base portion attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second big winning opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that its right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and the peripheral wall portion of the second prize winning opening 2006 and the center accessory 2500. A space in which the game ball B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501 . In addition, when the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5 , the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 .

In the normal state, the second attacker unit 2600 has the second attacker solenoid 2612 in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second large prize winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second large winning prize opening 2006 is closed by the second large winning prize opening door 2611 . In other words, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted into the second big winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加

In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the second When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (turned on), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second big winning door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member pulls up. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second big winning opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotating shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second large prize winning opening door 2611 moves leftward, the second large winning prize opening 2006 opens leftward, and the right end side of the second large winning prize opening door 2611 becomes lower. It will be in a tilted state. That is, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the falling game ball B abuts on the second big winning gate door 2611 , it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is received by the second big winning gate 2006 . The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, then guided by the guide passage 2613 and discharged backward. The game ball B released rearward from the guide passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8g. Side right center unit]
Next, the side right center unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129 and the like. The side right center unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a and attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . This side right middle unit 2700 has one general prize winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012 .

The side right center unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a width of one game ball B in the left and right direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and the left and right direction is the game ball. A second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width of two spheres B.

In addition, the side right center unit 2700 includes a first guide passage 2701 that guides backward the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a second guide passage 2701 that guides backward the game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012. two guide passages 2702; The first guide path 2701 extends rearward from the general prize winning opening 2001, bends rightward, and further bends rearward to form a crank shape. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 more than the first guide passage 2701 and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

In this side right center unit 2700, when assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. there is

In addition, the side right center unit 2700, in a state assembled on the game board 5, has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000, and a lower end substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600, Between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, a space is formed in which the game ball B can flow. In this side right center unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the second big winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It is open upward over substantially the entire space (see FIG. 130, etc.).

The side right center unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general prize winning port sensor 3051 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the side right center unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and then the back unit provided behind. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 at 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128 and the like. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right center unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is The gate member 2800 includes a gate portion 2003 for performing a lottery for the ordinary lottery result that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 when the game ball B passes through, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate portion 2003. 2801 and . A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003 .

The gate member 2800 has a guiding piece 2802 projecting obliquely downward to the left from near the right end of the bottom surface. The guiding piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes through the vicinity of the left end of the general prize winning opening 2001 in the side right center unit 2700 in the state assembled to the game board 5 .

The gate member 2800 is positioned substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled to the game board 5, and is positioned on both left and right outer sides of the game board. A gap is formed through which the sphere B can flow. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the right above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115, 130 and the like. FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part of the game area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in both the right and left outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG. A windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center role 2500 mainly enter the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W for the game ball B struck on the left side of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加, and is adjusted to enter a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. As a result, the game ball B can enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 with a certain probability by hitting it so as to flow down the left side of the center role 2500 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are more difficult than the game ball B which has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. It is adjusted so that the game ball B that has passed through the second guide path 2522 on the left side of the guide path group 2520 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. In addition, the plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are mainly adjusted so that the game balls B flow through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side thereof. ing.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 .

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and hit upward along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is hit so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W has a lower probability than these. induced to enter the

The game ball B guided to the left part of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf part 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200 . Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the three general prize winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then is guided to the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064 , and after being detected by the general prize winning slot sensor 3051 , it is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3051, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided. A game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002 . Then, the game ball B that has not been received by the general winning hole 2001 is discharged from the out hole 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the horizontal direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted into the first starting port 2002 . In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize gate 2001 of

A game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is detected by the first starting port sensor. After being detected by 3052 , it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3052, a lottery for the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B that circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003, or is received by the second starting port 2004, the first big prize winning port 2005, and the second big prize winning port 2006. There is no possibility of being taken.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center role 2500 is accepted in the second start opening 2004 is higher than that of the game ball B hit to the left side of the center role 2500 The probability of being accepted at the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is not open, it is possible to prompt the operation of hitting the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 ("left hitting").

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is moved with such a force that the game ball B enters above the portion of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 .

More specifically, the game ball B is struck with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B in contact with the impingement portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is released downward at a position slightly rightward from the position just above the gate portion 2003 .

A game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is caught by a plurality of obstructing nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 to the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate portion. 2003 and the right side of the gate member 2800 are guided so that the probability decreases in order, and flow down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 emitted downward from The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide path 2522 is guided such that the probability of the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 is substantially the same, and the probability of the right side of the gate member 2800 is lower than them. and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

A game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012 . The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, the second sub-out port sensor After being detected by 3054, it is discharged outside the game area 5a. Also, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is released to the side right center unit 2700 after being detected by the gate sensor 2801 . When the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery for a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

A game ball B passing through the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of hitting the side right center unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right center unit 2700. It flows down the left side of , and is sometimes accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or rarely accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012 . The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the eighth delivery opening 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, After being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051 , it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . At this time, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

A game ball B flowing down the left side of the right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and enters the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. flows down the left side of

At this time, when the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted by the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2006 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2601, and after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, the game ball B in the back unit 3000 The substrate is transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game balls B are detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

The game ball B, which was not accepted in the second big prize-winning hole 2006 and flowed down to the left of the second big prize-winning hole 2006, enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits the lower right guide passage 2530. to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 downward (diagonally lower left) flows down onto the first shelf 2412 a of the first attacker unit 2400 . In addition, since a plurality of obstructing nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B can directly enter the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls leftward due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 and the second shelf portion 2412b. After rolling, it is released leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to its momentum, and the inclination of them After rolling leftward from the door portion 2417a to the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400 from the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it may reach the upper shelf 2412p without flowing down to the first shelf 2412a by coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It may run down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf portion 2412p rolls leftward due to its inclination, is released leftward from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and hits the obstacle nail N planted leftward. After contacting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first grand prize opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d roll leftward and the first It is released outside the attacker unit 2400 . Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing when the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing when the first big winning opening 2005 opens, It may be accepted in the winning slot 2005 .

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it bounces rightward due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2412p, and the first shelf 2412a. By flowing upward, the first shelf 2412a may roll rightward against its inclination and be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2412a. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a passes between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. Then, it rolls leftward due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m and is received by the first sub-out port 2011. As shown in FIG. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then passes through the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. , and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the passing of the game ball B through the gate part 2003 results in the lottery of "ordinary hit" as the ordinary lottery result, the second start. Since the opening door 2414 is moved and the second start opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2412a is accepted by the second start opening 2004. there is a possibility. When the game ball B is received by the second starting hole 2004, it is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery for the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

Also, when the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b, the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery As a result, when a "big hit" is drawn, the first big prize opening door 2417 moves and the first big prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the ball is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B will be accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game balls B are detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402, the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b, by contacting the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p, it flows down diagonally to the right and the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412b. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and reaches near the left end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.例文帳に追加

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received by any of the second start opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged downward behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 is made to receive the game ball B, and "small win". It is necessary to draw a lottery for the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to allow the game ball B to pass through the gate part 2003 to draw a "normal hit" as a normal lottery result. Therefore, the chances of receiving the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 are lower than the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting port 2002 and the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first start port 2002 can be enjoyed. It can raise expectations for the acceptance of

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first start opening 2002, and a "small hit" or "big hit" is drawn as a result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006. is opened and closed, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed" so that the game ball B can be received in the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big prize hole 2006, and the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to increase the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passage for circulation facilitates passage through the gate section 2003. , the second sub-out port 2012 can be easily received, so that the game ball B can be adjusted in striking strength so that the game ball B circulates in a desired guide passage, and the game ball B can be adjusted to the player. B's driving operation can be enjoyed.

In addition, by performing "right hitting", by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the second start opening 2004 is in an open state "normal hit" may be drawn, and the open state To increase the expectation for a game and to suppress the decrease in interest because a ``small win'' or a ``big win'' may be drawn by receiving a game ball B in a second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加can be done.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. 131 is a front perspective view of the back unit of the game board, and FIG. 132 is a rear perspective view of the back unit of the game board. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall and having a box shape with an open front. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 is provided.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat plate-like back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat plate-like back front right decorative body 3040 provided below the front end inside the back box 3010. a back guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010; a back bottom left effect unit 3200 and a back bottom right effect unit 3250, and a back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part inside the back box 3010, and a back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. a back rear left effect unit 3500, a back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 in the back box 3010, and a back front left decoration 3030 and back rear left A back front left effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and a back front right effect unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800 and .

[5-9a. back box]
The back case 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 . In the back box 3010, a back front left decoration 3030, a back front right decoration 3040, and various production units are installed, and a production display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are installed on the rear side. The back box 3010 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which upper fixing pieces 1601b of the effect display device 1600 are inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d is provided near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear side as viewed from the rear so as to be slidable to the left and right.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting decorations, production units, etc., at appropriate positions.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The reinforcing plate 3011 reinforces the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing an enlarged upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to be separated from each other to the left and right.

The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031 . The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 , and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . Although illustration is omitted, the decoration seal 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The back front left decorative body 3030 is formed opaque, and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041 . The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to near the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . Although illustration is omitted, the decoration sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaque and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extend in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outside, is located outside the game area 5a in a front view when assembled on the game board 5. (See FIGS. 111 and 135, etc.). Furthermore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are formed in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outside, is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. extended to

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, in a front view, the back front left decorative body 3030 is positioned halfway from the bottom of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 provided at the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. It is extended to the position of In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward beyond the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 .

As a result, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the lower half of the back left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered with the back front left decorative body 3030 (the shaded portion in FIG. The elevation drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. In addition, in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (the hatched portion in FIG. 135). Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3 can make the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 invisible from the player side. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

In addition, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554, and in the state assembled to the game board 5, the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 is extended. A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it to the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered with the door frame 3 and hidden. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and it is possible to suppress the back front left decorative body 3030 from being unnecessarily large, thereby pachinko. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outside the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front structural member 1000 when viewed from the front, the function display unit The back front left decorative body 3030 can be used instead of 1400 to hide the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 (functional component) and the like provided at the rear.

On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600 in a front view, and has a transparent front. Even through the component 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved by making the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side. , and effects similar to those of the back front left decorative body 3030 can be exhibited.

As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least part of the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided on the rear side are covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts hard to see from the player side, and to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

In addition, as described above, since the front of the functional parts provided in the rear can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Also, the functional parts can be made invisible from the player side. That is, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 make it possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, thereby giving the player a sense of openness and the actual game area 5a. Although the size does not change, it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts of the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040, which are decorated with a predetermined decoration, are located outside the game area 5a. Since it can be visually recognized from the front through them, the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated with them, and the game area 5a can be made to appear larger than it actually is, so that the game can strongly attract the player's interest. It can be a board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000 and the back unit can be made transparent. 3000, etc., can be reflected or refracted forward (toward the player) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be displayed, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

In addition, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided in the rear can be accessed from the player side by the portions of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 that are extended outside the game area 5a. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional parts may be provided outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced in order to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, part of the functional parts are placed outside the game area 5a with a balance that allows the game area 5a to be large with respect to the size of the game board 5. It is desirable to have

Moreover, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. As a result, the design in the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can make the 5a appear larger than it actually is and can strongly attract the player's interest.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136(a) is a front perspective view of a back guide unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape such that both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guide unit 3050 is formed substantially entirely transparent.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening sensor 3052 that detects the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, An out-port sensor 3053 for detecting the game ball B received in the out-port 2010, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. and a magnetic sensor 3055 that is provided at a portion behind the and detects an illegal magnetism.

In addition, the back guidance unit 3050 is received in the first delivery port 3061 to which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is delivered, and the general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 through which the game ball B is delivered, a third delivery port 3063 through which the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 on the middle side of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and a general delivery port on the left side of the side unit 2200. A fourth delivery port 3064 where the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 is delivered, and a fourth delivery port 3064 where the game ball B accepted by the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The fifth delivery port 3065, the sixth delivery port 3066 where the game ball B received in the first large winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the second large winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 A seventh delivery port 3067 where the received game ball B is delivered, an eighth delivery port 3068 where the game ball B accepted by the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is delivered, and the side right middle unit 2700 A ninth delivery port 3069 through which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, the back guidance unit 3050, although not shown in detail, guides the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then discharges it downward. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and delivered to the second discharge path and the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and discharges it obliquely to the lower right, and a position below the sixth delivery port 3066 for the game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 and a fourth discharge path for guiding the liquid to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066, and then discharging the liquid obliquely downward to the left. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge path.

The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery port 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. be done. A game ball B received by the general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the second delivery port 3062, and a game ball B received by the general winning port 2001 on the middle side and delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are played. The ball B joins with the second discharge path and is discharged downward after being detected by the general prize winning opening 2001 . The game ball B received by the general prize winning port 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general prize winning port 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. .

The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and transferred to the fifth delivery port 3065, and the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B accepted by the second big winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the general prize winning port 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is upstream of the part communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, then merges with the fourth discharge path, It is discharged through four discharge channels.

This back guidance unit 3050 is provided with an out ball detecting member 3080 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 2010. - 特許庁The out-ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. To detect the game balls B received in the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that did not receive the privilege (game balls B to which no privilege was given, also referred to as "out balls"). belongs to.

The out-ball detection member 3080 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100, and includes a tubular portion 3081 extending in the front-rear direction so that the game ball B can flow, and the tubular portion 3081. A partition portion 3082 that divides the interior into left and right, a flange portion 3083 projecting in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081, and a game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081 and is positioned downward. and a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and ejected (see FIG. 114). Out ball detection member 3080 is provided with out opening sensor 3053 between cylindrical portion 3081 and rear cover 3084 .

The cylindrical portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction that allows two game balls B to be lined up sufficiently (a width that does not allow three game balls B to line up), and a lower inner surface It slopes down toward the rear. The partition part 3082 is provided in the vicinity of the rear end of the cylinder part 3081, and is partitioned into a size through which one game ball B can pass on both left and right sides. The front end of the partition 3082 is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward.

In the out-ball detection member 3080, two out-hole sensors 3053 are provided side by side on the left and right. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B that circulates on the left side of the partition 3082 in the tubular section 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition 3082 in the tubular section 3081. It detects a game ball B that has been distributed. The out port sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081 . As a result, the circulation direction of the game ball B circulating in the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the outlet sensor 3053, so the game ball B can be smoothly detected by the outlet sensor 3053. can be discharged quickly to prevent it from staying in front of the outlet sensor 3053 .

This out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, and the cylindrical portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 114).

When the out-ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3081 . Also, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 .

This out ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided backward by the out guide portion 1003 and is received in the out port 2010. The game ball B passed through the cylindrical portion 3081 is detected by one of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 to be discharged. The out ball detecting member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharged ball receiving portion 628 of the body frame 4 without contacting the board holder 1200 .

According to the out-ball detection member 3080 of this embodiment, the partition 3082 separates the two out-hole sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, so that the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is detected. The game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the right side of the out sensor 3053 side while being guided to the left side of the out side sensor 3053 . Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "hit left" or "hit right" according to the number of game balls B detected per hour by the left and right outlet sensors 3053, respectively. Based on the determination, it is possible to encourage the player to perform the most suitable driving operation for the game situation, thereby allowing the user to enjoy the intended game.

In addition, in the out-ball detection member 3080, the forward projection of the partition part 3082 is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over, so when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per time, the partition is detected. The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side of the part 3082 where the circulation amount of the game ball B is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 2010 without delay.

In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second big winning hole 2006, the first sub-out hole 2011, and the second sub-out hole 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 is reversed by the out ball detecting member 3080 and is detected by the out hole sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the "out ball" received in the out port 2010. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the out-ball detection member 3080 is provided in the back unit 3000 , but the configuration is not limited to this, and the out-ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100 . At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123 can be supported. In addition, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.例文帳に追加

In addition, according to the present embodiment, it is driven into the game area 5a, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been accepted by any of them can be detected by the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning If the game ball B is continuously detected in the mouth, but the "out ball" is not detected, it means that a particular winning hole is being cheated. It is possible to report that a fraudulent act is being carried out.

In addition, since the number of "out balls" can be counted by detecting "out balls", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening The number of "winning balls" and the number of "out balls" counted by detecting the game ball B accepted in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large From the number of "safe balls" paid out by receiving game balls B into the winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, the "ball output rate" of the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although not shown, a display section for displaying the "ball output rate" is provided on the rear side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG.

In addition, in the game board 5, all game balls B ("whole ball") struck into the game area 5a are detected, or all game balls B ("whole ball") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), the out-out sensor 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, and the second sub-out sensor 3054 detect only the "out ball". ” and “global ball”, it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 .

[5-9d. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137(a) is a front perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 137(b) is a back perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back-side effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back-side effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable structure of the back effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back effect unit.

The back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part (the front surface of the back wall) in the back box 3010 . The back-side effect unit 3100 has a U-shape opening downward when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010 . The back-side effect unit 3100 includes a back-side movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back-side movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-side movable decoration body 3110 in the vertical direction.

The back rear movable decoration 3110 includes a transparent plate-like decoration 3111 extending in the left-right direction and having a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of first decorations provided behind the decoration 3111 on the front surface. It comprises a back rear decoration substrate 3114 on which LEDs 3114a and a second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back rear decoration substrate 3114. - 特許庁The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 are each surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the back decoration substrate 3114 can light-embellish the decoration 3111 (back movable decoration 3110).

In addition, the back rear movable decoration 3110 includes a left slider 3116 vertically extending on the left side of the decoration 3111 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decoration 3111 . The left slider 3116 has a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from near its lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding leftward from near its upper end in a triangular shape, and a detection piece 3116c provided at its upper end. have.

The back rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U-shape that is open downward when viewed from the front. A slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the back and rear movable decoration 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a slide shaft 3122 that extends vertically in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122, and has a spiral on the outer periphery. and a spiral shaft 3123 in which a shaped groove is formed.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and the motor gear 3125 as a rotating shaft. A rear rear drive motor 3126 attached, a motor base 3127 mounting the rear rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and an upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 rotatably mounted to the unit base 3121. A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 are provided.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a slide guide 3130 which is screwed to a spiral shaft 3123 and can abut against the movable projection 3116a of the back rear movable decoration 3110 from below, and a slide guide 3130 which is on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123 A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and is capable of moving up and down, the lower end of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that biases the transmission slider 3131 upward, and the transmission slider 3131 a link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction due to the elevation of the link member 3133; It has

Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, A front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Attached front right cover 3138 and back rear drive motor 3126 attached to the front lower part of the front left cover 3137, back rear upper detection sensor 3135, back rear lower detection sensor 3136 and connection of effect drive board 1720 and the back rear left relay board 3139 that relays the connection between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138 and the back rear decoration board 3114 of the back rear movable decoration 3110 and the effect drive board 1720. and a rear right relay board 3140 that is relayed.

The unit base 3121 has an impact absorbing member 3121a that abuts against the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the impact. The upper end and lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 .

The slide guide 3130 has a detection piece 3130 a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end and is detected by a back rear bottom detection sensor 3136 . The slide guide 3130 is vertically slidable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 , and is prevented from rotating about the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by coming into contact with them. The upper end surface of the slide guide 3130 can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 . The lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 .

The transmission slider 3131 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be vertically movable. A front left cover 3137 allows the transmission slider 3131 to move vertically only within a predetermined range. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding rightward on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding rightward on the upper end side, and a columnar shape protruding rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. and a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper surface of the lower projection 3131a. Moreover, the transmission slider 3131 has a projecting pin 3131c slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 .

The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to an upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131 to urge the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 is formed in a triangular shape in which each vertex is R-chamfered when viewed from the front. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one vertex so as to be rotatable about the longitudinal axis. The link member 3133 has an elongated first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left vertex of the rotation axis, and an elongated slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the vertex above the rotation axis. It has a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

Lock member 3134 is attached between unit base 3121 and front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by front left cover 3137 .
The lock member 3134 protrudes rearward in a columnar shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and forms a flat upper end surface, and extends in the left-right direction. The contact surface 3134b, which extends and can contact the lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the back movable decorative body 3110, is inclined so as to move leftward as it goes downward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b, and a guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be vertically slidable.

Next, the operation of the back effect unit 3100 will be described. 140 (FIG. 141(a)), the back rear effect unit 3100 is in a retracted position in which the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward, and the slide guide 3130 is in a normal state. is positioned near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and positioned at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the back movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is in contact with the back movable decoration. The lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of 3110 abuts.

In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 3132 . Since the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring The biasing force of 3132 acts on the link member 3133 in the clockwise direction around the rotation shaft, and biases the lock member 3134 in the direction of sliding rightward. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained at the lock position by the biasing force of the spring 3132 .

In this state, the downward movement of the back movable decorative body 3110 is restricted by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 . Therefore, even if one of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the corresponding position for some reason (malfunction), the remaining can prevent the downward movement (fall) of the back movable decorative body 3110. can.

Also, in a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is positioned above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. located to the right of the axis. Further, the rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

The rear rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the upper rear effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the rear rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. Move to Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable decorative body 3110 is in contact with the locking member 3134, so the movable back decorative body 3110 cannot move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110 .

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the rear-rear-lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 moves to the lower projection 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It abuts on the upper end surface (see FIG. 141(b)). When the slide guide 3130 moves further downward while the back-rear-bottom detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower projection 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the biasing force of the spring 3132 .

As the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projecting pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise around its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. As the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the transmission pin 3134a inserted into the second slit 3133b The lock member 3134 moves leftward (see FIG. 141(c)).

When the locking member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable decoration 3110, the locking (downward regulation) by the locking member 3134 is released, and the back movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, which is moving downward, is in a non-detection state with respect to the rear rear bottom detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear driving motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the fallen back rear movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the impact absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, thereby stopping the falling and being in the appearance position (see FIG. 141(c)). In this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back movable decoration 3110, and the back movable decoration 3110 does not come into contact with it.

In the back-back effect unit 3100, the back-back movable decoration 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player's side) in the appearance position where the back-back movable decoration 3110 has fallen. In this state, the back movable decoration 3110 (decoration 3111) can be decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 to emit light. A player can be entertained by the luminous decoration.

When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is returned from the appearance position of the lower movement end to the retracted position in the normal state, the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in the reverse direction (here, clockwise in plan view) by the rear rear driving motor 3126. direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 due to the biasing force of the spring 3132 . As the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates clockwise and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position. Become.

In addition, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower projection 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable projection 3116a upward. By pressing the back movable decorative body 3110 upward (see FIG. 141(d)).

Then, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to the vicinity of the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b contacts the guide surface 3134c from below and pushes the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c exerts a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left. As a result, the lock member 3134 slides rightward against the biasing force of the spring 3132 that moves rightward through the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133 .

When the locking projection 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressure of the locking projection 3116b against the guide surface 3134c disappears. The locking member 3134 slides rightward by the biasing force of the spring 3132 to reach the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is positioned below the locking projection 3116b of the back movable decoration 3110, and the lock member 3134 prevents the back movable decoration 3110 from moving downward. can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearing position to the retracted position, which is the normal state.

According to the rear back effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right can be dropped from the retracted position invisible to the player to the appearing position visible to the player. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, since the locking member 3134 that locks (regulates) the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the state of the retracted position is moved to the left to release the lock, it can be rotated around the longitudinal axis. Compared to the case where the lock is released by moving, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Back rear movable decoration]
Next, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the rear movable decorative body together with the rear decorative substrate. 143(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. FIG. 144(a) is a front perspective view of the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rear movable decorative body. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body as seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the movable rear decorative body as seen from the rear. FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate in the front view of FIG. 147 with dashed lines. FIG. 149(a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back rear movable decorative body, and (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in (a), (c) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the same part as the decoration of (a).

FIG. 150 is an enlarged sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143(a). 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 exploded. FIG. 152 is an explanatory view showing the relation between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear movable decorative body. FIG. 153(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the cross section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate at the position of the first LED, and (b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. FIG. 10C is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide radiation plate at the part where the light guide radiation plate is formed, and (c) is an LED housing part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the second decoration part of the decoration body and the decoration sheet and the second decoration substrate behind the back It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of one LED from a front. FIG. 154 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the back decoration substrate together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155(a) is a front view of the rear decorative substrate, and FIG. 155(b) is a rear view of the rear decorative substrate. FIG. 156(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion of a different form from (a). It is an enlarged cross-sectional view, and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion of a form further different from that of (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 having a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes two first decorative portions 3151 provided near both left and right ends in a front view, and two first decorative portions 3151 arranged in the horizontal direction between the two first decorative portions 3151. and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. Each of the first decorative portions 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. In addition, although illustration is omitted, the second decoration part 3152 imitates a predetermined character, and is arranged in rows on the left and right, so that the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, pachinko) A predetermined logo is formed in line with the world view of the machine 1 (game board 5). In this way, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is decorated with a logo between two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIGS. 142 to 146 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decoration part 3150 with relief-like unevenness. and a translucent part (region) provided behind the decoration body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decoration part 3150 and having decoration (pattern) applied. A sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (area), a transparent plate-like light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113. A rear decorative substrate 3114 having a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “surface (mounting surface)”) and the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 A plate-shaped decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover it, a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decoration 3111, and a right slider extending vertically on the right side of the decoration 3111. A slider 3117 is provided.

In addition, the part number of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the surface of the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged, etc. Indicates the attributes of the electronic component on the front side (may also include the shape of the electronic component on the front side, the size of the electronic component on the front side, the mounting orientation of the electronic component on the front side (mounting direction), and the type of the electronic component on the front side). The surface-side inscription portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and a translucent portion ( A sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (area), a transparent plate-like light guide radiation plate 3113, and a rear decoration substrate 3114 are arranged in this order. Although there are portions (regions) having properties, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 by silk printing is not applied to the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-like decorative sheet 3112, and the It is visible through the decorative body 3111, and in a state where the first LED and the second LED are turned off, the area corresponding to the part (area) having translucency and the color of the predetermined paint is visible, it is only possible to confirm the existence of the predetermined paint color, and it is not possible to determine whether the predetermined paint color indicates a character or symbol or a shape. On the other hand, if the region corresponds to the transparent part (region) and the predetermined paint color can be seen, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface indicated by the surface side inscription portion) (attributes of side electronic components) can be discriminated.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body of the rear movable decorative body]
The decorative body 3111 has flat general surfaces on the front side and the rear side. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from a general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and protruding forward, and a second decorative protrusion 3111a. and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111 a is provided at a portion that forms the contours of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 . The first decorative projection 3111a in the first decorative portion 3151 is formed on the outer periphery of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms, and on the central stamen and pistil imitating parts, respectively. . The first decorative projection 3111a at the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer circumference of each second decorative portion 3152 in a double (two-line) manner. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved such that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative projection 3111 b is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 . The second decorative projection 3111b is shaped like a cherry blossom or petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151 . The second decorative projection 3111b is curved such that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative projection 3111c is provided within the frame of the first decorative projection 3111a. The third decorative projection 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 has a curved front surface. The third decorative projection 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 has a flat front surface.

The first decorative projection 3111a and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute part of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 of the decorative portion 3150, respectively.

In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster at a portion of the first decorative projection 3111a that protrudes forward from the second decorative projection 3111b (first foil stamping region (see FIG. 156(a))). It has a metal decoration portion 3111d (a dark shaded portion in FIGS. 147 to 149). The decoration body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metal decoration portion 3111d. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156(a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided on the curved front portion of the first decorative projection 3111a. is not provided on the side of the As a result, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d of the decoration body 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made longer than when the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d can impart a sense of quality. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative projection 3111a can be emphasized by the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in the second decorative portion 3152, as shown in FIG. is made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a and the like of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted by the rear surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The light can be reflected backward to illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by hot-stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is formed by injection molding of synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted in a predetermined position of a hot stamping device with the front side where the first decorative protrusions 3111a and the like protrude upward. At this time, above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate whose lower surface side is elastic and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. . Then, the hot plate is lowered to a predetermined distance downward from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b), and the hot plate is lowered. The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil stamped) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, a metal decoration portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil stamping region FS1 above (in front of) the second decoration protrusion 3111b of the decoration body 3111 (see FIG. 156(a)). .

The hot plate of the hot stamping device used for forming the metal decoration portion 3111d of the present embodiment has elasticity at the portion of the transfer sheet that contacts the decoration body 3111 to which the metal foil is transferred. Even if the front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a) is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil can be kept in a good state even on a three-dimensional shape such as a curved surface. It can be transferred (foil stamped) with As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment compared to the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the decoration body 3111 is provided with the metal decoration portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by a hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, thereby forming the first decorative protrusion. A decoration body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decoration portion 3111d at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b.

Alternatively, in a state in which the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on the hot stamping device, the hot plate is first pressed using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil). It is lowered to a position (second foil stamping area FS2) that is lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the tip portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b Transfer metal foil. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from the first metal foil, the hot plate is set lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It is lowered to the position (first foil stamping area FS1) to transfer the second metal foil to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156(b)). As a result, the decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration parts 3111d of different colors for the first decoration protrusion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b is formed without masking the intermediate product of the decoration body 3111. be able to.

Moreover, in the above embodiment, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film on the surface of the intermediate product before completion of the decoration body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film is peeled off (laser peeling) at a portion other than the first decorative protrusion 3111a by a laser beam. Alternatively, a decoration body 3111 having a metal decoration portion 3111d on the first decoration protrusion 3111a may be formed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156(c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided not only on the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a but also on the side surface thereof.

The decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear concave portion 3111e that is concave forward from the general surface on the rear side. The rear recessed portion 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. The plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 is made uniform by the recessed portion 3111e after this, so that deformation due to shrinkage of the resin during injection molding can be suppressed.

The rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward at portions corresponding to the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recessed portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact with each other, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visually recognized through the transparent decorative body 3111. - 特許庁

In addition, since the rear recessed portion 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear concave portion 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112, and the light emitted from the front toward the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is blocked by the gap. , the light is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front brightens the rear recess 3111e. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration substrate 3114 are not illuminated, the light from the front will cause the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112, that is, , a first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming a logo are brightened and easily visible from the front.

Furthermore, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f projecting rearward in a columnar shape from the rear surface. The attachment boss 3111f is for attaching the decoration base 3115 to the rear side of the decoration 3111 . The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a portion immediately behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. This makes it difficult to see the attachment boss 3111f from the front (player's side) due to the lens effect of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative projection 3111c is provided in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative projection 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet for back movable decorative body]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape approximately the same size as the outer shape of the decoration 3111 . The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet with a pattern on the rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 at a portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the rear portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. and a second contour portion 3112b provided at a portion between the first decorative projections 3111a corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and formed in duplicate on the decorative body 3111, a first light diffusing portion 3112c provided at a portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decoration body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); A second light provided in a portion inside the first decorative projection 3111a provided doubly on the decoration body 3111 corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 (a portion behind the third decorative projection 3111c). and a diffusion portion 3112d.

In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transparent portion 3112e provided behind the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111. have.

The first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, as shown in FIG. It is a part where light interference fringes are displayed by a hologram. The first outline portion 3112a is formed opaque. In this embodiment, the portion of the hologram in the first outline portion 3112a is the same gold color as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 . In addition, the part imitating the cherry blossoms in the first contour part 3112a is white or pink (pink in this embodiment is the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) It is colored according to the view).). It should be noted that the ink (paint) used for the pattern or the like may be one having glitter particles.

The first outline portion 3112a is located outside and behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. Since it has a portion of the same color (gold in this embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration of the first contour portion 3112a and the metallic decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made difficult to perceive.

Further, the first outline portion 3112a is formed in bright gray or white on the rear surface side. This improves the coloring of the pattern and hologram on the front side. In addition, the light emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be reflected back to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white back surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that the light guide radiation Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit brighter light, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted forward from the light-transmitting portion of the decorative sheet 3112, so that the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be decorated with brighter light. In addition, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be decorated with more uniform light emission.

Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative projection 3111a and the second decorative projection 3111b of the decoration 3111, the rear surface of the decoration 3111 is flat except for the rear recess 3111e. located behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no irregular reflection, and the pattern and hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111. - 特許庁

As illustrated, the second outline portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black linear shape with a predetermined width. The second outline portion 3112b is positioned behind a portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portions 3111d) provided in a double manner on the decorative body 3111. As shown in FIG. In other words, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the two gold metal decoration portions 3111d, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b complements the double metal decoration portion 3111d. The decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine unevennesses capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149(b) and the like, in the first light diffusing portion 3112c, in one petal of the cherry blossom flower modeled by the first decorative portion 3151, the light from the center to the peripheral edge of the petal Predetermined color (this embodiment (Pink) is applied by printing. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from behind to the first light diffusing portion 3112c emits light, the pear-skin pattern of the first light diffusing portion 3112c causes a slight Therefore, the luminous decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom can be given a three-dimensional effect.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine unevennesses capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided entirely inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as indicated by the light and shade hatching in FIGS. It is The second light diffusing portion 3112d has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine unevennesses capable of disturbing light. A plurality of fine unevennesses forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a dot-like pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in translucent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from behind to the second light diffusing portion 3112d emits light, the halftone dot pattern of the second light diffusing portion 3112d emits a predetermined amount of light. The second decorative portion 3152 consisting of characters can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion of the decorative body 3111 that is inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111 is provided with a rear recessed portion 3111e recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed in the front surface of the decorative body 3111 due to the presence of the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 at the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d. state. Due to this gap, the light irradiated from the front to the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decoration sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front is the primary light. The diffusion part 3112c and the second light diffusion part 3112d become bright. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration substrate 3114 are not illuminated, the light from the front will cause the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112, that is, , a first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming a logo are brightened and easily visible from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d, and the decoration of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is formed. It constitutes the rest of the portion 3150 excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111 . In the decorative sheet 3112 of this embodiment, the first outline portion 3112a, the second outline portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of the transparent base sheet. there is The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Also, the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusion film (diffuser film). Note that the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d may be lens films or prism films.

A transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since this transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 emits light from the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and irradiated to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative projection 3111a projecting forward, the metal decoration 3111d is provided only on the front side, and the side faces remain transparent. The light irradiated to the first decorative protrusion 3111a leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As a result, the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e can provide the player with a luminous decoration that looks like a halo is shining on the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d). In addition, the first outline portion 3112a located outside the first decorative projection 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light transmitted through the transmission portion 3112e and radiated to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. Therefore, the patterns and holograms provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be made more visible, and the decorative effect of the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or a hologram can decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111. The decoration of the back rear movable decoration 3110 can be made to look larger. Since the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. At the same time, the performance display device 1600 provided on the rear side displays a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, so that the player can see a performance with a sense of unity, thereby playing the game. The visual impact can be given to the player to attract attention, and the large decoration can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest of the player.

In addition, in the decorative sheet 3112 of the above-described embodiment, the transparent transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first outline portion 3112a may also be provided at a portion behind the metal decoration portion 3111d. As a result, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. , the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be avoided. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a to the rear portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decoration body 3111 passes through the first decorative protrusion of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated with the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be used as the first decorative protrusion. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiating plate of rear movable decorative body]
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent plate-like main body portion 3113a extending left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3113a, and a main body portion 3113a. A plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c that pass through the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decoration board 3114 are inserted; A plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED housing portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the peripheral edge of 3113c, and an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g provided along the rear edge of the leg portion 3113f on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. .

The light guide radiation plate 3113 also has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a when viewed from the front.

The body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward by about 1.5 times the thickness of the body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the rear end of the flange portion 3113b protrudes further rearward than the rear decorative substrate 3114 when assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110 .

The first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner peripheral shape. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the low-transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the region of the first decorative portion 3151, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the region where the first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has a darker shade of pink due to the dots. ing. More specifically, the first LED housing portion 3113c provided in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is positioned closer to the center than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom. The center of the long side of the rectangular inner periphery is positioned on the center line of the petal.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c provided in the second decorative portion 3152 are provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second outline portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. It is For this reason, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to see from the front.

Also, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113 c are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152 at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 . Moreover, when the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the respective first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. It is formed in a By connecting the first LED housing portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to avoid forming a portion thinner than the thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner periphery and penetrates through the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside (within the plate thickness) of the main body portion 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light is A part of the light is reflected straight toward the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the rest of the light passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and passes through the first LED accommodating portion. 3113c will be radiated inside. Then, when the light radiated inside from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches another inner peripheral surface, part of the light on the surface reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the remainder enters the main body 3113a. That is, in the interior of the main body portion 3113a, when the light that is guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c, it is radiated inside the first LED housing portion 3113c. Part of the light is reflected by the portion of the inner peripheral surface and the portion of the inner peripheral surface that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side of the first LED housing portion 3113c. , the amount of light is greatly reduced compared to before passing through.

As such, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a. In addition, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light that is about to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c can be blocked by the first LED 3114a. In the portion where the first LED 3114a is accommodated, light does not pass to the opposite side of the first LED accommodation portion 3113c. Accordingly, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at an optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent the light from being guided to another second decoration part 3152 to be decorated with light emission, and it is possible to surely decorate only the desired second decoration part 3152 in the plurality of second decoration parts 3152 with light emission. .

More specifically, the operation of the first LED housing portion 3113c as described above is described. For example, as shown in FIG. In order to illuminate the decoration, a first LED housing portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each second decoration portion 3152, and light is irradiated toward the inside of the second decoration portion 3152 in each first LED housing portion 3113c. A first LED 3114a is provided so that the In this embodiment, since the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between "i" and "ro" and between "ro" and "ha" are close to each other, they are connected to each other. is a single hole. As a result, the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 does not have a thin portion that is easily damaged. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for decorating the "☆" placed below the "I" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is illuminated, there is a risk that the "I" provided above the "☆" will be illuminated. A first LED housing portion 3113c housing a first LED 3114a for decorating part of the letter "I" with light emission is provided with an extending portion 3113j extending so as to cover the top of the "☆". ing. The extending portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for luminous decoration of "☆" from being guided to the "I" side. As a result, even if "☆" is decorated with light emission, "I" is not decorated with light emission. In addition, the extension portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light for luminous decoration of "i" from being guided to the "☆" side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be reliably illuminated, and the desired rendering effect can be fully exhibited.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference as shown in FIG. 152 and the like. The plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d are provided behind five circular portions resembling stamens provided around the center of the first decorative portion 3151 resembling a cherry blossom. More specifically, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided in each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms behind circular portions resembling stamens positioned on the center line of the petals. Thus, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery and penetrates through the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside (within the plate thickness) of the main body portion 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, the light is A portion of the light is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d so as to diffuse into the inner side of the main body portion 3113a in a fan shape. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a. As shown, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body portion 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d. The light can make the petals more brightly luminous and decorated.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in the shape of a quadrangular pyramid, and is arranged in a row so as to be continuous in the vertical and horizontal directions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are formed on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a except for the portion of the flange portion 3113b, the portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed almost all over the surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly reflect forward the light irradiated in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and radiate the light forward from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a. The light guide radiating plate 3113 of this embodiment is formed so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear when viewed from the front due to the existence of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e.

In addition, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decoration part 3150 made up of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 is changed due to a change or the like, there is no need to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the design change or the like can be easily dealt with, and the cost is reduced. can be suppressed.

The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of a portion of the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the inserted first LED 3114a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f has a surface on the side of the first LED housing portion 3113c that is flush with the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. As a result, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a can be widened, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted into the main body portion 3113a. can be done. In addition, when the leg portion 3113f is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surface thereof abuts the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. can be formed.

The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is provided in a chamfered shape along the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting forward the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f.

The right slider front portion 3113h is for forming a right slider 3117 in cooperation with a right slider rear portion 3115d of the decoration base 3115, which will be described later.

When the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 It is possible to make the surface difficult to see and prevent the appearance from becoming poor. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b that protrudes rearward from the rear decorative substrate 3114, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 extends from the rear decorative substrate. The creeping distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the rear decoration substrate 3114, and the rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. You can prevent it from being lost.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are holes penetrating the main body portion 3113a. The heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the thermal effect on the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed as through holes, the front sides of the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are blocked by the decoration sheet 3112, the decoration body 3111, and the like. However, compared to the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape) that does not penetrate, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. As a result, a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b can be mitigated, and thermal influence on the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the like can be suppressed. In addition, in the first LED housing portion 3113c that is closely connected to each other and the first LED housing portion 3113c that has the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as above, more heat can be released from the first LED 3114a, and a rapid temperature rise can be mitigated.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from behind. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a can be brought as close to the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has leg portions 3113f projecting rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear ends of the leg portions 3113f can be brought into contact with the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. , a gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113 a and the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 . As a result, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the back decoration substrate 3114 can be suppressed to prevent the influence of heat. can be reduced. In addition, the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the substrate main body 3114c of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is set from "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the second The distance to the front surface of one LED 3114a" is desirable. This is because if the gap is smaller than this, the heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back decoration substrate 3114 . If the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a is reduced, so that the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a fear that it will not be possible to decorate it.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides the light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and directs the light forward from the reflecting portion 3113e to substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. Since the light can be radiated forward, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a portion where the rear decorative substrate 3114 is not provided on the rear side of the main body portion 3113a. In other words, even if the size of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is smaller than the size of the body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the body portion 3113a. Therefore, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body portion 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body portion 3113a and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made longer. By increasing the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface, it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the above-described effects.

[5-9d-5. Back-back decoration substrate of back-back movable decoration]
On the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of surface-mounted and side-view type first LEDs 3114a, a plurality of surface-mounted and top-view type second LEDs 3114b, and a surface-mounted type connector 3114g (in FIG. 155(a), one surface mount type connector 3114g is arranged on the right side of the surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114). Each package of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector 3114g has a white (natural color) housing. It is also said to be made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as the natural color). Electronic components 3114 e (see FIG. 155( b )) such as LED driver ICs and resistors are mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 . The back decoration board 3114 has a flat board main body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 154, etc.).

In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114, a first LED 3114a (surface mounting type), a second LED 3114b (surface mounting type), and a connector 3114g (surface mounting A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white resist") over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where the type) is soldered. ) forms a white resist layer. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114, there are provided pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which the area on the rear surface (rear surface) of the substrate main body 3114c where electronic components 3114e (surface mount type) are mounted is soldered. A white resist layer is formed by solid white resist over the entire area except for the area. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114, although not shown, front surface electronic components such as the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are mounted in the vicinity of the front surface electronic components. attributes of front-side electronic components such as the part number of the front-side electronic component, the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is placed (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction), may include the type of electronic parts on the front side) is silk-printed on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable against white printed by Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the part numbers of the back side electronic components and the positions where the back side electronic components are arranged are shown near the back side electronic components such as the electronic component 3114e. Attributes of back-side electronic components such as areas (may also include back-side electronic component shape, back-side electronic component size, back-side electronic component mounting orientation (mounting direction), and back-side electronic component type) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion for white resist) does not stand out against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are arranged as described above. Second, it is a full-color LED that can emit light in multiple colors, and its light emission mode changes in various ways by turning it on (lighting) and turning it off. For this reason, on the surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114, as described above, pads on the surface (front surface) of the substrate main body 3114c to which the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are soldered; A white resist is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire area except for through holes and lands (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A layer is formed, and furthermore, on this solidly coated white resist, a surface side notation part that enables specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is printed with a yellow paint by silk printing, so that multicolor light emission In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side marking part inconspicuous with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED is turned off, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor is turned on (at the time of light emission) , a solid white resist with high reflectance, and a surface-side marking section printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. ) can maintain a high reflectance.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

The rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and has a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between itself and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to have a substantially constant size. In addition, the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that substantially follows the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, which will be described later. It is formed in a size that is formed to be constant. In other words, the rear decorative substrate 3114 is sized to be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115 b of the decorative body base 3115 .

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the first decorative projections 3111a of the decorative body 3111 are located on the central lines of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms at the locations of the first decorative portions 3151 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a. It is provided so that the light is irradiated toward the center of the flower near the tip inside (the metal decorative portion 3111d). As a result, the first LEDs 3114a in the first decorative portion 3151 can light-embellish each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms.

In addition, at the part of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, the first decorative protrusions provided doubly on the decorative body 3111 It is provided near the rear of 3111a so that light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 . As a result, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right sides can be illuminated one by one by the first LEDs 3114a of the second decorative portion 3152 .

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are arranged in a circular portion resembling stamens positioned on the center line of the five petals in the center resembling a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151. located at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151 . As a result, the five central stamen-like portions of the first decorative portion 3151 can be decorated with light emission by the second LEDs 3114b.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type that can irradiate light forward, when the second LED 3114b emits light, the part that imitates the stamen in the central part of the first decorative part 3151 is illuminated more than the other parts. It is possible to emit point light with high luminance, and to strongly attract the player's interest. Therefore, in the light-emitting decoration of the decorative portion 3150, it is possible to provide a portion that emits light in a planar shape by the first LED 3114a and a portion that emits light in a point shape by the second LED 3114b. A variety of lighting effects can be performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

The substrate main body 3114 c is a rigid substrate slightly thinner than the main body portion 3113 a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 . The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (shaded portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is separated inward from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL=1 mm in this embodiment). ing. With this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance from the conductive member (for example, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111) outside the back decoration substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d are increased, thereby discharging static electricity and the like. Insulation against short circuits can be enhanced, and damage to the back decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to a portion within a predetermined distance, and the area of the copper foil 3114d is made as wide as possible. As a result, part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e can be transferred to the copper foil 3114d, so that the heat can be dissipated from the copper foil 3114d. , and the electronic component 3114e can be prevented from being damaged by heat.

In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3114 has a predetermined width for facilitating forward reflection of the light emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the substrate main body 3114c on the light emitting surface side of the side-view type first LED 3114a on the front side. (the area surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153(a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of this embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. (1) The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is close to the vertical line of the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, so that the light emitted to the substrate main body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153(a) and the like, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, and the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is Since they are in contact with each other, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, the light (light amount) emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be increased, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) can be decorated with brighter light emission.

In addition, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts within the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 153(a), etc.). As a result, even if the white coating (white resist) applied to the surface is worn or flipped due to the contact of the leg portion 3113f, only the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. never do. Therefore, the exposure of the copper foil 3114d lowers the insulating properties, thereby suppressing damage due to short circuit such as static electricity.

As shown in FIG. 3113b and 3113b, the outer periphery is double-enclosed, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface from the outside, thereby preventing the appearance from deteriorating. In addition, in a state in which the rear decorative substrate 3114 is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer circumference of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. In addition, the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115 is inserted from the rear into the gap between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Since it meanders around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the rear decoration substrate 3114, and the rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to 10 mm or longer, or to a distance capable of supporting a discharge voltage of 10 kV.

In addition, since the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 allows a member provided behind the rear movable decorative body 3110 (in this embodiment, Light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with the light from the effect display device 1600 or the like provided behind, so that the decorative portion 3150 may be illuminated in an unintended state. It is possible to prevent the rear movable decorative body 3110 from being overwhelmed, and it is possible to reliably perform a desired light emission effect on the rear movable decorative body 3110.例文帳に追加In addition, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the rear decorative substrate 3114 can prevent the rear from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear movable decoration can be prevented. The deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are accommodated from behind with respect to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, provided on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be brought as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as LED driver ICs and resistors mounted on the rear surface. LED driver ICs, resistors, and the like as the electronic parts 3114e are generally black parts. The appearance of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be improved. In addition, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, which cannot be seen from the front, it is not necessary to apply white or other color paint to the electronic component 3114e to make it difficult to see. The cost of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base of back movable decorative body]
The decoration body base 3115 is formed transparent as a whole. The decoration base 3115 includes a plate-shaped cover plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the rear decoration substrate 3114, a flange portion 3115b that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate portion 3115a, and a cover plate portion 3115a that extends through the cover plate portion 3115a. and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the covering plate portion 3115a when viewed from the front.

The covering plate portion 3115a has an outer peripheral shape that substantially follows the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed between the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in a size that In other words, the cover plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. As shown in FIG. Since the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered by the cover plate portion 3115a, it is possible to protect the rear decorative substrate 3114 by preventing other members from coming into contact with the rear decorative substrate 3114 from behind. It is possible to prevent damage to the back decoration substrate 3114 .

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and extends forward beyond the rear decorative substrate 3114. protrudes so that the The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and makes the outer peripheral surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 difficult to see from the outside, thereby improving the appearance. In addition, when the flange portion 3115b is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3115b is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The shortest route from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 can meander around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creeping distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from flowing to the rear decorative substrate 3114 and damaging the rear decorative substrate 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c has a slit-shaped portion that is elongated in the left-right direction and a portion that is larger than the slit-shaped portion. The plurality of openings 3115c allow the heat from the electronic components 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to escape to the outside of the rear movable decorative body 3110. can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 .

In addition, the decoration base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e that slightly protrude from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of projections 3115e are arranged so as to abut on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, near the outer periphery thereof, where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 into contact with the front surfaces of the plurality of protrusions 3115e. . As a result, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily released through the gap between the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main functions and effects of back-rear movable decorative body]
Next, main functions and effects of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 in this embodiment will be described. In the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment, the decorative sheet 3112 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The mounting bosses 3111f of the decoration 3111 are attached to the decoration base 3115 while the back decoration substrate 3114 is sandwiched between them and the base 3115 (see FIG. 143, etc.). As a result, the back movable decorative body 3110 has a relatively thin thickness in the front-rear direction.

The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent plate-like decorative body 3111 and a first decorative projection 3111a, a second decorative projection 3111b, and a third decorative projection 3111c projecting forward, Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first outline portion 3112a with the hologram that displays the pattern and the interference fringes of light, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 Thus, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can impart a three-dimensional effect, and the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c provide a lens effect. and a hologram can give a sense of depth. As a result, even if the back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel thinness, and the decoration effect of the decorative part 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110 is sufficiently obtained. It can be displayed to entertain the player.

In addition, as described above, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, the third decorative projection 3111c, the first outline portion 3112a, and the like can impart a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. , the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the back movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and it can be placed in a more effective part inside the game board 5. By providing the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the pachinko machine 1 that entertains the players can be easily realized. In addition, since the back movable decorative body 3110 can be made thin, it is relatively easy to secure a space for arranging other decorative bodies. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of providing a pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance, a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining a variety of performances, and being highly appealing to players and capable of further differentiation. can do.

The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be conspicuous due to the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the metal decoration portion 3111d can be given a three-dimensional effect and a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position invisible to the player to the appearing position visible to the player, the luxurious decorative part 3150 can be seen, giving the player a premium feeling. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that something good will happen, and to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a flat rear surface of the decorative body 3111, and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative body 3111. , the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated, and the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look larger. In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 of the back movable decorative body 3110 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearing position, the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear displays a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby playing a performance with a sense of unity. It is possible to show the decorations to other people, to give a visual impact to the players to attract their attention, to make them enjoy the large decorations, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the players.

In addition, since the back rear movable decoration 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a behind the metal decoration 3111d of the decoration 3111 and the second outline portion 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112, the metal decoration 3111d and the second outline 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 are provided with the first LED 3114a. The two contoured portions 3112b can make it difficult to see the first LED 3114a from the front, thereby suppressing deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 and sufficiently exhibiting the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 , and the second decoration part 3152 can be decorated with light emission individually. As a result, it is possible to sequentially light-embellish the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, or light-embellish only specific first decorative portions 3151 and second decorative portions 3152. By appropriately lighting up the first decoration part 3151 and the plurality of second decoration parts 3152, it is possible to show the player various lighting effects, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest. can.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 irradiates light in a direction along the surface within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the side-view type first LED 3114a. The light from the first LED is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 because the light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the first LED and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are decorated with light. distance can be increased. As a result, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, even if the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is thin, the decorative body 3111 The decorative sheet 3112 can be evenly and uniformly decorated with light, and the player can be entertained by the good-looking light-emitting decoration. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side-view type first LED 3114a can uniformly illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be increased. The pachinko machine 1 that can be made thin and has the above-described effects can be reliably embodied.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has the first LED 3114a of the side-view type used for planar light emission, and the second LED 3114b of the top-view type. ), it is possible to add a part that emits light with high brightness in a dotted manner by the second LED 3114b to the part that is planarly decorated with the first LED 3114a. As a result, since the light emission of the second LED 3114b can give a sharpness to the light emission effect, the optimum light emission effect corresponding to the game state can be easily presented, and the player can be more entertained and the game can be played. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which a side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light is received by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light enters the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at a position close to the desired part to be decorated with the first LED 3114a, the desired part can be decorated with brighter light, and the effect is even greater. The player can be entertained by the luminous decoration with high brightness.

Furthermore, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the accommodation portion 3113d is provided, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a can be changed to the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodation portion 3113c and the second LED accommodation portion 3113d. , and the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts on the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114, and the main body portion 3113a and the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 are in contact with each other. Since a gap is formed in the back decoration board 3114, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can escape through the gap. It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat. In addition, the gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is defined as “half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a” to “substrate The distance from the front surface of the main body 3114c to the front surface of the first LED 3114a is preferably within the range of ". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, the heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back decoration substrate 3114 . If the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a is reduced, so that the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a fear that it will not be possible to decorate it.

In addition, the rear movable decoration 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear decoration substrate 3114 by the leg portion 3113f, and the decoration base 3115 has a plurality of openings. Since it has the part 3115c, by raising and lowering the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c. Also, the heat from the electronic components 3114e and the like can be released, and the temperature rise of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be suppressed.

A temperature sensor is provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110, and when the temperature of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (the rear decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the movable rear decorative body 3110 moves up and down. may be executed with a higher frequency (probability). As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, so that the surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated, and the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of problems due to heat.

Further, the rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear side with the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b is surrounded by the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 is the light guide radiation due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Since the plate 3113 meanders around the flange portion 3113b, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the rear decorative substrate 3114, and the rear decorative substrate 3114 flows. 3114 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is arranged such that the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit is provided in the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 at a position separated from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL. The predetermined distance SL can also increase the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, improve insulation against discharge of static electricity and short circuits, and suppress damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharge.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. not As a result, the creepage distance EL to the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d is reduced compared to the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if discharge occurs to the rear decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down (moves) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearing position moved downward by driving the back rear driving motor 3126. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the slider 3116 moves up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction tends to accumulate on the surface of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. FIG. Since the decoration body 3111 and the decoration body base 3115 constituting the surface of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 are formed of a synthetic resin with low conductivity, even if a lot of static electricity is accumulated, the surfaces of the decoration body 3110 and the decoration base 3115 are It is difficult to discharge the static electricity accumulated in the whole at once. On the other hand, since the metal decoration portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back rear movable decoration 3110 of the present embodiment, static electricity is likely to accumulate in the metal decoration 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111. However, as described above, the metal decoration 3111d Since the creeping distance EL to the rear decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the rear decorative substrate 3114 is not damaged by the discharge of static electricity, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down, and the rear movable decorative body is provided. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that entertains both the 3110 with a luminous performance decorated with luminescence.

When the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is greater than or equal to a predetermined area (for example, 100 cm 2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration portion 3111d to GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114. FIG.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of back movable decorative body]
Next, referring mainly to FIG. 157, a back movable decoration 3160, a back movable decoration 3170, a back movable decoration 3180, etc., which are different from the back movable decoration 3110 described above, are described. I will explain in detail. FIG. 157(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the configuration of the movable back decoration of the second embodiment different from the movable back decoration of FIG. 142, and (b) is a movable back of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decoration in a cross section, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back rear movable decoration of 4th Embodiment in a cross section.

The back rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment includes a decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and a decorative body 3161 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3161, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(a). A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 and internally emitting light in a direction along the front surface forward, and a light guide radiation plate. 3163 is equipped with a back decoration substrate 3164 on which a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating light in a direction along the front surface are mounted on the front surface.

The decoration body 3161 of the back rear movable decoration body 3160 includes a transparent plate-shaped body part 3161a, a flange part 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the body part 3161a, and a metal body provided on the front surface of the body part 3161a. and a decorative portion 3161c. The body portion 3161a may be flat, or may be decorated with an uneven relief. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

The decoration sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (pattern) is printed. This decorative sheet 3162 has a portion with low transparency in the decoration located in front of the LED 3164a of the rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161 b of the decorative body 3161 .

The light guide radiating plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape of the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED housing portion 3163a into which the LEDs 3164a of the rear decorative substrate 3164 are inserted from the rear, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the rear surface. and a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery thereof is formed in a quadrangular shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only at a predetermined portion. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are provided so as to forwardly reflect the light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a, and are arranged in a fan shape of concentric circles centered on the determined LED housing portion 3163a. . In other words, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b may be configured to reflect light forward from an unspecified direction in the same manner as the reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed to have the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163 . A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164. The side-view type LEDs 3164a are inserted into the LED housing portions 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 from behind. Although illustration is omitted, the rear decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3164 within a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3164 . In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3164 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on its front surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment, the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. are in contact with each other, and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 . As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3160 in the front-rear direction is thin. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164 . As a result, in the rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the rear rear decorative substrate 3164 are covered with the flange portion 3161b, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surfaces thereof from the outside. and make it look good.

In this back rear movable decoration 3160, the flange 3161b extends rearward from the main body 3161a of the decoration 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3164. Therefore, the metal decoration on the front surface of the main body 3161a The creepage distance EL from 3161c to (copper foil of) the back decoration substrate 3164 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back decoration substrate 3164, and the back decoration is achieved. Damage to the substrate 3164 can be prevented.

Thus, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3160, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3164 may be provided.

Next, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(b), the back rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3171 (frame and a light guide radiation plate 3173 which is provided behind the interior decoration 3172 and radiates light forward in a direction along the entire surface inside. and a rear decorative substrate 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a are mounted on the front surface for irradiating the interior of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in the direction along the front surface.

The outer decoration body 3171 of the back rear movable decoration body 3170 includes a main body part 3171a extending forward and backward in a frame shape, a supporting part 3171b protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 3171a in a flat plate shape, and the main body part 3171a. and a metal decorative portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the . The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the interior decoration body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

Although illustration is omitted, the interior decoration body 3172 is formed with an uneven relief-like decoration. The inner decoration 3172 is attached so as to close the front opening of the frame-shaped outer decoration 3171 .

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have approximately the same size as the inner decoration 3172 . The light guide radiating plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the external decoration 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LEDs 3174a of the rear decorative substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflection portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED housing portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery thereof is formed in a square along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc around the predetermined LED accommodating portion 3173a, and is provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflective portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to forwardly reflect the light from the respective LED housing portions 3173a. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b may be configured to reflect light forward from an unspecified direction in the same manner as the reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed to have the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173 . A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3174. The LEDs 3174a are inserted from the rear into the LED housing portions 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As shown in FIG. Although illustration is omitted, the rear decorative substrate 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3174 at a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3174 . In addition, the back decoration substrate 3174 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the rear rear movable decorative body 3170 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted in the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172 are fitted. , and the vicinity of the outer circumference of the rear surface of the inner decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. In the back rear movable decoration 3170, a light guide radiation plate 3173 and a back rear decoration substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the outer decoration 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 is attached to the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer circumference of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3170 in the front-rear direction is thin. In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3170, a gap having the thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173. As shown in FIG.

A main body portion 3171 a of the external decoration body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 . In this back rear movable decoration 3160, the outer circumferences of the inner decoration 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back rear decoration substrate 3174 are covered with the main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration 3171, and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are covered from the outside. to make it look better.

The back rear movable decoration 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3174 with the main body portion 3171a extending rearward of the outer decoration 3171. The creeping distance EL to (copper foil of) the rear decorative substrate 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the rear decorative substrate 3174, and the rear decorative substrate 3174 is discharged. can be prevented from being damaged.

Thus, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that the front surface of the inner decoration 3172 may also be provided with a metal decoration. In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3174 may be provided.

Next, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(c), the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3181 (frame A translucent interior decoration body 3182 that closes the inside), and a back decoration substrate 3183 that is provided behind the interior decoration body 3182 and has a plurality of LEDs 3183a mounted on the front surface that can irradiate light forward. and have.

The outer decoration body 3181 of the back rear movable decoration body 3180 includes a flat plate frame-shaped body part 3181a, a flange part 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the body part 3181a, and the entire surfaces of the body part 3181a and the flange part 3181b. and a covering metal decoration portion 3181c. The metal decoration part 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the external decoration body 3181. As shown in FIG. The metal decoration portion 3181c may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The interior decoration body 3182 is made of a transparent member. The inner decoration 3182 has a flat plate-like main body 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body 3181a of the outer decoration 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange 3181b, and a rearward portion from the outer circumference of the main body 3182a. and a flange portion 3182b extending to the . Although illustration is omitted, the main body portion 3182a has an uneven relief-like decoration formed on substantially the entire surface thereof.

The rear decorative substrate 3183 has an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decoration body 3182 . In other words, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed to have a size such that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 . A plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3183 . Although illustration is omitted, the rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3183 at a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3183 . In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3183 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on its front surface (both sides).

In the rear movable decorative body 3180 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the inner decorative body 3182 and the rear decorative substrate 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. The rear movable decorative body 3180 has a front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3181 a of the outer decorative body 3181 , and the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decorative body 3182 contacts the outer decorative body 3181 . It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181 b of the outer decoration 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decoration 3182 . In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration 3181. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 prevents the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 and the rear decorative substrate 3183 from being seen from the outside.

In this back rear movable decoration 3180, the flange 3182b of the inner decoration 3182 is provided inside the flange 3181b of the outer decoration 3181 provided with the metal decoration 3181c. Since the outer circumference of the back decoration board 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body part 3182a is separated from the inner circumference of the flange part 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182, the metal decoration part 3181c is separated from the back decoration board 3183 (copper The creeping distance EL to the foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration part 3181c can be prevented from flowing to the back decoration substrate 3183 and damaging the back decoration substrate 3183. can do.

Thus, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It should be noted that the front surface of the body portion 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182 may also be provided with a metal decoration portion. Further, in the rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. Figure 158(a) is a perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit in the back unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . Figure 159 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-left effect unit and the right-bottom effect unit viewed from the front, and Figure 160 is the bottom-left effect unit and right-bottom effect unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the movable configuration of the back bottom left effect unit and the back bottom right effect unit.

The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back back effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 . The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 are positioned on both left and right sides of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the state assembled on the game board 5. They are visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 will be described. The back-bottom-left effect unit 3200 includes a transparent bottom-left rotating decoration 3201 having an axial shaft 3201a projecting rearward, and a transparent bottom-left rotating decoration provided behind the bottom-left rotating decoration 3201. 3202, and a back bottom left decorative substrate provided behind the back bottom left decorative body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). 3203 is provided behind the lower back left decoration board 3203, and the lower back left rotating decoration 3201 is rotatably attached and the lower back left decoration 3202 is attached. and a unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the .

In addition, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 is attached to the back bottom left driving motor 3205 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotating shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotating shaft of the back bottom left driving motor 3205. a spur-gear-shaped drive gear 3206, a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 that meshes with the drive gear 3206 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and the first transmission gear 3207. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 rotatably attached to the unit base 3204 and the second transmission gear 3208 are meshed with each other and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotary ornament 3201. and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 on the lower side than the back lower left decorative body 3202 .

The back-bottom left-rotation decoration 3201 is formed in a shape that imitates a cherry blossom. A shaft 3201a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left rotary decoration 3201 is formed to a length that penetrates the lower back left decoration 3202, the lower back left decoration substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The back bottom left decoration 3202 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms having the same size as the back bottom left rotation decoration 3201 and rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it has been made.

The lower back left rotating decoration 3201 and the lower left back decoration 3202 are transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the bottom left rotation decoration 3201 and the bottom left decoration 3202 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in random directions. In one petal of the cherry blossom that is modeled by the decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202, the pachinko machine 1 (lower in transparency) is arranged so that the shading increases from the center to the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the view of the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is printed, but the bottom left rotation The surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203 arranged behind the lower back left decoration 3202 can be seen through the decoration 3201 and the lower back left decoration 3202 (also at the periphery of the petal). It's like

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The back bottom left decorative board 3203 is provided with a back bottom left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The back bottom left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative board 3203. As shown in FIG. When the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a, the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back bottom left drive motor 3205, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment rotates the back side through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotary decoration 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back bottom left decoration substrate 3203, so that the back bottom left rotating decoration 3201 and the back bottom left decoration 3202 are illuminated. It can be decorated with luminescence.

In addition, surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203, and areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged Front-side notation indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components (further, the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components.) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower back left rotation decoration 3201, a transparent lower back left decoration is printed. 3202, and the back bottom left decoration board 3203 are arranged in order, so that the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back bottom left decoration board 3203 by silk printing is applied to the back bottom left decoration body 3202, Then, it is possible to visually recognize through the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, and in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters and symbols are displayed in the predetermined paint color. , shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white) in each package, and the connector is The housing is made of white resin (also called natural color, which is recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)).

Next, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 will be described. The back bottom right effect unit 3250 includes a transparent back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 having a rearward projecting shaft 3251a and a back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 provided behind the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251. 3252, and a back-bottom-right decorative board provided behind the back-bottom-right decorative body 3252, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). 3253 is provided behind the lower back right decoration board 3253, the lower back right rotating decoration 3251 is rotatably attached and the lower right ornament 3252 is attached, and the back rear effect unit 3100 and a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the .

In addition, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 is attached to the back bottom right drive motor 3255 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotation shaft of the back bottom right drive motor 3255. a spur-gear-shaped driving gear 3256, a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 meshing with the driving gear 3256 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and the first transmission gear 3257 meshing. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and the second transmission gear 3258 are meshed and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3251a of the back lower right rotation ornament 3251. and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 on the lower side than the back lower right decorative body 3252 .

The lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. A shaft 3251a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower right rotary decoration 3251 is formed to have a length that penetrates the lower right lower back decoration 3252, the lower right decoration substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The back bottom right decorative body 3252 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 in the front-to-rear direction and rotating such that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it has been

The lower back right rotating decoration 3251 and the lower right back decoration 3252 are transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the lower back right rotation decoration 3251 and the lower back right decoration 3252 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. In one petal of the cherry blossom that is modeled by the decorative body 3251 and the lower right decorative body 3252, the pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the view of the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is applied by printing, but the back bottom right rotation The surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253 arranged behind the lower back right decoration 3252 can be seen through the decoration 3251 and the lower back right decoration 3252 (also at the periphery of the petal). It's like

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The back bottom right decorative board 3253 is provided with a back bottom right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The back bottom right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259 a that protrudes forward and is detected by a back bottom right detection sensor 3253 a of the back bottom right decorative board 3253 . When the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the back bottom right rotation decoration 3251 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back bottom right driving motor 3255, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment rotates the back side through the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotary decoration 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back-bottom-right effect unit 3250 can cause the back-bottom-right rotating decoration 3251 and the back-bottom-right decoration 3252 to emit light by causing a plurality of LEDs of the bottom-right decoration board 3253 to emit light.

In addition, surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged, etc. Front-side notation indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components (further, the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components.) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower back right rotating decoration 3251, a transparent lower back right decoration is printed. 3252, and the back bottom right decoration board 3253 are arranged in order, so that the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back bottom right decoration board 3253 by silk printing is applied to the back bottom right decoration body 3252, Then, it is possible to visually recognize through the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, and in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters and symbols are displayed in the predetermined paint color. , shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 are each made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connectors are made of resin. The housing is made of white resin (also called natural color, which is recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)).

A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), connectors (surface mount type), a bottom left detection sensor 3203a (lead type), and a bottom left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) are provided on the front surface (front surface) of the bottom left decorative board 3203 and the bottom right decorative board 3253. A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white A white resist layer is formed by the white resist. Pads to which a lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) and a lower back right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) are soldered are attached to the back surfaces (rear surfaces) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. A white resist layer is formed of solid white resist over the entire area except holes, lands, and the like. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253, although not shown, near surface side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface side. The part number of the electronic component, the attributes of the front electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front electronic component is placed (In addition, the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting orientation of the front electronic component (mounting direction), may include the model number of the front side electronic component. Printed by silk printing. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253, although not shown, in the vicinity of the back side electronic components such as the lower back left detection sensor 3203a and the lower back right detection sensor 3253a, Attributes of back-side electronic components such as the part number of the back-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the back-side electronic component is placed (In addition, the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the Mounting direction (mounting direction), may include the type of electronic components on the back side. It is printed by silk printing on the top.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion for white resist) does not stand out against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the front surfaces (front surfaces) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253 are covered with the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs and connectors are soldered. In the above, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), and further, this solid By silk-printing the surface side notation part that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light on the applied white resist with yellow paint, the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is white when turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side marking part inconspicuous with respect to the resist, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), the solid coating with high reflectance The surface (front) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is formed by a combination of white resist and a surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. can maintain a high reflectance.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

[5-9f. Behind the scenes production unit]
Next, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162(a) is a front perspective view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-bottom view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit. Fig. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the lifting mechanism for the back-lower middle effect unit and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the lower-back middle decoration unit of the lower-back middle effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the lifting and lowering of the lower back decoration body unit by the lower back middle elevating mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. FIG. 168(a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration of the back-lower middle decoration unit in the back-lower middle effect unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a table showing the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor; FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, the arrangement of the LEDs of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle effect unit.

The back lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 . The back bottom middle effect unit 3300 is attached behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 . The back-lower middle effect unit 3300 includes a back-lower middle decoration unit 3320 having a back-lower middle-rotating decorative body 3310 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-lower middle decoration unit 3320 for raising and lowering the back-lower middle decoration unit 3320. A lifting mechanism 3350 is provided.

The lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower-back middle effect unit 3300 is formed in a regular hexagon shape when viewed from the front. This back-bottom-middle rotary decoration 3310 has six number decorations "1" to "6" formed in a relief shape on the entire surface, which are arranged in circles at every angle of 60 degrees in a clockwise direction centering on the center. placed on the circumference. This back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a transparent inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 in a back-lower-middle decorative body unit 3320 described later, a front-end side of a back-lower-middle first decorative substrate 3322, and a substrate fixing member 3323 on the rear surface. has a concave portion 3311 that can accommodate the .

The back-bottom-middle rotary decoration 3310 is formed transparently, and the outer peripheral portion of each of the six number decorations protrudes forward, and furthermore, there is a rib portion that connects the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring shape. It is formed to protrude forward. A metallic decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed on the protruding outer peripheral portion and rib portion. In other words, the metal decoration portion 3310a having metallic luster is arranged near the back and middle rotary decoration body 3310. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion where the metal decoration portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed are integrally formed with the back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, but the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion may be molded separately from the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the molded outer peripheral portion and rib portion and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be assembled. In this case, metallic decorative portions 3310a having metallic luster are formed on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion.

The metal luster of the metal decoration part 3310a can impart a high-class feeling, and the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be conspicuous, and the presence of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further emphasized. It has become. The metal decoration portion 3310a is formed by hot-stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). The back bottom center rotating decoration 3310 has a metal decoration 3310a formed only on the outer peripheral portion and the rib protruding to the front surface thereof, and the side surface of the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310 is not formed with the metal decoration 3310a at all. do not have. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decoration part 3310a of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 to the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 is made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3310a from flowing to the back-bottom first decoration substrate 3322 and damaging the back-bottom first decoration substrate 3322. Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

In addition, as described above, the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 is formed with a rib portion projecting forward to connect the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring shape. The back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310 extends from the peripheral edge side portion (peripheral edge side root portion) where the rib protrudes to the front surface of the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, to the front peripheral edge of the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, and then to the back bottom middle. The rotary decoration 3310 is formed to be transparent up to the rear edge of the side surface, and has a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 extends from the peripheral edge side portion (peripheral edge side root portion) where the rib protrudes to the front surface of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 to the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310. A pear-skin-like pattern is formed by a plurality of ridges extending short and linearly in random directions up to the rear edge of the side surface of the underside middle rotation decorative body 3310, and the rib portion is the underside middle rotation decoration. The shading increases from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) protruding to the front surface of the body 3310 toward the front peripheral edge of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 and the side trailing edge of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the transparency is low) is applied by printing.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the lower back center decoration unit 3320 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 provided behind the back lower center rotary decoration 3310 and an inner lens (diffusion lens ) 3321, and the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) is mounted with a plurality of LEDs. A substrate fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a which is attached to an inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 so as to sandwich the middle first decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side and protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and the shaft of the substrate fixing member 3323. A rotary base 3324 having an axial hole 3324a into which the part 3323a is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable and which is attached to the rear side of the back lower middle rotary ornament 3310 is provided.

The surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 is provided with a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first decoration board 3322 in the back and inside are difficult to see clearly from the player's side. In addition, the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 may have a lens cut on the front surface and the back surface (may be formed into a polyhedron), or may be replaced with the surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 . A lens cut may be applied to the back surface (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

In addition, the lower inner decoration body unit 3320 includes an area detection piece 3325 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extends in a semi-circular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference that is coaxial with the area detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 protruding from the rotating base 3324 and a spur-shaped rotating gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotating base 3324 are provided.

Further, the underside inner decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the rotation base 3324 and has a penetrating circular opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass. A transparent lower back middle decoration body 3328 in which a plurality of linear grooves are formed radially from the opening 3328a toward the outer periphery with the center of the circular opening 3328a as the center point, and the back of the back lower middle decoration body 3328. A second decoration substrate 3329 in the back and a second decoration substrate 3329 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “surface (mounting surface)”), and a second decoration substrate in the back 3329, and a plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 (lead type) capable of detecting the area detection piece 3325, and attached to the front surface of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the back and bottom, and detecting the position detection piece 3326. and a detectable location sensor 3331 (lead type).

In addition, the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the back bottom middle second decoration board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft part 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached, and the back bottom middle decoration body 3328 is attached. a movable base 3332 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3332; A drive gear 3334 in the form of a spur gear meshing with a rotary gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a back-lower-center lifting mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. and a lifting slider 3336 slidably guided in the vertical direction by a slide rail 3360 .

The front end sides of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321, the first decoration board 3322, and the board fixing member 3323 are located between the rotary decoration body 3310 and the rotation base 3324 in the assembled state. , and is housed in the concave portion 3311 of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 and is not in contact with either the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 or the rotation base 3324 . By appropriately lighting the plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322, the numerical decoration (relief) portion of the rotary decorative body 3310 can be decorated with light. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Also, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decoration substrate 3329 are of the surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The area detection piece 3325 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 with a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327 . As shown in FIG. 168(a), the area detection piece 3325 has numbers "3", "4", and "5" from between the number decorations "2" and "3" on the back bottom center rotary decoration 3310. It is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees around the axis of rotation through the numeral decorations to between the numeral decorations "5" and "6".

A plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 each protrude rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection pieces 3325 . Each position detection piece 3326 is provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each is positioned in the center of the number decoration of the back and middle rotary decoration 3310. . In this embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape with a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis. There is an interval of 2×β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) around the rotation axis between the position detection piece 3326 (see FIG. 168(a)). .

A plurality of (three in this case) region specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to line up at an angular interval of θ degrees (60 degrees) centering on the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 . The three area identification sensors 3330 are provided in clockwise order of a first area identification sensor 3330a, a second area identification sensor 3330b, and a third area identification sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 detect the values of "3", "4", and "5" in a state in which the decoration "1" of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 is positioned directly above the center of rotation. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 168(a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from the lower portion of the rear surface. This elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the back, bottom, and middle elevating mechanism 3350 . The back-bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting the rotation position.

The back-lower middle decorative body unit 3320 rotates the back-lower middle-rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotating gear 3327 by rotating the driving gear 3334 with the back-lower middle rotating driving motor 3333. can be done. In addition, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first lower back middle decoration board 3322 and the second lower back middle decoration board 3329, respectively, so that the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 And the lower back inner decoration 3328 can be decorated with light.

In addition, surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322, areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged, etc. Front-side notation indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components (further, the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components.) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and an inner lens (diffusion lens ) 3321, and the rear lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 are arranged in this order, the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 by silk printing is the color of the inner lens. (diffusion lens) 3321, and through the back and middle rotary decorative body 3310, it is possible to visually recognize, and in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, the predetermined paint Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side marking portion) can be distinguished from each other by the color of .

In addition, each package of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

A white resist solution is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the first decoration substrate 3322, except for pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which multiple LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the formed white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back surface (rear surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322, the entire area excluding pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which connectors (surface mount type) are soldered is coated with a solid white resist. A resist layer is formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the first decoration substrate 3322, the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components, the surface Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic components are placed (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting (may include the type of electronic parts.) is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white. . Although not shown, on the rear surface (rear surface) of the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322, the part numbers of the rear electronic components and the positions where the rear electronic components are arranged are displayed in the vicinity of the rear electronic components such as connectors. Attributes of the back-side electronic components such as the indicated area (may also include the shape of the back-side electronic components, the size of the back-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic components, and the model of the back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

In addition, the part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs, area-specific sensors 3330, and position-specific sensors 3331 to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decoration substrate 3329, and surface-side electronic components are arranged. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position of the surface-side electronic component (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component ) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back middle second decoration substrate 3329 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and a transparent lower back middle decoration body 3328 Since the second decoration board 3329 in the back lower middle is arranged behind the , the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decoration board 3329 in the back lower middle is printed by silk printing. Through the decoration 3328, it is possible to visually recognize characters, symbols, shapes (that is, attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side description portion) can be discriminated.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 on the back and inside are each packaged in a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It has become.

Pads to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), area identification sensors 3330 (lead type), and position identification sensors 3331 (lead type) are soldered are mounted on the surface (front surface) of the second decoration substrate 3329 under the back, A white resist is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire area except for through holes and lands (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). layers are formed. Pads to which the region specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), the position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type), and a plurality of connectors (surface mounting type) are soldered on the back surface (rear surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329, A white resist layer is formed of solid white resist over the entire area except through holes, lands, and the like. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329, the part number of the surface-side electronic components, the surface Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic components are placed (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting (may include the type of electronic parts.) is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white. . Although not shown, on the rear surface (rear surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329, the part number of the rear electronic component and the position of the rear electronic component are displayed near the rear electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of the back-side electronic components such as the indicated area (may also include the shape of the back-side electronic components, the size of the back-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic components, and the model of the back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion for white resist) does not stand out against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. For this reason, pads, through-holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered, are provided on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decoration substrate 3329, as described above. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") over the entire area except , On the solid white resist, a surface-side notation portion that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multi-color light is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, thereby extinguishing the full-color LED capable of emitting multi-color light. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side marking part inconspicuous with respect to the white resist at times, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (during light emission), a solid surface with high reflectance The first decoration substrate 3322 in the back side and the second decoration in the back side are combined by the combination of the applied white resist and the surface side marking part printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. A high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the substrate 3329 can be maintained.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164 , the back-bottom middle lifting mechanism 3350 extends to the left and right, and both ends thereof are attached to the back-bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back-bottom right effect unit 3250 . 3352 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3351 so that the rotating shaft protrudes rearward; A gear-shaped driving gear 3353, a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 that meshes with the driving gear 3353 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and meshes with the first transmission gear 3354. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a and an elevation cam gear 3356 which has a driving pin 3356b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity thereof and which is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 at the upper center in the left-right direction.

In addition, the base end extending in the left-right direction is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and the driving pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction of the back, bottom, and middle lifting mechanism 3350. a second slit 3357b extending in the longitudinal direction on the distal end side of the first slit 3357a and into which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , and a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip thereof; and a rear lower middle relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

Further, the rear-lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having an elevating slit 3359a extending vertically through which an elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 in the decoration unit 3320 is inserted; A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the driving gear 3353 from the rear, and the tip end of the lifting arm 3357 moves upward in the moving direction (front side). and a spring 3362 biasing the lift arm 3357 to pivot in a clockwise direction with respect to view.

The rear bottom center elevation drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The lifting arm 3357 is rotatably mounted on the right side of the lifting cam gear 3356 at the same height as the center of the lifting cam gear 3356 . The elevating arm 3357 extends leftward from the elevating cam gear 3356 at its distal end.

The back-bottom middle relay board 3358 includes the back-bottom middle first decoration board 3322, the back-bottom middle second decoration board 3329, the area specifying sensor 3330, the position-specifying sensor 3331, the back-lower middle rotation drive motor 3333, and the back-lower middle elevation drive motor. 3352 , the connection between the rear lower middle elevation detection sensor 3358 a and the production drive board 1720 is relayed.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. An elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower inner decoration body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359 . The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction of the front cover 3359 . With the elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360, it is possible to support the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 so as to slide straight up and down.

When the driving gear 3353 is rotated by the driving motor 3352, the lifting cam gear 3350 moves through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the lifting cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. Then, the drive pin 3356b that revolves by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a into which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back center decoration body unit 3320 can be lifted and lowered together with the back lower center rotary decoration body 3310 via the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 which is slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

Next, a detailed description will be given of the movement of the lower back center rotating decorative body 3310 and the lower back center decorative body unit 3320 in the lower back center effect unit 3300. FIG. In a normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 is in a lowered position where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the front end of the elevating arm 3357 in the back-lower-middle lifting mechanism 3350 is positioned lower than the base-end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the front end moves the back-lower-middle lifting mechanism 3358 to the back-lower-middle lifting mechanism. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167(a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 is positioned below its center of revolution, and is positioned near the proximal end of the first slit 3357a of the elevation arm 3357. . More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if an urging force is applied to rotate the lifting arm 3357 in the clockwise direction by the spring 3362, the line of force of the urging force is applied to the drive pin 3356b in contact with the first slit 3357a. , the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356 passes through, so the elevation cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 does not revolve, so that the elevation arm 3357 does not rotate, and the underside decoration unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position due to the biasing force of the spring 3362. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the rear lower/middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the proximal end portion of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate clockwise due to the biasing force of the spring 3362, the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the driving pin 3356b causes the lifting cam gear 3356 to rotate counterclockwise. try to rotate. At this time, the driving pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the proximal end of the lifting arm 3357, but the driving pin 3356b is in contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. , the driving pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the upward movement of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the normal state, the lower back middle production unit 3300 has the uppermost number decoration among the plurality of number decorations in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 placed inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is positioned and can be visually recognized well from the front (player's side) (see FIG. 111, etc.). In addition, in a normal state, the lowermost numeric decoration is positioned behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the lower back center first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower center third decoration are located behind the first starting port 2002. By illuminating the LED of the second decoration substrate 3329, in addition to the luminous decoration of the back, bottom, and middle rotary decorations, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be luminous decorated (see FIG. 120, etc.). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the back, bottom, and middle elevation drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are rotated. As a result, the elevation cam gear 3356 rotates clockwise, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 revolves clockwise. As the driving pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a in contact with the driving pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the driving pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the lifting arm 3357 rotates clockwise around the proximal side so that the distal side of 3357 moves upward.

As the lifting arm 3357 rotates clockwise, the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the distal end side of the lifting arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. As a result, the lower back inner decoration body unit 3320 moves upward via the lifting pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end side. At this time, since the lifting arm 3357 is biased clockwise by the spring 3362, the biasing force assists the upward movement of the underside decoration unit 3320. The load applied to the lift drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When the drive pin 3356b further revolves clockwise and reaches near the end on the base end side of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the back, bottom, middle, and lift drive motor 3352 stops, and at the same time, the drive The revolution of pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the highest position and is in the raised position.

When the underside decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if a force acts to rotate the elevating arm 3357 counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320, the line of force of that force hits the first slit 3357a. Since the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356 passes through the contacting drive pin 3356b, the elevation cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevation arm 3357 does not rotate, and the underside decoration body unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position. The self-weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the rear lower/middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

In addition, in the state in which the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevation cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the proximal end portion of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320, the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b causes the elevating cam gear 3356 to move clockwise. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the driving pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the proximal end of the lifting arm 3357, but the driving pin 3356b is in contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. , the driving pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the underside decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the state in which the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (furthermore, the game ball rolling in the game area 5a B is located above the rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided in the center accessory 2500 that prevents B from rebounding from the outside to the inside of the center frame (surrounding wall portion 2501), and is positioned forward (the player All the numeral decorations can be seen well from the side) (see Fig. 201).

In order to return the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 from the raised position to the lowered position, the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction by the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352, and the lifting arm 3357 is rotated. rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the rear-lower-middle elevation detection sensor 3358a of the rear-lower-middle relay board 3358, the rear-lower-middle elevation driving motor 3352 stops the rotation of the driving gear 3353. , the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in the normal state of the lowered position (furthermore, the center position that prevents the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a from rebounding from the outside of the center frame (surrounding wall part 2501) to the inside) The rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the overlapping position when viewed from the front in the pachinko machine 1).

The back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the back-bottom middle-rotational driving motor 3333 in the back-bottom middle-decorative body unit 3320 to rotate the drive gear 3334 , thereby rotating the back-bottom middle-rotation decoration body 3310 via the rotation gear 3327 . can be rotated about a longitudinal axis. By rotating the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310, the six number decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The back-bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the back-bottom middle rotation driving motor 3333 in any position such as the lowered position or the raised position of the back-bottom middle decoration body unit 3320 .

In the normal state, one of the plurality of (here, six) number decorations in the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 is positioned directly above the center of rotation (stop position). is doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), in a state where the numeral decoration “1” on the back-bottom-middle rotary decoration 3310 is positioned upward, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is used to identify the first area. Three area-specific sensors 3330, a sensor 3330a, a second area-specific sensor 3330b, and a third area-specific sensor 3330c, are used for detection. is not detected.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. When the numeral decoration “1” is set to the stop position, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected to the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotating base 3324 as described above. is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168(b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the number decoration "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ±30 degrees.

In addition, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is not detected, the number decoration "2" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the number decoration "3" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are non-detecting, the numeral decoration of "4" is displayed within a range of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located inside.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are non-detecting, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numeral decoration of "5" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a is non-detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the number decoration "6" is in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

In this way, the combination of detection and non-detection of the three area identification sensors 3330, ie, the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c, allows any numerical decoration to identify the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether it is positioned within the stop area including.

Since the back-bottom middle rotation driving motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and rotates 30 degrees, the back-bottom middle rotation driving motor 3333 is rotated by 30 degrees. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired number decoration on the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 at the stop position. However, when such control is performed, it is necessary to recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the stop position region by the three region specifying sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of 3310 becomes complicated and the load increases. Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection strips 3326 are provided. This suppresses the complication of the control for stopping the rotation of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 and reduces the load.

More specifically, when it is desired to stop the desired number decoration on the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 at the stop position, the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 detect the desired stop position. If the combination satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted in the rotational direction by an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a. ing. In this state, the desired digit is 30 degrees of rotation away from the stop position.

In this state, when the back and middle rotary decoration 3310 is further rotated by α/2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees) which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 is separated from the position specifying sensor 3331. Then, the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detection. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detected is taken as the origin. Then, after rotating β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), the rotation of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation driving motor 3333 is stopped, thereby obtaining the desired number. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

In the above description, the stoppage of rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is explained by the angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the back-lower middle-rotation drive motor 3333, which is a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, in a state in which the combination of the three area specifying sensors 3330 satisfies the desired stop position, when the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates 13 steps further, the position detection piece 3326 is Moving away from the location sensor 3331, the location sensor 3331 becomes non-sensing. When the angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detected is set as the origin, the rotation of the lower back center rotary decoration body 3310 by the back lower center rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped when rotating 20 steps, thereby stopping the desired number decoration. It can be stopped exactly in position.

Next, the light-emitting decoration in the back-lower middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the back-lower middle production unit 3300 is a back-lower-middle primary decoration unit 3320 mounted with a plurality of LEDs for luminous decoration of the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 . It has a decoration substrate 3322 and a second decoration substrate 3329 in the lower back. A plurality of LEDs of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back side are located behind the six number decorations in the rotary decoration in the back side 3310, and each number decoration can be illuminated independently.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back center second decoration substrate 3329 are positioned behind the portion outside the plurality of number decorations in the back lower center rotating decoration 3310, and are located outside the back lower center rotating decoration 3310. The periphery can be decorated with luminescence.

As described above, this back-lower middle effect unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three area specifying sensors 3330. Therefore, based on the detection of the area specifying sensors 3330 By properly illuminating a plurality of LEDs on the back and inside first decoration substrate 3322, only specific numeral decorations are illuminated, or each numeral decoration is illuminated in a different color, and rotated. It is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, when the lower back center decoration body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the number decoration on the lower side of the lower back center rotary decoration body 3310 is positioned behind the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, By illuminating the corresponding portion of the LED on the back and middle first decoration substrate 3322, the first starting port 2002 can be decorated with light. Thereby, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002 . In addition, when the game ball B has won the first start port 2002, the LED of the first decoration board 3322 in the back and bottom is emitted (or one emission mode is determined from among a plurality of emission modes to emit light. ).

As described above, according to the lower back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions can detect an area having a length covering three stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position are provided, and three area identification sensors 3330 for detecting the area detection pieces 3325 and one position identification sensor for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensors 3331 and 3331 are provided, when the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates, the three area-specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area-detecting pieces 3325 sequentially increase from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. By repeating this process, all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detection once, and the area detection pieces 3325 are detected even until the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. By combining the area specifying sensors 3330 that are connected to each other, it is possible to roughly grasp the current rotational position of the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 .

Since the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area-specifying sensors 3330 causes the back-lower middle rotation. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, and the deviation of the stop position can be corrected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 having a plurality of stop positions as few as possible.

In addition, since the stop position of the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back-lower middle-rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to entertain the performance (movable performance) by the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is increased, the stop position deviation can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotary decoration 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased compared to the case where the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is reciprocated. can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest, and the rotation of the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can be strongly attracted. It is possible to amuse the player and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of number decorations are provided on the front surface, the rotation of the roulette is stopped at an arbitrary stop position after rotating in circles. Since it is possible to show such an effect to the player, it is possible to excite the player depending on whether or not the desired number decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position , and the number of stop positions of the back and middle rotary decorations 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasp of stop positions) of the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. The back-bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the back and middle rotary decorative body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. It is possible to further increase the positioning accuracy of the stop position.

In the above-described embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (together with) the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. Without limitation, the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member such as the drive gear 3334 that rotates with the rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 .

[5-9g. Backstage production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170(a) is a front perspective view of an upper back effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper back effect unit in the back unit. Fig. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. be. Fig. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back elevating decorative body unit in the upper back effect unit and is seen from the front. It is a diagram.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory view showing from the front the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotary decoration in the back-up production unit. FIG. 176(a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the upper lifting decorative body unit in the upper rear effect unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a raising/lowering decoration body unit, and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotary decoration body from a front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory view showing the decoration substrate from the front in a state in which the upward lifting decorative body unit is moved to the appearing position in the upward rear effect unit.

The back up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back back effect unit 3100 . As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back side effect unit 3400 includes a transparent back side front rotary decoration body 3410 having an axis shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the back side, and a back side front rotary decoration body. A transparent back upper front decoration body 3421 extending to the left and right through which the axial shaft 3410a of the 3410 penetrates in the center in the left-right direction, and a front surface (hereinafter referred to as "surface (mounting)" provided behind the back upper front decoration body 3421. A back top front decorative board 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a back top front decorative body 3421 provided behind the back top front decorative board 3422 and on the front side. and a unit base 3423 that rotatably supports the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410.

In addition, the rear effect unit 3400 is mounted between a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space with the rear surface of the unit base 3423, and a unit base 3423 having a rotation axis in front of the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. A rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425 attached so as to protrude into the space of the rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and meshing with the drive gear 3426 A rotating gear 3427 having a spur gear-like shape and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and having a detecting piece 3427a projecting forward, and a back upper front decoration substrate 3422. and a rear upper rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type) attached to the rear surface of the rotary gear 3427 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, the rear side effect unit 3400 includes a rear side lifting drive motor 3429 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotating shaft protrudes into the space between the front unit base 3423, and a rear side lifting drive motor 3429. A spur-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of a motor 3429, a gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and a portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a penetrates the rear cover 3424. an elevation cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to a rear cover 3424, having a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape and a detection piece 3431c projecting forward from near the outer circumference of the gear portion 3431a; , the back top elevation detection sensor 3432 (lead type) attached to the rear surface of the back top front decoration board 3422 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431, and the tip where the back top rear rotation decoration 3440 is provided. A rear upper elevating decoration unit 3450 whose base end side is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction so that the upper side moves up and down by revolving the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431; A spring 3433 is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and a spring 3433 biasing the elevating decorative body unit 3450 so that the front end side of the elevating decorative body unit 3450 rotates in a direction to move upward. and a rod-like restricting member 3434 that restricts the movement of the .

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is a transparent transparent body through which an axial shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the transparent upper back rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates at the center. A rear upper back decorative body 3451 and a rear surface provided behind the upper rear decorative body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). An upper rear decorative board 3452 and a rear upper rear decorative body 3451 are attached to the front surface from the rear of the upper rear decorative board 3452, and are rotatably mounted to a unit base 3423. and a lift unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft 3440a.

In addition, the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 includes a back upper rear rotation driving motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotation shaft of the back upper rear rotation driving motor 3454. A spur gear-shaped driving gear 3455 attached to the driving gear 3455, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 meshing with the driving gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456 A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457 that is rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453 and the shaft shaft 3440a of the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3457 and a spur-like rotating gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

Furthermore, the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 is attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the driving gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458 from behind. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the lifting unit base 3453 so as to cover the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back top front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back top effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. An axial shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 penetrates the back upper front decoration 3421, the back upper front decoration substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and extends through the unit base 3423 and the rear. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 . The back upper front decoration 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotating decoration 3410 placed in the center in the horizontal direction, and the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it is rotated so that it is positioned in the

The back top front decoration substrate 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the back top front decoration body 3421 in the left-right direction. By causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top decoration substrate 3422 to emit light, the back top rotary decoration 3410 and the back top front decoration 3421 can be decorated with light. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The front upper back rotary decoration 3410 and the front upper back decoration 3421 are transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is such that the shading (transparency decreases) of one petal of the cherry blossom flower modeled by the decorative body 3421 increases from the center of the petal toward the periphery. That is, a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) are applied by printing, and the upper back front decoration 3421 The pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is made to have a constant shading in the area excluding the area corresponding to the rotating decorative body 3410 (so that the shading is lighter than the shading at the periphery of the petals and the transparency is high). ) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed by printing, but the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 And through the front upper back decoration body 3421 (also at the peripheral edge of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the front upper back decoration substrate 3422 arranged behind the front upper back decoration body 3421 can be visually recognized. ing.

Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decoration board 3422, and areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decoration substrate 3422 is printed with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and behind the transparent back upper front rotary decoration 3410, a transparent back upper front decoration 3421, Since the back upper front decoration substrates 3422 are arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decoration substrate 3422 by silk printing is printed through the back upper front decoration body 3421. , or through the back upper front decoration 3421 and the back upper front rotary decoration 3410, and in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, if the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side writing portion) can be distinguished from the predetermined paint color.

In addition, each package of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). ing.

A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a back rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back up elevation detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the surface (front surface) of the back top front decoration board 3422. A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") over the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. of resist layer is formed. A plurality of connectors (surface mount type), a rear rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a rear elevation detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear upper front decorative board 3422. A white resist layer is formed of solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, and the like. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back upper front decoration board 3422, although not shown, near the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs, the part numbers of the surface side electronic components, the surface side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back upper front decoration board 3422, there is an area indicating the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged near the back side electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of back-side electronic components such as (further include shape of back-side electronic components, size of back-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of back-side electronic components, model of back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white.

The unit base 3423 has a through hole 3423a through which the upper back rotation detection sensor 3428 and the upper back elevation detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the upper back decoration board 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is coaxial with the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410, and has a columnar support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface, and an arcuate shape through which the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is inserted. and an elongated slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453. As shown in FIG.

A detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 is detected by a rear upper rotation detection sensor 3428 that penetrates through a through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. The elevation cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semicircular arc shape, and a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward is provided at a portion that protrudes outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453 of the rear elevation decorative body unit 3450 . Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the rear up elevation detection sensor 3432 that penetrates through the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

The back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. A shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the upper back rotary decoration 3440 penetrates the upper back decoration 3451, the upper back decoration substrate 3452, and the elevation unit base 3453, and extends through the elevation unit base 3453. extends to the rear of the The back top rear decoration 3451 stacks two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 in front and behind, and rotates so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it has been made.

The back top decoration substrate 3452 can make the top back rotary decoration 3440 and the back top decoration 3451 emit light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper decoration substrate 3452 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 are transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the back top post-rotation decorative body 3440 and the back top post-rotation decoration 3451 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. In one petal of the cherry blossom that is modeled by the decorative body 3440 and the rear upper back decorative body 3451, the pachinko machine 1 (lower in transparency) is arranged so that the shading increases from the center to the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the view of the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is applied by printing. Through the decoration body 3440 and the back top decoration body 3451 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the top back decoration substrate 3452 arranged behind the top back decoration body 3451 can be visually recognized. It's like

In addition, surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper decorative substrate 3452, and areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged Front-side notation indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components (further, the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components.) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top decoration substrate 3452 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent back top rotation decoration 3440, a transparent top back decoration is printed. 3451 , and the back top decoration substrate 3452 are arranged in order, so that the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top decoration substrate 3452 by silk printing is applied to the top back decoration body 3451 . or through the upper back decoration 3451 and the upper back rotary decoration 3440, and when the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized. , characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side marking portion) can be discriminated from a predetermined paint color.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper decoration board 3452 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white) in each package, and the connector is The housing is made of white resin (also called natural color, which is recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)).

A white resist solution is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the back upper decoration substrate 3452 except for pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist"). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back top decoration board 3452, a white resist layer is formed by solidly coating white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through-holes, lands, etc. where connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear upper back decoration board 3452, although not shown, near the surface-side electronic components of the plurality of mounted LEDs, the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components, the surface-side electronic components Attributes of front-side electronic components such as areas indicating positions to place ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back upper decoration board 3452, although not shown, there are areas near the back side electronic components of the connector, such as the part numbers of the back side electronic components and the positions where the back side electronic components are arranged. Attributes of back side electronic components (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic components, the size of the back side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back side electronic components, and the model of the back side electronic components may be included.) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so that the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is rotatably inserted through the base end side (the right end side in the front view). and an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. In the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted. The motor cover 3460 has a front surface decorated with cherry blossoms.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion for white resist) does not stand out against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of the front upper decoration substrate 3422 and the rear upper decoration substrate 3452 has the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs etc. are soldered. , A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), and further, this solid coating On the white resist that has been applied, the surface side notation part that allows the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light to be specified is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white color is displayed. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side marking part inconspicuous with respect to the resist, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (during light emission), it is a solid white color with high reflectance. and the surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. A high reflectance can be maintained.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

Next, the movement of the back top front rotary decoration 3410, the back top rear rotation decoration 3440, and the back top lifting decoration unit 3450 in the back top effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state of the back side effect unit 3400, the detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 attached to the shaft 3410a of the back side front rotary decoration 3410 is detected by the back side rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back top front rotation drive motor 3425, the back top front rotation decoration body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, in a normal state, the back upper elevating decoration unit 3450 having the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440 provided on the tip side extends in the left-right direction, and the whole except the tip side is It is positioned behind the back upper front decoration 3421 and is in a retracted position that is invisible from the front (see FIG. 176(a)). In addition, the part of the back upper elevating decoration unit 3450 protruding leftward from the back upper front decoration 3421 is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 in the state assembled to the game board 5, Not visible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431 c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the rear elevation detection sensor 3432 . In addition, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is located below the center of revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453 of the rear elevation decoration unit 3450. positioned.

More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431 b of the elevation cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453 b extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 . As a result, even if a force acts to rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450, the force is not applied. Since the line of force passes through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b in contact with the slit 3453b, the elevation cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 does not revolve either, the elevation unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back upper elevation decoration body unit 3450 rotates from the retracted position so that the tip side moves downward. no. Therefore, the weight of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back upper elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating unit base 3453 and the elevating cam gear 3431 .

In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 rotates counterclockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b through the drive pin 3431b. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b abuts the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, so that the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented. .

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear elevation driving motor 3429, the elevation cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. As a result, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise. As the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. The vertical lifting unit base 3453 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3453a by the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450 so that the front end side of the lifting unit base 3453 moves downward.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise and moves above the straight line connecting the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b It slides in the slit 3453b in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b revolves further clockwise and reaches near the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the rear elevation drive motor 3429, and simultaneously, the drive pin 3431b stops revolving.

As a result, the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 via the elevating unit base 3453 is stopped, and the front end side of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 including the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 is moved. , the state of the appearance position moved downward from the back upper front decoration body 3421 (see FIG. 176(b)). In this appearance position state, since the tip side of the upper back elevating decoration unit 3450 is positioned lower than the front upper back decoration 3421 from the vicinity of the center, the upper back rotation decoration 3440 and the like are visible from the front. becomes possible.

In the state in which the back-upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is at the appearing position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the driving pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 . As a result, even if a force is applied to further rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450, the line of force of that force hits the slit 3453b. Since the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 passes through the contacting drive pin 3431b, the elevation cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevation unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the rear elevation decoration unit 3450 rotates counterclockwise so that the tip side moves downward from the appearance position. , and the weight of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back upper elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating cam gear 3431 .

In addition, when the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearing position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3431b into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate further counterclockwise due to the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 rotates clockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b through the driving pin 3431b. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b abuts the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, so that the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented. .

When the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position side, the back upper back rotating decoration body 3440 provided on the tip side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back upper elevating decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the rear upper rear rotation decoration is rotated via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. Body 3440 can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 176(b)). Therefore, when the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 is visible from the front, by rotating the drive gear 3455 by the back top rear rotation driving motor 3454, the rotating back top rear rotary decoration 3440 can be visually recognized. .

When the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the opposite direction by the back upper elevating drive motor 3429, so that the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 moves up and down. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates clockwise, and the tip side of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the rear elevation detection sensor 3432, by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the rear elevation driving motor 3429, the rear elevation decoration unit 3450 is moved to the retracted position. can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the upper back elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assisting the rotation of the upper elevating back decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, thereby elevating the upper back elevating. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 177, the back side effect unit 3400 of the present embodiment is provided with the back side front decoration substrate 3422 behind the back side front rotary decoration 3410 and the back side front decoration 3421. By appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decoration substrate 3422 to emit light, the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 can be decorated with light. In addition, since the back top decoration board 3452 is provided behind the back top back rotary decoration body 3440 and the back top back decoration body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back top back decoration board 3452 are appropriately emitted. By doing so, it is possible to light-embellish the back top rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top rear decorative body 3451 .

At this time, in a state in which the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearing position side, the LED of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 is caused to emit light, so that the back upper rear rotation decoration which is light-emitting decorated. The body 3440 and the back top decoration 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back left production unit]
Next, the back-left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the rear left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. Fig. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decoration unit of the rear left effect unit and viewed from the front. Fig. 182 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decoration unit of the rear left effect unit. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the back-left effect unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-left decoration unit in the back-left effect unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100 . The back-left rendering unit 3500 includes a transparent back-left rotating decorative body 3510 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-left left-back decoration rotatably supporting the back-left rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side. A body unit 3520 and a back left driving unit 3550 mounted in the back box 3010 for rotating the upper end side of the back left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided.

The back-left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back-left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The back-rear-left rotating decorative body 3510 has an axial shaft 3510a projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 182).

As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the rear left decoration unit 3520 includes a transparent rear left decoration 3521 through which the shaft 3510a of the transparent rear left rotation decoration 3510 penetrates at the center, and a rear left decoration 3521. A rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the rear left decoration body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”); A front cover 3523 attached to the rear side of the rear left decoration body 3521 from the rear of the left decoration substrate 3522 and rotatably supporting the shaft 3510a of the rear rear left rotary decoration body 3510, and the front cover 3523. and a movable base 3524 which is attached to the rear side of the rear left drive unit 3550 and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the rear rear left drive unit 3550 .

In addition, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a rear rear left rotation driving motor 3525 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that the rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a rear rear left rotary drive motor 3525. A drive gear 3526 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of a left rotation drive motor 3525 and a spur gear 3526 engaged with the drive gear 3526 and attached to the rear end of an axial shaft 3510a of a back rear left rotation decoration 3510 A gear-shaped rotary gear 3527 is provided.

The rear left decoration 3521 of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is composed of two cherry blossoms having the same size as the rear left rotating decoration 3510, and the rear petals are arranged so that the front petals overlap each other. It is formed in a shape as if rotated so as to be positioned between A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back-left rotating decoration 3510 and the back-left left decoration 3521 are transparent, and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the back left rotation decorative body 3510 and the back left left decoration body 3521 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in random directions. The pachinko machine 1 (lower in transparency) is arranged so that, in one petal of a cherry blossom flower modeled by the decorative body 3510 and the rear-left decorative body 3521, the shading becomes darker (lower in transparency) from the center of the petal toward the periphery. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is printed, but the reverse side is rotated to the left. Through the decoration 3510 and the back left decoration 3521 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decoration substrate 3522 arranged behind the back left decoration 3521 can be visually recognized. It's like

Attributes of front-side electronic components such as part numbers of front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522, and areas indicating positions where front-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 by silk printing. Since the rear left decorative substrate 3522 is arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 by silk printing is applied to the rear left decorative body 3521 and then the rear left decorative substrate 3521 . It is visible through the rear left rotation decoration 3510, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state in which a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes are displayed in the predetermined paint color. (that is, attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated.

In addition, each package of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

The front surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 is formed by applying a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist"). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522, a white resist layer is formed by solidly coating a white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522, although not shown, the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components, the surface-side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522, although not shown, an area indicating the part number of the rear electronic component and the position where the rear electronic component is arranged is located in the vicinity of the rear electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of back-side electronic components such as (further include shape of back-side electronic components, size of back-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of back-side electronic components, model of back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. For this reason, the front surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 is coated with a white resist liquid over the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered, as described above. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid white resist”) formed by the above method, and furthermore, a large amount of white resist is formed on the solid white resist. The front surface side that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the yellow surface side is displayed against the white resist. In addition to being able to make the writing part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance A high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 can be maintained by combination of the surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape that combines a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear left decorative body 3521 in a front view and a portion extending upward from the upper left of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of the portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed in the shape of a shallow container that opens rearward.

The movable base 3524 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523 , and the upper end side thereof extends upward beyond the upper end of the front cover 3523 . The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3524b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape away from the shaft hole 3524a. A support shaft 3551a of a reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3524b protrudes forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525, the left back back decoration body unit 3520 rotates the left back back decoration body 3510 through the rotation gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. Can be rotated around an axis of orientation.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the back left driving unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a for rotatably supporting the back left decoration unit 3520. , a vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front surface of a reinforcing plate 3551 and attached inside the back box 3010; a unit cover 3553 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552; A back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 mounted so that its shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear mounted on the rotation shaft of the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 3555 and .

In addition, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with a motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to a unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. , a drive pin 3557b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c projecting forward from near the front periphery of the gear portion 3557a; A first slit 3558a extending horizontally into which a driving pin 3557b of 3557 is slidably inserted, and an operating pin 3524b of a movable base 3524 in the back rear left decoration unit 3520 extending horizontally below the first slit 3558a. has a second slit 3558b into which is slidably inserted, and a link member 3558 attached between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553 so as to be vertically slidable.

Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that biases the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevation cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. 3553, and a rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 (lead type) and

A white resist solution is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the rear left relay board 3561, excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist") formed by the coating. Also, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-left relay board 3561, the part numbers of the front-side electronic components, the front-side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. Although not shown, on the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear left relay board 3561, the part numbers of the rear electronic components, the rear electronic components, and the like are displayed in the vicinity of the rear electronic components such as the connector, the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562, and the like. Attributes of the back side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the components are placed (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic components, the size of the back side electronic components, the mounting direction of the back side electronic components (mounting direction), the back side electronic components ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. The rear left relay board 3561 is not a decoration board and is not mounted with LEDs, but is a board provided in the game board 5. By functioning as a board), when the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, the light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is designed to be able to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3551a protrudes forward from the top. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration body unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is positioned near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape that opens rearward.

The elevation cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 with the drive pin 3557b passing through the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560 . The detection piece 3557c is detected by a rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically and has a first slit 3558a near its upper end and a second slit 3558b near its lower end. The spring 3559 has its lower end attached to the link member 3558 and its upper end attached to the partition plate 3560 .

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular arc through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 is inserted. The rear left relay board 3561 relays the connection between the rear left decoration board 3522, the rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear left elevation drive motor 3554, the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for

Next, the operation of the rear-left effect unit 3500 will be described. 183 and 184(a), the back-left effect unit 3500 normally has a back-left rotating decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side (tip side). The unit 3520 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back left decorative body unit 3520 (back left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 and cannot be visually recognized from the front (player side). It's becoming

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left effect unit 3700, and the back-left elevating drive motor. Only part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131, etc.). In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the portion facing the front of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is covered with the portion outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3, and the player can invisible from the side (see Figure 135).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557 c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 . Also, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 is positioned directly below the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3557 and positioned near the left end of the link member 3558 in the first slit 3558a. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is positioned at the lower movement end, and the operating pin 3524b positioned to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is It is positioned near the left end of the link member 3558 in the second slit 3558b.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is biased upward by the spring 3559, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 with the first slit 3558a is Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b through the first slit 3558a due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 never moves upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the rear left decoration unit 3520 (back left rotary decoration 3510) moves from the retracted position about the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the back rear left elevation driving motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the elevation cam gear 3557 and the like.

In addition, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 tries to move upward by the biasing force of the spring 3559, the lift cam gear 3557 tries to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the leftward direction, but the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. cannot revolve, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevation cam gear 3557, and the rotation of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 rotates the motor gear 3555 counterclockwise, the elevation cam gear 3557 rotates counterclockwise via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. As a result, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 revolves counterclockwise. When the drive pin 3557b revolves counterclockwise, it slides rightward in the first slit 3558a while pressing upward the inner surface of the first slit 3558a, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will happen.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the rear left decoration unit 3520 protruding below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. , and while the operating pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, the movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a, and the rear left decorative body unit 3520 moves. It rotates counterclockwise from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3559, and the load applied to the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 is reduced.

In this way, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a, so that the rear left rotary decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves rightward. As a result, the back-left rotating decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-front-left effect unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (player's side).

In the back-left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the rotation of the back-left decorative body unit 3520 occurs when the elevation cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184(b)). In the state of the first appearing position, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position.

When the elevation cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the first appearing position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, and the counterclockwise rotation of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is stopped, resulting in the state of the second appearing position (Fig. 184 (c) )). In the state of the second appearing position, the back left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated counterclockwise by about 74 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

The drive pin 3557b is located directly above the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3557 when the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearing position. In this state, the weight of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 causes a force to rotate the left rear decorative body unit 3520 in the clockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a. The link member 3558 tries to move downward through the operating pin 3524b of 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the driving pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is positioned right above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevation cam gear 3557 does not rotate, so the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates from the second appearing position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the back left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the back left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, and the like.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearing position, the elevation cam gear 3557 is further rotated counterclockwise so that the driving pin 3557b contacts the left end of the first slit 3558a. Also good. As a result, when the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 attempts to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a by its own weight, the link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b. A force acting from the one slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the elevation cam gear 3557 to rotate counterclockwise. At this time, the driving pin 3557b tries to revolve to move leftward, but since the driving pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the driving pin 3557b cannot revolve. Without this, the downward movement of the link member 3558 is blocked, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be unrotatably locked in the state of the second appearing position.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear left rotation decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). becomes visible from

In this back left decorative body unit 3520, the driving gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotating driving motor 3525, so that the back left rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated via the rotating gear 3527 meshing with the driving gear 3526. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 183). Therefore, when the back left rotating decorative body 3510 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotating driving motor 3525, the rotating back left rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3555 is rotated by the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction of , the link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557, and as the link member 3558 moves downward, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 moves. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562, the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear rear left elevation driving motor 3554 is stopped, thereby retracting the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520. It can be returned to the state of position.

As shown in FIG. 183, the back-left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with a back-left decorative substrate 3522 behind the back-left rotary decoration 3510 and the back-left left decoration 3521. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back left decoration substrate 3522 to emit light, the back left rotating decoration 3510 and the back left decoration 3521 can be decorated with light. At this time, in a state in which the rear left decoration body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the LED of the rear left decoration substrate 3522 is caused to emit light, so that the light emission decoration is performed. The back-left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back-left left decorative body 3521 can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Back rear right production unit]
Next, the back-right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185(a) is a front perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit. Fig. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the right rear effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the right rear rear effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. Figure 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back right decoration unit of the back rear right effect unit and viewed from the front. Figure 189 is an exploded view of the back right decoration unit of the back rear right effect unit. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the back-right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-right decoration unit in the back-right effect unit.

The back right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back back effect unit 3100 . The back-right direction effect unit 3600 includes a transparent back-right rotating decorative body 3610 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-right decorative body 3610 rotatably supporting the back-right rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side. A body unit 3620 and a rear right drive unit 3650 mounted in the back box 3010 for rotating the upper end side of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided.

The back-right rotating decorative body 3610 of the back-right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The back rear right rotation ornament 3610 has a columnar shaft 3610a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 188).

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the rear right decoration unit 3620 includes a transparent rear right decoration 3621 through which the shaft 3610a of the transparent rear right rotation decoration 3610 penetrates at the center, and a rear right decoration 3621. A rear right decoration substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decoration body 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”); A front cover 3623 attached to the rear side of the rear right decoration body 3621 from the rear of the right decoration substrate 3622 and rotatably supporting the shaft 3610a of the rear rear right rotation decoration body 3610, and the front cover 3623. and a movable base 3624 which is attached to the rear side of the rear right driving unit 3650 and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the rear rear right driving unit 3650 .

In addition, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a rear rear right rotation driving motor 3625 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623; A drive gear 3626 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of a right rotation drive motor 3625 and a drive gear 3626 meshing with the drive gear 3626 and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 A gear-shaped rotating gear 3627 is provided.

The rear right decoration 3621 of the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 is composed of two cherry blossoms having the same size as the rear rear right rotating decoration 3610, and the rear petals are arranged so that the front petals overlap each other. It is formed in a shape as if rotated so as to be positioned between A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back-right rotation decoration 3610 and the back-right rotation decoration 3621 are transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the rear right rotation decoration 3610 and the rear right rotation decoration 3621 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. The pachinko machine 1 (lower in transparency) is arranged so that, in one petal of a cherry blossom flower modeled by the decorative body 3610 and the rear-right decorative body 3621, the shading becomes darker (lower in transparency) from the center of the petal toward the periphery. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the view of the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is applied by printing. Through the decoration body 3610 and the back right decoration body 3621 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decoration substrate 3622 arranged behind the back rear right decoration body 3621 can be visually recognized. It's like

Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 by silk printing. Since the rear right decorative substrate 3622 is arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 by silk printing is applied to the rear right decorative body 3621 and then the rear right decorative substrate 3621 . It is visible through the rear right rotation decorative body 3610, and in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters, symbols, and shapes are displayed in the predetermined paint color. (that is, attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated.

In addition, each package of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

The surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 is formed by applying a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist"). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear-right decorative board 3622, a white resist layer is formed by solidly coating a white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622, although not shown, the part numbers of the front electronic components, the front electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear-right decorative board 3622, although not shown, there is an area indicating the part number of the rear-side electronic component and the position where the rear-side electronic component is arranged near the rear-side electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of back-side electronic components such as (further include shape of back-side electronic components, size of back-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of back-side electronic components, model of back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 is coated with a white resist solution over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a “solid white resist”) formed by the above method, and a multi-layer coating is formed on the solid white resist. By printing the surface side notation part that can identify the full-color LED capable of emitting color by silk printing with yellow paint, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the yellow surface side against the white resist In addition to being able to make the writing part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance A high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 can be maintained by combining the surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape that combines a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear right decorative body 3621 in a front view and a portion extending upward from the upper right of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of the portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3623 is shaped like a shallow container that opens rearward.

The movable base 3624 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623 , and the upper end side thereof extends upward beyond the upper end of the front cover 3623 . The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. A support shaft 3651a of a reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3624b protrudes forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear right rotation driving motor 3625, the right rear rear decoration body unit 3620 rotates the right rear rear decoration body 3610 through the rotation gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. Can be rotated around an axis of orientation.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a for rotatably supporting the rear right decoration unit 3620. , a vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and attached inside the back box 3010, a vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652, and a unit cover A back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is attached to the upper front surface of the 3653 so that the rotation shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. and a motor gear 3655 having a spur gear shape.

In addition, the rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a gear portion 3657a in the shape of a spur gear meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lift cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from near the outer circumference, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b that extends left and right below 3658a and into which the operation pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decoration unit 3620 is slidably inserted. and a link member 3658 attached so as to be vertically slidable between.

Further, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 that biases the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevation cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. 3653, and a back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 (lead type), and a lower base 3663 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and to which the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

On the front and rear surfaces of the rear right relay board 3661, a white resist solution is applied over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist") formed by the coating. In addition, although not shown, on the surface (front) of the rear-right relay board 3661, the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components, the surface-side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear-right relay board 3661, although illustration is omitted, the part numbers of the rear-side electronic components, the rear surface, and the like are displayed in the vicinity of the rear-side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors and the rear-right elevation detection sensor 3662. Attributes of the back side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic components are placed (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic components, the size of the back side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back side electronic components, the back side (This may include the model number of the electronic component.) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white. . The rear right relay board 3661 is not a decoration board and is not mounted with LEDs, but is a board provided in the game board 5. By functioning as a board), when light emitted by LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is designed to be able to contribute to the production.

A reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3651a protrudes forward from the upper portion. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the supporting shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is positioned near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically with substantially the same length from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed into a shallow container shape that opens rearward.

The elevation cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 with the drive pin 3657b passing through the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660 . The detection piece 3657c is detected by a back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a near its upper end and a second slit 3658b near its lower end. The spring 3659 has its lower end attached to the link member 3658 and its upper end attached to the partition plate 3660 .

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular arc through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 is inserted. The rear-right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the rear-right decoration board 3622, the rear-right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear-right elevation drive motor 3654, the rear-right elevation detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for

Next, the operation of the back-right effect unit 3600 will be described. The back right effect unit 3600, in a normal state, has a back right rotating decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side (front end side), as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191(a). The unit 3620 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is positioned behind the back front right effect unit 3800, and is invisible from the front (player side). It's becoming

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the right front decorative body 3040 and the right rear effect unit 3800, and the whole is forward (player side). is not visible from

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657 c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 . Also, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 is positioned directly below the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3657 and positioned near the right end of the link member 3658 in the first slit 3658a. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is positioned at the lower movement end, and the operating pin 3624b positioned to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is It is positioned near the right end of the link member 3658 in the second slit 3658b.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is biased upward by the spring 3659, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 with the first slit 3658a is Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b through the first slit 3658a due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 never moves upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 (rear rear right rotation decoration 3610) moves from the retracted position about the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevation cam gear 3657 and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 tries to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the lift cam gear 3657 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the rightward direction, but the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. cannot revolve, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevation cam gear 3657, and the rotation of the rear right decoration body unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated counterclockwise by the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654, the elevation cam gear 3657 rotates clockwise via the gear portion 3657a. drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise. When the drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise, it slides leftward in the first slit 3658a while pressing upward the inner surface of the first slit 3658a, and the link member 3658 moves upward. becomes.

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decoration unit 3620 projecting below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. As the operating pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, the movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, and the back right decoration unit 3620 retreats. It rotates clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 191(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3659, and the load applied to the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is reduced.

In this way, the rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the rear right rotary decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves leftward. As it moves upward, the back-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 moves to the left of the back-front-right effect unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the back right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotation position of the back right decorative body unit 3620 when the elevation cam gear 3657 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted position state). is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191(b)). In the state of the first appearing position, the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated clockwise by about 44 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

When the elevation cam gear 3657 further rotates clockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides rightward within the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to just above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, and the clockwise rotation of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is stopped, resulting in the state of the second appearing position (FIG. 191(c)). ). In the state of the second appearing position, the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated clockwise by about 74 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

The drive pin 3657b is located directly above the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3657 when the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearing position. In this state, the weight of the right back decoration unit 3620 causes a force to rotate the right back decoration unit 3620 about the support shaft 3651a in the counterclockwise direction. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the driving pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is positioned just above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevation cam gear 3657 does not rotate, so the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the second appearing position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the rear right elevation driving motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevation cam gear 3657, and the like.

In addition, in the state where the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevation cam gear 3657 may be further rotated clockwise to bring the drive pin 3657b into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the rear right decorative body unit 3620 attempts to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a by its own weight, the link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b. A force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b causes the elevation cam gear 3657 to rotate clockwise. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b cannot revolve. Without this, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is blocked, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be unrotatably locked in the state of the second appearing position.

In a state in which the rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear rear right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). becomes visible from

In this rear right decoration body unit 3620, the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, so that the rear rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated through the rotation gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 190). Therefore, when the rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is visible from the front (player's side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the right rear rotating driving motor 3625, the rotating right rear rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3655 is rotated by the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction of , the link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657, and as the link member 3658 moves downward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 moves. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear rear right elevation detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear rear right elevation driving motor 3654 is stopped, thereby retracting the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620. It can be returned to the state of position.

As shown in FIG. 190, the back-right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with a back-right decorative substrate 3622 behind the back-right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back-right right decorative body 3621. By appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-right decorative substrate 3622 to emit light, the back-right rotating decoration 3610 and the back-right decoration 3621 can be decorated with light. At this time, in a state in which the rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the LED of the rear rear right decoration substrate 3622 is caused to emit light. The back-right rotating ornament 3610 and the back-right right ornament 3621 can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192(a) is a front perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 194 is an exploded back front left decoration unit in the back front left effect unit. and is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 195(a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front left effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front left effect unit.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back box 3010 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 . The back-front-left effect unit 3700 includes three back-front-left decorations in order from the top: a first back-front-left decoration unit 3710A, a second back-front-left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back-front-left decoration unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710 .

In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is slanted so that the upper end side moves to the right. Also, the shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from those of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back-front-left decoration unit 3710 of the back-front-left effect unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. A shutter support member 3712 having a shape is arranged vertically on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 and supported so as to be rotatable about an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3730 is provided.

The back front left decoration unit 3710 closes the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from behind, and is provided behind the back front left decoration 3713 and the back front left decoration 3713 in the form of a transparent plate. The back front left decorative substrate 3714 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) and the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are covered from behind. A rear cover 3715 attached to the front cover 3711 and attached to the front surface of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is provided.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, a back front left A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and a support plate 3716 are attached so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis. It is provided with a link member 3719 that rotates, and an opening/closing slider 3720 that slides vertically as the link member 3719 rotates to open and close the shutter unit 3730 .

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is formed in a shape (a shape stylized as a "pine tree") in which the corners are rounded by tilting the letter "convex" to the right. The front surface of the front cover 3711 is provided with a portion in which a metal decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is formed. In other words, a portion having a metal decorative portion 3711a with metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3711. As shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3711a with metallic luster is molded integrally with the front cover 3711, but is molded separately from the front cover 3711 so that the molded portion and the front cover 3711 may be assembled.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3711a can impart a high-class feeling, and the front cover 3711 can be made conspicuous, so that the presence of the front cover 3711 can be emphasized. The metal decoration portion 3711a is formed by hot-stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). The front cover 3711 has a metal decorative portion 3711a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decorative portion 3711a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3711 at all. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be increased by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3711. Therefore, the metal decorative portion 3711a It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front left decoration substrate 3714 and damaging the back front left decoration substrate 3714 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712 a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3733 of the shutter members 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from near the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening/closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731 . The shutter member 3731 includes a flat plate-like shutter 3732 extending in the left and right direction, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3732 in the left and right direction, and a left shaft portion 3733 protruding from the tip of the shaft portion 3733 on the left side in the direction perpendicular to the axis. and a crankshaft 3734 extending cylindrically in the direction.

The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711 . The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733 .

The shaft portion 3733 of the shutter member 3731 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, so that the shutter member 3731 can rotate around the shaft portion 3733 in the horizontal direction. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening/closing slider 3720. As shown in FIG.

Although illustration is omitted, the back front left decorative body 3713 has characters, items, logos, etc. in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It has a pattern. The back front left decorative body 3713 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing light from the LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 . The surface of the back front left decorative body 3713, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the arranged back front left decorative board 3714 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. The back surface of the back front left ornament 3713 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron) together with the front surface of the back front left ornament 3713 . may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front left decorative body 3713 is formed transparent, the surface (mounting) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 arranged behind the back front left decorative body 3713 is passed through the back front left decorative body 3713 . surface) can be visually recognized.

Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 and areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 is printed with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and the back front left decoration substrate 3714 is arranged behind the back front left decoration body 3713 which is transparent. Therefore, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is open, the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 by silk printing is applied through the back front left decoration body 3713. In a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface side inscription part is attributes of the front-side electronic components shown) can be discriminated.

In addition, each package of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

The front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is coated with a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist"). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered is coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, although not shown, near the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs, the part numbers of the surface side electronic components, the surface side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, the part numbers of the back side electronic components and the positions where the back side electronic components are arranged are displayed in the vicinity of the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. Attributes of the back-side electronic components such as the indicated area (may also include the shape of the back-side electronic components, the size of the back-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic components, and the model of the back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is coated with a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a “solid white resist”) formed by the above method, and a multi-layer coating is formed on the solid white resist. By printing the surface side notation part that can identify the full-color LED capable of emitting color by silk printing with yellow paint, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the yellow surface side against the white resist In addition to being able to make the writing part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance A high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be maintained by combining the surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction, and has a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. The support plate 3716 has a portion bent rightward on the front end side attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. there is The support plate 3716 also has a columnar support pin 3716a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719. As shown in FIG.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can rotate about the axis in the horizontal direction around the support pin 3716a. The link member 3719 has a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with the support pin 3716a inserted therebetween, and a second connection portion 3719a connected to the opening/closing slider 3720. A connecting portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3720 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and has a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is vertically slidably inserted.

Next, the operation of the back front left effect unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state of the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732 of the closed state. In this normal state, the back front left ornament 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player's side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (the plurality of shutters 3732) has a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front left decorative body 3713. It is

In a normal state, the back front left driving solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3720 is positioned at the upper movement end, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is positioned above the shaft portion 3733 .

In this normal state, when the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. move to As the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates around the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connection portion 3719b opposite to the first connection portion 3719a moves downward. As the second connection portion 3719b of the link member 3719 moves downward, the opening/closing slider 3720 connected to the second connection portion 3719b moves downward.

When the opening/closing slider 3720 moves downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates around the shaft portion 3733 . As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 faces the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front cover 3711 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left ornament 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195(b)).

After that, by deenergizing (OFF) the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger, which had been moving upward, moves downward due to the biasing force of the spring. The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left effect unit 3700 of the present embodiment, the shutter unit 3730 is opened and closed by the back front left driving solenoid 3717 , so that the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730 is changed to the back front left decorative body 3713 . The decoration (picture) can be switched to a different decoration (picture), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, since the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be illuminated when the shutter unit 3730 is closed. , the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 are caused to emit light, thereby the back front left decorated with light emission. The ornament 3713 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front left effect unit 3700, there are three back front left decoration units: a first back front left decoration unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration unit 3710C. 3710 can independently open and close the shutter unit 3730 and can be decorated with light emission, so that by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, a variety of effects can be provided to the player. I can show you.

[5-9k. Back front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196(a) is a front perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back-front-right decoration unit in the back-front-right effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 198 is an exploded view of one back-front-right decoration unit in the back-front-right effect unit. and is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 199(a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010 so that the upper part near the right end is positioned behind the back front right decorative body 3040. . The back-front-right effect unit 3800 has three back-front-right decorations in order from the top: a first back-front-right decoration unit 3810A, a second back-front-right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back-front-right decoration unit 3810C. It is composed of body unit 3810 .

In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is slanted so that the upper end side moves to the left. The shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is slightly different from those of the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back front right decoration unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating back and forth and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. A shutter support member 3812 having a shape is arranged vertically on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812, and each member is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3830 is provided.

The back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from behind, and is provided behind the back front right decorative body 3813 and the back front right decorative body 3813 in the form of a transparent plate. The back front right decorative substrate 3814 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) and the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are covered from the rear. A rear cover 3815 attached to the front cover 3811 and attached to the front surface of the back rear right effect unit 3600 is provided.

Further, the back front right decoration body unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816. A transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger of the right drive solenoid 3817 and a support plate 3816 are attached so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis. It has a rotatable link member 3819 and an opening/closing slider 3820 that slides vertically as the link member 3819 rotates to open and close the shutter unit 3830 .

The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 is formed in a shape (a shape stylized as a "pine tree") in which the corners are rounded by tilting the letter "convex" to the left. A front surface of the front cover 3811 is provided with a portion in which a metal decorative portion 3811a having metallic luster is formed. In other words, a portion having a metallic decorative portion 3811a with metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3811. As shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3811a with metallic luster is molded integrally with the front cover 3811, but is molded separately from the front cover 3811 so that the molded portion and the front cover 3811 may be configured to assemble.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3811a can impart a high-class feeling, and the front cover 3811 can be made conspicuous, so that the presence of the front cover 3811 can be emphasized. The metal decoration portion 3811a is formed by hot-stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). The front cover 3811 has a metal decorative portion 3811a formed only on its front surface, and no metal decorative portion 3811a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3811 at all. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 to the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be increased by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3811, so that the metal decorative portion 3811a It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front right decoration substrate 3814 and damaging the back front right decoration substrate 3814 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3833 of the shutter members 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from near the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening/closing slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831 . The shutter member 3831 includes a flat shutter 3832 extending to the left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3832 in the left and right direction, and a right shaft portion 3833 protruding from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis and then to the right. and a crankshaft 3834 extending cylindrically in the direction.

The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811 . The shaft portion 3833 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833 .

The shaft portion 3833 of the shutter member 3831 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, so that the shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft portion 3833 in the horizontal direction. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening/closing slider 3820. As shown in FIG.

Although illustration is omitted, the back front right decorative body 3813 has characters, items, logos, etc. along with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It has a pattern. The back front right decorative body 3813 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing the light from the LED of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 . The surface of the back front right decorative body 3813, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the arranged back front right decorative board 3814 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, the back surface of the back front right ornament 3813 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron) together with the front surface of the back front right ornament 3813. may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, the rear front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, the back front right decorative body 3813 is formed transparent, so that the surface (mounting) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 arranged behind the back front right decorative body 3813 is passed through the back front right decorative body 3813 . surface) can be visually recognized.

Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814, and areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) A surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is printed with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is arranged behind the transparent back front right decoration body 3813 . Therefore, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, a predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 by silk printing is applied through the back front right decoration body 3813. In a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface side inscription part is Attributes of the surface-side electronic components shown) can be discriminated.

In addition, each package of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

The front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is formed by applying a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist"). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered is coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814, although not shown, near the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs, the part numbers of the surface side electronic components, the surface side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, although illustration is omitted, the part numbers of the back side electronic components and the positions at which the back side electronic components are arranged are displayed in the vicinity of the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. Attributes of the back-side electronic components such as the indicated area (may also include the shape of the back-side electronic components, the size of the back-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic components, and the model of the back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is coated with a white resist solution over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid white resist”) formed by the above method, and furthermore, a large amount of white resist is formed on the solid white resist. The front surface side that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the yellow surface side is displayed against the white resist. In addition to being able to make the writing part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance A high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be maintained by combining the surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction, and its front end side is bent leftward. The support plate 3816 has a left bent front end portion attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. there is In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a projecting leftward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the lower end. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819. As shown in FIG.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate about the axis in the horizontal direction around the support pin 3816a. The link member 3819 has a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with the support pin 3816a inserted therebetween, and a second connection portion 3819a connected to the opening/closing slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3820 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of a shutter unit 3830 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3831, and has a transmission groove into which each crank shaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is vertically slidably inserted.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 faces forward as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832 of the closed state. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (player's side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832) has a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front right decorative body 3813. It is

In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3820 is positioned at the upper movement end, and the crank shaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is positioned above the shaft portion 3833 .

In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to As the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connection portion 3819b opposite to the first connection portion 3819a moves downward. The downward movement of the second connection portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening/closing slider 3820 connected to the second connection portion 3819b to move downward.

When the opening/closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3834 is positioned below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates around the shaft portion 3833 . As a result, since the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces the vertical direction, the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832 . The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199(b)).

After that, by deenergizing (OFF) the back front right driving solenoid 3817, the plunger, which had been moving upward, moves downward due to the biasing force of the spring. The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, the shutter unit 3830 is opened and closed by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, so that the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3830 is changed to the back front right decorative body 3813. The decoration (picture) can be switched to a different decoration (picture), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, since the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decoration body 3813, the plurality of LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 can be illuminated when the shutter unit 3830 is closed. , the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 are caused to emit light, thereby the back front right decorated with light emission. The ornament 3813 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front right effect unit 3800, there are three back front right decoration units, a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. Since the shutter units 3830 of the 3810 can be independently opened and closed, and the lighting can be decorated, by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front right decoration units 3810, a variety of effects can be provided to the player. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back movable ornament of the rear-back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body of the back-bottom middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. Fig. 202 shows the back top rear rotating decoration of the back top rear effect unit moving from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back left rotating decorative body of the back rear left effect unit moving from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and back back right. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing the rear-right-rotating ornaments of the production unit moved from the retracted position to the first appearing position; Fig. 203 shows the rear left rotation decoration of the rear left production unit from the retreat position to the second appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation decoration of the rear rear right production unit from the retreat position to the second appearance position, respectively. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state; FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state.

Fig. 205 shows the back rear movable decoration of the back rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back upper rear rotary decoration of the back upper rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, and the back rear left effect unit to the back rear. Move the left-hand rotation decoration from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the back-right rotation decoration of the back-right production unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and move the back-lower middle rotation decoration of the back-lower middle production unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved from the lowered position to the raised position;

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state 111, through them, the back front left decoration 3030, the back front right decoration 3040, and the back bottom left effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are rotated to the back bottom left. Decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 of back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 of back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and back top of back top effect unit 3400 The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, etc. can be visually recognized well, and the center accessory 2500 Through the frame of , the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well.

Further, in more detail, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 extends from the blocking portion 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is positioned along the side to the vicinity of the right middle unit 2700 . In addition, the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100 is positioned behind the upper rear effect unit 3400 and is invisible from the player side.

In addition, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the center and left side of the side unit 2200, and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first big prize winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 . The bottom-left rotating decorative body 3201 and the bottom-right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000 .

In addition, the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is in the state of the lowered position, and is located behind the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 so that the upper part projects into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the back-bottom middle-rotating decoration body 3310 obliquely from above, the number decoration above the center of rotation is displayed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

Further, the upper front decorative body 3421 of the upper rear effect unit 3400 extends left and right in the upper part of the game area 5a in front view, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the horizontal direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center accessory. 2500 , and the rest can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The back upper front rotating decoration 3410 is in the center in the left-right direction in front of the back upper front decoration 3421, and is in a state in which one petal is directed upward. can be visually recognized. In a normal state, the upper back elevating decorative body unit 3450 having the upper back rotating decorative body 3440 of the upper back effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the front upper back decorative body 3421. Not visible from the side.

In addition, the back-left decoration unit 3520 having the back-left rotating decoration 3510 of the back-left effect unit 3500 is in a retracted position behind the back-front left effect unit 3700 in a normal state. , are invisible from the player side. In addition, the back-right decoration unit 3620 having the back-right rotating decoration 3610 of the back-right effect unit 3600 is in a retracted position behind the back-front-right effect unit 3800 in a normal state. , are invisible from the player side.

In addition, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are arranged vertically along the left side of the game panel 1100, are positioned within the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A of the three back front left decoration units 3710 is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view, The lower part is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The middle second back front left decorative body unit 3710B is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower third back front left decorative body unit 3710C is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view, and the right part is within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the normal state of the back front left effect unit 3700, in each of the three back front left decoration units 3710, the shutter units 3730 are closed and the back front left decorations 3713 are invisible. Along with this, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Furthermore, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, are positioned within the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The first back front right decoration unit 3810A on the upper side of the three back front right decoration units 3810 has its right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view, The left side is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The second back front right decoration unit 3810B on the middle side and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C on the bottom side have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center panel on the right side from the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in front view. It is positioned behind the role object 2500 and the remaining left side is positioned within the frame of the center role object 2500 .

In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, in each of the three back front right decoration units 3810, the shutter units 3830 are closed and the back front right decorations 3813 are invisible. Along with this, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 performs a rear back performance of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back back left effect unit 3500, back back right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700 , and the back front right effect unit 3800 performs a predetermined effect (movable effect and light emission effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. is released, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearing position. As a result, the player can see an effect (movable effect) in which the large rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage over the player is generated. It is possible to make the player think that the game is not possible, and to increase the expectation for the game.

Although not shown, in this rear back effect unit 3100, after dropping the back rear movable decorative body 3110 to the appearance position, the rear rear driving motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the back rear movable decorative body. 3110 is returned to the retracted position, by appropriately changing the forward/reverse rotation of the back driving motor 3126, the back movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the direction center. As a result, the rear back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the vertical direction. The movable decorative body 3110 can be focused on, and the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the back-lower-middle rotary drive motor 3333 rotates the back-lower-middle rotary decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward so as to block part of the effect image on the effect display device 1600 and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is favorable from the player's side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates round and round, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained.

Since six number decorations are provided on the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310, by rotating the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310, the player is given the impression that the roulette wheel is spinning. can give Therefore, when the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated, the performance display device 1600 is caused to display a performance image such as "Sugoroku", and at the same time, the numeral decoration of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating is displayed. The "piece" may advance according to the . As a result, the player can feel nervous depending on whether or not the rotating back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired number decoration so that the "piece" advances to the desired "masu". It can make the player's heart beat faster and entertain the player. In addition, the advance of the "pieces" can make the player feel that the expectation value is increasing, and the expectation for the game can be heightened.

As an effect using the back bottom left effect unit 3200, the back bottom right effect unit 3250, the back top effect unit 3400, the back back left effect unit 3500, and the back back right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, FIG. As shown, in the bottom-left effect unit 3200, the bottom-left driving motor 3205 rotates the bottom-left rotating decorative body 3201, and in the bottom-right effect unit 3250, the bottom-right rotating decorative body is rotated by the bottom-right driving motor 3255. Rotate the 3251. In addition, in the back upper effect unit 3400, the back upper front rotary drive motor 3425 rotates the back upper front rotary decoration body 3410, and the back upper lift drive motor 3429 moves the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 downward from the retracted position. At the same time when it is rotated to the appearing position, the back top rear rotary decoration body 3440 is rotated by the back top rear rotation driving motor 3454 . Further, in the rear left effect unit 3500, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right first appearance position by the rear left elevation drive motor 3554, and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is operated to move the rear rear left decoration body unit 3520 to the first appearance position. Rotate the left rotation decoration 3510 . In addition, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly to the upper left, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 to the first appearance position. Rotate the right rotation decoration 3610 .

As a result, the back top/rear rotation decoration 3440, the back left rotation decoration 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration 3610 move to the front of the effect display device 1600 and become visible, and the back bottom left rotation decoration. Since the body 3201, the back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, the back top front rotation decoration 3410, the back top rear rotation decoration 3440, the bottom back left rotation decoration 3510, and the bottom back right rotation decoration 3610 rotate respectively, Rotating the six ornaments can give a strong impact to the player, making them feel that something good will happen and increasing their expectations for the game.

At this time, the back upper elevating drive motor 3429, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 are appropriately rotated in the forward and reverse directions to rotate the upper back elevating decorative body unit 3450 and the back rear left decoration. The body unit 3520 and the back right decorative body unit 3620 may be respectively swung. As a result, the back upper/rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back left rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 rotate while swinging, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Players can be entertained.

Also, at this time, the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 may be rotated. As a result, the seven decorations rotate round and round, so that the player can strongly feel that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage will occur. It is possible to heighten expectations for the game.

As an effect using the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right second appearance position, and the rear left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated by the rear rear left rotation driving motor 3525 . In addition, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper left, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 to the second appearance position on the upper left. The rotary decoration 3610 is rotated. As a result, the two decorations rotate at a position approximately at the height of the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the player is surprised and something good happens. It is possible to make the player think that this is not the case, and it is possible to heighten expectations for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back-left rotating ornament 3510 and the back-right rotating ornament 3610 at the second appearance position are the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 It is also possible to display an effect image that corresponds to the position of the eyes of a predetermined character's face in line with (the world view of the game board 5)). As a result, it is possible to present the player with an effect in which the character's eyes are spinning, and the player can be entertained.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The closed state is changed to the open state, and the shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right driving solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800 . As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side. The decoration of the decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, as an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, since each has three back front left decoration units 3710 and three back front right decoration units 3810, , the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, or a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed. As a result, it is possible to show a variety of performances to the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

In the back unit 3000, a back rear effect unit 3100, a back bottom left effect unit 3200, a back bottom right effect unit 3250, a back bottom middle effect unit 3300, a back top effect unit 3400, a back back left effect unit 3500, and a back back right effect unit 3600. , back front left effect unit 3700, and back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. As a result, all the decorations are movable, so that the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) will occur, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be heightened. can. In this case, in the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600, the back-left decoration unit 3520 and the back-right decoration unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

In the above description, the movement of each decoration has been described. It can be shown, and the player's interest can be further attracted.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately combine the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above, and the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can also be combined. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. The player can be entertained, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[5-11. Main effects of the game board]
Next, the main functions and effects of the game board 5 of this embodiment having the above configuration will be described. The game board 5 of this embodiment has an opening 1112 penetrating the game panel 1100 having the game area 5a on the front side. A frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is divided into an impossibility non-circulation area and formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening part 1112, has its front end projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, it is likely that the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 will be the circulation area and the inner side will be the non-circulation area. A flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 thinner than the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 extends from a position in the peripheral wall portion 2501 in which the front surface of the game panel 1100 is the same in the longitudinal direction toward the non-distribution area side (inner side). At the same time, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided with a flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution area side (outside). Since nothing extends to the circulation area side of the part where the support part 2503 is provided, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall part 2501. Thus, the substantial circulation area can be made up to the position where it touches the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial circulation area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center role 2500) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 is enlarged, the substantial distribution area will not become smaller as in the conventional pachinko machine. . Therefore, by enlarging the non-circulation area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the substantial reduction of the circulation area in which the game ball B circulates in the game area 5a, the non-circulation area is increased. The performance image of the performance display device 1600 as a performance device provided behind the area, the movable body of the performance unit, the decorative body, etc. can be made more visible, and the game ball B can be played in the circulation area and the non-circulation area. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining both the performance and the performance.

In addition, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-distribution area side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion is formed by the flange portion 2502 provided in a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. The portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution area side (outside), and the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502. , Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a contacts (abuts) the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall 2501 can be maintained by the support part 2503 and the like, Deformation and breakage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented.

In addition, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by attaching the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, and the game panel 1100, when the game ball B contacts, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from elastically deforming and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B, which circulates in the game area 5a, from making a strange movement different from the conventional one due to contact with the peripheral wall part 2501, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-distribution area side can be made difficult to see, and the support portion 2503 (center The performance image of the performance display device 1600 as a performance device provided behind and the movable body and decoration of the performance unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen through the accessory 2500), so the non-distribution area. It is possible to enlarge the range in which the production images, movable bodies, decorations, etc. provided behind the can be seen, making it easier to demonstrate the production effect of the production device, and providing behind the non-distribution area The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by making the performance image of the performance display device 1600, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. visible, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players. can.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the transparent part can be used to light the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and to Since it is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, or transmit the light from the light-emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), transparent parts such as the support part 2503 and the peripheral wall part 2501 can be illuminated. It is possible to make it look lively, improve its appearance, and enhance its appeal to the player. At this time, the transparent support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the movable body provided behind the support part 2503 (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back rear left effect unit 3500) can be provided with The above effect can be obtained by the light emitted by the light emitting means (LED), and the transparent support portion 2503 enables the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 extends in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the peripheral wall portion 2501 as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the front-rear direction, the support portion 2503 can be attached to the game panel. Compared to when it is extended with the same thickness as 1100, the lens effect by the support part 2503 can be reduced, and the support part 2503 can be attached to the rear back front left decorative body 3030 and the effect device (effect display device 1600 etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support portion 2503 is further reduced, and the portion behind the support portion 2503 (design ) can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the production image can be made more visible.

Furthermore, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown by the tip side of , compared to the case where the shape is along the peripheral wall portion 2501, it is difficult to see a single design, and it seems that the details are particular. A pachinko machine 1 with a deep design can be provided.

In addition, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant at that portion of the support portion 2503, and is different. Therefore, by setting the extending amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 extends from the peripheral wall part 2501 in the front and back directions of the game panel 1100 at the same position, the support part 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to give an illusion as if it is, and it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the presence of the support part 2503 .

In addition, the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front and rear directions of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends from the middle (middle) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front and rear direction. Compared to the case where the support part 2503 extends from the end side, the decrease in the reinforcing effect of the support part 2503 on the tip side of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (the center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even if the game medium abuts against it.

Furthermore, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 so that the rear side can be inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 can be The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or obscured by the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be seen when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. The pachinko machine appears to protrude forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, can give a sense of unity between the peripheral wall part 2501 (the center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and has a good appearance in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 regardless of whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque. The performance image of the performance display device 1600 provided behind the non-distribution area where the performance display device 1600 is provided, the movable body of the performance unit, the decorative body, etc. can be favorably visually recognized from the front (player side). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exhibiting the performance effect of the game, etc.

Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it appears to protrude outward, the player can easily notice the presence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and can easily recognize the circulation area and the non-circulation area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

In addition, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution area side (outside) is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and the portion at which the flange portion 2502 is provided Since the support part 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside) is not provided, the support part 2503 interferes with the visibility of the production device (the production display device 1600 and the production unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, it is possible to enlarge the area where the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit, etc. can be seen, and it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the effect of the effect device, and to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the performance by.

Furthermore, in the center accessory 2500, the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502 allow the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to be maintained at the same level as that of the conventional product. Deformation of the molded product can be prevented when it is removed from the mold.

In addition, since the support portion 2503 extends in a flat plate shape that is thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, only the support portion 2503 is in contact with the other portions. It is possible to prevent the difference in shrinkage amount from becoming large, and to prevent deformation of the center accessory 2500 during molding.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the frame-shaped front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear side are provided. , and are transparent, and behind the back left elevation drive motor 3554 and back rear right elevation drive of the back rear right production unit 3600 as functional parts of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part of it is outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extend from the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to cover at least the parts in the game area 5a of the lifting drive motor 3554 and the rear right lifting drive motor 3654. , the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654, The back rear left elevation driving motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation driving motor 3654 can be made difficult to see from the player side through the transparent front component member 1000, the game panel 1100 and the inside of the game area 5a, and the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 is improved. In addition, instead of the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654, the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 can be seen. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to players.

In addition, since the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundaries of the game area 5a defined by the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are difficult to understand. A feeling of openness can be given by looking like this, and even if the game area 5a has the same size as that of a conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger. Therefore, by making the game area 5a look larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1 can be heightened, and the player can enjoy the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to the players.

In addition, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged to cover at least the part in the game area 5a in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. Therefore, the front left decorative body 3030 and the right front rear decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, so that the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as described above, the functional parts can be made difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the central side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and in a front view, the back front extends from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. Since the decorations of the left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration can make the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a difficult to understand, giving a sense of openness to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made to appear larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By making it stand out, the appeal to the player can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 It is possible to prevent the back-right effect unit 3600 and the like from being seen, and the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600 and the like can be seen from the player side through the front constituent member 1000 and the game panel 1100, which makes the game look good. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by preventing the deterioration of the pachinko machine.

In addition, at least a part of the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front (the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 completely (entirely) outside the game area 5a), in order to arrange the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654, the front component 1000 and the outer circumference of the game area 5a The rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear right elevation drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them. It is possible to suppress the space of the game area 5a from becoming smaller by taking balance. In other words, since a part of the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, the space between the front component member 1000 and the outer circumference of the game area 5a can be reduced. , the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can further exhibit the above-described effects. Further, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the movable character inside the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space inside the game area 5a can be increased. The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is widened. All drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) for the accessories that move within the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Furthermore, since the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the performance display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, or diffuse the light from the pachinko machine 1 as if the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 were emitting light. can improve the appearance of Further, although opaque decorative seals 3032 and 3042 are applied to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the bases 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are respectively attached. And the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is made of a transparent member, so that the light from the various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be emitted from the back front left decoration 3030 or the back It is possible to give an impression that the light reaches the front right decoration 3040 and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 emit light. It can also be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be understood that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent even if it is not entirely covered. It can be spicy and made to look like part of the decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left ornament 3030 does not have a size that covers the entire back rear left elevation drive motor 3554, it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above. While reducing the cost of 3030, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger. At least a part of the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is covered and hidden by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. 1 (a portion closer to the boundary line dividing the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, it extends from within the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a for a predetermined location where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (such as the lower left location in FIG. 131, that is, the lower left corner location on the game board 5). By providing the decoration, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger.

In addition, the inside of the frame of the front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from behind by the transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided behind the game area 5a. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from behind by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. Similar effects can be achieved, and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game can be played smoothly in the game area 5a. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by entertaining the user.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the front view, the back front left decorative body The back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the like can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inside portion of the door window 101a in the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the rear front left decorative body 3030 can move the rear left decorative body 3030 upward and downward. Since the uncovered portion can be covered with the frame-shaped door frame 3 without covering the entire drive motor 3554, the back front left decorative body 3030 can be prevented from being longer than necessary. The cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 in the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since the seal is attached, the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), and the first starting opening 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 . Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier to direct the player's consciousness to the first starting hole 2002 rather than the general winning hole 2001, the number of game balls B accepted in the first starting hole 2002 is reduced (or the first starting A lottery of the first special lottery result performed by accepting the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 can avoid the player's concentration on the general prize winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by raising the expectation for the game, and to make the player recognize the position of the first start port 2002 that the player should aim at, and to make the player aim at the first start port 2002. You can enjoy the game.

Depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first starting port 2002, the player can be nervous, and when the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002 Depending on whether or not the lottery of the first special lottery result generates an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot"), the player can be excited and excited, and the expectation for the game can be heightened. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. After that, when a winning lottery is drawn according to the result of the first special lottery, an advantageous game state occurs in which the first big prize winning port 2005 and the second big winning prize port 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game. At this time, when the game ball B aimed at the first starting hole 2002 is accepted by the general prize winning hole 2001, the first special lottery result is not drawn, but the game ball B is paid out as a privilege. , the player can continue to enjoy the game without being discouraged, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the shape (appearance) of the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is greatly different, a sticker is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a sticker is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, the player does not feel uncomfortable, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the player enjoys the game with the pachinko machine 1 and loses interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are made of a transparent member, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be visually recognized through the transparent member. As a result, the player can surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 or the first start opening 2002, and can fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are made of a transparent member, the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1 can be used. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, or diffuse the light from the means (LED of the decorative substrate), the general prize-winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous, and the appearance is improved. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the appeal to the player.

Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B is placed in the general winning opening. Since the game ball B received in the 2001 is guided backward later than the game ball B received in the first special lottery result lottery, the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is guided to the general prize winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加Since it can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery for the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (feeling of superiority) due to the reception of the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 is given to the general winning. The player can enjoy the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received into the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately pushed backward ( Since it can be guided to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B accepted in the first start opening 2002, it is useless for the game ball B to be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 It is possible to prevent the player from experiencing the game for a long time, direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, and smoothly advance the game to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, in the general prize winning port 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. Therefore, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Then, depending on the player, an illusion can be given as if the game ball B has been received in the general winning hole 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap the general prize winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given after that, it is possible to avoid the distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, and the player can avoid it. Therefore, it is possible to keep the game enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning opening can be reduced. A decoration such as a sticker on the front surface of the mouth 2001 can be omitted. Therefore, since the cost for the general prize winning opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more enjoyable for the players by using the reduced cost for the performance device or the like.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the back-bottom middle decorative body unit 3320 of the back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, a rotating back-bottom middle rotation having a plurality of even-numbered (here, six) stop positions The decorative body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 whose length is half the length of the stop position, and a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 (here, six) corresponding to each stop position, and the area detection piece 3325 A plurality (here, four) of sensors consisting of a plurality (here, three) of area identification sensors 3330 consisting of half of the stop positions that detect Since it is provided, when the back-lower-middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area-specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area-detecting pieces 3325 repeatedly increase and then decrease in order from one side in the rotation direction. By combining the area specifying sensor 3330 that detects the area detecting piece 3325, the current rotational position of the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

More specifically, in the case of the back-bottom center rotary decoration 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, the area detection pieces 3325 are half and three stop positions are arranged side by side. and the minimum number of area-specific sensors 3330 required to detect movement to any stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set to a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned at the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the area detection piece 3325 at (the position of the decoration number "3"). From this state, when the back and middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decoration number "2"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detection piece 3325. do. Furthermore, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative number "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Furthermore, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decoration number "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor Sensor 3330 c detects area detection piece 3325 . Furthermore, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decoration number "5"), the second area specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detecting, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is an area detection piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decoration number "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detecting, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detecting piece 3325. is not detected. After that, when the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decoration number “3”), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. This is the initial state where the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates, and detection/non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated.

In this way, since the area detection pieces 3325 are provided with a length that covers half the number of stop positions, a combination of the detections of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 enables the back and bottom middle rotation decoration. Since the rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detected until the underside middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the next stop position, the underside can be detected. The current position of the middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Further, since the back and middle rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 After roughly detecting the rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. By minimizing the deviation of the stop position, it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back-lower middle rotary ornament 3310 having a plurality of stop positions.

In addition, since the stop position of the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back-lower middle-rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable (unpleasant feeling), and it is possible to entertain the performance (movable performance) by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress the decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not give discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is increased, the stop position deviation can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotary decoration 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased compared to the case where the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is reciprocated. can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest, and the rotation of the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can be strongly attracted. It is possible to keep the player entertained and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, by rotating the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310 faces forward toward the player side, and after rotating in circles, an arbitrary Since the player can see a roulette-like performance in which rotation is stopped at the stop position of , the player is thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. This makes it possible to entertain the movable presentation by the back-lower middle-rotation decorative body 3310 and suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is an even number, the minimum number of sensors (region specifying sensors 3330) necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position can correspond to the stop position. and the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasping of stop positions) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest by the back-lower middle-rotation decorative body 3310 having more stop positions.

It should be noted that, in the above-described embodiment, as the back-lower center rotary decorative body 3310 in the back-lower center effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, six stop positions are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have 4 to 10 stop positions.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body having a plurality of stop positions (back and middle rotating decorative body 3310) was shown to rotate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having a plurality of stop positions. For example, it may be “rotating”, “moving linearly”, “moving in an arc”, “moving in a curved line”, or the like.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is accommodated in the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, and for the sake of explanation, the rear surface of the board holder 1200 is seen when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. The surface opposite to the front side of the main control board 1310 (that is, the rear side) is sometimes referred to as the "surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310" on which electronic components are mounted. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game has a green coating film (hereinafter referred to as A green resist layer is formed by simply describing "a solid green resist"), and a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. are built in. A main control MPU which is a microprocessor, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and various solenoids are driven. and a RAM clear switch having a depressing operation part for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like. On the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the RAM clear switch, the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (furthermore, The shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation of the front-side electronic components (mounting direction), and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) are displayed in green. On the other hand, it is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a conspicuous white paint. The RAM clear switch is exposed from a transparent main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 . Since the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003, a second A second starting opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the starting opening 2004, a general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first big winning opening 2005. A first big prize winning hole sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B, a second big prize winning hole sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006, and a game ball B received in the out hole 2010 are detected. a first sub-out port sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011; a second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting a game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012; And detection signals from magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are input through the main control I/O port, respectively.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs control signals from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby controlling the starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid. 2612, etc., or output a drive signal from the main control I / O port to the function display unit 1400 status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal pending indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special pending number display device, second special symbol display, second special reserved number display, round display, etc., and output a drive signal.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 3052, the second start sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first grand prize sensor 2402, the second grand prize sensor 2601, and the outlet sensor 3053 While contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used, the general prize winning opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054 are contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches. I am using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 3052, the second starting hole sensor 2401, and Detection of game ball B by gate sensor 2801 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starter sensor 3052, the second starter sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous game state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are opened and the game ball B enters frequently. , The detection of the game ball B by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the first big winning slot sensor 2402 and the second big winning slot sensor 2601 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3051 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning hole sensor 3051 .

Furthermore, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, the out port sensor 3053 uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 frequently, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. is used.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. In addition, the main control MPU, which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when the voltages of these voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This blackout warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of game balls B is accommodated in a payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of a transparent power board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c. When viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, the surface opposite to the front side of the payout control board 633 facing the rear surface of the power supply board cover 631 (that is, the rear side) is the surface of the payout control board 633 on which electronic components are mounted ( mounting surface)”. The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, has a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid coating”) formed by applying a green resist liquid to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface). A green resist layer is formed by a green resist layer, and a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a firing control by a firing solenoid 542, and a ball feed solenoid 145. A launch control unit 633b that performs ball feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator. At the time of maintenance, the game balls B in the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guide unit 570, and the payout device 580 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201), and the ball extraction operation is started. and a ball-draw switch for On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, in addition to the error release switch, the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (furthermore, The shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation of the front-side electronic components (mounting direction), and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) are displayed in green. On the other hand, it is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a conspicuous white paint. The error release switch is exposed from the transparent payout control board box 632 that accommodates the payout control board 633 . Since the error release switch is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, or the ball cutting detection Detection signals from the sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. input to the MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. When the payout control MPU detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch, it transmits a door frame open command to the main control board 1310 to inform the main control board 1310 or opens the main body frame. When detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the switch, a body frame open command notifying that fact is transmitted to the main control board 1310 . Upon receiving such a command, the main control board 1310 transmits predetermined information (a format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) in the door frame open command for conveying the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. information for arranging) is added and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, or predetermined information (command (information for adjusting the format of transmission) is added and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Upon receiving such a command, the peripheral control board 1510 controls, for example, the lighting mode of the door frame 3 to the notification mode. Based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch and the detection signal from the main body frame open switch, either one of the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 or If both are detected, a frame open command may be sent to the main control board 1310 as a unified command. In this case, the main control board 1310 adds predetermined information (information for adjusting the format for sending the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 ) to the frame open command and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral control board 1510 that has received this frame open command controls, for example, the lighting mode of the door frame 3 to the notification mode.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is inputted to the payout control input circuit and inputted to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to move. One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In addition, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510 has a green resist layer formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solidly coated green resist”), As shown in FIG. 206, a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls effects based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect that controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. and a display control unit 1512 .

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decoration board of the game board 5. , game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for sending to the drive solenoid or for outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc., and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc. provided in the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board. to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , and outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 that indicates that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally. monitoring the action.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and uses the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, and the top side Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It is used together with WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input/output port. k) Bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable object drive command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side, are output by a plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display commands. 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order to define the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. Thus, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" is to hold the drawing data for one line drawn in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

A sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally 2 times vertically 3 times. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively.

[7. Game content]
Game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are rotated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 . is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The more the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N, the game ball The flowing speed of B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the game ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "probability variation (probability variation) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating a "hit" is performed.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 .

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200 , or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 is guided. Through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520, the plurality of guide passages 2520 and 2520 are discharged above the gate portion 2003 and implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After coming into contact with the obstructing nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The group of guide passages 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance is open near the impinging portion 1006, and an entrance which is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and does not hit the impingement portion 1006 (right hitting). When the game ball B is hit with a strength somewhat weaker than the ball B, it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 at a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is used than the first guide passage 2521 . Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521 .

When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the normal lottery result of the lottery is "normal hit", the first attacker unit. The closed second starting port 2004 at 2400 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 becomes possible.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0 .01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of reservations of the ordinary lottery result is four, and even if the game balls B pass through the gate section 2003, the game balls B exceeding the upper limit are discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

A game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of hitting the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of , and is sometimes accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or rarely accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012 . When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 , a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 . On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012, it is discharged out of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be received in the second big prize-winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004, or the first big prize-winning port 2005. .

In addition, the game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right center unit 2700, and the side right center unit 2700 has a general winning port 2001, a second big winning port 2006, a second There is no opportunity to be accepted in the starting port 2004 or the first big prize winning port 2005, and it is discharged out of the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide path group 2520, the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a. It is possible to prompt a hitting operation such that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2012.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, in the guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide path 2522 has a lower acceptance probability of the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide path 2521. , the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the second guide passage 2522 can be encouraged. In other words, it is possible to encourage a hitting operation that requires fine adjustment of the rotation operation of the handle 182 rather than a "right hitting" in which the game ball B contacts the impingement portion 1006, and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be encouraged. It is possible to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 mainly having .

A game ball B passing through the left side of the right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and enters the second big prize winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. , it is released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 .

At this time, when the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted by the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability. When the second large winning opening 2006 is open, when the game ball B is received in the second large winning opening 2006, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 from the payout device 580 a predetermined number (for example, 10, or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 .

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big winning opening 2006 is the first shelf part 2412a, the second starting door 2414, and the second shelf part 2412b, the upper left After rolling in the direction, it is released to the left, and further rolls leftward on the third shelf 2412c, the first big winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d into the game area 5a. released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting door 2414, the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003 is "normal hit", and the second starting door When the 2414 is retreating, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "probability variation (probability variation) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating a "hit" is performed.

In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the first big winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the second If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot"), after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. , the game ball B can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first big winning opening 2005 when the first big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 . Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and the player is encouraged. can entertain.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 enters an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", A lottery will be held for special lottery results that generate "middle hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability variation) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit".Then, the special lottery results that have been drawn are Predetermined time (for example, 0.1 ~ 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time) suggested to the player.In addition, the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 lottery The special lottery results include "loss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "variable (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", " There are "probable short-time hit", "non-probable short-time hit", "second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is a "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state capable of accepting the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", the first big prize winning opening 2005 becomes open for receiving the game ball B, and then a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or the first big prize winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the prize winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is 1 round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

If the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is the "second jackpot", after the first big winning port 2005 is able to accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special・Time) is generated. This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Reserved. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without withholding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than ``losing'', after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small winning" game, a "big winning" game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). The time until display is different), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation, and the operation button elevation drive motor By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back effect unit 3100, Bottom left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700, and back front left effect unit 3700 By appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., it is possible to perform lighting effect, display effect, etc., and various effects can entertain the player, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation portion 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 is caused to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

[8. Standing Auxiliary Member]
Next, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting support member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the tray plate 8 of the island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It assists the pachinko machine 1 to stand on its own when it is installed (attached) to the pachinko machine 1 to prevent it from overturning. This self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. Also, the self-standing auxiliary member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated cardboard, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

Although not shown in detail, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 . On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounted portion that is mounted on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 . In this embodiment, the plate unit 200 is provided with a groove extending back and forth as the mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a ridge inserted into the groove of the plate unit 200 as the mounting portion. ing. As a result, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid forward and backward with respect to the plate unit 200, and the mounting portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the plate unit 200. 7 can be attached (mounted). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding it forward. . Further, when the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment is removed, it can be easily attached by sliding it in the direction opposite to when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed.

The attachment (attachment) between the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 and the receiving portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above, and includes "insertion of a projection into a hole", "attachment of a nail", and "attachment". "By locking", "Magnetic attachment by a magnet", "Velcro fastener", "Suction cup", "Peelable adhesive material", etc. may be used. Further, the position where the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is provided is not limited to the lower surface of the plate unit 200 as described above, and may be "inside", "at least one of the left and right sides", "front", or the like. .

After the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the self supporting member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 and stored on the game hall side. It is attached to the unit 200 and used. The self-standing auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the plate unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached during the installation work.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 has the plate unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, which protrude greatly forward. Although the pachinko machine 1 tends to fall down easily, by mounting the self-supporting assisting member 7 on the lower mounting part of the plate unit 200, the self-standing of the pachinko machine 1 can be assisted to prevent it from falling forward. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment of the game hall, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, the space between the plate unit 200 and the tray plate 8 of the island equipment is fixed. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from overturning forward by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 positioned at the top, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 is held down so as not to overturn. The pachinko machine 1 is such that there is no need to install it and the labor required for installation work is easy.

In addition, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the attachment portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from overturning. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the side.

Furthermore, since the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, the pachinko machine 1 is assisted to stand on its own. Since it is possible to prevent the pachinko from overturning forward, it is possible to increase the size of the performance device, the decorative member, etc. provided on the door frame 3 and to protrude further forward. It is possible to easily construct a pachinko machine whose appearance is greatly different from that of the machine, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like protrude greatly forward in the door frame 3, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In the above embodiment, by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction, it can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting member 7 can be attached to the door. The plate unit 200 of the frame 3 may be attached and detached by sliding the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction.

In addition, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable with respect to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and a functional member (for example, the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202) provided detachably on the door frame 3 , door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island facility, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine is installed. Allow 1 to stand on its own in a stable state. On the other hand, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that part of the pachinko machine 1 can be replaced. It can function as a constituent functional member. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 projecting forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 is used as a functional member that also serves as the self-standing auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 By attaching the frame left side unit 400 to the lower side of the plate unit 200, it can function as a self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and by removing it from the lower side of the plate unit 200 and attaching it to the left side of the door window 101a, it can function as a functional member. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, there is no need to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is troublesome to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be detachably attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and functional members (for example, "substrate cover covering the substrate", "wiring "wiring holding member that holds", "protective cover that protects the back of the effect display device and movable decoration", "storage tank in which the game medium is stored", "guidance member in which the game medium circulates", etc.) and It may be used for both. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) to stabilize the pachinko machine 1. to be able to stand on their own. On the other hand, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 is attached to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4, thereby forming a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, there is no need to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is troublesome to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. In addition, when the self-standing auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the main body frame 4, when the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4, the player touches the detachable functional member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In addition, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, compared with the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not also used as a functional member, the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to reduce the number of parts required for this, and to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated within the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 does not need to be attached to the island equipment and stand on its own, the self-standing auxiliary member 7 is accommodated in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, so that the presence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加It is possible to avoid the deterioration of the play and the hindrance of the self-standing assisting member 7 in the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 housed in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand on its own. , the installation work and removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. In addition, in this case, compared to the case where the auxiliary self-supporting member 7 is removed and stored separately, there is no need to store the auxiliary self-supporting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the auxiliary self-supporting member 7 so as not to lose it. can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having a mounting portion that is attached to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is shown. Also good.

Also, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is built in the plate unit 200 (door frame 3). , when installed in the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be protruded downward and brought into contact with the tray plate 8 . As a result, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, it is not necessary to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and keep it separately, and the labor required for management on the game hall side can be reduced.

[9. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The decoration body 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment are the decorative members of the present invention, and the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 of the present embodiment. is the decorative plate of the present invention, the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is the radiation plate of the present invention, the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the present embodiment, The back and rear decorative substrate 3114 corresponds to the decorative substrate of the present invention, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b in the present embodiment correspond to the LEDs of the present invention, and the first LED 3114a in the present embodiment corresponds to the specific LED of the present invention. ing.

[10. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100, on the front side of the back-rear decoration board 3114 on which the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b are mounted, Since the decoration body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are arranged, and the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the front side of the decoration body 3111, the rear decoration substrate 3114 and the metal decoration are arranged. Since the portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are positioned between the portion 3111d and the metal decorative portion 3111d, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d dissipates the metal decoration. It is possible to prevent a linear discharge from the portion 3111d to the rear decorative substrate 3114. In addition, even if the static electricity of the metal decoration portion 3111d tries to discharge to the rear decoration substrate 3114, the static electricity cannot pass through the inside of the decoration body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the like. along the front surface of the light guide plate 3113, pass through the outer periphery, bypass the rear end of the flange portion 3113b projecting rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, and flow to the inside of the flange portion 3113b (back side of the rear decorative substrate 3114). However, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the rear decoration substrate 3114 can be sufficiently secured by the decoration body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the like.

At this time, since the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed to be smaller than the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 and the like so as to be surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the flange portion 3113b is formed to be smaller than the predetermined outer periphery. The static electricity detoured inward needs to flow along the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 as much as the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 is small, and the creeping distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 is further increased. It is possible to suppress discharge to the rear decorative substrate 3114 . Therefore, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114, so that the discharge (spark) causes the first LED 3114a mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114. and the second LED 3114b and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration part 3111d is surely illuminated by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the rear decoration substrate 3114. This allows the player to enjoy the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit on the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided within the predetermined distance SL from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c, static electricity is generated from the outer peripheral side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d. Even if an attempt is made to discharge to the foil 3114d, the creepage distance EL can be further increased by the predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the board body 3114c to the copper foil 3114d, and the discharge is not discharged to the back decoration board 3114 (copper foil 3114d). It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity from being discharged from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration substrate 3114, so that the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 and the second LED 3114a mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 can be prevented from being discharged (spark). Damage to the second LED 3114b can be avoided, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided on the light guide radiation plate 3113, the flange portion 3113b protrudes outside the decoration body 3111 when the decoration body 3111 is viewed from the front. The appearance of the decoration body 3111 can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, both sides of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100 are covered with the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112 and the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it is covered with the body base 3115 , it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 . In addition, in the rear decoration board 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b as electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the board main body 3114c, and copper foils 3114d forming circuits are formed on both sides of the board main body 3114c. , a predetermined distance SL from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c, and the front side surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a decorative body 3111, a decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 (light guide radiation plate 3113). 3113, the rear surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 is covered with the cover plate portion 3115a of the decoration base 3115, and furthermore, the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is covered with the back decoration substrate 3114. The flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the decoration base 3115 extends rearward, and the flange portion 3115b surrounding the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 extends forward from the cover plate portion 3115a of the decoration base 3115. The route of the creepage distance EL through which static electricity is discharged from the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the opposite side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is outside the flange portion 3113b. Proceed to the rear side, turn back inside the flange portion 3113b at the tip (rear end) of the flange portion 3113b, proceed to the front side between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and the flange portion at the tip (front end) of the flange portion 3115b. 3115b becomes a meandering route that turns back to the inside, and the creeping distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long, and discharge to the rear decoration substrate 3114. It can be suppressed that it will be done. Therefore, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114, so that the plurality of static electricity mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 can be prevented from being discharged (spark). It is possible to avoid damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like, and the decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration portion 3111d can be replaced with the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114a of the rear decoration substrate 3114. The two LEDs 3114b can surely make the light-emitting decoration, and the player can enjoy the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting performance) of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (back rear movable decoration body 3110), thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest. .

In addition, since a coating film (not shown) is provided on the surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the back decoration substrate 3114 on which the copper foil 3114d is provided, static electricity is discharged to the copper foil 3114d by the coating film as well. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

In addition, the legs 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the projections 3115e of the decoration base 3115 are brought into contact with the portions of the rear decorative substrate 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. In other words, the copper foil 3114d is not provided at the portion of the back decoration substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 abut. As a result, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d is prevented from being discharged to the copper foil 3114d through the portion of the back decoration substrate 3114 that the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 abut. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d is not provided on the portion of the back decoration board 3114 that the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 are in contact with, vibrations in the pachinko machine 1 and movement of the back movable decoration 3110 are avoided. Even if friction occurs between the light guide radiation plate 3113 or the decoration base 3115 and the back decoration substrate 3114 due to vibration due to movement, the friction does not cause the copper foil 3114d to be worn or peeled off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid problems such as disconnection of the circuit connecting the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, second LEDs 3114b, electronic components 3114e, etc., and short-circuiting of the circuit due to the peeled copper foil 3114d. It is possible to reliably function the electronic component 3114e, etc., and obtain the same effect as described above.

In addition, as described above, by covering both sides of the rear decorative substrate 3114 with the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115, static electricity discharge from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is prevented. Therefore, the discharge resistance performance of the coating film can be lowered, the coating film can be made as thin as possible, and the cost of the coating film can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 in the back rear movable decoration body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100 are caused to emit light, the first LEDs 3114a emit light to the back. The light emitted in the direction along the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c housing the first LED 3114a in the light guide radiation plate 3113. The light enters the body portion 3113a from the portion where the light is located, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided on the rear surface of the body portion 3113a, and is emitted from the front surface of the body portion 3113a. The light-transmitting decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the front side of the light-emitting decoration are provided. At this time, since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiating plate 3113 are flat plate-shaped, it is possible to reduce the thickness in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the rear movable decoration 3110 can be reduced. Further, from the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the leg portion 3113f is protruded rearward so as to be continuous with the portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a. Since the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving light from the first LEDs 3114a in the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be widened, more light from the first LEDs 3114a can enter the main body portion 3113a and be emitted forward. By increasing the amount of light emitted, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be decorated with brighter light. In the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light in the direction along the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflection portions 3113e. Compared to the case of irradiating light toward, the distance from the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to the front part of the light guide radiation plate 3113 where the light is emitted forward becomes longer, and the light from the first LED 3114a becomes longer. Light can be widely diffused and emitted forward. Therefore, the whole decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 can be evenly and brightly decorated, and the appearance of the luminescence decoration on the decoration body 3111 and the like is not spoiled, and the production effect of the decoration body 3111 and the like can be fully exhibited. be able to. In this way, since the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. It is possible to arrange the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in a part that is not arranged in the pachinko machine, and the arrangement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in an unexpected part strongly attracts the player's interest. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be easily selected by a player as a pachinko machine to play and that has a high appeal to the player.

Further, since the plurality of first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c penetrating the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light from the first LEDs 3114a Heat can be diffused into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the temperature rise of the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. In addition, since a gap is formed between the main body portion 3113a and the rear decorative substrate 3114 by the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the second light can be passed through the gap. Heat from the one LED 3114a can be discharged, and heat accumulation from the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Therefore, the heat accumulated between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear decoration substrate 3114 can reduce the unstable light emission of the first LEDs 3114a and damage the first LEDs 3114a. In addition to being able to reliably emit light as intended, the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (rear rear movable decoration body 3110) can be reliably illuminated by the first LED 3114a, and the rear rear movable decoration body 3110 can emit light. It is possible to make the player enjoy the decoration (light emitting performance) and suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, since the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has an auxiliary reflection portion 3113g on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c, the auxiliary reflection portion 3113g is capable of reflecting forward the light from the first LED 3114a. By the portion 3113g, the light incident from the inner surface side of the first LED housing portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f is emitted from the opposite surface to the outside of the leg portion 3113f (main body portion 3113a), and the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted. Since passing through the leg portion 3113f can be reduced, more light from the first LED 3114a can enter the main body portion 3113a, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, a copper foil 3114d constituting a circuit for causing a plurality of first LEDs 3114a (and second LEDs 3114b) to emit light is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and the copper foil 3114d is provided. has excellent thermal conductivity, the heat from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused through the copper foil 3114d, and the heat can be dissipated from the copper foil 3114d, so that the heat from the first LED 3114a is difficult to accumulate. By doing so, the above-described effects can be reliably exhibited.

In addition, on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, a light reflection auxiliary area 3114f recessed backward on the light emitting surface side of the first LED 3114a is provided by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and then the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is provided with , the leg portion 3113f forming part of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is in contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113. Without widening the gap between the main body portion 3113a of the plate 3113 and the rear decorative substrate 3114, the amount of rearward protrusion of the leg portion 3113f can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted from the main body portion. The light can be made to enter the inside 3113a, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (the rear movable decorative body 3110) can be decorated with brighter light.

In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is recessed rearward from the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the angle of irradiation from the first LED 3114a to the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f can be Since the angle can be close to vertical with respect to the front surface, the light from the first LED 3114a can be easily reflected forward by the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be made brighter. The effect similar to the above can be exhibited by luminous decoration.

Furthermore, since part of the light from the first LEDs 3114a is reflected forward by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f recessed backward in the rear decorative substrate 3114, the first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 Compared to the case where projections for reflection protrude forward on the light emitting surface side, the shadow of the projection due to the light from the first LED 3114a falls on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and the shadow part becomes dark. Instead, the entire back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the back decoration substrate 3114 is formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, when forming a circuit for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light, Since the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f can be formed together, the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f can be easily formed compared to the case where the substrate body 3114c is physically recessed by cutting, pressing, or the like. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and the leg portion 3113f is the copper foil of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Since there is no contact with the foil 3114d, even if friction occurs between the leg 3113f and the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f due to vibrations in the pachinko machine 1, the friction causes the copper foil 3114d (and the coating film) to wear out. It will not peel or peel off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid problems such as disconnection of the circuit for light emission of the first LED 3114a or the like, or short circuit due to the peeled copper foil 3114d. The desired light emission performance can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, since the white coating film is provided on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the white color of the coating film reflects forward the light irradiated to the front side of the rear decorative substrate 3114. By brightening the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (rear-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be decorated with brighter light emission.

In addition, the white coating film allows the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b provided on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the circuit pattern, etc. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of making the decoration of the back movable decoration 3110 look good and sufficiently exhibiting the decoration effect because the decoration can be made difficult to see through.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate-shaped plate provided between the decoration body 3111 (decoration sheet 3112) of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100 and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 Because the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with the penetrating first LED housing portion 3113c and second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted. , Compared to the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted are formed in a bottomed concave shape that does not penetrate, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can increase the volume (heat volume) of the space into which is inserted, and can diffuse the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. At this time, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, the volume (thermal volume) of the space into which the first LEDs 3114a are inserted can be increased. Heat from the LED 3114a can be easily diffused. Therefore, since the heat from the first LED3114a and the second LED3114b can be made difficult to be accumulated, the accumulated heat makes the light emission of the first LED3114a and the second LED3114b unstable, and the first LED3114a and the second LED3114b Damage can be reduced, the first LED 3114 a and the second LED 3114 b can be reliably emitted as intended, and the decoration body 3111 (back rear movable decoration body 3110) can be reliably illuminated, and the player can be entertained by the illumination decoration (illumination performance) by the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 is arranged so as to be continuous with the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a that emits light in the direction along the front surface is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a. The leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the main body portion 3113a is brought into contact with the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the rear decorative substrate 3114, so that the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are brought into contact with each other. Since a gap is formed between and, the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be discharged through the gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent the heat from accumulating from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and reduce the unstable light emission and damage. As described above, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can surely illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, and the luminous decoration (luminous performance) by the back rear movable decorative body 3110. can be enjoyed by the player and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the rear decorative substrate 3114, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decorative body 3111 are provided on the rear movable decorative body 3110, by moving the rear movable decorative body 3110, the generation of wind Since the front side and the rear side of the back decoration board 3114 can be ventilated to release the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. is difficult to accumulate. It is possible to reduce the unstable light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b due to the accumulated heat and damage to the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. Operation and effects can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the electronic component 3114e for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e does not affect the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. It is possible to prevent the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from malfunctioning due to the heat from the electronic component 3114e, thereby achieving the same effects as described above.

In addition, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, a narrow portion is formed between the first LED housing portions 3113c in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The light guide radiation plate 3113 can be made difficult to be damaged.

In addition, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c correspond to the light guide radiation plate 3113, respectively. The rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (body portion 3113a) and the front surface of the substrate body 3114c can be brought as close as possible by inserting them into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d. , the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the rear surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 (rear rear movable decoration body 3110) can be reduced.

In addition, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, even if a dark color such as black is used as the electronic component 3114e, it can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the appearance of the decoration body 3111 (the back movable decoration body 3110), and to improve the appearance of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 to sufficiently exhibit the decoration effect. .

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first decorative projections 3111a (metal On the rear side of the decorative portion 3111d), the first LED 3114a is mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 with the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 interposed therebetween, and the metallic decorative portion 3111d is visible from the front to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing portion 3113c from the front by the metal decoration portion 3111d, and the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing portion 3114a can be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to prevent the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (rear-rear movable decorative body 3110) from being spoiled by the visible part 3113c, thereby avoiding the deterioration of the appearance and ensuring the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111.例文帳に追加This allows the player to enjoy the decoration of the decoration body 3111, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a shape along the first decorative projection 3111a of the decoration 3111, even if the first LED housing portion 3113c can be seen through the decoration 3111, Since the first LED housing portion 3113c is along the first decorative projection 3111a, the first LED housing portion 3113c looks like a part of the decoration by the first decorative projection 3111a, and the player can It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the first LED housing part 3113c, and it is possible to avoid that the decorativeness of the decoration body 3111 is spoiled and the appearance deteriorates. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can exert the same functions and effects as described above.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the third decorative projection 3111c is surrounded by the first decorative projection 3111a (metal decoration 3111d), the metal decoration 3111d acts as a frame to make the third decorative projection 3111c stand out. be able to. Then, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a are mounted so as to irradiate a portion of the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c with light, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 is emitted from the first LEDs 3114a. Light is emitted into the main body portion 3113a in the direction along the front surface, and the light emitted inside the main body portion 3113a in the direction along the front surface is emitted forward by the plurality of reflection portions 3113e of the main body portion 3113a. The light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused in a wide range as much as possible at a portion behind the third decorative projection 3111c in the main body 3113a and then radiated forward. A wide range of the decorative projections 3111c can be decorated with uniform brightness, and the third decorative projections 3111c surrounded by the metal decorative portions 3111d of the decorative body 3111 can be made more conspicuous. The decoration effect can be exhibited more, and the player can enjoy the decoration of the decoration body 3111 (back rear movable decoration body 3110), thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest. At this time, since light is emitted from the first LEDs 3114a in the direction along the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the point-like light source of the first LEDs 3114a can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111. can be reduced. As described above, the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be evenly decorated with light, so that the player can enjoy the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3111, and the game is aroused. can be suppressed.

In addition, when the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 is decorated with light emission by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 Since the leg portion 3113f projecting backward is provided in the portion irradiated with the light from the LED 3114a, the area of the portion (the light receiving portion 3113i) irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a is widened by the leg portion 3113f. This allows more light from the first LED 3114 a to enter the main body 3113 a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 . Therefore, the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 can radiate more light forward from the first LED 3114a, so that the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated with brighter light. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by showing the player the luminous decoration with a higher production effect.

In addition, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d and penetrate in the front-rear direction in a shape along the metal decoration portion 3111d. , the brightness of the light-emitting decoration can be varied across the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (metal decoration portions 3111d). More specifically, when the light traveling in the direction along the front surface inside the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 reaches the portion (inner peripheral surface) of the first LED housing portion 3113c penetrating back and forth, A portion of the light is reflected toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a by its inner peripheral surface, and the rest of the light is emitted toward the inside of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side of the first LED housing portion 3113c, the inner peripheral surface causes a part of the light to be emitted inside the first LED housing portion 3113c. , and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light inside the main body portion 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c, the amount of light is greatly reduced and the light is guided to the opposite side, and the opposite side of the first LED housing portion 3113c becomes dark. . For this reason, when the first LEDs 3114a are provided on both sides of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, if only the first LEDs 3114a on one side emit light, the one side becomes brighter than the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. At the same time, the other side becomes dark, and when only the first LED 3114a on the other side is made to emit light, the other side becomes brighter than the first LED housing portion 3113c and the one side becomes darker, and when both the first LEDs 3114a are made to emit light, the first LED housing portion 3113c becomes brighter on both sides. Further, since the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d, as described above, the first LEDs 3114a are appropriately caused to emit light so that the metal decoration portion 3111d serves as a border. It is possible to illuminate only one side, illuminate only the other side, or illuminate both sides, so that the player can see a variety of lighting effects, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored and lose interest. can be suppressed.

Since each of the plurality of third decorative projections 3111c is surrounded by the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative projection 3111a), the first decorative projection 3111a is formed between the third decorative projections 3111c. The light from the first LED 3114a for decorating the other third decorative projection 3111c with light reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind this portion. Therefore, only the predetermined third decorative projections 3111c (the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112) can be illuminated in a favorable state. Therefore, it is possible to make the plurality of third decorative projections 3111c luminous decoration in a predetermined order, or to suggest a predetermined message to the player by luminous decoration of a special third decorative projection 3111c. Therefore, it is possible to show the player more colorful lighting effects, to prevent the player from getting tired of the game, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when the second LED 3114b of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is caused to emit light, the light passes through the second LED housing portion 3113d through which the light guide radiation plate 3113 penetrates, and directly reaches the rear surface of the decoration body 3111 (decoration sheet 3112). As a result, the portion of the decorative body 3111 that is irradiated with the light from the second LED 3114b can be brighter than the portion that is decorated with the first LED 3114a. Therefore, since it is possible to show to the player the portion that is planarly decorated with the first LED 3114a and the portion that is decorated with the dot-like light emission with the second LED 3114b, the luminous decoration of the decoration body 3111 can be sharpened. It is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, enhance the performance effect of the luminous decoration, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, the metal decoration portion 3111d can make the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing portion 3113c difficult to see from the front. Even if the dimension (thickness) of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) is reduced, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) is not impaired, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be fully exhibited. Therefore, the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the rear surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 in the back-rear movable decoration 3110 can be reduced, so that the back-rear movable decoration in the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. 3110 can be arranged more freely.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transparent decoration body 3111 in the back rear movable decoration body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100, the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes most forward and the first decoration Three decorative projections each having a curved front surface, a second decorative projection 3111b projecting smaller than the projection 3111a and a third decorative projection 3111c projecting smaller than the second decorative projection 3111b. Since the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a has a metal decorative portion 3111d by foil stamping, the portion where the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided remains transparent. That is, since one decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration portion 3111d and the transparent portion (light-transmitting decoration portion) is formed, the structure is such that the metal decoration portion and the light-transmitting decoration portion are assembled in the conventional manner. Since there is no assembly structure, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction, and as a result, the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the decorative body 3111 (rear movable decorative body 3110) in the pachinko machine 1, so that the decorative body 3111 can be arranged in a part that is not arranged in the conventional pachinko machine. Since the decorative body 3111 is arranged at an unexpected part, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, the pachinko machine can be easily selected by the player as the pachinko machine to be played, and appeal to the player. A pachinko machine 1 with high power can be provided.

In addition, a metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decoration projection 3111a of the three decoration projections of the decoration body 3111, and the metal decoration portion follows the front surface of the first decoration projection 3111a. Since the 3111d is curved, the light inside the pachinko machine 1 and the light inside the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reflected in various directions, and the metal decoration part 3111d can be glittered. In addition to being able to make it shine, the three-dimensional effect of the metal decoration part 3111d (first decorative projection part 3111a) can be emphasized, and the metal decoration part 3111d with three-dimensional effect gives a high-class feeling (premium feeling) to the player. can strongly attract the interest of

When the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on both the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the decoration of the decorative body 3111 has different metallic luster in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the feeling of depth can be increased for the decoration, and the three-dimensional decoration can make it easier to attract the player's interest.

In addition, the transparent decorative body 3111 has a first decorative projection 3111a, a second decorative projection 3111b, and a third decorative projection 3111c with different amounts of forward projection. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided, the three decorative protrusions having different protrusion amounts can give the decoration of the decorative body 3111 a three-dimensional effect. As a result, the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be presented to the player. can reduce the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decoration body 3111, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the decoration body 3111 can be increased, and the decorative effect of the decoration body 3111 can be fully exhibited, thereby strongly attracting the interest of the player. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be achieved.

In addition, a metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the first decoration projection 3111a that projects most forward among the decoration projections of the decoration body 3111, and the portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d projects most forward. To make the part 3111d more conspicuous, to make the difference in appearance between the metal decoration part 3111d and parts other than the metal decoration part 3111d appear larger, and to give the decoration of the decoration body 3111 a more three-dimensional effect. can be done. Therefore, even if the dimension of the decoration body 3111 in the front-rear direction is reduced, the three-dimensional decoration can be displayed. The pachinko machine 1 that can be played can be easily realized.

Furthermore, as described above, the dimension of the decoration 3111 in the front-rear direction can be reduced (thickness is reduced) to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement. Since many presentation members are provided, various presentations can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and reducing interest.

In addition, since the first decorative projection 3111a is provided with the metal decoration 3111d, the second decorative projection 3111b and the third decorative projection 3111c, which are not provided with the metal decoration 3111d, protrude forward. The resulting lens effect imparts a sense of depth to the pattern of the decoration on the decoration sheet 3112 provided behind, and the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 make the decoration with a more three-dimensional effect visible to the player. be able to. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 is sheet-like, even if the decorative sheet 3112 is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, an increase in thickness (dimension) in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. As described above, it is possible to provide a production member (rear rear movable decorative body 3110) composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a thin thickness in the front-rear direction, and a pachinko machine having the same effects as described above. can be 1.

In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 having the auxiliary decorative portions (the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b) is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b can be It is possible to reduce the rear side of the decorative body 3111 being seen through the transparent side surface of the one decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, even when the decoration 3111 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side of the decoration 3111 can be obscured by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, so that the appearance of the decoration of the decoration 3111 deteriorates. This can be avoided, and the decoration effect of the decoration of the decoration body 3111 can be fully exhibited.

In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, the first decorative projection is formed by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. It is possible to give the player the illusion that the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of 3111a. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 outside the metal decoration portion 3111d in a front view, the metal decoration portion is formed by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. 3111d can be shown wide. For this reason, the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 can show decorations with a higher decorative effect to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of the player is provided. can provide.

Furthermore, since the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 is formed by foil stamping, the metal decoration portion 3111d can be easily formed as compared with the case of immersion in a plating bath or vapor deposition of vaporized metal. , an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the hot stamping device for foil-stamping the metal decorative portion 3111d is equipped with a flat elastic hot plate, the hot plate contacts the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111. When it comes into contact with the hot plate, the surface of the hot plate is elastically deformed so that it becomes a shape that follows the curved front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a, and the metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred to the curved front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. It can be transferred (foil stamped) in good condition so that it adheres to the surface. In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by foil stamping using a hot stamping device, the transfer sheet having the metal foil is first brought into contact with the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the transfer sheet is pulled. Therefore, the metal foil can be transferred cleanly without wrinkles, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be made to have a good appearance.

In addition, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side is a flat surface having elasticity, even if the shape of the first decorative projection 3111a is different, the transfer sheet can be transferred without exchanging the hot plate. of metal foil can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible to easily respond to model changes, design changes, etc., and to suppress an increase in costs.

Furthermore, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side is elastic, the hot plate moves to the first decorative projection according to the distance to move the hot plate toward the decorative body 3111 side. Depending on the strength with which the first decorative projection 3111a is pressed, the amount (depth) of the first decorative projection 3111a immersed into the hot plate can be varied, and the hot plate in the first decorative projection 3111a (decorative body 3111) can be changed. can be widened or narrowed. That is, it is possible to freely change the range of foil stamping on the decorative body 3111 (decorative protrusion projecting forward). As a result, when it is desired to change the range in which the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided due to model change, design change, etc., the range of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily changed by changing the relative amount of movement of the hot plate. can.

Further, as described above, the elastic surface of the hot plate makes it possible to freely change the range of foil stamping on the decorative body 3111 (first decorative projection 3111a, etc.). When the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the decorative projection 3111b, the metal decorative portion 3111d can have different colors between the first decorative projection 3111a and the second decorative projection 3111b. More specifically, in the prior art, when it is attempted to form metal decoration portions of different colors on one member (decoration body), for example, after forming a metal layer of a first color on the entire surface, a masking process is performed. By forming a second color metal layer over the entire surface and removing the masking, it is possible to differentiate the color between the masked and unmasked areas. Alternatively, after forming a first color metal layer on the entire surface, a second color metal layer is formed thereon, and a part of the second color metal layer is peeled off by laser peeling or the like. The color can be made different between the peeled portion and the non-peeled portion. However, even if any of the techniques as described above are used, there is a problem that the manufacture of the decorative body is troublesome and the cost increases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elastic surface of the hot plate can freely change the range of foil stamping on the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the like. Using the transfer sheet having the metal foil of the color of , the hot plate is moved so as to be immersed in the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the metal foil of the first color is transferred to the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the first decorative protrusion 3111b. Transfer to the decorative protrusion 3111a, and then, using a transfer sheet having a second color metal foil, only the first decorative protrusion 3111a is immersed without contacting the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The hot plate is moved so as to transfer the second color metal foil to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As a result, it is possible to easily form the metal decorative portion 3111d having different colors for the first decorative projection 3111a and the second decorative projection 3111b, suppress an increase in cost, and further improve decorativeness. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by foil stamping, the metal foil is left unpeeled in areas other than the metal decoration portion 3111d, compared to the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is left by laser peeling. Therefore, deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced. More specifically, when laser peeling is used, if the front surface of the decoration 3111 to be peeled has unevenness such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the focal length of the laser varies depending on the position of the decoration 3111. As a result, the metal layer may not be sufficiently peeled off at a portion distant from (or close to) the focal length by more than a predetermined amount, resulting in unsatisfactory appearance due to residual peeling. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only at the required portion by foil stamping, and it is not necessary to peel off the metal foil after foil stamping to form a transparent portion, which makes the appearance good. A decoration 3111 can be formed.

In addition, as described above, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arrangement can be increased. position) and the appearance position visible from the player side, the metal decoration part 3111d can be provided by moving the back movable decoration 3110 to the appearance position. The appearance (visibility) of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) with high decorativeness makes the player think that something good will happen, and gives the player a sense of anticipation for the game. can be made to raise and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back rear movable decoration body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100, the flat plate-like decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration part 3111d on the front surface is provided with a flat light guide radiation plate. 3113 and the rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided, the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer circumference of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended rearward from the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended. Since the flange portion 3115b extends forward from the covering decoration base 3115 between the flange portion 3113b and the outer periphery of the rear decoration substrate 3114, the distance from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the rear decoration substrate 3114 is large. The root of the creepage distance EL advances rearward outside the flange portion 3113b, turns back inside the flange portion 3113b at the rear end of the flange portion 3113b, advances forward between the flange portions 3113b and 3115b, At the front end of the portion 3115b, it becomes a meandering route that turns back to the inside of the flange portion 3115b. distance) at which it is possible to block At this time, a decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface, and a back and rear decorative substrate 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b for decorating the decorative body 3111 with light emission are mounted, Since the decorative body base 3115 covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided on the rear movable decorative body 3110 which tends to generate static electricity by moving in the vertical direction, the movable decorative body 3110 Static electricity is easily accumulated, and when static electricity is accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d, the accumulated static electricity is discharged at once because of its high conductivity, and the discharge voltage increases, so that the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b However, as described above, since the creeping distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long, the metal decoration portion 3111d It is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the back from being discharged to the rear decorative substrate 3114, and prevent damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114. Thus, the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 having the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reliably decorated with light emission, and the player can see the light emission decoration ( luminous effect) can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward so as to form a predetermined decoration. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the portion 3111a, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the rear decorative substrate 3114 is increased by the length of the front-rear direction of the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made longer and that can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

In addition, since the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the decorative body base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. In addition, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in other members (for example, the effect display device 1600) provided behind the decoration base 3115 from being discharged to the rear decoration substrate 3114. Damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. of the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to the discharge of static electricity can be more reliably prevented.

Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit pattern on the rear decorative substrate 3114 is prevented from coming into contact with (the leg portion 3113f of) the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, the metal decorative portion The creeping distance EL from 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be increased even a little, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the copper foil 3114d of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided so as not to contact the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, vibrations from inside and outside the pachinko machine 1 act. However, friction does not occur between the leg portion 3113f and the copper foil 3114d, and the friction does not cause the copper foil 3114d to wear out and break the circuit. It is possible to prevent the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from not emitting light.

In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metal decorative portion 3111d, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that transmit light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, it is possible to give a high-class feeling by the luster of the metal decoration part 3111d, and to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be used as the second decoration projection. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of making a decoration 3111 (rear rear movable decoration 3110) conspicuous by luminous decoration of a part 3111b and a third decoration projection 3111, and strongly attracting a player's interest. can be done.

Furthermore, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward in a predetermined decorative shape, the metal decorative portion 3111d is given a three-dimensional effect. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of making the decoration part 3111d more conspicuous, enhancing the high-class feeling of the metal decoration part 3111d, and strongly attracting the attention of the players.

In addition, since the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115 doubly surround the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion. 3113b and the flange portion 3115b can be hidden from the player's side, and the appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the light guide radiation plate 3113 that diffuses the light, the light from the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is diffused and Since the metal decoration portion 3111d, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be irradiated with light from the light, the entire decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) is illuminated with uniform brightness. Thus, the appearance of the luminous decoration can be improved, and the performance effect by the luminous performance of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be further enhanced, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed. .

In addition, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 extends rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 that diffuses the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and radiates it forward, Part of the light incident on the inside of the light emitting plate 3113 is radiated to the outside from the flange portion 3113b, so that the flange portion 3113b can also be decorated with light. It is possible to make it more difficult to see from the player side, and the flange part 3113b is also decorated with light emission, so that the appearance of the light emission decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved, and the player can be entertained and entertained. A decrease can be suppressed.

The back movable decoration 3160, the back movable decoration 3170, and the back movable decoration 3180 can also achieve the same effect as described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100, a transparent light guide radiation A plate 3113 and a rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided. is inserted to accommodate the side-view type first LED 3114a. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 are caused to emit light, the light from the first LEDs 3114a is emitted from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113. and is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. Light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 passes through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 that constitute the decorative members, and is irradiated forward, so that the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The light-emitting decorative members (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) are decorated with light.

At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflection portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decoration body Since the 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are decorated with light emission, the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 compared to the case where the first LED 3114a emits light toward the front. The distance until the light is emitted forward can be lengthened, and the light from the first LED 3114 a can be widely diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 . Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is caused to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of point-like light emission. The sheet 3112 can be evenly decorated with luminescence to make it look beautiful, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In the rear movable decorative body 3110, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the plate-like decorative members (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front-rear direction is reduced. This makes it easy to secure a space for arranging the back rear movable decoration 3110, and arranges other production members (back upper front rotary decoration 3410, back upper rear rotary decoration 3440, etc.). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can easily secure a space for playing and which can entertain the players more by providing various performance members.

Furthermore, the decorative member (back rear movable decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has embossed portions such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since it is composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first outline portion 3112a, the embossed portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decorative portion 3150, and the embossed portion can provide a three-dimensional effect. A sense of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided behind by the lens effect. Therefore, the embossed portion of the decorative body 3111 and the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 allow the player to see a three-dimensional decoration (decorative portion 3150) with a sense of depth. Even if the dimension in the front-rear direction) is reduced, the decoration effect does not deteriorate, and the player's interest can be attracted and entertained. It is possible to reliably achieve the effects described above.

In addition, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as a first contour portion 3112a behind the decoration body 3111 having embossed portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the transparent decoration 3112 is provided, the decoration 3111 can be made to look like it is colored with the pattern color of the decoration sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decoration 3111, and the cost of the decoration 3111 can be reduced. can be made In addition, by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration portion 3150) of the decoration body 3111 (rear rear movable decoration body 3110) can be easily changed. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily adapted.

In addition, the first outline portion 3112a of the decoration sheet 3112 has a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern as the decoration portion 3150 is displayed by interference fringes of light. Light from the hologram of the first contour portion 3112a, light from other LEDs and effect display devices 1600, etc. provided in the pachinko machine 1, light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. By hitting the portion of , a predetermined hologram can be seen by the interference fringes of light, so the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved by the hologram, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the hologram Thus, a three-dimensional effect can be imparted to a part of the decorative part 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and even if the movable decorative body 3110 is made thin, the player does not feel thinness.

Furthermore, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by a hologram, the holograms are the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having the embossed portion such as 3111c, the lens effect of the embossed portion can impart a sense of depth to the pattern such as the hologram, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest. Possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique to form the hologram portion, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

In addition, in the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened, and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the transparent decorative body The pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be used to decorate up to the outer periphery of the 3111, and since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (the decorative part 3150), the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is given a sense of openness. It can be used and can make the decoration look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, and the decorative effect of the movable rear decorative body 3110 can be fully exhibited, and the movable rear decorative body can be exhibited. The decoration of 3110 can strongly attract the player's interest, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player can be provided.

In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, light is generated between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. The pattern of the first contour part 3112a of the decoration sheet 3112 can be more easily seen through the transparent decoration body 3111, and the decoration effect of the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112 can be fully exhibited. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, it is possible to minimize the front-to-rear dimension of the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 and realizing the above-described effects.

Furthermore, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and the design of the decorative sheet 3112 can decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111). Therefore, by making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back movable decorative body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. It is possible to show the decoration to the player, to give a visual impact to attract the attention of the player, to entertain the player with a large decoration, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest.

In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED accommodation portions 3113c in which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are accommodated from behind, the light guide radiation plate 3113 accommodates the first LEDs 3114a. By accommodating the first LED 3114a in the portion 3113c from behind, it is possible to bring the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 closer to each other as much as possible. The thickness in the direction can be made thin, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably embodied.

In addition, the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated in the first LED accommodation portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED accommodation portion 3113c into the plate thickness. Therefore, compared to the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (for example, the central portion) where light from the outer peripheral surface does not easily reach. However, by providing the first LED housing part 3113c in the part and irradiating the light from the inner surface, the part can be brightly emitted, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) can be evenly decorated with light.

Furthermore, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is of the side-view type, the first LED 3114a can be accommodated only by accommodating the first LED 3114a in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and emitting light. A pachinko machine 1 capable of emitting light from the inner surface (light receiving portion 3113i) of the portion 3113c in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and having the above-described effects can be realized without fail. be able to.

In addition, substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e. Even if the decoration (decorative part 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflecting part 3113e, and the change in the decoration of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be easily dealt with. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

It should be noted that the back movable decorative body 3160 and the back movable decorative body 3170 can also achieve the same effect as described above.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the game machine is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, as the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, the third decorative projection 3111c, and the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 are used. and the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, but limited to this not something to do. For example, the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 may be made into one decoration member, and the decoration part 3150 may be provided on the decoration member.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a receiving port (general prize winning port, starting port, variable winning port (variable starting port, large When a game medium is received in the receiving slot, the player receives benefits (payout of the game medium, open/close operation of the variable winning slot, etc.). Since the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, etc.) is given, the player can enjoy the operation of inserting the game medium so that the game medium can be received in the desired receiving port. ing. As a game machine of this kind, there is a decorative member whose surface is plated with metal and a notch penetrating back and forth is closed by a transparent lens portion; and a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-223485). According to the technique of this document, the appearance of the decorative member can be improved by the brilliance of the metal plating on the decorative member, and the decoration of the decorative member (lens portion) by the light emission of the LEDs can enhance the interest of the player. can attract and entertain By the way, in the case of a decorative member having a metal decoration portion by metal plating on the surface, as in the technique of this document, when static electricity is accumulated on the surface of the decorative member, the metal decoration portion has high conductivity. Therefore, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface is discharged at once, and the voltage (discharge voltage) of the discharge (spark) becomes high. In the technique of this document, since the decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the decorative member plated with metal, the metal plating and the decorative substrate are as close as possible, so the decorative member ( There is a risk that static electricity accumulated in the metal plating will be discharged between the metal plating and the decorative substrate, causing sparks. Therefore, sparks (discharge) are generated between the metal plating and the decorative substrate, which damages the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, making it impossible to perform the luminous decoration (luminous effect) of the decorative member. As a result, the player cannot be entertained, and there is a risk that the player's interest is lowered.

[Method of electrical connection between body frame and game board 5]
Next, a method of electrically connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided on the body frame. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically electrically connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board that is connected to the body frame 4, and a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the body frame side relay board arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the body frame 4. is provided.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 (not shown) is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 is played. Each terminal of the board-side drawer connector (convex type) is electrically connected to each terminal PN of the body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 .

For example, the main body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN of the main body frame 4 will be described. In addition, it has a box-shaped main body DCNa that is long in the left-right direction, and a plate-like base body DCNb that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear surface side of the box-shaped main body DCNa to form an English letter T shape as a whole. there is

Around the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa, a game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is provided from the front surface of the opening DCNaa toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa for a predetermined distance. Inclined portions DCNaaa are respectively formed for guiding toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa. The game board side drawer connectors of the game board 5 are connected to the central part (one place) and the left and right parts (one place on the left part and one place on the right part) of the inner upper surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa. (convex type) is turned upside down in a direction different from the normal direction and inserted into the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is prevented from being turned upside down and inserted into the DCN. The horizontal position of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 when it is inserted into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in the correct direction. A groove DCNaab is formed from the vicinity of the front surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa to prevent misalignment and enhance the engagement between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5. They are formed toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa.

On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa, pin-type terminals PN are arranged in two rows in the left-right direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (six pin-type terminals PN are arranged in one row in the left-right direction). ) pass through the box-like body DCNa and the base body DCNb.

Mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba are formed on the left and right sides of the base body DCNb, respectively. When mounting the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB (see Fig. 209), the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is first inserted into the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba. A rivet (not shown) is inserted from the front of the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), and the end portion is crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface) of the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). As a result, the body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209).

Also, on the back surface of the base body DCNb, when mounting the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), the body frame side drawer A cylindrical protruding portion DCNbb is formed so that the connector (concave type) DCN is mounted in the regular direction.

In addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) is electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Inline Package) type small connector is mounted, and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) type) and each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side are electrically connected to connect the game board via a DIP type small connector and a wiring (harness) not shown. Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed by the main control board 1310 provided in 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the body frame 4 .

In addition, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the body frame 4, and various power supplies from the power supply board 630 It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) supplied to various boards provided on the game board 5, and is shown separately from the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. A body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' not shown is provided on a body frame side relay board KB' (not shown) that is separate from the body frame side relay board KB. This body frame side relay board KB' is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN' in addition to the body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN'. type small connector is mounted, and is electrically connected to each decorative substrate and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 via a wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The drawer connector (convex type) is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) of the main body frame 4, and is connected to each terminal of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (not shown). By electrically connecting each terminal PN of (concave type) DCN', a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and a door are connected via a DIP type small connector and a wiring (harness) not shown. Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals and detection signals are formed by various decorative substrates, various sensors, various speakers, and the like provided in the frame 3 . The structure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) is the same as that of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'. is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB' (not shown) is the same as the method of fixing the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets). there is

Also, a method of fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to the game board side relay board (not shown); Another game board side relay board (not shown) of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (this other game board side relay board is , the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. The fixing method to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is the same as the fixing method (fixing method using rivets) to the body frame side relay board KB.

The use of rivets when fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) is because the drawer connector is used to connect the game board 5 to the main body. Although the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be electrically connected automatically just by mounting the game board 5 on the frame 4, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer of the game board 5 is removed. A large force may be applied from the connector (convex type) to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side. This is to prevent the soldered surface of the terminal PN from peeling off from the rear surface (solder surface) of the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). A bolt and nut are used to fix the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) is shown in the figure. In the case of fixing to the game board side relay board which does not, there is a drawback that the nut may be loosened when the game board 5 is attached to or removed from the body frame 4.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, a pin type is used as each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side. For example, when each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is used as a terminal and each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 is used as a contact, the pachinko machine 1 When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 with the power turned on, the contacts between the terminals and the contacts (specifically, a large current (rush current) flows in the contacts for various power supply lines) are welded. becomes. If the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 4 in this welded state, the contact of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN may be bent and broken, or the game board 5 may be broken. When removing from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the contact is peeled off and damaged, making the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN unusable.

In addition, if the terminals and contacts are welded together, the connector may be damaged, which may cause various control boards to malfunction or damage the electronic components mounted on the various control boards. problem that needs to be established.

In the present embodiment, the above-described problem does not occur at all by using pin type terminals PN for the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side. In other words, even if an operator mistakenly attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body The terminals PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the frame 4 are not welded, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit for preventing welding.

[Solder short circuit prevention]
Next, solder short-circuit prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 209 shows diagrams (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridges of terminals of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side. FIGS. 4(d) to 4(f) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the miniature connector of FIG. In FIG. 209, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for ease of viewing. Also, in FIG. 209, the solid arrow indicates the direction in which solder flows when the substrate is poured into the solder bath, and the dashed-dotted arrow indicates the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath.

As described above, the body frame side relay board KB arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the body frame 4 includes the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 as well as this body frame side drawer connector ( Concave type) A small DIP type connector that is electrically connected to the DCN is mounted. The terminals of this DIP type small connector are pin type terminals arranged in two rows. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba formed in the base body DCNb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the same straight line in the horizontal direction of the body frame side relay board KB. and a columnar projecting portion DCNbb are arranged (predetermined position for drawer connector), whereas the DIP type small connector is arranged in the vertical direction on the body frame side relay board KB, that is, the DIP type small connector Each terminal lined up in two rows of the small connector is arranged so that each terminal PN lined up in two rows of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is rotated 90 degrees (predetermined position for small connector) .

When the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB at a predetermined position for the drawer connector, each of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted. Terminals PN are inserted into through holes KTH1 having lands (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “lands KTH1”), and the columnar projecting portion DCNbb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the positioning hole. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN's mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba and the mounting holes KBa, KBa formed at positions corresponding to the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba communicate with each other to form the main body. Rivets (not shown) are inserted from the front of the frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN into the mounting through-holes DCNba, DCNba, respectively, and the ends are crimped and fixed to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame-side relay board KB. . When a DIP type small connector is placed on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, each terminal of the DIP type small connector is provided with a through hole KTH2 having a land. (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KTH2”).

When the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at the predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, there are two stages in the vertical direction, the first stage from the bottom. The six terminals PN in one row and the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. On the other hand, when a DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for a small connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, there are six stages in the vertical direction, and the first stage from the bottom. Two terminals PN in the first row, two terminals PN in the second row on the second row from the bottom, two terminals PN on the third row on the third row from the bottom, and two terminals PN on the fourth row from the bottom Two terminals PN in the fourth row, two terminals PN in the fifth row from the bottom, two terminals PN in the fifth row from the bottom, and two terminals PN in the sixth row from the bottom are arranged in parallel. becomes.

On the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector, and a DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for the small connector. When placed, each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each terminal of the DIP type small connector protrude from the rear surface (solder surface) KBy. In this state, each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each land KTH1 are relayed to the body frame side by flowing the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB to the solder bath. To be able to solder to the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the substrate KB, and to solder each terminal and each land KTH2 of the DIP type small connector to the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay substrate KB on the body frame side. can be done.

The direction in which the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath is from below the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. It is directed to the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row, and is the first row from the bottom from the two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom of the small DIP type connector. It is oriented toward the two terminals of the first row. In other words, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final row, and in the DIP type small connector, they are the first row from the bottom. The two terminals in the first row are the terminals in the final stage.

When the back surface (solder surface) of the board is poured into the solder bath, pin-type terminals such as the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and DIP type small connector terminals are aligned and placed in the solder bath. If the solder is flown downward, there is a risk that solder bridges will occur along the flow direction, particularly between the terminal in the final stage and the terminal in the preceding stage. Therefore, a solder escape pattern is formed on the terminal in the final stage.

In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as described above, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final stage. Each land KTH1 is connected to a rectangular solder escape pattern KNP1 whose width is the same as the outer diameter of the land KTH1. They are formed on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB so that the land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are electrically connected.

In the DIP type compact connector, as described above, the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final stage. The solder escape pattern KNP2 having a rectangular shape that is long in the direction and whose width is the same as the outer diameter of the land KTH2 is connected (that is, each land KTH2 of the two terminals in the first row and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are connected to each other). KNP2 are electrically connected to each other), and are formed on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB.

Thus, by forming a solder escape pattern on the terminal in the final stage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges in the terminal in the final stage and contribute to the prevention of solder short circuits. may occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each step by silk printing on the resist (countermeasure 1 by silk printing), A method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each stage by silk printing and printing vertical lines on the boundaries of lands and solder escape patterns of terminals adjacent to each other in the left and right direction (countermeasure 2 by silk printing), silk printing on resist A method of enclosing the land of each terminal and the solder escape pattern with a predetermined figure by printing and painting the area (countermeasure 3 by silk printing) can be mentioned.

[Measure 1 by silk printing]
First, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each step by silk printing on a resist (countermeasure 1 by silk printing) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 209(a), the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, and six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the six terminals PN. In other words, the horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and cross the vertical wall of the horizontal line KSH1, which looks like a mountain range. A horizontal line KSH1 at the boundary between six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. Solder bridging can be suppressed in each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical direction by the force of separating the solder when the solder tends to stay in the resist due to the wall.

As shown in FIG. 209(d), each terminal of the small DIP type connector has two terminals in the sixth row from the bottom and two terminals in the fifth row from the bottom. and a horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between and, two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and four rows from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fourth row, which are the eyes, and the fourth row, which is the fourth row from the bottom. a horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals of and the two terminals of the third row which is the third row from the bottom, A horizontal line KSH2 is drawn by silk-printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, and the two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom. Soldering surface) KBy, horizontal line KSH2 by silk printing on the boundary between two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. In other words, the horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. are connected. As a result, for example, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is poured into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and cross the vertical wall of the horizontal line KSH2, which is like a mountain range. , two terminals and lands KTH2 in the sixth row from the bottom and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fifth row from the bottom. Solder bridging can be suppressed in terminals adjacent to each other in the vertical direction by exerting a force to separate the solder when the solder tends to stay in the resist due to the walls. A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fifth row from the bottom and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fourth row from the bottom, and the fourth row from the bottom A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fourth row and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the third row from the bottom; A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between two terminals and lands KTH2 and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the second row from the bottom, and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the second row from the bottom and the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. Similarly to the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the fifth row, which is the fifth row, the vertical wall of the horizontal line KSH2, which looks like a mountain range, causes the solder to stay on the resist and separate the solder. Due to the force acting thereon, solder bridges can be suppressed in the vertically adjacent terminals and lands KTH2.

[Countermeasure 2 by silk printing]
Next, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a horizontal line is printed on the boundary of each stage by silk printing on the resist, and a vertical line is printed on the land of each terminal adjacent to the left and right and the solder escape pattern. A method (measure 2 by silk printing) of printing on the boundary of each will be described. In countermeasure 2 by silk printing, in addition to countermeasure 1 by silk printing, vertical lines are printed by silk printing on the lands of the terminals adjacent in the left-right direction and the boundaries of the solder escape patterns adjacent in the left-right direction. Measure 1 by silk printing will be omitted.

In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, in addition to the horizontal line KSH1 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. of the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row and the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row from the bottom, the terminals PN and lands KTH1 that are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction; A vertical line KSV1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the solder escape patterns KNP1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. In other words, the vertical lines KSV1 are printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. vertical walls are lined up. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder can flow over the resist and along the vertical wall of the vertical line KSV1, which looks like a mountain range. The solder flowing on the vertical wall like a mountain range of the vertical line KSV1 tries to stay in the resist by flowing to the left side of the vertical wall or the right side of the vertical wall across the vertical wall like a mountain range of the vertical line KSV1. Due to the force that separates the solder at , it is possible to suppress solder bridges in the laterally adjacent terminals PN and lands KTH1 and in the laterally adjacent solder escape patterns KNP1.

In addition to the horizontal line KSH2 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. From the two terminals and lands KTH2 in one row to the two terminals and lands KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder adjacent in the left-right direction A vertical line KSV2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the relief pattern KNP2. In other words, the vertical line KSV2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. Vertical walls are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder can flow over the resist and along the vertical wall of the vertical line KSV2, which is like a mountain range. The solder flowing on the vertical wall like a mountain range of the vertical line KSV2 tries to stay in the resist by flowing to the left side of the vertical wall or the right side of the vertical wall across the vertical wall like a mountain range of the vertical line KSV2. As a result, a force for separating the solder acts, so that solder bridges can be suppressed in the laterally adjacent terminals and lands KTH2 and in the laterally adjacent solder escape patterns KNP2.

[Measure 3 by silk printing]
Next, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridging, a method of enclosing the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal with a predetermined figure by silk printing on the resist and painting the area (measure 3 by silk printing). explain.

In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. , is surrounded by a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the body frame side. Print to fill the area excluding the area. That is, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are enclosed in a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled in, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 can be seen from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA1, each land KTH2 and each solder. The relief pattern KNP1 is a recessed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 is a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA1, and to prevent solder from flowing into each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1, which is a recessed area formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1. When the solder flows, it cannot get over the small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1 from each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1, which becomes a depressed area, and tries to stay there. Thus, solder bridging can be suppressed in each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and in the solder escape pattern KNP1 adjacent in the horizontal direction.

As shown in FIG. 209(f), in each terminal of the DIP type small connector, a land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are connected to the body frame side relay board KB. The rear surface (solder surface) KBy is surrounded by a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction by silk printing, and of the area KSA2 surrounded by this rectangular shape, the area excluding each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 is painted out. Print. That is, each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are surrounded by a rectangular area KSA2 by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP2 is printed so as to be filled in, when each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are viewed from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA2, each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP2 becomes a recessed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA2. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA2, and to prevent solder from flowing into each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which is a recessed area formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2. When the solder flows, it tries to stay on a slightly elevated plateau called the area KSA2 silk-printed from each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which becomes a depressed area, and the force of separating the solder acts. Solder bridging can be suppressed in each of the terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the direction and in the solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent in the left-right direction.

Compared to connectors that have not been subjected to measures 1 to 3 by silk printing, the silk-printed parts are extremely conspicuous in connectors that have been subjected to measures 1 to 3 by silk printing. When performing the work of visually confirming whether or not an error has occurred, the worker can quickly direct his or her line of sight because the marker serves as a mark for where to look on the board.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, when the board is flown into the solder bath, the measures 1 to 3 by silk printing described above are applied to prevent the occurrence of solder bridges and to prevent solder short circuits. Countermeasures 1 to 3 can also be used as a mark indicating which connector the worker directly solders to the board.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the board is flowed into the solder bath, the countermeasure 3 by silk printing described above is applied, and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209(c). In the enclosed area KSA1 and each terminal of the DIP type small connector, the area KSA2 enclosed in the rectangular shape shown in FIG. Instead of the rectangular shape, a region surrounded by another shape may be used to prevent solder bridging and prevent solder short-circuiting. FIG. 210 is a diagram (a) showing a modification of FIG. 209(c), and a diagram (b) showing a modification of FIG. 209(f). 210 that are the same as those in FIG. 209 are denoted by the same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 210, the solid arrow indicates the direction in which solder flows when the substrate is poured into the solder bath, and the dashed-dotted arrow indicates the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath.

In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. , and is surrounded by silk printing on the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the body frame side. The area except for the escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled. Further, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1' becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1'. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA1', and the land KTH1 and the solder escape pattern KNP1, which are recessed areas formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1', When the solder flows into the lands, the solder is separated from the lands KTH1 and the solder escape patterns KNP1, which are recessed areas, by trying to stay without getting over the small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1'. By applying force, it is possible to suppress solder bridges in the terminals PN and lands KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder escape patterns KNP1 adjacent in the horizontal direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 210(b), each terminal of the DIP type small connector has a land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and each shape of each solder relief pattern KNP2. The back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is surrounded by silk printing in a shape about three times larger, and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are excluded from the area KSA2' surrounded by this shape. Prints so that the area covered by the Also, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2' becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA2'. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing over the silk-printed area KSA2', and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which is a recessed area formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2'. When the solder flows into the solder, the solder tries to stay on a slightly elevated plateau called the area KSA2' silk-printed from each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which are recessed areas, and the force of separating the solder acts. Accordingly, solder bridging can be suppressed in each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and in the solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent in the horizontal direction.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal in the final stage and the solder escape pattern are connected to each other and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, but they are separated by a predetermined distance. may be formed by FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a modification in which the terminal in the final stage and the solder escape pattern are formed apart from each other by a predetermined distance.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a land KTH1 through which the terminal PN at the final stage of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a land KTH1 extending vertically. A solder escape pattern KNP1' having a rectangular shape whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (or may have a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1) is separated by a predetermined distance ( For example, they are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB with a distance of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH1. good too. This solder escape pattern KNP1' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211(a), the land KTH2 through which the final stage terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the width of the land KTH2, which is elongated in the horizontal direction, is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A solder escape pattern KNP2' having a rectangular shape (which may have a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) is separated by a predetermined distance (for example, a third of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). They may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB with a distance of 1 to 1/2 of the length. This solder escape pattern KNP2' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

Further, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. The solder escape pattern KNP1'' has a rectangular shape whose width is as large as the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and has a semicircular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1 (a rectangular shape whose one side is the outer diameter of the land KTH1. and may have a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1. ) on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. This solder escape pattern KNP1'' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns or a solid ground.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the land KTH2 through which the terminal at the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and the land KTH2 that is long in the left-right direction and whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A rectangular solder escape pattern KNP2'' having a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2 (having a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and having a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2). and are spaced apart by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH2), and the rear surface of the body frame side relay board KB (Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. This solder escape pattern KNP2'' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

Further, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. Solder escape pattern KNP1''' having a rectangular shape whose width is as large as the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and has a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1 (a rectangular shape whose one side is as large as the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and may have a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. This solder escape pattern KNP1''' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211(c), the land KTH2 through which the terminal at the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and the land KTH2 that is long in the left-right direction and whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A rectangular solder escape pattern KNP2''' having a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2 (having a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and having a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2). ) and are spaced apart by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) on the rear surface of the body frame side relay board KB ( (Solder surface) KBy may be formed on the copper foil surface. This solder escape pattern KNP2''' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the solder escape pattern KNP1 (KNP2) having a rectangular shape is connected to the land KTH1 (KTH2) through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted. The shape of the solder escaping pattern on the opposite side may be semicircular (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211(b)) or triangular (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211(c)).

In addition, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the direction in which the board is flowed into the solder bath (that is, the direction of the dashed-dotted arrows in FIGS. 209(a) to (c)) is determined in advance. If the board can be flowed in the opposite direction as well as in this direction (that is, if the board can be flowed into the solder bath from both directions), take measures 1 to 3 by silk printing described above. It is also possible to prevent solder short-circuit by preventing the occurrence of solder bridging. In this case, depending on the flow direction, a rectangular solder escape pattern is connected to the land through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted. The shape of the solder escape pattern on the opposite side, which is not connected to the terminal in the final stage, is semicircular (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211(b)) or triangular (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211(c)). See also.) Also, the terminal in the last stage and the solder escape pattern may be formed with a predetermined distance therebetween. The above-described solder escape pattern may be formed at both ends of the connector in the direction in which the board is flown into the solder bath. Further, when designing a board, if it is not known in which direction the board is to be flowed, the above-described solder escape patterns are formed in both directions so that the board can be flowed in either direction.

By the way, conventionally, various types of control boards such as a main control board for controlling game progress and game profits, a sub-control board for controlling effects to be executed as the game progresses, and an image control board for controlling the display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which the board is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, as in the game machine described in this document, although terminals of components are soldered by flowing various boards into a solder bath, solder bridges are formed between adjacent terminals, resulting in short circuits due to solder. was there.

[Prevention of stripping by over resist]
Next, prevention of stripping by over resist will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. FIG. First, the over resist applied to each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described, and the over resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram (a) of an over resist applied to each terminal of a drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, and a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a). FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram (a) of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of a board on which a surface mount type connector is mounted, and a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the board. FIG. 214 is a continuation of FIG. 213 and is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the YY line in c). 212 to 214, various wiring patterns and substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for ease of viewing.

[Over-resist applied to each terminal of drawer connector (concave type) on the frame side]
The over-resist applied to each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side will be explained. As shown in FIGS. KTH1".) has through holes formed in the base material KBo of the body frame side relay board KB, and the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, By removing the copper foil from the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, a land having an outer diameter KTHD1 is formed. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB are different. They have an outer diameter KTHD1 and have the same size.

On the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, a resist solution is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr. A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the resist layer KBxr corresponding to the land KTH1. In addition, on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, a resist liquid is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr, but the back surface (solder surface) is not formed. A backside (solder surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1.

In this embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the board ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB (GND) (that is, solid ground) is electrically connected to the same ground (GND) by a through-hole (not shown).

As described above, on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the area corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr has an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having a is applied. As a result, on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 can be covered with the resist. can be made uniform.

Further, on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, the area corresponding to the land KTH1 in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr has an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the back side (solder surface) side resist opening KByra is formed, over resist is applied in which the outer periphery of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. It is As a result, the resist covers the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 on the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, so that high peel strength can be applied to the land KTH1 from multiple directions. can be made uniform.

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KBo of the body frame side relay board KB are formed by bonding the copper foil surfaces, compared to the bonding between the base material KBo and the copper foil surface, the lands KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface are less. and solder joints are stronger.

By the way, when fixing the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB, rivets are used as described above. By using the drawer connector, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically established simply by mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4; Since a large force may be applied to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 when it is attached to the frame 4, this This is to prevent the soldered surfaces of the pin-type terminals PN in the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side from peeling off from the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board KB on the body frame side due to a large force.

However, by using the drawer connector, an external force is applied to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the frame-side relay board KB is separated from the base material KBo, and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface are separated from the base material KBo together with the lands KTH1. may do so.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, over resist is applied to the land KTH1 to form copper. By increasing the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the foil surface does not peel off from the base material KBo, the drawer connector can be used to connect the drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side by attaching or removing the game board 5. Even if an external force is applied, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB is the base material. It is possible to reliably prevent peeling from the KBo and peeling of various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1.

The outer diameter KTHD1 of the over-resisted land KTH1 takes into consideration the area where each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the land KTH1 and soldered. It is larger than the outer diameter of a land without over resist. This is because when the terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side is soldered to the land KTH1 on which over resist is applied, the joint area is This is to make the bonding area larger than that in the case of soldering to a land that is not over-resisted. As a result, the bonding strength to the land KTH1 on which the over resist is applied can be made greater than the bonding strength to the land on which the over resist is not applied.

Depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, when over-resist is not applied, the land has a normal outer diameter, and when over-resist is applied, it has a normal size. It is necessary to prepare a land with an outer diameter larger than the normal size at the board design stage. There is a problem in that the connection between the substrate and the land becomes insufficient, and solder failure may occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of over-resisting, for a board having even one land to which over-resisting is applied (for example, main body frame side relay board KB), all lands are , the same land as the land subjected to over resist is arranged as a land not subjected to over resist. As a result, the connection between the terminal and the land becomes sufficient, and the occurrence of defective soldering can be reliably prevented.

It should be noted that the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted is also provided with a land. is subjected to the above-described over resist. In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, there is another main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) connected to the main body frame side relay board KB' (not shown) separately from the main body frame side relay board KB. The above-described over-resist is applied to the lands of the body frame side relay board KB' (not shown). In addition, another game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) of the main body frame 4 (this other game board drawer connector (convex type) is A side drawer connector (concave type) which is different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the DCN) is mounted on another game board side relay board (not shown) (this The other game-board-side relay board is a game-board-side relay (not shown) in which the game-board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. which is different from the substrate), the above-described over resist is applied to the lands.

In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB are different. Although the outer diameter is KTHD1 and has the same size, compared to the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the body frame side relay board KB The outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy may be increased or decreased. In the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the surface) side resist opening KBxra.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of over-resisting, for a board (for example, main body frame side relay board KB) having at least one land to which over-resisting is applied, all lands are , the same land as the land on which over resist is applied is arranged as a land without over resist. A land having an outer diameter KTHD1 of a normal size smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 that is being used) may be placed. In other words, lands to which over-resist is applied and lands having an outer diameter of a normal size when over-resist is not applied may coexist. In this case, depending on the presence or absence of over resist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, the land having the outer diameter of a normal size without over resist and the land having an outer diameter of normal size with over resist applied It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage.

[Over-resist applied to fixed land of surface mount type connector housing]
213(a), (b), and FIGS. 214(c), (d), the over resist applied to the housing fixing pads KSPF of the surface mount type connector KCN mounted on the substrate KC will be described. , a pad KSP having a vertically elongated rectangular shape to which each terminal (for example, six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered; various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP; A vertically elongated rectangle fixed by soldering both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides) to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC. The housing fixing pad KSPF having a shape is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, thereby attaching each pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, and fixing each housing. Pads KSPF are formed respectively. The housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is made of non-conductive resin. Metal housing fixing portions are provided on both sides (left side and right side) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN.

Each pad KSP and the periphery KCxa of various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP are connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. ) is electrically unconnected and insulated from On the other hand, the four corners of each housing fixing pad KSPF in the periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF are fixed to each housing by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC. A thermal pattern KCxb is provided in which the pad KSPF is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) via a cross-shaped pattern. With this thermal pattern KCxb, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides respectively) are attached to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC (mounting surface) KCx. It is possible to prevent the heat that melts the solder from being removed from the outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF when the KSPF is soldered. Both sides of the housing of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are attached to the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. By soldering the surface mount type connector KCN to the board KC, the fixing of the surface mount type connector KCN to the board KC can be strengthened compared to the case where each terminal of the surface mount type connector KCN is simply soldered to the board KC. Both sides of the housing of the surface mounting type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) of the housing are electrically connected to the board ground (GND) of the board KC, and surface mounting is performed. It is also possible to enhance the shielding effect for the signals connected to each terminal of the type connector KCN.

On the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a resist liquid is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. In the area corresponding to each pad KSP, a pad surface (mounting surface side) side resist opening having the same shape as each pad KSP is formed, and an area corresponding to each housing fixing pad KSPF. is formed with a housing fixing pad surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each housing fixing pad KSPF. A resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr.

A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) are electrically connected to each other through through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

In this way, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the region of the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF has an opening rectangle smaller than the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for housing fixing pad having a shape is formed, the housing fixing pad is formed from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. An over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the KSPF is covered with the resist. As a result, on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the entire outer peripheral portion of each housing fixing pad KSPF can be covered with the resist. can be uniform for loads from

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KCo of the substrate KC are formed by bonding the copper foil surface, each pad KSP and each housing formed on the copper foil surface are more difficult than the bonding between the base material KCo and the copper foil surface. The bond between the body fixing pad KSPF and the solder is stronger.

By the way, as the board KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted, in this embodiment, for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633 and the like can be mentioned. Various wires and harnesses connected to various connectors provided on the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used when removing dust and cigarette tar accumulated on the pachinko machine 1, when performing various inspections, and the like. , is removed by an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall, and then reconnected after work. However, in most cases, staff such as game hall clerks who perform such work are unfamiliar with handling boards, and when removing various wirings and harnesses from connectors and when connecting various wirings and harnesses to connectors, , may be done by brute force (that is, with excessive force).

Then, among the plurality of connectors provided on the board KC such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, there are DIP type connectors and surface mount type connectors. is mounted on the board KC, if a staff member such as a game hall clerk performs the work described above, the force associated with inserting and removing the harness from the surface mount type connector KCN will be applied to the surface mount type connector KCN. Due to this large force, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are attached to the copper foil of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC. Each housing fixing pad KSPF formed on the surface KCxp is separated from the substrate KCo, and along with this, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC separates from the substrate KCo. In some cases, the various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp are peeled off from the substrate KCo together with the pads KSP.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, over resist is applied to the housing fixing pads KSPF so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp does not separate from the base material KCo. By increasing the peel strength, even if the surface mount type connector KCN is subjected to the force associated with the insertion and extraction of the harness to and from the surface mount type connector KCN, the peel strength is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. The housing fixing pad KSPF attached to the base does not peel off from the base material KCo, and along with this, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC peels off from the base material KCo, It is possible to reliably prevent various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp from peeling off from the base material KCo together with the pads KSP.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, the above-described over resist is applied to the housing fixing pads KSPF of the substrate KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN to which external force is applied is mounted. When a surface mount type connector into which various wirings and harnesses are inserted and removed is mounted in addition to the boards such as the control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the power supply board 630, the interface board 635, various decoration boards, and various relay boards are mounted. The above-described over resist may be applied to housing fixing pads of substrates such as substrates and various drive substrates. When a load is applied to the board of the movable body by wiring or harnesses that are electrically connected to the board of the movable body as the body moves, the housing of the board of the movable body in which a surface mount type connector is mounted. The above-described over-resist may be applied to the fixing pad, and in the case of various switches having a pressing operation part and being a surface mount type that is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate, various The above-described over resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the board for fixing the switch, and if some external force is applied to the board, the resistance, capacitor, diode, transistor, IC, etc. The above-described over resist may be applied to the pads of the board to which various terminals of the lead type and surface mount type electronic components are soldered.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF is formed in the region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. Since the housing fixing pad surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having a smaller opening rectangular shape is formed, from the outer circumference of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF Over-resisting was performed so that the outer peripheral portion of the housing fixing pad KSPF was covered with resist, but the over-resisting was not applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF, and the through hole had a land around the housing fixing pad KSPF. may be formed and over-resist may be applied to each land. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram (a) of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of a board on which a surface mount type connector is mounted in a modification, and a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the board. be. FIG. 216 is a continuation of FIG. 215 and is an enlarged view of the B part of FIG. d) is a schematic diagram (d) of a cross section taken along line ZZ in c). 215 and 216, various wiring patterns and substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for ease of viewing.

215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a) and 215(a) show a modified example in which the housing fixing pad KSPF is not over-resisted, but a plurality of through-holes having lands are formed around the housing fixing pad KSPF and each land is over-resisted. 216(b) and FIGS. 216(c) and 216(d), each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape to be soldered. pads KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, and both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are attached to the surface of the substrate KC ( housing fixing pad KSPF having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction fixed by soldering to the mounting surface), a plurality of through holes KCTH having lands (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "lands KCTH"), The solid ground connection wiring pattern that connects the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the solid ground is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Various wiring patterns connected to KSP, each housing fixing pad KSPF, each land KCTH, and each solid ground connection wiring pattern are formed. Each land KCTH is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same. The solid ground connection wiring pattern connecting the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH and the solid ground also has a function as a thermal pattern for the housing fixing pad KSPF.

For the housing fixing pad KSPF on the right side, two rows of three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and are arranged adjacent to each other on the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF. For the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side, two rows of three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other on the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

On the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a resist liquid is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in a region corresponding to the land KCTH. Also, on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a resist solution is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) resist layer KCyr. A backside (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in a region corresponding to the land KCTH. In this modification, the opening diameter of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra and the opening diameter of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra are the same size. A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) are electrically connected to each other through through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

In this way, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the surface (mounting surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH in the area corresponding to the land KCTH in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. ) side resist opening KBxra is formed, over resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. Further, on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in a region corresponding to the land KCTH in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr. Since the resist opening KCyra is formed, over-resist is applied such that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. This makes it possible to increase the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp by applying over resist to each land KCTH does not separate from the substrate KCo.

As described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and the rows are adjacent to the right housing fixing pad KSPF. , and the left housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, as described above, and the left housing fixing pad KSPF are placed next to each other on the left side of the As a result, even if the housing fixing pad KSPF is not over-resisted, each land KCTH is over-resisted, so that the housing fixing pad KSPF and each land KCTH form the solid ground connection wiring pattern described above. Due to the connection, even if the surface mount type connector KCN is subjected to the force associated with the insertion and extraction of the harness to and from the surface mount type connector KCN, the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC is formed. When the housing fixing pad KSPF attached is about to peel off from the base material KCo, the peeling strength is increased by each land KCTH formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. This makes it difficult for the housing fixing pad KSPF to separate from the base material KCo.

In this modified example, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the rear surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same. However, compared with the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC can be made larger or smaller. In addition, in this modification, the opening diameter of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The opening diameter of the backside (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter of the side resist opening KBxra.

In addition, in this modification, as described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction. are arranged adjacent to each other on the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side. Although it is arranged so as to be adjacent to the left of the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side, instead of or together with this, two lands are provided on the housing fixing pad KSPF on the right side at regular intervals along the vertical direction. Two rows in which the KCTHs are arranged may be arranged so as to be adjacent to each other above and/or below the housing fixing pad KSPF on the right side. Two rows in which two lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals may be arranged so as to be adjacent to each other above and/or below the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side.

By the way, conventionally, various types of control boards such as a main control board for controlling game progress and game profits, a sub-control board for controlling effects to be executed as the game progresses, and an image control board for controlling the display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which the substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). Since the connector provided on the board is subjected to a load due to the insertion and removal of the wiring, for example, when a person unfamiliar with handling the board removes the wiring from the connector or connects the wiring to the connector, excessive force is applied. There was a problem that the copper foil on the board peeled off due to the load on the connector.

[Configuration of peripheral control unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219. FIG. 217 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 218 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 219 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500 . 218, terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of various connectors are inserted into the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. , but is omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 having an open rear side and a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 and an electric It has a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 which is directly connected, and a base body 1502 which closes the opening of the cover body 1501 . Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 .

[Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data (peripheral data) that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is stored in the various boards mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 . Peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape with an area of about two-thirds of cover body 1501 when viewed from the back, and is arranged close to the left side of cover body 1501 . Peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 are located on the upper right side of cover body 1501, and peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape two times larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 .

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later. properly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to form the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. there is

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. , bottom side, and right side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e protrude rearward (toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a has an air-cooling fan FAN attached at a slightly upper right side of the center when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 . A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered at the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa, there are provided cylindrical predetermined through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa , it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510 .

A pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the fan mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa and attached, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal seated pan head screws (screws having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) are screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seated pan screw, comes into contact with the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN protrudes from the fan mounting recess 1501aa. can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a shorter distance than the distance from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). ), a wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 . When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which are attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front, and a volume control switch. The position corresponding to 1510d is defined as one closed, substantially horizontally long rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom) as a connector recess. 1501ac faces the opening side of cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed so as to protrude. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d. formed. The bottom surface of the connector concave portion 1501ac generally occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a sound volume adjuster. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

The cover flat plate 1501a is arranged along its lower side when viewed from the front thereof so that the positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are aligned by 1. Connector recess 1501ad is positioned lower than the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed oblong rectangular regions (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa). Further, the connector recess 1501ad and the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. are exposed from each other.

Also, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae along its left side when viewed from the front, at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . A mounting recess 1501af for mounting a wiring cover body 1503 having a laterally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae and can close the wiring draw-out opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is formed in a cylindrical shape at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover 1503, and is inserted into the through hole 1503a. dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are respectively formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is closed and a flexible flat cable (FFC) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected. An abbreviation for Cable, a flexible flat cable has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. )) so that they cannot be touched, the wiring cover body 1503 can function. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

Plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, and protrude upward and downward respectively outward with a predetermined interval in the center. In addition, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projects outward, and a hinge hook portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and projects outside are formed. The left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered on the rear surface side. On the other hand, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at positions protruding from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are opened. are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. By screwing it in, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Become. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. As a result, cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of peripheral control board 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw, so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is grounded (GND). The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where It is Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and circular copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Wiring patterns 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are mounted. 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520. Then, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are electrically connected. As a result, cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of peripheral data ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal round head screw, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 is grounded (GND). The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the cover flat plate. The rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the rear surface side of 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions that are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. The four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are surrounded by copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1530rf1 to 1530rf having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 1530rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is directed toward the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are closed. are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to secure the cover flat plate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other. The seat surface of the pan head screw made by Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal round head screw, thereby grounding the peripheral control board 1510. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. A rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the rear surface side and a rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is designed to be

In this way, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (the cover plate 1501a A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model type are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. is formed.

A cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (especially the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width of 6.5 mm in the horizontal direction, and a pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm in the vertical direction.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. FIG. Further, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are connected. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connectors formed on the cover body 1501 Gaps formed in connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, gaps formed in volume control switch 1510d provided in peripheral control board 1510, volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in cover body 1501, and liquid crystal output board 1530. The two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the gap formed in the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are taken in.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arcuate slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, The above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, gaps formed in the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, volume control switches 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, , a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap formed in the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. , and the area in the gap formed in ) are smaller than the sum of Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , when taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 The flow velocity of the air flowing into each can be kept small.

When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to blow out toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 However, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes air to be sucked in through the blades. Air may be sent out toward the control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[Base body]
The base member 1502 that closes the opening of the cover member 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in opaque black. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e project forward (back side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by base side walls 1502b to 1502e of base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the opening formed by cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501 . Thus, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is covered by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are located inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is positioned along the lower side at predetermined intervals so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board Each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. 1510y, the peripheral control board 1510 is warped due to the force when inserting the connectors for connecting the wires to these connectors CN2 to CN7 (positions that do not interfere with the protruding terminals). Disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 that are elongated in the vertical direction are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected.

An engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left side wall 1502c when the base body 1502 is viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the above-described L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Engageable.

A base side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the right base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. Through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[Various connectors]
On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501, the above-described peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding various ROM functions) and effect display control unit 1512 (various ROM functions). ), CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I / O interfaces etc. A peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on a single semiconductor chip, various programs capable of controlling the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects performed while the player is waiting), and various schedule data that define the progress of the effects. (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above), and the peripheral data provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 An SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data) stored in the ROM 1520a, and a slide system capable of adjusting the volume. A volume adjustment switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is off, a power supply generation circuit (not shown) for producing various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. I have it. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. A peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5). SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, using SPI communication and I2C communication, electrical drive sources provided on the game board 5 (for example, various motors and various solenoids, communicating via the connector CN6.) and door frames Drive data is sent to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, and the game board 5 side light emission data to the LED control IC for a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side , receives signals from various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (communicating via connector CN6) as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (via connector CN3 are communicating.) as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate for SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate for I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of non-controlled objects and the origin position are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are sent from GPIO (connector CN6 ), or output a signal from GPIO to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector with both SPI communication and GPIO), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, realizing a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can achieve a high data communication speed. Various control information (peripheral data) from a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530 are further provided. I have it. A surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 . A surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in a plurality of types of video signal formats. Examples of the multiple types of video signal systems include RGB, LVDS, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface), eDP (Embedded Display Port), and clockless systems. , four systems (four systems in total) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, the eDP method is adopted, and the RGB method is one system, the LVDS method is two systems (first LVDS method, second LVDS method), and the eDP method is one system Peripheral control board 1510 can also be created.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, there are LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. , is equipped with The peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (+37 V DC, +12 V DC, and +5 V DC) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 . LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state of DC +5V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +5V being supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which +12V DC is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +12V DC is supplied. The LEDML3 is for confirming (monitoring) the state of DC +37V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +37V being supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surface of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 The provided special connector SCN4 has a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, and the sockets and the plugs are fitted by inserting and pushing in the plugs of the corresponding connectors in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are structured such that they do not move vertically when viewed from the front of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 at the time of fitting.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs respectively, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530. (Mounting surface) The special connectors SCN4 provided on the 1530x are sockets.

The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. are mated. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is oriented forward and backward when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the machine 1 . The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. , even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum extent within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not face the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of the 1501a.

The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the plug and the socket are connected. Mate. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket moves forward and backward (pachinko machine 1 The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the direction of the rear surface and the front surface of the housing. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum extent within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the .

Here, the reasons for adopting the special connector SCN3 for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral data ROM 1520a (function of the image ROM of the effect display control section 1512 described above, etc.). including.). Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided for the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted in a plurality, Sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is less expensive than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

By adopting a NAND type flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a in this way, it is possible to reduce costs, contribute to a reduction in power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the effect of noise entering the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a special connector SCN3 socket on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the mounting surface 1510x, By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above, along with this peripheral control board 1510, the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is absorbed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when connecting, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is secured. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to display the progress of the game effect (for example, An image to convey that a jackpot game state will occur which is more advantageous than the normal state, an image to convey that the jackpot game state will not occur, and a state in which a jackpot game state will occur compared to the normal state although the jackpot game state will not occur. It is an important board for drawing images such as images that convey the fact that the game is approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration effects that are performed while the player is waiting). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via a wiring (harness). 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, thereby reducing the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector SCN4 socket provided on its surface (mounting surface) 1530x mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510x, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 must be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with a floating mechanism, it is possible to absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and pushed in. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is secured. can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected as described above. Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is said that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced compared to the case of performing a three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body can be operated) can be attached to the game board 5. It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electrical drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are mounted. The mounting surface 1520x and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are directed toward the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are directed toward the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. . As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Subsequently, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by , and metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a round head screw made by the manufacturer and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is constrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for constraining the vertical and horizontal directions. No projecting portion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error caused by such restraint is eliminated. 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are dimensional. This is because it can be absorbed with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are It is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are engaged with the base body. It is inserted into U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502 .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In the state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is covered with a metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 . A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other (surface contact). The front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y. As described above, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are brought into a conducting state. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized actions on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected through the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) when viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the side) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

Among the above-described assembling methods, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the inner space of the cover body 1501, for example, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is first placed at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear side of the cover body 1501.) side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on (mounting surface) 1520x is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is moved to the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 is (located close to the left side of the cover body 1501 when the body 1501 is viewed from the back). Even in such mounting procedures for various substrates, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, errors in the front-rear direction that occur when pushing in the plugs and sockets can be absorbed. 1520 and peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 stores the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. , and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 .

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the system of the video signal that is input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). In addition, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As for the method of the video signal input to the display device such as the effect display device, for example, as described above, there are multiple types of methods such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these multiple types of systems are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 . In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and connected to the same ground. Since it is configured to be the ground (GND), the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is sent to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) to remove the noise. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "noise countermeasure effect by peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, there is no need to equip each substrate with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which contributes to cost reduction of each substrate.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the status of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, multidirectional angles In order to confirm the state of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins from the top, they are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. As a result, modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b maintains the lighting state when DC +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Therefore, the DC +5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. can contribute to

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pins can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. can be checked through a vent 1501az having a In addition, the LEDML3, which is arranged near the special connector SCN1, maintains its lighting state when +37V DC is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. A special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have the function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply. The special connector SCN3 and the special connector SCN3 function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the board-to-board connector, so that the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ) 1520x can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided in the 1520x.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. A larger area than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) are distributed and arranged so that As a result, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be performed using a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is designed to keep the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it brightly illuminates the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having the function as a spotlight, the board-to-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is now possible to contribute to the improvement of sexuality.

A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product numbers printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and The SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c1, 1510c2 are designed so that the type and the status of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the status of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. They are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of 1510c2. As a result, modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state while the +12V direct current from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state of DC +12 V supply, but it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) and the state of the IC pin.

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

In the present embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type with a wide angle of about 120 degrees and of a type with weak directivity. is adopted, it is also suitable for use as lighting. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the rear surface of the flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By turning on the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted from the area on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the emitted light and direct it toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflecting portions (not shown) may be colored paint having a bright color such as white, or colored paint having gloss, or a metallic sheet having luster may be adhered.

In the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. , the game balls rub against each other and become charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become noise sources and be affected by noise. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data A configuration in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) is employed. As a result, noise entering through the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is suppressed by the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the like. Noise can be removed by flowing to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

[Partial removal of foil from solid ground]
By the way, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is grounded (GND) except for the wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal, the wiring pattern for supplying the power supply, and the area where various land patterns are formed. , is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as a “solid ground”), and the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is also formed of a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. , are formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as a "solid earth"), in which the area other than the area where various land patterns are formed is grounded (GND). The solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are different from each other. A plurality of through-holes (both sides (front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of peripheral control board 1510) formed on both surfaces (top (mounting surface) and back (solder surface)) of 1510 (holes (copper The same ground (GND) is established by being electrically connected through a plated hole).

Further, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side when viewed from the front. Position (that is, each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. 1510 protruding from the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the connector 1510, the force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at a position that does not interfere with the protruding terminals causes the peripheral Elongated disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed in the vertical direction to prevent the control board 1510 from warping and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected.

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above, , the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed (surface contact), and disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502 are formed. 1502aa3 are brought into contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and connected to the same ground. Since it is configured to be the ground (GND), the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is sent to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) to remove the noise. It is possible to do so.

By the way, the front surfaces of disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. A solid ground was formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in this abutted portion, and the solid ground was covered with a resist. A solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the board 1510 and covered with a resist, and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in the contact portion is covered with a resist without forming a solid ground. 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in the contact portion was covered with a resist instead of forming a solid ground. .

When electromagnetic noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and enters the solid brand. When electromagnetic wave noise intrudes through such an unexpected route, disconnection prevention ribs are formed on the base body 1502 to form electronic components susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns electrically connected to these electronic components. If the front surfaces of the portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are adjacent to the portions in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, malfunction or damage may occur.

In addition, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts which one of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 on the front side. Since it is not possible to predict whether or not the noise will enter, it is difficult to place electronic components susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns electrically connected to these electronic components away from specific disconnection prevention ribs.

A high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, whereby electromagnetic wave noise passes through the resist and becomes solid. When the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the solid-state adhesive are in contact with each other through a resist in order to intrude into the brand, a high voltage due to electromagnetic wave noise entering the base body 1502 is applied to the abutting portion. As a result, it is considered that an unnecessary loop wiring is formed through which electromagnetic noise enters from the disconnection preventing rib portion to the solid plane.

Here, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is solid. The shape of the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the shape of the solid ground at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body contacts the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface of the peripheral control board, and a schematic diagram (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 220(a), the corresponding positions and their surroundings are, as shown in FIG. 1510yp respectively. In other words, a region where a part of the solid plane is removed (removed) is formed on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

In these foil-free areas 1510ya, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to or greater than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. formed respectively. The length of the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

In addition, in these foil extraction regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side and the right side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is greater than or equal to the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. Each is formed The length of the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the right side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil extraction region 1510ya and the right side of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

In addition, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is greater than or equal to the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. Each is formed The length of the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the upper side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the upper side surfaces of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

That is, by forming the foil extraction area 1510ya on the copper foil surface 1510yp where the solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil extraction area 1510ya is not electrically connected to the solid ground. It is an insulated area.

When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. is formed. Disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil extraction region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil extraction area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. No foil-punched regions of the same shape are formed at all.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) to form the same ground ( GND). For this reason, in the present embodiment, noise entering the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 to the peripheral control area 1510ya through the foil extraction area 1510ya. A "route through which noise does not escape" is formed, which cannot penetrate into the solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate, and the noise penetrates into the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 as described above. Noise can be removed by forming a "noise exit route" that flows to the substrate ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal pan screw.

[Reuse of peripheral control boards]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board, and is a board that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused).

As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is surrounded by circular soldering copper foil (so-called " lands") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and copper foils for soldering having a circular shape (so-called lands) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 faces the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surface 1510x is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to open the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with the bearing surface of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw (the bearing surface of the head).

In this way, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan head screw (the seat surface of the head). By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeatedly screwing and removing the metal pan screws. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 rub against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 and come off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. The base of the peripheral control board 1510 rubs against the seat surface of the screw head (the seat surface of the head), and the peripheral control board 1510 comes off from the base material. If the copper foil of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the board is exposed, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot be reused due to oxidation and poor electrical connectivity. There is a problem of difficulty.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have They are soldered so that the copper foil is not exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan head screw are electrically connected together. It is covered so that it can be connected. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In addition, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from coming off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil portions of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are not exposed and can be prevented from being oxidized. It is possible to improve electrical connectivity in a state in which the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. electrical connection between the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw due to the viscosity of can improve the properties.

As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the noise entering the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) through the metal pan screw. ), it is possible to stably maintain the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin.

Further, in this embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are separated as described above. , are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed. As described above, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws, so they are soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. If the thickness of the applied solder is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder rises), the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw will be separated from each other. There is a problem that the contact area is reduced and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. As described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 serve as mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) for the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, if the thickness of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, is not made uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 must be uniform. The contact area between the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a is reduced, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. It should be noted that if the thickness of the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal round head screw and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the peripheral Distortion of the control substrate 1510 will occur, which may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 with which the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw abuts, is A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510 y of the peripheral control board 1510 , and a squeegee (like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask. By placing the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, is made uniform as the plate thickness of the metal mask. can be done. In addition, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil is formed into a metal mask by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (something like a spatula). The solder paste is applied through the holes, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste. The plate thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have their surfaces are soldered so that the copper foil is not exposed, but the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 abuts against the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, respectively, and is in contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side of 1510x, may be coated with a resist solution and covered. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with the resist solution. be. Even with this configuration, metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By screwing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via the metal pan screws. state can be In addition, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer coated on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same thickness. 1510r4 and inserting metal pan head screws into mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 of the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 contacting the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask. The solder paste is applied through the holes formed in the metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. ) can be flowed into the solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. In order not to reduce the area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should be soldered so that it does not partially bulge. need to be uniform. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is flowed into the solder bath.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist solution. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of a copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width of the resist is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221(c), a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined length are arranged in a ring around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. and horizontal lines (the resist may have a predetermined width and only vertical lines may be formed in a plurality of lines spaced apart by a predetermined distance, or the resist may have a predetermined width). A shape in which a plurality of lines are formed only in the horizontal direction with a predetermined distance between them.), as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines are formed obliquely downward to the right), and a small circular shape (not shown). An aggregated shape and the like can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since soldering is made to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist liquid). 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the bearing surface (the bearing surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be performed on the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to Also, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4.

In the above-described embodiment, a metal pan head screw was used to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a “chrysanthemum washer”).

In the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the conductive resin cover 1501, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a are formed. are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and a land 1510rb1 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rb4 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are brought into contact with each other, so that the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan head screw. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, and the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected. A metal cover 1501′ may be used instead of the resin cover 1501. FIG. In this case, the base body 1502 closing the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of conductive resin, or may be made of metal instead of the conductive resin. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae may be made of conductive resin or metal.

An amplifier board having circuits for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier board is accommodated in the metal board box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier board and the heat of the amplifier board itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal board box. Further, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal partial case.

The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. noise may intrude into the partial case of Therefore, like the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, so that the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected), a plurality of amplifier boards formed on the amplifier board The land and the mounting surface (boss surface) of a plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the rear surface side of the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case are brought into contact with each other. , the plurality of lands formed on the back side (solder side) of the amplifier board and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. The metal cover body or the metal partial case of the board box made of metal is electrically connected to a plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover body or the metal part case of the metal board box The partial case and the ground (GND) of the amplifier board can be electrically connected. In addition, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transferred from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case through the metal round head screws, thereby efficiently dissipating the heat to the outside air. can also

In the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501 (flat cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan screws. Thus, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected, but it can also be used in a two-story board (so-called "turtle child board"). can. For example, a plurality of lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, a plurality of lands on the child board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board, and a plurality of lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board. and multiple lands of the sub-board are screwed to both ends of metal struts (spacers), respectively. can be directly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) of the parent board and the ground (GND) of the child board can be the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin accommodates the peripheral control board 1510, but the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are accommodated. If the payout control board box 632 is made of a conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 must be transparent according to regulations, and a conductive resin is used. However, the board box for housing the power supply board and the various relay board boxes for housing various relay boards are made of conductive resin, and the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box. It may be fixed in the same way. In this way, the same noise countermeasure effect as the above-described peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be obtained for the board box that houses the power board and various relay board boxes that house various relay boards. can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with the peripheral control unit 1500. A board-to-board connector by a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a board-to-board connector by a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. By arranging it near the center of 552 , it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553 . As described above, the tank rail 553 has a plurality of notches 553aa formed on its lower side (lower rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front) to the outside through the metal powder of the game ball B. can be dropped, by arranging the board-to-board connector away from the tank rail 553, the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the board-to-board connector can be prevented. can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inter-board connectors, and the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. A board-to-board connector by means of a special connector SCN4 is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). As shown in FIG. 217, when 1500 is attached, the area above the board-to-board connector can be reduced by arranging it to be long in the vertical direction. The area of adhesion can be minimized. When the above-described board-to-board connector is arranged to be long in the horizontal direction, the upper area of the board-to-board connector becomes large, so that the area on which dust, metallic powder, etc., adheres is greatly increased. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are elongated in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. As described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac becomes Even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted by the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even if dust, metallic powder, etc. adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. there is In order to prevent dust, metallic powder, etc. from adhering to the respective electrical terminals, the direction in which the above-described board-to-board connector is arranged, the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged, is selected.

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 has the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 plugs, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the special connector SCN3 socket, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has the special connector SCN4 socket. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and correspondingly, the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is on the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a socket) that serves as a plug, and the peripheral control board 1510 has a special connector (or a socket that serves as a plug). a special connector) can be provided. In the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal formats to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is on the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that becomes a socket), and correspondingly, if the liquid crystal output board 1530 becomes a socket, it becomes a special connector (or a plug). special connector).

In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, cover side walls 1501b to 1501az provided on the upper, left, lower and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in one or a combination thereof. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover plate 1510a may be combined to form a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter produced by the game ball B (for example, metal powder produced by abrasion of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to falling foreign matter onto various boards in the peripheral control board box 1505 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to falling foreign matter from the tank rail 553 . The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 would be exposed to the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the box 1505 and enters the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring is increased.

In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, cover side walls 1501b to 1501az provided on the upper, left, lower and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover side wall 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side, respectively, thereby contributing to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. FIG. The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side were formed with the ventilation holes 1501az, through the ventilation holes 1501az, Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 and intrudes, causing the peripheral control board box 1505 to fall onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that an electrical trouble will occur due to foreign matter.

[Other noise countermeasures by peripheral control units]
In addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 that constitute the peripheral control board box 1505 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the wiring cover body 1503 is all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above. At the same time, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover body 1501 (the flat cover plate 1501a) with metal round head screws. Since it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates so as to be the same ground (GND), noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be (hereinafter referred to as "noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment"). Another configuration of the present invention in which noise countermeasures are taken by the peripheral control board box that can remove noise that has entered the peripheral control board box 1505 (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control board box according to second to fifth embodiments 222 to 241, will be described below. In FIGS. 222 to 241, the same reference numerals as those used in the configuration of the noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. A description of the configuration of the noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board boxes according to the second to fifth embodiments will be omitted except for some.

In the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is, as described above, all made of conductive polycarbonate containing carbon. In contrast to the configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments for noise countermeasures, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is transparent. In addition, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fourth embodiments, a metal shield plate is housed in the peripheral control board box. In the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, a metal shield plate is not housed in the peripheral control board box.

FIGS. 222 to 226 show the configuration for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a metal shield plate, and this metal shield plate A portion of the shield plate abuts on the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via a conductive elastic member. FIG. 222 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. 223 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, FIG. 224 is a front view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view taken along line -X, and FIG. 226 is a view along arrow A in FIG.

FIGS. 227 to 230 show the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, which further strengthens the noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. 227 shows a structure in which a portion of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of 1510 or the like is exposed, and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further brought into contact with each other via a conductive elastic member. 228 is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, FIG. 229 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 230 is a ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control substrate, which provides good contact between the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control substrate and the conductive elastic member. , a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (stripping example (a)), a schematic diagram of the back surface (soldering surface) of the peripheral control board (stripping example (b )), a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes with lands are arranged), a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (land is (d)) in which a plurality of through holes are arranged.

FIGS. 231 to 235 show the configuration for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. The rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a second metal shield plate, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are sandwiched between the first metal shield plate and the second metal shield plate, A part of the metal first shield plate and a part of the metal second shield plate are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, etc. FIG. 232 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the peripheral control board and the like according to the fourth embodiment; 234A and 234B show lands formed around through-holes on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 235 is a diagram (a) showing lands formed around the through-holes on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment; , and a diagram (c) showing a foil extraction region. In FIG. 227, the board conductive elastic member 1507 that can be in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing, and in FIG. The contactable conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is indicated by a chain double-dashed line for ease of viewing of the drawing.

FIGS. 236 to 241 show the configuration for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are covered with metal shield plates. Of the various boards housed in the peripheral control board box, which are not covered at all, the area where the ground (GND) of a specific board is partially exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are connected via a conductive elastic member. 236 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 237 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. (a) shows a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and shows a part of the base body constituting the peripheral control unit so that the state in which the conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen in the same figure. 239 is a continuation of FIG. 238, in which the conductive elastic member is made of metal of the effect display device 1600. FIG. FIG. 240 is a view (c) showing a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut off so that the deformed state when pressed against the back cover can be seen, and FIG. 240 is the tip of the contact probe; FIG. 241 is a partially enlarged front view of a cover body constituting a peripheral control unit having an opening into which a substrate can be inserted and brought into contact, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method of taking out the ground (GND) on the back side (solder side) of a specific board that makes good contact with the elastic member, and is a schematic diagram of the copper foil side on the back side (solder side) of the specific board ( Stripping example (a)), a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (stripping example (b)), a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through hole with land An example (c) in which a plurality of through-holes are arranged, and a schematic diagram of a back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (an example (d) in which a plurality of through-holes having lands are arranged).

[Comparison of noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed with screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to become the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the cover body 1501 molded of transparent non-conductive resin and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering the liquid crystal output substrate 1530; It is provided with a member 1545 and a base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 and is molded from transparent non-conductive resin. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to predetermined positions in the inner space of the cover body 1501 together with a metal shield plate 1540, thereby forming a metal shield. A plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502, thereby forming a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. ing.

[Cover Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is attached to the back side of the flat plate cover 1501a. A through hole 1540c2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with a mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. placed like this. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced by the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, the metal shield A through hole 1540c2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the plate 1540 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 are arranged so as to align with mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540 c 1 and 1540 c 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In this state, among the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition to the contact state, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are brought into contact with each other. Also, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 ground (GND). In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is formed on the back side of the flat plate cover 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Then, by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwing them toward mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, A peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540 b 1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . In this state, land 1520rf4 among lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface side of peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in contact with the rear surface of L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of metal shield plate 1540. Also, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1. In addition, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the peripheral data. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 ground (GND). In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 .

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Metal round screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the liquid crystal is displayed. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540 b 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 is in contact with the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to the 1530 ground (GND). The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ground (GND). In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metal shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the metal shield plate 1540 is formed. When the cover body 1501 and various substrates are clamped and fixed, the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model type are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are separated by the above-described predetermined distance dimension. A gap (2.3 mm) having a is formed.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is, as described above, the plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. 1501az and the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, gaps formed in the peripheral control board 1510 A gap formed between a volume control switch 1510d and a volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501; and the area of the gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10. Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is supplied to a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and a metal shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Via the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept low.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
The base flat plate 1502a has an L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d on the right side when viewed from the front, corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later. A vertically elongated rectangular through-hole 1502ab is formed which is one size larger than the rear surface of 1540d.

In addition, on the back surface (solder surface) side of peripheral control board 1510, areas corresponding to disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on base body 1502 have a smaller outer shape than disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having large circumferences are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil extraction regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil-extracted regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are connected to the ground of peripheral control board 1510 ( GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 through the foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A noise-free route is formed.

[Metal Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. L-shaped shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (in the second embodiment, 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) at the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side. Mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 are formed respectively.

In addition, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (this second embodiment) on the upper right side and the lower right side of a horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. In this case, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are respectively formed, and at the center of the oblong rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 and bent backward by a predetermined distance (21 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the second embodiment). A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. When the cover body 1501 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a. The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted into the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a without coming into contact therewith.

The metal shield plate 1540 is bent so that the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane, The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1 and 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed to be parallel surfaces. In the second embodiment, the distance from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1 and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. The mounting boss holes 1501ah2 project from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as described above. 1501ah1 and 1501ah2. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 protrude from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. This is one mounting boss hole out of a pair of formed mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. These mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and extend from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 as described above. These are two mounting boss holes out of four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 protruding from each other.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height (this In the second embodiment, a space having a diameter of 14.8 mm is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (12 mm in the second embodiment) between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 225) and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 225) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment).

In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e, power generation circuit (not shown), resistor (not shown), resistor (not shown), capacitors, LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), special connector SCN3, etc.), and liquid crystal output board 1530 The second space 1505b accommodates various electronic components (resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), special connector SCN4, etc.), while the second space 1505b does not accommodate any electronic components. By accommodating various electronic components and the like susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take countermeasures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise). This is because the heat generated from the various electronic components in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing the various electronic components that generate heat. . In other words, the metallic shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

Shield flat plate 1540a of shield plate 1540 is formed with ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape at positions corresponding to a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501, respectively. That is, like the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. there is When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recesses 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. As a result, air is taken in from the outside of peripheral control unit 1500 through ventilation holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501 and through ventilation holes 1540az formed in shield flat plate 1540a of shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (especially the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity). It is composed of a rectangular foam 1545b as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c applied to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include a polyester fabric on which a copper and nickel metal film is formed, and a polyimide film on which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed. As the foam 1545b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be used. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive covering portion 1545a to another member.

The cross-sectional shape (sliced shape) of the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) with a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm. has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) with a width of about 2 mm and a height of about 0.035 mm.

[Method for Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, a through hole 1540c1a is formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 in order to mount the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. do.

Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Subsequently, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by , and metal round screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held. A state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is reached.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal round head screw (not shown) into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540 c 1 and 1540 c 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In other words, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It will be in a state of being clamped and fixed by the body 1501 and various substrates.

In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is constrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for constraining the vertical and horizontal directions. No projecting portion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error caused by such restraint is eliminated. 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are dimensional. It can be absorbed by a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are It is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are engaged with the base body. It is inserted into U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502 .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. , the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through-hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state where it covers the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the cover body 1501. Then, a metal one-way screw is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 . A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other. In the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) to the rear surface of the is 2.7 mm.

In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected through the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. The adhesive tape 1545c of 1545 is attached (bonded).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600. , when viewing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and into the through-holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the transparent synthetic resin box. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole that constitutes the mounting portion formed on the back side of the .

The effect display device 1600 is composed of a picture frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a picture frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the picture frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the picture frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. It is housed in a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin box (protective cover body 1601 described above). Also, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to its rear side, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line of a peripheral control board 1510 or the like accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. are arranged to be the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit connecting piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back side of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the second embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), resulting in dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The conductive elastic member 1545 can absorb the dimensional deviation. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal rear cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is established. 1510 or the like and can be the same ground (GND), so that the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520 and various boards such as liquid crystal output board 1530) and peripheral control unit 1500 (various boards such as peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530). can do. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment are molded from transparent non-conductive resin. , a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions together with a metallic shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various boards. The metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates when it is attached and fixed. In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. properly connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 can be blocked from the substrate through the metal shield plate 1540. A “route through which noise escapes” can be formed by leading to the ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) and removing it. As a result, there is no need to equip each board (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of checking the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 1510, the part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., direction of the IC, part number , pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are checked from multiple angles. 1510b, they are arranged in a dispersed manner so as to form an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to confirm the modification of the control ROM 1510b through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b maintains the lighting state when DC +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Therefore, the DC +5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are used to check the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 2, an area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board. 1520 and 1520 are distributed and arranged so as to form a large area in which the silk-printed contents can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. In addition, the LEDML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is designed to keep the lighting state while the DC +35V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of supply, it serves as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the function of , the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pins is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. and the visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. .

Also, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. 2, the area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and 1530 are arranged separately so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Improvement of the visibility of contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improvement of visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , can contribute to

A plurality of circular ventilating holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1 and 1510c2. The state of the IC pins of 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 , and so that the states of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles, the areas are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. are placed. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can be done. In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state while the +12V direct current from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state of DC +12 V supply, but it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) , the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

The LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type, have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. is also suitable. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. . As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 224) having a distance of and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

In addition, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has luster, and the area of the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. and its surroundings, it also has a function as a reflecting section capable of reflecting the light emitted by the LEDML1 to LEDML4 and directing it toward the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be further coated with glossy colored paint.

In the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above. In the space, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is secured by the cover body 1501 and various boards. A structure is adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates by sandwiching and fixing. In the second embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line of each, a configuration is adopted in which the same ground (GND) is established.

As a result, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the body 1502 is guided to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 through the metal shield plate 1540. can be removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the body 1502 can be removed by guiding it to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540 .

In the second embodiment, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. When the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed in this space, and a metal shield plate 1540 is placed in this space to form two spaces. These two spaces are a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. (in the second embodiment, 12 mm), and a distance dimension of a second predetermined height between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. (1.6 mm in the second embodiment) and a second space 1505b. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large production unit (an electric drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production object, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position) is arranged on the game board 5, If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be the same distance dimension of the predetermined height. The predetermined height distance dimension may be configured to be greater than the first predetermined height distance dimension. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and the second space 1505b. Efficient transfer of heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not accommodating various electronic components and the like that generate heat inside. can be done.

In the second embodiment, a metal shield plate 1540 is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is printed with Visually check the part number and type (or management number), the IC pin status of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). Also, the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC direction, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a The state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. However, it is also possible to provide rectangular openings at positions of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. . Also, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a special connector SCN3) It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area, or the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. 1530, the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) It can also be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area.

In the second embodiment, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow into the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By blowing out to the outside, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It is possible to suppress the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when the air is taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540. However, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation sucks air through the blades and sends the air out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. good too. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

It should be noted that, even in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 abuts on the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. The solder paste is applied from the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool), and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flown into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. In order not to reduce the area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 should be soldered so that the soldering does not partially bulge. need to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist solution. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of a copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, the resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 221(a). A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed in the resist may be used). As shown in FIG. A plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a chrysanthemum shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (the resist may have a shape in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance, or a shape in which the resist is A shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width only in the lateral direction are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance), as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed obliquely), although not shown in the figure. A shape in which small circular shapes are gathered can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since soldering is made to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist liquid). 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the bearing surface (the bearing surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be performed on the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to Also, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4.

Also in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, metal pan head screws were used. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the rear surface of cover flat plate 1501a by passing metal washers such as flat washers, spring washers, and toothed washers (also called chrysanthemum washers) through the round head screws.

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover. and the metal back cover are housed in a transparent synthetic resin box in a state of being electrically connected, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be molded integrally with this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed with screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to become the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is further strengthened. A configuration is employed in which a portion of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the display device 1600 is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 further abuts via a conductive elastic member.

[Metal Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Specifically, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and is shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 228, each side of the shield flat plate 1540a is pushed rearward as a countermeasure against noise (electromagnetic noise) entering from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Side walls 1540ae are formed by bending (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). These side walls 1540ae are not formed with any ventilation holes 1540az. In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the side walls 1540ae are arranged such that their end faces extend from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since it has a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and is spaced apart, it does not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates. The metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. Detailed description is omitted.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to third embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and includes a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output. At a position corresponding to the region ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the substrate 1530 is exposed, there is a substrate conductive material that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. A plurality of insertion openings 1502az each having a square shape (a shape in which both the vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are about 8 mm) into which the elastic member 1507 is inserted are formed in the base flat plate 1502a. Although these insertion openings 1502az are formed to protrude forward and rearward from the base plate 1502a, the front end surfaces of the insertion openings 1502az are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. The rear end surface of each insertion port 1502az is formed so as to have a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1.5 mm) from the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates so as not to contact, and the rear end surface of each insertion port 1502az is a metal shield plate It is formed so as to be arranged on the same plane as the rear surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of 1540. As shown in FIG.

There are seven regions ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, and seven insertion openings 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these, and the peripheral data ROM There is one region ROP where part of the ground (GND) is exposed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1520, and one insertion opening 1502az is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at a position corresponding to this. There are two regions ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed, and two insertion openings 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these. In other words, a total of 11 regions ROP where part of the ground (GND) is exposed are provided on the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. , the base plate 1502a is provided with a total of 11 insertion openings 1502az at positions corresponding to the respective regions ROP. Further, serial numbers 1 to 11 are formed near the respective insertion openings 1502az on the back side of the base flat plate 1502a. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the operator of the manufacturer inserts the board conductive elastic member 1507 . As described above, the base body 1502 is molded from transparent non-conductive resin, so that the serial numbers 1 to 11 can be visually recognized from the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Note that the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

[Conductive Elastic Member for Board of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
In the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in addition to the conductive elastic member 1545 that can electrically connect the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, a peripheral A region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are separated. It has a board conductive elastic member 1507 that can be electrically connected. The substrate conductive elastic member 1507 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1507a and a rectangular foam 1507b as a core covered with the conductive covering portion 1507a. , consists of Examples of the conductive coating portion 1507a include a polyester woven fabric on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed. As the foam 1507b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used.

The board conductive elastic member 1507 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the front-rear direction (when viewed from the right side of the board conductive elastic member 1507 in FIG. 228, the width is about 11 mm, the depth is about 8 mm, and the height is about 8 mm). have. When the substrate conductive elastic member 1507 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az of the base body 1502, it is guided by the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az, and the substrate conductive elastic member 1507 has cushioning properties (elasticity). By pressing the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az, the substrate conductive elastic member 1507 is difficult to come off from the insertion opening 1502az.

[Partially Exposed Areas of Grounds of Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Here, a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed will be described. A region ROP formed in part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has the same structure. A region ROP formed in part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) will be described. 230(a) and 230(b), the region ROP formed in part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 is arranged such that a part of the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp of 1510y is exposed in a shape larger than the front surface shape of the board conductive elastic member 1507. A resist solution is applied onto the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

It is also possible to adopt a method of using a through hole instead of exposing the solid ground as the region ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 230(c) and 230(d), the area ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the solid ground on the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively, and the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed with a land around each through hole. A resist liquid can be applied onto the foil surface 1510yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

[Method for Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Since the method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is basically the same as the method of assembling the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the procedure for inserting the board conductive elastic member 1507 will be described. Before attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the manufacturer's operator Then, the board conductive elastic members 1507 are sequentially inserted from the longitudinal direction into the insertion openings 1502az of the base body 1502 described above from the serial number 1 to the serial number 11, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the Work is performed to bring the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into contact with the exposed region ROP.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a picture frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are accommodated in a picture frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the picture frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the picture frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. Housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. In addition, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to its rear side, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. are connected to the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit connecting piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back side of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), resulting in dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The conductive elastic member 1545 can absorb the dimensional deviation. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected to each other, and the peripheral control board housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is established. It can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to be the same ground (GND).

In addition, a conductive layer for each substrate, one of which is in contact with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, is in contact. The other end of the elastic member 1507 passes through a corresponding through-hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. be in contact. At this time, the board conductive elastic member 1507 is pushed in and collapsed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the board conductive elastic member 1507 is collapsed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm in height), thereby reducing the dimensional tolerance. The board conductive elastic member 1507 can absorb a dimensional deviation due to an assembly error. As a result, the board conductive elastic member 1507 is maintained in a state in which an external force is applied in the longitudinal direction. , and the contact surface with the area ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, the contact surface with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, , maintain good electrical connection, and connect the ground (solder surface) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 ( GND) and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are in a state of being electrically connected reliably, and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 and the like are electrically connected. can be connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 are blocked by the shield plate 1540 made of metal. A “route through which noise escapes” can be formed by leading to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removing noise through the substrate conductive elastic member 1507 . As a result, there is no need to equip each board (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), thereby reducing the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). can contribute.

It should be noted that in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed, but it abuts on the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan head screw. The mounting surfaces (bosses) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 in contact with the mounting surface 1510, may be coated with a resist solution and covered. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with the resist solution. be. Even with this configuration, metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By screwing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via the metal pan screws. state can be In addition, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 which contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer coated on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same thickness. . , distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

In the third embodiment, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow into the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By blowing out to the outside, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It is possible to suppress the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when the air is taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540. However, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation sucks air through the blades and sends the air out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. good too. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Also in the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 abuts on the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. The solder paste is applied from the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool), and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flown into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. In order not to reduce the area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should be soldered so that it does not partially bulge. need to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist solution. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of a copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, the resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 221(a). A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed in the resist may be used). As shown in FIG. A plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a chrysanthemum shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (the resist may have a shape in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance, or a shape in which the resist is A shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width only in the lateral direction are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance), as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed obliquely), although not shown in the figure. A shape in which small circular shapes are aggregated, etc. can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since soldering is made to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist liquid). 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined pattern formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the bearing surface (the bearing surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be performed on the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to Also, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4.

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment as well, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal round head screw was used. A metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, or a toothed washer (also called a chrysanthemum washer) may be passed through the round head screw to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In addition, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover. and the metal back cover are housed in a transparent synthetic resin box in a state of being electrically connected, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be molded integrally with this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison of noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed with screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to become the same ground (GND).

231 and 232, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the box shape is opened at the rear and is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the cover body 1501 molded of transparent non-conductive resin and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield placed on the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 A plate 1540, a conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined location on the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board. 1530 and the like, which can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) intruding into various substrates, a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 arranged on the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates; and a base body 1502 made of a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 . In the inner space of the cover body 1501, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted on a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back surface. It is sandwiched between (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position of cover body 1501. By closing the opening of cover body 1501 with base body 1502, a peripheral control board box formed by cover body 1501 and base body 1502 is formed. 1505 (sealed substrate box) is configured.

[Cover Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
First, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment are formed as mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah4 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The difference is that the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed as mounting boss holes 1501am3 and 1501am4 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, in the cover 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, a backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 even when power is cut off is provided from a holder (not shown). A cylindrical protrusion preventing portion 1501aw is formed to protrude from the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 toward the front side of the backup power source 1510e so that the power supply to the real-time clock IC (not shown) is not cut off. It is different from the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment in that In addition, the end face of the jump-out preventing portion 1501aw is arranged apart from the backup power source 1510e by a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1 mm).

Further, when attaching various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral The rear side of the cover flat plate 1501a is inserted directly into the through-holes (excluding the ones into which the mounting boss protrusions are inserted) of various substrates such as the data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. However, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board are mounted on the back side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. 1530 and the like, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted directly into a specific through-hole among the plurality of through-holes in the various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. After performing the first fixing method of inserting and fixing by screwing into mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, various peripheral control boards 1510, peripheral data ROM boards 1520, liquid crystal output boards 1530, etc. The through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate. , and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and other through holes other than the specific through holes in the various substrates, the opening of the cover member 1501 is closed with the base member 1502, and the base flat plate 1502a is formed. Each through-hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 by inserting a metal round head screw (not shown) into the through-hole of the mounting boss formed on the front side, The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and other through-holes in the various boards are inserted into the mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. 2 Perform the fixation method.

In the first fixing method, when attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is mounted. is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a through-hole formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, which will be described later. The hole 1540c2a is arranged so as to align with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are the through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal. The holes 1540c1a, the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are aligned with each other. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the control board 1510 are arranged so as to align with the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, which will be described later, are mounted. 1540b1a is arranged so as to be aligned with mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the rear surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. The through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 to 1501ah4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later is are aligned with mounting boss holes 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501an1 to 1501an4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Then, metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into specific through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, thereby performing peripheral control. A substrate 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws.

Among the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, specific through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah2. As a result, of the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb2, and 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 are brought into contact with the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw. becomes. In addition, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, thereby The board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby connecting the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the output board 1530 . Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . Become.

Then, metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into specific through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and mounting is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am4. As a result, of the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb3, and 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 are brought into contact with the bearing surface of the metal pan screw. Become. In addition, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the metallic shield The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the shield plate 1540 on the board surface (mounting surface) side made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520 . Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . .

After this first fixing method, in a second fixing method, a metal plate, which will be described later, is applied so as to cover the rear (solder surface) sides of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to various peripheral control substrates 1510, peripheral data ROM substrates 1520, and liquid crystal output substrates 1530. Among the through holes other than the specific through holes in the substrate, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are corresponding through holes. metal pan screws (not shown) in through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6, which are formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a by closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502. through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a respectively formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the board made of metal, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and The through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a through the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

By performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in this order, the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal. It is sandwiched between the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. As shown in FIG. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are arranged. , are in contact with each other, and L-shaped attachment of lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the substrate made of metal. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. , the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal board back surface (solder surface) The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metallic The substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. As a result, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, thereby supplying power. It will be connected to the ground (GND) line of the substrate 630 .

Further, by performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the land 1520rb2 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the shield on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate are fixed. The surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the plate 1555 and the surface of the plate 1555 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the backside (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, the shield plate 1555 on the backside (solder surface) side of the board made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the same ground is connected. (GND), the metal board rear (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby connecting to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. , and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 . Become.

Further, by performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the land 1530rb3 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate are fixed. and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of 1555 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the rear (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder surface) of the substrate made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the substrate made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520 . Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the substrate made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by connecting it to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . .

Further, by performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined position of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal. It is pressed against the front surface side of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of the same material and is in a state of being in contact. As a result, the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. A gap (2.3 mm) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model type are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is, as described above, the plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. 1501az and the gaps described above (the gaps formed in the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, and the gaps formed in the peripheral control board 1510 A gap formed between a volume adjustment switch 1510d provided and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. and the area of the gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10. Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. , the air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is supplied through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the metal substrate surface (mounting hole) accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When air is taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the surface (surface) side shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small. It is possible.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
Through holes 1502ag1 are formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Mounting bosses 1502af1-1502af6 are formed with .about.1502ag6, respectively. Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 to fix the base 1502 to the cover body 1501 .

It should be noted that on the back surface (solder surface) side of peripheral control board 1510, areas corresponding to disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on base body 1502 have a smaller outer shape than disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having large circumferences are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil extraction regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil-extracted regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are connected to the ground of peripheral control board 1510 ( GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 through the foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A noise-free route is formed.

[Metal Board Surface (Mounting Surface) Side Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
It is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) side of various boards that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that enters various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The shield plate 1540 on the substrate surface (mounting surface) side made of metal is a horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm) with a predetermined distance between the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent backward by 12 mm (in the fourth embodiment, from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) are formed.

In addition, the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal has a rectangular shield plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm), which is oblong when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined distance above and below the right side of the shield plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm). L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by a dimension (in the fourth embodiment, 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) are formed, and the oblong rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm) and bent backward by a predetermined distance above the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 (in the fourth embodiment, 9.9 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a). A connection piece 1540d is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the rear side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal. In this state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, and the fan mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a fit into the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a. It will be inserted without contact.

The substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal is bent so that the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1 and 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed in parallel with each other. In the fourth embodiment, the distance from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed in the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively.

Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal. is a space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this space, two spaces are formed by disposing a metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (12 mm in the fourth embodiment), and a second predetermined height distance between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later. and a second space having a dimension (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment).

In the first space, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e, power supply generation circuit (not shown), resistor (not shown), capacitor (not shown), etc.) , LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), special connector SCN3, etc.), and provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 While various electronic parts and the like (resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), special connector SCN4, etc.) are accommodated, the second space does not accommodate any electronic parts or the like. By accommodating various electronic components and the like susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take countermeasures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Since various electronic components that generate heat are not accommodated, the heat generated from the various electronic components in the first space is transferred to the second space 1505b through the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is for efficient communication. In other words, the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal has a function as a heat sink in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

Shield flat plate 1540a of substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal has a plurality of circular vent holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501, and has the same shape. A ventilation hole 1540az is formed. That is, like the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. there is When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recesses 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. As a result, air is taken in from the outside of peripheral control unit 1500 through ventilation holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501 and through ventilation holes 1540az formed in shield flat plate 1540a of shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (especially the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

In addition, the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is provided with cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. As a countermeasure against (electromagnetic wave noise), each side of the shield plate 1540a is bent backward (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530). sidewalls 1540ae are formed respectively. These side walls 1540ae are not formed with any ventilation holes 1540az. In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the side walls 1540ae are arranged such that their end faces extend from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since it has a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and is spaced apart, it does not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates.

Shield flat plate 1540a of metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a circular shape through which projection prevention portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape protruding from the back side of cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1502 passes. is formed with an opening 1540aw.

[Metal Board Backside (Solder Side) Side Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
It can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering various boards such as peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530. The shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the metal board is formed on the upper left, lower left, upper right, and lower right sides of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1555a (thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (in the fourth embodiment, 2.3 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1555a) are formed on the sides. These L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 are bent so that their respective surfaces are arranged on the same plane.

Cutouts 1555aa1 to 1555aaa3 are formed on the shield flat plate 1555a so as not to interfere with disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502, respectively. Further, the shield flat plate 1555a includes a mounting boss 1502af4 that contacts the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 among the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, A notch 1555aa5 is formed so as not to interfere with the mounting boss 1502af5 that contacts the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. In addition, on the surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, electrical connections other than the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided so as to correspond to the shape of the shield flat plate 1555a. A transparent insulating sheet (not shown) is attached (adhered) to prevent a short circuit due to physical connection. Further, the side wall 1540ae and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal are not formed in the shield flat plate 1555a at all.

It should be noted that in the area below the notch 1555aa5 on the surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is attached to the back surface. This is a region where the conductive elastic member 1545 that is attached (adhered) is pressed and contacted.

In a state in which a metallic substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is attached to cover the back surface (solder surface) sides of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, By arranging a metallic substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 in the vicinity of the back surface side (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, Various substrates absorb heat generated from various electronic components, etc., and the absorbed heat is removed from various substrates by the metallic substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, thereby efficiently cooling various substrates. In other words, the substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of metal has a function as a heat sink in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

Note that when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the back side of the substrate back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 made of metal is in contact with the surface of the base plate 1502 a of the base body 1502 .

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity). It is composed of a conductive covering portion 1545a, a rectangular foam 1545b as a core covered with the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1545a include a polyester woven fabric on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed. As the foam 1545b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be used. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive covering portion 1545a to another member.

The cross-sectional shape (sliced shape) of the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape with a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width of about 2 mm. , has a rectangular shape whose height is about 0.035 mm.

[Method for Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is attached. The through hole 1540c1a formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed in the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged. The through-hole 1540c2a formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged. The through-hole 1540b1a formed in the upper surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal board 1540 is arranged. The through-hole 1540b2a formed in the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a, and formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3, and 1520r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. 1530r2, 1530r3, 1530r4 are arranged so as to be aligned with mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 233, by the first fixing method, a metal pan (not shown) is attached directly from the rear surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The cover plate 1501a is fixed by inserting screws into various mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. According to this first fixing method, a screw fixing instruction mark and a serial number near the screw fixing instruction mark are printed as silk printing on the rear surface (solder surface) of each substrate for the through hole to be fixed. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the manufacturer's worker inserts and screws in a metal pan head screw (not shown) for fixing. The color of the screw fixing instruction mark and the serial number printed in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark as silk printing is the surface (mounting surface) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. ) are printed in the same color (here, white) as the area that indicates the position (including orientation designation) of the various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board and the part number.

Specifically, in the through-hole 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixation instruction mark DTH1 encircling the periphery of the land 1520rb1 on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a thick solid white line is silk-printed. , and a white serial number 1 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as a silk print in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH1. Further, in the through hole 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixation instruction mark DTH2 encircling the periphery of the land 1520rb4 on the back (solder side) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a thick white solid line is printed as silk printing. , a white serial number 2 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as a silk print in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH2.

Further, in the through-hole 1530r1 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH3 encircling the periphery of the land 1530rb1 on the back (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a thick white solid line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 3 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as a silk print in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH3. Further, in the through-hole 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 encircling the periphery of the land 1530rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a thick white solid line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 4 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as silk printing near the screw fixing instruction mark DTH4.

Further, in the through hole 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixation instruction mark DTH5 encircling the periphery of the land 1510rb2 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a thick white solid line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 5 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as silk printing in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH5. Further, in the through-hole 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixation instruction mark DTH6 encircling the periphery of the land 1510rb3 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a thick white solid line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 6 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as silk printing near the screw fixing instruction mark DTH6.

An operator at the manufacturer sequentially inserts and screws metal pan head screws (not shown) from serial number 1 to serial number 4 to fix the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. It may be slightly displaced from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even in such a case, by fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is eliminated. When fixing the control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover plate 1501a Since the dimensional margins provided for each of them can be absorbed, the position of the peripheral control board 1510 is finely adjusted so that the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the cover flat plate 1501a. It can be matched with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side.

An operator of the manufacturer sequentially inserts and screws metal round head screws (not shown) to serial numbers 1 and 2 to form them on the rear (solder side) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4, which are connected to each other, and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are in contact with each other. In addition, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 .

An operator of the manufacturer sequentially inserts and screws metal pan head screws (not shown) from serial number 3 to serial number 4, thereby forming on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4, which are attached to each other, and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. In addition, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the metallic shield The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

An operator of the manufacturer sequentially inserts metal pan head screws (not shown) into serial numbers 5 and up to serial number 6, and screws them in to fix them. The lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3, which are attached to each other, and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other.

In addition, when the manufacturer's worker inserts and screws in metal pan head screws (not shown) in order from serial number 1 to serial number 6, the manufacturer's worker performs serial number 1 to serial number 6 in order. If a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted and fixed by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) at random instead of inserting and screwing in a metal pan head screw (not shown), any one of serial numbers 1 to 6 In some cases, a mistake may occur in which a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the object indicated by the serial number and screwed in to fix it. If such a mistake occurs, the peripheral control board box 1505 (peripheral control unit 1500) will be shipped with incomplete fixation by metal pan screws (not shown).

In addition, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510 designated by serial numbers 1 to 6 by the operator of the manufacturer. Through-holes other than 1510r3, that is, one or more of through-holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, through-holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and through-holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 Even if the cover plate 1501a is fixed by inserting a metal round head screw (not shown) directly into the through hole and screwing it into the mounting boss hole formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501. , among the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss corresponding to the erroneously inserted metal pan screw and the erroneously inserted metal boss 1502af1 to 1502af6 Since it always interferes with the head of the pan head screw, a gap is formed between the base body 1502 and the cover body 1501 so that the cover body 1501 cannot be completely closed with the base body 1502 .

In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the L of a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is formed so as to cover the back (solder surface) sides of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1555b1a and 1555b2a formed in the letter-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 are arranged so as to match the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the L-shaped mounting of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) side of the metal board is performed. The through-hole 1555b3a formed in the piece 1555b3 is aligned with the through-hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal substrate. The through hole 1555b4a is arranged to match the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. In this manner, the substrate rear (solder) side shield plate 1555 made of metal is arranged to cover the rear (solder) sides of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, since holes such as ventilation holes are not formed at all in the shield flat plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the board made of metal, the above-described screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to The serial number 6 is also covered with a shield plate 1555 on the backside (solder surface) side of the board made of metal, making it difficult to see. In other words, the assembled peripheral control board box 1505, which is molded from transparent non-conductive resin, is viewed from various angles through various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Even if it is installed, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by the above-described first fixing method. The shield plate 1555 makes it invisible, and the security of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be improved.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member 1545 is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate. is attached (bonded) with an adhesive tape 1545c.

Subsequently, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the guide portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the cover body 1501 The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. , the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501, and the mounting bosses formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a are secured by the second fixing method. Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the 1502af1 to 1502af6 and screwed to fix them.

Specifically, a metal round head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag1 of the mounting boss 1502af1 formed on the front side of the base flat plate 1502a to secure the L-shaped shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal substrate. through-hole 1555b1a formed in the mounting piece 1555b1, the through-hole 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through-hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metallic substrate. It is fixed by screwing it into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, a metal round screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag2 of the mounting boss 1502af2 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a, and the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate rear (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is mounted. 1555b2, the through hole 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the board surface (mounting surface) side made of metal. It is fixed by screwing it into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the flat plate 1501a. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the L-shaped of the metal board back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It will be in a state of being sandwiched between the surfaces of the mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are arranged. , are in contact with each other, and L-shaped attachment of lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the substrate made of metal. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. In other words, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In this connected state, the shield plate 1540 on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the rear surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected. The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal board is formed. The rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, a metal round screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag3 of the mounting boss 1502af3 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a, and the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate rear (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is mounted. The through hole 1555b3a formed in 1555b3 and the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are threaded into mounting boss holes 1501ah1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to fix them. As a result, the land 1520rb2 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 abut against each other. state. In other words, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the backside (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the shield plate 1555 on the backside (solder surface) side of the board made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 .

In addition, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag4 of the mounting boss 1502af4 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a and passed through the through hole 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the rear side of the cover plate 1501a. It is fixed by screwing into the formed mounting boss hole 1501ah4. Also, a metal round head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag5 of the mounting boss 1502af5 formed on the front side of the base flat plate 1502a to pass through the through hole 1530r2 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and form it on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501am3.

Also, a metal round head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag6 of the mounting boss 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a to attach the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The through hole 1555b4a formed in 1555b4 and the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are passed through and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a for fixing. As a result, the land 1530rb3 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of metal come into contact with each other. state. In other words, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the backside (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder surface) of the substrate made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

By this second fixing method, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a and screwed in to secure the metal substrate surface. The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is pressed against the front surface side of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 to be in contact therewith. As a result, the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the fourth embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), resulting in dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The conductive elastic member 1545 can absorb the dimensional deviation. As a result, a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) sandwiching various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. The peripheral part sandwiched between the metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 in a state of being electrically connected to the side shield plate 1555 reliably. Since the control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of various boards such as the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the same ground (GND) can be used, noise (electromagnetic waves The peripheral control unit 1500 (various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530) and the peripheral control unit 1500 (the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520) provide an environment strong against noise). , and various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

Subsequently, a metal one-way screw with a metal anchor rivet (not shown) inserted is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the cover body 1501 toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed in the base body 1502. screw in. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other.

In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected through the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the attachment portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600. , when viewing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to attach the transparent synthetic resin box. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole that constitutes the mounting portion formed on the back side of the .

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment are formed by being molded from transparent non-conductive resin, and the internal space of the cover body 1501 is , a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530. Board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. , the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. It is configured. In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. properly connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is shielded from the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface). Through the side shield plate 1555, it can be led to the substrate ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. As a result, there is no need to equip each board (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of shield flat plates 1540a formed in the shield plate 1540 on the substrate surface (mounting surface) side made of metal. Arrangement of the circular ventilation holes 1540az will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of checking the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the , the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.), can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from multiple angles. They are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of the ROM 1510b. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to confirm the modification of the control ROM 1510b through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b maintains the lighting state when DC +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Therefore, the DC +5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are used to check the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 2, an area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board. 1520 and 1520 are distributed and arranged so as to form a large area in which the silk-printed contents can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. In addition, the LEDML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is designed to keep the lighting state while the DC +35V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of supply, it serves as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the function of , the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pins is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. and the visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. .

Also, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. 2, the area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and 1530 are arranged separately so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Improvement of the visibility of contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improvement of visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , can contribute to

A plurality of circular ventilating holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1 and 1510c2. The state of the IC pins of 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 , and so that the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles, the areas are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. are placed. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can be done. In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state while the +12V direct current from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to check (monitor) the state of DC +12 V supply, but it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) , the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

The LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type, have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. is also suitable. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are shielded by a metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In the state of being sandwiched and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed, and a metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space to form two A space is created. These two spaces are, as described above, between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. a first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment), the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and the cover flat plate and a second space having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the back surface of 1501a. As described above, the first space accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. there is The interior of the first space thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

In addition, since the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a glossy surface, and the metal substrate faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively. The area on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and its surroundings serve as a reflecting portion that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDML1 to LEDML4 and direct it toward the peripheral control board 1510 again. also has the function of These reflective portions may be further coated with glossy colored paint.

In the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above. In the space, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are placed on the board surface (mounting surface) side made of metal, a shield plate 1540, and the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal board. By being sandwiched by the shield plates 1555 and attached, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. A configuration of electrically connecting to the In the fourth embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line of each, a configuration is adopted in which the same ground (GND) is established.

As a result, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the body 1502 is transmitted through the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data. It can be led to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the body 1502 is filtered through the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555 to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates). (GND)) and removed.

In the fourth embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and metal substrates. In a state in which the cover plate 1501a is sandwiched by the rear (solder surface) side shield plates 1555 and attached to a predetermined position on the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a, the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the cover plate 1501a are in contact with each other. A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed between the substrate and the rear surface, and a metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is placed in this space. are arranged, two spaces are formed, and these two spaces are the surfaces of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal. A first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal. and a second space having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a game board 5 is provided with a large production unit (an electric drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position), If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be the same distance dimension of the predetermined height. The predetermined height distance dimension may be configured to be greater than the first predetermined height distance dimension. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space. By not accommodating various electronic components that generate heat, the heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is efficiently transferred to the second space through the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. I can tell you well.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a control panel. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., IC direction, part number, pin number, etc.) ) can be visually recognized, and the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the states of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the silk-printed information on the peripheral control board 1510 can be seen. The contents (for example, orientation of the IC, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ), the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). However, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. It can also be configured as In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. It can also be configured as Also, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area than the shape formed by the special connector SCN3. The shape of the board-to-board connector (the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) is changed so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area.

[Circumference of Through Holes of Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
Here, the surroundings of through holes formed in various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment will be described. On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. Lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 are formed in contact with and electrically connected to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIG. ) side shield plate 1540 has a land 1520rf4 which is electrically connected to the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1. Also, as shown in FIG. A land 1530rf1 is formed in contact with the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 to be electrically connected.

These lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, and 1530rf1 are electrically connected to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) shield plate 1540. Therefore, a "noise exit route" is formed through which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal flows to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards). The surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 correspond to mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. , 1501am1 are in contact with each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah2, and 1501am1 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a to L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2, and lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, and 1530rf1, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(b), on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, there is formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil extraction areas NR5 and NR6 are formed to have a circular shape that is one size larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3, and the attachment surfaces (boss surfaces) of the attachment boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are the foil extraction areas NR5. , NR6. In addition, as shown in FIG. Foil removal regions NR7, NR8, and NR9 are formed in the shape of circles that are one size larger than the outline circles of the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, and 1501ah4 formed on the back side, and the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, and 1501ah4 are mounted. The faces (boss faces) abut on the foil extraction regions NR7, NR8 and NR9, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(b), on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r2, 1530r3, and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the rear side of the cover flat plate 1501a is provided. The foil extraction areas NR10, NR11, and NR12 having the shape of a circle one size larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed in the mounting surfaces ( (boss surface) abut against the foil extraction regions NR10, NR11, and NR12, respectively.

These foil-extracted regions NR5 to NR12 are designed to prevent noise (electromagnetic noise) from entering through mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. is isolated from the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 so that In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a through the foil extraction areas NR5 to NR12, thereby causing peripheral control. A “noise-removable route” is formed that prevents intrusion into the solid ground of various substrates such as the substrate 1510 , the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 , and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. Lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 are formed in contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIG. ) side shield plate 1555, there is formed a land 1520rb2 which contacts and is electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3. In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(a), on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a metallic substrate rear surface (solder surface) side is provided. A land 1530rb3 is formed in contact with and electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555. As shown in FIG.

These lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2 and 1530rb3 are in contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3 and 1555b4 of the substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of metal. Therefore, a "noise exit route" is formed through which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering the shield plate 1555 on the backside (solder surface) side of the board made of metal flows to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards). The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, and 1555b4 of the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are attached to mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3, 1502af3, and 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1502af6 come into contact with each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a 1502AF1, 1502AF2, 1502AF3, 1502AF6, and the back of the metal board (soldering surface) side (soldering surface) side (soldering surface) L -shaped mounting 1555 L -shaped mounting 1555 Even if it enters 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4 and lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3, this intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(b), on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, there are metal pan head screws (not shown). Lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 to be directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 surrounding the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 with thick white solid lines are printed as silk printing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(b), metal pans (not shown) are provided on the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 into which screws are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 surrounding the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 with thick white solid lines are printed as silk printing. On the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as shown in FIG. Lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 to be directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 surrounding the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 with thick white solid lines are printed as silk printing.

Even if metal pan head screws (not shown) are directly inserted into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and screwed in, the area of the thick white solid line portion of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 does not Although the regions near the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 overlap with the heads of the metal pan head screws (not shown), the outer peripheral portions of the regions indicated by the thick white solid lines of the screw fixing indication marks DTH5 and DTH6 are not shown. By forming the head of the screw to be larger than the outline of the screw head, the solid white line of the screw fixing indication marks DTH5 and DTH6 makes the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) stand out. It is designed to contribute to the prevention of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) in which a pan head screw is inserted, screwed in, and then forgotten to be fixed. Also, even if metal pan head screws (not shown) are directly inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed in, the region of the thick white solid line portion of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 will not be covered. Of these, the regions near the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 overlap with the heads of the metal pan head screws (not shown), but the outer peripheral portions of the regions indicated by the thick white solid lines of the screw fixing indication marks DTH1 and DTH2 are not shown. Since the head of the pan head screw (not shown) is formed to be larger than the outline of the head of the pan head screw, the solid white line of the screw fixing indication marks DTH1 and DTH2 makes the head of the pan head screw (not shown) stand out. It is possible to contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of inserting and screwing in a pan head screw and forgetting to fix it. Also, even if metal pan head screws (not shown) are directly inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed in, the area of the thick white solid line portion of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 will not be removed. Although the regions near the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 overlap with the heads of the metal pan head screws (not shown), the outer peripheral portions of the solid white solid line regions of the screw fixing indication marks DTH1 and DTH2 are not shown. By forming the head of the screw to be larger than the outline of the screw head, the solid white solid line of the screw fixing indication marks DTH3 and DTH4 makes the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) stand out. It is designed to contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) in which a pan head screw is inserted and screwed in and then forgotten to be fixed.

235(c), a surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through hole 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. A foil extraction area NR13 having a circular shape one size larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af4 is formed, and the attachment surface (boss surface) of the attachment boss 1502af4 abuts on the foil extraction area NR13. In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(c), on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r2 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a base flat plate 1502a is provided. A foil extraction region NR14 having a circular shape one size larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af5 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af5 abuts on the foil extraction region NR14.

These foil-extracted regions NR13 and NR14 serve as grounds (GND) for various substrates so as to prevent noise (electromagnetic noise) from entering from mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a. isolated from. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a to the solid ground of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the foil extraction regions NR13 and NR14. A "noise-proof route" that cannot be penetrated is formed.

In this way, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 surrounded by the solid white lines are printed as silk printing. The holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 and the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are through holes into which metal pan head screws (not shown) are directly inserted and screwed to be fixed to the cover body 1501. FIG. On the other hand, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 on which no screw fixing instruction mark is printed as silk printing, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 formed in the substrate 1530 are formed by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502. When fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by screwing, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1501 and the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. It is a through-hole that is clamped and fixed by fastening together with mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back side of 1501a.

That is, metal round head screws are directly inserted into a plurality of through-holes provided in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and are screwed to be fixed to the cover body 1501. If the through-holes and the through-holes that are clamped and fastened together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are mixed, an operator of the manufacturer may apply silk to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 printed as printing, screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 as silk printing, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 printed on the peripheral control board 1510 as silk printing. through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510 and through holes 1520r1 and 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which are through holes fixed to the cover body 1501 by directly inserting and screwing metal round screws. 1520r4, through-holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and through-holes 1510r1 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 which are through-holes which are sandwiched and fastened together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, 1510r4, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be distinguished. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are screwed (fixed by screwing). work) can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of working efficiency.

In the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield Either one or both of the plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and are not electrically connected. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are electrically floating. The electrically floating metal functions as an antenna that picks up noise and may become a noise source. It is necessary not to make it for various substrates. Therefore, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal rear cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 are shown. In addition to the case of electrical connection by wiring that is not shown, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 described above may be electrically connected by wiring that is not shown. As described above, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 made of metal functions as a main body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 300 to impart rigidity. It is electrically connected to the above-described frame ground substrate 559 via a ground wire. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

Note that in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the shield plate 1555 on the rear side (solder side) of the metallic substrate is the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When placed so as to cover the rear surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the above, as described above, the shield flat plate 1555a of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of metal has holes such as ventilation holes. Since they are not formed at all, the screw fixing indication marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are also covered with the metal substrate backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555, making them difficult to see. A plurality of holes may be formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 . In this way, the operator of the manufacturer can determine whether or not the various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by the above-described first fixing method through the plurality of holes (that is, It is possible to visually confirm whether or not the metal pan screws are inserted and fixed in the portions where the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 are present.

In addition, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, The land 1510rb2, 1510rb3 into which the metal pan head screw (not shown) shown in 235(b) is directly inserted and screwed is surrounded by thick solid white lines with screw fixing instruction marks DTH5, DTH6 printed as silk printing, On the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, metal pan screws (not shown) shown in FIG. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 are printed by silk printing to enclose lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 to be directly inserted and screwed in with thick white solid lines. In the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 in the periphery of the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 into which metal pan head screws (not shown) shown in FIG. Although the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 surrounded by solid lines are printed as silk printing, thick white dashed lines (one-dot chain line, two-dot chain line) may be used instead of the thick white solid lines.

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the colors in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are silk-printed are the peripheral control board 1510, The area indicating the position (including orientation designation) of various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the part number are printed as silk prints. Although it is the same color as the printed color (white), the area indicating the position (including direction designation) of various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards and its part number may be a color different from the color printed as silk printing. For example, if the area indicating the position (including orientation designation) of various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards and the part number are printed in white , the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 may be silk-printed in yellow or black so that the colors are different from white.

Further, in the configuration for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal board surface (mounting surface) The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the side shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other, and the land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the metal substrate surface are in contact with each other. The rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the land 1530rf1 formed on the surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal substrate. The rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2. The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are not brought into contact with the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is The rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. The shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is not brought into contact with the land 1520rf4, and the L-shaped shield plate 1540 on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is configured to abut on the surface of the shield plate 1555. The rear surface of the mounting piece 1540b2 is not brought into contact with the land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but is brought into contact with the surface of the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. can be configured to This is a state in which the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic board back (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected by the above-described conductive elastic member 1545 . This is because

In this configuration, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It is configured so as not to come into contact with various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . In addition, through-holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) shield plate 1540 are formed on the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, respectively. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a. The base body 1502 also corresponds to through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a respectively formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Through-holes are formed at the respective positions. Through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540b1a, 1540b1a, 1540b1a, 1540b1a, 1540b1a, 1540c2a, 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1 Screw holes are formed at positions corresponding to 1540b2a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the surface of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 come into contact with each other. state (that is, a state in which good electrical connectivity can be achieved between the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic board back surface (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555). Screw holes are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into through holes formed in the base body 1502 so that they are clamped and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 . It can be fixed by screwing in each direction.

In the fourth embodiment, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow into the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By blowing out to the outside, the air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 on the substrate surface (mounting surface) side made of metal. However, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation draws in air through the blades toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. air may be forced out. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Also, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. For the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in a), a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. A squeegee (something like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask so that it is applied from the holes formed in the metal mask. , the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flown into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate are in contact. In order not to reduce the contact area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is designed so that the soldering does not partially bulge. should be uniform to

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by partially applying a resist solution to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the "predetermined shape", the resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 221(a). A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed in the resist may be used). As shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a chrysanthemum shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (the resist may have a shape in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance, or a shape in which the resist is A shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width only in the lateral direction are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance), as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed obliquely), although not shown in the figure. A shape in which small circular shapes are aggregated, etc. can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to the area having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist solution can be reduced. 1510rf1, 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. , 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that such a predetermined figure formed by resist may be applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

In addition, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, metal pan head screws were used when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, or a toothed washer (also called a chrysanthemum washer) may be passed through the round head screw to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In addition, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover. and the metal back cover are housed in a transparent synthetic resin box in a state of being electrically connected, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be molded integrally with this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison of noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed with screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to become the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the cover body 1501 molded of transparent non-conductive resin and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, and a transparent non-conductive material covering the opening of the cover body 1501. and a base body 1502 molded from a flexible resin. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 .

In the noise countermeasure configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the fact that the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of transparent non-conductive resin, T In that the board conductive elastic member 1508 is fitted on the back side of the base flat plate 1502 a so that a part of the board conductive elastic member 1508 having a letter shape protrudes from the back side of the base body 1502 , the liquid crystal output board 1530 A region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed is provided on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the test pad for the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 , and that the cover body 1501 has openings for contacting probes with the test pads. is different from the configuration of

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to fifth embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment is mostly similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. At a position corresponding to the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, a board conductive elastic member 1508 that can be in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is fitted. A rib portion 1502aw is formed to protrude forward from the surface of the base flat plate 1502a with a predetermined distance dimension (a distance dimension that does not come into contact with the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). An insertion opening 1502az having a square shape (one side is 8 mm) is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the rectangular rib portion 1502aw. The T-shaped substrate conductive elastic member 1508 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1508a and a T-shaped core member covered by the conductive covering portion 1508a. and a foam 1508b having a Examples of the conductive coating portion 1508a include a polyester woven fabric on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed. As the foam 1508b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. The T-shaped foaming body 15808b has a rectangular parallelepiped base portion that is long in the vertical direction (when the T-shaped foaming body 15808b in FIG. 237 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 3.5 mm and the depth is about 8 mm and a height of about 16 mm), and the projection has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that extends in the front-rear direction from the center to the rear (when the T-shaped foam 15808b in FIG. 237 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 11 mm). 5 mm, about 8 mm deep and about 8 mm high). After the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the board conductive elastic member 1508 is assembled (the method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is the same as the method for assembling the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted). ), the rectangular parallelepiped base portion of the T-shaped board conductive elastic member 1508 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base member 1502 and pushed in the vertical direction to fit. As a result, as shown in FIG. 238(a), a protruding portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the front-rear direction of the T-shaped board conductive elastic member 1508 protrudes rearward from the back side of the base flat plate 1502a. state.

When the vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped base portion of the T-shaped substrate conductive elastic member 1508 is inserted and pushed into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, as shown in FIG. ), the front surface of the base portion, which has a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction, is pressed against the region ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and is brought into contact. The upper and lower back sides of the base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction (that is, a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction to which the projecting portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped elongated in the front-rear direction is not connected) ) are engaged with the surface of the base flat plate 1502a.

In this manner, the board conductive elastic member 1508 is formed in a T-shape, and the rib portion 1502aw of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502 and the insertion opening 1502az are formed in the center of the rib portion 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions. With this configuration, when the board conductive elastic member 1508 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az and pushed in, as described above, the rectangular parallelepiped base portion of the board conductive elastic member 1508 elongated in the vertical direction is formed. The upper back side and the lower back side (that is, the back side of the base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction to which the projecting portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped elongated in the front-rear direction is not connected) are engaged with the surface of the base flat plate 1502a. Since the state is such that the board conductive elastic member 1508 is difficult to come off from the insertion port 1502az, it is easy to handle.

In addition, on the back surface (solder surface) side of peripheral control board 1510, areas corresponding to disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on base body 1502 have a smaller outer shape than disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having large circumferences are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil extraction regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil-extracted regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are connected to the ground of peripheral control board 1510 ( GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 through the foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A noise-free route is formed.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a picture frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a picture frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the picture frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the picture frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. Housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment part formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the board conductive elastic member 1508 protruding from the back side of the base body 1502 is a rectangular parallelepiped elongated in the front-rear direction. is pressed against the metal back cover of the production display device 1600 (in the fifth embodiment, the protrusion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the front-rear direction of the board conductive elastic member 1508 4.5 mm in the front-rear direction and expands in the vertical direction), and the T-shaped board conductive elastic member 1508 is deformed into an H-shape. The conductive elastic member 1508 has a contact surface with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and a contact surface with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. , to maintain good electrical connection, the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, are electrically reliably connected, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520) and can be the same ground (GND). As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the board conductive elastic member 1508 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the peripheral control board). 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Since it is electrically connected to the line and can be the same ground (GND), the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520 and various boards such as the liquid crystal output board 1530) and the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1500 (various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530). Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment are molded from transparent non-conductive resin. , a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions. When the shaped base portion is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 via the board conductive elastic member 1508). is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the data ROM board 1520). In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. properly connected. For this reason, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 is guided to the substrate ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and removed. A "route to exit" can be formed. As a result, there is no need to equip each board (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. can contribute.

The ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 ( ) (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 ( ) is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 . is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of .) is provided on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . As shown in FIG. 240, on the cover body 1501, the tips of contact probes (hereinafter simply referred to as "contact probes") are attached to the test pads (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It may be a "test lead" for conducting a continuity check of a so-called "tester") into which a contact is made. By bringing this contact probe into contact with the test pad, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected. An inspector can easily perform an inspection operation to determine whether or not there is connection.

[Partially Exposed Areas of Grounds of Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
Here, the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed will be described. A region ROP formed in part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as shown in FIGS. A portion of the substrate ground (GND) (that is, a solid ground) formed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of 1530y has a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction of the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 and has a shape larger than the front surface shape of the base portion. Resist liquid is applied onto the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be exposed inside the rectangular rib portion 1502aw formed on the surface of the base flat plate 1502a. is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

It is also possible to adopt a method of using a through hole instead of exposing the solid ground as the region ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 241(c) and 241(d), the area ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the solid ground on the front surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively, and the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed with a land around each through hole. A resist liquid can be applied onto the foil surface 1530yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

In the fifth embodiment, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow into the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By blowing out air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to the outside, when taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of air vents. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the formed ventilation holes 1501az can be kept small. Air may be sucked in through the peripheral control IC 1510a and sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

It should be noted that, even in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 abuts on the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. The solder paste is applied from the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool), and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flown into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. In order not to reduce the area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 should be soldered so that the soldering does not partially bulge. need to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist solution. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of a copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, the resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 221(a). A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed in the resist may be used). As shown in FIG. A plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a chrysanthemum shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (the resist may have a shape in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance, or a shape in which the resist is A shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width only in the lateral direction are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance), as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed obliquely), although not shown in the figure. A shape in which small circular shapes are aggregated, etc. can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since soldering is made to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist liquid). 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the bearing surface (the bearing surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be performed on the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to Also, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4.

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment as well, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal round head screw was used. A metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, or a toothed washer (also called a chrysanthemum washer) may be passed through the round head screw to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In addition, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover. and the metal back cover are housed in a transparent synthetic resin box in a state of being electrically connected, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be molded integrally with this transparent synthetic resin box.

By the way, conventionally, boards such as a main control board for controlling game progress and game profit, a sub-control board for controlling effects executed with the progress of a game, and an image control board for controlling the display of an image display device, etc. is arranged on the back side (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, like the game machine described in this document, since the game machines are arranged in a row facing each other in a hall, the influence of the noise generated from the game machines facing each other is affected by the board on which the electronic components are mounted. There was a risk that the board would malfunction due to the noise.

In addition, conventionally, there have been gaming machines equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc., and an effect control board, etc., on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted. proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the game machine from the island equipment of the game hall are charged with static electricity when they rub against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from

In addition, conventionally, there have been gaming machines equipped with boards on which electronic components such as ROMs for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, and CPUs for controlling display devices for displaying various images are mounted. proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, since some of the various boards provided in the gaming machine are accommodated in the board box, it is necessary to perform work for accommodating the boards in the board box, and improvement in work efficiency has been demanded.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable]
Next, the flexible flat cable connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 244. FIG. 242 is a front perspective view of the flexible flat cable, and FIG. 243 is a diagram (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to a connector on the back side of the performance display device, and the flexible flat cable is a liquid crystal display device. It is a view (b) showing a state electrically connected to the connector of the output board, and is a partially enlarged view of the B section shown in (a) and the C section shown in (b), in which the flexible flat cable is FIG. 244 shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device and is not normally connected to the connector; FIG. FIG. 4A is a diagram showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is not normally electrically connected to the connector of the liquid crystal output substrate; FIG. In FIG. 243(c), the connector CN10 shown in FIG. 243(b) is shown rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

[Shape of flexible flat cable]
The flexible flat cable LFC electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600. In addition, these flat conductors are covered with an insulator, and compared to ordinary round electric wiring, the thickness (diameter) of ordinary round electric wiring is 1/3 to 5 As shown in FIG. 242, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba are provided on the upper end side of the main body LFCa, which is elongated in the vertical direction and has a predetermined width, on the back side of the main body LFCa. To reinforce the electrodes LFCba having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba that are exposed and have a length and that have a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa and that are exposed. While the reinforcing plate LFCca is formed on the main body LFCa, on the lower end side of the main body LFCa, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body LFCa with a predetermined length. A reinforcement plate LFCcb having a predetermined thickness and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of a plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes LFCbb is formed on the surface side of LFCa for reinforcing the electrodes LFCbb.

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa are connected to a connector 1600ca (see FIG. 243) of a control board 1600c provided on a metal back cover 1600b covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. (a).), while a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa are connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. is electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided in the .

The flexible flat cable LFC is bent 90 degrees to the left at a portion having a predetermined vertical distance from the upper end of the main body LFCa, and has a straight upwardly bent portion LFCd (the predetermined vertical distance is It is the distance dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa to the center point of the straight line rising to the right.), and a predetermined distance dimension in the horizontal direction (in this embodiment, a predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction) from the bent portion LFCd (the center point of the straight line rising to the right). ), a bent portion LFCe is formed which is smoothly bent in the front direction and smoothly bent in the right direction as it is, and is formed so as to be parallel in the front-back direction (depth direction). ing.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the effect display device]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC, as shown in FIG. is electrically connected to the connector 1600ca of the . This control board 1600c restores the drawing data transmitted from the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and includes various electronic components for displaying images on the liquid crystal panel 1600a and LEDs ( Alternatively, various electronic parts for adjusting the brightness of the cold cathode tube are mounted.

Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is not properly inserted deep into the connector 1600ca, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba A contact failure may occur between the electrodes LFCba of the connector 1600ca and the corresponding electrodes of the connector 1600ca. one electrode LFCba of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba is obliquely inserted into the connector 1600ca electrode corresponding to this one electrode LFCba, another electrode adjacent to this electrode, , the control board 1600c and various electronic components mounted on the control board 1600c may be damaged.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally connected to the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. In the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left side near the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) so as to serve as a mark for insertion. The long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction and the vicinity of the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is engraved on the right outer side). These guidelines G1L and G1R are stamped on the metal back cover 1600b in the process of pressing with a pressing machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally connected to the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. After being inserted, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may come off the connector 1600ca, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may come off. In order to prevent the electrode LFCba of the flat conductor and the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to each electrode LFCba from being obliquely displaced and making contact with another adjacent electrode, a short circuit may occur. Square brackets (") are provided slightly outward from positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal SFC as an area where the fixed seal SFC having a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction and fixed to the back side of the lid 1600b is attached. These four bracket (")-shaped guidelines G2, G2, G2, G2 are stamped in the process of pressing the metal back cover 1600b with a press machine. The posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed by fixing the flexible flat cable LFC to the rear side of the metal back cover 1600b with the fixing seal SFC.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LCD output board]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are, as shown in FIG. electrically connected. In addition to the connector CN10, the liquid crystal output board 1530 also has the above-described connectors CN8 and CN9 and a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 and the like. By inserting and electrically connecting the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the special connector SCN2 of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device can be displayed from the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Rendering data of an image to be rendered on the apparatus is input to the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the special connector SCN2 from the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is transmitted from the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the flexible flat cable. Input is made to the control board 1600c via the LFC and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. FIG.

Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted deep into the connector CN10, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb A contact failure may occur between the electrodes LFCbb of the connector CN10 and the corresponding electrodes of the connector CN10. one electrode LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb is obliquely inserted into the connector CN10 corresponding to this one electrode LFCbb, another electrode adjacent to this electrode, , the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and various electronic components mounted on the peripheral control substrate 1510 electrically connected to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 may be damaged.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In the left-right direction near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the upper outer side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) so as to serve as a mark for and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), a long solid guideline G3L linearly extending in the horizontal direction is printed by silk printing.

In this embodiment, no through-hole is formed in the area where the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is arranged. Even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the exposed flexible flat cable LFC is flat. This is to prevent the die conductor from shorting due to the through hole.

[Relationship between reinforcing plate of flexible flat cable and connector]
When inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, The electrode LFCba of the type conductor faces the electrode of the connector 1600ca and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, while the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Become. As a result, the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC extend normally to the depths of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC must be inserted deep into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. In other words, when the amount of pushing is insufficient, the lower end side peripheral portion of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is exposed from the connector 1600ca.

Further, when inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the flat conductor The electrode LFCbb of the connector CN10 faces the electrode of the connector CN10 and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, while the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. As a result, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are properly inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, as shown in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that unless the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, that is, the pushing amount is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10.

[When the flexible flat cable is not properly connected]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted deep into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the production display device 1600. 244(a), the left end side of the main body LFCa covers the guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction and cannot be visually recognized, and the right end side of the main body LFCa is The guideline G1R linearly extending in the vertical direction is inclined, and the lower edge side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is inclined with respect to the lower edge side of the connector 1600ba. A part of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing is exposed from the connector 1600ba. In this way, by the guide lines G1L and G1R and the reinforcing plate LFCca, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are arranged on the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covered is properly inserted to the depth can be easily determined visually. As a result, on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, an operator can attach a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. When the electrode LFCba is inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the , it can be easily visually determined whether the electrode LFCba is normally inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

In addition, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but obliquely. 244(b), the upper edge of the main body LFCa covers the guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction and cannot be visually recognized, and the lower edge of the main body LFCa extends in the left-right direction. The left end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb (in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb) is aligned with the left end of the connector CN10. The side (in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the connector CN10) is inclined, and a part of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10. In this way, by the guide lines G3U and G3L and the reinforcing plate LFCcb, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Whether or not the connector CN10 is properly inserted all the way into the provided connector CN10 can be easily visually determined. As a result, on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, an operator attaches a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When the electrode LFCbb is inserted into the connector CN10 provided in the connector CN10, it can be easily visually determined whether the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the top of the position corresponding to the upper edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) was printed by silk-screen printing, and the rectangular area with the guideline G3U as the upper side and the guideline G3L as the lower side was solidly printed by silk-screen printing. may be Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 does not. The copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 covered with the resist is prevented from being peeled off due to the peeling of the silk print in the rectangular area where 1530x is solidly applied. In addition, short-circuiting of the flat conductors of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) was printed by silk-screen printing, but the liquid crystal corresponding to the rectangular area with the guideline G3U as the upper side and the guideline G3L as the lower side and the area inside the area. A foil extraction area may be formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the output substrate 1530 . Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-punched rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the foil-punched rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 does not. Even if the resist of 1530x is peeled off, there is no copper foil surface in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, so the flat conductor of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC will be shorted. can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) were printed by silk printing, but the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 was removed. The guide lines G3U and G3L may be formed by removing the guide lines G3U and G3L. G3U and G3L may be formed.

In the above-described embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10. After that, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are separated from the connector CN10, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are removed. In order to prevent the electrode LFCbb of the type conductor and the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to each electrode LFCbb from being obliquely displaced and making contact with another adjacent electrode, a short circuit may occur. A fixing seal having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction may be attached to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x. In this case, on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as the area where the fixing sticker is to be pasted, the area slightly outward from the positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixing sticker is indicated by, for example, brackets ("). The guidelines may be formed by silk printing (graphics such as lines, symbols, etc.) may be printed, respectively, or may be formed in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. By removing the copper foil, a bracket (“) shape (graphics such as lines and symbols may be used) guide lines may be formed. When applying the liquid, by not applying the resist liquid to a part of the area, a bracket (")-shaped guideline (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed. The flexible flat cable LFC is a fixed seal. By being fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the flexible flat cable LFC, the posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected using the flexible flat cable LFC. However, in the case where a substrate is provided on a movable body that is driven by an electric drive voltage, a flexible flat cable is used as an electrical wiring for electrically connecting between the substrate and the drive substrate. good too. Since a load is applied to the movable body due to the electric wiring accompanying the operation of the movable body, this load may be so large that it cannot be ignored. Therefore, by using a flexible flat cable instead of wiring and harnesses as electrical wiring, the load on the movable body due to the flexible flat cable accompanying the movement of the movable body is suppressed, thereby reducing the overload of the electric drive source. can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) are printed by silk-screen printing, a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is printed on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer. When the formed electrodes LFCbb of flat conductors are inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, it is visually checked whether the electrodes LFCbb are properly inserted all the way into the connector CN10. However, for example, as an indication of the standby position (original position) of the movable body operated by the drive of the electric drive power, on the substrate near the standby position (original position) of the movable body A figure such as a line or a symbol indicating the standby position (original position) of the movable body may be printed by silk printing. In this way, when an attendant such as a store clerk of a game hall inspects the pachinko machine, the movable body is manually moved to the standby position (original position) without turning on the power of the pachinko machine. can be In addition, even when the pachinko machine is turned on, it can be used to determine whether the movable body is displaced from the standby position (original position), so it can be used to check for defects in the movable body. can also

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the vertical direction. The long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly to the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ) is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side (that is, the upper side of the upper side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the upper side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) and the lower side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC A long solid line guideline G3L linearly extending in the left-right direction near the bottom of the position corresponding to (that is, the bottom and outside of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) is on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. However, the solid line may be replaced with a dashed line, a dashed line with two dots, or an arrow line indicating the direction of insertion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the vertical direction. The long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly to the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ) is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction near the right side of the position (that is, the right inner side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC), and the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the side (that is, the left inner side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) is the effect display device 1600. may be formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but near the bottom of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the flexible flat A long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the cable LFC (lower inside), and the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC ( That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 may be formed with a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction (upper inner side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the vertical direction. The long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly to the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ) is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G1L linearly extending vertically at a position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC, and a long solid line guideline G1R linearly extending vertically at a position corresponding to the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. may be formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b. That is, the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1L are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap each other, and the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1R are aligned in the front-rear direction. positional relationship. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but extends linearly in the horizontal direction at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid-line guideline G3U and a long solid-line guideline G3L linearly extending in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 at a position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. That is, the upper edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3U are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlapped, and the lower edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3L are aligned in the front-rear direction. positional relationship. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other in the front-rear direction. As a result, the distance dimension between the upper edge and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) of the electrode LFCba normally inserted deep into the connector 1600ca. In addition, when the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other in the front-rear direction, so that the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the dimension of the distance between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) of the electrode LFCba normally inserted deep into the connector 1600ca. , the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is longer than the length (insertion length) at which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted deep into the connector 1600ca, in other words, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC In a state in which the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side are normally inserted deep into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, the reinforcing plate LFCca When the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca does not coincide with the lower edge of the connector 1600ca in the front-rear direction and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca is spaced parallel to the lower edge of the connector 1600ca, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca Whether or not the electrode LFCba is normally inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca is determined by checking the bottom edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the bottom edge of the connector 1600ca. It is difficult to use and distinguish. Similarly, the distance dimension between the upper edge and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb was the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCbb was normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10, but the upper edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side is longer than the length (insertion length) of the electrode LFCbb normally inserted deep into the connector CN10. In a state in which the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb are normally inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the lower edge of the connector CN10, do not coincide in the front-rear direction, and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is spaced parallel to the lower edge of the connector CN10, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the lower edge of the connector CN10, are spaced apart, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the electrode LFCbb has been properly inserted all the way into the connector CN10 by using the lower edge side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower edge side of the connector CN10. .

Therefore, in such a case, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca in a state where the electrode LFCba is normally inserted deep into the connector 1600ca, , a solid line ( Instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca may be used. It may intersect with the guideline G1L, or may be L-shaped integrally formed with the guideline G1L described above.) and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC A solid line extending straight to the right in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flat cable LFC) (in place of the solid line, a dashed line or a dashed two-dotted line may be used, and the reinforcing plate LFCca The guideline G1R' (this guideline G1R' may intersect with the guideline G1R described above, or may be an L-shaped guideline integrally formed with the guideline G1R described above). ) and are preferably engraved on the back side of the metal back cover 1600 b of the effect display device 1600 .

Further, in a state in which the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted deep into the connector CN10, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower edge of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the flexible flat cable A solid line (in place of the solid line , a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. Alternatively, it may be an L-shape formed integrally with the guideline G3U described above.In addition, a rectangular shape ( The inside thereof may be solidly printed by silk printing.) and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) A solid line extending linearly downward (in place of the solid line, a dashed line or a two-dotted line may be used in place of the solid line, indicating the position of the bottom side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. The guideline G3L' (This guideline G3L' may intersect with the above-described guideline G3L, or may be an L-shaped integrally formed with the above-described guideline G3L. Further, A rectangular shape (the inside of which may be solidly printed by silk printing) having the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the guideline G3L′ and the distance dimension in the horizontal direction of the above-described guideline G3L. It is preferable that the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is printed by silk printing.

Instead of silk printing, the guidelines G3U' and G3L' can be obtained by removing the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as in the modification described above. Alternatively, guide lines G3U′ and G3L′ can be formed by not applying the resist solution to a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. may Further, as in the above-described modified example, the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is removed, and the vertical distance dimension of the guideline G3L′ and the guideline G3L described above are removed. By forming a rectangular shape (the copper foil inside the rectangular shape may also be removed) having a distance dimension in the left-right direction of may

[Connector connection method]
Next, connect to the connector provided on the relay board that relays various wiring to the peripheral control board 1510, the relay board that relays various wiring to the main control board 1310, and the relay board that relays various wiring to the payout control board 633 Connectors for wiring and harnesses to be connected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a diagram (a) showing the layout of the connectors of the relay board, and a diagram (b) showing a state in which the connectors of the wires and harnesses are normally connected to the connectors of the relay board. It is a figure (c) which shows the state to which the connector of wiring and harness is not normally connected with respect to.

By the way, if the connector of the wiring or harness is not properly inserted into the connector of the relay board, contact failure may occur between the electrodes of the connector. When the connector is inserted into the connector, adjacent electrodes of the connector come into contact with each other, causing a short circuit, which may damage the relay board and various electronic components mounted on various control boards electrically connected to the relay board.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 245(a), the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD is provided with the socket-side connector SCK into which the plug-side connector PLG of the wiring and harness KDCBL is inserted. there is The connector SCK on the socket side is of a right angle type (also called a "side type"), and is box-shaped with an opening SCKb formed on the lower surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. is formed in A plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa, in which the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed, is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension in the left-right direction as the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction is integrally formed. As described above, the lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a predetermined distance dw1 from the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD and is located on the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board KD. KDx, but in this embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension dw1 is the vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG.

When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa is inserted into the socket-side connector. It abuts on the lower side surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the SCK is formed, resulting in a state of surface contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 245(b), the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG The lower side surface PLGb of PLGb) and the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the front-rear direction.

Thus, the connector SCK on the socket side is arranged with a distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side as a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD. Therefore, when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board edge of the relay board KD) extend in the front-rear direction. are arranged in a positional relationship that overlaps with each other. As a result, on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, when the operator normally inserts the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the operator's finger The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG), and the lower end side of the relay board KD By touching KDeg (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) and being arranged on the same plane, the plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is moved to the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the SCKb is properly inserted all the way to the back. Also, when the pachinko machine is inspected by an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall, the above-described pachinko machine can be placed on the same plane as described above. By the tactile sensation of being placed, it can be easily determined whether or not the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

Note that when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK and is obliquely inserted, as shown in FIG. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG of the plug side (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, , board end of the relay board KD) with a protrusion amount dSP. As a result, a worker on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a staff member such as a game hall clerk who inspects the pachinko machine can see that the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side is not at the lower end of the relay board KD by the protrusion amount dSP. By protruding from the side KDeg, the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (that is, , the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side, and the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are touched to form a step. It can be easily determined that the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted deep into the opening portion SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the socket-side connector SCK has a vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. and formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG in a state in which the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening portion SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) Although they were arranged in a positional relationship that coincides with the direction and overlaps, the component placement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side is printed by silk printing with a solid line that is larger than the outer shape of the connector SCK on the socket side. In addition, in a state in which the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body PLGb is formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower side of the component arrangement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side are arranged so as to match. may be FIG. 246 is a modified example of FIG. 245, and is a view (a) showing the arrangement of the connector of the relay board and the part arrangement line, and the connector of the wiring and harness is normally connected to the connector of the relay board. It is a diagram (b) showing a state, and a diagram (c) showing a state in which the connector of the wiring or harness is not normally connected to the connector of the relay board.

For example, on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD, as shown in FIG. 246(a), a socket-side connector SCK into which the plug-side connector PLG of the wiring or harness KDCBL is inserted is arranged. The connector SCK on the socket side is formed in a box shape with an opening SCKb formed in the lower surface SCKaa of the body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. A plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into this opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (for example, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. which is approximately twice the distance dimension dw1 arranged from the lower end side KDeg of KD and has a distance dimension of at least 5 mm. are placed in

The reason why the lower side surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is separated from the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD by the first distance dimension dw2 will be explained briefly. When mounting components or passing the board into the solder bath, it is necessary to form a so-called "scrap board" (the area where electronic components cannot be mounted), which is 3 mm to 5 mm inward from each edge of the board. Electronic components cannot be mounted over the entire range (range from each edge of the board to its periphery). When mounting electronic components without forming this scrap board (that is, when mounting electronic components in the range from each edge of the board to its periphery), a gripping jig for fixing the board and a board warp prevention are required. Although it is necessary to use a jig, in this case as well, electronic components cannot be placed in the area of the substrate clamped by the gripping jig or the substrate warp prevention jig, which is about 5 mm inward from the edge of the substrate. Therefore, in this embodiment, as the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. It is about twice the distance dimension that is arranged as a square and has at least 5 mm. As a result, when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is inserted. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is arranged above the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD, so that it is arranged inside the relay board KD. It will be done.

Around the connector SCK on the socket side, a rectangular component arrangement line DSLK indicating the component positions of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed on at least the lower surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed, and the socket. The lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the side has a second distance dimension dw3 and is printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD by silk printing. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension in the left-right direction as the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction is integrally formed. Around the connector SCK on the socket side, as described above, the rectangular component arrangement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side and at least the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side are formed. and the lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with the second distance dimension dw3. In this embodiment, the second distance dimension dw3 is the distance dimension in which the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. They have the same distance dimension (that is, the distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side).

When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa is inserted into the socket-side connector. It contacts with the lower surface SCKaa of the opening SCKb of the SCK and comes into surface contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 246(b), the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG The lower side surface of PLGb (PLGbb) and the lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are aligned with each other. As a result, workers on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer and staff members such as game hall clerks who inspect pachinko machines can insert the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG into the opening portion SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. It can be easily visually determined whether or not it is normally inserted all the way to the back. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

Note that when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK and is obliquely inserted, as shown in FIG. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG of the connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the component arrangement line of the connector SCK on the socket side. It is arranged to protrude from the lower side of the DSLK with a protruding amount dSP. As a result, a worker on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or an employee such as a game hall clerk who inspects the pachinko machine will notice that the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side is not aligned with the part arrangement line DSLK by the protrusion amount dSP. By protruding from the lower side DSLKeg, it is possible to easily visually determine whether the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

By the way, conventionally, various types of control boards such as a main control board for controlling game progress and game profits, a sub-control board for controlling effects to be executed as the game progresses, and an image control board for controlling the display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which the substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). Some of the connectors provided on the circuit board have wires to which wires are inserted and removed, and some have connectors whose one end is electrically connected to the wires. In the connection work, it was necessary to check the electrical connection to the connector, and the checking work took time.

[Wiring groove]
In the present embodiment, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and viewed from the front side, the left rear surface of the game board 5 has a payout machine spaced apart by a predetermined distance, as described above. A back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the base unit 550 is arranged. A ball guiding unit 570 attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e is arranged on the upper left back surface of the game board 5, and is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e on the center side of the left back surface of the game board 5. A payout device 580 is arranged, and an upper full ball path unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e is arranged on the lower side of the left rear surface of the game board 5.

As described above, in this embodiment, the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the left back plate 551e are arranged with a predetermined distance from the rear of the left back surface of the game board 5. A space is formed. In this space, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 113, a plurality of protective cover bodies 1601 molded of non-conductive transparent resin covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the performance display device 1600 are provided. The formed L-shaped wiring treatment pieces 1601a are arranged along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601, and various wirings are locked by the L-shaped wiring treatment pieces 1601a.

The game balls B are ground in the island facilities of the game hall, rub against each other in circulation between the island facilities and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guide unit 570, payout device 580, and upper full ball path unit 600 that can retain the game balls B are attached. .

In other words, since the ball guide unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 The space formed (hereinafter referred to as “wiring routing space”) is under an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. As shown in FIG.

Various electric wires routed in the wiring space include, for example, wiring for transmitting control signals and wiring for supplying various power sources, and a plurality of various electric wires are intermingled in the wiring space. Wiring that transmits control signals is vulnerable to noise and can cause problems due to electromagnetic wave noise (for example, normal data changes to other data and becomes garbled, or signals that are not originally output are being output. signal, etc.) are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise, whereas wiring for supplying various power sources is resistant to noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise.

Then, among the various wirings routed in the wiring routing space, it is necessary to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise that can avoid problems due to electromagnetic noise for the wiring that transmits control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise. On the other hand, there is no need to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise for wiring that supplies various power supplies that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise.

247 to 252, a configuration in which wiring grooves for routing various wirings are provided on the left rear surface of the game board 5 (hereinafter referred to as "wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments") will be described. do. FIG. 247 is a partial perspective view (a) of the game board as seen from the rear for explaining the area where the wiring grooves are attached, and a diagram (b) showing a state in which the wiring grooves according to the first embodiment are mounted on the back side of the game board. FIG. 248 is a continuation of FIG. 247 and is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board, and FIG. 249 is according to the first embodiment. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from behind with the wiring grooves attached to the back side of the game board, and FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing the state of various wiring when the game board is viewed from the front in a state where it is mounted on the back side of the game board, and FIG. 251 is a wiring groove according to the second embodiment mounted on the back side of the game board FIG. 252 is a perspective view showing the state of various wiring when the game board is viewed from behind in a state in which the wiring grooves according to the second embodiment are installed on the back side of the game board; 1 is a perspective view showing the state of various wiring when the game board is viewed from the front. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 247(b) and 248(c), only the flexible flat cable is shown as the wiring routed in the first and second wiring grooves for electromagnetic wave noise countermeasures, and other various wirings are omitted for the sake of visibility of the drawings. . Also, in FIGS. 249 to 252, the game board is omitted for ease of viewing.

[Areas where wiring grooves are installed]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and viewed from the front side, the left back plate is arranged at a predetermined distance from the rear of the left rear surface of the game board 5 . A space is formed between the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the back left portion 551e by the portion 551e. In this space, various wires are engaged with an L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on a protective cover body 1601 covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the performance display device 1600. 1601 are arranged along the vertical direction. In the wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 247(a), instead of the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed in the protective cover body 1601, mounting boss holes are formed in the protective cover body 1601. 1601d are formed two on the upper side and two on the lower side.

[Wiring grooves according to the first embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 247(b), 249 and 250, the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is a metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity, and is a thin metal flat plate (thickness 2 .0 mm to 2.6 mm) are bent by press working to form a groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed on the upper and lower sides by bending by press working. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower left side walls of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. are formed, and L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower sides of the right side wall of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. Notches 1605c are formed in corresponding portions. A notch hole 1605bb is formed by pressing at the tip of the mounting surface 1605ba of the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b.

The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is connected to the same ground (GND ). This prevents the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 from being electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided on the game board 5 . In other words, electrically floating metal functions as an antenna that picks up noise and may become a noise source. .

Notch holes 1605bb formed in mounting surfaces 1605ba of four L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b in metal wiring groove 1605 are arranged so as to correspond to four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in protective cover body 1601, respectively. After the mounting boss holes 1601d are inserted into the notch holes 1605bb (the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss holes 1601d is the same dimension as or smaller than the plate thickness dimension of the notch holes 1605bb.) When a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the notch hole 1605bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605 are in contact with each other. An extra-groove space is formed with the bottom outer surface 1605d. Further, when the game board 5 to which the metal wiring groove 1605 is fixed is attached to the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 is the payout base unit 550 described above. By being closed by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, an inner groove space is formed in the metal wiring groove 1605 in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section.

In other words, the space between the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the delivery base 551 of the delivery base unit 550 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 so that the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605 are formed. A space outside the groove and a space inside the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 can be formed respectively. It's becoming That is, the space outside the groove formed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having the U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space that does not face the side of the electromagnetic noise source. On the other hand, the space inside the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space facing the source side of the electromagnetic wave noise. The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 of the space outside the groove is larger than the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the space inside the groove.

Since the ball guide unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are formed. The space where the wiring is routed, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but since the metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, the electromagnetic noise is removed from the groove inner space. The metal wiring groove 1605 can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion toward the outer space.

As a result, it is possible to avoid problems caused by electromagnetic noise by routing the wiring for transmitting control signals, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise, to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, and also to avoid the influence of electromagnetic noise. Wiring for supplying various power sources that are difficult to receive can be drawn around in the groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 .

For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1606 (abbreviation of FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. A plurality of flat conductors are arranged parallel to each other and covered with an insulator. It is an important wiring that transmits drawing data (control signals) to a sub-effect display device (not shown), and when affected by electromagnetic noise, the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown) In order to prevent troubles such as disturbance of the wiring and images like a sandstorm, the wiring is routed to a space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 . In addition, various wiring for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above, a twisted pair cable for transmitting control signals by the plus side wiring and the minus side wiring, the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 Various wirings that transmit detection signals from various sensors that are input to 1510 are conductors (single wire material or stranded wire material) that are covered with an insulating material. The normal data output by the control board 1510 changes to other data and is received (input) at the output destination as garbled data, or it is output as a signal that is being output even though it is a signal that is not originally output. In order to prevent troubles such as receiving (inputting) earlier or detection signals from various sensors being accurately received (inputted) to the peripheral control board 1510 , the wiring is drawn to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 . is turned. Twisted pair cables and various types of wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 are routed upward or downward along the space outside the groove.

On the other hand, wiring for supplying various power sources such as +24 V, +12 V, and +5 V (which may also include ground (GND)) created on the power supply board 630 described above is a conductor (single wire or twisted wire). is covered with an insulating material, and the voltage of various power supplies (including the ground (GND)) is in a stabilized state, so compared to the control signal, electromagnetic noise Even if it is affected by the influence of , the voltage fluctuation due to this influence is extremely weak and is not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise.

Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the game board by various power supply lines electrically connected from the drawer connector (concave type) on the side of the main frame to the drawer connector (convex type) on the side of the game board 5 via the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board 5 . 5 and various wirings for supplying power from the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5 to the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 so that they are not arranged close to the flexible flat cable 1606. The metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 through the cutouts 1605c formed on the lower sides of the right and left side walls of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. It is drawn around in the space inside the groove, and is drawn around upward along the inside of the groove and is drawn around from the upper end of the metal wiring groove 1605 to various substrates provided on the game board 5 .

In this way, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 provides a space for passing wiring (a space for wiring) as a space outside the groove for wiring for transmitting control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise, Since it can be configured as a two-story structure divided into a space in the groove for routing wiring that supplies various power supplies that are not easily affected, the front surface of the left part of the back plate 551e and the game board 5 It is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in the space (wiring routing space) formed on the left rear surface.

Now, the flexible flat cable 1606 will be described. The flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub performance display device (not shown), and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. It has a thickness (diameter) about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire, and the liquid crystal of the peripheral control unit 1500 It is formed three-dimensionally by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times from the output board 1530 toward a sub performance display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5, and has a predetermined width. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba having a predetermined length are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body 1606a on the left upper end side of the main body 1606a elongated in the direction. A reinforcing plate 1606ca is formed to reinforce the electrodes 1606ba having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba which are exposed and have a thickness, whereas the lower end of the main body 1606a is formed. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb having a predetermined length are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body 1606a, and a plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes 1606bb having a predetermined thickness are arranged on the front side of the main body 1606a. A reinforcing plate 1606cb is formed to reinforce the electrode 1606bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the conductor electrode 1606bb.

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1606a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 1606a are made of a metal backing (not shown) covering the back upper side of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the lid.

Between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) on the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected, a capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is provided. is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, the power supply line and substrate ground (GND) of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. A decoupling capacitor (not shown) and a bypass capacitor (not shown) for a power source are mounted between the capacitors, which are called bypass capacitors. are improving their sexuality.

A flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 connects the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. Passing between the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the display area and the outer surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity, the wire is routed to the outer groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, and is guided downward along the outer groove space. It is drawn into the substrate holder 1200 attached to the back surface of the game board 5 as it is, and is electrically connected to the connector of the control substrate provided on the metal back cover covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub-effect display device (not shown). be done.

A flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is used to display effects on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the game board 5, as described above. It can be routed to an extra-groove space formed by a conductive metal wiring groove 1605 passing between the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the device 1600 except for the display area. In addition, as described above, the effect display device 1600 has a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-like metal frame. As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is provided between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shielding member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise from entering toward the flexible flat cable 1606 in the region through which it passes.

[Modification]
The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. (GND), but instead of or together with this, an L-shaped connection piece is pressed toward the protective cover body 1601 at the bottom of the groove 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity. By providing a connecting piece opening in the protective cover body 1601, the connecting surface of this L-shaped connecting piece can be inserted into the protective cover body 1601 through the connecting piece opening provided in the protective cover body 1601. It may be in a state of being electrically connected by abutting with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, or a connection provided in the protective cover body 1601 by attaching a conductive elastic member to the connecting surface of the L-shaped connecting piece. Through the one opening, the metal rear cover of the effect display device 1600 and the surface of the conductive elastic member (the surface opposite to the surface attached to the connecting surface of the L-shaped connecting piece) in the protective cover body 1601 come into contact with each other. (In other words, the connecting surface of the L-shaped connecting piece passes through the connecting piece opening provided in the protective cover 1601 and the metallic effect display device 1600 inside the protective cover 1601 is connected. It may be electrically connected to the back cover via a conductive elastic member). The conductive elastic member is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes a conductive coating, a rectangular foam as a core covered with the conductive coating, and affixed to the conductive coating. and a conductive adhesive tape. Examples of the covering portion include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of foams include heat-resistant polyurethane foams. Examples of conductive adhesive tapes include conductive double-sided adhesive tapes using an acrylic adhesive. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive coating to the connecting surface of the L-shaped connecting piece.

In addition, wiring for transmitting control signals output from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the game board 5 when viewed from the front is provided outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605. It may be routed into the space and routed upward along the space outside the groove. In this way, the wiring to the function display unit 1400 can be improved in noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. FIG.

In addition, the metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. (GND), but even if the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided on the game board 5, it functions as an antenna that picks up noise and acts as a noise source. If there is no possibility that the electromagnetic wave noise from the noise source is small enough to be ignored, the metal wiring groove 1605 is not electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown). , may be in an electrically floating state.

The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate elongated in the vertical direction. ' can be configured as In this case, conductive plating (for example, noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating) is applied to the entire front and back surfaces of the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605', and the conductive plated portion is is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (board ground (GND)) of various boards provided on the game board 5 . Even with this configuration, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605′ plated with conductive material has the same effect as the above-described conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, reduces electromagnetic noise). It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion from the space inside the groove toward the space outside the groove.). Even if the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605' with conductive plating is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided on the game board 5, it functions as an antenna that picks up noise. If there is no possibility that it will become a noise source, or if the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is negligibly small, electrically connect the conductive plating to the board ground (GND) via wiring (not shown). Instead, it may be in an electrically floating state.

The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate elongated in the vertical direction. ' can be configured as Even with this configuration, the conductive resin wiring groove 1605'' has the same effect as the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 described above (that is, the electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted from the space inside the groove to the space outside the groove). It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion toward it.).

Further, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) is provided between the flat conductors. may be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal.

Also, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but is particularly vulnerable to electromagnetic noise (that is, easily affected by electromagnetic noise). For flat conductors for transmission (hereafter referred to as "flat conductors vulnerable to electromagnetic noise"), connect the substrate ground (GND) and the electrical The flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are sandwiched between the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the effects of electromagnetic wave noise. may In this way, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic noise caused by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of the electromagnetic noise.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals arranged in parallel. When configured to include flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and flat conductors supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power sources are arranged adjacent to each other. When the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the power supply should be an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current due to a sudden increase in resistance, or an overcurrent protection element that has a small resistance below the rated current and cuts An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when the current is reached (for example, a circuit with a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch has a relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, and the resistance value increases sharply from a certain temperature. This heat causes the main body to generate heat, and this heat reduces the conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body cools, the conductivity returns and returns. It is preferable to This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a thickness (diameter) of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire. Therefore, when an overcurrent flows in the flat conductor that supplies power, short circuiting of the flexible flat cable 1606 can be prevented by the overcurrent protection circuit or overcurrent protection circuit to ensure safety and prevent damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Wiring grooves according to the second embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 248(c), 251 and 252, the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is a resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity, and has a U-shaped cross section that is long in the vertical direction. A groove portion 1608a is formed, and mounting pieces 1608b projecting outward upward and downward are formed on the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section and are integrally molded. The mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is formed to be flush with the bottom outer surface 1608c of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and mounting holes 1608bb are formed at the tip of the mounting piece 1608b. It is A wiring insertion notch 1608d is formed in the substantially central portion of the left side wall of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section as viewed from the opening side. The resin wiring groove 1608 may be molded with a transparent non-conductive resin, or may be molded with a colored non-conductive resin such as black. The groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608 has a thickness of 2.0 mm to 2.6 mm, and the mounting piece 1608b of the resin wiring groove 1608 has a height of 4.0 mm to 5.0 mm. be.

Mounting holes 1608bb formed in the mounting surfaces 1608ba of the four mounting pieces 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 are arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601, respectively. After each mounting boss hole 1601d is inserted, the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d is smaller than the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting piece 1608b. ), and in a state in which a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the mounting hole 1608bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section between the resin wiring groove 1608 and the resin wiring groove 1608 are fixed. The bottom outer surface 1608c of the protective cover member 1601 contacts with the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b. Further, when the game board 5 to which the resin wiring groove 1608 is fixed is attached to the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 is the payout base unit 550 described above. By being closed by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, an intra-groove space is formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. FIG.

In addition, the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 to the opening side surfaces of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove part 1608a, and the L-shaped shape of the metal wiring groove 1605 The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1605ba of the mounting piece 1605b to the opening side surfaces of the left and right side walls of the groove 1608a is the same dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction), have the same height. In addition, the height (distance dimension in the depth direction) H3 of the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 is equal to the height of the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. and the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the inner groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. , is added to the length.

Since the ball guide unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are formed. The space where the wires are routed, that is, the wiring routing space is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, and the resin wiring groove 1608 has non-conductivity. The resin wiring groove 1608 cannot function as a shielding member capable of preventing intrusion into the space in the groove formed by .

For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1609 (FFC stands for Flexible Flat Cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. A plurality of flat conductors are arranged parallel to each other and covered with an insulator. It has the same shape as the flexible flat cable 1606 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above, and is important for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub effect display device (not shown). If it is affected by electromagnetic wave noise, troubles such as disturbance of the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown) or a sandstorm-like image may occur.

Therefore, a shield wire 1610 woven in a mesh pattern is provided on one of the flat surfaces of the flexible flat cable 1609, and a special structure is adopted in which the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin. This shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the substrate to which the upper end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected, and is also connected to the ground of the substrate (substrate ground (GND)) to which the lower end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected. ground (GND)).

When the flexible flat cable 1609 is formed three-dimensionally by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times, a wiring insertion notch is formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. Through the portion 1608d, it is routed into the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, and extends from the portion bent toward the lower end side of the groove inner space into the groove inner space from the lower end side by a predetermined distance dimension. The portion extending to the portion is formed such that the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided faces the opening side of the groove portion 1608a. That is, in the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface where the flexible flat cable 1609 is provided with the shield wire 1610. The space formed between them (that is, the small space in which the flexible flat cable 1609 is arranged) is a space that does not face the source side of the electromagnetic wave noise. The space formed from the surface on which is provided to the opening side of the groove portion 1608a is a space facing the side of the source of the electromagnetic wave noise.

Since the ball guide unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are formed. The space where the wiring is routed, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. is formed to face the

In addition, wiring that supplies various power sources (including ground (GND)) such as +24 V, +12 V, and +5 V created on the power supply board 630 described above has a conductor (single wire or twisted wire) with a circumference of It is covered with an insulating material, and the voltage of various power supplies (including the ground (GND)) is in a stabilized state, so compared to the control signal, the influence of electromagnetic noise is reduced. Even if it is affected, the voltage fluctuation due to this influence is extremely weak, and the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise is less likely to occur.

In the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the flexible flat cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources coexist. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is provided is directed toward the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the groove having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. It faces the open side of 1608a. Various power supplies from the power supply substrate 630 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shielded wire 1610 is provided.

Various power supplies from the power board 630 are supplied to the game board by various power supply lines electrically connected from the drawer connector (concave type) on the side of the main frame to the drawer connector (convex type) on the side of the game board 5 via the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board 5 . 5 and various wirings for supplying power from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is provided. The inner groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 from below the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608. , and is drawn upward along the inner space of the groove, and is drawn from the upper end of the wiring groove 1608 made of resin to various substrates provided on the game board 5 .

In this way, the flexible flat cable 1609, which is a wiring for transmitting control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise, is shielded from the wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity in the space through which the wiring passes (the space for routing the wiring). The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the wire 1610 and not provided with the shielded wire 1610 is directed toward the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the shielded wire 1610 is provided. By directing the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 toward the opening side of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, a space is formed between the front surface of the left back plate 551e and the left rear surface of the game board 5. It is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in (wiring routing space).

In addition, by arranging various power supplies from the power supply substrate 630 along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shielded wire 1610 is provided, the flexible flat wiring, which is wiring for transmitting control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise, can be used. The cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise can be arranged coexisting in the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 .

Note that the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment, is different from the conductive metal wiring groove 1605, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment. Various wiring for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, a twisted pair cable for transmitting the control signal by the positive side wiring and the negative side wiring, and input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is not possible to use the resin wiring groove 1608 itself to route various wiring through which detection signals from various sensors are transmitted.

Here, the flexible flat cable 1609 will be described. The flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub performance display device (not shown), and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. It has a thickness (diameter) about 1/3 to 1/5 of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire, and as described above, it is flexible. The flat cable 1609 has a special structure in which a shield wire 1610 woven in a mesh pattern is provided over one of the flat surfaces of the flat cable 1609, and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin. The flexible flat cable 1609 is directed from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 toward the sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. The flexible flat cable 1609 is bent three-dimensionally by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba having a predetermined length are exposed on the back side of the main body 1609a on the left upper end side of a strip-shaped main body 1609a having a predetermined width and being long in the horizontal direction. A reinforcing plate 1609ca is formed on the surface side of the main body 1609a to reinforce the electrodes 1609ba having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes 1609ba having a predetermined thickness. On the other hand, on the lower end side of the main body 1609a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609bb having a predetermined length are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body 1609a, and on the front side of the main body 1609a, predetermined electrodes 1609bb Reinforcing plates 1609cb are formed to reinforce the electrodes 1609bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609bb having a thickness and being exposed.

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above, and are connected to this connector (not shown). While the shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a connector, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes are formed on the lower end side of the body 1609a. 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) covering the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5, A shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the control substrate via a control substrate connector provided on the metal back cover (not shown).

Between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) on the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected, a capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is provided. is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, the power supply line and substrate ground (GND) in the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. A decoupling capacitor (not shown) and a bypass capacitor (not shown) for a power supply are mounted between the capacitors, which are called bypass capacitors. are improving their sexuality.

A flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 connects the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. Through the wiring insertion notch 1608d formed in the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing between the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering except for the display area. It is drawn around into the space inside the groove, is guided downward along this space inside the groove, is pulled around into the substrate holder 1200 attached to the back surface of the game board 5 as it is, and is drawn around the back surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub effect display device (not shown). It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper side.

A flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is used to display effects on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the game board 5, as described above. A wiring insertion notch formed in a groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing between the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the device 1600 except for the display area. Through 1608d, it can be routed to the space inside the groove formed in the wiring groove 1608 made of resin. In addition, as described above, the effect display device 1600 has a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-like metal frame. As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is provided between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shielding member capable of preventing electromagnetic wave noise from entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the region through which it passes.

[Modification]
In addition, the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape over the entire surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 is bent into a three-dimensional shape by repeatedly mountain-folding and valley-folding a belt-like main body 1606a having a predetermined width and being long in the left-right direction. However, a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape may be provided on one face piece of a short flexible flat cable 1609' in which the belt-like main body 1606a is folded once in the mountains or valleys. For example, when two substrates are placed in an environment affected by electromagnetic noise, a short flexible flat cable 1609' provided with a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape between the two substrates can be used. By electrically connecting, it is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. FIG. The upper end of the flexible flat cable 1609' is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of one of the two boards, and the lower end of the flexible flat cable 1609' is connected to the ground (GND) of one of the two boards. It is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the other of the two substrates.

In addition, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 passes between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shielding member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise from entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the area where the flexible flat cable 1609 is located. Also, in this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 is formed so as to face the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, by combining mountain folds and valley folds of the flexible flat cable 1609 before and after this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 where the shield wire 1610 is not provided in this region can be used as the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. The flexible flat cable 1609 may be formed so as to face the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is provided may face the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 . In this way, the shield line 1610 is formed in the area passing between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area. The side of the flexible flat cable 1609 that is not provided can prevent electromagnetic noise from entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609 with the shield of the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and a shield wire 1610 is provided. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 can be prevented from entering electromagnetic wave noise toward the flexible flat cable 1609 by a shielding wire 1610 .

In addition, the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity were configured separately, but the protective cover body 1601 is If it is made of a non-conductive resin, the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 may be formed integrally.

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609 are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. In addition, the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via this connector (not shown), and a plurality of flexible flat cables 1609 are formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a. The flat conductor electrode 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) covering the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. At the same time, the shield wire 1610 was electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the control substrate via a control substrate connector provided on the metal back cover (not shown). Therefore, for example, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba arranged in parallel, the flat conductors arranged on both end sides may be electrically connected to the shield wires 1610, respectively. Even with this configuration, the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In addition, the control board is connected to the control board through the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) covering the back upper side of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It can be electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)).

Further, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) is provided between the flat conductors. may be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal.

Also, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but is particularly vulnerable to electromagnetic noise (that is, easily affected by electromagnetic noise). For flat conductors for transmission (hereafter referred to as "flat conductors susceptible to electromagnetic noise"), connect the substrate ground (GND) and the electrical The flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are sandwiched between the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the effects of electromagnetic wave noise. may In this way, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic noise caused by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of the electromagnetic noise.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals arranged in parallel. When configured to include flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and flat conductors supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power sources are arranged adjacent to each other. When the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the power supply should be an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current due to a sudden increase in resistance, or an overcurrent protection element that has a small resistance below the rated current and cuts An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when the current is reached (for example, a circuit with a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch has a relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, and the resistance value increases sharply from a certain temperature. This heat causes the main body to generate heat, and this heat reduces the conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body cools, the conductivity returns and returns. It is preferable to This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a thickness (diameter) of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire. Therefore, when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, the short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1609 can be prevented by the overcurrent protection circuit and the overcurrent protection circuit to ensure safety and prevent damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Other decoration devices]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the back-up effect unit 3400 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 . Here, a case where a light emitting effect unit 5000 is provided in place of the back effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 259. FIG. Fig. 253 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit seen from the front, Fig. 254 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit seen from the back, and Fig. 255 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 256 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit exploded and viewed from behind, FIG. 257 is a front view showing the arrangement relationship between the LED bare chips and the light guide plate, and FIG. 258 is arranged on the surface of the light guide plate. FIG. 259 is a diagram (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the LED substrate, and an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a). It is a diagram (b) showing a state in which the insertion of the LED board of the flexible flat cable into the connector is normal, and an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a), showing the LED board of the flexible flat cable It is a figure (c) which shows the abnormal state that the insertion to a connector is insufficient. 253 to 256 and 259, only the lower end side of the flexible flat cable is shown and the other parts are omitted for the sake of visibility of the drawings.

[Luminous production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 253 to 258, the light emitting effect unit 5000 includes a light emitting effect main body 5010 having a circular shape, a T-shaped main body attachment portion 5020 for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010, It is guided into the light emitting main body 5010 along the back side of the main body mounting portion 5020, and the control signal output from the effect driving board 1720 in response to the command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above is used for light emitting effect. A flexible flat cable 5030 (FFC) for transmission to the main body 5010. The flexible flat cable is three-dimensionally formed by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times. The conductor is covered with an insulator.)). Here, first, the light emission effect main body 5010 will be described, and the method of assembling the main body attachment portion 5020, the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emission effect unit 5000 will be described in order.

[Luminous effect body]
The light emission effect main body 5010 is processed from a circular transparent resin-molded decorative body 5040 and a thin circular transparent resin plate that is housed inside the decorative body 5040 and has a notch in the upper part thereof. A diffuser sheet 5050 to be molded, and a conductor molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part and being housed inside the decorative body 5040 in a state of being arranged on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffuser sheet 5050 . A light plate 5060, an LED board 5070 having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part thereof, and a rear opening of the decoration 5040. and a lid body 5080 made of a transparent resin and having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part thereof.

[Decoration body]
At the center of a surface 5040x of a circular decorative body 5040 molded of transparent resin, a convex portion 5040a corresponding to the outer shape of a character protrudes forward, and the character is printed on the entire surface of the convex portion 5040a. there is Of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040, the outer peripheral portion of the convex portion 5040a excluding the entire surface on which the character of the convex portion 5040a is printed and the entire area of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 excluding the convex portion 5040a have the world view of the character. A background pattern (not shown) with a design representing the Although the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is printed with characters and background patterns, the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is illuminated from the front of the light emission effect unit 5000 (that is, pachinko machine 1 A player sitting in front of the decoration body 5040 can easily visually recognize it, and the change in the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 can be communicated to the player.

On the rear surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040, leaving the upper side thereof, a member accommodation recess 5040b having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part and accommodating the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 is formed. ing. A reverse arrangement prevention piece for preventing the front and rear surfaces of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 from being turned upside down is provided on the upper left side of the member housing recess 5040b when the decoration body 5040 is viewed from behind. 5040c is formed to protrude from the bottom inner surface of member housing recess 5040b toward back surface 5040y of decoration 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. In addition, when viewed from the back of the decorative body 5040, lids for regulating the positions of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 and closing the member accommodation recess 5040b are provided on the upper left, right, and lower sides of the member accommodation recess 5040b. Mounting boss holes 5040d for fixing 5080 to the rear surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 protrude from the bottom inner surface of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the rear surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. (a total of three mounting boss holes 5040d). In addition, mounting boss holes 5040e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decoration 5040 as viewed from the back, and extend rearward from the back surface 5040y of the decoration 5040 to have a second distance dimension. (a total of two mounting boss holes 5040e).

[LED board]
LED board 5070 having a circular shape with a notch in its upper part is formed with notch 5070a at a position corresponding to reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in member housing recess 5040b of decoration 5040, and decoration 5040 Through holes 5070b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b.

A plurality of LED bare chips are mounted on a front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 . This LED bare chip (also referred to as "LED element") is enclosed in a package such as a surface-mount type, chip-on-board type, or bullet type, and is an extremely small electronic component. In this embodiment, the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 instead of mounting the LED package containing the LED bare chip on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 . We adopted a configuration that is directly mounted on the

Methods for electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrodes on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 include wire bonding and flip chip bonding. It was adopted. In this flip-chip bonding, unlike wire bonding, wires are used to electrically connect the electrodes of the LED bare chip to predetermined electrodes on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but bumps are applied to the electrodes of the LED bare chip. is formed and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 . This connecting portion is reinforced with solder, resin, or the like.

On the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row with a predetermined distance dimension, and five LED rows are provided in the vertical direction. Six LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction on the fifth stage 5070c5 from the bottom, and LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction on the second stage 5070c2 from the bottom and the fourth stage 5070c4 from the bottom. , and eight LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a line in the horizontal direction in the third stage 5070c3 from the bottom.

On the center line of the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 in the horizontal direction, the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is arranged. The fourth stage, which is one row above the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 on the intermediate line that passes through the midpoint between this center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070 and is parallel to this center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070 A row of 5070c4 LEDs is arranged. Then, on an intermediate line passing through approximately the midpoint of this center line and a straight line parallel to this center line and passing through the lowest point of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070 and parallel to this center line and the above-mentioned straight line. The second stage 5070c2 of the LED array, which is one lower than the third stage 5070c3 of the LED array, is arranged in the . 1 of the LED row of the fourth row 5070c4 is placed on a straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the third row 5070c3. The second LED bare chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bare chip 5075 in the LED row of the second row 5070c2 is arranged, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the third row 5070c3 and the fourth row LED bare chip 5075 are arranged. The 7 LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row 5070c4 are arranged so as not to line up vertically, and the 8 LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row 5070c3 on the third stage and the 7 LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row 5070c2 on the second stage are arranged. The two LED bare chips 5075 are displaced so as not to line up in a line in the vertical direction. The seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 are arranged vertically in a row.

On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5, which is one above the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4, is located on the upper side of the LED board 5070 and below the two through holes 5070b. is arranged, and the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 which is one lower than the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 is arranged on the lowest point side of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070 and above one through hole 5070b. It is A straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 and 1 from the left of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 The straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance between the 5th LED bare chip 5075 and the 2nd LED bare chip 5075 coincides. A bare chip 5075 is arranged, and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the first row 5070c1 is arranged, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fourth row 5070c3 and the fifth row 5070c5 are arranged. The six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row are arranged so as not to line up vertically, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the second LED row 5070c2 and the six LED rows of the first row 5070c1 The LED bare chips 5075 are displaced so as not to line up vertically. On the straight line described above, the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the fifth row 5070c5 and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the first row 5070c1 are arranged. Furthermore, since the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the third row 5070c3 is also arranged, the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fifth row 5070c5 and the LED row of the third row 5070c3 are arranged. The 2nd to 7th six LED bare chips 5075 and the six LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged vertically in a row.

On the other hand, a connector 5070d for transmitting a control signal for controlling a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on a front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. FIG. The connector 5070d is electrically connected by inserting the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 . The upper end side of this flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into a connector (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720 and electrically connected. The control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 is transmitted to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emission mode of the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is controlled. be done.

A front surface (mounting surface) 5070x and a back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 are coated with a green resist liquid except for various lands and through holes. The entire surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is printed by white silk printing except for various lands and through holes. That is, while the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is green. different. The reason why the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white is that light emitted from a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by other members. When returning toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the surface (mounting surface) of the LED substrate 5070 functions as a reflective sheet that can efficiently refract the returning light forward again. This is to allow the 5070x to have it.

[Modification]
The LED board 5070 drives a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 by receiving a control signal from the effect drive board 1720 via the flexible flat cable 5030. was That is, in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect drive board 1720 is controlled by electronic components for LED control mounted on itself (for example, an IC such as an LED driver and a gradation control driver). A signal was output to the LED substrate 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 . Electronic components for LED control mounted on the effect drive board 1720 may be mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. FIG. Since the connector 5070d is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, an electronic component for LED control having a height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) approximately equal to the height of the connector 5070d can be Even if this electronic component for LED control is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the decoration body 5040 and the lid body 5080 can be used as they are without changing the dimensions. This can contribute to miniaturization of the effect drive board 1720 . Moreover, by configuring in this way, a control signal is output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 to drive the LED bare chip 5075 . can also

In addition, although flip chip bonding is employed as a method of electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrodes on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding may be employed instead of flip chip bonding. good.

[Light guide plate]
A light guide plate 5060 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape with a cutout in the upper part thereof has a cutout portion 5060a formed at a position corresponding to a reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in a member accommodating recessed portion 5040b of the decoration body 5040. In addition, through holes 5060b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, respectively.

The rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodation concave portion 5040b of the decorative body 5040 while being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. As shown in FIG. On the rear surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, a notch is formed in the upper part so as to cover the LED bare chips 5075 at positions corresponding to the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. It has a cylindrical shape (hereinafter referred to as a “semi-cylindrical shape”), and the axis of this semi-cylindrical shape is inclined slightly downward with respect to the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, so that the curved surface of the semi-cylindrical shape is obliquely inclined. Incident recesses 5060c are formed respectively. The bottom of the incident recess 5060 c does not penetrate the surface 5070 x of the light guide plate 5060 and stays within the light guide plate 5060 . When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 abuts against the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 and is accommodated in the member accommodation concave portion 5040b of the decorative body 5040, the LED bare chip 5075 is arranged on the axis of the semi-cylinder. At the same time, the LED bare chip 5075 is sealed in the incident concave portion 5060c.

A rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 has a cylindrical flat surface 5060d formed from the opening side of the incident recess 5060c in the section from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes to the position of the concentric circle separated by a predetermined distance dimension. A notch is formed in an upper portion of the cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and the cylindrical flat surface 5060d and the opening side of the incident recess 5060c are similar.

On the rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, a prism pattern having a substantially triangular cross section is concentrically formed beyond a section formed by a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylindrical column passes, and A prism portion 5060e is formed in which the distance between the prism patterns having a substantially triangular cross section increases as the distance from the central point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes increases. The distance dimension of the prism portion 5060e in the left-right direction is the distance dimension of a straight line connecting the center points of the adjacent LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (hereinafter referred to as the "block reference distance in the left-right direction. It may be described as "dimension".) On the other hand, the vertical distance dimension of the prism portion 5060e is one lower than the step of the LED bare chip 5075 enclosed in the main incident recess 5060c from the notch portion formed in the upper part of the cylindrical flat surface 5060d. It is a distance dimension to the prism pattern of the last stage passing through the center point of the nearest LED bare chip arranged in the next stage (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "vertical block reference distance dimension").

On the rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, incident concave portions 5060c, a cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and a prism portion 5060e are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. are formed to form prism surfaces. The horizontal distance dimension of the single prism block 5060f is the horizontal block reference distance dimension, and the vertical distance dimension of the single prism block 5060f is the vertical block reference distance dimension. Among the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x, the one closest to the left and right outer peripheral portions of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 to the LED of the fifth stage 5070c5 The first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of each row, the first stage 5070c1 and the sixth LED bare chip 5075 from the left among the LED arrays of the 5th section, the left side of the LED arrays of the second stage 5070c2 and the fourth stage 5070c4 7th LED bare chip 5075, and 8th LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the third row of LED rows, the horizontal distance dimension of the single prism block 5060f does not correspond to the horizontal block reference distance dimension. , the final stage prism pattern is formed to extend to the outer peripheral edge of the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, while a plurality of single prism blocks 5060f are formed on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060 on the front surface 5060x side of the light guide plate 5060, the surface is flat without any processing. ing.

In this embodiment, as described above, instead of mounting the LED package in which the LED bare chip is enclosed on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the surface of the LED substrate 5070. (Mounting Surface) A configuration for direct mounting on the 5070x was adopted. As a result, the thickness of the light guide plate can be compared with the thickness of the light guide plate in the case where the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. can be reduced by the depth distance dimension in the package, and the size of the depth distance dimension of the light emission performance main body 5010 of the light emission performance unit 5000 is ensured larger to contribute to the three-dimensional shaping of the light emission performance main body 5010. be able to. In addition, since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if the door frame 3 or the like is hit by the player and the impact is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the light emitting effect unit 5000 provided on the game board 5 will not be affected by the impact. By weakening the impact caused by such a pounding, there is a low probability that a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 will be damaged by the impact caused by such a pounding.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. ) 5070x, but if the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 does not interfere with the three-dimensional modeling of the light emitting effect main body 5010, a side type can be used instead of the LED bare chip. may be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070 x of the LED substrate 5070 . In this case, the dimensional distance of the single prism block 5060f composed of the entrance concave portion 5060c, the cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and the prism portion 5060e increases, and the thickness of the light guide plate also increases. The light emitting surface of the LED package having a side-type surface mount type does not face the diffusion sheet 5050, but faces below the incident recess 5060c. Go forward to diffusion sheet 5050 .

[Diffusion sheet]
The diffusion sheet 5050 is processed and molded from a thin circular transparent resin plate having a notch in its upper part, and has a notch at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decoration body 5040. A portion 5050a is formed, and through holes 5050b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, respectively. The back surface of the diffusion sheet 5050 is coated with white paint and processed into a pear-skinned surface having fine unevenness. is incident through the light guide plate, the incident light can be diffused.

The rear surface 5050y of the diffusion sheet 5050 is accommodated in the member accommodation recess 5040b of the decoration 5040 in contact with the front surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 molded of transparent resin. The rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodation concave portion 5040b of the decorative body 5040 while being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. As shown in FIG. On the rear surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, as described above, incident recesses are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 so as to cover the LED bare chips 5075. 5060c are formed respectively.

On the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, as described above, a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a line and separated by a predetermined distance dimension. The LED bare chips 5075 in the row of LEDs are enclosed in incident recesses 5060c formed on the back surface 5060y side of the corresponding light guide plate 5060, respectively. When the light-emitting surface of the LED bare chip 5075 emits light, the space of the incident recess 5060c is illuminated brightly, so that the LEDs in each stage of the LED row enclosed in each incident recess 5060c are more brightly lit than the area where the incident recess 5060c is not formed. The light from the bare chip 5075 passes through the light guide plate 5060 molded of transparent resin and is emitted from the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060, so that the brightness of the light emitted from the space of each incident concave portion 5060c is increased. As a result, the regions where the spaces of the incident recesses 5060c exist are arranged like point light sources, and it is difficult to uniformly illuminate the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060. FIG.

Therefore, on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long band shape in the left-right direction coated with white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows of each stage. At the same time, a diffusion region 5050d for diffusing light is formed by spraying white paint in dots on regions other than these five regions 5050c1 to 5050c5. The part coated with this white paint becomes an opaque area where the rear or front cannot be seen through the diffusion sheet 5050 . Note that the surface 5050x side of the diffusion sheet 5050 is not coated with any paint.

Specifically, on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, a white band region 5050c1 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 of the LED board 5070, and the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 of the LED board 5070 is formed. A white band region 5050c2 is formed at a position corresponding to , and a white band region 5050c3 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third row 5070c3 of the LED substrate 5070, corresponding to the LED row of the fourth row 5070c4 of the LED substrate 5070. A white band region 5050c4 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED substrate 5070, and a white band region 5050c5 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED substrate 5070.

The vertical distance dimension of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 has the same distance dimension. Each has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 described above. Further, among the distance dimensions in the horizontal direction of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the horizontal direction of the white band regions 5050c1 and 5050c5 have the same distance dimension. is a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 that is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. is doing. Further, among the distance dimensions in the horizontal direction of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the horizontal direction of the white band regions 5050c2 and 5050c4 have the same distance dimension. is a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 that is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. is doing. Further, among the distance dimensions in the horizontal direction of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimension in the horizontal direction of the white band region 5050c3 is the above-described light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. It has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes a single prism block 5060f.

In this way, on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white strip regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a strip shape that is long in the left-right direction and coated with white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of each row of LEDs. As a result, the light emitted from each of the incident recesses 5060c can be refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed to the light guide plate 5060, so that the regions where the spaces of each of the incident recesses 5060c exist can be made like point light sources. You can soften the lighting conditions.

In addition, since the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white as described above, it is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and passes through the light guide plate 5060 to the surface ( (Mounting surface) The light returning toward 5070x can be efficiently refracted forward again.

Also, the light emitted from the prism portion 5060e that constitutes the single prism block 5060f is diffused by the diffusion region 5050d. In other words, the light emitted from each of the incident recesses 5060c is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed toward the light guide plate 5060, thereby softening the state in which the regions where the spaces of each of the incident recesses 5060c exist emit light like a point light source. At the same time, the light returning toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the white LED substrate 5070 and is efficiently emitted forward again. Since the light can be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d through the portion 5060e, it is possible to contribute to the aspect of uniformly illuminating the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060. FIG. This contributes to uniformly illuminating the surface of the light guide plate 5060 facing the diffusion sheet 5050 (the surface 5060x), so that it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable due to the light emission effect of the decorative body 5040. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the light emitting effect.

[Lid]
A lid 5080 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape with a cutout in its upper part has a cutout portion 5080a formed at a position corresponding to a reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in a member accommodating recessed portion 5040b of the decorative body 5040. In addition, through holes 5080b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, respectively.

Further, the cover 5080 has a plurality of long ventilating holes 5080c aligned vertically and horizontally, and the flexible flat cable 5030 is placed at a position corresponding to the connector 5070d mounted on the rear surface 5070y of the LED board 5070. A wiring opening 5080d is formed through which the .

In addition, mounting boss holes 5080e for fixing the body mounting portion 5020 are formed on the left and right sides of the center of the rear surface 5080y side of the lid body 5080 as viewed from the rear, and extend rearward from the rear surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 for a third distance dimension. (two mounting boss holes 5080e in total). The outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 is the same as the two mounting bosses formed on the left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the above-described light emitting effect main body 5010. It is the same as the outer diameter of the hole 5040e.

[Body mounting part]
The main body attachment portion 5020 having a T shape for attaching the light emitting main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010 has a T-shaped groove formed in each of the side walls facing backward except for the upper left and right ends of the T-shaped flat plate. and two metal L-shaped plates 5020b having a symmetrical shape that reinforce the base body 5020a along the side walls except the upper and lower sides of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, 5020b, and a metal plate 5020c that reinforces the base body 5020a along the upper side wall of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, there are two mounting boss holes 5040e formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010, and the position corresponding to the light emitting effect main body 5010. Through holes 5020d are formed at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed at the left and right sides of the center of the rear surface 5080y of the lid 5080, respectively. In addition, when viewing the base body 5020a from behind, a plurality of metal plates 5020b, 5020b and a metal plate 5020c are fixed to the inner bottom surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. mounting boss holes 5020e are formed so as to protrude rearward from the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a to have a length of the fourth distance dimension (a total of 11 mounting bosses). hole 5020e). In addition, the outer diameter of the mounting boss hole 5020e is the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 described above (upper left and right of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting main body 5010). 5040e) is about two times smaller than the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed in .

Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a are formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting main body 5010. Through holes 5020ba are formed at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 5040e and at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the rear surface 5080y of the lid 5080 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. In addition, through holes 5020bb are formed at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed in the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Also, a metal plate 5020c attached to the inner bottom surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a has a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner bottom surface of the T-shaped groove. Holes 5020ca are formed respectively.

In addition, when viewing the base body 5020a from behind, the flexible flat cable 5030 is attached to the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a and the lower side wall of the base body 5020a connected to the bottom. A wiring opening 5020f is formed to pass through. In the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, a plurality of through-holes for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part inside the back box 3010 are formed (not shown).

In addition, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown). It is the same ground (GND) as (substrate ground (GND)).

[Flexible flat cable]
The flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals output from the effect drive board 1720 in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. is covered with an insulator, and compared to normal round electric wiring, it is about 1/3 to 1/5 the thickness (diameter) of normal round electric wiring. Although not shown, it is three-dimensionally formed by repeating mountain folds and valley folds from the effect drive board 1720 to the light emission effect main body 5010, and furthermore, the main body mounting portion 5020 Along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c and fold into the light emitting effect main body 5010, The main body 5030a is formed three-dimensionally by repeating valley folds a plurality of times, and has a strip-shaped main body 5030a that has a predetermined width and is elongated in the left-right direction. A rectangular conductor electrode having a predetermined length is arranged in an exposed state, and a plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 5030a has a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length. While a reinforcing plate is formed to reinforce the main body 5030a, on the lower end side of the main body 5030a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb having a predetermined length are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body 5030a. A reinforcing plate 5030cb is formed on the surface side of the main body 5030a to reinforce the rectangular electrodes 5030bb having a predetermined thickness and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb. .

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes (not shown) formed on the upper end side of the main body 5030a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the effect drive board 1720, while they are formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb are electrically connected to a connector 5070d mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 of the light emission effect main body 5010.

Between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) on the production drive board 1720 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected, a capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is provided. is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, between the power supply line and the substrate ground (GND) in the LED board 5070 of the light emission effect main body 5010 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected, a decoupling capacitor (not shown), a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown), etc. A capacitor called a bypass capacitor is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 is three-dimensionally bent and routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the back surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. There is also a portion where the cable 5030 is routed. As described above, the game ball B is ground in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, is charged, and discharges static electricity, thereby emitting electromagnetic noise. . Therefore, when the game ball B flows down the game area 5a of the game board 5, the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the vicinity thereof become an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. ing. The flexible flat cable 5030, which transmits the control signal to the light emitting main body 5010, is vulnerable to noise and is susceptible to troubles caused by electromagnetic wave noise (for example, normal data changes to other data and becomes garbled, or the signal is not originally output. However, it is likely to be affected by electromagnetic noise, but as described above, near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise There is also a part that is pulled around.

Therefore, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, both ends in the width direction of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the electromagnetic noise generation source side (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "both ends") ) is used as a ground (GND) line as a power line so that the power line is arranged together. As a result, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes, the electrodes other than the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the end are removed from the game ball B by the ground (GND) line, which is the flat conductor electrode on both sides of the end. By arranging a ground (GND) line between the source of the electromagnetic wave noise caused by the electrostatic discharge and other electrodes (electrodes containing control signals) other than the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the extreme end, It is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to other electrodes (electrodes including lines for transmitting control signals) other than the flat conductor electrodes on both ends. .

In addition, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the extreme end are used as power supply lines so that the power supply lines are arranged together. A power supply line (for example, a +5V line) is arranged on the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides. A power supply line (for example, a +5V line) is highly noise-resistant and not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise, so it can be arranged in electrodes close to the electrodes on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes. preferable. Of the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on both sides of the extreme end, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the one extreme side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other extreme side or both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the one endmost side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other endmost side.

Furthermore, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the extreme end are both used as ground (GND) lines. However, two metal L-shaped plates are placed along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 of the light emitting main body 5010 in the portion that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. That is, the flexible flat cable 503 is shielded by the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c at the portion that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise. , noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors covered with an insulator. The color of this insulator is white, and the entire flexible flat cable 5030 is white. The reason for adopting white is that the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, so that it is mounted on various decorative substrates provided in the back unit 3000. By functioning as a reflector plate that reflects the light emitted by the LED itself, the light leaking behind the back unit 3000 is suppressed as much as possible, contributing to the reduction of the effect of the lighting effect of the light emitted by the LED. be.

[Modification]
In order to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the end are both connected to the power line. Although the ground (GND) line is used as the power supply line so as to be arranged, a power supply line (for example, a +5V line) may be used as the power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged instead of the ground (GND) line. This is because a power supply line (for example, a +5V line) is resistant to noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise. In this case, among the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on both sides of the extreme end, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the one extreme side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other extreme side A ground (GND) line is arranged on one of the two or both of the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the one endmost side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other endmost side. ing.

Also, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the extreme end are routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. 5020 along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the 5020 so as to pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. However, at least one of the flat conductor electrodes on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed along one metal L-shaped plate 5020b of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b. may be made. In this way, the flexible flat cable 503 is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise, along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b. Shielded by 5020b, it can contribute to the improvement of noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) is provided between the flat conductors. may be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal.

Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but is particularly susceptible to electromagnetic noise (that is, easily affected by electromagnetic noise). For flat conductors for transmission (hereafter referred to as "flat conductors susceptible to electromagnetic noise"), connect the substrate ground (GND) and the electrical The flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are sandwiched between the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the effects of electromagnetic wave noise. may In this way, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic noise caused by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of the electromagnetic noise.

In addition, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel. When configured to include a flat conductor electrically connected to the board ground (GND) and flat conductors supplying various power supplies, the board ground (GND) and the power supply are placed next to each other. When the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current due to a sudden increase in resistance, or an overcurrent protection element that has a small resistance below the rated current and cuts An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when the current is reached (for example, a circuit with a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch has a relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, and the resistance value increases sharply from a certain temperature. This heat causes the main body to generate heat, and this heat lowers the conductivity and cuts off the current. It is preferable to This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a thickness (diameter) that is about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electrical wire. Therefore, when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, the short circuit of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be prevented by the overcurrent protection circuit and the overcurrent protection circuit to ensure safety and prevent damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[How to assemble the light emitting unit]
Next, a method for assembling the lighting effect unit 5000 will be briefly described. First, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are arranged in order according to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodation recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5040d. A lid body 5080 is arranged to cover the accommodation recess 5040b. In this state, the rear surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the rear surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are arranged on the same plane and become flush with each other, and the end surface of the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c and the end surface of the mounting boss hole 5040d are aligned with the lid. The above-described first distance dimension is set in advance such that it does not protrude from the back surface 5080y of the body 5080 and is located between the front surface 5080x and the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 . Then, a metal round head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through hole 5080b formed on the rear surface 5080y side of the lid 5080 toward the mounting boss hole 5040d to fix it. As a result, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are arranged and accommodated in the member accommodation recess 5040b of the decoration 5040 when the decoration 5040 is viewed from the front.

Subsequently, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are inserted into a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed in the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through hole 5020bb formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b toward the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed. A pan head screw is screwed from the through hole 5020ca formed in the metal plate 5020c toward the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed. The end face of the mounting boss hole 5020e does not protrude from the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the back side of the metal plate 5020c, and the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are not protruded from the front and back sides. The above-described fourth distance dimension is set in advance so as to fall between .

Subsequently, the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted through the wiring opening 5080d formed in the lid 5080 into the connector 5070d mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. FIG. Then, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed through the wiring opening 5020 f formed in the main body attachment portion 5020 . A method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED substrate 5070 will be described later.

Subsequently, the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 is arranged in alignment with the mounting boss hole 5040e formed in the rear surface 5040y of the decoration body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5080e formed in the rear surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through hole 5020ba formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b toward the mounting boss holes 5040e, 5080e. The end surfaces of the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b, and are fitted between the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. A second distance dimension and a third distance dimension are preset.

Next, the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body attachment part 5020 between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. The assembly of the light emitting effect unit 5000 is completed by pulling it around so as to pass through.

By the way, conventionally, boards such as a main control board for controlling game progress and game profit, a sub-control board for controlling effects executed with the progress of a game, and an image control board for controlling display of an image display device, etc. is arranged on the back side and various wiring members are routed around (for example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the game machine from the island equipment of the game hall are drawn around the game machine because they are charged with static electricity by rubbing against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls for various wirings.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LED board]

Here, a method for attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED board 5070 will be described with reference to FIG. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into a connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 and inserted all the way. electrically connected.

When the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted deep into the connector 5070d, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb A contact failure may occur between the electrodes 5030bb and the corresponding electrodes of the connector 5070d.

Therefore, on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, as shown in FIG. Near the top of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) so as to serve as a mark for normal insertion. A long solid line guideline G4U linearly extending in the left-right direction (upper and outer side), and a lower vicinity of a position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) A long solid line guideline G4L linearly extending in the left-right direction toward the vicinity of the corresponding position (bottom outside), and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid line guideline G4V extending linearly matching the straight line in the vertical direction of the left edge 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb is printed by silk printing.

No through-hole is formed in the area where the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is arranged. Even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed by rubbing the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is not flat. This is to prevent the conductor from short-circuiting due to the through-hole.

[Relationship between reinforcing plate of flexible flat cable and connector]
When the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat The conductor electrode 5030bb faces the electrode of the connector 5070d and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable 5030, while the reinforcing plate 5030ca for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable 5030. . As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are properly inserted deep into the connector 5070d mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 259(b), the left edge 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb and the guideline G4V are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other in the vertical direction. If the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not inserted deep into the connector 5070d provided on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, the insertion amount ( 259(c), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb is separated from the guideline G4V by the insertion shortage SRT. In this way, on the assembly line of a pachinko machine manufacturer, an operator attaches a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When the electrode 5030bb is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether the electrode 5030bb is normally inserted all the way into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

It should be noted that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted deep into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When inserted obliquely, the upper side of the lower end of the main body 5030a covers the guideline G4U extending linearly in the horizontal direction and cannot be visually recognized, and the lower side of the lower end of the main body 5030a extends linearly in the horizontal direction. It becomes a state having an inclination with respect to the guideline G4L. In this way, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 by the guide lines G4U and G4L and the reinforcing plate 5030cb. It is possible to easily visually determine whether or not the connector 5070d is properly inserted all the way into the connector 5070d. As a result, on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, an operator attaches a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When inserted into the mounted connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether the electrode 5030bb is properly inserted all the way into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

[Modification]
In addition, it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the vicinity of the bottom of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the vicinity of the bottom outside of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the left and right direction. Although a long solid line guideline G4L extending linearly to and is printed by silk printing, the inside of a rectangular area having the guideline G4U as the upper side and the guideline G4L as the lower side may be solidly printed by silk printing. . Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G4L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed by rubbing the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed. The copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 covered with the resist is exposed without being exposed by preventing the resist from peeling off due to the silk printing in the solid rectangular area being peeled off. It is possible to prevent the flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited.

In addition, it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the top of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the vicinity of the bottom of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the vicinity of the bottom outside of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the left and right direction. A long solid line guideline G4L that extends linearly to and is printed by silk printing. (Solder surface) A foil extraction area may be formed on the copper foil surface of 5070y. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-punched rectangular area can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the foil-punched rectangular area can function as the guideline G4L. Furthermore, when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed and the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is removed. Even if it is peeled off, there is no copper foil surface in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed, so it is possible to prevent the flat conductors of the exposed flexible flat cable 5030 from shorting. can.

In addition, it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the top of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the vicinity of the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the horizontal direction. A long solid line guideline G4L that extends linearly to and is printed by silk printing. , G4L may be formed, and guidelines G4U and G4L may be formed by not applying the resist solution to a part of the area when applying the resist solution to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. may

Further, after a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are normally inserted into the connector 5070d, the flexible flat cable The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is disconnected from the connector 5070d, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030, Each electrode 5030bb and the corresponding electrode of the connector 5070d are diagonally displaced and contact other adjacent electrodes to prevent short circuits. A fixing sticker having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction may be attached. In this case, on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, as the area where the fixing seal is attached, a square bracket (") shape is formed, for example, at a position slightly outward from the positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixing seal. (It may be a figure such as a line or a symbol.) Guidelines may be formed by printing by silk printing, or the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700 may be formed. A guideline in the form of brackets (“) (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed by removing the , or a resist solution may be applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. In this case, by not coating a part of the region with the resist solution, a bracket (“)-shaped guideline (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed. The flexible flat cable 5030 is attached to the LED substrate by a fixed seal. By being fixed to the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of 50700, the posture of flexible flat cable 5030 can be fixed.

In addition, it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the top of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the vicinity of the bottom of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the vicinity of the bottom outside of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the left and right direction. A long solid line guideline G4L extending linearly to the left edge side 5030cba of a reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid line guideline G4V that extends linearly and matches the straight line is formed on the LED board 5070, but a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used instead of the solid line, and the guidelines G4U and G4L are inserted. It may be an arrow line indicating the direction, or an arrow indicating the position of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for the guideline G4V.

[Each decorative substrate for the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 75 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 260 to 264. FIG. FIG. 260 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical connection of each decorative board provided on the door frame, FIG. 261 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. FIG. 263 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. It is an enlarged view of the view. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 and the frame door sub-relay board will be described, an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, a decorative board equipped with the LED constant current drive circuit, and an LED constant current drive circuit. A method of arranging the drive circuit will be described.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 includes the upper left plate decorative body 271, the upper right plate decorative body 276, the upper central plate decorative body 312a, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the side The side window interior decoration part 410b of the window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are respectively arranged, and the dish upper left decoration body 271, the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the dish A plate lower left decoration 281, a plate lower right decoration 286, and a plate center lower decoration 312b are arranged below the central upper decoration 312a.

Behind the upper left plate decoration 271, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the upper left plate decoration 271 is arranged. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the upper right plate decoration 276, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the upper right plate decoration 276 is arranged. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). Behind the upper plate center decoration 312a, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314 formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semi-arc shape along the plate center upper decoration 312a is arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 are used for light emission decoration.

Behind the door frame left side decoration 404, a left side upper decoration substrate 402a and a left side lower decoration substrate 402b are formed in the shape of elongated strips extending vertically along the door frame left side decoration 404. A door frame left side decorative board 402 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, left side upper decorative board 402a 5, and 10 on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b). The side window interior decoration parts 410b are arranged in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and are formed in a long and narrow strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412 behind it. A window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 12 LEDs) mounted on the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 are decorated with light emission. Behind the door frame right side decoration 419, a right side upper decoration substrate 418a and a right side lower decoration substrate 418b are formed in the shape of elongated strips extending vertically along the door frame right side decoration 419. A door frame right side decorative board 418 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, right side upper decorative board 418a 418b, and 10 on the right side lower decorative substrate 418b).

Behind the door frame top decoration 453, a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 is arranged. A door frame top left decoration substrate 456 formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right along the left side of the top decoration 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side of the door frame top decoration 453 . A door-frame top-right decorative board 457 formed in an elongated strip shape is arranged, and a plurality of them are mounted on the door-frame top-center decorative board 455, the door-frame top-left decorative board 456, and the door-frame top-right decorative board 457, respectively. Full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 LEDs on the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, 7 LEDs on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and 6 LEDs on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457) are decorated.

Behind the lower left plate decoration 281, a lower left plate decoration board 283 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the lower left plate decoration 281 is arranged. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the lower right plate decoration 286 is disposed a lower right plate decoration substrate 288 formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right along the lower right plate decoration 286 . A plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 6 LEDs) are mounted on the LEDs to illuminate and decorate. Behind the lower plate center decoration 312b, a lower plate center decoration substrate 316 formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semicircular arc along the lower plate center decoration 312b is arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 are used for light emission decoration.

The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 provided in the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation ring decoration board 352 formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear, as described above. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 includes a front decoration board 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape on the front side, and a rear decoration board 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape on the rear side. , consists of The rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (nine in this embodiment) mounted on the front decoration substrate 352a, and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decoration substrate 352b ( In the present embodiment, luminous decoration is provided by 9).

In this way, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a long and narrow strip shape. Thus, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distances of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, etc. can also be provided.

[Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub-relay board]
Plate upper left decorative substrate 273, plate upper right decorative substrate 278, plate center upper decorative substrate 314, left side upper decorative substrate 402a, left side lower decorative substrate 402b, side Window interior decoration part decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, plate lower left decoration board 283, the door frame side decorative substrates such as the plate lower right decorative substrate 288, the plate center lower decorative substrate 316, the front decorative substrate 352a, and the rear decorative substrate 352b, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. Electrical connection with the provided door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives light emission data, which is the first serial system on the door frame side, serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1, light emission data SDAT2 and clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are inputted independently. Further, the door frame secondary relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. ) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

[Door frame side 1st serial line]
The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the plate unit relays of the plate unit 200 shown in FIG. It is input to the substrate 214 and is also input to the handle decoration substrate 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

The first serial line on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate unit relay board 214 are connected to the plate lower left decorative board 283, the plate lower right decorative board 288, , and input to the operating portion relay board 392 of the effect operating unit 300 shown in FIG.

The door frame side first serial system (luminescence data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate lower left decorative board 283 are input to the plate upper left decorative board 273, respectively. In other words, the dish lower left decorative board 283 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper left decorative board 273, thereby The decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected in a string. A door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214, DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are input to the plate lower left decoration board 283 serving as a bridge board. An input connector (not shown) is provided for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper left decorative board 273, respectively. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 electrically connected to the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 (that is, the last stage of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283) is provided with the lower left plate decoration substrate 283. Only an input connector (not shown) is provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors that are not connected. .

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate right lower decorative board 288 are input to the plate right right decorative board 278, respectively. That is, the dish lower right decorative board 288 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative board 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a string. The plate lower right decorative board 288 serving as a bridging board is supplied with the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214, DC +12 V, and ground (GND). An input connector (not shown) is provided, and a door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are shown for outputting to the plate upper right decorative board 278 respectively. There is a connector for output that does not work. On the other hand, the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 electrically connected to the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 (that is, the last stage of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288) is connected to the lower right plate decoration substrate 288. Only an input connector (not shown) is provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from output connectors (not shown) of 288. ing.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the operation section relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are connected to the plate center upper decorative board 314, the plate It is input to the center lower decoration board 316 and the front decoration board 352a of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decoration board 352a are respectively input to the rear decoration board 352b. That is, the front decoration board 352a serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration board 352b. and the post-decorative substrate 352b are electrically connected in a row. On the front decoration board 352a serving as a bridging board, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the operation part relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300, DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are respectively. An input connector (not shown) for input is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decoration board 352b. is provided with an output connector (not shown). On the other hand, the rear decoration board 352b electrically connected to the front decoration board 352a (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the front decoration board 352a) has an output connector (not shown) of the front decoration board 352a. Only input connectors (not shown) are provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) respectively output from.

Here, for example, the plate lower left decoration board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input will be briefly described. The plate lower left decorative board 283 has an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat dissipation circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a includes a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current to be supplied to sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y and a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls the constant current to flow through sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214. FIG. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, the heat dissipation circuit 283c takes charge of part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

Further, for example, the plate upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the plate lower left decorative board 283 are input will be briefly described. , the upper left decorative board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat dissipation circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of supplying a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6. , and a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current to be supplied to suLED1 to suLED6. The constant-current driving circuit 273x controls the supply of constant current to suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door-frame-side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish. Since the constant current drive circuit 273x is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dissipated by the heat dispersion circuit 273c.

[Door frame side 2nd serial line]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame secondary relay board 105 are connected to the left side lower decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. Along with being input to the substrate 402b, the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the right side lower decoration substrate 418b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. are entered in each.

DC +12 V and ground (GND) input to the left side lower decoration board 402b of the door frame left side decoration board 402 are input to the left side upper decoration board 402a of the door frame left side decoration board 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are connected to the door frame top right decoration board. 457 is entered.

The door frame side second serial system (luminescence data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455 respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top right decorative board 457 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative board 455. The door frame top right decorative board 457 and the door frame top central decorative board 455 are electrically connected in a string. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridge board receives the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC +12 V, and ground. (GND) are input to each input connector (not shown), and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are connected to the center of the door frame top. An output connector (not shown) is provided for each output to the decoration board 455 . In addition, the door-frame top-right decorative board 457 is shown on the door-frame top-center decorative board 455 that is electrically connected to the door-frame top-right decorative board 457 (that is, is located after the door-frame top-right decorative board 457). An input connector (not shown) is provided for inputting the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors that are not connected. , door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. .

The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top center decoration board 455 are input to the door frame top left decoration board 456, respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top center decorative board 455 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. Thus, the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are electrically connected in a row. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative board 456 electrically connected to the door frame top center decorative board 455 (that is, the rear stage of the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the final stage) has a door. Inputs (not shown) to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) output from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top central decorative board 455, DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are respectively inputted. There is only a connector for

Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 are input. Briefly describing the left side lower decoration board 402b, the left side lower decoration board 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat dissipation circuit 402bc, and ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left plate decorative substrate 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left plate decorative substrate 273, and supplies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8. and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay capable of setting the maximum current to be supplied to hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame secondary relay board 105. control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative substrate 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the plate upper left decorative substrate 273. A sink type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of supplying a constant current to hdLED10 and five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left decorative board 402a, hdLED9, hdLED10, and left and a maximum current setting circuit 402bby capable of setting the maximum current to be passed through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the side upper decorative substrate 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame secondary relay board 105. A constant current is controlled to flow through hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 on the upper left decorative substrate 402a.

Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc. Also, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative substrate 402a. ing.

In this way, part of the heat generated by the constant-current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed only by the heat-dissipating circuit 402bc of the board (left-side lower decoration board 402b) on which the constant-current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is transferred to the subsequent substrate in addition to the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the substrate (left side lower decorative substrate 402b) on which it is mounted. The heat dissipation circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative substrate 402a can disperse the heat generated by the constant current driving circuit 402bbx.

The constant-current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current through the board (left-side lower decoration board 402b) on which it is mounted and to the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decoration board 402a, which is the subsequent board. It is Therefore, the operation of electrically connecting the left side lower decorative board 402b and the left side upper decorative board 402a is always required. The operator who performs this work must have his finger on the connector of the left side lower decoration board 402b, the connector of the left side upper decoration board 402a, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b, or the heat of the left side upper decoration board 402a. Since the distributed circuit 402ac is touched, it is necessary to prevent the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the left side upper decoration substrate 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat dissipating circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b and the heat dissipating circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to

As described above, the left-side upper decorative board 402a receives direct current +12 V from the left-side lower decorative board 402b and the ground (GND). A line through which an electric current flows is input. The left-side upper decorative substrate 402a includes the heat dissipation circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, as described above. As described above, the heat dissipating circuit 402ac has the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current driving circuit 402bbx, as well as the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[Light emission data]
The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described here. It consists of key information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation from among gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 is specified.

[Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit, so the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the plate lower left decorative board 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through sdLED1 to sdLED6, and the maximum current to be passed through sdLED1 through sdLED6 is set. and a maximum current setting circuit 283y.

[Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and each channel can output a current. In this embodiment, an output channel LR , LG and LB are controlled individually, thereby using three output channels. In other words, in this embodiment, one constant-current drive circuit can control the light emission mode by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs. is now possible.

The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current drive section 283xi. mainly composed of

[Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit that can generate and supply an internal power supply Vreg (in this embodiment, +5V DC) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x by inputting DC +12V from the +12V power supply line. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current driving section. 283xi, and the internal power supply Vreg supplies a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current driving section 283xi. is able to work.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the +5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 283x is used. This is because when the +5V power line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is used, the +5V power line is used by routing electric wiring, so the length of the +5V power line that supplies DC +5V is The longer it is, the easier it is for noise to enter. Then, if external noise is transmitted to the +5V power supply line and DC +5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the LED may flicker under the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the +5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x. A configuration is adopted in which the linear power supply 283xa of the current drive circuit 283x independently generates DC +5 V as the internal power supply Vreg.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal power supply Vreg is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to other boards and is used only within the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg. Therefore, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, which contributes to preventing flickering of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. In addition, electric wiring for input and electric wiring for external transmission to the +5V power supply line become unnecessary, which contributes to miniaturization of the connector.

[Reset part]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. A so-called power-on-reset circuit can be initiated. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset section 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting section 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing section 283xg, the PWM section 283xh, and the constant current driving section 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting section 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing section 283xg, the PWM section 283xh, and the constant current driving section 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, address setting section 283xe, oscillator 283xf, logic processing section 283xg, PWM section 283xh, and constant current driving section 283xi are started to operate.

The constant current drive circuit 283x, for example, does not receive a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. there is For example, if a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as a "reset signal transmission line") is used, this reset signal transmission line can be used by routing electrical wiring. As a result, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily penetrates. Then, when external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by eliminating the need for the reset signal transmission line in the constant current drive circuit 283x, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal is independently generated as the internal reset signal RST in the reset section 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x. did.

Thus, in this embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external board, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to other boards, and only within the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using this, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x is not reset by external noise, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It is possible to contribute to prevention of unexpected extinguishing and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. In addition, an input electric wiring and an external transmission electric wiring for the reset signal transmission line are not required, which contributes to miniaturization of the connector.

[buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "data line") for transmitting serial data (here, light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. , the waveform of the signal that transmits the serial data is shaped and output to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "clock line") for transmitting a clock signal (here, clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. A clock signal is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the clock signal can be shaped and output to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x.

Data lines and clock lines are transmitted over a plurality of substrates and relay substrates, as described above. As a result, both the data line and the clock line are long, making it easier for noise to enter. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd are provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the noise entering the data line and the clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x is reduced. is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent board.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if both the data line and the clock line are long, the data line and the clock line can be formed to be resistant to noise. As a result, noise-resistant signal transmission can be realized. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise.

[Address setting section]
Based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, the address setting unit 283xe sets 64 addresses as IDs (IDs for individual identification) of the constant current drive circuit 283x using three ID resistors (not shown). It is possible to do so.

Thus, in this embodiment, the ID that can identify the individual constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not set appropriately by receiving data from software.

[Oscillator, logic processor]
The logic processing unit 283xg receives serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) and clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal (here, clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. Sometimes, gradation information is fetched from this serial data, and the gradation level in the output channel is set in the PWM section 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to obtain the gradation information that has been fetched. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM section 283xh. control to maintain the current contents of

[PWM part]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel from off to lighting (maximum luminance) in a total of 128 steps from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. In other words, the PWM unit 283xh has PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the respective gradation levels are set, these PWM gradation control sections 1 to 24 control the constant current driving section 283xi so as to flow a current corresponding to the set gradation levels.

[Constant current driver]
The constant current driver 283xi supplies one constant current driver (not shown) for one output channel so as to achieve the gradation set in the PWM gradation controllers 1 to 24 provided in the PWM unit 283xh. A current driver supplies a constant current to the LED elements forming the full-color LED. That is, the constant current driver 283xi has constant current drivers 1 to 24 corresponding to the PWM gradation controllers 1 to 24 (that is, 24 constant current drivers).

The constant current drivers 1 to 8 have one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting red (R) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded (GND). Each of the constant current drivers 9 to 16 has one end of a resistor Rg for setting the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting green (G) light, which constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LG1 to LG8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded (GND). Each of the constant current drivers 17 to 24 has one end of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting blue (B) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element, which constitute the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line and receives DC +12V.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dissipation resistors. 1 to constant current drivers 8), respectively, so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 1 to 8, respectively. It's becoming The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers 9 to constant current drivers 16), and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 9 to 16, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers 17 to constant current driver 24), and the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24 side, respectively. ing.

The constant-current drivers 1 to 8 draw a constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED, which are individually set, so that the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED are drawn. can emit light. The constant-current drivers 9 to 16 each absorb a constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, thereby causing the green (G) LED elements that form the full-color LEDs. can emit light. The constant-current drivers 17 to 24 absorb the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, respectively, so that the blue (B) LED elements that form the full-color LEDs are drawn. can emit light.

In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting light from 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents. , it is possible to turn off, turn on with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes a resistor Rr for setting the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting red (R) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Construct full-color LEDs in the eight output channels up to LG8, and the resistor Rg for setting the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit green (G) light, and the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. and a resistor Rb for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

One end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded (GND). there is One end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded (GND). there is One end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded (GND). there is

[Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative substrate with an LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 and 262. FIG. Here, a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. The above-described LED constant-current drive circuits provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are configured as the same circuit. Therefore, in FIGS. 261 and 262, for convenience of explanation, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

[Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

As described above, the door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives the light emission data SDAT1, which is the door frame side first serial system, serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , the clock signal SCLK1 is input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power line of the power supply board 630 to receive DC +12V, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. It is connected and grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the plate lower left decorative board 283 is connected to the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC +12 V, and the ground (GND) of the plate unit 200. It is input through the plate unit relay board 214 . DC +12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements composing the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the above-described constant current) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via heat dissipation resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements composing the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the above-described constant current) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a through heat dissipation resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements composing the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 (the above-described constant current) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via heat dissipation resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). Output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

Based on the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) on the side of the door frame, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID, drives the LED constant current drive circuit 283a from the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is taken in, and sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 283c. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame secondary relay board 105 is transmitted via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) to the top left decoration of the dish. DC +12V and ground (GND) are input to the upper left decorative board 273 via the lower left decorative board 283 while being input to the board 273 . As a result, noise that has entered the data line or clock line just before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) is prevented from being transmitted to the succeeding board 273, which is the top left decoration board. , the waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x).

The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). Output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

Based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID, Gradation information is taken in, and suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is of the sink type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 273c. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) can be dispersed.

In addition to the plate lower left decorative board 283 and the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate lower right decorative board 288, the plate upper right decorative board 278, and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are used as the decorative boards provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. , and door frame top right decorative substrate 457 .

[Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. ˜hdLED 10, with heat dissipation circuit 402bc.

As described above, the door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives the light emission data SDAT2, which is the door frame side second serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , the clock signal SCLK2 is input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power line of the power supply board 630 to receive DC +12V, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. It is connected and grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC +12 V, and ground (GND). there is DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and also to the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) LED elements that constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. , and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

In this embodiment, as described above, one constant-current drive circuit controls the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs to change the light emission mode. can be controlled. Therefore, of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are controlled in light emission mode by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the remaining two LEDs are controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. For hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb controls the light emission mode. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board across the board on which it is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative board 402b). It is designed to control the light emission mode of huLED1 to huLED5.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 for the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 The output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current drivers 1 to 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are electrically connected via the heat dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dissipation resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dissipation resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. to LB8 (constant current drivers 17 to 24 described above).

Of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, for two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are respectively The output channels LR1 and LR2 (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are electrically connected via the heat dissipation resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10, and the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are electrically connected to each other. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 (constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 10 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dissipation resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dissipation resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above).

In addition, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a that follows the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, red ( The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb through the heat dissipation resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the heat dissipation resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, respectively. are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current drivers 3 to 7 described above) of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively. Output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (constant current driver 11 to the constant current driver 15), and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are respectively connected to the heat dissipation resistors huRb1b to Electrically connected to output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via huRb5b and heat dissipation resistors huRb1a to huRb5a in left side lower decoration board 402b. It is Output channels LR8, LG8 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

Based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, Gradation information is taken in, and among 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information. .

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb receives the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, the gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and 10 Of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10, are individually controlled for dimming and lighting, and the left side that follows the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a are individually controlled for dimming lighting.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of the sink type, and heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through eight of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. do. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, and hdRb1 to hdRb8 that constitute the heat dissipation circuit 402bc. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink type. Five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, mounted on the upper left decorative board 402a, which follows the lower side decorative board 402b, generate heat by absorbing a constant current flowing through them. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two of the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, to hdLED9 and hdLED10. The heat dissipation resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, and hdRb10 constituting the heat dissipation circuit 402bc are in charge of the heat dissipation resistors, and are mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, which is the substrate subsequent to the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, are heat dissipation resistors huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, and huRb1a to huRb5a, which constitute a heat dissipation circuit 402bc in the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, and the left side upper decoration substrate 402a. The heat dissipation resistors huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 402ac in You can do it.

As described above, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b and the heat dissipation circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the air, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic parts due to static electricity.

In addition to the left-side lower decorative board 402b, the decorative boards provided with two LED constant-current drive circuits include a plate center upper decorative board 314, a plate center lower decorative board 316, a side window inner decorative part decorative board 413, and a right side. There is a bottom decorative board 418b and a door frame top center decorative board 455. FIG.

In addition to the left-side upper decoration substrate 402a, there is a right-side upper decoration substrate 418a as a decoration substrate that does not have any LED constant current drive circuit.

[Method for arranging LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 263 and 264. FIG. In this embodiment, the LED constant-current drive circuits provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are the same circuits as described above. Here, an electronic component in which a constant current drive circuit forming an LED constant current drive circuit is integrated on one semiconductor chip will be described. As a type of IC package for the constant current drive circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) is used. ), which is the so-called VQFN. Of the four sides of the constant current drive circuit, one side is the input side and the remaining three sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. In addition, in FIG. 264, various electronic components are omitted and part of the silk printing is omitted for ease of viewing the drawing.

Each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in the shape of an elongated strip, as described above, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. And there is. Since the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side plate formed in the shape of a vertically extending elongated strip having two LED constant current drive circuits is used. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arc shape will be described.

[Left side lower decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 263(a), the left side lower decorative board 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, while the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb , is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. A connector LDUCN for connecting electrical wiring to the upper left decorative board 402a is mounted on the upper edge side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame secondary relay board 105 and electrical wiring is mounted on the lower edge side of the surface 402by.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are provided with electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, etc., through holes, test pads, A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") over the entire area except for the land. It is In this embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is coated with a solid white resist to reflect light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). can be increased.

The part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are indicated on the solid white resist painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas and , are not printed at all as serigraphy. In addition, the board control number of the left-side lower decoration board 402b is not formed as white resist characters on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b.

This is because the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the areas indicating the positions of the full-color LEDs reduce the reflectance of the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. prevent this from happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

75 provided on the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403, as described above. , the left side inner lens 403 is attached to the rear of the door frame left side decorative body 404 . As described above, the left side inner lens 403 is formed transparent and is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so as to refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame left side decorative board 402 arranged behind is difficult to clearly see from the player side. When a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). Even if the player can see the LED mounting surface 402bx, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1~ Since the part number corresponding to hdLED10 and the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, they correspond to full-color LEDs that have no relation to the game for the player. This prevents the part number and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, full-color LEDs It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area indicating the positions where certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged.

The part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is to be arranged are completely silk-printed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Not printed. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position of the connector LDLCN, which has no relation to the game for the player.

In addition, as described above, a white resist layer is formed of solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering (solidly painted) the entire LED mounting surface 402bx. HDLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entire LED (solidly painted) are mounted. Thus, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. not In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is printed with foil characters (that is, a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed). The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters in a pattern and removing the copper foil around them), and the foil-cut characters are formed by solidly coating the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b with a white resist. covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component. The board management number of the lower left decorative board 402b is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b instead of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. is formed on the layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed with a wiring pattern of copper foil and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form a character), or the left side lower decorative substrate 402b On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, foil-cut characters (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, It may also be formed as a punched character formed by punching a copper foil. Also, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground as will be described later. For this reason, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is obtained by creating letters with foil-extracted letters (that is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) with a wiring pattern made of copper foil and removing the surrounding copper foil. Instead of being formed as solid grounding characters formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx and solid grounding on the LED non-mounting surface 402by, the solid grounding is formed as solid characters on either or both surfaces of the LED mounting surface 402bx. may be

On the other hand, a constant current drive circuit 402bax and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay, which constitute the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, are provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg and various distributed resistors are arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and electronic components are placed near these regions. and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) as silk-screen printing. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 264(a)) as a silk print on the left side lower decoration substrate. IC1 (Fig. 264 ( a)) is printed as a silk print in a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the white resist solidly applied to the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402 bay are arranged are silk-printed yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 264(a)). are printed on the solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and near these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the maximum current setting Resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the circuit 402bay and corresponding part numbers R1, R2, R3 (see FIG. 264(a)) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk-printed LEDs on the left side lower decorative board 402b. Each of them is printed on a white resist solidly coated on the non-mounting surface 402by.

In addition, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, correspond. 264(a) are indicated by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 264(a), only the chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 are shown, respectively). Part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed above or below near these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 264(a), full-color LEDs hdLED4, hdLED5 and Only LED4 and LED5, which are corresponding part numbers, are shown respectively.) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

On the white resist solidly painted on the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b, there is an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b is arranged. is printed as silk-printing with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) not shown, and the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed as silk-printing in yellow (or black) not shown near this area. ing.

Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of black, brown, or blue resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED, so the LED non-mounting surface is implemented in

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a lighting test is individually performed for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green (G) light, and LED elements that emit blue (B) light, which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are attached near the plurality of check pins on the lower left side decoration. It is printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing on a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the substrate 402b. A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

In the embodiments, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color, which reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from full-color LEDs, are LEDs that emit light from full-color LEDs. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, the area corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in the region, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, or connectors that do not have white color may be placed in that region. In this case, on the white resist solidly coated on the non-mounting surface of the LED, a yellow chain line (or a black chain line), not shown, is printed as a silkscreen to indicate the positions where electronic components and connectors are to be placed. At the same time, in the vicinity of this area, part numbers corresponding to electronic parts and connectors are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid ground that grounds the area excluding land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). A solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and a solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). there is

As described above, the left-side lower decorative board 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically. The width from the left edge 402beg1 to the right edge 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width from the left edge to the right edge of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Therefore, if the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b, the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx will be aligned. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, let's draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on that edge. Even so, it is difficult to draw out all wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the edges of the wiring patterns because there are restrictions on the minimum distance dimension in the pattern width of the wiring patterns and the spacing between the adjacent wiring patterns. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the edge sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. adopted the configuration.

In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower right edge of the four edges of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is the input. 262, the terminals on the input side are connected to the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and resistors Rr and Rg of maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left edge, upper left edge, and upper right edge are mainly the terminals of output side 1 to the output side. 262, output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2 , clock signal SCLK2) and the like. The output side 1 terminal has a terminal to which the resistor Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which the ground (GND) is input. there is

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left side 402beg1 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition, the remaining two edges can be arranged such that they are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged on the four sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns are subject to the minimum distance dimension limitation. Also, all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in a vertically elongated strip shape.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, of the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, the group 1 composed of the four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4 and the four full-color LEDs Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the groups 1 and 2 can be routed to reduce its length. can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed to the group 1 and the group 2 from being increased or shortened disproportionately to either the group 1 or the group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern on the work.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is placed in the vertical central portion of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (the full-color LED hdLED6 in FIG. 263(a) is 263(a), and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged in the vertical central portion (FIG. 263(a)) of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. 402bax), and can be arranged above hdLED8, which is a full-color LED formed in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. . As a result, an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant-current drive circuit 402bax to hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are eight full-color LEDs, can be secured in the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. , two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10, and five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided on the upper left-side decorative substrate 402a shown in FIG. 402b.

In addition to the resistors Rr, Rg and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby, capacitors (not shown) are soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b in this embodiment. The resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length: 2.0 mm). height: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are smaller than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). extremely small. For this reason, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) differ from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in that one longitudinal side of each of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb is the left side of the left lower decoration substrate 402b. 402beg1 and the right side 402beg2, and one longitudinal side of the capacitor (not shown) is perpendicular to the left side 402beg1 and the right side 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b. are arranged as In other words, the edges of the constant-current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx arranged such that the edges of the land pattern are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistors They are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower decoration substrate 402b so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one longitudinal side of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel to each other.

In addition, as described above, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is such that the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit are arranged 45 degrees from the left edge and right edge of the decoration substrate. The door-frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door-frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door-frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decoration 453, which are arranged in an inclined state and are substantially identical, are arranged in the same manner as the door. Unlike the other decorative boards of the frame 3, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are placed on the door frame top decorative body 453. Since the width dimension from the upper edge to the lower edge is large, the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit are separated from the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the . That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decoration substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is non-parallel to the edge of the decoration substrate. There is a mixture of what is and what is. In this embodiment, the door frame top central decorative board 455 has 11 full-color LEDs provided therein, and another central decorative board (not shown) on which five full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. two LED constant current drive circuits (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, 2nd maximum current setting circuit)) shown by one LED constant current driving circuit (here, the second LED constant current driving circuit (second constant current driving circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)) Two heat dissipating circuits (the first constant current driving circuit is the first heat dissipating circuit (heat dissipating resistor), the second constant current driving circuit is the second heat dissipating circuit (heat dissipating resistor)) , and the door frame top left decorative board 456, in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided therein, has another left decorative board (not shown) mounted with one full-color LED (not shown). One LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided in the door frame directly controls light emission via one heat dissipation circuit (heat dissipation resistance) provided in itself (not shown), door frame top right decorative board 457 has one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit , maximum current setting circuit) directly controls light emission via a single heat dissipation circuit (heat dissipation resistor) provided therein (not shown). The other central decorative board is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative board is formed in the left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. , and the other right decorative substrate is formed in a long and narrow strip shape extending left and right along the right side of the door frame top decoration 453. The other center decoration board, the other left decoration board, and the other right decoration board need to be provided with heat dissipating circuits (heat dissipating resistors) respectively. The heat dissipating circuit (here, the second heat dissipating circuit (heat dissipating resistor)) provided in the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 itself and the heat dissipating circuits of the other central decorative substrates are, as described above, provided on the door frame top central decorative substrate. In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative board 455 itself, it also prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has a function that allows Further, the heat dissipation circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat dissipation circuit of the other left decorative board are, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself (exactly In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity. Further, the heat dissipation circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself and the heat dissipation circuit of the other right decorative board are, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself (exactly In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

In addition, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. HDLED1 to hdLED10 are located near the right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decoration board 402b when viewed from the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b. While the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged with a predetermined interval between them, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged near the left edge 402beg1 of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. A configuration is adopted in which they are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of the sink type, and generate heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element. Therefore, even in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in a vertically elongated strip shape, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx from the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less susceptible to the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

In addition, by arranging the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits The edges of the land patterns 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and right edge of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared with the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the one in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right sides of the decorative board is the decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the can be made shorter. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the horizontal direction.

[Decorative board on the center of the plate]
As shown in FIG. 263(b), the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, which is the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300, while the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314b are mounted on an LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, which is the upward side of the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. 263(b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is actually arranged along the plate center upper decoration 312a). ), on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, on the right side along the upper edge 314eg1, a connector HCN for connecting the operation section relay board 392 and electrical wiring is mounted.

On the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, etc., through holes, test pads, A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") over the entire area except for the land. It is In this embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, so that the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are emitted forward (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the production operation unit 300). The reflectance of the film can be increased.

Part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are shown on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. Areas and , are not printed at all as serigraphy. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the substrate control number of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is not formed as a white resist character.

This is because the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decoration substrate 314 due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. prevent this from happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

In addition, the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. A plate center upper decoration substrate 314 is attached below (or behind) the plate center upper inner lens 313 . Since the unit front cover 312 is formed transparent, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is formed transparent as described above. As described above, the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish is formed transparent, and is formed so that the lens is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so as to refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 arranged below (or behind) the lens 313 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. When a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his head (face), his line of sight changes depending on the direction of his head (face). Even if the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314, the full-color LEDs are not visible on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing. The part number corresponding to the LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are prevented from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10) and the auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the full-color LEDs It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area indicating the positions where certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged.

The part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged are completely printed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 as silk printing. Not printed. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position of the connector HCN, which has no relation to the game for the player.

In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The packages of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solidly coated). Mounted are full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entirety (solidly painted). Thus, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 at all. not In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the substrate management number of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is printed with foil characters (that is, a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). The foil-cut characters are formed by making characters in a pattern and removing the copper foil around them), and the foil-cut characters are formed by solidly coating the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 with a white resist. covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component. The board management number of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is assigned to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 instead of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314. is formed in the layer (copper plane) on which the characters are formed with a wiring pattern of copper foil and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters), or the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 On the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, foil-cut characters (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, It may also be formed as a punched character formed by punching a copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a solid ground as will be described later. For this reason, the board management number of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish is obtained by making letters with foil-cut letters (that is, letters with a copper foil wiring pattern in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) and removing the surrounding copper foil. Instead of being formed as solid grounding characters formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid grounding surface of the LED non-mounting surface 314y, either one or both surfaces are formed as blackout characters. may be

On the other hand, a constant current drive circuit 314ax and a maximum current setting circuit 314ay, which constitute the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, are provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg and various distributed resistors are arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk printing. Electronic parts and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

In addition, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decoration substrate 314, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decoration substrate 314, correspond to each other. are printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are placed in the vicinity of these regions HSLK1 to HSLK10. are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

In addition, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decoration substrate 314, there is an area indicating the position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decoration substrate 314 is arranged. is printed as silk-printing with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) not shown, and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed as silk-printing with yellow (or black) not shown in the vicinity of this area. ing.

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED-mounted surface because the reflectance of full-color LED light emission is reduced.

Furthermore, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green (G) light, and LED elements that emit blue (B) light, which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are displayed near the plurality of check pins as decoration on the center of the dish. It is printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing on a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the substrate 314. FIG. A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid ground, in which areas other than land patterns and wiring patterns of electronic components and connectors are grounded (GND). A solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decorative substrate 314 and a solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decorative substrate 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). there is

In the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color, which reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, are Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, the area corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be placed in that area. In this case, on the white resist solidly coated on the non-mounting surface of the LED, a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) (not shown) is printed as a silk print to indicate the positions where electronic components and connectors are to be placed. Along with this, in the vicinity of this area, part numbers corresponding to electronic parts and connectors are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

As described above, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in the shape of an elongated band plate having a semicircular arc shape. When viewed (that is, when the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is actually arranged along the plate center upper decoration body 312a), the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 extends from the upper edge 314eg1 to the lower edge 314eg2. is only about 1.78 times the width from the left edge to the right edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, if the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 becomes extremely short, the wiring pattern should be drawn out from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. Even so, it is difficult to draw out all wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the edges of the wiring patterns because there are restrictions on the minimum distance dimension in the pattern width of the wiring patterns and the spacing between the adjacent wiring patterns. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the edge sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the top edge 314eg1 and the bottom edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. adopted the configuration.

In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, of the four sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the lower left side of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is the input. By arranging the terminal on the input side near the upper edge 314eg1 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 so as to become the side terminal, the input side terminal can be connected to the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and resistors Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left edge, upper right edge, and lower right edge are mainly the terminals of the output side 1 to the output side. 3, and the output side 1 terminal to the output side 3 terminal are the above-described output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), etc. are output. The output side 1 terminal has a terminal to which the resistor Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which the ground (GND) is input. there is

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the top side 314eg1 of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314. In addition, the remaining two edges can be arranged such that they are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. FIG. As a result, from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged on the four sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns are subject to the minimum distance dimension limitation. Also, all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is led out from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in a long strip shape having a semi-arc shape.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, of the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, group 1 consisting of four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 consisting of hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the groups 1 and 2 can be reduced. can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed to the group 1 and the group 2 from being increased or shortened disproportionately to either the group 1 or the group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern on the work.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, when the upper plate center decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. 263(b), the constant current drive circuit 314ax is connected to the semicircular central portion of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (the full-color LED shown in FIG. 263(b). 263 (b ) where the full-color LED hdLED6 is arranged), and to the left of the full-color LED hLED8 which is formed in the group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. can be done. As a result, an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to hLED1 to hLED8, which are eight full-color LEDs, can be secured in the plate center decorative substrate 314, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx. , an area for routing wiring patterns to hLED9 and hLED10, which are two full-color LEDs, can be secured in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. FIG.

In addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 in this embodiment. The resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length: 2.0 mm). height: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are smaller than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). extremely small. For this reason, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb, and the capacitors (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2, and one edge in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) is perpendicular to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. are arranged as In other words, the edges of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged such that the edges of the land pattern are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and the resistors They are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel to each other.

Further, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and ten full-color LEDs are provided. hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged near the lower edge side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and in a semicircular shape on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. While the constant-current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged at predetermined intervals along the plate center decoration substrate 314, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged near the top edge 314eg1 of the plate center decoration substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decoration substrate 314. A configuration is adopted in which they are arranged on the non-LED-mounting surface 314 y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 . Like the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink type as described above, and by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element, Fever. Therefore, even in the central upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semicircular arc shape, by separating the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx from the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, It is possible to make the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 less susceptible to the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx.

In addition, by arranging the land pattern edges of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuits The edges of the land patterns 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and right edge of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared with the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the decorative board in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board is better. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the can be made shorter. Since this can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the effect operation unit 300, the large-sized effect operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3, and the effect operation unit can be provided. A light emission effect by 300 can be performed.

[A metal pad on the bottom of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit]
As described above, the types of IC packages for the constant current drive circuits, which are the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the upper plate center decorative board 314, are flat. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the left side lower decoration board 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

A metal pad FP is exposed at the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called exposed pad (hereinafter referred to as "EPad") is formed. This IC package is soldered to a substrate so that heat dissipation and bonding can be improved.

The land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with a square EPad land pattern EP in addition to each lead pad. The EPad land pattern EP is electrically connected to the solid ground of the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a grid pattern. These thermal vias TV electrically connect the EPad land pattern EP and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad cannot be drawn out in the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is of the sink type, and generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from the EPad to the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. By diffusing, heat can be dissipated from the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

Incidentally, the relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly explained. The number and size of the diameter of the thermal vias TV are selected so that the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit is 50% or more. As a result, the junction area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the EPad land pattern EP are soldered is prevented from becoming too large, and voids are prevented from occurring. It is possible to obtain a high bonding strength. Note that the EPad land pattern EP can be formed by dividing it into a grid pattern. It is necessary that the bonding area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

Further, in the case where the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decoration board 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx When the edge of the land pattern is inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat radiation effect of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP is also arranged on the left side in the same manner. When arranging the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so that they are arranged parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower side decorative substrate 402b and are inclined at an angle of 45 degrees, , and the EPad land pattern EP is also arranged with an inclination of 45 degrees. When the edge of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the lower left decorative substrate 402b The distance between the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 is shortened, and the distance to the edge of the substrate is shortened. . On the other hand, the left edge 402beg1 of the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b when the edge of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged in a state inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left-side lower edge 402beg1 and the right-edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance dimension between the right edge 402beg2 and the edge of the substrate is a portion where the distance between the vertex of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge of the substrate is short, but the two sides in contact with the vertex are non-parallel to the edge of the substrate. Since there is plenty of room for heat dissipation on the substrate, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than when the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge of the substrate are parallel to each other.

Each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in the shape of an elongated strip as described above, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In this embodiment, as an example, as described above, the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in a vertically elongated strip-like shape and is provided with two LED constant-current drive circuits. The plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having an arc shape will be described, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged will indicate the LED by the light emission of the full-color LED. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from being lowered, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are visible to the player. A detailed explanation has been given of the fact that measures such as a decrease in reflectance have been taken to prevent this from happening.

Here, other configurations of the present invention in which countermeasures such as reflectance reduction are taken (hereinafter referred to as "configurations for countermeasures such as reflectance reduction according to the second to fourth embodiments") are shown in FIGS. Details will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 265 shows a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, FIG. 266 shows a configuration for measures against a decrease in reflectance etc. according to the third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 268 is an enlarged view of the D'' part of FIG. 266 as viewed from the non-mounting surface of the LED, FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the part seen from the LED non-mounting surface. FIG. 265 to 269, for those having the same function as the embodiment shown in FIGS. are denoted by the same reference numerals. Also, in FIG. 267, various electronic components are omitted and part of the silk printing is omitted for ease of viewing of the drawing. Various electronic components are omitted from FIG. 269 for ease of viewing.

The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 in the effect operation unit 300, and the handle decoration substrate 184 in the handle unit 180 have the reflection according to the above-described first embodiment. Configuration of countermeasures against reduction in efficiency (part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs and areas indicating positions where full-color LEDs are arranged can prevent the reflectance from decreasing on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Countermeasures such as reduction in reflectance that can prevent players from seeing the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs, which have no relation to the game for the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs are arranged. is adopted), but configurations for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to second to fourth embodiments to be described later may be adopted.

[Comparison between configuration for countermeasure against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to first embodiment and configuration for countermeasure against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to second embodiment]
In the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1 to hdLED1 to The part number corresponding to hdLED10 and the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. On the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the maximum current setting circuit 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, various distributed resistors, and other electronic components are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk-screen printing. Electronic parts and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. In addition, on the white resist solidly painted on the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. Regions corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk-printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1-hdLED10 are printed as silk-printing in the vicinity of these regions. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, a full-color LED is formed on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. On the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, as described above, are applied. 314 ay resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg, various distributed resistors, and other electronic components are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk printing. Electronic parts and corresponding part numbers are printed in the vicinity in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing. In addition, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is mounted. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as silk printing, respectively, and full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are located in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. On the top, part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and areas indicating positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed by silk printing. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged are printed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b with yellow solid lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 as silk printing. , and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed near these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 to the left or above, and LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs, are printed in yellow on the lower left side as silk printing. They are printed on the white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the decoration substrate 402b.

On the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is to be arranged is printed with a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk printing. A part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area.

In addition, as described above, a white resist layer is formed of solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering (solidly painted) the entire LED mounting surface 402bx. HDLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entire LED (solidly painted) are mounted. Thus, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, the lighting inspection of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, is individually performed (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are attached near the plurality of check pins on the left side lower decoration board. It is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing on a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of 402b. A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

Here, white is adopted as the color of the resist liquid that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and white resist is applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The reason for adopting yellow as a silk-printed paint for part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 indicating positions where full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, the red color stands out when the background is white. is silk-printed with red paint onto the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The area indicating the positions where certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 stand out. ), the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are painted in yellow on the left side of the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged. When silk-printing is performed on a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower decorative substrate 402b, hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are silk-printed on the white resist with yellow paint and arranged. The area indicating the position and the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not conspicuous. The area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are front-side electronic components mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. can be specified (sometimes simply referred to as "notation part"), and the front side notation part is the part number of the front side electronic component, the position where the front side electronic component is arranged Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as areas indicated (further, may include surface-side electronic component shape, surface-side electronic component size, surface-side electronic component mounting orientation (mounting direction), surface-side electronic component model) There is.)

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light-emitting effects by means of illumination by a plurality of light-emitting units such as LEDs mounted on each decorative board, hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. There are various lighting modes depending on whether it is turned on (lighted) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided with electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, etc., through-holes, test electrodes, and so on. A white resist layer formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except pads, lands, etc. is formed, and furthermore, a region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, which makes it possible to specify the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light on the solid white resist, and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 is silk-printed with yellow paint, and when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the part number is silk-printed with yellow paint on the white resist. In addition to being able to make the area indicating the positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 inconspicuous, furthermore, when the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are lit (emission ), a region indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged, printed by silk printing with a solid white resist with high reflectance and a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. , hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and corresponding part numbers, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b can be maintained high.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, maximum current Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the setting circuit 402bay and various distributed resistors are arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing. Electronic parts and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) as silk prints in the vicinity. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267(a)) on the left side lower decoration board. IC1 (Fig. 267 ( a)) is printed as a silk print in a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the white resist solidly applied to the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402 bay are arranged are silk-printed yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 267(a)). are printed on the solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and near these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the maximum current setting Resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the circuit 402bay and corresponding part numbers R1, R2, R3 (see FIG. 267(a)) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk-screened LEDs on the left side lower decorative board 402b. Each of them is printed on a white resist solidly coated on the non-mounting surface 402by.

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of black, brown, or blue resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs. is implemented in

Note that, even in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are coated with solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. , part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed by silk printing. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are printed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative substrate 314 with yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 as silk printing. , and near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and on the right side, the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LED1 to LED10 are printed in yellow on the plate center decorative substrate. 314 are printed on a solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x.

On the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative substrate 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is to be arranged is printed with a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk printing. A part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area.

In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The packages of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solidly coated). Mounted are full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entirety (solidly painted). As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are provided near the plurality of check pins on the plate center upper decorative substrate. The LED mounting surface 314x of 314 is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing on a white resist that is solidly coated. A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

Here, white is adopted as the color of the resist liquid that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314, and the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 is used. The reason for adopting yellow as the silk-printed paint for the part numbers corresponding to the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged and the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. is silk-printed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 with red paint, the full-color LED is silk-printed with red paint on the white resist Areas indicating positions where certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, and part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, stand out. ), the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 in the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged are painted in yellow in the center of the plate. When silk-printing is performed on a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decoration substrate 314, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are silk-printed on the white resist with yellow paint. The area indicating the position and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are not conspicuous. The area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are front-side electronic components mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. can be specified (sometimes simply referred to as "notation part"), and the front side notation part specifies the part number of the front side electronic component and the position where the front side electronic component is arranged Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the indicated area (may also include front-side electronic component shape, front-side electronic component size, front-side electronic component mounting orientation (mounting direction), and front-side electronic component type) There is.)

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light-emitting effects by means of illumination by a plurality of light-emitting units such as LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. There is, and the lighting mode changes in various ways by turning on (lighting) and turning off. For this reason, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided with electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, etc., through holes, and test electrodes. A white resist layer formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except pads, lands, etc. is formed, and furthermore, an area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, which makes it possible to specify the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light on the solid white resist. The full-color LEDs hLED1 to It is a full-color LED in which a part number corresponding to the hLED 10 is silk-printed with yellow paint, and silk-printed with yellow paint on a white resist when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off. In addition to being able to make the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10 inconspicuous, furthermore, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (light emission ), an area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged, printed by silk printing with a solid white resist with high reflectance and a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. , hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the corresponding part numbers, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 can be maintained high.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the silk printing may appear pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may look orange. Ink companies that supply printing paints also have a range of yellow colors (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), so yellow is specified as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. However, it does not become completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

On the other hand, a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting an LED constant current drive circuit 314a, a resistor Rr of a maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and a resistor Rr, Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rb, Rg, and various distributed resistors are arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk printing. Corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

In the second embodiment, resistors, capacitors, and the like mounted on the non-LED-mounted surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a black resin package. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED-mounted surface because the reflectance of full-color LED light emission is reduced.

In addition, even in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are coated with solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, and the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reflected forward (that is, toward the upward side of the production operation unit 300). rate can be increased.

As described above, in the configuration for the countermeasure against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the first embodiment, full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed on the white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. and the area indicating the positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing, and are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. , in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the second embodiment, on the white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided. The part number (yellow letters and yellow numbers) and the area (yellow solid line) indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed as silk-screen printing, and the decorative substrate on the center of the plate. Part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged on a solid white resist coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of 314. The difference is that the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position to be printed is printed as a silk screen print.

The solid white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b can increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It's like In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, so that the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 emit light forward (that is, the direction toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300) Reflectance can be increased. Therefore, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged are printed in black as silk-screen printing on the white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. If it is printed, the black silk printing will reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and the problem arises that the light emission of the full-color LED will not be used efficiently. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the top left decoration 271, the bottom left decoration 281, the top right decoration 276, the bottom right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper plate center decoration 312a, the lower plate center decoration 312b, the left side door frame decoration 404, the inner side window decoration member 412, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the top door frame decoration 453) are arranged as described above. , is formed transparent, and when a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). A player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of various decoration boards provided. In this case, there arises a problem that the player sees the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player.

Therefore, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed. By printing on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface in yellow, which is a bright color different from black, on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface, the mounting position of the full-color LED is indicated. It can be difficult to find the lines (i.e., areas indicating where to place the full-color LEDs) or to find the numbers that identify the full-color LEDs (i.e., the part numbers that correspond to the full-color LEDs).

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed. By printing on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface in , it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full-color LEDs.

The configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment. In other words, the number identifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) are made difficult for the player to see. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full-color LEDs.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) is silk-printed, and is different from black. When printing on a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface in yellow, the polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

Further, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color that reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED are Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance of the mounting surface, electronic components such as non-white resistors and capacitors, or non-white connectors may be placed in that area. In this case, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic components and connectors are to be arranged is printed as a silk print with a yellow solid line (not shown), and in the vicinity of this area, Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts and connectors are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged has a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, and is printed on the LED mounting surface with a yellow solid line as silk printing. Although it was configured by printing on a solid white resist, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed into a shape smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a rectangular shape smaller than the full-color LED main body, or simply a single (thick line) and printed as a silk print on a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface with a yellow solid line. In this way, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the full-color LED main body covers the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged, which is printed by silk printing. The solid line disappears and can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison between configuration for measures against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment and configuration for measures against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, as described above, full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1 to hdLED1 to The part number corresponding to hdLED10 and the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. On the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the maximum current setting circuit 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, various distributed resistors, and other electronic components are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk-screen printing. Electronic parts and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. In addition, on the white resist solidly painted on the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. Regions corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in the vicinity of these regions as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, a full-color LED is formed on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. On the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are provided. 314 ay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, various distributed resistors, and other electronic components are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk printing. Electronic parts and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk prints in the vicinity. In addition, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as silk printing, respectively, and full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are located in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 is a foil-cut character (that is, a cut-out character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and removing the copper foil around it ( In FIG. 266(c), only the foil letter LED7 is shown as a part number corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. A foil-extracted region excluding terminals and wiring patterns not shown (that is, a region formed by removing copper foil, excluding terminals and wiring patterns, in a layer (copper plane) on which wiring patterns are formed (Fig. 266(c) shows only the foil-extracted area LSLK7 as an area corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED7)), and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly painted in white. The foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are each covered with the resist. Specifically, areas indicating positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as foil extraction areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. Part numbers LED1 to LED10 corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b as blank characters on the left side or above the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10. , the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is a foil extraction area (that is, the wiring pattern is formed) excluding each terminal (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown). In the layer (copper plane) in which each terminal and wiring pattern are removed, the area formed by removing the copper foil is formed in the layer (copper plane), and in the vicinity of this area, a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is attached to the foil (not shown). It is formed as a blanked character (that is, a blanked character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and cutting out the surrounding copper foil).

In addition, as described above, a white resist layer is formed of solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering (solidly painted) the entire LED mounting surface 402bx. HDLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entire LED (solidly painted) are mounted. Thus, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, the lighting inspection of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, is individually performed (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins, part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are marked with foil letters (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters. A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, maximum current Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the setting circuit 402bay and various distributed resistors are arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing. Electronic parts and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) as silk prints in the vicinity. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267(a)) on the left side lower decoration board. IC1 (Fig. 267 ( a)) is printed as a silk print in a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the white resist solidly applied to the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402 bay are arranged are silk-printed yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 267(a)). are printed on the solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and near these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the maximum current setting Resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the circuit 402bay and corresponding part numbers R1, R2, R3 (see FIG. 267(a)) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk-screened LEDs on the left side lower decorative board 402b. Each of them is printed on a white resist solidly coated on the non-mounting surface 402by.

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of black, brown, or blue resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs. is implemented in

Note that, even in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are coated with solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil character (that is, a character is formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and removing the surrounding copper foil). In addition, the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is not shown is each terminal and the foil extraction area excluding the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) In each terminal and a region formed by removing the copper foil, except for the wiring pattern). Each character is covered. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as foil extraction areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively. In the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 and on the right side, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as letters on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively. The foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are each covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the central upper decorative substrate 314. As shown in FIG. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is a foil extraction area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed). In the layer (copper plane) in which each terminal and wiring pattern are removed, the area formed by removing the copper foil is formed in the layer (copper plane), and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is formed in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blanked character (that is, a blanked character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and cutting out the surrounding copper foil).

In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The packages of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solidly coated). Mounted are full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entirety (solidly painted). Thus, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins, part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are marked with foil letters (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters. A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting an LED constant current drive circuit 314a, a resistor Rr of a maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and a resistor Rr, Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rb, Rg and various distributed resistors are to be arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk printing. Corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

In the third embodiment, resistors, capacitors, and the like mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a black resin package. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED-mounted surface because the reflectance of full-color LED light emission is reduced.

In addition, even in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, and the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reflected forward (that is, toward the upward side of the production operation unit 300). rate can be increased.

As described above, in the configuration for the countermeasure against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the first embodiment, full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed on the white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. and the area indicating the positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing, and are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. , in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in foil characters (that is, In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form letters), and full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed. The area indicating the placement position is a foil extraction area excluding each terminal and wiring pattern not shown (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the copper foil is removed except for each terminal and wiring pattern. The white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b covers the foil-cut region and the foil-cut characters. On the LED mounting surface 314x of the central upper decorative substrate 314, part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed with foil characters (that is, a wiring pattern in which the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed is copper foil). The character is formed by making a character and removing the copper foil around it), and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged Excluding terminals and wiring patterns not shown It is formed as a foil extraction area (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and wiring pattern), and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of The difference is that the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are each covered with white resist.

The solid white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b can increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It's like In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, so that the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 emit light forward (that is, the direction toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300) Reflectance can be increased. Therefore, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged are printed in black as silk-screen printing on the white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. If it is printed, the black silk printing will reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and the problem arises that the light emission of the full-color LED will not be used efficiently. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the top left decoration 271, the bottom left decoration 281, the top right decoration 276, the bottom right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper plate center decoration 312a, the lower plate center decoration 312b, the left side door frame decoration 404, the inner side window decoration member 412, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the top door frame decoration 453) are arranged as described above. , is formed transparent, and when a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). A player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of various decoration boards provided. In this case, there arises a problem that the player sees the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player.

Therefore, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player, are formed as foil-cut characters, and the part numbers are completely unrelated to the game for the player. By forming an area indicating the position of an unrelated full-color LED as a foil-extracted area and covering the foil-extracted character and the foil-extracted area with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface, the full-color The wiring pattern of the LED, the foil-free area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged), the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED), are made of copper foil to make them the same color, and by covering them with a white resist formed on the LED mounting surface, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (i.e., the position where the full-color LED is placed) ), or to find the number that identifies the full-color LED (ie, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED).

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs, which have no relation to the game for the player, are formed as foil-cut letters, and the part numbers for the player have no relation to the game at all. By forming an area indicating the position of an unrelated full-color LED as a foil-extracted area and covering the foil-extracted character and the foil-extracted area with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface, the full-color It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the LED.

The configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment. In other words, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number identifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full-color LEDs.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the process of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil-extracted area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil-extracted area) , the polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

Further, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color, which reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, do not emit light from the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED mounting surface, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that are not white, or connectors that are not white may be placed in that area. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the electronic component or connector is arranged is a foil extraction area (not shown) excluding each terminal and wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer in which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) ), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, it is formed as a region formed by removing copper foil), and in the vicinity of this region, the part number corresponding to the electronic component or connector is indicated by foil characters (not shown) In other words, the character is formed by making a character with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and removing the copper foil around the character.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil extraction area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil extraction area) , Although it was configured to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, the foil extraction area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as a foil extraction area) , a shape smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a rectangular shape smaller than the full-color LED main body). In this case, the punched character and the foil punched area are not connected and are formed in mutually independent areas. In this way, when the full-color LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surface, the foil-extracted areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are to be arranged are covered with the full-color LED main body, so there is a foil-extracted area surrounding the full-color LED main body. This can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison between configuration for measures against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment and configuration for measures against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1 to hdLED1 to The part number corresponding to hdLED10 and the area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. On the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are provided. 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, various distributed resistors, and other electronic components are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk-screen printing. Electronic parts and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. In addition, on the white resist solidly painted on the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. Regions corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk-printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1-hdLED10 are printed as silk-printing in the vicinity of these regions. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, a full-color LED is formed on the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. On the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are provided. 314 ay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, various distributed resistors, and other electronic components are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk printing. Electronic parts and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk prints in the vicinity. In addition, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as silk printing, respectively, and full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are located in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 268(c) shows only characters without white resist as part numbers corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. ), and the region indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is a white resist removal region using two-coat white resist (in FIG. 268(c), the full-color LED hdLED7 Only the white resist removed area LSLK7 is shown as an area corresponding to . Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b is coated with white resist as the first coat of the white resist applied twice. It is covered (that is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is coated with the white resist solution as the first coat of the white resist applied twice). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is, as the second coat of the white resist coated twice, an area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged (predetermined pin numbers are arranged). 268(c), the area corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED, is an area corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. ) are masked as white resist removed areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, and the vicinity and left side of these white resist removed areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 are masked. Alternatively, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with white resist while the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LED1 to LED10 are masked as characters without white resist. covered. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the whole is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer is formed. By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are white resist areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as characters without white resist.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are the same. Therefore, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have different densities, and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the base (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer In contrast, the white resist of the first layer appears darker than the white resist of the first layer in areas where the white resist of the second layer does not overlap with the white resist of the first layer because of the masking. The white resist of the first layer looks light because it is exposed without being covered with the white resist. In other words, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown). The numbers are formed as white resist removed characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist in the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist in the second layer are the same. The white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have shading, and when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer In the region where the white resist of the eye and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer looks dark, whereas the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer are masked. In the region where the white resist of the first layer does not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed, so the white resist of the first layer looks pale. It will happen. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-free area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It's becoming

In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the white resist of the first layer and the second The light refractive index of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It is possible to do so.

Also, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering (solidly painted) the entire LED mounting surface 402bx. HDLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entire LED (solidly painted) are mounted. Thus, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, the lighting inspection of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, is individually performed (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are written in white resist characters (not shown) near the plurality of check pins. is formed as A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, a region indicating the position of arranging electronic components such as various distributed resistors (not shown) is formed as a white resist removal region using two coats of white resist, similar to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition, in the vicinity of these areas, part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are formed as white resist-cut characters using two coats of white resist, similar to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. . Specifically, first, the non-LED-mounted surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is coated with a white resist as the first coat of the two-coat white resist. It is covered with a resist (that is, the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is coated with a white resist solution as the first coat of the white resist applied twice). The non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, an area indicating the position where the constant-current drive circuit 402bax is arranged (predetermined pin number arrangement) as the second of the two-coat white resist. 269, the white resist removed region LSLKa as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax has a region between the 1st pin and the 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark indicating the arrangement.) is masked as the white resist removed area LSLKa, and a constant current is applied near and upward to the white resist removed area LSLKa. With the part number IC1 (see FIG. 269(a)) corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax masked as characters without white resist, the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. covered with resist. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower decorative substrate 402b in the same manner as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left lower decorative substrate 402b. The whole is covered with a white resist, and the whole is covered except for the region masked with the white resist of the second layer, so that the masked region is recessed as a recess corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A white resist removed area LSLKa is formed as a region to be printed, and IC1, which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is formed as white resist removed characters.

The non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b has a white resist (not shown) in a region indicating the positions of electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various distributed resistors (not shown). In the vicinity of this region, white resist-cut characters R1, R2, not shown, corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg mounted on the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b are shown. R3 is formed, and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as various distributed resistors and capacitors (not shown) are formed as white resist characters (not shown). In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is placed near this region. It is formed as a white resist removed character (not shown).

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are the same. , the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have shading. Looking at the base of 402by (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the second layer In contrast, the white resist of the first layer appears thicker than the white resist of the first layer in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap because of the masking. Since it is exposed without being covered with the white resist of the second layer, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the second-layer white resist, the white resist-extracted characters formed on the first-layer white resist can be identified. can be performed, and the white resist removal area can be identified.

In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer and the second The light refractive index of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. You can do it.

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of black, brown, or blue resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs. is implemented in

Note that, even in the configuration for the countermeasures against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are coated with white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. The corresponding part numbers are formed as white resist-cut characters using two coats of white resist, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged use two coats of white resist. It is formed as a white resist removed region. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 is coated with the white resist as the first coat of the two coats of white resist. It is covered (that is, the white resist solution is applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 as the first coat of the white resist applied twice). Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is an area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged (predetermined pin numbers are arranged as the second coat of the two-coat white resist). For example, in the white resist removal area HSLK7 as an area corresponding to the full-color LED hLED7, a notch mark and a notch mark indicating the arrangement of the fifth pin of the full-color LED hLED7 are included. are masked as white resist removed regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and near these white resist removed regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 and to the right, hLED1, which is a full-color LED, is formed. The entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with white resist while the part numbers LED1 to LED10 corresponding to LED10 are masked as characters without white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the whole is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer is formed. By covering the entire area except for the areas masked by the resist, the masked areas are recessed as recesses, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are white resist areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as characters without white resist.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are the same. Therefore, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have different densities, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the base, the white resist of the second layer appears darker in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, whereas the masked white resist makes the second layer appear darker. In the region where the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed. The white resist of the eyes will appear pale. In other words, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters in the first layer of white resist can be identified. ing.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown). The numbers are formed as white resist removed characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist in the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist in the second layer are the same. The white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have shading, and when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer In the region where the white resist of the eye and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer looks dark, whereas the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer are masked. In the region where the white resist of the first layer does not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed, so the white resist of the first layer looks pale. It will happen. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It's becoming

In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer and the second The light refractive index of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It is possible to do so.

In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The packages of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solidly coated). Mounted are full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entirety (solidly painted). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are written in white resist characters (not shown) near the plurality of check pins. is formed as A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various distributed resistors (not shown) are provided. A region indicating the position where electronic components such as are arranged is formed as a white resist removal region using a white resist that is coated twice in the same manner as the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and these regions A part number corresponding to an electronic part is formed in the vicinity as a white resist removal character using a two-coat white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. FIG.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are the same. Therefore, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have shading, and through the white resist of the second layer, the LED non-mounting surface of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 Looking at the base of 314y, the white resist of the second layer looks dark in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, whereas the masked In the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed. The white resist of the first layer looks pale. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-extracted characters formed on the white resist of the first layer can be identified. can be performed, and the white resist removal area can be identified.

In addition, since the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is coated with white resist twice, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer and the second The light refractive index of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. You can do it.

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance of full-color LED light emission is reduced.

In addition, even in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, and the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reflected forward (that is, toward the upward side of the production operation unit 300). rate can be increased.

As described above, in the configuration for the countermeasure against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the first embodiment, full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed on the white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. and the area indicating the positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing, and are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. In the configuration of the fourth embodiment for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is coated with part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in two coats of white. In addition to being formed as white resist removed characters using resist, areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are formed as white resist removed areas using twice-coated white resist, and , On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are formed as white resist-extracted letters using a white resist that has been applied twice, and the full-color LED The difference is that the regions indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are formed as white resist-free regions using two-coat white resist.

The solid white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b can increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It's like In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, so that the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 emit light forward (that is, the direction toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300) Reflectance can be increased. Therefore, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged are printed in black as silk-screen printing on the white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. If it is printed, the black silk printing will reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and the problem arises that the light emission of the full-color LED will not be used efficiently. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the top left decoration 271, the bottom left decoration 281, the top right decoration 276, the bottom right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper plate center decoration 312a, the lower plate center decoration 312b, the left side door frame decoration 404, the inner side window decoration member 412, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the top door frame decoration 453) are arranged as described above. , is formed transparent, and when a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). A player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of various decoration boards provided. In this case, there arises a problem that the player sees the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player.

Therefore, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, white resist-free characters using a white resist coated twice with a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has absolutely nothing to do with the game for the player In addition, by forming an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which has no relation to the game for the player, as a white resist removal area using the white resist coated twice, the mounting position of the full-color LED (i.e., the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) or finding the number specifying the full-color LED (i.e., the part number corresponding to the full-color LED). can be done.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the fourth embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which is completely unrelated to the game for the player, is coated twice with white resist, and the white resist character is used. In addition, by forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which has no relation to the game for the player, as a white resist removal area using the white resist coated twice, the light emission of the full-color LED It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface.

In the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the fourth embodiment, the same effect as the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment can be obtained. In other words, the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED) and the white resist removal area that uses two coats of white resist that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the position where the full-color LED is placed) ) can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to omit the process of silk printing on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface, respectively. A reduction in the number of steps can contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal area using two-coat white resist indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) area), a polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color, in which the reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases due to the light emission of the full-color LED, are Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance of the mounting surface, electronic components such as non-white resistors and capacitors, or non-white connectors may be placed in that area. In this case, an area indicating the positions of electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors to be mounted on the LED mounting surface is formed as terminals (not shown) and a white resist removal area (not shown). In addition, part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors to be mounted on the LED mounting surface are formed as characters without white resist (not shown).

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the non-LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate, but are entirely covered with the first layer of white resist. By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the second layer of white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED and connector are arranged is formed as a white resist removal area. In addition, part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs and connectors are formed as white resist removed characters, but other methods may be used to form white resist removed areas and white resist removed characters. . For example, after the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate are coated with white resist once or several times, before the white resist dries, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED or connector is arranged A method of forming a white resist removed area by pressing a plate of, and forming a white resist removed character by pressing a plate showing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED or connector, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and After coating the non-LED-mounted surface with white resist once or several times, after the white resist dries, laser irradiation is performed to illuminate the areas where the full-color LEDs and connectors are to be arranged as white resist removal areas. In addition to forming, a method of forming part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs and connectors as characters without white resist can be mentioned.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal area using two-coat white resist indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) area), the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged was configured to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED. It may be configured to have a shape smaller than the outer shape (for example, a rectangular shape smaller than the full-color LED body, or simply a single thick line). In this way, when the full-color LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs are to be arranged is covered with the full-color LED main body, and the surroundings of the full-color LED main body are also covered with the white color of the second layer. Since the resist overlaps with the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer becomes darker, it can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

In the above-described embodiment, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. , the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are arranged in an inclined state of 45 degrees. , the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, but it can also be applied to an elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided on the game board 5. FIG. Examples of the elongated plate-like decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 include decorative substrates provided in various effect units of the game board 5 .

In the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative board of the door frame 3 controls light emission by passing a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs. , red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green, and other monochromatic LEDs. Monochromatic LEDs can also be used. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control light emission of a maximum of 24 monochromatic LEDs.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the DC +12 V supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, but the LED constant current drive circuit The internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the linear power supply provided in the constant current drive circuit (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 261) is set within the allowable current range of the linear power supply. You may use it as a voltage for LED lighting inside. For example, for one of the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, maximum one single color LED (for example, LEDs excluding red LEDs) are electrically connected, the anode terminal of the single-color LED is configured to receive an internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) generated by a linear power supply, and the single-color LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel through the heat dissipating resistor of the heat dissipating resistor circuit described above. Further, a maximum of two single-color LEDs (for example, red LED) are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel through the heat dissipating resistance of the heat dissipating resistor circuit described above. The decorative board configured in this manner can be applied to a decorative board provided on the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3 .

In the above-described embodiment, the DC +12 V supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channel of the constant current drive circuit Among LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminals of the LED elements constituting one full-color LED for one output channel are electrically connected through the heat dissipation resistance of the heat dissipation resistance circuit described above. , a plurality of full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series for one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is two to three. If it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, instead of the +12 V DC supplied (output) from the power supply board 630, it is supplied (output) from the power supply board 630. DC +35V may be used as the voltage for lighting the LEDs. The decorative board configured in this manner can be applied to a decorative board provided on the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3 .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 of the door frame top decoration 453 are the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455. When the frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged on the door frame top decoration 453, the width dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the decoration substrates is large. The edges of the land pattern are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. For any one decoration substrate or any two of the frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit The sides may be arranged so as not to be parallel to the top side and the bottom side of the decoration substrate. Then, the door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of the other right decorative board on which, for example, two full-color LEDs are mounted, in addition to the full-color LEDs provided therein, by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456, in addition to its own full-color LED, directly drives another left decorative board on which, for example, one full-color LED is mounted, by its own LED constant current drive circuit. Light emission may be controlled.

In the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided on the door frame 3. The LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates provided in each decorative body are coated with a solid white resist, but instead of this, they may be printed by white silk printing. In this case, after printing the entire LED mounting surface and LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates with white silk printing, the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed as silk printing. Each will be printed in yellow (or black).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, various decorative substrates provided for each decoration provided on the door frame 3, such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, etc. On the LED non-mounting surface, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards were printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, respectively, but the mounting position of the full-color LED (That is, when printing the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) as silk printing), add the polarity mark of the full-color LED to the full-color LED It may be configured to specify the mounting direction.

107 to 205 (for example, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 provided in the back-rear left effect unit 3200, and the back-rear decoration substrate provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. Bottom left decoration board 3203, back bottom right decoration board 3253 provided in the back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle first decoration board 3322 and back bottom middle second decoration board 3329 provided in the back bottom middle decoration body unit 3320, back top Back top front decoration board 3422 provided in production unit 3400, back top rear decoration board 3452 of back top elevating decoration unit 3450, back rear left decoration board 3522 provided in back rear left decoration unit 3520, back rear right decoration unit 3620 The back right decorative substrate 3622 provided in the back, the back front left decoration substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decoration unit 3710, and the back front right decoration substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decoration unit 3810) are the front surface (surface) and the rear surface ( A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") on the back surface), Full-color LEDs, corresponding part numbers, and positions for arranging full-color LEDs that make it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) on the white resist that is solidly painted on the front (surface) of each decorative substrate The notation part such as the area indicating is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, and the configuration of countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above (full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers, and full-color LEDs are arranged The area indicating the position to be used can prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the full-color 107 to 205 in that measures such as a decrease in reflectance are taken to prevent the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged from being visually recognized by the player). When mounting electronic components such as ICs, resistors, capacitors, etc. on the rear surface (back surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. On the white resist solidly coated on the rear surface (back surface), areas indicating the positions where electronic components are to be placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and the vicinity of these areas corresponding electronic components The part number may be printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing, or a modified example of the configuration for countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above may be adopted. . 107 to 205, for each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5, the above-described configuration (including modifications) for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, and the third embodiment. Either configuration (including modifications) for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance according to the form or a configuration (including modifications) for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment is adopted. may

By the way, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with various substrates that are supplied with power from a power supply substrate and that can control illumination (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in the game machine, lines for transmitting power and lines for transmitting control signals are routed to various boards, and as the length of these lines increases, various boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a front frame configured to cover a window that opens forward and backward with a see-through protective plate (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (paragraph [0014] , and FIG. 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the width of the left and right sides of the front frame becomes thin, and the decorative substrates accommodated in the left and right sides also become strip-shaped. In addition, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, so that the decorative substrate provided on the game board also has a strip-like shape. However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emission means is provided on the strip plate-like decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emission means.

In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a movable accessory device that is arranged in a standby manner in front of and below the display screen of the effect display device and that operates during the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058064). Publication (paragraph [0040], Figures 4, 8 and 9)). A decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted facing the rear surface of the light emitting portion (lens) of the design surface is mounted inside the movable accessory device. However, there is a risk that the number identifying the light-emitting means mounted on the decoration board and auxiliary lines indicating the mounting position of the light-emitting means, etc., which are completely unrelated to the game for the player, may be visible to the player through the light-emitting portion.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine to which a decoration board on which light emitting means is mounted is attached (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with a variety of performances using the light-emission performance by such light-emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the decorative board, the number identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means reduce the reflectance and make the decoration. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light-emitting surface.

Further, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which a decorative substrate on which electronic components such as a light emitter (light emitting means) are mounted facing the back surface of a light emitting portion (lens) is mounted on the frame side or the game board side (for example, , JP 2015-058064 A (paragraph [0011], paragraph [0040], FIGS. 1, 2, 4, 8, and 9)). However, there is a risk that the auxiliary symbols specifying the electronic components mounted on the decoration board, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player, may be seen through the light-emitting portion by the player.

[Silk printing with light-colored paint on the white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative substrate provided for the game board and the door frame]
Next, a white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate is printed by silk printing with a light-colored paint, and each decorative substrate is provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. Each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 adopting the configuration of (1) will be described.

[Silk printing with light-colored paint on the white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the game board]
107 to 205, for example, the back decoration substrate 3114 provided in the back rear movable decoration 3110 shown in FIG. Back bottom left decoration board 3203 provided in the unit 3200, back bottom right decoration board 3253 provided in the back bottom right effect unit 3250 shown in FIG. A decoration board 3322 and a second decoration board 3329 in the back and bottom, a back top front decoration board 3422 provided in the back top effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 181, the rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided in the rear left decoration unit 3520 shown in FIG. 181, and the rear right decoration substrate 3622 provided in the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 shown in FIG. , a back front left decoration substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decoration unit 3710 shown in FIG. 193, and a back front right decoration substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decoration unit 3810 shown in FIG. , A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). Full-color LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) can be specified on a white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 while forming a layer. The part numbers corresponding to the LEDs, the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged, etc. are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. In other words, each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 has the same configuration as the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above. In other words, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged can prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED. At the same time, it has the effect that it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. (Measures are taken to reduce reflectance, etc.).

Here, the members arranged in front of the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 will be briefly described. As shown in 145, a transparent plate-like light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 having a translucent part (region) and a transparent part (region), and a transparent A plate-like decoration 3111 is arranged in this order, and is covered with a game board side transparent member such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-like decoration sheet 3112, and the decoration 3111. As shown in FIG. 159, the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 provided in the lower back left effect unit 3200 has a transparent lower left decorative body 3202 facing forward, and a transparent lower left rotating back. They are arranged in the order of the decoration 3201 and are covered with the game board side transparent members such as the back bottom left decoration 3202 and the back bottom left rotation decoration 3201 . As shown in FIG. 159, the front surface (front surface) of the back-bottom-right decoration board 3253 provided in the back-bottom-right effect unit 3250 has a transparent back-bottom-right ornament 3252 and a transparent back-bottom-right rotation toward the front, as shown in FIG. They are arranged in the order of a decoration 3251 and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a bottom right decoration 3252 and a bottom right rotation decoration 3251 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, the front surface (front surface) of the lower back inner first decoration substrate 3322 provided in the lower back inner decoration unit 3320 has a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 and a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 facing forward. The inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 and the inner back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 are arranged in this order, and are covered with the game board side transparent members such as the back and bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 . As shown in FIG. 165, on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower back middle decoration substrate 3329 provided in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, a transparent lower middle decoration 3328 is arranged. It is covered with a game board side transparent member such as. As shown in FIG. 171, the front surface (front surface) of the back top front decorative substrate 3422 provided in the back top effect unit 3400 has a transparent back top front decoration body 3421 or a transparent back top front decoration body as shown in FIG. 3421 and a transparent back top front rotary decoration 3410 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as the back top front decoration 3421 and back top front rotation decoration 3410 . As shown in FIG. 173, the front surface (front surface) of the back top rear decoration board 3452 of the back top lifting decoration unit 3450 provided in the back top effect unit 3400 has transparent top back decorations 3451, Then, they are arranged in the order of the transparent back upper rear rotary decoration 3440, and are covered with the game board side transparent members such as the back upper rear decoration 3451 and the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the like.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 181, the front surface (front surface) of the rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided in the rear left decoration unit 3520 is composed of a transparent rear left decoration 3521 and a transparent rear left decoration 3521 toward the front. They are arranged in the order of the rear left rotation decorative body 3510 and are covered with the game board side transparent members such as the rear left rear decoration body 3521 and the rear rear left rotation decoration body 3510 . As shown in FIG. 188, the front surface (surface) of the rear-right decoration substrate 3622 provided in the rear-right decoration unit 3620 is composed of a transparent rear-right decoration body 3621 and a transparent rear-right decoration body 3621 toward the front. The rotating decorations 3610 are arranged in this order, and are covered with the game board side transparent members such as the back-right decoration 3621 and the back-right rotation decoration 3610 . As shown in FIG. 193, the front surface (surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decoration unit 3710 is composed of a transparent plate-like back front left decoration 3713 and a frame-like shutter. A support member 3712, a shutter unit 3730, and a frame-shaped front cover 3711 are arranged in this order, and covered with a game board side transparent member such as a back front left ornament 3713 or the like. As shown in FIG. 197, the front surface (surface) of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decoration unit 3810 is composed of a transparent plate-like back front right decoration 3813 and a frame-like shutter. A support member 3812, a shutter unit 3830, and a frame-shaped front cover 3811 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a back front right decorative body 3813 or the like.

In this way, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is covered with the game board side transparent member. As described above, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating film, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating film, which is covered with the game board side transparent member.

Since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light-emitting effect by means of illumination by a plurality of light-emitting units such as LEDs mounted on each decorative board, a plurality of lights mounted on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) change their light-emitting modes in various ways by turning on (light-emitting) and turning off. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can see the front surface (front surface) of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 through the game board side transparent member, and the player loses interest in the game. There is a possibility that the interest will decrease, and it is also inefficient that the production member having the decorative substrate on which the extinguished LED is mounted cannot contribute to the progress of the production.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, each decoration provided on the game board 5 is displayed in a state in which a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) mounted on the front surface (surface) of each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5 is turned off. The white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the substrate makes the game board side transparent member appear as if it were a white member. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 effectively reflects external light. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, since the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is covered with the game-board-side transparent member, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 ( When the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 makes the game board side transparent member appear as if it were a white member. visible. As a result, even when the decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 are used as a type of decoration visible to the player, even when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 can effectively reflect and emit external light, external light of various colors can be emitted from the transparent member on the game board side. By emitting to the outside, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

As described above, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film and covered with the game board side transparent member. Of the game board side transparent members, a decorative sheet 3112, a lower back left rotating decoration 3201, a lower lower left decoration 3202, a lower lower right rotating decoration 3251, a lower right lower back decoration 3252, a lower middle rotating ornament 3310, Back top front rotating decoration 3410 Back top front decoration 3421 Back top back rotation decoration 3440 Back top back decoration 3451 Back back left rotation decoration 3510 Back back left decoration 3521 Back back right rotation decoration As described above, the body 3610 and the back-rear-right decorative body 3621 are transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. In line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (i.e., the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed. In other words, among the transparent members on the game board side, the decoration sheet 3112, the lower back left rotation decoration 3201, the lower back left decoration 3202, the lower back right rotation decoration 3251, the lower back right decoration 3252, and the lower back middle rotation decoration. Body 3310, back upper front rotary decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back upper rear rotary decoration 3440, back upper rear decoration 3451, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear left decoration 3521, back rear The right-hand rotation decoration 3610 and the back-right decoration 3621 are transparent, and have pink-colored dark and light regions. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 becomes a white background. , a dark and light area having a pink color stands out from this white background, and has a decorative sheet 3112, a back bottom left rotating decoration 3201, a back bottom left decoration 3202, a back bottom right rotating decoration 3251, a back bottom right decoration 3252, and a back bottom. Middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper front rotation decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back upper rear rotation decoration 3440, back upper rear decoration 3451, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear left decoration 3521 , back right rotating decorative body 3610, and back rear right decorative body 3621 can provide the player with three-dimensional modeling beauty.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the metal decoration portions (gold material) such as the metal decoration portion 3111d, the metal decoration portion 3310a, the metal decoration portion 3711a, and the metal decoration portion 3811a are formed by hot stamping gold metal foil. A white resist is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of each decoration substrate arranged behind each decoration on which such a metal decoration part (golden material) is formed, whereas it is formed by foil stamping. On the top, a surface-side notation section is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, which enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light. Gold is a color like gold and a color that shines yellow like gold. Therefore, the yellow color of the surface-side inscription portion is similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3111d. In addition, in the game machine, as a gold material, in addition to the obstacle nail N using brass and the metal decoration part formed by hot stamping as described above, for example, a yellow material (for example, transparent) is applied to silver plating. Examples include a member on which a yellow resin that may have light properties, a yellow printed matter, and a gold printed matter are placed.

[Example of placing a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a decoration sheet having a transparent area, etc. placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board and surrounding the transparent area with the gold material (metal decoration part) ]
In addition, as each of the decorative substrates provided on the game board 5, for example, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the back-rear movable decoration 3110, the back-lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 provided in the back-lower middle decoration body unit 3320, and the back-lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 are provided. The front surfaces (surfaces) of the second decoration substrate 3329, the back front left decoration substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decoration unit 3710, and the back front right decoration substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decoration unit 3810 are white as described above. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying the resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"), and this solid coating On the white resist, a surface-side notation portion that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, and a metallic decorative portion with metallic luster is arranged in the vicinity. As described above, the surface-side notation part enables specification of the surface-side electronic component mounted on the front surface (surface) of each decoration board provided on the game board 5, and the part number of the surface-side electronic component , the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged (further, the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, It may include the type of front side electronic parts.).

For example, the rear decorative substrate 3114 provided on the rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described. A transparent plate-like light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-like decoration sheet 3112 having a translucent portion (region) and a transparent portion (region), and a transparent plate-like decoration body 3111 are arranged in this order. It is covered with a game board side transparent member such as a light guide radiation plate 3113 , a sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 , and a decorative body 3111 . The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metal decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster. The metal decoration part 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and multicolor light emission is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the rear decoration substrate 3114. Since the surface-side marking portion that enables identification of possible full-color LEDs has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front-side marking portion is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. there is

A full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3111d of the transparent plate-like decorative body 3111 provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110. On the other hand, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 corresponding to the transparent region of the transparent plate-shaped decorative body 3111 excluding the rear decorative substrate 3114, a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is mounted.

In the state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is transparent, except for the metal decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster of the decorative body 3111. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background, although it can be visually recognized through this region, the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111 due to the eye-catching property. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is applied to the metallic decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster of the decorative body 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area except for the color ( The eye is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111 due to the attractiveness of the gold color. As a result, even when the rear decorative substrate 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, when the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are turned off, the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are printed by silk printing on the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Although the surface-side notation portion having a yellow color that enables identification can be visually recognized through a transparent region excluding the metal decoration portion 3111d having a metallic luster of the decoration 3111, the rear decoration substrate 3114 The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) serves as a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d is eye-catching, and is provided on the decoration 3111 from the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decoration portion 3111d that is formed (formed), even if the surface side description portion is printed by silk printing in a yellow color (gold) similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d, this yellow It is possible to make the existence of silk printing difficult to understand.

Through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-back decoration substrate 3114 . Through-holes, lands, and the like are conspicuous from the white paint film because the copper foil is exposed. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the (surface) to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, the eye is attracted to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111. In this way, the presence of through holes, lands, etc. can be obscured. Therefore, when performing an artwork work for routing the wiring pattern of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the position, size, and number of through holes and lands are restricted. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the rear decorative substrate 3114 and contribute to shortening the time required for artwork work.

[Example of placing a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent lens placed in front of a board silk-printed in yellow]
The first lower back middle decoration substrate 3322 and the second lower middle decoration substrate 3329 provided in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 will be described. As shown in FIG. 165, the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 is arranged in the order of a transparent inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 and a transparent inner rotating ornamental body 3310 under the back. , and the back and middle rotating decorations 3310 and other transparent members on the game board side. As shown in FIG. 165, on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower back middle decoration substrate 3329 provided in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, a transparent lower middle decoration 3328 is arranged. It is covered with a game board side transparent member such as. The back-lower-middle rotary decorative body 3310 is entirely formed transparent except for the metal decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster. The metal decoration part 3310a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and the front surfaces (surfaces) of the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decoration substrate 3329 are painted solid white. Since the surface-side notation portion that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light printed on the resist by silk printing has yellow, the color (yellow) of the surface-side notation portion is the color of the metal decoration portion 3310a. It is a color similar to the color (gold) it has.

In addition, on the front surface (surface) of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back side corresponding to the metal decoration part 3310a of the back bottom middle rotary decoration 3310, a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is not mounted, whereas the metal decoration part Full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first decoration substrate 3322 corresponding to the transparent area of the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 excluding 3310a.

In the state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 is replaced with the metallic luster of the back lower middle rotary decoration body 3310. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent region excluding the metal decorative portion 3310a, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back and bottom becomes a white background. Due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration part 3310a, the line of sight is drawn from the front surface (front surface) of the back bottom middle first decoration substrate 3322 to the metal decoration part 3310a provided (formed) on the back bottom middle rotary decoration 3310. be guided by nature. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310, and a white coating film is formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-lower middle first decoration substrate 3322. can be made difficult to see. In addition, in the state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decoration substrate 3329 in the back and inside can be visually recognized through the transparent back and inside decoration 3328. However, since the back bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 in which the metal decoration part 3310a with metallic luster is provided (formed) in front of the back bottom middle decoration 3328 is arranged, the back bottom middle second The white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 serves as a white background, and the front surface (surface ) to the metal decoration portion 3310 a provided (formed) on the back lower middle rotary decoration body 3310 . As a result, the eye is attracted to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310, and a white coating film is formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-lower middle second decoration substrate 3329. can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, in the state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 is used to make the metallic luster of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310. Although it can be seen through the transparent area except for the metal decoration part 3310a held, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back and bottom becomes a white background. Then, the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3310a attracts attention from the front surface (front surface) of the back bottom middle first decoration substrate 3322 to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the back bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310. The line of sight is naturally guided. As a result, even when the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 By attracting the eye, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 on the back side. In addition, in the state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decoration substrate 3329 in the back and inside can be visually recognized through the transparent back and inside decoration 3328. However, since the back bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 in which the metal decoration part 3310a with metallic luster is provided (formed) in front of the back bottom middle decoration 3328 is arranged, the back bottom middle second The white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 serves as a white background, and the front surface (surface ) to the metal decoration portion 3310 a provided (formed) on the back lower middle rotary decoration body 3310 . As a result, even when the lower back middle second decoration substrate 3329 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 By attracting the eye, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 on the back side. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the LED capable of emitting multicolor light is printed by silk printing on the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back and inside. Although it is possible to visually recognize the surface-side notation part having yellow that enables the identification of the full-color LED through a transparent area excluding the metal decoration part 3310a with metallic luster of the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310. , The white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 becomes a white background, so that the back-lower middle first decoration is made by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration part 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the substrate 3322 to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the back lower middle rotary decoration body 3310, the surface side notation portion is the color (golden) of the metal decoration portion 3310a. ), the presence of this yellow silk print can be made difficult to understand. In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the LED capable of emitting multicolor light is printed by silk printing on the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the second decoration substrate 3329 on the back and inside. Although the surface-side labeling portion having a yellow color that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED can be visually recognized through the transparent back and middle decoration 3328, the metal decoration portion with metallic luster is in front of the back and bottom middle decoration 3328. Since the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 on which 3310a is provided (formed) is arranged, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-lower-middle second decoration substrate 3329 serves as a white background. Then, the metal decoration 3310a provided (formed) on the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 from the front surface (surface) of the back-lower middle second decoration substrate 3329 due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided, even if the surface-side notation portion is silk-printed in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3310a, the existence of this yellow silk-printing can be difficult to understand. It is possible.

In addition, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 . Through-holes, lands, and the like are conspicuous from the white paint film because the copper foil is exposed. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of 3322 to the metal decoration part 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310, it is provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 ) By attracting the eye to the metal decorative portion 3310a, the existence of through holes, lands, etc. can be obscured. , the position, size, and number of through-holes and lands are not restricted, and the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the back-bottom-middle first decorative substrate 3322 can be increased, and the time required for artwork work can be improved. It can also contribute to shortening. In addition, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decoration substrate 3329 on the back and bottom. Through-holes, lands, and the like are conspicuous from the white paint film because the copper foil is exposed. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of 3329 to the metal decoration part 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310, it is provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 ) By attracting the eye to the metal decorative portion 3310a, the presence of through holes, lands, etc. can be obscured. , the position, size, and number of through-holes and lands are not restricted, and the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the second decoration substrate 3329 can be increased, and the time required for artwork work can be increased. It can also contribute to shortening.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent decoration placed in front of a board silk-printed in yellow and surrounding the transparent decoration with the gold material (metal decoration part)]
The back front left decoration substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decoration unit 3710 will be described. , a transparent plate-like back front left ornament 3713, a frame-like shutter support member 3712, a shutter unit 3730, and a frame-like front cover 3711 are arranged in this order. It is covered with a side transparent member. The front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3711 is provided with a metallic decorative portion 3711a having a metallic luster. The metal decoration part 3711a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is printed on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 by silk printing. Since the surface-side marking portion that enables the identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting light has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front-side marking portion is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3711a. ing.

On the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 corresponding to the metal decoration portion 3711a of the back front left decoration unit 3710, a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is not mounted, but the metal decoration portion 3711a is not mounted. A full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 corresponding to the region within the frame of the frame-shaped front cover 3711 removed.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the back front left decoration 3713 is arranged behind the back front left decoration 3713 because the back front left decoration 3713 is transparent. The white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the substrate 3714 can be visually recognized through the frame of the back front left decorative body 3713, the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730, but the back front left Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 serves as a white background, the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a attracts attention from the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711 a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711 . As a result, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the back front left decoration 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the back front left decoration 3713 is arranged behind the back front left decoration 3713 because the back front left decoration 3713 is transparent. The white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the substrate 3714 can be visually recognized through the frame of the back front left decorative body 3713, the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730, but the back front left Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 serves as a white background, the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a attracts attention from the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711 a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711 . As a result, even when the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. , Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In the open state where the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730 and the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is solidly painted. The surface-side labeling portion having a yellow color that enables specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor, which is printed by silk printing on a white resist, is placed inside the frame of the back front left decorative body 3713, the shutter support member 3712, and the shutter unit. Although it can be seen through the frame of 3730, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 serves as a white background, so that the metal decoration portion 3711a has the color (gold). Because the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 to the metal decoration portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, the surface side display portion is the metal decoration portion 3711a. Even if it is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) of , the existence of this yellow silk printing can be made difficult to understand.

Through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 . Through-holes, lands, and the like are exposed from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3711a makes the back front left decoration substrate 3714 more attractive. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. As a result, the presence of through holes, lands, etc. can be obscured. Therefore, when working on the artwork that draws the wiring pattern of the back front left decorative board 3714, the position, size, and number of through holes and lands can be changed. This can increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 and contribute to shortening the time required for artwork work.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent decoration placed in front of a board silk-printed in yellow and surrounding the transparent decoration with the gold material (metal decoration part)]
The back front right decoration substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decoration unit 3810 will be described. A transparent plate-shaped back front right ornament 3813, a frame-shaped shutter support member 3812, a shutter unit 3830, and a frame-shaped front cover 3811 are arranged in this order. It is covered with a side transparent member. A front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3811 is formed with a metallic decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster. The metal decoration part 3811a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is printed on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (surface) of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 by silk printing. Since the surface-side marking portion that enables the identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting light has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front-side marking portion is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3811a. ing.

The front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 corresponding to the metal decoration portion 3811a of the back front right decoration unit 3810 is not mounted with a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light. A full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 corresponding to the region within the frame of the frame-shaped front cover 3811 removed.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the rear front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the back front right decoration 3813 is arranged behind the back front right decoration 3813 because the back front right decoration 3813 is transparent. Although the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the frame of the back front right decorative body 3813, the shutter support member 3812, and the frame of the shutter unit 3830, the back front right Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 serves as a white background, the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a attracts attention from the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811 a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811 . This makes it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 by attracting the eye to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the back front right decoration body 3813 is formed transparent, so that the back front right decoration body 3813 is arranged behind the back front right decoration body 3813. The white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the frame of the back front right decorative body 3813, the shutter support member 3812, and the frame of the shutter unit 3830, but the back front right Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 serves as a white background, the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a attracts attention from the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811 a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811 . As a result, even when the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. , Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In the open state where the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830 and the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is solidly painted. The surface-side labeling portion having yellow that enables specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light printed by silk printing on a white resist is placed inside the frame of the back front right decorative body 3813, the shutter support member 3812, and the shutter unit. Although it can be seen through the frame of 3830, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 serves as a white background, so that the metal decoration portion 3811a has the color (gold). Because the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 to the metal decoration portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, the surface side display portion is the metal decoration portion 3811a. Even if it is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) of , the existence of this yellow silk printing can be made difficult to understand.

Through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 . Through-holes, lands, etc. are exposed from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. As a result, the presence of through holes, lands, and the like can be made difficult to understand. This can increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 and contribute to shortening the time required for artwork work.

[Example of arranging a transparent decoration placed in front of a board silk-printed in yellow in between a gold material (metal decoration part) and a gold material (metal decoration part)]
In addition, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower-back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower-back middle effect unit 3300 shown in FIG. 171 is arranged on the upper side thereof, the back front left decoration unit 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 shown in FIG. 193 is arranged on the left side thereof, and on the right side thereof The back front right decoration unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 shown in FIG. 197 is arranged, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 shown in FIG. The back bottom right effect unit 3250 shown is arranged.

A back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 of a back-bottom middle decoration unit 3320 arranged on the lower side of the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a back-front left decoration unit 3710 arranged on the left side of the game area 5a of the game board 5. and the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 arranged on the right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are provided (formed) with metal decoration portions 3310a, 3711a, and 3811a. They all have gold in color.

On the other hand, the back top front decorative body 3421 and the back top front rotary decoration body 3410 of the back top effect unit 3400 arranged on the upper side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are formed transparently, and the back top front decoration is formed. The front surface side labeling portion that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the substrate 3422 has a yellow color. The color (yellow) of the part is the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 arranged on the left side of the back upper effect unit 3400, and the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back upper effect unit 3400. The metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration body unit 3810 has a color similar to gold. In other words, the back upper front decoration substrate 3422 having a yellow surface side inscription similar to gold is attached to the metal decoration portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the front cover of the back front right decoration unit 3810. 3811 (the metal decoration portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3781 of the back front right decoration unit 3810). ), the color (yellow) of the front side inscription part can be seen through the back upper front decoration 3421, or the back upper front decoration 3421 and the back upper front rotating decoration 3410 Even so, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the presence of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and the presence of the front surface side notation by the attractiveness of the gold-colored metal decorations 3711a and 3811a.

In addition, the bottom-left decorative body 3202 and the bottom-left rotating decorative body 3201 of the bottom-left effect unit 3200 arranged on the lower left side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are formed transparently, and the bottom-left decorative substrate is formed. 3203 has a yellow color on the front surface side labeling portion that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor, which is printed by silk printing on the solid white resist coated on the front surface (surface) of 3203. The color (yellow) of is arranged on the lower right side of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 arranged on the upper left side of the back bottom left effect unit 3200. The metal decoration portion 3310a of the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310 of the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 has a color similar to the gold color of the metal decoration part 3310a. In other words, the back-bottom-left decorative substrate 3203 having a surface-side inscription in yellow similar to gold is attached to the metal decoration portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back-front-left decoration unit 3710 and the back-bottom of the back-bottom middle decoration unit 3320. Because it is mixed with the metal decoration part 3310a of the middle rotation decoration body 3310 (the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 and the back bottom middle rotation decoration of the back bottom middle decoration body unit 3320) 3310a of the body 3310), the color (yellow) of the front side marking portion can be visually recognized through the back bottom left decoration 3202 and the back bottom left rotation decoration 3201. Even if there is, it is possible to obscure the presence of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 and the presence of the front surface side notation by the attractiveness of the gold-colored metal decorations 3711a and 3310a.

In addition, the bottom-right decorative body 3252 and the bottom-right rotating decorative body 3251 of the bottom-right effect unit 3250 arranged on the lower right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are formed transparently. The surface side labeling portion that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the substrate 3253 has a yellow color. 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 arranged on the upper right side of the back bottom right effect unit 3250 and the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200. The metal decoration portion 3310a of the lower middle rotating decoration 3310 of the lower middle decoration body unit 3320 to be arranged has a color similar to gold. In other words, the back-bottom-right decorative substrate 3253 having a surface-side inscription in yellow similar to gold is attached to the metal decoration portion 3811 a of the front cover 3811 of the back-front-right decoration unit 3810 and the back-bottom of the back-bottom middle decoration unit 3320 . Because it is mixed with the metal decoration part 3310a of the middle rotation decoration 3310 (the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 and the back bottom middle rotation decoration of the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320) 3310a of the body 3310), the color (yellow) of the front side marking portion can be visually recognized through the back bottom right decoration 3252 and the back bottom right rotation decoration 3251. Even if there is, it is possible to obscure the existence of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 and obscure the existence of the front side notation part by the attractiveness of the metal decoration parts 3811a and 3310a having gold.

[Example of placing an obstacle nail near a transparent ornament placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board]
As described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The front structural member 1000 is transparently formed together with the game panel 1100 as described above. As a result, the existence of various members arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 from the front of the front component member 1000 (that is, the front of the game board 5) (hereinafter referred to as It may be described as a “transparent game panel 1100”).

In addition, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 has the center accessory 2500 formed in a transparent frame shape, the starter unit 2100 formed of a transparent member, and the side unit 2200 formed of a transparent member. The side upper left unit 2300 is made transparent, and the unit base 2411, front cover 2412, and rear cover 2413 of the first attacker unit 2400 are made of transparent members. For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 1100 and through various transparent members of the front unit 2000, it can be visually recognized.

For example, in the back-bottom-left effect unit 3200, behind the transparent game panel 1100, transparent decorations such as a back-bottom-left rotating decoration 3201 and a back-bottom-left decoration 3202 are arranged. A rear lower left decorative substrate 3203 is arranged in the rear. A plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower left decorative substrate 3203 . In this manner, behind the transparent game panel 1100, the transparent decorations of the back bottom left rotating decoration 3201, the back bottom left decoration 3202, and the back bottom left decoration substrate 3203 are arranged in this order. The front surface (surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is coated with a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by applying a white resist solution. A white resist layer is formed. On the white resist solidly painted on the front surface (surface) of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203, the surface of the part number of the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of full color LEDs, the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic components are arranged, etc. Indicates the attributes of the electronic component on the front side (may also include the shape of the electronic component on the front side, the size of the electronic component on the front side, the mounting orientation of the electronic component on the front side (mounting direction), and the type of the electronic component on the front side). The surface-side notation portion is printed in yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N (in this embodiment, brass is used)) by silk printing.

In the game area 5 a of the game board 5 , a plurality of obstacle nails N (in this embodiment, brass is used) having a gold color in a predetermined gauge arrangement and contacting the game balls are attached to the transparent game panel 1100 . Since it is planted, it is possible to utilize the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstructing nails N. That is, since a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the player is arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 due to the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N. Even if the front surface (surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 can be seen through transparent decorations such as the lower back left rotating ornament 3201 and the lower back left ornament 3202, the lower back left ornamental substrate 3203 This contributes to obscuring the presence of the front-side notation part of yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N) printed by silk printing on the white resist that is solidly applied to the surface.

Similar to the back-bottom-left effect unit 3200, the back-bottom-right effect unit 3250 also contributes to obscuring the presence of the front-side notation portion. That is, since a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the player is arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 due to the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N. The front surface (front surface) of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253 of the lower back right effect unit 3250 can be visually recognized through the transparent decorations of the lower back right rotating decoration 3251 and the lower right back decoration 3252 of the lower back right effect unit 3250. Even if possible, yellow printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250 (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N ) contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the surface side notation part.

Further, similarly to the back bottom left effect unit 3200, the point that the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 also contributes to making it difficult to recognize the existence of the front side notation portion holds true. That is, since a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the player is arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 due to the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N. The front surface (front surface) of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back-lower middle effect unit 3300 is passed through the transparent decorations such as the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the back-lower middle effect unit 3300. Even if it can be seen, or through the transparent decorations of the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 and the back-lower middle decoration 3328 of the back-lower middle effect unit 3300 arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 , Even if the front surface (front surface) of the second decoration board 3329 in the back-lower middle effect unit 3300 can be visually recognized, the first decoration board 3322 in the back-lower right direction of the back-lower right effect unit 3250 and the lower-back side To make it difficult to understand the presence of a yellow (color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N) printed on the white resist solidly painted on the middle second decorative substrate 3329 by silk printing. contributing.

Further, for example, in a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (surface) of the lower-back left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower-back left effect unit 3200 is turned off, the surface of the lower-back left decorative substrate 3203 is turned off. The front side inscription part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the back is transparent decoration called the back bottom left decoration body 3202 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201. Although it can be seen through the body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 becomes a white background, so that the front of the surface of the lower left decorative substrate 3203 becomes a white background. The line of sight is naturally guided from the surface of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 to the gold obstacle nail N by the attractiveness of the gold obstacle nail N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in the becomes. As a result, even when the back lower left decorative board 3203 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the obstacle nail N having gold color, so that the surface of the back lower left decorative board 3203 is displayed. Since it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the surface of the game machine, the world view of the game machine does not easily collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

Similar to the back bottom left effect unit 3200, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 also has the point that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of decorativeness. That is, in a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (surface) of the lower-back right decorative substrate 3253 of the lower-back right effect unit 3250 are turned off, LEDs formed on the surface of the lower-back right decorative substrate 3253 The front side inscription part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film to be applied is a transparent decoration body called the back bottom right decoration body 3252 of the back bottom right production unit 3250 and the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, Although it is visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 serves as a white background, so that it is arranged in front of the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. Due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored obstacle nail N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the line of sight is naturally guided from the surface of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 to the gold-colored obstacle nail N. . As a result, even when the back lower right decorative board 3253 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, the eye is drawn to the obstacle nail N having a golden color, so that the surface of the back lower right decorative board 3253 is displayed. Since it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the surface of the game machine, the world view of the game machine does not easily collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, similarly to the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 can also be prevented from being decorative. In other words, in a state where the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first decoration board 3322 in the back side of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 is turned off, the first decoration board 3322 in the back side is turned off. An inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the back bottom left rendering unit 3200 and a back bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 are the front side marking part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of the back. Although it is visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the back and bottom middle first decoration substrate 3322 serves as a white background, so that the back and bottom middle first decoration substrate 3322 is visible. The gold-colored obstacle nail N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the decoration substrate 3322 attracts attention from the surface of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back and bottom. The line of sight is naturally guided to. In addition, in a state in which the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (surface) of the second decoration board 3329 for the middle back of the back-lower middle effect unit 3300 is turned off, the second decoration board 3329 for the middle back is turned off. The front side inscription portion formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of the transparent display unit 3328 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310. Although it is visible through the decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the second decoration substrate 3329 in the back and bottom becomes a white background, so that the second decoration in the back and bottom is visible. Due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored obstacle nail N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the substrate 3329, the gold-colored obstacle nail N is attracted from the surface of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the back and bottom. The line of sight is naturally guided. As a result, even when the first decoration board 3322 in the back and the second decoration board 3329 in the back are used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the obstacle nail N having a gold color. This makes it difficult to see the white coating film formed on the surfaces of the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decoration substrate 3329, so that the world view of the gaming machine is less likely to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

Although a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, instead of these, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The sheet has a portion designed in gold (the same color as the gold of the plurality of obstacle nails N or a color close to this gold). Through the transparent decorations such as the back-bottom-left rotating decoration body 3201 and the back-bottom-left decoration body 3202 in the back-bottom-left effect unit 3200 arranged at the rear of the portion where the bottom-left effect unit 3200 is arranged, the back-bottom-left decoration substrate in the back-bottom-left effect unit 3200 is passed through the transparent decorations. 3203 can be visually recognized, yellow (cell sheet It contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the surface side inscription part of the color similar to gold that the part designed in ) has. In a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (surface) of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200 are turned off, LEDs are formed on the surface of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203. The front side marking portion formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white coating film is formed into transparent decorations such as a back bottom left decoration body 3202 and a back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200, and then transparent. Although it can be seen through the game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 becomes a white background, so that it is arranged in front of the surface of the lower left decorative substrate 3203. The line of sight is naturally guided from the surface of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 to the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet by the attractiveness of the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100.例文帳に追加becomes. As a result, even when the back bottom left decorative board 3203 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, the eye is drawn to the part designed in gold on the cell sheet, and thus the back bottom left decorative board 3203 is displayed. Since the white coating film formed on the surface of 3203 can be made difficult to see, the world view of the game machine is less likely to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

Further, similarly to the back bottom left effect unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and this cell sheet is gold (the same color as the gold of the plurality of obstacle nails N or this color). There is a portion designed in a color close to gold), and due to the attractiveness of the portion designed in gold, the decorativeness of the lower back right production unit 3250 arranged behind the portion designed in gold also decreases. can be suppressed. That is, in a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (surface) of the lower-back right decorative substrate 3253 of the lower-back right effect unit 3250 are turned off, LEDs formed on the surface of the lower-back right decorative substrate 3253 The front side inscription part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film to be applied is a transparent decoration body called the back bottom right decoration body 3252 of the back bottom right production unit 3250 and the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, Although it is visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 serves as a white background, so that it is arranged in front of the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. The eye is naturally guided from the surface of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 to the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet due to the attractiveness of the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 . The Rukoto. As a result, even when the back-bottom-right decorative board 3253 is used as a kind of decoration that is visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the gold-colored part of the cell sheet, and thus the back-bottom-right decorative board is displayed. Since the white coating film formed on the surface of the 3253 can be made difficult to see, the world view of the game machine is less likely to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

Further, similarly to the back bottom left effect unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and this cell sheet is gold (the same color as the gold of the plurality of obstacle nails N or this color). There is a part designed in a color close to gold), and due to the attractiveness of this part designed in gold, the decorativeness of the back lower middle production unit 3300 arranged behind this part designed in gold is also reduced. can be suppressed. In other words, in a state where the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first decoration board 3322 in the back side of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 is turned off, the first decoration board 3322 in the back side is turned off. An inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the back bottom left rendering unit 3200 and a back bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 are the front side marking part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of the back. Although it is visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the back and bottom middle first decoration substrate 3322 serves as a white background, so that the back and bottom middle first decoration substrate 3322 is visible. Obstacle nails with gold color are drawn from the surface of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back and bottom by the attractiveness of the part designed in gold in the cell sheet pasted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the decoration substrate 3322. The line of sight is naturally guided to N. In addition, in a state in which the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (surface) of the second decoration board 3329 for the middle back of the back-lower middle effect unit 3300 is turned off, the second decoration board 3329 for the middle back is turned off. The front side inscription portion formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of the transparent display unit 3328 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310. Although it is visible through the decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the second decoration substrate 3329 in the back and bottom becomes a white background, so that the second decoration in the back and bottom is visible. Obstacle nails N having gold color are drawn from the surface of the second decoration substrate 3329 in the back and bottom by the attractiveness of the part designed in gold in the cell sheet pasted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the substrate 3329. The line of sight is naturally guided to. As a result, even when the first decoration board 3322 in the back and the second decoration board 3329 in the back are used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the portion designed in gold on the cell sheet is visible to the player. By attracting, it is possible to make it difficult to see the white coating film formed on the surface of the first decoration substrate 3322 and the second decoration substrate 3329, so that the world view of the game machine is difficult to collapse. . Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

[Silk printing with light-colored paint on the white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame]
On the other hand, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration for countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the above-described second embodiment (hereinafter, may be described as "various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3"). 38, the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 provided in the upper left plate decoration unit 270 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and the upper right plate shown in FIGS. A plate upper right decoration substrate 278 provided in the decoration unit 275, a plate lower left decoration substrate 283 provided in the plate lower left decoration unit 280 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and a plate right provided in the plate lower right decoration unit 285 shown in FIGS. Lower decoration board 288, plate center upper decoration board 314 provided in the effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, plate center provided in the effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. Lower decoration board 316, production operation ring decoration board 352 provided in production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, central button decoration board 376 provided in production operation button unit 360 of production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. A peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration board 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 shown in FIG. 67, and a door frame right side unit shown in FIG. 410, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 shown in FIG. 70, the door frame top center decoration provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. There are a substrate 455, a door frame top left decoration substrate 456 provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 74, and a door frame top right decoration substrate 457 provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. , A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). Full-color LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) can be specified on a white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 while a layer is formed. Since the part numbers corresponding to the LEDs, the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged, etc. are printed with yellow paint by silk printing, the reflectance decreases according to the above-described second embodiment. The effect of the configuration of such countermeasures, that is, the region indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged, can prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED. At the same time, it has the effect that it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. (Measures are taken to reduce reflectance, etc.).

Here, to briefly explain the members arranged in front of the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decoration substrate provided in the door frame 3, the front surface (surface) of the handle decoration substrate 184 provided in the handle unit 180 is As shown in FIG. 38, the transparent inner lens 185a and the transparent handle cover 185 are arranged in order toward the front, and are covered with the inner lens 185a, the handle cover 185, and other transparent members on the door frame side. ing. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (surface) of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 provided in the upper left plate decoration unit 270 is composed of a transparent upper left plate inner lens 272 and a transparent upper left plate decoration body. 271, and covered with a door frame side transparent member such as an upper left inner lens 272 of the plate and an upper left decorative body 271 of the plate. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (surface) of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 provided in the upper right plate decoration unit 275 is composed of a transparent upper right inner lens 277 and a transparent upper right decoration body. 276, and covered with a door frame side transparent member such as an upper right inner lens 277 of the plate and an upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (surface) of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 provided in the lower left plate decoration unit 280 is composed of a transparent lower left plate inner lens 282 and a transparent lower left plate decoration body. 281, and covered with a door frame side transparent member such as a lower left inner lens 282 of the dish and a lower left decorative body 281 of the dish. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (front surface) of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 provided in the plate lower right decoration unit 285 is composed of a transparent plate lower right inner lens 287 and a transparent plate lower right inner lens 287 toward the front as shown in FIGS. They are arranged in the order of the lower right decorative body 286 and are covered with the door frame side transparent member such as the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish and the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (surface) of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 provided in the effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 includes a transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 and a transparent plate center They are arranged in the order of the upper decoration 312a, and are covered with the door frame side transparent member such as the plate center upper inner lens 313 and the plate center upper decoration 312a. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (surface) of the lower plate center decoration substrate 316 provided in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 includes a transparent lower plate center inner lens 315 and a transparent lower plate center decoration. They are arranged in the order of the body 312b, and are covered with a door frame side transparent member such as a lower dish center inner lens 315 and a lower dish center decorative body 312b. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (surface) of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided in the effect operation unit 300 is arranged in the order of a transparent decoration board cover 353, a transparent ring mounting base 331, and a transparent rotation operation part 302. and covered with the door frame side transparent members such as the decorative substrate cover 353 , the ring mounting base 331 , and the rotary operation portion 302 . As shown in FIG. 60, a transparent center button cover 375 is arranged on the upper surface (surface) of the center button decoration board 376 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame such as the center button cover 375 is arranged. It is covered with a side transparent member. As shown in FIG. 60, the upper surface (front surface) of the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in the presentation operation button unit 360 of the presentation operation unit 300 includes a transparent peripheral substrate cover 378, a transparent peripheral decoration inner lens 379, and a transparent outer lens. They are arranged in the order of the outer peripheral button cover 380 and are covered with the door frame side transparent members such as the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 , the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 has a transparent left side inner lens 403 and a transparent door frame lens 403 facing forward. The left side decorative body 404 is arranged in this order, and is covered with the door frame side transparent member such as the left side inner lens 403 and the door frame left side decorative body 404 . As shown in FIG. 70, the front surface (front surface) of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 has a transparent inner inner lens 414 and a transparent side window interior decoration toward the front, as shown in FIG. The inner lens 414 and the side window inner decorative portion 410b are arranged in order of the portion 410b, and are covered with the door frame side transparent member such as the inner lens 414 and the side window inner decorative portion 410b. As shown in FIG. 70, the front surface (surface) of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 provided in the door-frame right-side unit 410 has a transparent right-side inner lens 415 and a transparent door-frame right-side lens 415 facing forward. The decorative body 419 is arranged in this order, and is covered with the door frame side transparent member such as the right side inner lens 415 and the door frame right side decorative body 419 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 provided in the door frame top unit 450 has a transparent top center inner lens 458 and a transparent door frame top facing forward. The decoration body 453 is arranged in this order, and is covered with a door frame side transparent member such as a top central inner lens 458 and the door frame top decoration body 453 . As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 provided in the door frame top unit 450 has a transparent top left inner lens 459 and a transparent door frame top decorative body facing forward. 453 and covered with a door frame side transparent member such as a top left inner lens 459 and a door frame top decorative body 453 . As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 provided in the door frame top unit 450 has a transparent top right inner lens 460 and a transparent door frame top decorative body facing forward. 453 , and covered with a door frame side transparent member such as a top right inner lens 460 and a door frame top decoration 453 .

In this manner, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is covered with the door-frame-side transparent member. As described above, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating film, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating film, which is covered with the door frame side transparent member.

Since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by means of illumination by a plurality of light emitting units such as LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, a plurality of light emitting devices mounted on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) change their light-emitting modes in various ways by turning on (light-emitting) and turning off. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs are extinguished, the player can visually recognize the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 through the door frame side transparent member, and the player loses interest in the game. There is a possibility that the interest will decrease, and it is also inefficient that the production member having the decorative substrate on which the extinguished LED is mounted cannot contribute to the progress of the production.

Therefore, in each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration for countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is mounted on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface). When the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 makes the door frame side transparent. It is made to look as if the member is a white member. As a result, even in a state where the light emission effect by a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) is not in progress, the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed. Since the white coating film on the outside can effectively reflect and emit outside light, various colors of outside light can be emitted from the door frame side transparent member to the outside. In other words, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) does not collapse easily. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, in each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the front surface (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is the same as that of the door. Since it is covered with the frame-side transparent member, a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) mounted on the front surface (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 are turned off. In this state, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 makes the door frame side transparent member appear as if it were a white member. As a result, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, and a state in which the light emitting effect by a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors) is not in progress. Even so, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or the top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 can effectively reflect and emit external light, so various colors outside light from the transparent member on the door frame side to the outside, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, which employs the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, is coated with a white resist liquid as described above. It is coated with a white coating film and covered with the door frame side transparent member. Among the transparent members on the door frame side, the handle cover 185, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b. , the rotary operation portion 302, the central button cover 375, the outer peripheral button cover 380, the left side door frame decoration 404, the inner side window decoration portion 410b, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the top door frame decoration 453 are described above. As such, it is made transparent. On the other hand, among the game-board-side transparent members covering the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5, the decoration sheet 3112, the back-bottom-left-rotation decoration 3201, the back-side Bottom left decoration 3202, back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, back bottom right decoration 3252, back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back top back rotation decoration 3440, back top rear decoration 3451, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear left decoration 3521, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, and back rear right decoration 3621 are pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The difference is that a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)).

To briefly explain this, the pachinko machine 1 can provide the player with an effect with a different view of the world by replacing the game board. In order to reduce the manufacturing cost of various substrates provided for door frames and game boards, the resist solution applied to various substrates is usually unified in green, which is inexpensive. However, when providing a glittering effect to the player by cooperating the light emitting effect by the game board and the light emitting effect by the door frame, in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the front surface (surface ), the green color of the resist solution applied to the surface of the game board is visible as it is, so that the world view of the game board may be lost, and the player may lose interest in the game.

Therefore, in each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration for countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is mounted on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface). When the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 makes the door frame side transparent. The member is made to look as if it were a white member. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 can be applied in various ways. By using a white background that is easily dyed in a different color, it is possible to make it easy to be dyed with the world view of the game board and to prevent the world view of the game board from collapsing. In other words, even if the game board is replaced with respect to the door frame 3 installed in the game hall, it is mounted on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 as described above. When a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the door frame side transparent member formed on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is a white member. By making it look as if it exists, it is possible to make the world view of the replaced game board unsuitable.

In addition, as described above, the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, which employs the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, is coated with a white resist liquid. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist") formed by being coated, and is covered with the door frame side transparent member. Of the door-frame-side transparent members, for example, a transparent rotary operation section 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player are formed transparently, and act as an effect operation unit. Surfaces (mounting ) are arranged at positions that are easily visible to the player through the corresponding door frame side transparent member. The reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas it decreases as the color approaches black. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is not conspicuous. The writing part is hard to stand out. As described above, the surface-side notation part enables specification of the surface-side electronic components mounted on the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3. The part number of the electronic component, the attributes of the front electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front electronic component is placed (In addition, the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting orientation of the front electronic component (mounting direction), and may include the type of front-side electronic components).

On the other hand, as described above, the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of the power supply substrate 630 and the main control substrate 1310 are coated with a green resist solution (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid green coating”). A green resist layer is formed by the "resist of"), and the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is placed (In addition, The shape of the front-side electronic parts, the size of the front-side electronic parts, the mounting direction of the front-side electronic parts (mounting direction), and the model number of the front-side electronic parts.) are displayed in white. It is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with paint. The power board 630 is housed in a transparent power board cover 631 , and is exposed from the transparent power board cover 631 with a power switch 630 a for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 . The main control board 1310 is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320 and is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320 provided with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM. Since the power switch 630a is arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged in a position that is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, and the RAM clear switch is arranged on the rear side of the game board 5, so that the game can be played. It is placed in a position where it is difficult for people to see it.

The reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas it decreases as the color approaches black. For this reason, if the background is a color closer to black than white, the white will stand out. In the combination of green and white, if the background is green, the white will stand out. In some cases, the green surface-side marking portion stands out against the green resist. In other words, the white surface side marking portion (the white back side marking portion for the green resist) stands out against the solid green resist painted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310. .

In other words, since the power switch 630a and the RAM clear switch are arranged at positions that are difficult for the player to see, the combination of the white color of the paint printed by silk printing and the green color of the resist liquid is easily visible. Also, the surface-side markings such as electronic part numbers, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player, are not visible to the player through the transparent power supply board cover 631 and the transparent main control board box 1320 . On the other hand, a transparent rotary operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player are arranged at positions that are easily visible to the player. Because the combination of yellow paint printed by silk printing is not easy to see against the white color of the white, the rotary operation unit with a transparent surface side inscription such as electronic part numbers that has no relation to the game for the player 302 and the transparent pressing operation portion 303 can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, an effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided in the effect operation unit 300, a central button decoration board 376 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and a peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. , etc. is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, the transparent rotary operation part 302 that can be rotated by the player and the transparent pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player are used. is placed in a position that is easily visible to the player, and the yellow color of the paint printed by silk printing is not easy to see against the white color of the resist solution. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the surface-side notation portion such as an electronic part number that does not have a handle through the transparent rotary operation portion 302 and the transparent pressing operation portion 303 . Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

[White coating film formed on the surface of each decorative substrate provided on the game board and door frame]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, while a player is playing a game, when a game ball shot toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 is flowing down, it accidentally hits an obstacle nail together with other game balls. It may become clogged. In this state, when the player launches the game balls one after another toward the game area 5a, the game balls are piled up on the clogged game balls, and the game balls gather in a grape shape. In order to eliminate the state in which the game balls are gathered like grapes, the player calls an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall to remove the game balls that are gathered like grapes. An attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall called by the player opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, each decoration board provided on the game board 5 is displayed. In addition to performing control to turn off all the mounted LEDs, each movable body provided on the game board 5 is controlled to maintain the position at the time of opening regardless of whether it is operating or not. Control of the game board at the time". Along with such control of the game board at the time of opening, or instead of this, a specific LED among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the front surface (surface) of the sound decoration board 469 When the door frame 3 is equipped with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening regardless of whether it is operating Perform "control of the door frame when opening", which is to control so as to

Further, when game balls are clogged in the nose for supplying game balls of the island equipment in the game hall, the game balls from the island equipment in the game hall are not supplied to the pachinko machine 1, and the game balls are not paid out to the players. When the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, etc. shown in FIG. A staff member such as a store clerk is called to clear the clogged balls. An attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall called by the player opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, each decoration board provided on the game board 5 is displayed. Control is performed to turn off all the mounted LEDs, and control is performed to maintain each movable body provided on the game board 5 at the position at the time of opening regardless of whether it is operating or not. "Control of the game board at the time of opening" is performed. Along with such control of the game board at the time of opening, or instead of this, a specific LED among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the front surface (surface) of the sound decoration board 469 When the door frame 3 is equipped with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening regardless of whether it is operating or not. The above-mentioned "control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed.

When opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 or when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (that is, when opening the front frame), the control and / or opening of the game board at the time of opening When controlling the door frame at the time, a specific LED ( For example, all the LEDs 469a) except for the plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are turned off. The front surface (surface) of the substrate becomes visible through the game board-side transparent member, and/or specific LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469) are mounted. The front surface (surface) of each of the decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 except for the decoration substrate provided on the door frame 3 to be displayed can be visually recognized through the door frame side transparent member, and the player loses interest in the game. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 or when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 (that is, when the front frame is opened) Also, in a state in which the effect is progressing according to the schedule data, the player cannot see the progress of the effect at all. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) cannot be conveyed to the player, and the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) cannot be experienced. There is also a possibility that the period is made for the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the front surface (surface) of each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5 and each decoration provided on the door frame 3 adopting the configuration for countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. A plurality of LEDs (full-color capable of emitting multicolor When the LEDs are turned off, the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member are white members due to the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. It looks as if As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emits external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, external light of various colors is emitted from the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member to the outside. The world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is conveyed to the player so that the player can experience the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

When the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on, the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, but as described above, the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are provided with LEDs. Formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) mounted on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate are turned off. Due to the white coating film applied, the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member appear as if they were white members. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emits external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, external light of various colors is emitted from the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member to the outside. The world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is conveyed to the player so that the player can experience the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate (hereinafter referred to as "door frame 3 Of the door frame side transparent members that cover the white coating film formed on the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the "handle cover 185, the upper left decorative body 271 , plate upper right decoration 276, plate lower left decoration 281, plate lower right decoration 286, plate center upper decoration 312a, plate center lower decoration 312b, rotary operation unit 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decoration 404, the side window inner decoration 410b, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 are formed transparently. Of the game board side transparent member that covers the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decoration sheet 3112, the back lower left rotation decoration 3201, the back lower left decoration 3202, the back lower right rotation decoration 3251, the back Lower right decoration 3252, back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper front rotating decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back upper rear decoration 3451, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, back-left decoration 3521, back-right rotating decoration 3610, and back-right decoration 3621 are the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). Although it was different in that a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) were applied by printing along the . Plate upper right decoration 276, plate lower left decoration 281, plate lower right decoration 286, plate center upper decoration 312a, plate center lower decoration 312b, rotary operation unit 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door frame The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5 A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) may be printed by printing.

That is, among the door-frame-side transparent members covering the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, the handle cover 185, the upper-left plate decoration body 271, and the upper-right plate decoration Body 276, lower left plate decoration 281, lower right plate decoration 286, upper center plate decoration 312a, lower center plate decoration 312b, rotary operation unit 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door frame left side decoration The body 404, the side window interior decoration part 410b, the door frame right side decoration body 419, the door frame top decoration body 453, and the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5 are covered. Of the board-side transparent members, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decoration 3201, the lower left left ornament 3202, the lower right rotating ornament 3251, the lower right ornament 3252, the lower middle rotating ornament 3310, the back Top front rotary decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back top rear decoration 3451, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear left decoration 3521, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, and the rear right decorative body 3621, the same predetermined color (in this embodiment, pink ) may be applied by printing. In this way, the world view based on the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) can be further enhanced by making the connection between the door frame 3 and the game board 5 one. can be expressed. In other words, the related color (associative color) is applied to the door frame side transparent member and the game board side transparent member so as to conform to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). ) (For example, colors with gradation, colors related to sea, sky, space, colors related to animals and plants, colors related to vehicles, robots, colors related to sports, colors related to flames, rain, colors related to snow, Christmas, New Year, summer vacation, winter vacation, spring vacation , colors related to beaches, hot springs, ski resorts, etc.) or the same color is given to make the connection between the door frame 3 and the game board 5 one, and the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, , the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate (hereinafter referred to as "door frame 3 Door frame side transparent member (for example, handle cover 185, upper left decorative body 271 , plate upper right decoration 276, plate lower left decoration 281, plate lower right decoration 286, plate center upper decoration 312a, plate center lower decoration 312b, rotary operation unit 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decoration 404, the side window inner decoration 410b, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453) are formed transparent, but are different from the outline of the door frame side transparent member. A metallic decorative part (gold) with a metallic luster and a metallic decorative part (gold) with a metallic luster that has a planar design or a three-dimensional design on the surface of the transparent member on the door frame side are provided (formation do). In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is applied to the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be visually recognized through the door frame 3, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 becomes a white background, so that the color of the metal decoration part ( The eye is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member due to the attractiveness of the gold color. becomes. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member, and the white color formed on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 Visual recognition of the coating film can be made difficult. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate (hereinafter referred to as "door frame 3 Door frame side transparent member (for example, handle cover 185, upper left decorative body 271 , plate upper right decoration 276, plate lower left decoration 281, plate lower right decoration 286, plate center upper decoration 312a, plate center lower decoration 312b, rotary operation unit 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decoration 404, the side window inner decoration 410b, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453) are formed transparent, but are different from the outline of the door frame side transparent member. A metallic decorative part (gold) with a metallic luster and a metallic decorative part (gold) with a metallic luster that has a planar design or a three-dimensional design on the surface of the transparent member on the door frame side are provided (formation do). In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is applied to the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be visually recognized through the door frame 3, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 becomes a white background, so that the color of the metal decoration part ( The eye is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member due to the attractiveness of the gold color. becomes. As a result, even when the decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are used as a type of decoration visible to the player, the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member is eye-catching. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 . Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white resist is printed by silk printing on the front surface (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. Although the surface-side marking portion having yellow that enables the identification of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light can be visually recognized through the door-frame-side transparent member, the front surface (front surface) or top surface of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3. The front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion by the white coating film formed on the (surface) serving as a white background. Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decoration provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member, the surface side inscription is printed by silk printing in yellow, which is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration. Even if it is on the market, it is possible to obscure the existence of this yellow silk print.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration 3111 of the back rear movable decoration 3110 shown in FIGS. including the hologram portion in the first outline portion 3112a of the sheet 3112), the metal decoration portion 3310a of the back, bottom, middle, rotary decoration 3310 shown in FIG. 163, and the front cover of the back, front, left decoration unit 3710 shown in FIG. The metal decoration parts of each decoration provided on the game board 5, such as the metal decoration part 3711a in 3711 and the metal decoration part 3811a in the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 shown in FIG. 197, are all gold as a predetermined color. However, the metal decoration parts of each decoration provided on the game board 5 may be configured to have an opaque gold color as the predetermined color, or may be translucent ( It may be composed of a gold color that has translucency), or it may be composed of a mixture of opaque gold color and translucent gold color (having translucency) as a predetermined color. may be The same applies to the modifications shown below, and the metal decorations are all configured to have gold as the predetermined color. The color may be entirely opaque gold, the predetermined color may be translucent gold (having translucency), or the predetermined color may be opaque gold. It may be composed of a mixture of a gold color and a translucent (translucent) gold color.

[Deformation where a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a decoration sheet having a transparent area, etc., placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate, and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part) Example 1]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, as each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5, for example, the rear decorative substrate 3114 provided on the rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, the front surface (surface) of the sheet is composed of a transparent plate-like light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet having a translucent part (region) and a transparent part (region) toward the front. A shaped decorative sheet 3112 and a transparent plate-shaped decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and a decorative body 3111. The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metal decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster. The metal decoration portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). On the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114, as described above, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid white resist”) is applied. ), a white resist layer is formed by silk printing on the solid white resist, and the surface side notation part that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is printed in yellow on the solid white resist. have. For this reason, the color (yellow) of the surface-side notation portion is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Therefore, by further forming a metal decoration portion 3111d with metallic luster on the outer peripheral portion of the decoration body 3111, the entirety except for the metal decoration portion 3111d with metallic luster is formed colorless and transparent. It may be configured to surround the area.

In this case, a metal decoration portion 3111d having a metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral portion of the decoration body 3111, and the metal decoration portion 3111d is removed so as to surround the area where the entirety is colorless and transparent. 149) and the size and arrangement of other members related to these metal decorations 3111d may be changed as appropriate.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is replaced by the decorative body 3111 with metallic luster. The white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background, although it can be visually recognized through the transparent region excluding the metal decoration portion 3111d. Due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the portion 3111d, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is replaced by the metallic luster of the decoration 3111. Although it can be seen through the transparent area except for the metal decoration part 3111d with the The eye is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Become. As a result, even when the rear decorative substrate 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white resist is printed by silk printing on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The surface-side notation portion having yellow color that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light can be visually recognized through a transparent region of the decoration body 3111 excluding the metal decoration portion 3111d having metallic luster. However, since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background, the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 ( Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the surface) to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, the surface side description portion is printed in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d by silk printing. Even if it is printed, the presence of this yellow silk print can be obscured.

[Deformation where a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a decoration sheet having a transparent area, etc., placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate, and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part) Example 2]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, as each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5, for example, the rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, the front surface (surface) of the sheet is composed of a transparent plate-like light guide radiation plate 3113, a transparent portion (region) and a transparent portion (region). A shaped decorative sheet 3112 and a transparent plate-shaped decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and a decorative body 3111. The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metal decorative portion 3111d having metallic luster. The metal decoration portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). On the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114, as described above, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid white resist”) is applied. ), a white resist layer is formed by silk-printing on the solid white resist, and the surface-side labeling portion that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is printed in yellow. have. For this reason, the color (yellow) of the surface-side notation portion is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Therefore, in addition to the front-side marking portion, for example, a thick solid line or a figure having another shape surrounds the metal decoration portion 3111d. It may be configured to be printed in yellow on the resist by silk printing.

In this case, a figure having a thick solid line or other shape is printed in yellow by silk printing on a white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 so as to surround the metal decoration portion 3111d. 147 to 149, and the size and arrangement of other members related to these metal decorations 3111d may be changed as appropriate.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is replaced by the decoration body 3111 having a metallic luster. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background, although it can be visually recognized through the transparent region excluding the metal decoration portion 3111d. Due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the portion 3111d, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, the eye is attracted to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is replaced by the metallic luster of the decoration 3111. Although it can be seen through the transparent area except for the metal decoration part 3111d with the The eye is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Become. As a result, even when the rear decorative substrate 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white resist is printed by silk printing on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114. In addition to the surface-side notation part having a yellow color that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light, a figure having a thick solid line or other shape is included in the decoration body 3111 except for the metal decoration part 3111d with metallic luster. Although it can be seen through the transparent region, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 becomes a white background, so that the color (golden color) of the metal decoration portion 3111d is changed. ), the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Even if a figure having a solid line or other shape is printed in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d by silk printing, the existence of this yellow silk printing can be difficult to understand.

[Modified example in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is arranged at the joint of the transparent frame-side transparent member arranged in front of the substrate silk-printed in yellow]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate (hereinafter referred to as "door frame 3 The door frame side transparent member (for example, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decoration of the plate Body 276, lower left plate decoration 281, lower right plate decoration 286, top center plate decoration 312a, bottom center plate decoration 312b, left side door frame decoration 404, right side door frame decoration 419, and top door frame The decoration body 453) is transparent, but the joint between the left side of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the upper side of the door frame left side decoration body 404 (the left side of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the left side of the door frame) A metal decoration part (gold) with a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the part designed to appear to be connected to the upper side of the decoration body 404, and the bottom of the door frame left side decoration body 404 is provided (formed). Metallic luster at the joint between the side and the left side of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate (the portion designed so that the lower side of the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame and the left side of the upper left decorative body 271 of the door frame are connected) The joint between the right side of the upper left plate decoration 271 and the left side of the upper plate center decoration 312a (the right side of the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper center of the plate) is provided (formed). A metal decoration (gold) with a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the part designed to appear to be connected to the left side of the decoration 312a, and the right side of the plate center upper decoration 312a and the Metal with metallic luster at the joint with the left side of the upper right plate decoration 276 (the portion designed so that the right side of the upper right plate decoration 312a and the left side of the upper right plate decoration 276 appear to be connected) A decorative portion (golden) is provided (formed), and the joint between the right side of the plate upper right decorative body 276 and the lower side of the door frame right side decorative body 419 (the right side of the plate upper right decorative body 276 and the door frame right side decoration A metal decoration part (gold) with metallic luster is provided (formed) on the part designed to appear to be connected to the lower side of the body 419, and the upper side of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is provided (formed). and the right side of the door frame top decoration 453 (the part designed so that the upper side of the door frame right side decoration 419 and the right side of the door frame top decoration 453 seem to be connected). You may make it provide (form) the metal decoration part (gold) with . In addition, the joint between the right side of the lower left plate decoration 281 and the left side of the lower center plate decoration 312b (designed so that the right side of the lower left plate decoration 281 and the left side of the lower center plate decoration 312b appear to be connected) A metallic decorative portion (golden) with metallic luster is provided (formed) in the portion where the plate center is attached), and the joint between the right side of the plate center lower decoration 312b and the left side of the plate lower right decoration 286 (the plate center lower A metal decoration (gold) with a metallic luster is provided (formed) in the portion designed so that the right side of the decoration 312b and the left side of the plate lower right decoration 286 seem to be connected). good too. In this way, a metal decorative portion (gold) with a metallic luster is provided as a joint of the door frame side transparent member (a portion designed so that the adjacent door frame side transparent members are connected to each other). By (forming), this joint can be hidden.

[Modified example in which a gold material (glossy sheet member) is placed in front of a transparent game panel plate placed in front of a board silk-printed in yellow]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the center accessory 2500 is a flat plate-shaped flange that protrudes from the outer periphery of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as the center frame) and contacts the front surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. 2502, but a glossy sheet member having glitter that glitters in particles (gold or a color mixed with gold) is provided on the front surface of this flange portion 2502, and the back of this glossy sheet member A decoration substrate mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light may be arranged on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . The front surface (surface) of the decoration substrate is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . As for the positional relationship between the decorative substrate and the glossy sheet member, the glossy sheet member may cover all or part of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate when viewed from the front of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Alternatively, they may be arranged close to each other in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction without covering the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate at all. They may be spaced apart. The front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), which forms a white resist layer. A region indicating a part number corresponding to a full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) on a solid white resist. etc. are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. Also, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N having a gold color are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement so as to abut against the game balls. In this way, in front of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate, a glossy sheet member having glitter that glitters in particles (gold or a color mixed with gold) and a plurality of obstacle nails N having gold are arranged. Therefore, the presence of the decorative substrate is made difficult to understand by the attractiveness of the glossy sheet member having glitter that glitters in particles (golden or in a color mixed with gold) and the plurality of obstacle nails N having gold. Even if the color (yellow) of the surface-side inscription portion can be seen through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, it can be printed on the white resist solidly coated on the decorative substrate by silk printing. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the presence of the front-side notation portion printed in yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the glossy sheet member and the obstructing nail N).

[Modified example in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a transparent game panel board placed in front of a board silk-printed in yellow]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a decoration substrate mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light is arranged on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 and the decoration substrate are arranged. An inner lens that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member may be arranged between the . The surface of the inner lens has a lens cut applied to a part of a specific area or the entire area (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be refracted irregularly. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate arranged behind the inner lens. Also, the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . Regarding the positional relationship between the decoration substrate and the inner lens, the inner lens may be arranged to cover all or part of the front surface (surface) of the decoration substrate when viewing the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), which forms a white resist layer. A region indicating a part number corresponding to a full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) on a solid white resist. etc. are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. Also, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N having a gold color are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement so as to abut against the game balls. A plurality of gold-colored obstructing nails N are arranged in front of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate. It has no relationship with the surface side notation part of the color similar to the gold color of ) in terms of decoration. The presence of the decorative substrate can be made difficult to understand by the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstructing nails N, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the surface-side marking portion can be detected by the cut area of the inner lens. can be obfuscated.

[Modification 1: A gold material (metal decoration) is placed in front of a transparent member that is placed in front of a substrate silk-printed in yellow, and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided with a logo decoration body (logo decoration movable body) having a logo to operate. The logo decoration is composed of a transparent inner lens arranged behind a transparent front decoration, a decoration substrate arranged behind the inner lens, and a base member etc. arranged behind the decoration substrate. be. The front decoration has a transparent logo area (for example, the character part area of "ABC"), and other areas other than the logo area are formed as metallic decorations (golden) with metallic luster. there is In other words, the logo area is surrounded by the metallic decorative portion (golden) with metallic luster. The surface of the inner lens has a lens cut applied to a part of a specific area or the entire area (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be refracted irregularly. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate arranged behind the inner lens. The front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), which forms a white resist layer. A region indicating a part number corresponding to a full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) on a solid white resist. etc. are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. The presence of the decorative substrate can be obscured by the attractiveness of the gold color of the metallic decoration part with metallic luster, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the surface side marking part is indicated by the lens cut on the inner lens. can be obfuscated by the

[Modification 2: A gold material (metal decoration) is placed in front of a transparent member that is placed in front of a substrate silk-printed in yellow, and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided with a graphic ornament (graphic ornament movable body) having a predetermined figure to operate. The figure decoration is composed of a transparent inner lens arranged behind a transparent front decoration, a decoration substrate arranged behind the inner lens, and a base member etc. arranged behind the decoration substrate. be. The front decoration has a metal decoration (golden color) with metallic luster on the outer peripheral portion thereof, and a metallic decorative portion with metallic luster on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion). (Gold). Then, in this one region (for example, the central portion), in addition to the figure region (for example, the eyelid portion of the human eye, the mouth portion of the human body, the ear portion of the human body, letters, numbers, figures, and symbols) , etc., are formed as metal decorations (golden) with metallic luster. Furthermore, the front decoration has a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion) from the inside of the metallic decoration portion (gold) having a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion. A region extending to the outside of the metal decoration portion (gold) held is formed transparent. In addition, the front decoration body is formed in one area (for example, central part) from the inner side of the metallic decoration part (gold) with metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral part of one area (for example, central part). A transparent metal decoration portion (gold) is formed in an area extending to the outside of the outer peripheral portion of the area where the graphic area is to be formed. The surface of the inner lens has a lens cut applied to a part of a specific area or the entire area (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be refracted irregularly. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate arranged behind the inner lens. The front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), which forms a white resist layer. A region indicating a part number corresponding to a full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) on a solid white resist. etc. are printed with yellow paint by silk printing.

In other words, the front decoration has a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion) from the inside of the metallic decoration portion (gold) having a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion. A region extending to the outside of the metal decoration (gold) held is formed transparent, and a metal decoration (gold) with metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion). Since the area extending from the inside to the outside of the outer peripheral part of the area where the figure area is formed as a metallic decoration (gold) with metallic luster in one area (for example, the central part) is transparent, The transparent area is surrounded by a metal decorative portion (gold) with metallic luster. In this way, the presence of the decorative substrate can be obscured by the attractiveness of the gold color of the metal decorative portion with metallic luster, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the surface side marking portion can be made visible to the inner lens. It can be obscured by the cut areas.

[Modification example in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is arranged in front of a transparent member arranged in front of a substrate silk-printed in yellow and surrounds the gold material (metal decoration part)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided with a graphic ornament (graphic ornament movable body) having a predetermined figure to operate. The figure decoration is composed of a transparent inner lens arranged behind a transparent front decoration, a decoration substrate arranged behind the inner lens, and a base member etc. arranged behind the decoration substrate. be. The front ornamental body has a figure area (e.g., the eyelid part of the eyeball of the human body, the mouth part of the human body, the ear part of the human body, as well as a hexagon or octagon) in one area (e.g., the central part). It is formed as a metallic decorative portion (golden) with metallic luster, and a region surrounding this partial region is formed transparent. In other words, the metallic decorative portion (gold) with metallic luster is surrounded by the transparent area. In addition, when the front decoration is formed as a graphic area in one area (for example, the central part) as the eyelid of the eyeball of the human body, the metallic decoration (gold) with metallic luster is formed on the upper eyelid and the lower eyelid. The upper eyelid is opened from the lower eyelid, and the opened portion and other areas other than the upper eyelid and the lower eyelid are transparent. In other words, the upper eyelid and the lower eyelid, which are metallic decorations (golden) with metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent region. In addition, when the front decoration is formed as a figure area in one area (for example, the central part) as the mouth of the human body, the metal decoration part (gold) with metallic luster becomes the upper lip and the lower lip, and the upper lip is opened from the lower lip, and the opened portion and other areas except for the upper and lower lips are transparent. In other words, the upper lip and the lower lip, which are metal decorations (golden) with metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent region. In addition, when the front decoration is formed in one area (for example, the central portion) as a graphic area such as a human ear, a hexagon, or an octagon, the metal decoration (gold) with metallic luster is formed on the ear. (The inner region of the ear may be transparent, or translucent or opaque with a predetermined color (red, blue, black)), The hexagonal outer peripheral portion (the hexagonal inner region may be formed transparent, may be formed with a predetermined color (red, blue, black) with translucency, or may be formed opaque ), the octagonal outer peripheral portion (the octagonal inner region may be formed transparently, may be formed with a predetermined color (red, blue, black) with translucency, or may be formed opaquely. ), and regions other than the ears, hexagons, and octagons of the human body are transparent. In other words, the ears, hexagons, and octagons of the human body, which are metal decorations (golden) with metallic luster, are surrounded by transparent regions. The surface of the inner lens has a lens cut applied to a part of a specific area or the entire area (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be refracted irregularly. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate arranged behind the inner lens. The front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), which forms a white resist layer. A region indicating a part number corresponding to a full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) on a solid white resist. etc. are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. In other words, since the metallic decorative part (gold) with metallic luster is surrounded by a transparent area, the metallic decorative part (gold) with metallic luster is painted solidly on the front (surface) of the decoration substrate. It is in a state of being surrounded by the white of the white resist that has been applied. In this way, the presence of the decorative substrate can be obscured by the attractiveness of the gold color of the metal decorative portion with metallic luster, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the surface side marking portion can be made visible to the inner lens. It can be obscured by the cut areas.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the back-lower center rotating decorative body 3310 of the back-lower center effect unit 3300 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 201, in a state in which the back bottom middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the area where the back bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position) has a decoration substrate. Due to the lack of existence, it is no longer possible to perform light emission effects in this area. Therefore, in a state where the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position) in the area where the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position), and the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310 The front surface (front surface) of the decoration board may be arranged behind the back-bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310 so as to face the front of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) so as not to interfere. The front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), which forms a white resist layer. A region indicating a part number corresponding to a full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) on a solid white resist. etc. are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. When the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 exists at the standby position (original position), the front surface (surface) of the decoration board is covered with the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310, so that when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, I don't understand the existence of the decorative board at all.

However, as the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the decoration substrate arranged behind the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 gradually appears and becomes visible. Therefore, during the period from when the back and middle decoration unit 3320 starts to move to the raised position until it returns to the standby position (original position), the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration substrate is controlled to emit light. be done. As a result, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, so that the existence of the yellow surface side notation part printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board can be seen. can be made difficult. In addition, the yellow surface side notation part printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the decoration substrate is the metal The color is similar to the gold color of the decoration part 3310a, and even if the back-bottom middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the front surface (surface) of the decoration substrate remains the same as the back-bottom middle rotation decoration 3310. Since it can be arranged in the vicinity of the metal decoration part 3310a, the decoration substrate can be visually recognized by starting to move the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 to the raised position due to the attractiveness of the gold metal decoration part 3310a. Even in such a state, the yellow (color similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3310a) printed on the white resist solidly coated on the decoration substrate by silk printing is printed on the surface side. Existence can be obscured. In addition, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement so as to abut against the game balls. Even when the rear lower middle decorative body unit 3320 starts to move to the raised position and the decorative substrate is in a visible state, printing is performed by silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the decorative substrate. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the presence of the front-side marking portion of yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstructing nails N).

[Avoidance of Concentration of Arrangement of Surface Side Display Part Printed by Silk Printing]
Next, avoidance of concentration of arrangement of front side display portions printed by silk printing will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 270 . FIG. 270 shows a method of arranging a surface display unit that can specify a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of a decorative substrate and LEDs corresponding to each, and in the case of concentrated arrangement (part 1) (a), FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a case of distributed arrangement (Part 1) (b). Pads, through holes, lands, etc. are omitted from FIGS. 270(a) to (d). 270(a) to (d) are the decoration substrates provided on the game board 5, and the door frame 3 adopting the configuration for countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above. It is shown as an example of each decoration substrate provided.

The front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC is coated with a white resist liquid (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") to form a white coating film. A resist layer is formed, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) can be specified on the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC, corresponding to full-color LEDs. Attributes of electronic parts such as the part number to be used, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged (further, when including the shape of the electronic part, the size of the electronic part, the mounting direction of the electronic part (mounting direction), and the model of the electronic part ) is printed with yellow paint by silk printing.

First, considering the case where four full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front surface (surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC, four full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC. Areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating positions and part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. For example, as shown in FIG. 270(a), 270 (b ), the four full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 are distributed and arranged outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged. Let's consider the case of arrangement.

In addition, the positions where the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC in the case of concentrated arrangement and the front surface (surface) of the decoration substrate KC in the case of distributed arrangement ) are assumed to be the same as the positions where the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged in KCx are arranged.

In both the concentrated arrangement and the distributed arrangement, areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged, part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs, and other electronic components (resistors, capacitors, In addition to the IC, there are cases where connectors are included.) and are each printed with yellow paint by silk-screen printing, so the front surface (surface ) ratio to KCx (hereinafter referred to as “yellow occupancy”) is the same.

In addition, the area excluding the area printed by silk-printing with yellow paint (that is, the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC is printed by silk-printing with yellow paint. The ratio of the decoration substrate KC to the front surface (front surface) KCx (hereinafter referred to as "white occupancy") is larger than the yellow occupancy. In this way, the white occupancy rate in which white color occupies the surface of the decoration substrate KC by the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is obtained by part numbers KCn1 to KCn4, etc., where yellow is the front surface (surface ) Since it is larger than the yellow occupancy rate that occupies KCx, even when the decoration substrate KC (white coating film) is used as a kind of decoration that is visible to the player, it is printed by silk printing. To make it difficult for a player to notice the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 because the white color of the white paint film, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, is more visible than the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. can contribute to Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In the case of concentrated arrangement, the four full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 are concentrated in an area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions of the four full-color LEDs. Specifically, in the case of the concentrated arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is arranged below the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED1 is arranged, and the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is arranged below the area KCp2 showing the position where the full-color LED2 is arranged. The part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is arranged, the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED3 is arranged above the area KCp3 indicating the position where the full-color LED3 is arranged, and the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED3 is arranged above the area KCp4 showing the position where the full-color LED4 is arranged. , the part number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED 4 is arranged.

In this way, when the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are concentrated locally in the region surrounding all the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, even if it has a high reflectance, a reflectance decreased region where the reflection efficiency decreases is formed. In addition, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are locally concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to The presence of KCn4 is prominent.

In other words, in the case of the centralized arrangement, in the local area within the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged, the white color of the white paint film, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, and the In comparison, the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 catches the player's eyes more, and the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 is easily noticed. Therefore, there is a possibility that decorativeness may be deteriorated.

On the other hand, in the case of distributed arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are not concentrated but distributed outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged. are arranged as follows. Specifically, in the case of distributed arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is arranged in the upper left part of the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED1 is arranged, and the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is arranged in the upper right part of the area KCp2 indicating the position where the full-color LED2 is arranged. The part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged on the left side, and the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 is arranged in the lower left of the area KCp3 indicating the position where the full-color LED 3 is arranged, and the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 is arranged. A part number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED 4 is arranged on the lower right side of KCp4.

In this way, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are not locally concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions of the full-color LEDs 1 to 4, and the full-color LED 1 When the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are distributed outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the LEDs 4 are arranged, the part numbers corresponding to the four full-color LEDs Since the above-described lower reflectance region formed by KCn1 to KCn4 being concentratedly arranged is not formed at all, the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, but yellow part numbers KCn1 to A high reflectivity can be maintained by KCn4. In addition, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are dispersedly arranged outside the area surrounding the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 exist. is inconspicuous.

In other words, in a local area within the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged, the yellow occupancy rate is higher in the case of the concentrated arrangement than in the case of the distributed arrangement. (by the proportion of the local area of the front surface (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC in the area of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with yellow paint) is higher, whereas the case of distributed arrangement is higher. Compared to the one that adopted the case of concentrated arrangement, the yellow occupancy rate (the local area of the front (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC in the areas of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with yellow paint ) will be lower. In this way, in the local area within the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LED1 to LED4 are arranged, it is better to adopt the case of distributed arrangement than the yellow part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. The white color of the white paint film, which is a kind of decoration that is visible to the player, often catches the player's eyes, making it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

It should be noted that even if the distributed arrangement is employed, the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full color LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged corresponds to the four full color LEDs due to the arrangement of other electronic components. In some cases, one or two of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 must be placed, but even in this case, the yellow occupancy rate ( The area of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 respectively printed with yellow paint by silk printing is increased by the proportion of the local area of the front surface (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC.

In the case of distributed arrangement, the following rules may be provided as a method of arranging the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 270(b), for example, one full-color LED (which may be another electronic component) out of four full-color LEDs is selected as a reference, and the width of this selected one full-color LED is Use dimension and height dimensions. If the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 having the width dimension Nw and the height dimension Nh is selected as a reference, regions KCp1-KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1-LED4 are arranged are defined. First, the full-color LEDs 3 are arranged so that they are outside the surrounding area, and then the full-color LEDs 1 are arranged above the full-color LEDs 3 with a first distance Ph obtained by multiplying the height dimension Nh of the full-color LEDs 3 by a predetermined number. The LED 4 is arranged to the right of the full-color LED 3 with a second distance Pw obtained by multiplying the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 3 by a predetermined number, and the full-color LED 2 is arranged at a first distance obtained by multiplying the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 3 by a predetermined number. Ph and the second distance Pw obtained by multiplying the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 3 by a predetermined number is arranged above and to the right of the full-color LED 3 . It should be noted that the positions at which LED1, LED2, and LED4 are arranged may be the same value that is the above-described predetermined multiple times, or the values may be changed individually. It may be selected so as to be outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LED1 to LED4 are arranged.

Next, considering the case where two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front surface (surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC, two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC. and the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two adjacent full-color LEDs are printed with yellow paint by silk printing, for example, FIG. 270(c). , two full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers KCn1-KCn2 are placed near and above regions KCp1-KCp2 indicating positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are placed, that is, regions KCp1-KCp2 and parts In the case of concentrated arrangement in which the numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are concentrated in the vicinity, and as shown in FIG. Second, let us consider the case of a distributed arrangement in which two full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are respectively distributed and arranged.

In addition, the positions where areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where two full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC in the case of concentrated arrangement, and the front surface (surface) of the decoration substrate KC in the case of distributed arrangement ) are assumed to be the same as the positions where the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged in KCx are arranged.

In both the concentrated arrangement and the distributed arrangement, areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged, part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs, and other electronic components (resistors, capacitors, In addition to the IC, there are cases where connectors are included.) and are each printed with yellow paint by silk-screen printing, so the front surface (surface ) ratio to KCx (hereinafter referred to as “yellow occupancy”) is the same.

In addition, the area excluding the area printed by silk-printing with yellow paint (that is, the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) KCx of the decoration substrate KC is printed by silk-printing with yellow paint. The ratio of the decoration substrate KC to the front surface (front surface) KCx (hereinafter referred to as "white occupancy") is larger than the yellow occupancy. In this way, the white occupancy rate in which white color occupies the surface of the decoration substrate KC due to the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is determined by the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2, etc., where yellow is the front surface (surface ) Since it is larger than the yellow occupancy rate that occupies KCx, even when the decoration substrate KC (white coating film) is used as a kind of decoration that is visible to the player, it is printed by silk printing. To make it difficult for a player to notice the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 because the white color of the white paint film, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, is more noticeable than the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. can contribute to Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In the case of concentrated arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are arranged near and above the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, that is, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. KCn2 is concentrated and arranged. Specifically, in the case of the concentrated arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is arranged near and above the region KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED1 is arranged, and the position where the full-color LED2 adjacent to the full-color LED1 is arranged. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is arranged near and above the region KCp2 shown.

In this way, when the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are arranged in the upper vicinity of the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, the parts corresponding to the two full-color LEDs Since the numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are locally concentrated, the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white paint film, but the reflectance is high, but the reflection efficiency is reduced. A rate drop region is formed.

In other words, in the case of concentrated arrangement, in a local area near and above the areas KCp1-KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs 1-2 are arranged, a white coating, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, is applied. The yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 catches the player's eye more than the white color, and the player easily notices the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Therefore, there is a possibility that decorativeness may deteriorate.

On the other hand, in the case of distributed arrangement, two full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers KCn1-KCn2 are distributed at positions away from areas KCp1-KCp2 indicating positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. are placed. Specifically, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is arranged at the lower left of the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED1 is arranged, and the position where the full-color LED2 adjacent to the full-color LED1 is arranged. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is arranged on the lower right side of the area KCp2 shown.

In this way, when the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are arranged separately at positions away from the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, two full-color LEDs and Since the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are not locally concentrated at all, and the above-described reflectance decrease region is not formed at all, the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, but High reflectivity with yellow part numbers KCn1-KCn2 can be maintained. In addition, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are dispersedly arranged at positions apart from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to The presence of KCn2 is inconspicuous. Therefore, deterioration of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In the case of distributed arrangement, the following rule may be provided as a method of arranging the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 270(d), for example, one of the two full-color LEDs (which may be another electronic component) is selected as a reference, and the width of the selected full-color LED is Use dimension and height dimensions. When selecting a part number KCn1 corresponding to a full-color LED 1 having a width dimension Nw and a height dimension Nh as a reference, areas KCp1-KCp2 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1-LED2 are arranged are defined. The two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are distributed so that they are all outside the enclosing area, that is, at positions away from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. After arranging the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1, the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is placed at a second distance Pw' (the second 2 distance Pw' is greater than or equal to the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 1 so that at least the minimum length of the character string of the full-color LED 1 is separated.) corresponds to the full-color LED 1. It is arranged on the right side of the full-color LED1 away from the part number KCn1. In addition, the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged in another place along the vertical direction of the full-color LED 2 arranged to the right of the full-color LED 1 (for example, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED 2 adjacent to the full-color LED 1 is arranged. In the case where the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged on the upper right side of KCp2), a second distance Ph' obtained by multiplying the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 1 by a predetermined number for the vertical direction (the second distance Ph' is at least , the full-color LED 1 is separated from the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 by more than or equal to the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 1 so that the distance is the minimum character string height of the full-color LED 1. placed. In addition, the above-mentioned value of the predetermined number of times for the horizontal direction and the above-mentioned value of the predetermined number of times for the vertical direction may be the same value, or the values may be changed individually. . . , two full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 may be selected to be dispersedly arranged at positions away from the positions where LED2 is arranged.

In the case of distributed arrangement, as a method of arranging the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LEDs, for example, two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front surface (surface) KCx of the decoration board KC. , Of the two full-color LEDs, for one full-color LED, the other full-color LED is arranged in one of the upper right, lower right, upper left, and lower left of the one full-color LED. One of the full-color LEDs (which may be another electronic component) is selected as a reference, and the width dimension and height dimension of this selected one full-color LED are used. Since the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 can be spaced apart from each other by the second distance Pw' and/or the second distance Ph' described above, the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged are Two full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers KCn1-KCn2 can be distributed in positions away from the indicated regions KCp1-KCp2.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a decorative substrate on which light emitting means is mounted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). A decorative member covering the decorative board is arranged in front of the light emitting means provided in this gaming machine. By the way, if the decorative member is made of a transparent material, the color of the resist liquid applied to the surface of the decorative substrate is visible when the light emitting means is turned off, and the world view of the game machine is lost and the enjoyment is lost. There was a possibility that the interest in the game would decrease.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a board on which an operation unit is provided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-205304 (paragraphs [0106] to [0112] and FIG. 9)). This substrate was housed in the housing member. By the way, if the housing member is made of a transparent or translucent material, the electronic component number formed on the surface of the substrate on which the operating portion is provided can be seen through the housing member. However, since the electronic part number has absolutely nothing to do with the game for the player, there is a risk that if the electronic part number is visually recognized through the housing member, the world view of the game machine will be lost and the interest in the game will be reduced. there were.

In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a substrate on which a part number or the like is indicated by silk-screen printing (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-141683 (paragraph [0047], paragraph [0048], and FIG. 3)). . Some substrates are coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color to enhance the decorativeness of the substrate to have a high reflectance. However, if a substrate is used as a kind of decoration that is visible to the player, the silk print is also visible to the player, and there is a risk that the decorativeness will be reduced.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, it has the light emitting effect unit 5000 of FIG. 255 as a decorative member. 255 as a substrate, a light guide plate 5060 in FIG. 255 as a light guide member, a diffusion sheet 5050 in FIG. 255 as a transparent member, and a decoration body 5040 in FIG. 255 as a decoration body. . The LED board 5070 is mounted with an LED bare chip 5075 in FIG. 255 as a light emitting means. The light guide plate 5060 is arranged in front of the LED substrate 5070 and can emit light emitted by the LED bare chips 5075 forward. The diffusion sheet 5050 is arranged in front of the light guide plate 5060 . Decoration body 5040 is arranged in front of diffusion sheet 5050 . On the diffusion sheet 5050, at least at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having long bands in the left-right direction are applied as opaque regions on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 in FIG. is formed.

In this way, the light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075, which is a light emitting means, is emitted to the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member, through the light guide plate 5060, which is a light guide member. Five white strip regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having long strips in the left-right direction are formed on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, which is an opaque region, at a position corresponding to the LED bare chip 5075, which is the light emitting means. Therefore, the position where the LED bare chip 5075, which is the light emitting means, is mounted does not shine brightly in the decorative body 5040, which is a decorative body, like a point light source. Five white strip regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having strip shapes elongated in the left-right direction are used for softening. As a result, the surface 5060x, which is the surface of the light guide plate 5060, which is a light guide member, facing the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member, can be uniformly illuminated. It is difficult to give a sense of incompatibility to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the light emitting effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game. 249, and wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. . The metal wiring groove 1605 is conductive, and the wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise. The wiring routed in the space inside the groove formed by .theta.

The metal wiring groove 1605 is formed on the bottom inner surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. 250, which is the other side of the conductive member that does not face the electromagnetic noise generation source side, and has a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. A wiring routed to a space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is arranged on the bottom outer surface 1605d of the groove 1605a.

In this way, the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the second wiring member, is more resistant to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise than the wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member. The wiring routed in the space inside the groove is located on the bottom inner surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605, which is one surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 facing the electromagnetic noise generation source side. The metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member, is weaker in the influence of electromagnetic wave noise than the wiring arranged in the groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the second wiring member. The wiring routed in the formed space outside the groove is the bottom of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the other surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 not facing the electromagnetic wave noise generation source side. By being arranged on the outer surface 1605d, in the space affected by electromagnetic wave noise, the wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member, and the second wiring member A wiring routed in a groove space formed by a certain metal wiring groove 1605 can be arranged in a mixed manner. Therefore, it is possible to improve noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the flexible flat cable 5030 shown in FIG. 254 is provided as a planar wiring member. The flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel as a plurality of conductors including a ground line, which is a power supply line, and a control line, and covered with an insulating material. Flat conductors on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source of electromagnetic noise are arranged as ground lines, which are power lines. In other words, among the plurality of flat conductors including the ground line, which is the power line, and the control line, the ground line, which is the power line, is arranged between the source of the electromagnetic wave noise and the control line.

In this way, in the flexible flat cable 5030, which is a planar wiring member, a plurality of flat conductors, which are a plurality of conductors including a ground line that is a power supply line and a control line, are arranged in parallel. Among the plurality of flat conductors including the ground line and the control line, the ground line, which is the power line, is arranged between the source of the electromagnetic wave noise and the control line. It is possible to improve the noise resistance due to electromagnetic noise for flat conductors other than the flat conductors on both sides of the farthest side as the conductors on the farthest side. Therefore, it is possible to improve noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the door frame 3 shown in FIG. It has a plurality of LEDs 469 a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decoration substrate 469 . The door frame 3 is provided to be openable and closable, and a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 of the door frame top unit 450 are mounted on the upper front surface of the door frame 3 at predetermined positions. It is provided. The door frame top unit 450 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and can emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3 .

Specifically, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of a pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 are made of translucent resin, such as a diaphragm and a center cap. (for example, milky white polypropylene or the like), and the magnetic circuit part such as the magnet and the yoke is formed in a columnar shape having a through hole through which the vibrating part and the magnetic circuit part are inserted in the housing. held by the body. A plurality of openings are formed in the housing portion in the circumferential direction. The through-hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, but is open in the rear. On the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, there are four mounting portions formed on four board mounting bending plates (not shown) extending rearward from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 by a predetermined distance (approximately 18 mm in this embodiment). A decorative substrate 469 is attached. When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 , the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464 . It is arranged so as to face the rear surface, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged to cover the rear side of the magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464 .

When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light passes through the through holes of the magnetic circuit section formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464 and passes through the translucent center cap. is emitted, and light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, so that the top side speaker 464 can be decorated with lights. It's becoming Furthermore, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it is reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke that constitutes the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape). The back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are repeatedly turned, and the light is emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, that is, behind the top side speaker 464.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451b of the door frame top base 451, as described above. On the door frame top base 451, the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration board 469 is larger than the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration board 469 so that the acoustic decoration board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 at the position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached is exposed. Through holes 451ba having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed respectively. When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light is emitted rearward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, and the acoustic decoration board 469 emits light. and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, the light exits to the rear of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, as described above. In the door frame base 101, through holes 101k having a shape larger than or the same shape as the perimeter of the through holes 451b formed in the door frame top base 451 are located at positions corresponding to the left and right through holes 451b formed in the door frame top base 451. are formed respectively. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light is emitted rearward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, thereby producing an acoustic decoration. The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 passes through the gap between the outer periphery of the substrate 469 and the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and through the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. to the rear of the

In this way, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 of the door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3, and the door frame 3 Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3 are the directions of the door frame top unit 450. It is possible to visually recognize the notification mode by light emission of a plurality of LEDs 469 a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 . As a result, in the game hall, the sound decoration board of the door frame top unit 450 is displayed to the attendant such as the store clerk of the game hall passing through the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. A plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of 469 can transmit the notification mode. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the notification mode of the plurality of LEDs 469 a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 can be visually recognized from the front side and the rear side of the door frame 3 .

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the door frame 3 shown in FIG. It has a side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a speaker illumination unit composed of a transparent plate. The door frame 3 is provided so as to be openable and closable, and the speaker illumination unit is provided on the door frame 3 and can emit light in a manner different from normal when the pachinko machine 1 has an abnormality or malfunction. When the door frame 3 is in the open state, the door frame 3 is provided so that it can be visually recognized not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3 that it emits light in a manner different from the normal state. ing.

Specifically, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of a pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 are made of translucent resin, such as a diaphragm and a center cap. (for example, milky white polypropylene or the like), and the magnetic circuit part such as the magnet and the yoke is formed in a columnar shape having a through hole through which the vibrating part and the magnetic circuit part are inserted in the housing. held by the body. A plurality of openings are formed in the housing portion in the circumferential direction. The through-hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, but is open in the rear. On the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, there are four mounting portions formed on four board mounting bending plates (not shown) extending rearward from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 by a predetermined distance (approximately 18 mm in this embodiment). A decorative substrate 469 is attached. In this manner, the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the transparent plate are attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, thereby assembling the speaker illumination unit. In other words, the speaker electric decoration unit is composed of the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the transparent plate. When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 , the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464 . It is arranged so as to face the rear surface, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged to cover the rear side of the magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464 .

When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light passes through the through holes of the magnetic circuit section formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464 and passes through the translucent center cap. is emitted, and light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, so that the top side speaker 464 can be decorated with lights. It's becoming Furthermore, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it is reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke that constitutes the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape). The back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are repeatedly turned, and the light is emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, that is, behind the top side speaker 464.

The peripheral control board 1510 detects an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jams in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guide unit 570, and payout device 580, etc., detection of fraud, opening of the door frame 3, main body Opening of the frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (malfunction related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.)) (hereinafter referred to as may be described as "occurrence of an abnormality or defect."), light emission data, which is a notification mode different from the normal mode described above, is mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown). In addition, in the light emission mode of the production mode (normal time), it is a variety of light emission modes that combine lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. In the notification mode (mode different from normal time), This is a light emission mode in which the other color (in this embodiment, red) is lit with the maximum luminance.

In the conventional game machine, when the door frame 3, which is the front frame, is in an open state, it is possible to visually recognize light emission from the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 (forward) to inform the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or a problem. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to visually recognize the light emitted from the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3 (rear side) to inform the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction. In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the door frame 3 is opened, the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction is externally detected from both the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. The notification light emission can be visually recognized (that is, the occurrence of an abnormality or defect can be notified to the outside in a new manner in both the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. ). As a result, in the game hall, from both the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3, the occurrence of abnormalities and troubles to staff such as store clerks of the game hall is prevented. It can be transmitted quickly, and the work efficiency of the game hall can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a lottery is performed based on the result of the starting condition, the symbols are variably displayed based on the results of the lottery, and the symbol variability is displayed as a predetermined result. A gaming machine for awarding a specific game profit to a player by deriving a winning variation result, the gaming machine comprising a game board provided with a symbol display device for performing variable display of the symbols, and the game board. a frame, a front frame that is openable and closable with respect to the frame, detection means for detecting an open/closed state of the front frame, and detection means provided on the front frame for detecting the open state of the front frame. and a front frame light emitting means capable of emitting light in a special mode different from the normal time based on the above.

Specifically, for example, as a starting condition, the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in FIG. 111, and in the main control board 1310 in FIG. For example, a lottery for a special lottery result that generates a "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability variation) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit") is performed. The main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 111 based on the result of the lottery, and uses a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal to perform a symbol variation display. An advantageous game state (for example, "big hit", "medium win", "minor win", "probability") that is advantageous to the player by deriving a predetermined winning variation result as a special lottery result that is a result of symbol variation display. Variable (probable variation) per", "time reduction (time reduction) per") can be given. A game board 5 having a function display unit 1400 for performing variable display of patterns, a main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 10 as a frame on which the game board 5 shown in FIG. 10 as a front frame, a door frame open switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 as a detection means for detecting the open/closed state of the door frame 3, and a door frame 3 provided with, Based on the detection of the open state of the door frame 3, the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, and the acoustic decoration board 469 shown in FIG. , and a speaker illumination unit composed of a transparent plate. In addition, in the light emission mode of the production mode (normal time), it is a variety of light emission modes that combine lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. In the notification mode (mode different from normal time), This is a light emission mode in which the other color (in this embodiment, red) is lit with maximum luminance.

Further, the front frame light-emitting means comprises a light-emitting board having a light-emitting section mounted on a board surface facing the front side of the gaming machine, and the light-emitting section mounted on the light-emitting board emits light in the special mode. At least a part of the periphery of the light emitting substrate so that the fact that the light emitting portion emits light in the special mode can be visually recognized not only from the front of the front frame but also from the rear of the front frame The light emitting portion is arranged to leak light.

Specifically, for example, speaker bracket 463 which is a front frame light emitting means, top side speaker 464, acoustic decoration board 469, and a speaker illumination unit composed of a transparent plate is a board facing the front side of pachinko machine 1. It consists of an acoustic decoration board 469 as a light emitting board on which a plurality of LEDs 469a are mounted as a light emitting part. LED 469a emits light in the notification mode not only from the front of the door frame 3 as the front frame but also from the rear of the door frame 3 as the front frame. A plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light.

Further, when the open state of the front frame is not detected, the front frame light emitting means emits light for predetermined effects based on a variation pattern set when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. At a position corresponding to the rear side of the front door light emitting means when the front frame is in the closed state, a light reflecting portion (white printed portion, metal member) capable of reflecting light leaked from the light emitting portion forward is provided. .

Specifically, for example, the speaker illumination unit composed of the speaker bracket 463, which is the front frame light emitting means, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the transparent plate is used as the front frame when the door frame 3 is open. When it is not detected (when the payout control MPU detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, it transmits a door frame opening command to the main control board 1310 to notify that effect. However, when the main control board 1310 does not receive this door frame open command), the main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400, and the pattern is changed using a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal. Main control board 1310 transmits to peripheral control board 1510 a command corresponding to a variation pattern set when the pattern is to be variably displayed. Based on the clock signal, the light emission data that becomes the light emission mode of the production mode is output to the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 to turn on, off, blink, and gradation lighting. A light emitting part is mounted on the acoustic decoration board 469 at a position corresponding to the back of the speaker illumination unit when the door frame 3 as the front frame is in the closed state. 10 (a white printed portion having a high emissivity or a color close to white) and metal fasteners FT (metal gloss A metal member having a

Further, the covering portion constituting the back side of the light emitting substrate is a transparent member, and the light leaked from the light emitting portion is visible from behind the front frame through (through) the transparent member.

Specifically, the speaker electric decoration unit is composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration substrate 469, and a transparent plate. The plate is a transparent member, and light leakage from the plurality of LEDs 469a of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 can be visually recognized from behind the door frame 3 through the transparent plate, which is a transparent member.

Further, a plurality of light emitting substrates constituting the front frame light emitting means are provided, and at least one of the plurality of light emitting substrates is provided on the open end side of the front frame.

Specifically, the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration board 469 as the front frame light emitting means, and the acoustic decoration board 469 as the light emitting board constituting the speaker electric decoration unit composed of the transparent plate are the pachinko machine 1. are arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front. At least one of the acoustic decoration substrates 469 is arranged on the upper right side of the door frame 3 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and is provided on the open end side of the door frame 3. As a result, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened, the light emitted from the rear side of the door frame 3 can be easily recognized visually.

Further, a plurality of the light emitting substrates constituting the front frame light emitting means are provided, and the light reflecting portions are provided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting substrates.

Specifically, the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration board 469 as the front frame light emitting means, and the acoustic decoration board 469 as the light emitting board constituting the speaker electric decoration unit composed of the transparent plate are the pachinko machine 1. are arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, and the reflective sheet 1000a of FIG. 10), a reflective sheet 1000a is arranged in the upper left area of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the sound decoration board 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and the light reflecting part shown in FIG. The metal fastener FT arranged in the upper right region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 is located at a position corresponding to the sound decoration board 469 on the right side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. 5 in the upper right region of the front component 1000 .

Further, the light reflecting portion is a white printed portion provided on the game board and provided outside the game area of the game board.

Specifically, a reflective sheet 1000a (a white printed portion having a white color or a color close to white with a high emissivity) in FIG. It is a white printing part provided in.

The white printed portion has a larger area than the light emitting substrate. Specifically, the surface area of the reflective sheet 1000a is larger than the area of the front surface (surface) or rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front.

The light reflecting portion is a metal member provided on the frame. Specifically, the metal fastener FT arranged in the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in FIG. 10 as the light reflecting portion is made of metal (metal member) and has a luster. .

[Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 276. FIG. 271 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 271, and FIG. 273 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. 274 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing, and FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation Display processing will be described.

[various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big win game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination for use in determining the initial value of this special random number A decision random number, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot gaming state, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A variable display pattern random number for use in determining a variable display pattern of special symbols to be variably displayed on the symbol display device, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbols and minor winning symbols derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the winning type), and a random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. etc are provided. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the reception of the game ball of the second start port 2004, and this normal symbol hit determination An initial value determination random number for determination of a normal symbol hit for use in determining the initial value of the random number, and a normal symbol for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs a high-speed preselection based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an "initial value updating type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, various kinds of data stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the processing when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the information regarding the information as numerical values is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off). When clearing except for a specific area out of all areas of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match, the initial value determination random number for normal design per judgment is from the non-volatile RAM that the main control MPU incorporates An ID code is taken out, and an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal symbol based on the taken out ID code is executed, and the derived fixed value is It is designed to be set. That is, the initial value determination random number for determining a normal per symbol is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU. The first security measure is to prevent the ID code from being rewritten using an external device once the ID code is stored. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by execution is taken to prevent analysis by taking a two-step security measure.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the taken out ID code as the initial value determination random number for determining the normal per symbol will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for illegally obtaining and updating the random number for normal pattern hit determination coincides with the normal pattern hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval, and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed so that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004. game state cannot be generated.

[Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU is circuit-configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 271 and 272, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main-control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the blackout warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a blackout warning signal is input from the blackout monitoring circuit. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed and the RAM clear switch is operated. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14 is extremely short. The player turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch.

When the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU makes it possible to execute RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) is to be erased. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and detects whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Then, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. 1311a is turned ON, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. The main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. It is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied by determining that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. and/or it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON by the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not established.

When the main control MPU determines in step S18 that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, it sets the value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S18 that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, it sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current set value (set key cylinder of the set key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU (a set value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later). is a flag that indicates whether or not it is permitted to change the setting of the set value of the set value 1 to set value 6 at the time of the first ON operation, and the setting value is changed. It is set to a value of 1 when it is permitted to change the setting, and is set to a value of 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. In addition, since the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510 at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 is controlled by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU ) can receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, it returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and set to a value of 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

In the determination of step S25, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, when it is not permitted to change the setting of the setting value. (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when various information is not erased. In the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines that various information is not to be erased, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not ended normally, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described later in detail, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

The pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is shifted from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). After turning clockwise by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b in the determination of step S18 described above, and sets according to the setting key ON signal. By determining that the setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the value 1 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above. , it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 1 in the determination of step S25 described above, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change of step S37 described later is performed. Following the process, in the process of step S38 to be described later, by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed ( Hereinafter, it will be described as "first RAM error cancellation method").

As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch. is started. The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch has been operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination of S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1, that is, various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are cleared. By clearing the RAM error, it is possible to proceed with the game by canceling the RAM error (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error canceling method").

Thus, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, an error is displayed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM If there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM (or it is unreliable), there are two canceling methods: the first RAM error canceling method and the second RAM error canceling method. It can be done by As a result, when there is no need to change the settings of the set values, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has ended normally, the main control built-in A working area of the RAM is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is irradiated to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU itself resets and then returns.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of subsequent various processes, so that the main control side power failure processing (to be described later) ends normally and the backup flag BK- If FLG is not set to 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when the setting value is permitted to be changed, the main control MPU executes the setting change process. (Step S37). In this setting change processing, which will be described in detail later, based on the detection signal from the setting change button of the setting change board 1311, every time the push operation section of the setting change button of the setting change board 1311 is pressed, , the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. Based on, the changed set value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, the main control internal RAM are cleared except for the specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area). In this embodiment, when the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, and when the setting change process ends, the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" includes a setting value dedicated area in which setting values are stored, and an out port 2010, a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port provided in the game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5. 2012, and an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by 2012 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores set values to be changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball count dedicated area stores the out hole 2010, the first sub-out hole 2011, and the first sub-out hole 2011 that are counted in the ball number counting process described later. A counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012 is stored.

In addition, the main control MPU may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, the main control MPU, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch instructs the RAM clear and erases various information, when the sum value does not match, or when the main control side power supply When the shutdown processing is not normally completed, a counter that retrieves a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU and updates the random number for judging a normal pattern based on the retrieved ID code. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range is performed, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number described above. Set to random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value. Further, the main control MPU progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer set value is set in the WDT control register") to activate the main control built-in WDT and start counting time until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built into the main control MPU ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the clocked time reaches the time set by the timer set value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is stored in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU in order to update the hardware. Along with making settings such as latching and acquiring, settings such as activation of the hard random number circuit incorporated in the main control are set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and the predetermined When all the values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. successively extract the other values in the , without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. A random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). Create a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and use it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. memorize to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. be. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S54, when the main control MPU judges that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU performs non-hit-or-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers, normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU, for example, outputs drive signals to various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, the base monitor, etc. Stop (step S62).

After step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power failure processing, and the main control side power ON processing is executed again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing is not stored immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is applied due to the fact that the main control side power failure processing is not executed. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power failure processing is executed at the time of power failure, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when restarting after forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. There is no way that the value (sum value) and the value (sum value) match, and the checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Further, when it is determined in step S25 that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is permitted to change the setting value, setting change processing is performed in step S37, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1). When it is determined that the various information should be erased, in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the setting value is changed and determined. When changing the settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability variation (probability variation)). state, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information described above before the start of the next business. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation unit. Also, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information etc. from the main control built-in RAM.As described above, the setting key can change the set value as well as the current setting Since it is an important key that can be used to check the setting values, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people. is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a staff member such as a game hall clerk can delete (clear) the game backup information from the RAM By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the clear switch, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby process in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. DC +5 V is applied for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as a DC +5V to the island of the game hall. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the waiting time (boot timer) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). 2.5 seconds is set.), and just before reaching the standby time, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. is applied as DC +5V, within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control-side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a game hall clerk or other attendant, and even if the game hall clerk or other attendant does not indicate the intention of clearing the RAM, the memory is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the game backup information described above is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the game cannot be progressed. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize number information output determination counter) can be prevented from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, supplies game information and other information (e.g., the number of main prize balls) according to the progress of the game. Information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), which is a backup process for storing various information including the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process when the main control side power is turned off, which is composed of an infinite loop, is performed by the main control board. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, the main control MPU of the main control MPU, when it restarts, receives the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT causes the main control MPU to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power restoration, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is performed. is repeated, the game cannot be progressed.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). By blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output determination A mechanism was adopted in which updating of various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for use) can be avoided. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output judgment (Information indicating the value of the counter for use, etc.)) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and Other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls) and other information are not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls)) are reliably prevented from being changed. is now possible.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, power is turned on (power restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, create a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and built in the main control as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting solenoid 2415 and information instructing the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. . Here, first, the main control return destination command at power-on includes information instructing the driving state of the starter solenoid 2415 and information instructing the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. Problems in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on is not set to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described.

For example, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2418 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the first big prize winning port 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member, or when the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven and the second big prize winning port 2006 is opened by the opening and closing member, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the main control board 1310 detects the momentary power failure or power failure based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. is restored to the game state immediately before the occurrence of , the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven, the first big winning port 2005 is closed by the opening and closing member, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven. The state in which the second big winning port 2006 is closed by the opening/closing member is shifted to the state in which it is open.

However, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will not operate the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and returned, the jackpot game state It is not possible to indicate at all which round of That is, for example, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402, the number of the game balls entering the first big winning hole 2005 is counted as one big winning hole. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the first big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of played game balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the first big winning port 2005 opens and closes as an opening member Mainly a large winning prize opening 1 closed display command instructing a transition from an open state to a closed state by (that is, starting to close the first large winning prize port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 between rounds). Transmission from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to open the first big winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the opening/closing member (that is, the opening of the fifth round of the first big prize hole 2005 is started). It is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that tells the player that the movable piece is open) When the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2415 to open the movable piece to open the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state, and when power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 resets the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, so that the start opening solenoid 2415 is started to drive and the movable piece is closed. A transition is made to a state in which the second start port 2004 is closed.

However, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, it becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In such a case, the game state is returned to the second start port 2004 as the game state when the power is restored so that the game ball can be accepted. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. There is also a problem that the player does not understand what kind of game should be played.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the command at power-on A counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the first big prize winning port 2005 is closed by the opening and closing member. Since it is possible to tell the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition to the open state is possible, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen specifying that it is 4 rounds of the jackpot game state (that is, how many rounds ) can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but in the jackpot game state, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started and the first big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member. A screen that tells the player that the screen) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player seated in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to enter a game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above-described example, in a state in which a game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and a game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then When power is restored to , a screen ( For example, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the message "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second start opening." It is possible to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored by displaying it in the display area.

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 side can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off processing even once, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison judgment, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the state command at the time of power-on classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at the time of power-on, and the main prize number information at the time of power-on By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the main prize ball when the power is turned on. Only three commands, namely, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands first transmit a power-on state command, then transmit a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then transmit the number of main prize balls when power is turned on. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure) when the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is cleared. When the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the above-mentioned low Information indicating which state (probability and time-saving state) to return from among probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state, low probability non-time-saving state, and high probability non-time-saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine It consists of information and Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times ), it is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which probability fluctuations occur in the state of being played.

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, in order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on A counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by looking at the inspection monitor, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 271 and 272 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 273 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input or not. . Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. Then, when the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU detects, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, and the detection from the second starting opening sensor 2401. signal, the detection signal from the first big prize winning hole sensor 2402, the detection signal from the second big prize winning hole sensor 2601, the detection signal from the out hole sensor 3053, the first sub-out hole sensor 2403, and the second sub-out hole sensor 3054, Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame open switch 4a, detection signals from the body frame open switch 4b, and from the setting key switch 1311a. , the signal from the setting switching button, and the payout control board 633 that tells that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. It is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding starting opening winning command classified into others is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start sensor 3052, a start win prize command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start sensor 2401 When there is a detection signal, a start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In the present embodiment, when the switch input processing is started, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing). , are read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is not the same, it is read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or as if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the states in which all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) are checked for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general prize winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first A detection signal from the big winning hole sensor 2402, a detection signal from the second big winning hole sensor 2601, a detection signal from the out hole sensor 3053, the first sub-out hole sensor 2403, and the second sub-out hole sensor 3054, the magnetic sensor 2404, Detection signals from 2602 and 3055, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame opening switch 4a, detection signal from body frame opening switch 4b, signal from setting key switch 1311a, setting It is possible to increase the reliability of the payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received the signal from the switching button and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone idle terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of the various input ports. based on When the main control MPU judges that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is divided into a notification display to inform that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win-loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-hitting random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to win/lose determination (win/lose determination), each counter counts up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win-lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs ball number counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the outlet sensor 3053 is input, and the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 is entered. When the out-port sensor 3053 detects game balls collected by the provided out-port 2010, the value of the collected ball counter for counting the number of game balls collected by the out-port 2010 is incremented by 1. (Increment) operation is performed, and the detection signal from the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is input, and the game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5 are displayed in the first position. When the sub-out port sensor 2403 detects, the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011 is added (incremented) by 1, and When the detection signal from the second sub-out port sensor 3054 is input and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects the game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5 adds (increments) the value of a recovered ball counter that counts the number of game balls recovered through the second sub-out port 2012 by 1 (increments). That is, in the ball counting process, the out-port sensor 3053 detects game balls collected by the out-port 2010, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 detects game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011, and the second When the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012, a calculation is performed to add 3 to the value of the collected ball counter. The main control MPU uses the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the game balls recovered by the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012. This is stored in an out-ball counting dedicated area in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control MPU determines that when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by 10, that is, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10. Each time, a ball recovery command is created to notify that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. It should be noted that the main control MPU, when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value is 65535) and further adds (increments) the value of the recovered ball counter by 1 to the value of the recovered ball counter, The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value of 0, and an operation to add from this value of 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first big prize hole 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is 10. , the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this Self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the payout control board 633 does not input the payer ACK signal to inform that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command within a predetermined time. A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633 .

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information. , a main award number information output command classified as other is created to convey that effect, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the above-described input information storage area. Various winning openings such as one starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, and first big winning opening 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on game board 5") Based on the game ball entered The number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process of step S108, the memory is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. there is In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read out. is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of 10. (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize number information output command is created to notify that effect, and as transmission information In addition to storing in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding prize balls is checked. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation counter is incremented by one. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time radio wave irradiation is determined in the fraudulent act detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraud detection processing. ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when detection signals from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, and 3055 are input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as ) is being performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by one. The value of this magnet counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. A value of 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnetic goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraudulent act detection processing. ), a magnet informing command classified into informing display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnetic goto with such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can discover the magnetic goto at an early stage. It's becoming

In addition, in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection from the first big winning hole sensor 2402 or the second big winning hole sensor 2601 is performed when the game is not in the jackpot game state. When a signal is input (when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006), etc., when an abnormal winning occurs in the big winning hole, it is classified as an abnormal state into a notification display. A winning abnormality display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and/or the magnet goto are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud, while the radio wave emission goto and the magnet When no fraud is detected, the value 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as no fraud is detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and is set to 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. Further, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning of a large winning opening, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing enable signal setting process (step S113). In this shooting permission signal setting process, the logic of the shooting permission signal that tells the shooting control section 633b of the payout control board 633 that the shooting of the game ball B is allowed is set. Specifically, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0 based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, the main control MPU determines that fraud has not been detected. Sometimes, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. is detected, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU reads the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, receives a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a to open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4. When the door frame open switch 4a detects that the door frame open switch 4a is open, the body frame open switch 4b detects that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by inputting a detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b. In this case, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the firing permission signal is set after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic is set until the start of the firing.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is Obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and set this obtained random number as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is determined (determines the hit type) whether it matches with any of the hit type determination values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are due to the first start opening sensor 3052, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the determination results (lottery results) are the second start opening sensor 2401 If it is due to, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-described random number for the variable display pattern. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 to light up the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands classified as related to big wins (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1 closing display command, big win game state, etc.) Winning mouth 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or, for example, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is driven to open and close the opening and closing member. The output of the signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of times (round) that the first big prize winning port 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two times, the round of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp of the display is set so as to light the 2nd round display lamp of the display, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15 round display lamp to light the 15 round display lamp of the round indicator, store it in the output information storage area as output information, or light the presence or absence of time saving in a predetermined color The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as the output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per judgment random number is extracted and incorporated into the main control as normal winning opening winning prize information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

0th section to 3rd section (four sections) are provided in this normal winning opening winning information storage area, and the normal winning opening is provided in order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening Winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage and the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning entry winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information of the third section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage. After shifting, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning entry winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning prize winning information in the second region of the normal winning prize information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning prize information storage, and the normal winning prize winning prize information in the second section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening prize information storage become empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is regarded as a reserved ball, and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 In order to light up the suspension indicator, the output of the lighting signal for the normal suspension indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol per determination is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 by opening the movable piece, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-described transmission information storage is performed as transmission information. In addition to storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging normal symbol hit matches the normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and transmitted. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting solenoid 2415 is set to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the value of the random number for judging the symbol per pattern does not match the judgment value of the normal per symbol pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. , Creating various commands classified into normal pattern synchronization production related, storing as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and lighting the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause it to be set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of winning a normal prize) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs setting value confirmation display processing (step S117). In this setting value confirmation display process, which will be described in detail later, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area and, based on this input information, the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected. A detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b and a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder is rotated to turn off the setting key switch 1311a). position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the external position to be turned on. By judging that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the frame 2 and judging that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. is established, while it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key is determined by the setting key ON signal. By determining that the setting key of the switch 1311a is not turned ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not established. In the setting value confirmation display process, when the setting value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal is generated to display the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. is stored as output information in the output information storage area, and if the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process ends and returns to this routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU, for example, from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the main payout control board 633 Or output a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2418 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member of the first big winning opening 2005 when it is in the jackpot game state, or a movable piece for opening and closing the second start opening 2004 In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2415 that performs the opening and closing operation, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as information output signal, time saving information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. are output to the payout control board 633, firing permission logic or firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, and displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012. A display signal is output to the base monitor, and a lighting signal is output for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands that are classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, and are classified into jackpot related Various commands (for example, when detecting a game ball entering the first big winning hole 2005, based on the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2402, the big winning hole 1 corresponding to the big winning hole count command count display command), various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to general-purpose diagram synchronization effects, various commands categorized as normal electric role-related effects, various commands as categorized as notification displays, and status display commands. Various commands classified, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 can control prize balls based on game balls entered into various winning holes provided on the game board 5). Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558 as main prize number information. main prize number information output command, etc.), and various commands classified by specific history (for example, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 is 10) A ball recovery command that tells that every time it reaches, a setting change command that tells that the setting value has been changed, and the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable) ), and a setting key ON operation command for confirming the set values stored in the set value dedicated area described later in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. As described above, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. The main-circumference serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU transfers at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main-circumference serial data. can be done. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation settings of the command to be performed, the power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize number information output judgment counter when power is turned on Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the order of the status, mode, and sum value that constitutes the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the output determination counter notification command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

It should be noted that every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10, if a ball recovery command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to that effect, the peripheral The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the control board 1510 counts the number of game balls recovered from the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 for each received ball recovery command. Updated with the ball recovery information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (the counted value (that is, the total number of game balls recovered from the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012)). date and time) is updated. It should be noted that if the ball recovery command cannot be received and the pachinko machine 1 is powered off after the business hours of the game hall are over, the last counted value (that is, the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011 and the total number of game balls collected at the second sub-out port 2012) is stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) in association with the updated date and time. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 stores and retains the ball recovery information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is generated again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball collection history information. It should be noted that the counted value to be stored as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and terminates this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. When power is turned on, a main control return destination command at power-on instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine, is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It can be output. In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on process on the main control side shown in FIG. In order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of , a power-on state command classified as power-on, When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command and when the power is turned on, the main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 of this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on state command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value constituting the counter notification command for determining the output of the main winning ball number information at power-on. are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. , main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when the power is turned on. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at the time of power-on, are sent as the main peripheral serial data to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. Then, transmit to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then output main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[Setting change processing]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current setting value as shown in FIG. 274 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU obtains the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total. This is the same processing as the calculation of .

Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power-off processing (when power is turned off) in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). When the main control MPU determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S206). The determination of step S204 and the determination of step S206 are the same as the determination of step S30 and the determination of step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 271, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power failure processing described later. A flag indicating whether or not data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. be done.

When the main control MPU determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off processing has not ended normally, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be set and changed. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination of step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU determines that the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 are set values 1 to 6, which are within the normal range. It is determined whether or not it is in any of the values, and when it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines that it is out of the normal range in the determination of step S208, it sets the set value 1, which is the initial value, to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6. However, the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process of step S210 may proceed to set the setting value 1, which is the initial value, to the setting value obtained in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU When the MPU determines that it is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button, and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is input, and determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not input. determine that it is not.

When the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the setting switching button has been operated, it updates the setting value by adding (incrementing) the value by 1 (step S218). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs to the setting indicator 1310g a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting indicator 1310g, and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU judges that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU judges whether or not the decision key has been operated (step S222). ). In this judgment, the main control MPU sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. When the key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key cylinder is rotated from the rotational position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Rotation position) is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and it is further turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it back to the second turning on position. 1311a determines that the decision key has been operated based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and determines that the decision key has been operated when the decision key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a; When the determination key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the determination key has not been operated.

When the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the decision key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 to determine whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. When the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the setting switching button has been operated, the main control MPU performs steps S218 and S220 again, determines step S222, and determines that the enter key has not been operated. When the determination is made, the process returns to the determination of step S216, and each time the setting switching button is operated, the setting value is updated by adding 1 to the setting display 1310g until the enter key is operated. , and if the setting switching button is not operated, the setting value updated by operating the setting switching button immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is used by the main controller. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the determination in step S222 determines that the decision key has been operated, the main control MPU stores the updated set values in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area , the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After completion of the process of step S224, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated set values when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occur are stored in the main control built-in RAM. is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of

Following step S224, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this judgment, the main control MPU moves the setting key cylinder from the initial position (that is, setting key 1311a) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the switch 1311a. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when determining in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting values are hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

After step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). This setting change permission flag CS-FLG is, as described above, the current set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the first ON state). A flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change of setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time of operation), and when permitting setting change of setting value It is set to a value of 1, and to a value of 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value. In the processing of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting change of the setting values thereafter.

After step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). "Normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. A determination is made as to whether or not it is in any of the range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, that set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command to set transmission information (step S236), Subsequently, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting of step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S238 prior to the serial communication initial setting of step S44. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, but this is prioritized before the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is reserved and set in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of storing the setting value. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S233 that it is not in the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described later in detail, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

[Set value confirmation display process]
Next, setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not being acknowledged.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU determines whether the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON. is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. A setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to turn off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed. is open, and it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established. On the other hand, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. It is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied by determining that there is no display.

When the main control MPU determines in step S352 that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU ends this routine as it is, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and then the current setting value is obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU obtains the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

After step S356, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. A value of 3, a set value of 4, a set value of 5, and a set value of 6 are set in advance. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU uses the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM) to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. set value stored in ) is within the normal range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, use the set value as it is. do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU determines that the set value obtained in step S356 is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360 ) to end the routine. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the set value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, confirms the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is the command to send.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the setting key ON operation history information (set value confirmed) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. information that associates the message with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the above-described ball recovery history information, set value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information are generated. A predetermined specific history information display permitting condition is satisfied that the display of the specific history information can be permitted. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 is controlled by a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied. , the image that has been displayed so far is switched to a specific history information display image for selectively displaying specific history information, and control is performed to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is pressed. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key switch 1311a receives an off signal from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. On the other hand, when the OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been turned off, it terminates this routine as it is. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , the OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is terminated. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display processing of this routine has ended (that is, the confirmation of the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). is a command that tells

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 has performed control to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S357, when the main control MPU judges that it is not within the normal range, it sets interrupt non-permission (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 273, which is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared. By setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the control MPU, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT starts the main control. The MPU does not have to be reset forcibly. In addition, the infinite loop maintains the state in which the error display processing is completed, and the game cannot be progressed at all, so that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is a process performed at step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 275), and is the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 276 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. On the other hand, if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is to be stopped (non-permission). .

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 271 or the process performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 274), the main control MPU interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 273 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing of step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed. Since the firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function, at the time of power recovery, The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the fire enable logic.

Therefore, the error display processing of this routine is the processing performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 271 or the processing performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 274), the main control MPU restores the power in step S400 and then displays an error display in this routine. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being shot even after the process has started, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic), and its predetermined output port is set. output terminal to the discharge control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine ends, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing enable signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. Output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400. FIG.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 274 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 274 and the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display processing, which is this routine, is the processing performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275) and step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is used as main peripheral serial data in peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410. Sending to 1510.

The error display command is a command to notify that there is an abnormality (or that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores and holds error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time) in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ).

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a blue background image saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant." Control is performed to display a message image of white characters, and an announcement of "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a member of staff." Control is performed so that the sound is forcibly set to the maximum volume without being dependent on the sound volume, and is played from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, body frame speaker 622, etc.). The processing for notifying the RAM error by the error display command is the processing with the highest priority. Prioritize error reporting.

[Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 280. FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 277, and FIG. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[Processing when the payout control unit power is turned on]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) over a predetermined period of time from the power-on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.). Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting enables access to the payout control built-in RAM, and enables writing (storage) or reading of payout information, for example.

After step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When the payout control MPU determines that they match in step S526, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the process at the time of power failure of the payout control unit is normally completed, payout control built-in RAM is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

After step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that there is no power failure warning signal input, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544 ).

After step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various kinds of information are read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that informs that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) have been received normally, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls). A prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 each time the ball is played.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter is provided for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information. The number of game balls put out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring.

In the process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, the number of prize balls information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize number information output determination counter value is read from the prize ball information storage area. In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, a prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of prize balls information output), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that tells that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is stuck due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball stickiness determination time set as the determination condition; Skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full with the game balls stored During the full tank determination time, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not inconsistent game ball payouts due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected in step 1 and the number of balls detected in step 1 are repeated Time management is performed for the mismatch counter reset determination time that is set as the condition. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. By setting it to 0, it accurately measures the time it takes to determine if the ball is stuck. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit is checked. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game balls is executed by the payout device 580 and cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU, while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, when the game balls are being put out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, the momentary power failure or power failure causes the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the game ball payout cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration By restoring the value stored as payout backup information to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, the instantaneous The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls can be continued. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stoppage when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stoppage occurs. This prevents the various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the effects of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, a logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out control. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, for example, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. , that is, the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is determined to be in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball stick operation determination setting processing, As an error status output setting to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal is output to notify that the payout operation to pay out the rental balls is impossible when the CR unit is not in communication. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and ball-out check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is detected by a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. , and the number of game balls introduced into the guide passage 570a of the above-described ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 exceeds a predetermined number. and determine whether or not For example, the determination of whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made by using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is detected in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, timing of the full-tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is stored in the above-described state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls, and the full-tank information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Judgment whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms in this full tank and ball out check process. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is When it transitions from OFF to ON, it starts counting the above-mentioned dead ball determination time in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out is notified to that effect. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Bulb-out information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormality occurs in various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball removal, and ball picking are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding action is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various kinds of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays are created based on the various information. and transmit it to the main control board 1310 . For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information, frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 .

After step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value 0 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. performs timer update processing, performs CR communication processing in step S554, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control unit main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition setting of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Incidentally, the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[Dispensing control section timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 277 to 279.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 280, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 281 to 285. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing an example of the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing an example of V blank interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 283 is an example of 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit. 284 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 285 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining hot start/cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 and various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after executing the current time information acquisition processing so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V-blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC that indicates that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 to check whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. Repeatedly determine whether or not By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the production operation unit 300 Rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300”). Various types of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotating direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation Operation history information of the unit 303, etc.) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. It is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the sound volume has been adjusted in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the performance proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of LEDs used as direct light, the luminance of LEDs used as indirect light, and respectively. During the progress of the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, the player (or the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and the first When one specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-described scale set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set so as to achieve the specified specified brightness value. Tone information can be updated.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, respectively. A player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates an operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain a 31st luminance that is the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. A specified brightness value can be set up to a specified value.

For example, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) designates the 0th (zero) brightness assuming that the current brightness is the minimum brightness (turns off) when rotating the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise. When the value is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher along the tone curve or spline tone curve), while the rotary operation unit 302 is reversed. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of the clockwise rotation operation, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear or spline tone curve), the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. When the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the push operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress. , etc.) can set a desired brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 . In addition, when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302, the predetermined luminance value to the 31st luminance are displayed at predetermined positions in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the effect. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate in the form of an image how much brightness the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) desires. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are directly irradiated as light. be. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. A formula (for example, a linear tone curve , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the above-described brightness specified values, 0 (zero) brightness specified value ~ It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the side of the game board that are set as the gradation information described above and that are directly illuminated as light, the pallet A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. Palette values corresponding to luminance designations are set as the above-described gradation information along predetermined formulas (for example, linear tone curves or spline curve-like tone curves).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance step after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the minimum luminance (lights off). As the lowest possible brightness, it is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, one luminance designation value and the corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

Thus, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED When setting the brightness and the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) operates the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Brightness by operating While set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 and presses the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The brightness designation value by the operation of 303 and the corresponding special palette value are set. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)), and in conjunction with this Then, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even without setting, the light emission mode accompanying the flow of performance is set, and the flow of performance by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. , set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too bright (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more dramatic effect), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness. Even if one specified brightness value is set up to the specified brightness value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a particular decorative board. , one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for the other decoration boards, respectively, so that the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark The brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship of .

Furthermore, indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust the brightness than direct light, but for LEDs used as indirect light, a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent from the normal palette value) The brightness can be set by . As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value. and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process to be described later. One minute (one frame) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed in excess of the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. It is a mechanism that can give priority to performances by sound effects such as music and sound effects that match various performances from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers").

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is set to indicate the number of the light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, and the sound command data instructing the sound data of the notification sounds and notification sounds, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that is originally supposed to be instructed.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for pending lookahead-related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands received. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the schedule data for generating the lighting mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Executed, the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to become the maximum brightness from the first specified brightness value. When one luminance designated value is set up to the 31st luminance designated value, the grayscale information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to achieve the set luminance designated value. It is possible.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a start winning prize command for instructing the start of the starting winning prize effect, normal symbol Ordinary design storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), variation pattern for instructing the start of variable performance such as variable display of decorative designs in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special designs Analyze whether or not the command is a pattern storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and a large winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in the first large winning opening 2005, and currently, Recognize which game state it is.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands categorized as related to figure synchronization effect, various commands categorized as normal electric role effect related, various commands as categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display, various commands as categorized as test related, and In addition, there are various commands classified. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to advance notice and the like based on the received command, and based on the result of the lottery, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating sound effects such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The schedule data for generating the lighting mode is configured by arranging the lighting mode data defining the lighting modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which of the plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is to be used, and a number of tracks of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be simultaneously monitored without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is stored in the peripheral control ROM. is read (extracted) from and output to VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and renders (displays) one screen on the effect display device 1600. A minute (one frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is changed based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. are identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponding to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is obtained, and in the sound data output processing of step S1018, the output set in the sound data generation processing is performed. Sound data is output from each channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into values in 1024 steps up to a value of 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for the low tone of the body frame 4 Music and sound effects are played from In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume control switch. It's like

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used.

Specifically, for the production sound, the board volume adjusted by turning the volume control switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the board volume is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit 0.5 seconds after receiving the variable pattern command and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. ) can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, peripheral Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the variation pattern command in the control unit, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit has received the stop display command and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. seconds), the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The voltage is converted into seven levels of volume 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume to set the substrate volume.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, the volume of the sound flowing from the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound on the main body frame 4 is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified production sound is serialized. output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3 , the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 are set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effects, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the synthesized effect sound, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually adjusted to the center of the top on the side of the door frame 3. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified to a master volume value, which is the sound volume, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data, and is used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of this synthesized notification sound is actually set to the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body for bass of the main body frame 4 It amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the frame speaker 622, serializes this amplified notification sound, and outputs it as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound to notify the staff of the hall of the fraudulent act against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this sound effect is suppressed. Synthesize the sound data of the embedded track, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the informational sound is embedded, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume. , the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are compared with the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the sounds that are actually emitted from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound on the main body frame 4 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It progresses according to the sound generation schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top central speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When this predetermined period elapses, the volume of the effect sound progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute until now is reduced to the substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume control switch. The volume value is set again (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the adjusted effect sound sub The sound is set to a volume value), and flows from the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. FIG.

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko is played. When a notification sound is played to notify a hall clerk or the like of a fraudulent act on the machine 1, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame. 4, but this muted effect sound progresses in accordance with the schedule data for sound generation, so that after a predetermined period of time the notification sound has passed, the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3 462, when the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 cease to flow, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point at which the informative sound started to flow, but continues for a predetermined period after the informative sound starts to flow. The sound starts to flow again from the point where it has progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the time has passed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume from muted to maximum volume by program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers become small, but the pachinko machine 1 does not. When a problem occurs or the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the backup area for regular processing.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as execution completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. Thus, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing starts by setting a value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1008, and starts 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. This V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is, as described above, a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when the signal is input to the CPU. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the normal processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 282 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the execution of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when no part-stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When the processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control of FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the peripheral control unit of this routine indicates that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 281, will be described later. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 281 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 283 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

In step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit has started when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is prioritized over the peripheral control unit V Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In accordance with the drive data, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series. Every time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, the pointer is updated. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3, an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 have been input. position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 or obtain the movable position to grasp the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit 302 rotation (rotation direction) history information and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302 and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, and the brightness of various LEDs mounted in plurality on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the SDRAM. It is backed up by copying it to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. there is In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[Peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to transmit the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt occurs with this as a trigger, and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 284 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, reads 1-byte (8-bit) information. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the judgment of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has not been sequentially read out from the reception buffer, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, following the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, reads the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. In a certain mode and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facility of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become electrically charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated. in a receptive environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been affected by noise between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 and has changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. can judge.

In step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the received main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216 ), exiting this routine.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is When it is determined that the period for which information can be received has passed, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, the routine ends.

[Peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. When this peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, as shown in FIG. (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that two macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If so, this routine is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, power saving processing is performed. (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control ICs can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

After step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal has been input. determine whether In other words, it continues infinitely to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing the determination in this manner, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it is no longer possible to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314. CPU is not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 281 is started again.

As described above, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state by executing the WDT clearing process in step S1314. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It's becoming As a result, even if the peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 286 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and stored in the RAM. A first start opening passing process such as storing in one special symbol reservation storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second start opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big win execution flag indicating that the big win game state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the big win execution flag is set, the big win game state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display is stopped becomes a mode suggesting "15R big hit", 15R A process of opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005 according to the big winning game state is executed. Further, when the state of suggesting "5R big win" is reached, processing for controlling the opening and closing of the first big prize winning port 2005 is executed according to the 5R big win gaming state, and when the mode of suggesting "2R big win" is reached. Then, a process of controlling the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the 2R jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after performing the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating the time saving state, and the 2R big hit game based on the fact that the result of the lottery processing at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state has become a mode suggesting "2R big hit". Set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot game state based on the mode suggesting the ``5R jackpot'', when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and non-time saving state. . Then, the time saving flag is the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times of continuation of the time saving state, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In that case, when the big hit game state is terminated, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. The time saving frequency counter is counted down every time the variable display of the special pattern is executed until the counter value becomes '0', but the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes '0'. Sometimes, it is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 297 described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0" (Step S237), execute the first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238), the second stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special design including the lottery process related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the second special design is stopped Process processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 287 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 3052 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly suspend the variable display control of the first special symbol. The processing of S245 is to be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S244, the random numbers obtained in step S241 are stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S241, the display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information are executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then the process is terminated.

However, in the processing of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reservation memory changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first reservation memory. Along with updating to correspond to the number, a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0-4). It's like

FIG. 288 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in the above step S241, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not a big win will occur, and if a big win will occur, the type of the big win will be determined. The mode type of the game presentation is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600) Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reservation memory number (the One special reservation number counter value) and the corresponding first special symbol pre-determination command are set (step S262).

Then, by transmitting the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), it is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is a big win, the kind of big win if it is a big win, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big win. Preliminary determination information such as whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect to be executed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is performed by peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the start winning. You will be able to understand the IC.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reservation storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories. Store in order from the area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the first variation pattern command received when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received. Discard the determination information and move the advance determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). shift the stored pre-determined information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be announced in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 289 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S234).

Now, in the processing of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) is "1" (step S252). In the processing of this step S252, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253- The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

However, in the processing of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the second reservation memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reservation memory. While updating to correspond to the number, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0-1). It's like

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 2002 is set to "4", while the game ball enters the second start port 2004. The upper limit of the number of second reserved memories based on entering the ball is set to "1". In addition, the second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the second special symbol variation time is shortened compared to the normal state. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed for a long period of time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the second start port 2004 Even if a game ball enters the game ball, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being able to obtain the chance of a big winning lottery.

FIG. 290 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S239 of the special symbol process processing are similar program modules, and the random number used for determination And only the table is different, here only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the above-described first special symbol process flag.

1. Read the first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU, based on the read first special random number, lottery processing and the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol is performed first special Design normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. Variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which lottery process etc. are performed for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 271).

FIG. 291 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. Random numbers (for example, first special random numbers, first pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, variable random numbers) related to the display mode of the first special symbol that is stored in the first storage area out of the random numbers are read out from the RAM. . And next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurred is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the hit/loss of the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 292 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table shown in FIG. When the second special symbol normal process is executed, it is compared with the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 293(A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one type of first special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and three types different from the jackpot determination value. The first special random numbers are matched with the big hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has won the small win, and the first special random numbers of 315 kinds are matched with the loss determination value indicating that the first special random numbers are lost. It is associated (jackpot probability: 1/319, small hit probability: 3/319). In addition, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot 144 types of second special random numbers that match and are different from the big hit determination value match the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and the 174 types of second special random numbers are the loss determination that indicates that the above loss. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability: 1/319, small hit probability: 144/319). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. , When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting opening 2004 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2002 is executed The player is in a more advantageous state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special As a result of comparison with a random number), when it is determined to be a big win (step S312), a big win flag indicating that the variation wins a big win is set (step S313), and the win determination process is terminated.

Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table and the reach random number read out in step S302 are compared (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is a time saving state. and a reach determination table at the time of state. Then, in the reach determination table during the time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number will reach, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers will not reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each of the 67 types of reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased more than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (step S317), the change is A reach flag is set to indicate reach, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 294 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 294, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) or whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 293(B). to determine the type of jackpot, and determine the mode (stopped pattern of the first special pattern) of the first special pattern corresponding to the decided type of jackpot when the variation control is stopped (step S322).

In particular,
1. After opening the first big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first big winning hole 2005, it closes. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the first big winning hole 2005, and after the big win game state ends, a special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) until the variable display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened more than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability variable jackpot to control 2 . After the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern five times (five rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2005 (easily) in a 5R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special symbol (first special symbol) is obtained. , Second special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. After the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter (easy) the 2R jackpot game state into the first big prize hole 2005, and the time saving state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If it is, it is controlled to a time-saving state in which it is terminated unless a big win is achieved during the time when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the big win game state, and 2R is performed. 2R jackpot controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the jackpot game state;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, the mode when the variation control of the second special symbol is stopped (stopped symbol of the second special symbol) is
In particular,
1. After the second big winning hole 2006 is open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won the second big winning hole 2006, it closes. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the second big winning hole 2006, and after the big win game state ends, a special symbol (first special pattern, second special pattern) until the variable display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened more than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability variable jackpot to control 2 . After the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won the second big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern five times (five rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the second big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 5R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special pattern (first special pattern) is obtained. , Second special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. After the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won the second big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the second big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 2R jackpot game state, and before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, it is controlled in a time saving state. If it is, it is controlled to a time-saving state in which it is terminated unless a big win is achieved during the time when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the big win game state, and 2R is performed. 2R jackpot controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the jackpot game state;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, in the big hit pattern determination table compared with the first pattern random number, 8 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variable jackpot, and 100 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and a 2R jackpot. 92 judgment values are distributed when That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, a 15R big win has a probability of 4%, a 5R big win has a probability of 50%, and a 2R big win has a probability of 46%. Similarly, in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, 92 determination values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 determination values are distributed in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R. Eight determination values are distributed when a big hit is achieved. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number, there is a probability of 46% that it becomes a 15R variable big hit, a 50% probability that it becomes a 5R big hit, and a 4% probability that it becomes a 2R big hit. . Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability that the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the second pattern random number is determined to be a 15R probability variable jackpot is higher than the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002 The state is advantageous to the player.

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the 2R big win is determined, the 2R big win pattern is determined as the big win pattern, when the 5R big win is determined, the 5R big win pattern is determined as the big win pattern, and when the 15R big win is determined, the big win is determined. A 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the pattern.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when the big hit flag is not set in step S131, if the small hit flag is set (step S324), read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. An opening/closing pattern in which the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control a small winning game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the second big winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加First small hit 2. An opening/closing pattern in which the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed 9 times to control a small winning game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the second big winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加One of the two types of small wins of the second small win is determined.

In addition, 200 determination values are distributed in the small hit design determination table compared with the first design random number in the case of the first small hit. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, the first small win is obtained with a probability of 100%, and the second small win is not won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second random number, 20 judgment values are distributed when the first small prize is obtained, and 180 judgment values are distributed when the second small prize is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number, the first small win is obtained with a probability of 10%, and the second small prize is obtained with a probability of 90%.

Further, when the type of the small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of the small win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the first small winning pattern is determined, the first small winning pattern is determined as the small winning pattern, and when the second small winning pattern is determined, the second small winning pattern is determined as the small winning pattern. .

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, determines the winning pattern (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S328, determines the above lottery result (type of big win, small win, loss of reach, loss (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result (step S328 ). And after that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and left decorative design → right decorative design → middle Stop and display in the order of the decorative patterns (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies a small hit or a 2R big hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. is determined to be a small hit pattern ("Final Battle"), and if the 5R short-time jackpot is specified, the 5R short-time jackpot pattern (left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same among the patterns "0" to "9" If the 15R probability variation jackpot is specified, the 15R probability variation jackpot pattern (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern among the patterns "0" to "9"). combination). In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss If it is determined to be a design), and if a loss is specified, it is determined to be a design that does not involve reach (a combination in which at least the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are different patterns), and fluctuation When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has passed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and controlled.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times after the jackpot game state, but the time saving state The time saving state may be ended based on the fact that a predetermined number of big hits have occurred after the shift control is performed to the state. Specifically, after the jackpot game state, control is performed to the time saving state, and when a predetermined number of (for example, two) jackpots occur after that, control is not performed to the time saving state after the predetermined number of times of the jackpot game state is completed. , may be controlled to a normal state. Also, even if the number of occurrences of big wins is less than a predetermined number, control may be performed to the non-time-saving state during the big-win game state, and control of the time-saving state may be performed again after the big win game state.

FIG. 295 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 295, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S341), select a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342), and select a small hit flag. is set (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit corresponding to the type of the small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop design setting process is selected (step S344). , If the reach flag is set (step S345), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal In the case of a loss (a loss in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is obtained from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's expectation for the big winning game state is increased.

Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, as the process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter in which the number of times of continuing the time saving state is set is "0". do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving control is ended is set (step S354).

When it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point , the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, while the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second during the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), A special pattern variation pattern is set in such a manner that the special pattern variation time information set to about 12 seconds in a non-working time state is associated with the special pattern random number (first special pattern, second special pattern). . That is, in the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during the time saving state, compared to the variation pattern at the time of loss selected in the non-time saving state, so that the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short, Variation time information of the above special design is set.

FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process is terminated when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). Thereby, when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed for a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is terminated and the non-time saving control is performed. (Normal state control) will start.

Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game (step S387), and starts the big win game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to a jackpot number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process to be described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes "0", the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed. to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big win control process described later, the big win opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning mouth opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big win number counter reaches "0", and the big win is performed. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), when the big win frequency counter is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0", the process shifts to the big winning mouth post-opening process (step S403) and ends the big win game. Execute control that causes

Then, a jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R time-short jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R time-short jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the effect of the big win game corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, similarly, the jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R timing short jackpot) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time short jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) are set.

In addition, when the jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, when the jackpot game is ended, specifically, the jackpot is executed in the jackpot control processing (step S235A) after the jackpot opening (step S403). The opening and closing control of the first big winning hole 2005 according to the type (for example, after the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2005 is described above. Opening and closing control that repeats the opening and closing pattern that is closed when detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2402 twice, five times, or 15 times) and opening and closing control of the second large winning opening 2006 (for example, the first large winning opening 2005 After opening for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2005, the opening and closing pattern is closed twice, 5 times. times, or opening and closing control repeated 15 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). While the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114) by resetting the jackpot executing flag, the first function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S386), if the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates to start the small hit game. A small-hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time (time for displaying the start of the small-hit game, etc.) until the start of the small-hit game is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small-hit running flag indicating that the small-hit game is being executed is set (step S393). In addition, the small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the kind of the small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the kind of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. As a result, the production of the small-hit game corresponding to the kind of the small-hit instructed by the small-hit start command is executed by the production display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second Second small hit start command) is set.

In addition, when the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically, the small hit middle process (step S411) of the small hit control process (step S236A) described later ) to control the opening and closing of the second big winning hole 2006 according to the type of the small win (for example, the opening and closing pattern of opening the second big winning hole 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated twice or nine times). is reset when exiting. By resetting the small hit executing flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it becomes a loss, the waiting time (the time during which the stop design of the special design is displayed) until the variable display of the next special design is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processing of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (step S395), and the process ends.

FIG. 298 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The above-mentioned peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are shifted to the above-mentioned jackpot game state based on the fact that the mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a big hit symbol. 1510 or waits until the next round is started pre-opening big winning opening (step S401)
2. Based on the state at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols, the first big prize winning port 2005 or the second big prize winning port 2006 is controlled to open state based on the big hit pattern, or based on the start of the next round. After opening the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or after 10 game balls enter the first big winning hole 2005 When it is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 that a prize has been won, or after the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or 10 game balls are placed in the second big winning hole 2006. Processing during the opening of the big winning opening which is closed when the winning is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2601 (step S402)
3. A post-opening process for the big winning opening to wait until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state will end when all the rounds are completed (step S403).

The big win process flag is operated in the process of step S42 so as to indicate that the big winning hole pre-opening process (step S401) should be performed. Further, in the process during the opening of the big prize winning opening (step S402), at the start of the round in which the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened, a big winning round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of the round for controlling the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to be closed, a big winning round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is implemented by the device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like.

[Inner lens]
In the conventional pachinko machine 1, the mounting surface of the board on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is provided so as to face the player, and is designed to perform luminous decoration. In addition, the mounting surface of the substrate on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent decoration, and the LEDs mounted on the substrate emit light in various colors to cause the decoration to emit color, or Light emission of an LED or the like is made to be visually recognized through.

In addition, the substrate of the conventional pachinko machine 1 is coated with a solid green resist, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the contour line where the electronic parts are arranged, etc. are further added from above this resist. , are printed on white or black silk in close proximity to electronic components such as LEDs. The information formed on these substrates is difficult for the player to see when the LED is illuminated, but is visible to the player when the LED is extinguished.

In recent pachinko machines 1, a uniform design is applied to the whole, and the image of the effect display device 1600 is integrated to express the world view of characters, animation, etc. design is a very important factor. However, in the conventional pachinko machine 1, information irrelevant to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, written on the board, is not displayed when the LED is turned off. By being visually recognized, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 is destroyed, the design property is deteriorated, and there is a possibility that the amusement of the game is reduced.

In order to solve this problem, LEDs are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board, and the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, outline where electronic parts are arranged, etc. The information is printed with white or black silk to make it difficult for the player to see the information, or the surface of the board on which the LED is mounted (the LED mounting surface) is printed in a predetermined color (white in this example, green, etc.). After applying paint (resist, silk, etc.) of black, purple, etc.), the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged according to the unevenness and the light reflection state. In order to make the information such as outline lines visible, the same color paint is applied twice except for these information parts so that the information is difficult for the player to see.

However, when silk-printing information such as the number of connector pins, IC direction, part number, pin number, outline where electronic parts are arranged, etc. on the back surface that is different from the LED mounting surface, LEDs and the like must be specified by alternately comparing the front surface and the back surface of the substrate, and there is a drawback that the workability is reduced, and the LED and the information related to the LED are not provided on the same surface. and information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged. There is a drawback that a mistake of erroneous identification occurs. In addition, if information such as the number of connector pins, IC direction, part number, pin number, outline where electronic parts are arranged, etc. can be visually recognized depending on the unevenness or light reflection state, the part showing this information Since the (region) and other portions (regions) are of the same color, it is difficult to distinguish them, and there is a drawback that workability during maintenance and inspection is reduced.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the external shape where the electronic parts are arranged are recorded on the board while suppressing the deterioration of workability such as maintenance inspection. This makes it possible to prevent the player from viewing information irrelevant to the game, such as lines. A detailed description will be given below. As information irrelevant to the game written on the board, any one of the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, etc. The following inventions are applicable as long as they are described in the mounting surface).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the inner lens is arranged between the decorative body covering the front of the LED and the substrate on which the LED is mounted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the front surface (surface) of a handle decoration board 184 provided in the handle unit 180 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is covered with a transparent handle cover 185. A transparent inner lens 185a is arranged between the handle decoration substrate 184 and the upper left dish decoration substrate 273, which is provided in the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs, as shown in FIGS. The front surface (surface) of the plate is covered with a plate upper left decorative body 271, and a transparent plate upper left inner lens 272 is arranged between the plate upper left decorative body 271 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, and is provided in the plate upper right decorative unit 275. The front surface (surface) of the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a plate upper right decoration 276, and a transparent plate is placed between the plate upper right decoration 276 and the plate upper right decorative substrate 278. The front surface (surface) of a lower left plate decoration substrate 283 provided in the lower left plate decoration unit 280 on which the upper right inner lens 277 is arranged and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a lower left plate decoration body 281. A transparent plate lower left inner lens 282 is arranged between the body 281 and the plate lower left decorative substrate 283, and the front surface of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 ( The surface) is covered with a lower right plate ornament 286 , and a transparent lower right inner lens 287 is arranged between the lower right plate ornament 286 and a lower right plate decoration substrate 288 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the upper surface (surface) of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 provided in the effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is the plate center. It is covered with an upper decoration 312a, and a transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 is provided between the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center upper decoration substrate 314, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 The upper surface (surface) of the lower plate center decoration substrate 316 provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is covered with the lower plate center decoration body 312b, and the lower plate center decoration body 312b and the lower plate center decoration substrate 316 are covered. A transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 is provided between them. Covered by a cover 380 , a transparent peripheral decoration inner lens 379 is provided between the peripheral button cover 380 and the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is a transparent door frame left side decoration body 404. A transparent left-side inner lens 403 is arranged between the door-frame left-side decorative body 404 and the door-frame left-side decorative substrate 402, and as shown in FIG. The front surface (surface) of the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent door frame right side decoration 419, and this door frame right side decoration 419 and the side window interior are covered with a transparent door frame right side decoration 419. A door frame top central decorative board 455 provided with a door frame top unit 450 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon, a door frame top left decoration, and a transparent right side inner lens 415 are arranged between the decorative part decorative board 413 and the door frame top left decoration. The front surfaces (surfaces) of the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are covered with a transparent door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, and the door frame top left decoration. A transparent top center inner lens 458 , top left inner lens 459 and top right inner lens 460 are arranged between the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 .

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the front surface of the first decoration board 3322 provided in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is rotated by the lower middle rotary decoration 3310. A transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 is arranged between the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the back-lower-middle first decoration substrate 3322, and as shown in FIGS. The front surface of the back front left decoration board 3714 provided in the decoration unit 3710 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is covered with a front cover 3711, and is between the front cover 3711 and the back bottom center first decoration board 3322. A transparent plate-like back front left decorative body 3713 functioning as an inner lens is arranged, and as shown in FIGS. The front surface of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is covered with a front cover 3811, and between the front cover 3811 and the back front right decorative substrate 3814, a transparent plate-like back front right decorative body 3813 functioning as an inner lens is provided. are placed.

The inner lens has a three-dimensional uneven surface so as to make the refractive index non-uniform and diffuse the light from the LED irregularly. (provided at a distance from the decoration). When visually recognizing through the inner lens information irrelevant to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, written on the mounting surface of the substrate. , the information is distorted (out of focus, distorted to the extent that it cannot be recognized as characters or information) due to the three-dimensionally formed uneven surface. As a result, the information irrelevant to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, written on the mounting surface of the substrate, can be recognized as information by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, suppress deterioration of the design, and suppress deterioration of the game interest. It should be noted that the surface of the inner lens is not limited to three-dimensionally forming an uneven surface. may be diffused irregularly. Also in this case, the number of pins of the connector marked on the mounting surface of the board, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, etc., which are visible through the inner lens, are irrelevant to the game. Information becomes visible in a distorted state (out of focus).

The inner lens of this example is made of colorless and transparent resin, and allows light from the LED to pass therethrough. As long as it is made of a translucent material (resin or the like), it is not limited to being colorless and transparent, and may be colored and transparent to the extent that it can be seen through. In addition, the surface of the inner lens in this example is three-dimensionally formed by forming a plurality of small surfaces with different angles like a diamond cut. It has an appearance that is cloudy in places due to the non-uniform rate.

In addition, the decorations of this example (the handle cover 185, the top left decoration 271, the top right decoration 276, the bottom left decoration 281, the bottom right decoration 286, the top center decoration 312a, and the bottom center decoration 312b , outer peripheral button cover 380, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, door frame top decorative body 453, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, front cover 3711, front cover 3811) are made of transparent members. and has a relatively smooth surface. In addition to the inner lens, the front and back surfaces of the decoration may also be three-dimensionally formed in an uneven shape. , part numbers, pin numbers, outlines on which electronic parts are arranged, etc. can be reliably prevented from being visually recognized by the player. Further, in this case, the degree of unevenness of the surface of the decorative body arranged on the side closer to the player may be made weaker than the degree of unevenness of the surface of the inner lens. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transparency of the decoration arranged on the side closer to the player from being lowered, and the inner lens that looks cloudy due to the reduction in transparency through the decoration can be visually recognized. A three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be achieved.

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since white is adopted as the resist of the substrate on which the LED is mounted, the white turbid resist is provided between the mounting surface of the substrate and the decoration. The inner lens, which has an appearance, blends well with the white resist and does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, the design of the pachinko machine 1 is not degraded.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, white is used as the resist on the surface of the board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged on the LED mounting surface. Information such as outlines to be printed is printed with yellow silk. Here, in general, yellow and white have the closest reflectance and brightness compared to other colors, and there is little visual difference (contrast). In comparison, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged is difficult to identify even when the board is directly viewed. A white resist may be used only on the LED mounting surface (front surface), and various information may be printed with yellow silk. or black), or various information may be printed on silk of a color other than yellow (for example, white or black).

On the other hand, when carrying out maintenance inspections, information such as the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, outline where electronic parts are arranged, etc. must be written in a color different from the color of the resist on the board. In addition to being able to easily identify and understand this information, information such as the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, outline where electronic parts are arranged, etc. Since it is written in close proximity to the LED, it is possible to clarify the correspondence relationship between the LED and information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an IC, a resistor, a capacitor, a connector, etc. are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface (rear surface). That is, only the LEDs are mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface) of the substrate. As a result, the LEDs are mounted so that the emitted light is directed toward the player, and on the front side of the board that is easily visible to the player, ICs and LEDs that are easily visible to the player due to their color, shape, and size By mounting resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. on the back side of the board, which is difficult for players to see, without mounting resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc., the presence of ICs, resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. can be made difficult to notice. Also, when using a connector or the like formed in the same white color as the resist on the LED mounting surface, it may be mounted on the LED mounting surface.

Further, the degree of unevenness of the surface of the inner lens may be varied according to the distance between the inner lens and the substrate. Specifically, when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is short (for example, less than 1 cm), the degree of three-dimensional formation of the inner lens is strengthened, and when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is long (for example, 1 cm or more), may weaken the degree of three-dimensional formation of the inner lens. As a result, optimal shielding is performed according to the distance from the board, and the number of connector pins, IC direction, part number, pin number, and outline where electronic parts are arranged are marked on the mounting surface of the board through the inner lens. It is possible to suppress lines from being visually recognized, suppress information unrelated to the game from being recognized by the player as information, prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, and reduce the deterioration of the design. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest by suppressing it. As a method for changing the degree of three-dimensional formation, the degree of three-dimensional formation can be enhanced by deepening the unevenness of the substrate surface, or weakening the degree of three-dimensional formation by making the unevenness of the substrate surface shallow. Examples include increasing the degree of unevenness by reducing the shaping (surfaces with different angles) and weakening the degree of unevenness by increasing the shaping (surfaces with different angles) of the substrate surface.

In addition, the inner lens is not limited to the one that makes the information written on the substrate difficult to see. Part of the information may be visible to the extent that it is recognizable as information (to the extent that it is recognizable as lines or characters), or all or part of the information written on the substrate may be some kind of information. It is possible to recognize that is written, but it is said to be difficult to see to the extent that it is difficult to recognize the written information as information (to the extent that lines and characters are obscured and visible) In addition, it is difficult to recognize that some information is written on all or part of the information written on the substrate (to the extent that lines and characters cannot be seen at all). It may be something that is

Further, in the above example, a resin molded member having a three-dimensionally formed uneven surface was used as the inner lens. A translucent sheet may be used that obscures part of the information or makes it difficult to recognize that some information is written on all or part of the information written on the substrate. For example, provided between an LED board 5070 provided in the light emitting effect unit 5000 shown in FIG. A sheet similar to the diffusion sheet 5050 that is processed and molded from a transparent resin plate may be used, or a translucent sheet such as a frosted glass-like translucent sheet or a crystal-like translucent sheet that lowers the transparency. may be used. In this case, the space between the mounting surface of the board on which the LED is mounted and the decorative body can be made narrower than when a three-dimensionally formed member is used, so that the degree of freedom in design increases.

Also, in the above example, the decorative body and the inner lens are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative body itself may be used as the inner lens. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress deterioration in the design of the pachinko machine 1 at low cost.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is in a state of waiting for customers, and the light-emitting members such as LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 are provided at times other than when game effects are not being executed, such as during a period during which a demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is being performed. Among them, a plurality of light emitting members provided at positions always visible to the player (in this example, the LED provided on the door frame 3, the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 , LED mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right LED mounted on the lower back right decorative board 3253 of the production unit 3250, LED mounted on the lower left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left production unit 3200, etc.). It is set to be higher than the ratio of the light-off state. As a result, the period in which the light is on can be made longer than the period in which the light is off. Information irrelevant to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, described in , can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, by making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the information unrelated to the game, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the design, and suppressing the deterioration of the interest in the game. become.

[Coverage of the substrate mounted on the movable decoration]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, behind the back-rear movable decoration 3110, the back-rear rotary decoration 3440, the back-left decoration 3521, and the back-right decoration 3621 exposed in front of the effect display device 1600, Information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of where the electronic parts are arranged is also visually recognized by the player. making it difficult. A detailed description will be given below.

As described above, the rear rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rear rotary decoration 3440, the rear rear left decoration 3521, and the rear rear right decoration 3621 are usually invisible to the player (when not driven). It is accommodated in a position (waiting position), and moves to a position (driving position) visible to the player in front of the effect display device 1600 during the effect (during driving) and becomes visible to the player.

Therefore, during normal operation (during non-driving), the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the rear movable decorative body 3110 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A back upper rear decoration board 3452 provided on the front surface and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon, a rear left decoration board 3522 provided behind the back rear left decoration body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and It is difficult for a player to visually recognize information such as outlines on which electronic parts are arranged.

On the other hand, when the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the back upper rear rotary decoration body 3440, the back rear left decoration body 3521, and the back rear right decoration body 3621 are displayed in front of the production display device 1600 (at the time of driving). , the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the back upper rear rotary decoration body 3440, the back rear left decoration body 3521, and the back rear right decoration body 3621 are driven so that they can be visually recognized from the player from the standby position where the player cannot visually recognize them. By moving to the position, the rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the rear movable decorative body 3110 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the front surface provided behind the upper rear rotary decorative body 3440 are displayed. A back top rear decoration board 3452 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a back rear left decoration board 3522 provided behind the back rear left decoration body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back rear right decoration The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are written on each of the rear right decorative substrates 3622 provided on the rear side of the body 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. There is a risk that information such as outlines that are displayed may be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 299(A), the back rear movable decoration 3110, the back top rear rotating decoration 3440, the back left left decoration 3521, and the back rear right decoration 3621 are produced and displayed. When exposed to the front of the device 1600, the back rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decoration 3110, the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, and the back left. Light emission of LEDs mounted on each of the rear-left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the decoration body 3521 and the rear-right decoration substrate 3622 provided behind the rear-right decoration body 3621 is controlled to visually recognize each substrate. make it harder to be

That is, after the display effect is started by the effect display device 1600, the rear rear drive motor 3126 is driven to expose the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, or the rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 is driven to rotate the rear upper rear. The decoration body 3440 is exposed, the rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to expose the rear left decoration body 3521, and the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to rotate the rear right decoration body 3621. When it is exposed, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is synchronized with the timing of driving the back rear drive motor 3126, the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625. Back rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back, back top rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back top rear rotary decoration 3440, back rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the back rear left decoration 3521, and back Light emission of LEDs mounted on each of the rear right decorative substrates 3622 provided behind the rear right decoration 3621 is controlled, and the movable decorations (back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left After the end of the movable effect or the light emitting effect by the decorative body 3521, the rear right decorative body 3621), the timing when the movable decorative body has finished moving from the drive position to the standby position (back rear drive motor 3126, back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 , back left rotation drive motor 3525 and back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 are stopped), the back rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decoration 3110, and the back upper rear rotation decoration 3440. Back top rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back, back left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the back rear left decoration 3521, and back rear right decoration substrate 3622 provided behind the back rear right decoration 3621, respectively. extinguishes the LED mounted on the .

As a result, the rear rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rear rotary decoration 3440, the rear rear left decoration 3521, and the rear rear right decoration 3621 are effected and displayed in a state in which the LEDs mounted thereon are controlled to emit light. Since it is exposed in front of the device 1600, the light emitted from these LEDs can make each board difficult to see, and the number of connector pins, IC direction, and part number written on each board can be changed. , pin numbers, outlines where electronic parts are arranged, etc. are less visible to the player, thereby preventing the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and deteriorating the design. It becomes possible to suppress the decline in amusement interest. That is, in a state where the board is easily visible to the player, that is, by controlling light emission of the LED mounted on each board, the board becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, information such as the number of connector pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic parts is written near the LED on each board. In order to cause the LED to emit light in the vicinity of this information, the number of pins of the connector on the substrate, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline of where the electronic parts are arranged, etc. are determined by the light emitted from the LED. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the area where the information is written. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the light source (LED) is arranged in the vicinity of information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, and emits light. Such information can be made difficult to be visually recognized by making the information visible.

The timing for controlling the light emission of the LEDs is not limited to that described above, and as shown in FIG. 3521 and the rear right decorative body 3621 are provided behind the rear movable decorative body 3110 when they have finished moving to the driving position in front of the production display device 1600, that is, when they reach the driving position and stop moving. back rear decoration substrate 3114, back top rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back top rear rotary decoration 3440, back rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the back rear left decoration 3521, and back rear right decoration. The LED mounted on each of the rear right decorative substrates 3622 provided behind 3621 is controlled to emit light, and when the movable performance is finished and movement from the drive position to the standby position is started, the rear rear movable decoration is started. 3110, a rear upper decoration substrate 3114 provided behind 3110, a rear upper rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the upper rear rotary decoration 3440, a rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the rear left decoration 3521, and The LEDs mounted on each of the rear-right decorative substrates 3622 provided behind the rear-right decorative body 3621 may be extinguished.

That is, after the display effect is started by the effect display device 1600, the rear rear driving motor 3126 is driven to expose the rear movable decorative body 3110, or the rear upper rear rotation driving motor 3454 is driven to rotate the rear upper rear. The decoration body 3440 is exposed, the rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to expose the rear left decoration body 3521, and the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to rotate the rear right decoration body 3621. When the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the back top rear rotary decoration body 3440, the back rear left decoration body 3521, and the back rear right decoration body 3621 are exposed to the drive position, A back rear decoration provided behind the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in accordance with the timing of stopping the driving of the drive motor 3126, the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625. A substrate 3114, a back top rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back top rear rotary decoration 3440, a back rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the back rear left decoration 3521, and behind the back rear right decoration 3621. Light emission control of the LEDs mounted on each of the rear right decorative substrates 3622 provided, and timing to start moving from the drive position to the standby position after completing the movable effect (back rear drive motor 3126, back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the timing at which the rear left rotation driving motor 3525 and the rear right rotation driving motor 3625 are started to drive), a rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the rear rear movable decoration 3110, and a rear upper rear rotation decoration. 3440, a back upper rear decoration substrate 3452, a back rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the back rear left decoration 3521, and a back rear right decoration substrate 3622 provided behind the back rear right decoration 3621. You may make it light-extinguish the LED mounted in each.

As a result, when the performance display device 1600 appears at the front drive position and is most easily visible to the player (back rear drive motor 3126, back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and when the driving of the back right rotation driving motor 3625 is stopped), the back rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decoration 3110, and the back top rear decoration provided behind the back top rotation decoration 3440. The LEDs mounted on each of the substrate 3452, the rear-left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the rear-left decoration 3521, and the rear-right decoration substrate 3622 provided behind the rear-right decoration 3621 are caused to emit light. , each substrate can be made difficult to be visually recognized. In addition, when the LED is turned off, the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the rear rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the rear upper rear rotary decoration 3440, the rear rear The rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the left decoration 3521 and the rear right decoration substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decoration 3621 are exposed at positions visible to the player in an easily visible state. However, since the back rear movable decoration 3110, the back top rear rotating decoration 3440, the back rear left decoration 3521, and the back rear right decoration 3621 are moving, the player gazes at each board. Therefore, even if each LED is turned off, information such as the number of connector pins, IC direction, part number, pin number, outline where electronic parts are arranged, etc. written on each board is not available. It is difficult for a player to visually recognize.

In addition, the back rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decoration 3110, the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, and the rear rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back rear left decoration 3521. The timing for emitting light from the LEDs mounted on each of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 is not limited to the above, and the rear rear is movable. During the movement of the decoration 3110, the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, the back rear left decoration 3521, and the back rear right decoration 3621 from the standby position to the driving position, for example, the back rear movable decoration 3110 and the back upper rear rotation decoration. Each LED may emit light at the timing when the body 3440, the rear left decoration 3521, and the rear right decoration 3621 are actually visible to the player or just before reaching the drive position. , back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper rear rotary decoration 3440, back rear left decoration 3521, and back rear right decoration 3621 are illuminated at the timing of starting movement, and back rear movable decoration. 3110, an effect of causing each LED to emit light at the timing when the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, the back rear left decoration 3521, and the back rear right decoration 3621 reach the drive position and the driving of each motor is stopped. In other words, one or more of a plurality of timings may be combined and executed.

Further, in this example, the state in which the LED emits light indicates a state in which light emission is controlled in a predetermined light emission pattern, and is not limited to the state in which the LED continues to light, but at least the light-on state and the light-off state. It also includes flashing states that are controlled one or more times. In either case, since the light emission of the LED can be made dazzling to the player, it is possible to make the board difficult to see. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the design of the pachinko machine 1 by making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the information such as the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the design. It is possible to suppress the decrease in amusement that accompanies the decrease.

In addition, the back rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decoration 3110, the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440, and the rear rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back rear left decoration 3521. When the LEDs mounted on the rear left decorative board 3522 and the rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 are to emit light, high luminance (in this example, the maximum settable luminance value (100%), which may be half or more (85% or more in this example) of the settable luminance range (70 to 100% in this example), or higher luminance than the backlight of the effect display device 1600 ) may be used to emit light. As a result, the LEDs are caused to emit light with high brightness at a position closer to the player than the performance display device 1600, so that the player can be made to feel the light from these LEDs dazzling, making each board difficult to see. In addition, since the player who is paying attention to the effect display performed by the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with light stronger than the backlight of the effect display device 1600, the player is accustomed to the brightness of the effect display device 1600. This increases the probability that a person feels dazzling, and increases the effect of making each substrate difficult to see.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the rear rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the rear upper rear rotary decoration 3440, the rear rear A back-rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the left decoration 3521 and a back-rear right decoration substrate 3622 provided behind the rear-right decoration 3621 each adopt white as a resist for the LED mounting surface (front). In addition, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, etc. is displayed on this LED mounting surface, and the reflectance and brightness are close to white, and the visual difference ( It is printed on yellow silk with little contrast. As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged even when the board is visible compared to printing with silk in colors other than white and yellow. It becomes difficult to identify information such as outlines. In addition, when the present technical idea is exposed to the front of the effect display device 1600 and becomes the most visible state, the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the rear rear movable decoration 3110 and the rear upper rear rotary decoration are provided. 3440, a back upper rear decoration substrate 3452, a back rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the back rear left decoration 3521, and a back rear right decoration substrate 3622 provided behind the back rear right decoration 3621. The LED mounted on each is made to emit light to make each board difficult to see. Although it is possible to enhance the effect by printing various information with , these techniques are not indispensable for solving the problem.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the game performance performed by the performance display device 1600, the variation display during execution and the variation display (holding display) to be performed in the future suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit (the possibility of a big win). It is designed to execute the expectation degree suggestion production to be done. In this expectation suggesting effect, the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the type, color, pattern, etc. of an image such as a character displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁For example, when the same character is displayed, the color of the character is such that white<blue<yellow<green<red<gold is suggested in this order, and the degree of expectation for a big hit increases.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decoration 3110, the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, and the back rear left decoration 3521. The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, As the color of the silk for printing information such as outlines on which electronic components are arranged, yellow used to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit is adopted. Therefore, when the rear rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rear rotary decoration 3440, the rear rear left decoration 3521, and the rear rear right decoration 3621 are visibly exposed, they are irrelevant to the game printed on these substrates. Although the player does not clearly recognize that the information is written, even if it is recognized that there is something yellow, it is a game that evokes a suggestion of the degree of expectation of a big win. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that irrelevant information is written.

In addition, among the colors used to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, yellow, which suggests a relatively high degree of expectation of a big hit, is arranged on the LED mounting surface, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts. Since the information such as the outline of the game is used as the color of the silk to be printed, it is possible to make the player who recalls the suggestion of the degree of expectation of the big win think that the degree of expectation of the big win is high, and suppress the decline in the interest of the game. can. In addition, yellow, which is used as the color of silk, is a color similar to gold, which suggests that the expectation of a big hit is very high (70% of the expectation of a big hit). A rear decoration substrate 3114, a rear top rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the rear top rear rotary decoration 3440, a rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the rear rear left decoration 3521, and a rear rear right decoration 3621. A player who only glances at the back rear right decorative board 3622 provided in the rear may misunderstand that it is gold, and there is a very high possibility that he will recognize that there is something like gold and win a big prize. It is possible to improve the game interest of the player who recognizes that the high value is suggested. Further, as shown in FIG. 149, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent portion (for example, a portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d) and an opaque portion (metal decorative portion 3111d). is formed with a gold metal decoration portion 3111d. Then, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is visibly exposed, the player who glances at the metal decorative portion 3111d can be made to recognize that the degree of expectation for a big win is very high. In addition, the metal decoration part 3111d is not limited to the same color as gold, which suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, but also a color similar to gold that can be recognized as the same at first glance, or a color similar to gold. It may be formed in a color (for example, yellow) etc., or the back decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decoration 3110, the back top provided behind the back top rotary decoration 3440, etc. Silk printed on the LED mounting surfaces of the rear decoration substrate 3452, the rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the rear left decoration 3521, and the rear right decoration substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decoration 3621. In addition to the above-mentioned yellow as the color of , among the colors that suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, it is the same color as gold, which has a high degree of expectation of a big hit, or a color similar to gold to the extent that it is recognized as the same at first glance, a color similar to gold etc. may be used.

In addition, as described above, the rear rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rear rotary decoration 3440, the rear rear left decoration 3521, and the rear rear right decoration 3621 can be moved from the waiting position, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize, to the effect display device 1600. It is designed to move to a driving position that can be visually recognized by the player in front, and during this movement, the back rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decoration 3110 and the rear top rear rotary decoration 3440 are provided. Staring at the back top rear decoration board 3452 provided in the back, the back rear left decoration board 3522 provided behind the back rear left decoration 3521, and the back rear right decoration board 3622 provided behind the back rear right decoration 3621. Because it is difficult for a player to simply glance at these boards, it is important to know that information such as the number of pins on the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of where the electronic parts are arranged is written. It is difficult to be recognized, and it is easy to evoke the suggestion of the degree of expectation of a big hit. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the deterioration of the design.

In addition, the back rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decoration 3110, the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440, and the back rear left decoration 3521 provided behind. A member similar to the above-described inner lens may be provided in front of each of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 . As a result, even if these boards are visually recognized at the time of light emission of the LED, the information irrelevant to the game written on the boards can be suppressed from being recognized as information by the player. It is possible to prevent the world view from collapsing, suppress the deterioration of the design, and suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Also, in the above example, the movable decoration on which the board on which the LED is mounted (the back rear movable decoration 3110, the back top rear rotating decoration 3440, the back left left decoration 3521, and the back rear right decoration 3621) is moved from the standby position, which is difficult for the player to see, to the driving position, which is visible for the player. This technical idea can be applied even when the state is changed to a state that is difficult to be visually recognized by a player and a state that is visible to a player. For example, the back upper front decorative body 3421 covers the front side and is usually difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the back upper front decorative body 3421 is moved to the raised position and the lowered position to move the back rear movable decoration body. A state in which the front side of the decorative body 3110 is covered is changed from a state in which it is difficult for the player to see the decorative body 3110 to a state in which the front side of the movable decorative body 3110 is opened and the player can see the decorative body 3110 (exposed state), and the rear side is movable. Even when the decoration body 3110 performs light emitting effects, movable effects, etc., the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, and the part number written on the rear decoration board 3114 provided behind the rear movable decoration body 3110 are required. , pin numbers, outlines on which electronic components are arranged, etc. can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 300, when the display effect is started by the effect display device 1600 and then the motor is driven to move the back top front decoration body 3421 from the raised position to the lowered position, the back top front In accordance with the timing of driving the motor for moving the decoration 3421, the LED mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the rear movable decoration 3110 is controlled to emit light, and the rear movable decoration 3110 emits light. After the end of the movable effect, the rear back movable decoration 3110 is synchronized with the timing when the back upper front decoration 3421 has finished moving from the lowered position to the raised position (the timing when the motor for moving the back upper front decoration 3421 is stopped). The LEDs mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind may be turned off.

As a result, the LED mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110 is controlled to emit light, and the back movable decoration 3110 is changed from a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the back decoration. change to a visible state (visible to the player in a state where the LEDs mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the rear movable decorative body 3110 are controlled to emit light). Therefore, it is possible to make the back decoration board 3114 difficult to see by the light emission of the LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, By making information such as part numbers, pin numbers, outlines where electronic parts are arranged, etc. less visible to the player, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress deterioration of the design. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

The timing for controlling light emission of the LEDs mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 is not limited to the above-described timing. It may be the timing when the decoration 3110 is actually visible to the player, the timing just before the back top front decoration 3421 reaches the lowered position, or the timing when the back top front decoration 3421 reaches the lowered position. It can be timing. That is, while the back upper front decoration 3421 is moving, the player is less likely to pay attention to the back upper front decoration 3421 and pay attention to the back rear movable decoration 3110. The light emission of the LEDs mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 may be controlled at the timing when it becomes easy to attract attention.

In addition, a front movable decoration movable between a predetermined standby position and a predetermined driving position, and a front movable decoration provided behind the front movable decoration at the standby position, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize by moving to the driving position. In the case of providing a rear movable decoration that can change from a state to a state visible to the player and can operate in a predetermined manner (rotation, vibration, etc.), the rear movable decoration is provided in a predetermined manner. By operating in this manner, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline of the electronic parts, etc. written on the substrate provided on the back side of the rear movable decoration can be obtained. You may make it hard to be visually recognized by a player.

For example, the back top front decoration 3421 is configured to be movable between the raised position and the lowered position, and the back top front rotating decoration 3410 is arranged behind the back top front decoration 3421 in the raised position in a state that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. is provided, after the display effect is started by the effect display device 1600, when the motor is driven to move the upper front decoration 3421 from the raised position to the lowered position, the front upper back decoration 3421 In accordance with the timing of driving the motor that moves the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425 to rotate the back upper front rotary decoration 3410, The back top front rotation drive motor 3425 is stopped in accordance with the timing when the back top front decoration 3421 has finished moving from the lowered position to the raised position (the timing at which the motor for moving the back top front decoration 3421 is stopped). may

As a result, when the back top front rotating decorative body 3410 is operated, the back top front rotating decoration body 3410 changes from a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it to a state in which the player can recognize it. It becomes difficult to stare at the back upper front decoration board 3422 provided behind the front rotary decoration body 3410, and the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, electronic parts, etc. By making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the information such as the outline where the is arranged, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, suppress the deterioration of the design, and suppress the deterioration of the game interest. become able to.

In this example, the state in which the movable decoration (in this example, the back upper front rotating decoration 3410) is operating indicates a state in which the movable decoration is driven and controlled in a predetermined operation mode. It is not limited to a state of continuous movement without stopping, but also includes an intermittent movement state in which control is performed between a moving state and a stopped state at least once or more.

In addition, the timing for operating the back top front rotary decoration 3410 is not limited to the above-described one. It may be the timing when the front upper back decoration 3421 is actually visible to the player, the timing just before the front upper back decoration 3421 reaches the lowered position, or the timing when the front upper back decoration 3421 reaches the lowered position. good too. That is, while the back top front decoration 3421 is moving, the probability that the player will be distracted by the movement of the back top front decoration 3421 and pay attention to the back top front rotating decoration 3410 is low. The back top front rotary decoration 3410 may be operated at the timing when the back top front rotation decoration 3410 is likely to be noticed.

[Auxiliary occultation by surrounding light emitting means]

Next, an example of making it difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, etc. written on the board on which the LED is mounted. A modification will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, predetermined LEDs are turned off under specific conditions. In this case, since the LED is turned off, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the electronic There is a risk that information such as outlines on which parts are arranged may be visually recognized by the player. In this example, even when a predetermined LED is turned off under a specific condition, the information written on the board on which this LED is mounted is made difficult for the player to see. A detailed description will be given below.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, LEDs provided around the performance display device 1600 are extinguished when a specific ready-to-win performance is executed in the display performance executed by the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加Specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, when the back-lower-middle lifting drive motor 3352 rotates the lifting arm 3357 to move the back-lower-middle decorative body unit 3320 from the lowered position to the raised position, the back-up post rotation is performed. When moving the decoration body 3440 to the appearance position below the back top front decoration body 3421, the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is moved to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the right of the back front left effect unit 3700. In the case of movement, when the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is moved to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the left of the back front right effect unit 3800, and the rear rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 downward. When the lock by the locking member 3134 is released by moving to drop the rear movable decorative body 3110 from the retracted position to the appearing position, it is mounted on the rear front left decorative substrate 3714 of the rear front left decorative body unit 3710. LEDs (LEDs arranged in the area A in FIG. 301), LEDs mounted on the back upper front decoration board 3422 of the back upper effect unit 3400 (LEDs arranged in the area B in FIG. 301), LEDs mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 (LEDs arranged in area C in FIG. 301) and mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250 (the LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 301), and the LED mounted on the lower back left decoration board 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200 (the LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 301 ) and turn off the lights.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable decorations (the back-bottom middle decoration unit 3320, the back-top-rear rotation decoration 3440, the back-rear left-rotation decoration 3510, the back-rear-rotation right-hand decoration) are arranged in front of the effect display device 1600. When executing an effect that exposes the decorative body 3610 and the back movable decorative body 3110), by turning off the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600, the effect display device 1600 is displayed in front. It does not interfere with the visibility of the performance performed by the movable decoration. When the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is not moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the LED mounted on the lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 provided in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is extinguished. (LEDs placed in region D in FIG. 301).

Also, when turning off the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 and the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 , the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the plate top left decoration substrate 273, the plate top right decoration substrate 278, and the plate center top decoration substrate 314 are also controlled to emit light. ) is controlled. That is, in a situation where the LEDs provided around the performance display device 1600 are turned off and the board on which the LEDs are mounted is easily visible, the right side of the door frame provided to surround the game area 5a of the game board 5 The LED mounted on the door frame right side decorative board 418 of the side unit 410, the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top of the door frame top unit 450. The LED mounted on each of the central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 is controlled to emit light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 are located in front of the pachinko machine 1 (on the player side) rather than the game board 5. It is provided protruding. That is, the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light at a position closer to the player than the game board 5 is.

Therefore, when the LEDs provided around the performance display device 1600 are turned off, the LEDs provided in the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 By controlling the light emission of the LEDs, it is possible to control the light emission around the game board 5 at a position closer to the player than the game board 5. By performing more emphasized light emission control, it is possible to direct the player's attention from the game board 5 to the door frame 3 and suppress staring at the direction of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the boards on which the LEDs are mounted, which are provided around the performance display device 1600. Since it is possible to make it difficult for players to visually recognize information such as outlines where electronic parts are arranged, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress the deterioration of the design. It becomes possible to suppress the decline in amusement interest.

In addition, as the light emission mode when controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3, for example, the LED is continuously lit for a certain period of time, and the blinking state is switched between the lit state and the extinguished state one or more times. Higher brightness than usual (in this example, the maximum value of brightness that can be set (100%), more than half of the brightness range that can be set (70 to 100% in this example) (85% or more in this example) or the brightness may be higher than the backlight of the effect display device 1600) (not only lighting for a certain period of time, but also blinking or flashing) are mentioned. In either case, the player's attention is drawn to the game board 5 by making the light emission of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 feel dazzling or by controlling the light emission of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 in a more emphasized manner than usual. The player is directed to the door frame 3 around the game board 5 to suppress the player from staring at the direction of the pachinko machine 1, and by making the difference in brightness clear, the part darkened compared to other areas is suppressed. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see, it is possible to make it difficult to see the board on which the LEDs provided on the game board 5 are mounted. As a result, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged, which are written on the substrate on which the LEDs are mounted on the game board 5, is available to the player. Since it is difficult to visually recognize the pachinko machine 1, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from collapsing, and deterioration of the design can be suppressed.

In addition, under certain conditions, the LEDs mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710, the LEDs mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, and the back The LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the front right decoration unit 3810, the LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 Even when the LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative board 3203 are turned off, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on. Therefore, the light from the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the light from the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are combined with the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 and the back top front of the back top effect unit 3400. The decoration board 3422, the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back bottom left decoration board 3203 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200. , and light can be emitted from the periphery of these substrates. It can make visibility difficult.

In addition, the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 on which LEDs are mounted, the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, and the back front right of the back front right decoration unit 3810. A member similar to the above inner lens is provided in front of each of the decoration substrate 3814, the back bottom right decoration substrate 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back bottom left decoration substrate 3203 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200. You may do so. As a result, even if these boards are visually recognized when the mounted LEDs are extinguished, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the information irrelevant to the game written on the boards as information. The world view of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from collapsing, the deterioration of the design can be suppressed, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 on which LEDs are mounted, the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, and the back Each of the back front right decoration board 3814 of the front right decoration unit 3810, the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back bottom left decoration board 3203 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 is LED. In addition to adopting white as a resist on the mounting surface (front surface), information such as the number of connector pins, IC direction, part number, pin number, outline where electronic parts are arranged, etc. It is printed with yellow silk, which has a similar rate and brightness and less visual difference (contrast). As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged even when the board is visible compared to printing with silk in colors other than white and yellow. It becomes difficult to identify information such as outlines. In addition, when the LED is turned off, the present technical idea makes each substrate difficult to see by controlling light emission in a predetermined manner around the substrate on which the LED is mounted. Although it is possible to enhance the effect by adopting white as the resist on the mounting surface (front) and printing various information on the LED mounting surface with yellow silk, these technologies are not suitable for solving the problem. It is not mandatory.

In addition, under certain conditions, movable decorations (back bottom middle decoration unit 3320, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back left left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, and rear movable decorative body 3110), but the present invention is not limited to this. LEDs mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, LEDs mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right effect unit 3250 LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253, LED mounted on the back bottom left decoration board 3203 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200, movable decoration (back bottom middle decoration body unit 3320, back top rear rotation decoration A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the body 3440, the back left rotating decoration 3510, the back right rotating decoration 3610, and the back rear movable decoration 3110, are turned off. On the other hand, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LED provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light (not turned off), for example, when the opening of the door frame 3 is detected. The present technical idea can be applied even in such cases. Also, even under certain conditions, among the light-emitting members (lamps, LEDs, etc.) provided on the game board 5, those that display important information related to the game, such as the function display unit 1400, should not be turned off. good too.

[Coverage of the board mounted on the production operation unit]
Next, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged, which are provided in the effect operation unit 300 and described on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 on the surface of which LEDs are mounted. An example of making it difficult for a player to visually recognize information such as outlines to be displayed will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the LED mounted on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is turned off (not limited to turning off, but may be of a lower luminance than usual). . In this case, since the LED is turned off, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, and the pin number marked on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are displayed by visually recognizing the effect operation ring decoration board 352. , there is a risk that information such as outlines where electronic parts are arranged may be visually recognized by the player. In this example, even if the LED mounted on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is turned off based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, or is in a standby lighting state with a lower luminance than usual, Information written on the performance operation ring decoration board 352 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize. A detailed description will be given below.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when performing a player-participation type effect in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 are operated, the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated. LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided inside, LEDs mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330, are controlled to emit light to decorate the central button cover 375, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the rotating operation part 302 of the effect operation ring 330.

Then, when the player-participation type effect for operating the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is finished, the central button decoration provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. The LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are extinguished.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when performing a player-participation-type effect in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated, the effect operation unit 300 is controlled to emit light. Then, the center button cover 375, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotating operation part 302 of the effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation button unit 360 are decorated with light, thereby giving the player the effect operation. The rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation portion 301 in the unit 300 are focused on and the operation thereof is urged.

On the other hand, when the player-participation-type effect of operating the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the effect operation unit 300 is not performed, the center provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 The LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the button decoration substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and the LEDs mounted on the surface of the performance operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330 are extinguished.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the player participation type effect is not performed, the surface of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 When the effect operation unit 300 is operated during a normal time when the mounted LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off, The central button decoration substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light over a certain period of time, thereby controlling the center of the performance operation button unit 360. The button cover 375, the peripheral decorative lens 379, and the peripheral button cover 380 are decorated with light.

As a result, the center button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LEDs. Since information such as pin numbers and outlines where electronic parts are arranged becomes difficult for a player to visually recognize, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, thereby suppressing deterioration of the design, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can prevent a decrease in In this way, during normal times when the player-participation-type effect of operating the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is not performed, the effect operation unit 301 is operated and the player performs the effect. In a situation where the operation unit 301 is focused, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are controlled to emit light, and the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral decorative lens of the production operation button unit 360 are controlled. 379 are decorated with light emission, the central button cover 375 and the peripheral decorative lens 379 which are decorated with light emission, and the light emitted from the LED make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the central button decoration substrate 376 and the peripheral button decoration substrate 377. Become.

When the effect operation unit 301 is normally operated, the LED mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 is controlled to emit light over a certain period of time, and the center button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 emits light. Control to decorate, control to emit light from the LEDs mounted on the surface of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 over a certain period of time to decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 with light, and effect operation provided below the effect operation ring 330. Any one or a combination of two or more (all ) may be executed. Also, if the effect operation unit 301 is operated again before a certain period of time elapses, these LEDs may be extinguished after a certain period of time has elapsed since the operation. That is, these LEDs may be extinguished when the period during which the effect operation unit 301 is not operated after the effect operation unit 301 is operated reaches a certain period.

In addition, the LED for light emission control may be changed according to the part of the effect operation unit 300 that is normally operated. For example, when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit 300 The central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, And the outer peripheral button cover 380 is decorated with light emission, and when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated, the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 is turned on for a certain period. Light emission control may be performed so that the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is decorated with light emission. As a result, it is possible to control the light emission of the LED provided at the part where the player pays attention, and suppress the board on which the LED is mounted from being seen.

In addition, in the above-described example, during normal times when the player participation type effects are not performed, they are mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. Although the LEDs and the LEDs mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are shown to be extinguished, they are not limited to being extinguished, and the player participatory effect can be used. a presentation light emission mode when prompting the operation of the presentation operation unit 301, and a standby light emission mode in which the brightness is lowered compared to the presentation lighting state (not limited to the lighting state but also including a light-off state); This technical idea can be applied to any device that controls light emission by switching.

In addition, since the player participation type production is not performed, LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300 and the production When the effect operation unit 300 is operated during the normal time when the LEDs mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the operation ring 330 are controlled to emit light in the standby light emission mode, the above Separately from or in addition to the process of controlling the light emission by switching from the light emission mode during standby to the light emission mode during presentation, or in addition to the process, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is driven and controlled to vibrate the pressing operation unit 303 for a certain period of time ( Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 may be drive-controlled to rotate or vibrate (rotate left and right alternately) the rotary operation unit 302 for a certain period of time.

That is, when the effect operation unit 300 is operated in a normal time when the player participation type effect is not performed, the center button decoration substrate 376 and the peripheral button decorations provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 are displayed. The board 377 is moved (vibrated in this example) so that it becomes difficult to stare at, or the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330 is operated (this For example, it may be rotated or vibrated). As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts, which are written on the mounting surfaces of the center button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352, are arranged. Since the information such as the outline of the pachinko machine 1 becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the design, and suppressing the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

In this example, the effect operation ring is composed of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided inside, and the rotary operation unit 302 that constitutes the surface of the effect operation ring 330 and covers the front of the effect operation ring decoration board 352. 330 shows that the rotary operation unit 302 is operated in front of the effect operation ring decoration board 352. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 may be obscured by performing an operation (vibration, reciprocating motion, etc.) so that at least a portion overlaps with the operation ring decoration board 352, or the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit 300. Only a central button cover 375 and an outer peripheral button cover 380 covering the surfaces of the central button decorating substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorating substrate 377 are vibrated without moving the central button decorating substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorating substrate 377 provided in the 360. This may make it difficult to visually recognize the center button decoration substrate 376 and the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 .

In addition, the center button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 is shifted from the normal (non-operating) reference position (origin) by the press detection sensor 381 based on the operation of the press operation unit 303. When it is detected that the center button cover 375 is returned to the reference position (origin) (original return operation), the up/down detection sensor 382 may detect that the effect operation button unit 360 is pulled. When it is detected that the production operation button unit 360 is in a state shifted from the normal (non-movable) lowered position, the operation (origin return operation) of returning the production operation button unit 360 to the reference position (origin) is performed. Alternatively, the elevation detection sensor 382 detects that the effect operation button unit 360 is at an intermediate position that is neither the normal (non-movable) lowered position nor the movable raised position. In this case, an operation (origin return operation) for returning the effect operation button unit 360 to the reference point (origin) may be performed.

In this case, since the center button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 move along with the return-to-origin operation, it becomes difficult to stare at the surfaces of these boards. In addition, in addition to when the effect operation button unit 360 is operated, the above-described movable decorations (back rear movable decoration 3110, back top rear rotary decoration 3440, back left left decoration 3521, back rear right decoration 3621 etc.) is deviated from the standby position (origin), the operation (origin return operation) of returning the movable decoration to the standby position (origin) may be performed. In operation, the movement of the substrates mounted on the movable decoration makes it difficult to stare at the surfaces of these substrates.

It should be noted that the above-described movable decorations (back bottom middle decoration unit 3320, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back left left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, and back back movable decoration 3110) Even when it is detected that it is deviated from the standby position or the driving position due to the influence, the operation to return to the standby position (origin return operation) may be performed. Lower middle decoration unit 3320, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, and rear back movable decoration 3110) are moved and mounted on the surface of the substrate. can make it difficult to stare at. That is, the movable decorations such as the back top rear rotating decoration 3440, the back left rotation decoration 3510, the back rear right rotation decoration 3610, and the back rear movable decoration 3110, which are arranged so as to be difficult for the player to recognize, are on standby. In a state in which there is a possibility that the surface of the board mounted on the board may be visually recognized by the player due to the position being shifted, the board is moved by operating the movable decoration, thereby making it difficult for the player to stare at the surface of the board. At the same time, it may be moved to the standby position to change the state in which the surface of the substrate is visible to the state in which it is difficult to be visually recognized.

In addition, in the above-described player participation type effect, the operation of the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 is valid for a predetermined period of the game effect. When the operation unit 303 is operated, the display contents of the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 are changed according to the operation. That is, the player comes to pay attention to the effect operation section 301 by executing the player participation type effect. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the effect LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the operation unit 300, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. The central button cover 375, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotating operation part 302 of the effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation button unit 360 are controlled by controlling the light emission of the LED mounted on the surface in the effect light emission mode. , the center button decoration substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are made less visible.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 302, at the timing of starting the player participation type production before the operation of the production operation unit 301 becomes effective, the center button provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300 The LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 and the LEDs mounted on the surface of the effects operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effects operation ring 330 are controlled to produce effects. The center button cover 375 of the operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are decorated with light, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation portion 301 are decorated. These LEDs are extinguished when the period during which the operation is valid (operation valid period) has passed. As a result, the central button cover 375, the peripheral decorative lens 379, the peripheral button cover 380, and the peripheral button cover 375 of the production operation button unit 360 are displayed before the player recognizes that the player participation type production is started and pays attention to the production operation unit 301. And the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission, and the center button decoration substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 are suppressed from being visually recognized, and these substrates Information irrelevant to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, can be suppressed from being visually recognized.

It should be noted that the light emission mode of the LED may be changed before the operation valid period starts and during the operation valid period. , or the brightness of the LEDs, it may be possible to determine whether or not the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is effective. That is, at the timing of starting the player participation type production, the LED mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300 and the production operation ring The LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below 330 is controlled to emit light in the first effect light emission mode, and during the operation valid period, the light emission mode changes from the first effect light emission mode to the second effect time. Light emission may be controlled by switching to the light emission mode. Further, at the timing when the effective period of operation has passed, the light emission mode is switched from the light emission mode during the second performance to the light emission mode during the first performance for light emission control, and after the game performance, the light emission mode for the first performance is switched to the light emission mode for standby and the light emission control is performed. You may make it

Further, when the player-participation type effect is started, the effect display device 1600 displays a prompt to operate the effect operation section 301 . In this example, an image similar to that of the effect operation section 301 is displayed, and the message "Press the button!" It should be noted that the mode of the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 (in this example, color and pattern) may be changed to execute an expectation degree suggesting effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. . As described above, in this example, the degree of expectation for a big hit suggested in the order of white<blue<yellow<green<red<gold is set to increase, and the mode of the image of the effect operation unit 301 is set to one of these. You may make it suggest a jackpot expectation degree by using a color.

In addition, LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration substrate 376 and the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in the presentation operation button unit 360 of the presentation operation unit 300, and the presentation operation ring decoration provided below the presentation operation ring 330 When the LEDs mounted on the surface of the substrate 352 are controlled to emit light in the second effect light emission mode, the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is the same (not necessarily a perfect match, but almost The light emission may be controlled by color (including the same color). As a result, the effect operating unit 301 can be decorated with light in relation to the expectation degree suggesting effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the sense of presence is enhanced. If the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is decorated with light before the timing of displaying the image of the effect display unit 301 on the effect display device 1600, the image of the effect display unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Until then, the production operation unit 301 is decorated with light emitting color (white in this example) of normal (the color with the lowest expectation of big hit), and the image of the production operation unit 301 is displayed on the production display device 1600, or the timing After a predetermined period of time (for example, several seconds) has elapsed since then, the color may be changed to the same color as the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 to be decorated with light.

[Lamp/LED brightness adjustment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation portion 301 in the effect operation unit 300, the LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457; 273, a plate upper right decorative board 278, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface of the plate center upper decorative board 314 may also be adjustable in brightness.), LEDs provided on the game board 5 (in this example, at least A plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame left side decoration board 402, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457, The brightness of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114, the rear upper rear decoration substrate 3452, the rear rear left decoration substrate 3522, and the rear rear right decoration substrate 3622 mounted on the movable decoration can also be adjusted. It is also possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of LEDs as the backlight of the effect display device 1600. However, the LEDs provided in the display that displays important information related to the game (for example, the function display unit 1400 It is desirable that the brightness of the provided LEDs) cannot be adjusted.) and can be adjusted over a range of 70% to 100% in 5% increments.

Specifically, when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, the brightness of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the LEDs provided on the game board 5 is improved, and the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated. When rotated counterclockwise, the brightness of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the LEDs provided on the game board 5 is reduced.

Further, when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302, a barometer corresponding to the current brightness is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a certain period of time, and the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When operated, the scale of the barometer increases until the luminance reaches 100%, and when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise, the scale of the barometer decreases until the luminance reaches 70%. In this way, when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, by making the user pay attention to the display contents of the effect display device 1600, the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 can be provided. The central button decoration board 376, the peripheral button decoration board 37, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 can be suppressed from being visually recognized. Since information such as the number of pins, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, etc. becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from collapsing and the design is improved. can be suppressed, and a drop in amusement can be suppressed.

In addition, since the player participation type effect is not performed as described above, the buttons are mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. When the rotary operation unit 302 is operated in a normal state in which the LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off, the center button decoration board is displayed. 376, LEDs mounted on the surface of the peripheral button decoration board 377, and LEDs mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. , are controlled to emit light over a certain period of time, and the central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the rotary operation part 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are decorated with light. Then, when the period during which the effect operation section 301 is not operated reaches a fixed period, the display of the barometer of the effect display device 1600 is extinguished, and the LED of the effect operation unit 300 is extinguished.

In this way, by controlling the light emission of the LEDs provided in the effect operation unit 300 when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302, the central button decoration board 376 on which these LEDs are mounted, The surfaces of the peripheral button decoration board 377 and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LED.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs mounted below the effect operation ring 330 The brightness of the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided in , cannot be adjusted. That is, the brightness of the LEDs provided in the performance operation unit 300, which is provided at a position close to the player and tends to attract attention, cannot be adjusted, and is controlled to emit light at a preset brightness. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 300 is light-emitting decorated in the light-emitting mode during effect, the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376, the peripheral button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are mounted with a constant brightness or higher. Illuminated from the LED in a situation where the player pays attention to the production operation unit 300 (a situation in which the production operation unit 301 is operated such as a player participation type production or volume adjustment is being performed). The center button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the emitted light. Since information such as numbers, pin numbers, outlines where electronic parts are arranged, etc. becomes difficult for a player to visually recognize, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress deterioration of the design. It is possible to prevent a decline in amusement interest.

In addition, as described above, white is used as the resist on the mounting surfaces of the central button decoration substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the number of pins of the connector is indicated by yellow silk on the mounting surface. Information such as the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged is printed. In this way, in this example, the information is printed on the mounting surface of the board with yellow silk, which has little visual difference (contrast) from white, so it can be used not only when the LED is lit, but also when the LED is extinguished. Even this information is difficult to identify.

It should be noted that the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is performed for a certain period of time (for example, the period from when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the peripheral control MPU is activated, before and after the special symbols that are variably displayed are stopped). It may be always executable except for a certain period of time, one or both of them), or a specific condition such as a period during which a demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state may be made executable only when Further, the result of luminance adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 may be immediately reflected, or the result of the luminance adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 may be reflected depending on the situation (whether or not the variable display is being performed, etc.). are reflected immediately, and the result of luminance adjustment is reflected at a timing later than the operation timing of the rotary operation unit 302 .

In this example, brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 can be performed even when the door frame 3 is open. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened, the LEDs mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 are mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400. LED, LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom left effect unit 3200 LEDs mounted on the back bottom left decoration substrate 3203, movable decorations (back bottom middle decoration unit 3320, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, and A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the back movable decorative body 3110), are turned off (unlit state), and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (this example Then, at least the door frame left side decoration substrate 402, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, and the dish upper left decoration substrate 273, The plate upper right decorative substrate 278 and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be controlled to emit light. That is, when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302 while the door frame 3 is open, the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off. , the brightness cannot be determined from the light emission states of these LEDs.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not opened (the door frame 3 is closed), the LEDs mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 and the back top effect unit 3400 LED mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 Mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250 LED mounted on the back bottom left decoration board 3203 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200, movable decorations (back bottom middle decoration unit 3320, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back back left rotation decoration A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 such as the LEDs provided on the body 3510, the back right rotating decoration 3610, and the back rear movable decoration 3110) are not controlled to turn off (lighting possible state). Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed and the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotary operation part 302, the brightness can be determined by the light emitting state of the LED provided on the game board 5.例文帳に追加

As described above, the back front left decoration board 3714, the back top front decoration board 3422, the back front right decoration board 3814, the back bottom right decoration board 3253, the back bottom left decoration board 3203, the back back decoration board 3114, the back top back For the decoration board 3452, the rear-left decoration board 3522, and the rear-right decoration board 3622, white is used as a resist on the mounting surface, and yellow silk is used on the mounting surface to indicate the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, and the components. Information such as numbers, pin numbers, outlines where electronic parts are arranged, etc. are printed. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is opened and the LEDs mounted on these substrates are in a non-lighting state, it is possible to make it difficult to identify these pieces of information.

[Reverse emission of pachinko machines]
Conventionally, the back side of a pachinko machine is only equipped with a control board and the like, and is not a part that a player recognizes. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment employs a novel construction that has never existed in the past so as to improve the efficiency of various operations on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the like. Description will be made below with reference to FIGS. 303 to 308. FIG.

Fig. 303 is a side view schematically showing the light emitted from the light-emitting decorations at the standby position when viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1, and Fig. 304 is at the appearing position when viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 305 is a side view schematically showing the light emitted from the light-emitting decorative body, FIG. 305 is a diagram showing a back decoration substrate provided with a plurality of holes, and FIG. 307 is a perspective view showing the light emitting area on the side of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 308 is a perspective view showing the light emitting area on the side of the game board viewed from the rear left. is.

(About the light from the luminous decoration)
The game board 5 of this example is provided with an effect display device 1600 having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image. is provided with a plurality of light emitting decorations. Further, the rear unit 3000 is provided with a rear box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, while various units having light-emitting decorations are located inside the back box 3010 and in front of the effect display device 1600. installed.

As the luminous decorations of this example, there are provided a back upper front rotary decoration 3410, a back upper front decoration 3421, a back upper rear decoration 3451, a back rear movable decoration 3110, etc. These luminous decorations are provided. The LED mounted on the board emits light as a part of performance when the pattern is variably displayed, or emits light as decoration of the game board 5 when the pattern is not variably displayed.

First, the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 and 304. FIG. As described above in detail, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the upper front decorative body 3421 of the upper rear effect unit 3400 is provided above the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the front upper rear decoration. At a position on the central front side of the body 3421, a back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is attached. More specifically, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and is composed of a non-light-transmitting portion and a light-transmitting lens portion. In addition, the back upper front decoration 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotating decoration 3410 placed in the center in the left-right direction, and the rear petals overlap the front petals. It is formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be positioned between the two, and almost the entirety is a translucent lens portion with almost no non-translucent portions. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a cut lens shape that bends light, making the luminous decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 303, a back top front decoration substrate 3422 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the back top front rotary decoration 3410 and the back top front decoration 3421 . The back top front decoration substrate 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the back top front decoration body 3421 in the left-right direction. Then, the back top front decorative substrate 3422 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that the forward light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted to the lenses of the back top front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back top front decoration body 3421. By reaching the part, the lens part of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 can be decorated with light.

In addition, top-view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back upper front decoration board 3422 (the surface facing the front side facing the player). The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (toward the player) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 . For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portions of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 positioned in front, and the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration can be efficiently irradiated. The lens portion of 3421 can be decorated with bright light.

A coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back upper front decoration board 3422 excluding the mounted LEDs and other mounted parts. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens parts of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 with light, and the lens parts of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 can be efficiently irradiated. The bright and luminous decoration can be made. In addition, when the LED is in a non-light-emitting state, the front surface of the front upper back decorative substrate 3422 can be seen by the player through the lens portions of the front upper back rotary decoration 3410 and the front upper back decoration 3421. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by making the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 have a coating film made of a white solder resist, the lens portions of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 can be passed through. From the player's side, it is possible to keep the lens part recognizable as white, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 being seen.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper part of the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back surface of the game machine) of the back upper front decoration board 3422 of this example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422, top view type LEDs are mounted, and the back upper front decorative board 3422 (on the side opposite to the player side. In other words, the pachinko It is possible to irradiate light toward the back side of the machine 1).

In addition, not only the front surface but also the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 has a coating film made of white solder resist on the surface portion excluding the mounted multiple LEDs and other mounted parts. is doing. As described above, a coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a high reflectance. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light toward the rear of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 .

As shown in FIG. 303, when the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back top rear decoration 3451 are in the retracted position, the back top rear rotary decoration is behind the left side portion of the back top front decoration substrate 3422 in the left-right direction. Since the body 3440 and the rear upper back decorative body 3451 are positioned, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the upper front decorative substrate 3422 is emitted from the upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the rear upper rear decorative body 3451 . will be irradiated toward Part of such light is reflected by the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back top rear decoration 3451, and is reflected by the back top front decoration substrate 3422 (back top front rotation decoration 3410 and back top front decoration 3421). Then, light leaks out from the gap between the back upper rear rotary decoration body 3440 and the back upper rear decoration body 3451, and such leaked light (light leakage) can be visually recognized by the player. Become. In this way, not only the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 emit light, but also light leaks from the back side of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421. As a result, it is possible to execute a lighting effect that gives the player a sense of depth.

In addition, when the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 and the top back decoration 3451 are in the retracted position, behind the right side portion of the top back decoration substrate 3422 in the left-right direction, the back top rear rotation decoration 3440 and the top back decoration are located. The rear decoration 3451 is not positioned. In addition, when the rear back movable decoration 3110 is at the retracted position, the rear rear movable decoration 3110 is not positioned behind the upper part of the rear upper front decoration substrate 3422 in the vertical direction. In addition, the effect display device 1600 is not positioned behind the upper part of the back upper front decoration board 3422 in the vertical direction. From this, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back surface of the back top front decorative substrate 3422 is divided into the back top rear rotary decoration body 3440, the back top rear decoration body 3451, the back rear movable decoration body 3110, The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decoration board 3422 are directly illuminated without being blocked by the effect display device 1600 . The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decoration board 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 . The light emitting region L1 in the vicinity of the site can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 304, in the state where the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back top rear decoration 3451 are at the appearing positions, all parts of the back top front decoration substrate 3422 in the left-right direction are behind the back top. The rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 are not positioned. In addition, when the rear back movable decoration 3110 is at the appearing position, the rear rear movable decoration 3110 is not positioned behind the upper part of the rear upper front decoration substrate 3422 in the vertical direction. In addition, the effect display device 1600 is not positioned behind the upper part of the back upper front decoration board 3422 in the vertical direction. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decoration substrate 3422 is emitted from the back upper rear rotary decoration body 3440, the back upper rear decoration body 3451, the back rear movable decoration body 3110, and the effect display device. Without being cut off by 1600, the light is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative board 3422. FIG. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decoration board 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 . The light emitting region L1 in the vicinity of the site can be visually recognized brightly.

Next, the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 and 304. FIG. As described above in detail, behind the front upper back decoration 3421, the upper back decoration 3451 of the upper back lifting decoration unit 3450 is provided. , back upper rear rotary ornament 3440 is attached. More specifically, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape resembling a cherry blossom, and is composed of a non-light-transmitting portion and a light-transmitting lens portion. In addition, the back top rear decoration 3451 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms having the same size as the back top rotation decoration 3440 in the front and back direction so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is formed in a shape as if it were rotated in the direction of rotation, and substantially the entirety is a translucent lens portion with almost no non-translucent portions. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a cut lens shape that bends light, making the luminous decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 303, a back top decoration board 3452 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the top back rotary decoration 3440 and the top back decoration 3451 . The rear upper back decoration board 3452 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that the forward light from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portions of the upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the rear upper rear decoration 3451. Then, the lens parts of the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 can be decorated with light.

In addition, the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 are capable of moving from the retracted position to the appearing position when predetermined rendering conditions are satisfied. When the back upper back rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper back decoration 3451 are in the retracted position, they are located behind the front upper back decoration 3421 and invisible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is positioned behind the top of the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 , whereas the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 are positioned behind the tank rail 553 . A performance display device 1600 is positioned behind the lower part of the . Further, in a state where the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 are moved to the appearance position, they are positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 and can be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, top-view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back upper rear decoration board 3452 (the surface facing the front side facing the player). The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player's side) of the upper back decoration substrate 3452 . Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portions of the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back top rear decoration 3451 positioned in front, and the back top rear rotation decoration 3440 and the back top rear decoration. The lens portion of 3451 can be decorated with bright light.

In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface portion of the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452 excluding the mounted LEDs and other mounted parts. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 with light, and the lens portions of the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 can be efficiently irradiated. The bright and luminous decoration can be made. In addition, especially when the LED is in a non-light-emitting state, the front surface of the back top decoration board 3452 is exposed to the player through the lens portions of the back top rotation decoration 3440 and the back top back decoration 3451 . It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by making the front surface of the back top decoration substrate 3452 have a coating film made of a white solder resist, the lens portions of the top back rotation decorations 3440 and the top back decorations 3451 can be passed through. From the player's side, it is possible to keep the lens part recognizable as white, and it is possible to suppress the loss of interest due to the front surface of the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452 being seen.

As shown in FIG. 303, in the state where the back upper back rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper back decoration 3451 are in the retracted position, the back upper back rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper back decoration 3451 are positioned in front of the back upper back rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451. A rotating decoration 3410 and a back upper front decoration 3421 are located. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper decoration board 3452 is reflected by the back upper front rotating decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421, and is reflected on the back upper rear decoration board 3452. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the are irradiated. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decoration board 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 . The light emitting region L1 in the vicinity of the site can be visually recognized brightly.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper part of the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back surface of the game machine) of the rear upper rear decoration board 3452 of this example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear upper back decoration board 3452, top view type LEDs are mounted, and the rear upper rear decoration board 3452 (the side opposite to the player side. In other words, the pachinko It is possible to irradiate the light toward the back side of the machine 1).

In addition, not only the front surface but also the rear surface of the rear upper rear decorative substrate 3452 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface portion excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface and other mounted parts. have. As described above, a coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a high reflectance. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light toward the rear side of the back upper decoration substrate 3452 .

As shown in FIG. 303, in a state in which the back upper rotary decoration 3440 and the upper back decoration 3451 are at the retracted position, regardless of whether or not the movable back ornament 3110 is at the retracted position, the upper back rear ornament 3110 is at the retracted position. Behind the upper part of the decoration substrate 3452 in the up-down direction, the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is not positioned. In addition, the effect display device 1600 is not positioned behind the upper part of the upper back decoration board 3452 in the vertical direction. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the upper back decorative substrate 3452 is not blocked by the rear movable decorative body 3110 and the effect display device 1600, and the light from the upper rear decorative substrate 3452 is not blocked. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind are directly irradiated. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the upper back decoration board 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting area L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 304, when the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back top rear decoration 3451 are in the appearing position, they are positioned in front of the effect display device 1600, so that the back top rear decoration substrate 3452 is positioned. The light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface is not emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 . For this reason, in a state where the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back top rear decoration 3451 are at the appearing positions, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the top back decoration substrate 3452 are controlled so as not to emit light. .

Next, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 and 304. FIG. As described above in detail, behind the upper back decoration body 3451, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100 is provided. More specifically, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is a transparent flat plate-like decorative body 3111 that extends in the left-right direction and has a decoration that constitutes a part of the decorative portion 3150 with embossed (relief-like) unevenness. , a translucent sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 provided behind the decorative body 3111 and having a decoration (pattern) that constitutes the rest of the decorative portion 3150; and a rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 and having a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface. there is Back rear decorative substrate 3114 emits light from a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface, so that forward light from the plurality of LEDs reaches decoration 3111 and decoration 3111 (back rear The movable decoration 3110) can be decorated with light.

As shown in FIG. 304, the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 can move from the retracted position to the appearing position when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied. When the rear back movable decoration body 3110 is at the retracted position, it is located behind the front upper back decoration body 3421 and is invisible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is positioned behind the upper part of the back movable decorative body 3110, while the performance display device 1600 is positioned behind the lower part of the movable decorative body 3110. . Further, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearing position, it is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 and can be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), a plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a and a top-view type second LEDs 3114b are provided as a plurality of LEDs. is implemented. The side-view type first LED 3114a can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the back decoration substrate 3114, while the top-view type second LED 3114b can emit light toward the back decoration substrate 3114. It is possible to irradiate light toward the side of 3114 . In addition, a transparent plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided on the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 emit light toward the light guide radiation plate 3113. By irradiating, the light guide radiation plate 3113 can emit light toward the front, and the light can be uniformly irradiated to the decoration 3111 as a whole, and the decoration 3111 (the back and rear movable decoration 3110 ) can be easily visually recognized and decorated with light emission.

A coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, excluding the mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, the decorative body 3111 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and the decorative body 3111 (rear rear movable decorative body 3110) can be decorated with bright light. In addition, there is a possibility that the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 can be visually recognized from the player side through the decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. be. In this regard, by forming the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to have a coating film made of a white solder resist, even if the decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is passed through, the decorative body 3111 cannot be seen from the player side. can only be recognized as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 being visible.

As shown in FIG. 303, when the rear back movable decoration 3110 is in the retracted position, in front of the back rear movable decoration 3110, there are an upper front rotary decoration 3410, a front upper back decoration 3421, and an upper rear decoration. A decoration 3451 is located. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the front-back rotary decoration 3410, the front-back decoration 3421, and the rear-back decoration 3451. , the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back rear movable decorative body 3110 are irradiated. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further reaches near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting area L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

In addition, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is diffused in the light guide radiation plate 3113 and emitted toward the front of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Light is also emitted toward the sides of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the top, bottom, left, and right ends of the radiation plate 3113 . In other words, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 passes through the light guide radiating plate 3113 from the upper, lower, left and right ends of the light guiding radiating plate 3113 to the rear decorative substrate 3114 ( The light is emitted toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted through the light guide radiation plate 3113 near the transparent portion of the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the pachinko machine 1. The area L2 and the light emitting area L3 can be visually recognized brightly.

Light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted from the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Part of the light emitted from the rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted upward and rearward. When the back-back movable decoration body 3110 is at the retracted position, the performance display device 1600 is not positioned above and behind the back-back decoration board 3114 . That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is blocked by the effect display device 1600 from the upper end of the light guide radiation plate 3113 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. Instead, the light is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the back decorative substrate 3114 (light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further emits light near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The region L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 303, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearing position, it is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600, so that a plurality of the rear-back movable decorative bodies 3110 mounted on the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 The light from the LED is not emitted toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553. - 特許庁

In this example, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a transparent plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is guided. Although the light is diffused by the light radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation plate 3113 may not be provided. In such a case, the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a side-view type first light so that the side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the upper and rear sides of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are irradiated with light. An LED 3114a is preferably provided. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 is also irradiated toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the back decoration substrate 3114, and the pachinko machine 1 The light emitting region L2 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the rear box 3010 can be visually recognized brightly. In addition, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is irradiated toward the rear box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the rear decorative substrate 3114, and the rear box 3010 , and the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly.

Although the back box 3010 of this example is provided with a transparent portion in part, the back box 3010 may be provided with a through portion instead of the transparent portion. Even in such a case, the light from the LED of the light-emitting decoration can pass through the through portion of the back box 3010 . For example, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 passes through the bright through portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion can be visually recognized brightly.

In addition, the back box 3010 of this example is provided with a translucent portion that is a transparent portion and a non-translucent portion. side) is printed in white, painted in white, or mirror-printed or mirror-finished, making it possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.) I have to. Thereby, the light directed to the non-light-transmitting portion can be efficiently reflected to the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly.

In addition, with regard to the above-described light-emitting decorations, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of various decoration boards is not only emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located in the front of the decoration board (such as the decoration board of the light-emitting decoration other than the light-emitting decoration described above) that should be specialized for the production. The light from the plurality of LEDs is configured so as not to irradiate the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . Specifically, for the decorative substrate, which should be specialized for production, the mounting surface is formed with a coating film made of green or black solder resist, and the light from the LED is diffused by enclosing it in a box. is suppressed to produce point light emission so that the light from the LED can be clearly visually recognized.

As another example, the rear decorative substrate 3114 may be provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 305, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is directed toward the decorative body 3111 positioned in front of the rear upper decorative substrate 3452. Part of the light irradiated toward the decorative body 3111 is reflected and directed to the rear of the decorative body 3111. - 特許庁When a plurality of holes are provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114, the reflected light of the light irradiated toward the decorative body 3111 passes through the plurality of holes and travels to the rear of the rear decorative substrate 3114. becomes possible. A decoration base 3115 is attached to the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 so as to cover the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 . Holes are provided at corresponding positions. As a result, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated toward the rear of the rear decorative substrate 3114 . That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is partly reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114. , the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper and rearward) the back decoration board 3114, pass through the transparent part of the back box 3010, and furthermore the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of can be visually recognized brightly.

In the above description, the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is preferably formed smaller than the existing LED. For example, when the size of the hole provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114 is large, light from behind the rear decorative substrate 3114 (for example, light emitted from the effect display device 1600) It is easy to enter through the holes provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114, and there is a risk that the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 may look like they are lit even when they are turned off. By reducing the size of the holes provided in the post-decorative substrate 3114, such adverse effects can be reduced.

Similarly, the back decoration substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, but the number of these holes is as small as possible, and for example, they are mounted on the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114. It is preferably formed less than the number of LEDs. For example, when the number of holes provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114 is increased, light from the rear of the rear decorative substrate 3114 (for example, light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is emitted from the rear decorative substrate. It is easy to enter through the holes provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114, and there is a risk that the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 may look like they are lit even when they are turned off. By reducing the number of holes provided in the post-decorative substrate 3114, such an adverse effect can be reduced.

In the above description, a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided in the rear-back decorative substrate 3114. holes may be provided. As a result, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper front decoration board 3422 is reflected by the back upper front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back upper front decoration body 3421. Through the plurality of holes provided in the front decoration substrate 3422, light can be efficiently irradiated toward the rear of the back upper front decoration substrate 3422. FIG. In addition, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back top decoration substrate 3452 is reflected by the top back rotation decoration body 3440 and the back top back decoration body 3451, and the back top decoration. Through the plurality of holes provided in the substrate 3452 , light can be efficiently irradiated toward the rear of the back upper decoration substrate 3452 . That is, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back top front decoration substrate 3422 and the back top rear decoration substrate 3452 becomes reflected light, and the back top front decoration substrate 3422 and the back top rear decoration substrate are reflected. It is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the 3452, passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010, and further illuminates the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. It can be seen brightly.

Next, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are not shown in FIGS. 303 and 304, but will be described below. As described above in detail, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the back front left decoration 3713 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 is provided on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the effect is displayed. A back front right decoration 3813 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 is provided on the right side of the display area of the device 1600 . More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are provided with patterns such as characters, items, logos, etc., in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It consists of a light lens part. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a cut lens shape that bends light, making the luminous decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

A back front left decorative substrate 3714 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the back front left decorative body 3713 . Then, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that forward light from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the back front left decoration body 3713, and the rear front left decorative substrate 3714 emits light. The lens portion of the decorative body 3713 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, there is a possibility that the front surface of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 can be visually recognized from the player side through the lens portion of the back front left decoration body 3713, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. There is In this regard, by forming the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 with a coating film made of white solder resist, even if the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 is passed through, the lens portion can be seen from the player side. Since the white color can be recognized, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 being visible.

In addition, side-view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 (the surface facing the front side facing the player). The side-view type LED can reflect light on the front surface of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 and emit light toward the front (player side) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 . Therefore, the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 positioned in front can be efficiently irradiated with light, and the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 can be decorated brightly.

A coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 excluding the mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 can be decorated with bright light.

In the above, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is provided with a side-view type LED directed leftward so that light is emitted toward the left side of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 . In other words, the left side of the back box 3010 that is closer to the back rear decorative board 3114 among the sides of the back box 3010 is located on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714, and the direction of the side-view type LED. is provided facing the left side of the back box 3010 . Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decoration board 3714 is irradiated toward the left side of the back box 3010 located on the left side of the back front left decoration board 3714. becomes. The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 307, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 is emitted from the light emitting area near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. L2 can be visually recognized brightly.

The back front right decorative body 3813 has the same configuration as the back front left decorative body 3713, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 is emitted from the back front right decorative board 3814. It is configured to irradiate the right side of the back box 3010 located on the right side of the . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 308, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is emitted from the transparent portion of the light emitting area L3 on the right side of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. You can see your surroundings brightly.

Next, the under-back middle rotary decoration 3310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 and 304. FIG. As described above in detail, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5 , the lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower-back middle effect unit 3300 is provided in the center of the lower side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 . More specifically, the back-bottom-middle rotary decoration 3310 has six number decorations "1" to "6" formed in relief on the entire surface, and is rotated 60 degrees clockwise around the center. It is arranged on the circumference for each angle, and is composed of a non-light-transmitting portion and a light-transmitting lens portion. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a cut lens shape that bends light, making the luminous decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 303, on the rear side of the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310, a back-lower-middle first decoration substrate 3322 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached. Then, the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that the forward light from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310, The lens portion of the lower middle rotation decoration 3310 can be decorated with light.

As shown in FIG. 304, the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 is capable of moving from the retracted position to the appearing position when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied. In a state in which the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, it is positioned behind the game panel 1100 forming the game area 5a and is visible to the player. At this time, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are positioned behind the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 . In addition, when the back-lower-middle-rotation decorative body 3310 has moved to the appearance position, it is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 and can be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, top-view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) of the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 . The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player's side) of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back and bottom. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 positioned in front with light, and the lens portion of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be decorated brightly.

In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322, excluding the mounted LEDs and other mounted parts. there is A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 with light, and the lens portion of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be decorated with bright light. In addition, the front surface of the lower back center first decoration substrate 3322 is visually recognized from the player's side through the lens portion of the back lower center rotary decoration 3310, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. It may be possible. In this regard, by forming the front surface of the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 with a coating film made of white solder resist, even if the lens part of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is passed through, the player can see It is possible to keep the lens part recognizable as white, and to suppress the decrease in interest due to the front surface of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back and bottom being visible.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back surface of the gaming machine) of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the present example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, top view type LEDs are mounted behind the first lower back middle decoration substrate 3322 (opposite side to the player side. In other words, it is possible to irradiate light toward the back side of the pachinko machine 1).

As shown in FIG. 303, in the state in which the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are positioned behind the back-bottom middle first decoration board 3322. ing. The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. However, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is located behind the back box 3010, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the first decoration board 3322 in the back bottom Although the vicinity of the light-emitting area L4 near the transparent portion of the back box 3010 in is irradiated so as to be bright, it is blocked by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. FIG.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 304, in the state where the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 is at the appearing position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. FIG. For this reason, in the state in which the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is at the appearing position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 is controlled so as not to emit light.

From the above, as light-emitting decorations for brightening the back side and the side side of the pachinko machine 1, the back top front rotating decoration body 3410, the back top front decoration body 3421, and the back top rear decoration body 3451, back rear movable decoration 3110 is provided, three back front left decoration units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and three back front right decorations are provided on the right side of the game board 5. A unit 3810 is provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 306, the light-emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. , The light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind. As shown in FIG. 308, the light-emitting ornament provided on the right side of the game board 5 is visible from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1). , the light emitting region L3 is brightened.

(About the advantages of providing a light-emitting area on the back side of a pachinko machine)
Generally, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility provided in a game hall. Specifically, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on one side of the island facility, or a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on both sides of the island facility. be done. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the interior is closed and dark. By the way, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, control members such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, wiring connecting the control members, a supply mechanism for the game balls B used in the game, and the like are arranged. , maintenance may be required for a predetermined portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in rows on both sides of the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 on one side of the island facility is opened and the pachinko machine 1 on the other side is opened. Although it is possible to perform maintenance on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, since the inside of the island equipment is dark, the visibility of the parts to be maintained is poor, and it is difficult to visually check the back side of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can open and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 with one side as an axis. can be opened to maintain the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. However, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, light from the outside (light from the hall) is directed to the portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 far from the opening axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy to reach and can be visually recognized brightly, light from the outside (light of the hall) hardly reaches the part near the opening axis of the main body frame 4 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, cannot be seen brightly. In other words, when the portion to be maintained is close to the opening axis of the main body frame 4, the visibility of the portion to be maintained is poor, making it difficult to visually check the back side of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the plurality of light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for the purpose of decoration, and also the back side and the side side of the pachinko machine 1 for purposes other than decoration. is configured to illuminate for the purpose of Specifically, the light from the LED mounted on the light-emitting decoration is directed not only to the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also to the back side and the side side, and the light illuminates the transparent portion of the back box 3010. By configuring to pass through, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the light emitting area L2 and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 are brightened. be able to. For example, the light irradiating the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 can pass through the transparent parts of the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 to brighten the area behind the pachinko machine 1 as well. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside of the island facility is closed and dark, but the inside of the island facility can be brightened by lighting the rear of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加As a result, when performing maintenance on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the portion to be maintained is improved, and the efficiency of visual work on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In this example, a plurality of light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 have a role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and a role of brightening the back side and the side side of the pachinko machine 1. It is configured to For example, by providing an LED that can emit light toward the rear side on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1, but if an LED dedicated to maintenance is provided, The number of parts increases and the cost increases. In this regard, it is possible to prevent the cost from increasing by making the plurality of luminous decorations that brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 also play the role of brightening the back side and side sides of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加can.

In this example, the light from the LEDs of the plurality of light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 is configured to brighten the back side and the side side of the pachinko machine 1. Since it is not desirable to look directly at the light source of the LED during maintenance on the back side or the side side, the light from the LED that brightens the back side or the side side of the pachinko machine 1 is It is configured to provide indirect light that is not viewed directly. For example, the back upper front decoration body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decoration substrate 3422, and makes it possible to emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, when viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, when viewing the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553), the LED is provided with a cover body so that the light source of the LED is not directly viewed, The light from the LED is configured to be indirect light. As a result, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 from interfering with the work.

(Regarding the characteristic configuration of the luminous decoration of this example)
The luminous decoration body of this example is variously devised so that not only the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is brightened for the purpose of decoration, but also the back side and the side side thereof are brightened for purposes other than decoration. Although the details have been described above, specific configurations include the following configurations.

First, the back-rear movable decoration 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 so that it can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 . In the state in which the back rear movable decoration 3110 is at the retracted position, the back upper front rotary decoration 3410, the back upper front decoration 3421, and the back upper rear decoration 3451 are positioned in front of the back rear movable decoration 3110. there is As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the front-back rotary decoration 3410, the front-back decoration 3421, and the rear-back decoration 3451. , the rear box 3010 and the tank rail 553 positioned behind the rear decorative substrate 3114 are indirectly irradiated. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 illuminates the back rear movable decoration body 3110, brightens the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and the back box. Passing through 3010, the luminous area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of this example is decorated with light by receiving light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The upper front rotary decoration 3410, the back upper front decoration 3421, and the back upper rear decoration 3451 have a larger area than the back rear movable decoration 3110. - 特許庁For this reason, when the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 is reflected on the back top rotary decoration 3410, the back top front decoration 3421, and the back top decoration 3451, In addition, it is diffused in a wider area than the rear movable decorative body 3110 . As a result, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be widened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

In the above, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the rear surface of the front upper back decoration body 3421 and the rear surface of the rear upper rear decoration body 3451 . A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected at a high reflectance on the rear surface of the front upper rear decoration body 3421 and the rear surface of the rear upper rear decoration body 3451. Therefore, the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back decorative substrate 3114 are efficiently irradiated. As a result, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

Next, the back rear movable decoration 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and is capable of emitting light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, as described as another example, by providing a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction in the rear decorative substrate 3114, the reflected light of the light irradiated toward the decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reflected. , through a plurality of holes to reach the rear side of the rear decoration substrate 3114 . That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is partly reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114. , the rear box 3010 and the tank rail 553 positioned behind (upper and rearward) the rear decorative substrate 3114 are irradiated. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 illuminates the back rear movable decoration body 3110, brightens the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and the back box. Passing through the transparent part of 3010, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened.

Next, the back upper front decoration body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decoration substrate 3422, and is capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. there is Behind the front upper back decoration 3421, there are an upper rear rotary decoration 3440, an upper rear rear decoration 3451, a portion where the movable rear decoration 3110 is positioned at the retracted position, and an upper rear rotary decoration. There are 3440, a rear upper rear decorative body 3451, and a portion where the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located. Of these, the part where the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, the back upper rear decoration 3451, and the back rear movable decoration 3110 are positioned at the retracted position is mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decoration substrate 3422. The light from a plurality of LEDs is reflected by the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 located behind, and the back rear movable decoration 3110, and directed to the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. is irradiated. On the other hand, for the portion where the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 are not located, the back box 3010 and the tank rail located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 553 is directly irradiated. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decoration board 3422 passes through the back box 3010 to the pachinko machine 1 in addition to the role of illuminating the front side of the pachinko machine 1. It can play the role of brightening the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 in the rear and brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

Next, as light-emitting decorations, on the upper part of the game board 5, a back upper front rotary decoration 3410, a back upper front decoration 3421, a back upper back decoration 3451, and a back rear movable decoration 3110 are provided. Three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided on the right side of the game board 5, which are provided separately. It is The light-emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light-emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 , When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind, the luminous area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the luminous decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is , when viewing the pachinko machine 1 from behind, the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and multiple areas on the back side and the side side of the pachinko machine 1 are illuminated. Allows to brighten.

In addition, the light-emitting decoration includes an LED capable of emitting light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, is provided. Then, for the LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, the light is reflected by a member located in front of it, and directed toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. The back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the indirect light. On the other hand, the LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1 can brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1 with its direct light. At this time, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 is used, and an area that can be brightened by indirect light and the pachinko machine 1 An LED that can emit light toward the rear (rear side) of the LED may be used to separate the area from the area that can be brightened by direct light from the LED.

In the above, the area that can be brightened by the direct light from the LED may be the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the operator such as the hall manager can work. Are suitable. Although the details will be described later, for example, the operation part 640a and the attachment/detachment part of the back cover 640 can be mentioned as a part where a worker such as a hall manager can work. The operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at a position where they can receive direct light from the LED, so that they can be visually recognized brighter by receiving the direct light from the LED than when receiving the indirect light. can. As a result, when working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the body frame 4. By making the operation part 640a and the attachment/detachment part brightly visible, the operator can easily confirm the object to be operated, and the attachment/detachment of the back cover 640 to/from the body frame 4 is facilitated, and the inspection work of the hall manager is facilitated. can be facilitated.

In addition, when irradiating direct light from the LED to a part where a worker such as a hall manager can work as described above, the board on which such an LED is mounted It is preferable to make the mounting surface dark (eg, green or black). If the mounting surface is a dark color, the light is less likely to be reflected by the dark mounting surface, so the direct light from the LED does not diffuse much, and the area where the direct light from the LED is irradiated can be pinpointed. Light can be emitted. As a result, when, for example, the operating portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at positions capable of receiving direct light from the LEDs, the direct light from the LEDs is pinpointed, The operation portion 640a and the attachment/detachment portion of the back cover 640 can be clearly seen due to the difference in brightness from the peripheral portion.

(Regarding the light intensity adjustment of the light emitting area provided on the back side of the pachinko machine)
There are various hall environments in which the island facilities are provided. For example, regardless of the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is conceivable that the inside of the island facilities is separately brightened. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is equipped with a configuration that brightens the back side, but there is a possibility that it is not necessary to brighten such a back side. In addition, although the inside of the island facility is dark, if the number of pachinko machines 1 whose back sides are brightened as game machines provided in the island facilities is small, the back side is brightened with normal brightness. In that case, there is a possibility that the inside of the island facility may not be sufficiently bright. Therefore, an example in which the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted according to the hall environment will be described below.

The light-emitting decoration of this example includes an LED capable of emitting light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 and an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. , are provided, but for these LEDs, the light amount is adjusted step by step by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. allows you to adjust. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of LED light intensity from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and the higher the stage, the more the LED light intensity increases. . In other words, the LED of the luminous decoration body is configured so that the light is directed toward the rear (rear side) of the pachinko machine 1 to brighten the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, but the light amount of the LED is made adjustable. Thus, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed. For example, when the inside of the island facility is a bright hall environment, the operator such as the hall manager may adjust the light intensity of the LEDs so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened. If the inside of the island facility is in a dark hall environment, an operator such as a hall manager can brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by adjusting the light intensity of the LEDs to increase. In this way, by making it possible to adjust the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the hall environment, when performing maintenance on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the parts to be maintained is improved. It is possible to improve the efficiency of visual work on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In the above, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by making it possible to adjust the light amount of the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations, and the degree of freedom in the viewing mode for the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. However, if the light intensity of the LEDs of all the light-emitting decorations provided on the front side of the game board 5 is adjusted collectively, for example, if the light intensity of the LEDs of all the light-emitting decorations is reduced, , the front side of the pachinko machine 1 becomes too dark, and there is a possibility that the original effect (attracting customers, etc.) of using the light-emitting decorative body is lost while the operator is working during the hall business. Also, when the operator reduces the light intensity of the LED of the light-emitting decoration and neglects to restore the light intensity of the LED after the work is completed, the original effect of using the light-emitting decoration is reduced. It may get lost. In this regard, in this example, among the luminous decorations for decoration provided on the front side of the game board 5, the back upper front rotating decoration 3410, the back upper front decoration 3421, the back upper rear decoration 3451, the back As described above, the rear movable decorative body 3110 and the like also have the role of brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so they are subject to adjustment of the light amount of the LEDs by the light amount adjustment operation. Of the luminous ornaments for decorative purposes provided on the side, the luminous ornaments having the first large prize winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for luminous decoration of the first large winning opening 2005 are installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It does not have a role to brighten the LED, and is regarded as a light-emitting decorative body that brightens with emphasis on the purpose of attracting customers. That is, among the light-emitting decorations for decorative purposes, at least the light-emitting decorations having a role of brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are subject to adjustment of the light amount of the LEDs by the light amount adjustment operation. As a result, even if the light amount of the LED of the light-emitting decoration is adjusted, for example, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened, the light-emitting decoration provided on the front side of the game board 5 for the purpose of attracting customers remains bright. It does not darken, and the purpose of attracting customers can be well maintained.

The operation of adjusting the light amount of the LED of the light-emitting decoration can be performed both during the standby state in which the pattern is not variably displayed and in the variable display in which the pattern is variably displayed. In addition, in this example, the player can perform the light amount adjustment operation by using the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the production operation unit 300. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an operation section may be separately provided for the hall manager to perform the operation for adjusting the amount of light. At this time, the adjustment target of the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation section for the hall manager is the same as the adjustment target of the LED light amount by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation section for the player. In addition, even if the light intensity is adjusted to the minimum light intensity, the light intensity adjustment operation on the operation unit for the player cannot make the light intensity zero and the LED cannot be completely turned off. As for the light quantity adjustment operation, when the minimum light quantity is adjusted, the light quantity may be set to zero and the LED may be turned off completely.

(Regarding the visibility of the wiring provided on the side of the pachinko machine)
Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting the various substrates are provided. The pachinko machine 1 of this example uses the light from the light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 and has a configuration that brightens the back side, so the wiring exposed outside the pachinko machine 1 , it is easy to check the state from the outside, but it is difficult to check the state from the outside of the wiring that is not exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, an example in which it is possible to easily check the state from the outside of wiring that is not exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, three back front left decoration units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5 as light-emitting decorations that brighten the back side and the side side of the pachinko machine 1, and on the right side of the game board 5, Three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. As shown in FIG. 307, the light-emitting ornament provided on the left side of the game board 5 is a transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind. The light emitting area L2 in the vicinity is brightened, and as shown in FIG. The light emitting region L3 in the vicinity of the transparent portion on the left side of the panel) is brightened.

Also, on the back side of the back box 3010, an effect drive board 1720 is attached to drive the decoration boards, the drive motors, the drive solenoids, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 according to commands from the peripheral control board 1510. It is The effect driving board 1720 is electrically connected to the decoration board, the driving motor, the driving solenoid, etc. by a plurality of wirings. I arranged it like this. In this regard, the light-emitting ornament provided on the left side of the game board 5 is positioned so that the light-emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) is visible from behind the pachinko machine 1. Since the light is emitted so as to make it brighter, the state of the wiring along the right side surface inside the back box 3010 can be visually recognized well. Similarly, the light-emitting ornaments provided on the right side of the game board 5 cover the light-emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind. Since the light is emitted so as to make it brighter, the state of the wiring along the left side inside the back box 3010 can be visually recognized well. For example, if the decorative substrate, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. do not operate normally, the wiring along the left side or right side inside the back box 3010 may be disconnected or disconnected from the connection terminal. However, by irradiating light so as to brighten the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the wiring from the side of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, and the work of checking the state of the wiring is facilitated. Efficiency can be improved.

In addition, when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 is a part of the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 far from the opening axis of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind. The left side of the pachinko machine 1, which is near the opening axis of the body frame 4, is the right side of the pachinko machine 1. , the light from the outside (light from the hole) is difficult to reach, and cannot be visually recognized brightly. For this reason, in the case where there is no configuration for brightening the back side or the side side like a conventional game machine, the wiring is arranged near the right side of the pachinko machine 1, which is the part near the opening axis of the main body frame 4. It was particularly difficult to check the condition of the wiring when it became necessary to do so. In this regard, in this example, the light is emitted so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010, and the wiring that needs to be arranged near the right side of the pachinko machine 1 is , along the right side of the inside of the back box 3010. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state of the wiring along the right side surface inside the back box 3010 cannot be visually recognized.

In this example, as the wiring along the side surface inside the back box 3010, the wiring that connects the effect drive board 1720, the decoration board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, etc. is mentioned, but other than that. Alternatively, for example, wiring connected to the main control board 1310 may be used. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. For example, through an external terminal board 558 connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring, information on the game is output to the outside (hall computer). and At this time, if the wiring connecting the main control board 1310 and the external terminal board 558 is tampered with, the information about the game cannot be properly grasped outside (the hall computer), and the pachinko machine 1 This creates a situation in which it is easy to commit fraud. In other words, among various wirings, the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 can be said to be wiring having a high degree of importance in advancing the game. In this regard, by irradiating light so as to brighten the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is improved, and tampering with such wiring can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, as for the wiring along the left side and the right side inside the back box 3010, a plurality of wirings are bundled by a hook part integrally formed in the back box 3010 or a bundling wire. These hook portions and bundling wires are made of translucent members and are provided at positions visible through the transparent portions on the left side and right side of the back box 3010 . As a result, the light is emitted so as to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1). At that time, the hook portion and the bundling wire itself are illuminated, and the state of the wiring can be visually recognized well. Also, when irradiating light so as to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) Moreover, it is possible to prevent the brightness of such light-emitting regions from decreasing without hindering the progress of light.

In addition, regarding the wiring along the left side and right side inside the back box 3010, a plurality of wirings are arranged so that the transparent parts on the left side and right side of the back box 3010 are not blocked by a plurality of wirings. are provided in the vertical direction on the left side and the right side of the back box 3010 so as to be superimposed or bundled. For example, if a plurality of wirings are provided in parallel with the left side and right side of the back box 3010, the transparent portions on the left side and right side of the back box 3010 are blocked. It becomes difficult to maintain the brightness of the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion of the surface and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1). Such a situation can be prevented by providing a plurality of wirings so as not to block the transparent portions on the left side and the right side.

(Regarding a change in the appearance of the light-emitting region when the state changes)
In addition, in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island facility, if the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is open and maintenance is being performed, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island facility Even if an abnormality occurs, it is difficult to notice the occurrence of the abnormality because the front side of the pachinko machine 1 where the abnormality has occurred cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, an example in which the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be recognized even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, as light-emitting decorations, an upper front rotary decoration 3410, an upper front front decoration 3421, an upper rear decoration 3451, and a rear movable decoration 3110 are provided on the upper part of the game board 5. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. In addition, for these light-emitting decorations, in the event that some kind of abnormality occurs, such as detecting illegality due to magnets or vibrations, and the game cannot be played, the light-emitting decoration will be used until the abnormality is resolved. An LED provided on the body is controlled to blink. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are light emitting areas L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) as light emitting areas that can be brightened by the light emitting decorations. ) and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LEDs provided on the light emitting ornaments are controlled to blink. In this case, these light-emitting regions were made to blink. As a result, in a state in which a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island facility, even during maintenance with the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 opened, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island facility can be When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the light-emitting area that can be brightened by other light-emitting decorations of the pachinko machine 1 blinks, making it possible to recognize the occurrence of an abnormality through the inside of the island equipment. Become. In other words, even during maintenance with the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 open, it is possible to quickly discover an abnormality in the other pachinko machine 1 in the same island facility through the inside of the island facility, and eventually. It is possible to prevent fraudulent use of other pachinko machines 1. - 特許庁

In addition, regarding the LED of the light-emitting decoration, light amount adjustment operation is performed using the rotary operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the production operation unit 300, so that the light amount can be adjusted step by step. making it possible. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of LED light intensity from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and the higher the stage, the more the LED light intensity increases. . As described above in detail, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by adjusting the light amount of the LED of the light-emitting decoration. However, when some kind of abnormality occurs, such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration, if the LED of the light-emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to blink with an adjusted light amount, the When the adjusted amount of light is darkened, the occurrence of abnormality may not be noticed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁In addition, when the operator reduces the light amount of the LED of the light-emitting decoration and neglects to restore the light amount of the LED after the work is completed, the light amount of the LED is small, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 Then, there were times when we did not notice the occurrence of an abnormality. In this regard, in this example, during a period in which a game cannot be played due to some kind of abnormality such as the detection of fraud due to a magnet or vibration, the amount of light emitted from the LED of the light-emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. The adjustment is disabled, and the LED is controlled to flash at a predetermined light intensity (for example, stage 5, which is the upper limit of the light intensity that can be adjusted in normal times). As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, when the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decorative body blinks, the light emitting area does not become too dark. In other words, even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the occurrence of the abnormality can be detected without fail, and the abnormality can be detected without fail, and furthermore, fraudulent use of other pachinko machines 1 can be prevented. can be prevented.

Similarly, for the light-emitting decoration, when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, the LED provided in the light-emitting decoration is controlled to blink until the body frame 4 is closed. I have to. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are light emitting areas L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) as light emitting areas that can be brightened by the light emitting decorations. ) and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LEDs provided on the light emitting ornaments are controlled to blink. In this case, it was decided that these light-emitting regions would blink. For example, in a state in which a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on an island facility, if the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is open for maintenance, the body of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility Even if a person illegally opens the frame 4, the front side of the illegally opened pachinko machine 1 cannot be visually recognized, making it difficult to notice the act of illegally opening. However, in this example, when the body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is illegally opened by the fraudulent person, it is possible to make it brighter with the light-emitting decorations of the other pachinko machine 1. By blinking the light-emitting area, it becomes possible to recognize the act of illegal opening through the inside of the island facility. In other words, even when the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is open for maintenance, the act of illegally opening the other pachinko machine 1 in the same island facility through the inside of the island facility is detected early. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent use of other pachinko machines 1. - 特許庁

Regarding the luminous decoration, when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, not only the time until the body frame 4 is closed, but also a certain period of time after the body frame 4 is closed. Until then, the blinking control of the LED provided on the light-emitting decoration may be continued. As a result, when a fraudulent person illegally opens the body frame 4 of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, even if the opening is for a short time, the other pachinko machine 1 is decorated with light. The blinking of the light-emitting area that can be made brighter by the body continues for a certain period of time, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible from overlooking the act of illegally opening the island equipment through the inside.

In addition, regarding the light-emitting decoration, when the transition to the standby state in which the pattern variation is not performed, the light amount of the LED provided in the light-emitting decoration is reduced from the start of the pattern variation until the standby state ends. I try to control the decrease. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are light emitting areas L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) as light emitting areas that can be brightened by the light emitting decorations. ) and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided to reduce the light intensity of the LEDs provided on the light emitting ornaments. It was assumed that these light-emitting regions would darken when controlled. For example, in a state in which a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on an island facility, when maintenance is being performed with the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 open, the front of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility Since the side cannot be visually recognized, it is difficult to grasp whether the pachinko machine 1 is playing. However, in this example, when the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island equipment shifts to the standby state, the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 is darkened. , through the inside of the island facility, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the player is playing. In other words, even if the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is in progress, it is possible to grasp whether or not another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility is playing through the inside of the island facility. , whether or not it is necessary to strengthen monitoring to prevent fraud during the standby state.

(Regarding a change in the visibility of the light-emitting region during operation of the light-emitting decorative body)
Further, when the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is under maintenance, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be visually recognized. It's getting harder to see if the body is functioning properly. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, as light-emitting decorations for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a back top front rotary decoration 3410 and a back top front decoration 3421, a back top rear rotation decoration 3440 and a back top are provided on the upper part of the game board 5. A rear decorative body 3451 and a rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided. is doing. Of these, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 are capable of moving from the retracted position to the appearing position when predetermined performance conditions are satisfied. . In the state where the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, the back upper rear decoration 3451, and the back rear movable decoration 3110 are moved to the appearance position, the light from the LEDs of these light emitting decorations is reflected on the tank rail 553 transparently. It was made not to reach the light emitting region L1 near the site. In particular, the light from the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper rear decoration 3451 is prevented from reaching the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 . On the other hand, for the light from the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back top front decorative substrate 3422, the back top rear rotary decoration 3440, the back top rear decoration 3451, and the back rear movable decoration 3110 move to the appearance position. As a result, the light is not positioned behind the back upper front decoration board 3422 and is not blocked, and reaches the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. - 特許庁In other words, when the operable light-emitting decorations among the plurality of light-emitting decorations are in operation, the brightness in the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 changes, and is visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitting region L1. As a result, even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the light-emitting decoration is operating by changing the visual recognition mode of the light-emitting area L1.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initial operation of the operable light-emitting decorations among the plurality of light-emitting decorations is performed. Specifically, the upper back rotary decoration 3440, the upper back decoration 3451, and the back movable decoration 3110 move from the retracted position to the appearing position, and then move from the appearing position to the retracted position. An operation is repeatedly performed to confirm that these luminous decorations can be moved to the appearance position. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is necessary to open the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operate the power switch on the power board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Sometimes, it is difficult to confirm whether or not the initial operation of the light-emitting decoration is normally performed by directly viewing from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and it is particularly difficult to confirm the operation. In this regard, in this example, the brightness of the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is changed according to the operation of the light-emitting decorative body, so that even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light-emitting region L1 By visually recognizing the change in the visual mode, it is possible to confirm that the initial operation of the light-emitting decoration is normally performed. As a result, when the power switch is operated, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized, but when the light-emitting decoration is initialized, the visual mode of the light emitting area L1 changes from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is only necessary to confirm whether or not the luminous ornament is in the initial operation, and the efficiency of the visual work for the initial operation of the luminous decoration can be improved.

It should be noted that the brightness in the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is changed during the operation of the operable light emitting decorations among the plurality of light emitting decorations. It is preferable to configure so that the change in brightness is large between the state in which the light-emitting decoration is in the retracted position and the state in which it is in the appearance position. For example, on the rear surface of the back top front decorative substrate 3422, an LED that emits light toward the light emitting region L1 is mounted, but the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 located behind the back top front decoration substrate 3422 is mounted. And when the rear upper back decorative body 3451 and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the rear surface of the upper front decorative substrate 3422 may be extinguished. The LED itself may not be mounted on the rear surface of the upper front decoration board 3422 . In such a configuration, when the back top rotary decorative body 3440 and the back top rear decorative body 3451 located behind the back top front decorative substrate 3422 and the back back movable decoration body 3110 move to the appearance position, the back top The light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the front decoration board 3422 does not reach the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, and the brightness of the light emitting area L1 can be reduced. As a result, the change in brightness in the light-emitting area L1 becomes large between the state where the light-emitting decoration is at the retracted position and the state at the appearance position, and from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to check whether the light-emitting decoration is operating. You can easily figure out what.

(About light from the back side of the effect display device)
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this example uses the light from the light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 and has a configuration for brightening the back side. As for the area behind the device 1600, the effect display device 1600 blocks the light from the LED of the light-emitting decoration, and it is possible that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be brightened only by using the light-emitting decoration. have a nature. For example, in the area behind the effect display device 1600, if the area where the hall manager needs to work is dark, it will be difficult for the hall manager to work on that area. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to brighten a predetermined portion even in the area behind the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

First, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 309 is a diagram showing an opening provided on the back side of the effect display device. As shown in FIG. 309, the effect display device 1600 includes a box-shaped box body 1611 (metal frame) having openings in the front and back, and a front opening of the box body 1611 that is closed to display a predetermined image. a transparent flat light guide plate 1613 provided behind the liquid crystal panel 1612 and capable of irradiating light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612; , a light emitting substrate 1615 mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the light guide plate 1613, and a light guide plate 1613 provided behind the light guide plate 1613 so as to block the opening on the rear side of the box 1611. and a metal back panel 1614 (metal back cover) capable of blocking light backward from the light plate 1613 . Although not shown, the effect display device 1600 includes a panel drive board for driving the liquid crystal panel 1612 .

A plurality of LEDs are mounted side by side on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 can emit light toward the light guide plate 1613 located above the light emitting substrate 1615 . In addition, the light guide plate 1613 can receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the light guide plate 1615 and emit surface light from the front side of the light guide plate 1613 . It is possible to irradiate light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612 . Therefore, the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be visually recognized brightly.

In addition, the light emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounted parts. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a high reflectance. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, the light emitting board 1615 is mounted with a connector 1615a for electrically connecting to the effect driving board 1720 on the upper surface thereof. Note that the connector 1615a is an opaque member. A connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 has a terminal surface facing rearward, and by connecting to a connector on the wiring side in which the wiring from the effect drive board 1720 is bundled, the light emitting board 1615 and the effect are produced. It can be electrically connected to the drive substrate 1720 . As a result, the effect driving board 1720 can control whether or not to light the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615, adjust the brightness, and the like.

The light guide plate 1613 receives light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615, and is configured such that the front side of the light guide plate 1613 emits surface light strongly. In addition, the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 are also configured to emit weak light. As described above, the light-emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounted parts, etc. The light emission becomes strong not only on the front side of the light plate 1613 but also on the rear side and the side side of the light guide plate 1613 .

The back panel 1614 is configured to block light backward from the light guide plate 1613 which receives light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light. A plurality of openings that can be passed through are intentionally provided at predetermined positions. As a result, from the plurality of openings, the light from the rear side and the side side of the light guide plate 1613 that emits light by receiving the light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted backward (to the rear of the effect display device 1600). It is possible.

Specifically, when viewed from the rear of the effect display device 1600, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at the lower left portion of the back panel 1614, and the two openings B are provided on the right side of the back panel 1614 slightly toward the center. The opening C is provided on the right side along the right edge of the back panel 1614, and the opening D is provided on the upper side along the upper edge of the back panel 1614.

First, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615. As shown in FIG. In addition, the opening A is one size larger than the connector 1615a. As a result, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 can be seen through the opening A. FIG. Since the light from the rear side and the side side of the light guide plate 1613 which receives light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted from the opening A, the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a is bright. can be visualized. As a result, the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 needs to be connected to the wiring side connector 1615a in which the wiring from the effect driving board 1720 is bundled, but the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a By brightly recognizing the , it is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is normally connected to the connector on the wiring side, and it is possible to facilitate the inspection work of the hall manager.

By the way, a plurality of LEDs are provided on the light-emitting board 1615. Although the connector 1615a mounted on the light-emitting board 1615 can be visually recognized from the opening A, any of the plurality of LEDs can be visually recognized. It is configured to be disabled. In other words, among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light-emitting substrate 1615, even the LED closest to the opening A is not provided at a position visible from the opening A. For example, when light from some of the plurality of LEDs is directly irradiated through the opening A, when working with the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615, Direct light from the LED enters the worker's eyes and makes it difficult to perform the work. On the other hand, since the light from the plurality of LEDs is only indirectly irradiated through the opening A, it becomes difficult to work on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615. can be prevented. Similarly, the openings B to D of the back panel 1614 are configured so that none of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 can be visually recognized from the openings B to D.

Two openings B of the back panel 1614 are provided side by side vertically apart from each other at a position slightly closer to the center than the opening C on the right side of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600 . The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front. A back cover 640 is provided to cover the . The back cover 640 can be opened and closed around the left side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 as viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1 . On the right side of the back cover 640, two operating sections 640a are provided vertically separated so that they can be operated by the operator, while the body frame 4 corresponds to each of the two operating sections 640a. The rear cover 640 can be attached to the body frame 4 by attaching and detaching the operation part 640a to and from the attachment/detachment part. can be opened and closed. Note that (the operation portion 640a of) the back cover 640 and the attachment/detachment portion are both transparent or translucent members.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, an operation portion 640a and a detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the opening B of the back panel 1614 (rear of the effect display device 1600). ing. That is, from the opening B, the light from the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 which receives light from a plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted, so that the operation portion 640a and the attachment/detachment portion of the back cover 640 is provided at a position capable of receiving such light. As a result, the operating portion 640a and the removable portion of the back cover 640 receive light from the opening B, and the luminous region L6 near the operating portion 640a and the removable portion of the back cover 640 can be visually recognized brightly. When working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the body frame 4. By making the light-emitting region L6 near the attachment/detachment part brightly visible, the operator can easily confirm the object to be operated, and the back cover 640 can be easily attached/detached to/from the body frame 4. It is possible to facilitate the inspection work of.

Also, the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed around a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 located on the right side of the outer frame 2 when viewed from behind the pachinko machine 1 . In other words, the operation portion 640 a and the attachment/detachment portion of the back cover 640 are provided at positions close to the opening axis of the body frame 4 . A plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side on a game island, and the inside of the game island is darkened in a closed space. When the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, light from the outside (hole light) reaches a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 far from the opening axis of the body frame 4. On the other hand, it is difficult for light from the outside (light of the hall) to reach the part near the opening axis of the main body frame 4 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and it is visible brightly. Can not do it. In this regard, the operating portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are positioned near the opening axis of the main body frame 4 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Even so, light from the outside (light from the hole) is difficult to reach, but by receiving light from the opening B, the operation portion 640a of the back cover 640 and the light-emitting region L6 near the attachment/detachment portion are brightly visible. can be done.

The opening C of the back panel 1614 is provided on the right side along the right end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600 . The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but it is behind the opening C when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. A payout unit 560 is provided at the location. The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 according to instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. or a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side, but behind the opening C, the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560, a payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit 600 is located. At least the ball guide unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 are transparent members.

Then, from the opening C, the light from the rear side and the side side of the light guide plate 1613 which receives the light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted. The light-emitting area L7 near the dispensing device 580 and the upper full-ball path unit 600 can be visually recognized brightly. As a result, in the payout unit 560, when the game ball B is guided downward from the tank rail 553, there is a possibility that a ball jam may occur. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not clogging of balls occurs in the passage for guiding the ball B, and to easily remove the clogging of balls when the clogging of balls occurs. Work can be facilitated.

The opening D of the back panel 1614 is provided on the upper side along the upper end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600 . The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front. A tank rail 553 is provided at a position where the In addition, the tank rail 553 uses a transparent member, and can transmit light with high transmittance. Since the opening D emits light from the rear and side surfaces of the light guide plate 1613 which receives light from a plurality of LEDs and emits light, the light emitting region near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

As described above in detail, with regard to the light-emitting ornaments provided on the game board 5, if some kind of abnormality occurs, such as detection of fraud due to magnets or vibrations, and the game cannot be played, the abnormality is detected. The blinking of the LED provided on the light-emitting decoration is controlled until the problem is resolved. That is, among the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration is the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1 ) and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LEDs provided on the light emitting ornaments are controlled to blink. By doing so, these light emitting areas are supposed to blink.

In addition, if some kind of abnormality occurs, such as detection of fraud due to magnets or vibration, and the game cannot be played, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the outer frame 3 It may be necessary to open the body frame 4 and perform maintenance on members provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁For example, in order to perform maintenance on various substrates arranged inside the back cover 640, it is necessary to operate the operation part 640a of the back cover 640 to open the back cover 640 from the body frame 4. In other cases, a ball jam occurs in the dispensing unit 560 and needs to be removed. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, similarly to the LEDs provided on the light-emitting decorations, if the LEDs provided on the light-emitting substrate 1615 of the effect display device 1600 are controlled to blink, maintenance will be reduced. Visual recognition of the work target becomes difficult. In this regard, in this example, even if some kind of abnormality occurs in the effect display device 1600, such as detecting fraud due to a magnet or vibration, and the game cannot be played, the effect display device 1600 The LEDs provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 are not controlled to blink, but are controlled to be constantly lit as in normal times. That is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the area around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 is used as a light emitting area that can be brightened by receiving light from the opening of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600. A light-emitting region L5, a light-emitting region L6 near the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640, a light-emitting region L7 near the dispensing unit 560, and a light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 are provided. By controlling the constant lighting of the LEDs provided on the light-emitting substrate 1615 of the display device 1660 in the same manner as during normal operation, the visibility of these light-emitting regions is not changed. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LEDs provided in the light-emitting decorations are controlled to blink, but the locations where maintenance is highly necessary are controlled to be constantly lit as in normal times. By providing such a light emitting area, the visibility is good without changing, and the efficiency of maintenance work at the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in the event of an abnormality.

(Regarding the visibility of the gap between the control boards provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1)
Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting the various substrates are provided. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration in which the back side is brightened by using the light-emitting ornaments provided on the game board 5 and the light from the opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600. If the entire area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be bright, it becomes easier for the hall manager to perform maintenance work in the island facility, while the various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are not affected. This makes it easier for fraudsters to commit fraud. Therefore, an example in which the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be bright while making it difficult for a cheater to cheat on various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below. .

As shown in FIG. 306, light-emitting decorations for brightening the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 include a back-up front rotating decoration 3410, a back-up front front decoration 3421, and a back-up rear. A decoration body 3451 and a back-rear movable decoration body 3110 are provided. On the left side of the game board 5, three back-front left decoration body units 3710 are provided. A decoration unit 3810 is provided. The light-emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light-emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 , When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind, the luminous area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the luminous decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is , When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind, the light emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened.

A characteristic configuration for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is the opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600 . Specifically, an opening A is provided on the lower left side of the back panel 1614, an opening B is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614 slightly near the center, and an opening C is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614. An opening D is provided on the upper side of the back panel 1614 . Light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the production display device 1600 brightens the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615, and light from the opening B is used to operate the back cover 640. The light emitting region L6 near the portion 640a and the attachment/detachment portion is brightened, the light from the opening C brightens the light emitting region L7 near the dispensing unit 560, and the light from the opening D brightens the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. The light emitting area L1 is brightened. The light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting area L6 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. Since the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300 is located, the light from the opening A is blocked by the main control board 1310, making it difficult to see the light emitting area L6 from behind the pachinko machine 1.

Also, of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700 , and effect drive boards 1720 are provided with pilot lamps at positions that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, respectively. The pilot lamp is a member for informing whether or not each board is operating normally by means of the light emitting mode of the LED. The light from the pilot lamp of the peripheral control board 1510 brightens the light emitting area L8 near the pilot lamp, and the light from the pilot lamp of the effect drive board 1720 brightens the light emitting area L9 near the pilot lamp. The light from the pilot lamp of the main control board 1310 brightens the light emitting area L10 in the vicinity of the pilot lamp. In other words, these configurations can also be cited as configurations for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 .

The above-described light-emitting area includes the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the drive board unit 1700. It is provided around the control board group consisting of the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720. - 特許庁That is, of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, except for the control board group attached to the back side of the back box 3010, the light emitting area is configured to be bright. Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside of the island facility is closed and dark, but the inside of the island facility can be brightened by lighting the rear of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, among the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A light emitting area is not provided in the area where the control board group including the effect drive board 1720 is provided. That is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the gaps between the control boards that make up the control board group (the gap between the main control board 1310, the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720, the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel The gap between the relay board 1710 and the effect driving board 1720) is configured to be dark. The panel relay board 1710 is a board that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and is connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring and to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring. Such wiring is arranged in a gap between the control boards forming the control board group. Among them, the main control board 1310 in particular controls the progress of the game. There is a problem that an unfair situation arises. In this regard, by making the gaps between the control boards that make up the control board group dark while the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the wiring arranged in the gaps. It is possible to prevent tampering with wiring or the like connected to the control board 1310 .

(Regarding the visibility of the configuration of measures against metal powder)
Next, electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B falling outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 310. FIG. FIG. 310 is an enlarged schematic diagram showing a part of the cross section taken along the line CC of FIG. 99(a), showing an overview of the configuration for dealing with metal powder.

The game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 are worn such that the game balls B collide with each other or rub against each other, and the metal powder is peeled off from the game balls B and falls. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adheres to the main guiding portion 553a, the downstream flow of the game ball B is hindered, and the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. , and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 306, in this example, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. It is As a result, for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B naturally falls outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa, and the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a falls outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. Metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by this, and the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a is worn out by inserting a cotton swab into the notch portion 553aa by an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall. The metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by performing the operation of removing the metal powder.

By the way, metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged below the tank rail 553. As a result, an electrical trouble occurs, which may cause malfunction or malfunction of the peripheral control unit 1500 . For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes ICs such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM, and the peripheral data ROM board, which will be described later, includes ICs such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin intervals of these ICs become smaller, the pin intervals of various connectors 1615a and special connectors 1615a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 become narrower. , and the gap between the connector 1615a and the special connector 1615a is also narrowed, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

First, as shown in FIG. 310, a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are located behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface), it is shifted backward (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). are displaced by the distance dimension).

As described above, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape that bends downward in multiple directions. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 310, the lower end of the top plate constitutes a first eaves portion 551da extending rearward of the pachinko machine 1 so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. . Further, when the rear cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the rear cover 640 is in surface contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da.

As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. there is That is, the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a allows the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa to cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The metal powder of the game ball B falling to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is suppressed from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the game It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above in detail, as shown in FIG. 306, in this example, as light-emitting decorations for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a back top front rotary decoration 3410 and a back top front decoration are provided on the upper part of the game board 5. A body 3421, an upper rear rotary decoration 3440, an upper rear decoration 3451, and a movable rear decoration 3110 are provided. A light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is brightened. That is, since the light from the LEDs of these light-emitting decorations is irradiated toward the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is emitted from the tank rail 553. When the tank rail 553, which is a transparent member, is visually observed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the metal powder rises up like a black spot, and the visibility of the metal powder is good. It is a thing. As a result, it is possible to easily check whether or not metal powder is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and the work of removing the metal powder from the notch portion 553aa of the main guide portion 553a can be performed efficiently. It can be carried out.

The light emitting region L1 also includes the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a positioned below the main guide portion 553a. The first canopy portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 630 are transparent members. That is, the light from the LED of the light-emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is irradiated toward the first canopy part 551da of the top plate part 551a in the light-emitting area L1, so that the notch part 553aa When the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the pachinko machine 1 is adhered to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below, the transparent member When the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is visually recognized, the metal powder appears like a black spot, and the visibility of the metal powder is good. As a result, it is possible to easily check whether or not the metal powder adheres to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. can be done efficiently.

Regarding the above, even when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the closed pachinko machine 1 is bright, by opening the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B in the closed pachinko machine 1 is discharged to the tank rail 553 It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is attached to the main guide portion 553a and the first overhang portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. In addition, the light from the LEDs of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421, the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451, and the back rear movable decoration 3110 of the pachinko machine 1 is a tank. Although it is irradiated toward the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the rail 553, it is not desirable to directly look at the light source of the LED during the maintenance of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so the back side of the pachinko machine 1 The light from the LED that brightens the LED is configured to be indirect light that is not viewed directly from the light source of the LED.

Also, after confirming the adhesion of the metal powder, when removing the metal powder from the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 Light-emitting decorations that brighten the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent part (upper back front rotary decoration 3410 and front upper back decoration 3421, upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and rear upper back decoration 3451, back rear movable It is also conceivable that the light from the decoration 3110) interferes with the removal work. For this reason, after confirming the adhesion of metal powder by opening the body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1, when the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 whose metal powder is to be removed is opened, the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 Light-emitting decorations that brighten the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 in (back upper front rotating decoration 3410 and back upper front decoration 3421, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440 and back upper rear decoration 3451 , Back rear movable decorative body 3110) may be turned off so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is not illuminated. In addition, not only the light-emitting decorative body that brightens the light-emitting region L1, but also other LED lights that may hinder the work of removing the metal powder may be turned off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 from interfering with the work of removing the metal powder.

However, depending on the hall environment, the hall itself may be dark, and it may be preferable that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, such as removing metal powder. Therefore, in the state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, optionally, the light emitting decorations (back upper front rotating decorations 3410 and A light emission start switch may be provided to enable the LEDs of the front upper back decoration 3421, the upper rear rotary decoration 3440, the upper rear decoration 3451, and the rear rear movable decoration 3110 to start emitting light. Such a light emission start switch is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the body frame 4 is open. Thus, in a state in which the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, the hall manager can freely operate whether or not to start emitting light of the LED for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and match the hall environment. be able to.

Also, the tank rail 553 is molded from a transparent material (polycarbonate resin or the like) so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the place where the ball is jammed can be specified quickly. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the balls in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the interest of the player in the game due to the interruption of the game can be increased. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to achieve the same effect as the effect of use.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, furthermore, in the state assembled to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 covers at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Since it extends downward from the top plate portion 553aa, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa and adheres to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a When falling from the first canopy part 551da of 551a, this metal powder is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a. By suppressing entry into the body 1501 , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In this way, the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and the back cover 640 are configured to collect the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). functioning as a canopy or cover Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa, not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened, the main The metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da, and the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. The metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B falling to the outside from the main guide part 553a through the cutout part 553aa is dropped to the peripheral control unit. Entry into the cover body 1501 of the ball 1500 is suppressed, thereby suppressing the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In the above example, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da when assembled to the main body frame 4, but the upper end of the back cover 640 and the first eaves You may make it space apart and arrange|position the part 551da. That is, the back cover 640 and the first canopy portion 551da work together to allow the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa to enter the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Any form of arrangement between the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da may be used as long as it suppresses the intrusion.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600) is displaced in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in this embodiment, it is about half the diameter of the game ball B). 1) (that is, due to the structure in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly below the notch 553aa), the game ball B from the tank rail 553 It is effective as a countermeasure against metal powder that can prevent electrical troubles caused by metal powder.

Further, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later), whereas the upper side, the left side, and the left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later) are provided. Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, it is assumed that the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). Intrusion into the inside of the cover body 1501 can be made difficult even if it does.

Of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, any one or a combination of ventilation holes A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate 1510a may be combined to form a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter produced by the game ball B (for example, metal powder produced by abrasion of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by falling foreign matter onto various boards in the peripheral control board box 1505 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to falling foreign matter from the tank rail 553 . The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 would be exposed to the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the box 1505 and enters the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring is increased.

Also, when the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the heat dissipation function is compensated by increasing the number of the ventilation holes 1501 provided on the other surface or expanding the area of the ventilation holes 1501. may This can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505, and can suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles such as thermal runaway.

Further, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 is substantially horizontal. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B drops from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa and adheres to the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the metal powder can be retained on the upper surface of the cover body 1501. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside of the cover body 1501 . Part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be inclined as long as the metal powder of the game ball B is not dropped toward the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 .

Also, the first eaves member 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 may be attached to the top plate portion 551a as a separate member (another structural component).

In addition, when the top and rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are covered by the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and/or the back cover 640, When the plurality of cutouts 553aa and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are displaced in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of cutouts 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a When there is a low probability that the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the peripheral control unit 1500 will move toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, one Ventilation holes 1501az may be provided in portions (for example, corners of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az are formed in a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 although most of the upper surface is closed, etc.).

Further, the present technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. , compared to the conventional pachinko machine, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is suppressed from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 (for example, corners of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is closed, but a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in the state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1 has the ventilation holes 1501az. The present technical idea also applies to the provision of the ventilation holes 1501az in the base plate.

Also, a plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 . In addition, along the lower side of the cover body 1501, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 has seven connectors (to be described later) provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and seven connector holes and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to volume control switches. A volume adjustment hole is formed in each, and two connector holes are formed in positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached inside the cover body 1501, gaps are formed between the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed through the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed in the cover body 1501. A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed through this volume control hole. Further, when a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later, is attached inside the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed through these two connector holes.

A cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 allows air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 to pass through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a shield plate accommodated in a space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. 1540 through a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, and the gaps described above (the gaps formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, A gap formed between a volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501, two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board, and two connectors formed on the cover body 1501. It will be taken in through the hole and the gap formed in the hole.

By the way, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy metal powder of the game ball B is affected by the air flow and moves toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. electrical trouble (short circuit) due to the sucked metal powder, various electronic components provided on various boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 attached inside the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. etc., malfunction (failure) will occur.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), a first canopy portion 551da is formed along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby It can be configured to have a function as a canopy to prevent the heavy powder B metal powder from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 . A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, the ball passage in which the game ball B rolls may be formed with a cutout portion, a hole, or a groove similar to the cutout portion 553aa. Specifically, in a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage 570a that guides a game ball B from a tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, the metal powder of a game ball B in the guide passage 570a is introduced from the guide passage 570a. A notch, hole or groove that can be removed to the outside can be formed in the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 . Dispensing device 580, board unit 620, and the like are arranged below ball guiding unit 570. Dispensing device 580 has a board on which blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted, and board unit 620 has power supply board 630. , payout control board 633, interface board 635, etc., and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when a notch, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, the game ball falling through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates arranged below the induction unit 570 . Therefore, an eaves-like member can be formed so as to protrude rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580, and a notch portion formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 can be configured. , the position of the hole or the groove, and the position of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted in the dispensing device 580 can be staggered, or both can be adopted. can also In addition, along the upper sides of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, etc., an eave-like member is formed to protrude backward. The position of the notch, hole, or groove formed in the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, the positions of the power board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured as They can be staggered or both can be adopted.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above has the following features.

(Solution 1)
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
a light emitting means capable of emitting light in relation to a game effect executed as the game progresses;
a decorative substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted;
a movable decorative body provided with the decorative substrate and capable of moving between a reference position that is difficult to be visually recognized by the player and an operating position that is visible to the player;
movable means for operating the movable decoration;
a position detection means for detecting the position of the movable decoration,
A white coating film is formed on the surface of the decorative substrate, and a mounting auxiliary symbol is formed on the white coating film in a color different from that of the white coating film to enable identification of the light emitting means,
The movable means returns the movable decoration to the reference position when the movable decoration is in a position visible to the player even though the movable decoration is not operated. do.
With this configuration, when the movable decoration is at a position visible to the player even though the movable decoration is not operated, the player can operate the movable decoration so as to return it to the reference position. In order to make it difficult to see from the outside, it is possible to prevent the decoration substrate from being stared at by moving the decoration substrate along with the movement of the movable decoration. In addition, by returning to a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing information irrelevant to the game even when the movable ornament returns to the reference position and stops moving. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the world view of the game machine and the deterioration of the interest in the game.

(Solution 2)
In the gaming machine of Solution 1, the mounting assistance symbol is formed in yellow.
By configuring in this way, on the surface of the decorative substrate on which the white coating film is formed, the mounting auxiliary symbol is formed in yellow, which is close to white in reflectance and brightness, and has little visual difference (contrast). It is possible to make the mounting aid symbols more difficult to identify than when the mounting aid symbols are formed in other colors.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a gaming machine, but it is also applicable to other gaming machines such as a mackerel ball machine and an arrange ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a spinning drum or reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

The slot machine 6000 comprises a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004, as shown in FIG. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, a key is inserted into a keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise to open the front door (front frame) 6002 to the main body. It can be opened from the portion (box) 6004 .

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to lock the main body (box) 6004. It is used for opening and closing and locking the front door (front frame) 6002 . The metal locking device is attached to a cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) made of metal extending back and forth, a key hole 6005 made of metal formed in the front end face of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the regular metal key. The cylinder main body of the metal locking device penetrates from the rear through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal lock unit (not shown) is inserted from behind. By inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder into the pair of cutouts, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004 and the rotation transmission member of the locking device made of metal and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit has the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, and also functions as a door frame metal ground, and is connected to the main body ( It is electrically connected to a ground substrate provided inside the box 6004 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This ground board (not shown) collects electromagnetic noise generated in various places and can be grounded (grounded) to the island equipment of the game hall. It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is arranged on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. there is This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the body portion (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal by the opening and closing operation by the metal locking device. Instead, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the body portion (box) 6004 is detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not placed near or around the metal locking device, and is positioned below the metal locking device and placed on the main body so as not to be affected by electromagnetic wave noise that enters the metal locking device. An open switch is arranged on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002 . In this manner, even if electromagnetic noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic noise.

A front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative portions are not plated with decorative plating at all, while others are plated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity, so electromagnetic wave noise may enter. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit.) are electrically connected). As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise entering the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metallic door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the board ground. In addition, among various decorative parts, when electromagnetic noise that enters the decorative parts with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), the door frame metal ground wire is transferred. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 via the ground board, and then transmitted from the ground board to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

In addition, an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit at a predetermined location on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, and when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, An electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit on the open side portion opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The electrostatic removal pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic noise) caused by electrostatic discharge.

Also, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of them are decorated with decorative plating on the entire surface, and among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). , and the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire was The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board are electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. may be electrically connected. The power board is supplied with AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against transient excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and does not allow current to flow. , has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the N terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the terminal of the power supply board, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 . A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this projecting portion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024 . These bet buttons 6010, 6012, starting lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, accumulation settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 .

In addition to the main control board 1310, the main control board box 1320 also accommodates a setting change board 1311 on which setting key switches 1311a capable of changing setting values are mounted. In other words, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, so that the setting key switch can be set. 1311a is arranged inside the body portion (box) 6004 . The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004. It may be attached and fixed to a housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004 . In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 has a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, and a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot). and the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above may be mounted.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 and production devices (not shown) are displayed through this display window. It is designed to be transparent. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 . On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002 .

On these variable rotators, translucent pattern belts printed with a plurality of patterns (for example, bells, watermelons, cherries, 7s, Vs, etc.) as pattern information are attached to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such cylindrical variable rotators are called reels or drums in game machines such as slot machines, and the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown) are connected to the respective variable rotators. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shafts of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of patterns are continuously changed from the above display window from top to bottom. It looks like

The production device includes a plurality of movable production bodies (not shown), the above-described production display device 1600, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-described peripheral control unit 1500. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, and the like. By performing various controls, the progress of production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310 starts the variable display of pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals to a receiving tray 6026 as a game medium.

In addition, in the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as game media inserted into the ball slot 6008', and the start lever 6014 is operated. Then, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls to a receiving tray 6026 as game media.

1 pachinko machine 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 3000 back unit 3100 back rear effect unit 3110 back rear movable decoration 3111 decoration (decoration member, decoration plate)
3111a first decorative protrusion 3111d metal decorative portion 3112 decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a body portion 3113b flange portion (peripheral wall portion)
3113c First LED housing portion 3113d Second LED housing portion 3113e Reflecting portion 3114 Back rear decoration substrate (decoration substrate)
3114a first LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Substrate main body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decorative body base 3115a Coating plate portion 3115b Flange portion EL Creepage distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that conducts a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition and provides a player with a profit based on the result of the lottery,
a game board on which a predetermined game area is formed;
a light-emitting unit provided on the game board and configured to light-embellish a predetermined decorative portion visible from the front side of the game machine;
a separate light-emitting unit different from the light-emitting unit;
a state detection unit that detects the state of the game machine;
light emission control means for controlling the light emission mode of the light emitting section and the light emission mode of the separate light emitting section;
light amount adjustment means capable of adjusting the light amount based on a predetermined light amount adjustment operation;
a light-transmitting portion provided in a rear bulging portion that bulges rearward of the game machine,
The light-transmitting part is provided so as to transmit light emitted from the light-emitting part when the light-emitting part emits light,
When the light emitting unit is in a normal state, the amount of light can be changed based on the operation for adjusting the amount of light. It becomes impossible to change the amount of light based on the adjustment operation,
The separate light emitting unit is incapable of changing the light amount based on the light amount adjustment operation regardless of whether or not the state of the gaming machine is determined to be abnormal based on the detection result of the state detection unit,
The light emission control means changes the light emission mode of the light emitting section when the state of the gaming machine is determined to be abnormal based on the detection result of the state detecting section,
The light emitted from the light-emitting portion out of the light-emitting portion and the separate light-emitting portion is transmitted through the light-transmitting portion, while the light emitted from the separate light-emitting portion out of the light-emitting portion and the separate light-emitting portion is transmitted. is configured not to transmit light from the light transmitting portion,
Furthermore, a special light emitting unit is provided separately from the light emitting unit and the separate light emitting unit,
The light emitted from the special light emitting unit is visible from the rear side of the gaming machine, and even if the state of the gaming machine is determined to be abnormal based on the detection result of the state detecting unit, the special light emitting unit A game machine characterized in that the light emission mode of is not changed .

Images